summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat
-rw-r--r--.gitattributes3
-rw-r--r--29051-8.txt13663
-rw-r--r--29051-8.zipbin0 -> 216149 bytes
-rw-r--r--29051.txt13663
-rw-r--r--29051.zipbin0 -> 215554 bytes
-rw-r--r--LICENSE.txt11
-rw-r--r--README.md2
7 files changed, 27342 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/29051-8.txt b/29051-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52e94bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/29051-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13663 @@
+Project Gutenberg's Account of a Voyage of Discovery, by Captain Basil Hall
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Account of a Voyage of Discovery
+ to the West Coast of Corea, and the Great Loo-Choo Island
+
+Author: Captain Basil Hall
+
+Release Date: June 6, 2009 [EBook #29051]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jane Hyland and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: SULPHUR ISLAND.
+
+_Published Jany. 1. 1818. by John Murray, Albemarle Street, London._]
+
+
+
+
+ACCOUNT
+
+OF
+
+A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY
+
+TO THE
+
+WEST COAST OF COREA,
+
+AND
+
+THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND;
+
+WITH
+
+AN APPENDIX,
+
+CONTAINING
+
+CHARTS, AND VARIOUS HYDROGRAPHICAL AND SCIENTIFIC NOTICES.
+
+
+BY CAPTAIN BASIL HALL,
+
+ROYAL NAVY, F.R.S. LOND. & EDIN.
+MEMBER OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF CALCUTTA, OF THE LITERARY SOCIETY OF
+BOMBAY, AND OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES AT BATAVIA.
+
+
+AND
+
+A VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE,
+
+BY H.J. CLIFFORD, ESQ.
+
+LIEUTENANT ROYAL NAVY.
+
+
+LONDON
+JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE-STREET.
+1818.
+
+
+
+
+TO
+CAPTAIN MURRAY MAXWELL,
+Knight Companion to the Bath,
+TO WHOSE
+ABILITY IN CONDUCTING THIS VOYAGE,
+ZEAL IN GIVING ENCOURAGEMENT TO EVERY INQUIRY,
+SAGACITY IN DISCOVERING THE DISPOSITION OF THE NATIVES,
+AND ADDRESS IN GAINING THEIR CONFIDENCE AND GOOD WILL,
+IS TO BE ATTRIBUTED
+WHATEVER MAY BE FOUND INTERESTING OR USEFUL
+IN THE FOLLOWING PAGES,
+THIS WORK
+IS MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED,
+BY
+THE AUTHORS.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+The following work contains a Narrative of the Voyage to the West Coast
+of Corea, and the Great Loo-choo Island; an Appendix, containing
+Nautical details; and a Vocabulary of the Language spoken at Loo-choo.
+
+In drawing up the Narrative from journals written at the time, I have
+derived great assistance from notes made by Lieutenant H.J. Clifford, of
+the Navy. This officer obtained permission from the Admiralty to
+accompany me, though on half pay, and having no specific duty to
+perform, he was enabled to devote himself entirely to the acquisition of
+knowledge; and had it in his power to record many interesting
+occurrences of the voyage, which the numerous duties of my station left
+me but little leisure to observe or describe.
+
+All the Charts, Tables, and Nautical Notices have been placed in an
+Appendix, in order to avoid the interruption which such details are apt
+to occasion when inserted in a journal; and the Nautical reader will
+perhaps consider it advantageous, to have this part of the subject set
+apart, and condensed, instead of being scattered over the pages of the
+narrative.
+
+I am indebted to Mr. Clifford for very important assistance in
+collecting and arranging the materials which form this Appendix.
+
+The northern part of the Chart of the Yellow Sea, given in the Appendix,
+was taken from a Chart by Captain Daniel Ross, of the Bombay marine, the
+scientific and able surveyor commanding the squadron which the
+Honourable East India Company, in the spirit of a liberal and enlarged
+policy, have employed for upwards of nine years, in surveying the China
+Seas.
+
+The Vocabulary is exclusively compiled by Mr. Clifford, who took the
+greatest pains to collect words and sentences in common use; and though,
+from the shortness of our stay, this part of the work is necessarily
+incomplete, it is hoped that a future voyager will derive considerable
+assistance from it, in his intercourse with the natives.
+
+The drawings of scenery and costume were made by Mr. William Havell, the
+eminent artist who accompanied the Embassy, from sketches taken on the
+spot, by Mr. C.W. Browne, midshipman of the Alceste, and myself.
+
+Nothing respecting the west side of Corea has hitherto been accurately
+known to Europeans. The coast laid down in most Charts has been taken
+from the celebrated map of the Jesuits, which is very correct in what
+relates to China, but erroneous with respect to Corea. The Jesuits,
+indeed, did not survey this country, but have inserted it in their map,
+I believe, from Japanese authorities.
+
+Captain Broughton in his voyage to the North Pacific Ocean visited the
+South Coast of Corea, and his account of the inhabitants agrees with
+ours in most particulars.
+
+The same distinguished voyager visited the Great Loo-choo Island in
+1797, after having been shipwrecked near Typinsan, one of its dependant
+islands. He was at Napakiang for a few days, and his account of the
+natives is highly interesting.
+
+There is an article by Pere Gaubil, a missionary, on the subject of the
+Loo-choo Islands, in the 23d vol. of the "Lettres Edifiantes et
+Curieuses." It is a translation from the official report of a Chinese
+embassador sent to Loo-choo by the Emperor Kang Hi; our opportunities,
+however, were not sufficient to enable us to judge of the accuracy of
+this curious memoir.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+ NARRATIVE.
+
+ CHAPTER I.
+
+ H.M.S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of
+ Discovery--Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea--Unsociable
+ Character of the Natives--Hutton's Island--Interesting geological
+ Structure--Anchor near the Main Land--Corean Chief's Visit--Objections
+ made to Strangers landing--Distress of the Chief--His
+ Character--Departure from Basil's Bay--Clusters of Islands--Murray's
+ Sound--Deserted Corean Village--View from the Summit of a high
+ Peak--Interview with the Coreans--Peculiarities of their
+ Character--Language--Erroneous geographical Position of this
+ Coast--Leave Corea Page 1
+
+
+ CHAPTER II.
+
+ Enter the Japan Sea--Sulphur Island--Volcano--See the Great Loo-choo
+ Island--Lyra nearly wrecked--First Interview with the Natives--Anchor
+ at Napakiang--Natives crowd on Board--Their interesting Appearance
+ and Manners--Several Chiefs visit the Alceste--Land to make
+ Observations--Astonishment of the Natives--Six Chiefs visit the
+ Ships--Alceste and Lyra proceed farther in Shore--A Chief of high Rank
+ waits upon Captain Maxwell--Return his Visit--Feast--Projected Survey
+ of the Anchorage--Visit Reef Island--The Lyra sent to look for another
+ Harbour--Arrangements for landing the Alceste's Stores--Description of
+ the Temple and Garden--First Acquaintance with Mádera--Study of the
+ Language 58
+
+
+ CHAPTER III.
+
+ The Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo--Discovery of Port
+ Melville--Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its
+ Banks--Lyra nearly wrecked--Interview with Natives at the South
+ Point--Return to Napakiang--Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's
+ Funeral--Mádera's Character and Conduct--Sociable Habits of the
+ Natives--Dinner given to the Chiefs of the Island by Captain
+ Maxwell--Mádera's Behaviour on this Occasion--Two Women seen--A Lady
+ of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife--Captain Maxwell fractures his
+ Finger--Loo-choo Surgeon--Concern of the Natives--Visit of the
+ Prince--Discussion about the King of Loo-choo's Letter--Mádera appears
+ in a new Character--Feast given by the Prince--List of Supplies given
+ to the Ships--Behaviour of the Prince on taking Leave--Preparations
+ for Departure--Mádera's Distress--Last Interview with the
+ Chiefs--Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and Customs of
+ Loo-choo--Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island 135
+
+
+ APPENDIX.
+
+ Notice explanatory of a Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-lee v
+
+ Notice to accompany the Chart of the West Coast of Corea x
+
+ Notice to accompany the general Chart of the Great Loo-choo Island
+ in the Japan Sea, and the Charts of Napakiang Roads and Port
+ Melville xvii
+
+ Observations made at the Observatory at Napakiang xxix
+
+ Table of Observations made with Dr. Wollaston's Dip Sector: with
+ an Engraving, and a Description of this Instrument, and
+ Directions for its Use xxxi
+
+ Meteorological Journal, from July to November 1816, while the
+ Ships were in the Yellow and Japan Seas li
+
+ Abstract of the Lyra's Voyage, from leaving England till her
+ Return; shewing the Distance between the different Places at
+ which she touched, and the Time taken in performing each Passage cix
+
+ Geological Memorandum; being a Description of the Specimens of
+ Rocks collected at Macao and the Ladrone Islands, on the Shores
+ of the Yellow Sea, the West Coast of Corea, and the Great Loo-choo
+ Island cxix
+
+
+ VOCABULARY.
+
+ PART I.--English and Loo-choo words.
+
+ PART II.--Sentences in English and Loo-choo, with a literal Translation.
+
+ Loo-choo and Japanese Numerals--Names of Persons at Napakiang--Names of
+ Places--Days of the Moon--Orders of Rank--Tattoo Marks--Hours of the
+ Day.
+
+ Comparison between the Japanese and Loo-choo Languages.
+
+ Comparison between the Loo-choo and Insu Languages.
+
+ Comparison between the Loo-choo, Japanese, and Insu Languages.
+
+ Corean Words.
+
+
+
+
+ DIRECTIONS FOR PLACING THE PLATES.
+
+
+ Sulphur Island, to face the Title Page.
+ Corean Chief and Secretary To face Page 16
+ Napakiang 77
+ Loo-choo Chief and his two Sons 97
+ Priest and Gentleman of Loo-choo 132
+ The Prince of Loo-choo 176
+ Scene after the Prince's Feast 196
+ Gentleman of Loo-choo in his Cloak 215
+ Bridge of Napakiang 222
+
+
+ APPENDIX.
+
+ Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-lee v
+ Coast of Corea x
+ Chart of the Great Loo-choo Island xix
+ Napakiang Roads xxi
+ Port Melville xxiv
+ Wollaston's Dip Sector xxxiii
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+[Transcriber's note: The following errors have been corrected in the text.]
+
+ERRATA.
+
+Page 1, line 2 from bottom, for _11th August_, read _9th August_.
+
+Page 60, top line, for _was_, read _saw_.
+
+
+APPENDIX.
+
+Meteorological Journal.--Longitude on the 1st Sept. for 124.20,
+read 124.48.
+
+The longitudes in the Met. Journ. from the 3d to the 7th of Sept. inclusive
+are too small by 15'.
+
+
+VOCABULARY.
+
+ For _Tatesee_, read _Tatsee_.
+ For _Teetesee_, read _Teetsee_.
+ For _Meetesee_, read _Meetsee_.
+ For _Eeotesee_, read _Eeotsee_.
+ For _Eeyatesee_, read _Eeyatsee_.
+ For _opposite_, read _under_, in the note on the word Hour.
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: a letter with a macron above it is denoted by [=x].]
+
+
+VOYAGE TO THE WEST COAST OF COREA AND THE LOO-CHOO ISLANDS.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+ H.M.S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of
+ Discovery--Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea--Unsociable
+ Character of the Natives--Hutton's Island--Interesting geological
+ Structure--Anchor near the Main Land--Corean Chiefs
+ Visit--Objections made to Strangers landing--Distress of the
+ Chief--His Character--Departure from Basil's Bay--Clusters of
+ Islands--Murray's Sound--Deserted Corean Village--View from the
+ Summit of a high Peak--Interview with the Coreans--Peculiarities of
+ their Character--Language--Erroneous geographical Position of this
+ Coast--Leave Corea.
+
+
+The embassy to China, under the Right Honourable Lord Amherst, left
+England in his Majesty's frigate Alceste, Captain Murray Maxwell, C.B.,
+on the 9th of February, 1816, and landed near the mouth of the Pei-ho
+river, in the Yellow Sea, on the 9th of August. Shortly afterwards the
+Alceste and Lyra sloop of war, which had accompanied the embassy,
+proceeded to the coast of Corea, the eastern boundary of the Yellow Sea;
+for as these ships were not required in China before the return of the
+Embassador by land to Canton, it was determined to devote the interval
+to an examination of some places in those seas, of which little or no
+precise information then existed. The following pages give the details
+of this voyage.
+
+1st of September.--This morning at daylight the land of Corea was seen
+in the eastern quarter. Having stood towards it, we were at nine o'clock
+near three high islands, differing in appearance from the country we had
+left, being wooded to the top, and cultivated in the lower parts, but
+not in horizontal terraces as at the places we had last visited in
+China. We proceeded to the southward of the group, and anchored in a
+fine bay at the distance of two or three miles from the southern island.
+Shortly after anchoring, a boat came from the shore with five or six
+natives, who stopped, when within fifty yards of the brig, and looking
+at us with an air of curiosity and distrust, paid no attention to the
+signs which were made to induce them to come alongside. They expressed
+no alarm when we went to them in our boat; and on our rowing towards the
+shore, followed us till we landed near a village. The inhabitants came
+in a body to meet us, forming an odd assemblage, different in many
+respects from any thing we had seen; their colour was a deep copper, and
+their appearance forbidding, and somewhat savage. Some men, who appeared
+to be superior to the rest, were distinguished by a hat, the brim of
+which was nearly three feet in diameter, and the crown, which was about
+nine inches high, and scarcely large enough to admit the top of the
+head, was shaped like a sugar-loaf with the end cut off. The texture of
+this strange hat is of a fine open work like the dragon-fly's wing; it
+appears to be made of horse-hair varnished over, and is fastened under
+the chin by a band strung with large beads, mostly black and white, but
+occasionally red or yellow. Some of the elderly men wore stiff gauze
+caps over their hair, which was formed into a high conical knot on the
+top of the head. Their dress consisted of loose wide trowsers, and a
+sort of frock reaching nearly to the knee, made of a coarse open grass
+cloth, and on their feet neat straw sandals. They were of the middle
+size, remarkably well made, and robust looking. At first they expressed
+some surprise on examining our clothes, but afterwards took very little
+interest in any thing belonging to us. Their chief anxiety was to get
+rid of us as soon as possible. This they expressed in a manner too
+obvious to be mistaken; for, on our wishing to enter the village, they
+first made motions for us to go the other way; and when we persevered,
+they took us rudely by the arms and pushed us off. Being very desirous
+to conciliate them, we shewed no impatience at this treatment; but our
+forbearance had no effect; and after a number of vain attempts to make
+ourselves understood, we went away not much pleased at their behaviour.
+A Chinese[1], who accompanied us, was of no use, for he could not read
+what the Coreans wrote for him, though in the Chinese character; and of
+their spoken language he did not understand a word.
+
+On leaving these unsociable villagers, we went to the top of the highest
+peak on the island, the ascent being easy by a winding foot-path. From
+this elevation we saw a number of islands to the eastward, and the main
+land at a great distance beyond them. The top of the hill being covered
+with soft grass and sweet-smelling shrubs, and the air, which had been
+of a suffocating heat below, being here cool and refreshing, we were
+tempted to sit down to our pic-nic dinner. We returned by the other side
+of the hill; but there being no path, and the surface rocky and steep,
+and covered with a thick brushwood, we were not a little scratched and
+bruised before we reached a road which runs along the north face of the
+hill about midway. By following this, we came to a spot from whence we
+were enabled to look down upon the village, without being ourselves
+perceived by the natives. The women, who had deserted the village on
+our landing, had now returned; most of them were beating rice in wooden
+mortars, and they had all children tied on their backs. On a sudden they
+quitted their work and ran off to their huts, like rabbits in a warren;
+and in a few minutes we saw one of the ship's boats row round the point
+of land adjacent to the village, which explained the cause of their
+alarm. After remaining for some time in expectation of seeing the women
+again, we came down to the village, which the natives now permitted us
+to pass through. On this occasion one of the gentlemen of our party saw,
+for an instant, a woman at no great distance, whose feet he declared
+were of the natural size, and not cramped as in China. The village
+consists of forty houses rudely constructed of reeds plaistered with
+mud, the roofs are of all shapes, and badly thatched with reeds and
+straw, tied down by straw ropes. These huts are not disposed in streets,
+but are scattered about without order, and without any neatness, or
+cleanliness, and the spaces between them are occupied by piles of dirt
+and pools of muddy water. The valley in which this comfortless village
+is situated is, however, pretty enough, though not wooded; the hills
+forming it are of an irregular shape, and covered at top with grass and
+sweet-scented flowers; the lower parts are cultivated with millet,
+buckwheat, a kind of French bean, and tobacco, which last grows in great
+quantity; and here and there is a young oak-tree.
+
+We saw bullocks and poultry, but the natives would not exchange them
+for our money, or for any thing we had to offer. They refused dollars
+when offered as a present, and, indeed, appeared to set no value upon
+any thing we shewed them, except wine glasses; but even these they were
+unwilling to receive. One of the head men appeared particularly pleased
+with a glass, which, after a good deal of persuasion, he accepted, but,
+in about five minutes after, he, and another man to whom a tumbler had
+been given, came back and insisted upon returning the presents; and
+then, without waiting for further persuasion, returned to the village,
+leaving with us only one man, who, as soon as all the rest were out of
+sight, accepted one of the glasses with much eagerness.
+
+These people have a proud sort of carriage, with an air of composure and
+indifference about them, and an absence of curiosity which struck us as
+being very remarkable. Sometimes when we succeeded, by dint of signs and
+drawings, in expressing the nature of a question, they treated it with
+derision and insolence. On one occasion, being anxious to buy a clumsy
+sort of rake made of reeds, which appeared to me curious, I succeeded in
+explaining my wish to the owner, one of the lowest class of villagers;
+he laughed at first good humouredly, but immediately afterwards seized
+the rake which was in my hand, and gave it a rude push towards me with a
+disdainful fling of the arm, accompanying this gesticulation by words,
+which seemed to imply a desire to give any thing upon condition of our
+going away. One man expressed the general wish for our departure, by
+holding up a piece of paper like a sail, and then blowing upon it in the
+direction of the wind, at the same time pointing to the ships, thereby
+denoting that the wind was fair, and that we had only to set sail and
+leave the island. Several of the people were marked with the small-pox.
+The children kept out of our reach at first, but before we went away,
+their fears had, in some degree, subsided, for the boys, who, from their
+feminine appearance, were mistaken at first for girls, accompanied us to
+some distance from the village.
+
+Captain Maxwell named these islands Sir James Hall's group, in
+compliment to the President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. They lie
+in longitude 124º 46' E. and latitude 37º 50' N.
+
+At eight o'clock in the evening we weighed and stood to the southward,
+but as the coast was quite unknown, we kept rather off shore during the
+night, and in the morning no land was in sight. On the 2d we stood to
+the eastward, but not having daylight enough to get in with the coast,
+it became necessary to anchor for the night, though in deep water.
+
+3d of September.--Having reached nearly lat. 36-1/3 N. and long. 126 E.
+we sailed this morning amongst a range of islands extending as far as
+the eye could reach, both to the southward and northward, at the
+distance of six or seven leagues from the main land. By two o'clock we
+were close to the outer cluster of the islands, and the passages
+appearing clear between them, we sailed through and anchored inside.
+While passing one of these islands in the ships, at no great distance,
+it looked so curiously formed, that, on anchoring, we went in the boats
+to examine its structure more minutely[2]. While we were thus engaged,
+the natives had assembled in a crowd on the edge of the cliff above us;
+they did not seem pleased with our occupation of breaking their rocks,
+for, from the moment we landed, they never ceased to indicate by shouts,
+screams, and all kinds of gesticulations, that the sooner we quitted the
+island the better; the cliff being 200 feet high, and nearly
+perpendicular, it was fortunate for us that they confined themselves to
+signs and clamour, and did not think of enforcing their wishes by a
+shower of stones.
+
+As soon as we had completed our investigation of this spot, we went
+round in the boats to a small bay where there was good landing. Here we
+were met by the natives, who addressed several long speeches to us in a
+very loud tone of voice; to which we replied in English, that our wish
+was merely to look at the island, without interfering with any body; at
+the same time we proceeded up a foot-path to the brow of a hill. This
+the natives did not seem at all to relish, and they made use of a sign
+which was sufficiently expressive of their anxiety, though we could not
+determine exactly to whom it referred. They drew their fans across their
+own throats, and sometimes across ours, as if to signify that our going
+on would lead to heads being cut off; but whether they or we were to be
+the sufferers was not apparent. It was suggested by one of our party
+that they dreaded being called to account by their own chiefs for
+permitting us to land. All these signs, however, did not prevent our
+advancing till we had reached the brow of the hill to which the path
+led; from this place we had a view of a village at the distance of half
+a mile, of a much better appearance than that above described. Trees
+were interspersed among the houses, which were pleasantly situated at
+the bottom of a little cove, with fishing-boats at anchor near it. We
+explained readily enough that our wish was to go to the village, but it
+was all in vain, for their anxiety increased every moment, and we
+desisted from any further attempts to advance.
+
+The dress of these people is a loose white robe, cloth shoes, and a few
+wear the broad hats before described; by most the hair is tied in a high
+conical knot on the top of the head, but by others it is allowed to fly
+loose, so as to give them a wild appearance. Some confine the short hair
+by a small gauze band with a star on one side, forming, along with the
+top knot, rather a becoming head-dress. Their beards and whiskers which,
+apparently, had never been cut, and their fans and long tobacco-pipes,
+and their strange language and manners, gave a grotesque air to the
+whole group, which it is impossible to describe. They crowded about us,
+and, by repeated shouts, manifested their surprise at the form and
+texture of our clothes; but on a watch being shewn, they disregarded
+every thing else, and entreated to be allowed to examine it closely. It
+was evidently the first they had seen, and some of them while watching
+the second-hand, looked as if they thought it alive. From the watch they
+proceeded to examine the seals and keys; with the former they shewed
+themselves acquainted by pressing them on their hands, so as to cause an
+impression. Their attention was drawn away from the watch by our firing
+a musket, which made the whole party fall back several paces.
+
+After amusing ourselves in this manner for some time, we walked back to
+the boats, to the great joy of the natives, who encouraged us by all
+means to hasten our departure. They took our hands and helped us over
+the slippery stones on the beach; and, on perceiving one of the boats
+aground, several of them stript and jumped into the water to push her
+off. This gave us an opportunity of observing their remarkable symmetry
+and firmness of limb; yet, as their long hair was allowed to flow about
+their neck and shoulders, their appearance was truly savage. During this
+visit we saw no women; but the children came round us without shewing
+any symptoms of fear. The people, upon the whole, are more free, and not
+so surly as our acquaintance on Sir James Hall's group. They have a
+singular custom of speaking with a loud tone, amounting almost to a
+shout. Captain Maxwell named this island after Dr. Hutton the geologist.
+
+4th of September.--During all last night it remained perfectly calm. At
+nine o'clock in the morning we got under weigh with a fine sea breeze,
+and stood in for the land, leaving on either hand many well cultivated
+islands. The main land seems to be populous, from the number of large
+villages which we passed, and the cultivation which extends a
+considerable way up the mountains. Our object this morning was to
+discover some safe anchoring place in the main land, but we were obliged
+to coast along for a considerable distance before any opening appeared.
+About three o'clock we sailed round a point of land and discovered a
+bay, which, at first sight, promised shelter, but the water proved too
+shallow even for the Lyra, and we anchored far out in five fathoms. The
+natives who had assembled in crowds on the point shouted to us as we
+passed, in seeming anger at our approaching so near. This bay is about
+four miles in diameter, and is skirted by large villages built amongst
+trees, and surrounded by cultivated districts, forming altogether a
+scene of considerable beauty.
+
+As soon as the Alceste had anchored, Captain Maxwell, Mr. Clifford, and
+I, went towards the nearest village in the bay. On approaching the shore
+we observed a great bustle among the inhabitants on the shore, as well
+as in the boats at anchor off the village. The people on the beach
+hastily jumped into canoes, whilst those in the large boats weighed the
+anchors, and pulled out with such expedition, as to meet us in a body
+before we were near the landing-place. Every boat was crowded with
+people, and ornamented with numerous flags and streamers; but one of
+them being distinguished by a large blue umbrella, we steered towards
+it, on the supposition that this was an emblem of rank; in which opinion
+we were soon confirmed by the sound of music, which played only on board
+this boat. On coming closer, we saw a fine patriarchal figure seated
+under the umbrella; his full white beard covered his breast, and reached
+below his middle; his robe or mantle, which was of blue silk, and of an
+immense size, flowed about him in a magnificent style. His sword was
+suspended from his waist by a small belt, but the insignia of his office
+appeared to be a slender black rod tipped with silver, about a foot and
+a half long, with a small leather thong at one end, and a piece of black
+crape tied to the other: this he held in his hand. His hat exceeded in
+breadth of brim any thing we had yet met with, being, as we supposed,
+nearly three feet across.
+
+As this was evidently the chief of the party, we pulled alongside and
+got into his boat, where he received us with much politeness; but as he
+looked dissatisfied at this proceeding, we returned to our own boat, and
+there carried on the conference. While we were endeavouring to make
+ourselves understood, the other boats gradually separated, and began to
+form a circle round us. Apprehending treachery, we prepared our arms,
+and pushed off to a little distance. The old gentleman, perceiving this,
+looked about very innocently to discover the cause of our alarm; and at
+length being made aware by our signs of what was the matter, he
+commanded all the boats to go to the other side. We now remained a
+considerable time without being able to make ourselves understood; for
+the Chinese whom we had with us was quite ignorant of their language. We
+endeavoured, by pointing to the shore, to signify our desire to land,
+while the old Chief, by similar signs, expressed his wish to go to the
+ships. We accordingly rowed to the Lyra, which lay nearer to the shore
+than the Alceste. When the Chief's boat was within ten yards of the
+brig, they let go their anchor, and threw a rope on board her, by which
+they drew the boat alongside in a very seaman-like style. The old man
+did not find it an easy matter to get up the ship's side, encumbered as
+he was with his splendid robes; he was no sooner on board, however, than
+we were crowded with the natives, who boarded us on all sides. Some
+climbed up the rigging, so as to overlook the quarter-deck; others got
+on the poop, and a line was formed along the hammock netting from one
+end of the brig to the other. As the evening was fine, it was thought
+best to entertain the venerable Chief upon deck, rather than give him
+the trouble of going down to the cabin, which, indeed, we had reason to
+fear would prove too small for the party. Chairs were accordingly placed
+upon the deck; but the Chief made signs that he could not sit on a
+chair, nor would he consent for a time to use his mat, which was brought
+on board by one of his attendants. He seemed embarrassed and displeased,
+which we could not at the moment account for, though it has since
+occurred to us that he objected to the publicity of the conference. At
+length, however, he sat down on his mat, and began talking with great
+gravity and composure, without appearing in the smallest degree sensible
+that we did not understand a single word that he said. We of course
+could not think of interrupting him, and allowed him to talk on at his
+leisure; but when his discourse was concluded, he paused for our reply,
+which we made with equal gravity in English; upon this he betrayed great
+impatience at his harangue having been lost upon us, and supposing that
+we could, at all events, read, he called to his secretary, and began to
+dictate a letter. The secretary sat down before him with all due
+formality, and having rubbed his cake of ink upon a stone, drawn forth
+his pen, and arranged a long roll of paper upon his knee, began the
+writing, which was at length completed, partly from the directions of
+the Chief, and partly from his own ideas, as well as the occasional
+suggestions of the bystanders. The written part was then torn off from
+the scroll and handed to the Chief, who delivered it to me with the
+utmost confidence of its being understood: but his mortification and
+disappointment were extreme on perceiving that he had overrated our
+acquirements[3].
+
+[Illustration: _Drawn by Wm. Havell, Calcutta._ _Engraved by
+Robt Havell & Son._
+
+COREAN CHIEF and his SECRETARY.
+
+_Published Jany, 1, 1818, by John Murray, Albemarle Street, London._]
+
+A debate now appeared to take place between the Chief and his followers,
+as to the mode of communicating with us; meanwhile, as we ourselves were
+equally at a loss, we became anxious to relieve the old man's
+embarrassment, by shewing him all the attention in our power, and
+completely succeeded in putting him into a good humour, by giving him
+some cherry brandy, and distributing rum to his people.
+
+While these attempts at explanation were going on, the crowd of natives
+increased, and their curiosity became so great, that they pressed round
+us in a way nowise agreeable. Some of them roved about the ship, and
+appeared highly entertained with every thing they saw. The Chief
+himself, however, did not appear at ease, but continued giving
+directions to his officers and people about him with an air of
+impatience. He more than once ordered them all into their boats, but
+they always returned after a few minutes. One man persevered in climbing
+over the hammocks, close to the Chief, to see what was going on. The
+noise made to keep him back attracted the Chief's attention, who
+immediately gave orders to one of the attendants for his being taken
+away; it will be seen by and by what was his fate.
+
+The persons forming the suite of the Chief were dressed nearly in the
+same manner as himself, excepting that their robes were white, and did
+not contain such a profusion of cloth. They wore the large hats and wide
+trowsers tied above the ancle, with cotton shoes turned up a little at
+the toe. The immediate attendants, who seemed also to be soldiers, were
+differently clothed: over a loose pink frock with wide sleeves, they
+have another which fits closer, and is without sleeves, the corners
+being tucked up, like the skirts of some military uniforms. Their hat is
+a broad flat cone made of thick grass, the under part being embossed
+with different coloured silks, and from a gilt ornament on the peak
+there hangs a tassel made of peacock's feathers, and another of hair
+dyed red: some are armed with bows and arrows, others with only a
+straight sword, having no guard for the hand. A coarse frock without
+sleeves, and trowsers, or rather drawers, covering the thigh, are worn
+by the lower orders.
+
+It was nearly dark when the Chief gave directions for preparing the
+boats, at the same time calling to two of his attendants to assist him
+to get on his legs. Each took an arm, and in this way succeeded in
+raising him up, which was no sooner observed by the people, than they
+jumped into their boats with the utmost alacrity, and the Chief, after
+many bows and salams, walked into his boat. This did not give him so
+much trouble as he had experienced on coming on board, for a platform of
+gratings and planks had been prepared for his accommodation during his
+visit, an attention with which he seemed much pleased. So far all seemed
+well; but there was still something amiss, for the old man, seated in
+state under his umbrella, remained alongside with his attendants ranged
+on the deck about him, he and his people preserving the most perfect
+silence, and making no signs to explain his wishes. We were greatly
+puzzled to discover what the old gentleman wanted, till at length it was
+suggested, that having paid us a visit, he expected a similar compliment
+in return. This idea was no sooner started, than we proceeded to pay our
+respects to him in his boat. He made signs for us to sit down, honouring
+us at the same with a corner of his own mat. When we were seated, he
+looked about as if in distress at having nothing to entertain us with,
+upon which a bottle of wine was sent for and given to him. He ordered an
+attendant to pour it into several bowls, and putting the bottle away,
+made signs for us to drink, but would not taste it himself till all of
+us had been served. He was nowise discomposed at being obliged to
+entertain his company at their own expense; on the contrary, he carried
+off the whole affair with so much cheerfulness and ease, as to make us
+suspect sometimes that he saw and enjoyed the oddity of the scene and
+circumstances, as fully as we did ourselves.
+
+After sitting about ten minutes, we left the Chief in great good humour,
+and returned on board, thinking, of course, that he would go straight to
+the shore; but in this we were much mistaken, for we had no sooner left
+him, than he pushed off to the distance of ten or twelve yards, and
+calling the other boats round him, gave orders for inflicting the
+discipline of the bamboo upon the unfortunate culprit, who had been
+ordered into confinement during the conference. This exhibition, which
+it was evidently intended we should witness, had a very ludicrous
+effect, for it followed so much in train with the rest of the ceremony,
+and was carried on with so much gravity and order, that it looked like
+an essential part of the etiquette. During the infliction of this
+punishment, a profound silence was observed by all the party, except by
+five or six persons immediately about the delinquent, whose cries they
+accompanied by a sort of song or yell at each blow of the bamboo. This
+speedy execution of justice was, no doubt, intended to impress us with
+high notions of Corean discipline.
+
+As it was now quite dark, we did not expect the Chief to pay any more
+visits this evening; but we underrated his politeness, for the moment
+the above scene was concluded, he steered for the Alceste. Captain
+Maxwell, who during all the time had been on board the Lyra, hurried
+into his boat to be prepared to give him a proper reception in his ship,
+and had just time to change his jacket for a coat and epaulettes before
+the Chief arrived. After climbing up the ship's side with some
+difficulty, and being received in due form on the quarter-deck, which
+was lighted up, he was handed into the foremost cabin, where he was met
+by Captain Maxwell, and conducted to a seat in the after cabin. As he
+declined sitting on a chair, he was obliged to wait for his mat, and, in
+the meantime, looked round him in amaze at the magnificence of the
+apartments. The change of dress made him behave towards Captain Maxwell
+as to a perfect stranger; but the moment he recognised him, he appeared
+much amused with his mistake, and his manners became less reserved. He
+now turned about to see what was become of his mat, and was astonished
+to find himself alone with us in the cabin. It was then discovered that
+the sentry at the door, in repressing the crowd of his followers, had
+found it impossible to distinguish his more immediate attendants, and
+had therefore allowed nobody to pass.
+
+The door being opened, the mat-bearer and four of the principal people
+were called in by the Chief; and when we were all fairly seated on the
+deck, the secretary was directed to prepare a writing, which was
+dictated and delivered much in the same manner as before. Whether the
+presentation of a written paper was considered by the Chief as a
+necessary piece of etiquette, or whether he really had more hopes of
+being understood on this occasion than before, was quite uncertain; but
+the mode adopted by Captain Maxwell to undeceive him was conclusive. He
+immediately called for paper, and wrote upon it in English, "I do not
+understand one word that you say," and presented this paper in return,
+with all the forms and ceremonies that had been adopted towards himself.
+The Chief, on receiving it, examined the characters with great
+attention, and then made signs that it was wholly unintelligible,
+alternately looking at the paper and at Captain Maxwell with an
+inquiring air, and was only made sensible of the awkward dilemma in
+which we were placed, by observing Captain Maxwell repeat all his looks
+and gestures as equally applicable to the Corean writing which he held
+in his hand[4].
+
+The Chief had now recourse to signs, which he used ever afterwards. He
+was in great spirits, and seemed entertained with the efforts which were
+made to please him. He asked to look at a mirror which had caught his
+attention; when it was put into his hands, he seemed very well satisfied
+with the figure which it presented, and continued for some time pulling
+his beard from side to side with an air of perfect complacency. One of
+the attendants thought there could be no harm in looking at the mirror
+likewise, but the Chief was of a different opinion, and no sooner
+observed what he was doing, than he very angrily made him put down the
+glass and leave the cabin. The secretary too fell under his displeasure,
+and was reprimanded with much acrimony for overlooking our paper when we
+were writing. Scarcely five minutes elapsed, in short, during his stay,
+without his finding some cause of complaint against his people; but we
+could not determine whether this arose from mere captiousness, or was
+done to give us a higher notion of his consequence, because, in the
+intervals, he was all cheerfulness and good humour. He was offered tea
+and cherry brandy, which he took along with us, and appeared at his ease
+in every respect. We thought that he made signs, implying a wish for us
+to visit him on shore; to this we cheerfully assented, and an
+arrangement for landing in the morning was made accordingly by means of
+similar signs, with which the Chief appeared much pleased, and rose to
+go away.
+
+He had not got much beyond the cabin-door, however, before the serenity
+of his temper was once more overturned. On passing the gun-room
+sky-light, he heard the voices of some of his people whom the officers
+had taken below, and who were enjoying themselves very merrily amongst
+their new acquaintance. The old Chief looked down, and observing them
+drinking and making a noise, he called to them in a loud passionate
+voice, which made them leave their glasses, and run up the ladder in
+great terror. From thence the alarm spread along the lower deck, to the
+midshipmen's berth, where another party was carousing. The grog and wine
+with which they had been entertained was too potent for this party, as
+they did not seem to care much for the old Chief, who, posting himself
+at the hatchway, ascertained, by personal examination, who the offenders
+were. On this occasion, his little rod of office was of much use; he
+pushed the people about with it to make them speak, and used it to turn
+them round, in order to discover their faces. One man watching his
+opportunity when the Chief was punching away at somebody who had just
+come up, slipped past and ran off; but the quick eye of the old man was
+not so easily deceived, and he set off in chase of him round the
+quarter deck. The man had an apron full of biscuit, which had been
+given to him by the midshipmen; this impeded his running, so that the
+Chief, notwithstanding his robes, at last came up with him; but while he
+was stirring him up with his rod, the fellow slipped his cargo of bread
+into a coil of rope, and then went along with the Chief quietly enough.
+The old man came back afterwards, and found the biscuit, which he
+pointed out to us, to shew that it had not been taken away.
+
+He continued for some time at the hatchway, expecting more people; but
+finding none come up, he went below himself, to the main deck, and
+rummaged under the guns and round the main-mast, to discover whether any
+one was concealed; but finding no person there, he came again upon deck,
+and shortly after went into his boat.
+
+On returning to the Lyra, we found a number of boats anchored round her,
+which looked as if they meant to keep strict watch over us. We went in
+our boat to one of them, where we found the crew asleep. They seemed to
+have had orders not to follow the Chief to the frigate, and were here
+waiting his return. On our pointing to the shore, and making signs that
+the old man with the long beard and large hat had landed, they began
+immediately to get their anchor up, and called to the other boats to do
+the same. In a few minutes they were all at work, and every person in
+the boats joined in repeating the two words "ho ya, ho ya," the effect
+of which, from a great many voices, was not unpleasing.
+
+The cable in these boats is wound round a large reel or barrel; to the
+ends of which two wheels with handles are fitted, which enables a
+considerable number to apply their strength at the same moment. The
+anchor is made of a dark coloured, heavy wood, with a long shank and
+flukes, and a short stock crossing the former, near the crown of the
+anchor, and not at the end of the shank, as with us in Europe. The mat
+sails are divided into horizontal divisions by slender pieces of bamboo.
+When not under sail, the boats are moved by oars having a circular piece
+of wood tied to the end, and are steered by a large scull over the
+stern. The bow is square above, but rises from the water in a slope,
+making a small angle with the water, like the end of a coal barge, but
+overhanging more. The planks are fastened together by means of square
+tree-nails, which pass in a slanting direction through the plank, and
+not straight, as with us.
+
+5th of September.--A considerable bustle was observed on shore at
+daybreak this morning; and shortly afterwards, we saw the old Chief and
+his suite embark, and pull towards us, accompanied by a numerous fleet
+of smaller boats, all ornamented with showy flags, and crowded with
+people in gay and bright coloured garments, forming, upon the whole, a
+splendid and imposing scene. As the procession moved slowly along, the
+band in the Chief's boat struck up a lively, martial sort of air, on
+instruments similar to those we had heard last night; the tone of which
+is not unlike the drawling sound of the bagpipe, the bass or drone being
+produced by a long horn, and the squeaking sounds by four trumpets, two
+of which have stops in the middle, by which the notes are distinctly
+marked.
+
+The Chief's visit was so unexpectedly early, that we had not put things
+in order for his reception, before he was alongside: he came on board,
+however, and seemed happy at being allowed to walk about the decks, and
+examine every thing at his leisure. When the cabin was ready, and the
+Chief seemed to have satisfied himself with looking round the upper
+deck, he was asked to walk down; which he complied with as soon as he
+understood what was meant. But he found it no easy matter to get down
+the narrow hatchway, in which there was barely room for his hat; but
+this he would by no means take off. As he entered the cabin, his robes
+and hat completely filled the door-way; and when seated at the table,
+(for he now made no objection to a chair) he occupied no inconsiderable
+portion of the whole apartment. He sat here for some time, and examined
+every thing in the cabin with great attention, pointing with the little
+stick whenever he saw any thing which he wanted to look at more closely.
+In this way, the books, globes, glasses, &c. were put into his hands;
+and it was not a little amusing to see the old gentleman wheeling the
+globes round, and hunting over the books for pictures, like a child. A
+person of rank who accompanied the Chief this morning, was asked to the
+cabin along with him; and was no sooner seated, than we observed that he
+had a very sickly look; which circumstance was the cause of a curious
+mistake. It had been supposed that the Chief, during last night's
+conference, made allusions to some friend of his who was unwell; and
+accordingly, in our arrangements for the morning, it was proposed to
+take the doctors of both ships on shore, to visit him. As the Chief had
+himself come on board, our plans for landing were interrupted, and we
+ascribed this early visit to his anxiety on account of his friend's
+health.
+
+It was therefore taken for granted, that this sickly looking companion
+of the Chief, who, some how or other, got the title of the "Courtier,"
+amongst us, was the patient alluded to last night; and no sooner were
+the first compliments over in the cabin, than the doctor was sent for to
+prescribe. On his being introduced, the Courtier was made to hold out
+his tongue, have his pulse felt, and submit to various interrogatories,
+the object of which the unfortunate man could not divine, particularly
+as there was nothing at all the matter with him. He submitted with so
+much patience to all these forms, and the Chief looked on with such
+grave propriety during all the examination, that they evidently
+considered the whole scene as a part of our ceremonial etiquette. When
+this gentleman was released from the doctor's hands, he began to examine
+the books with the air of a person who understands what he is about. He
+appeared desirous of passing for a literary character; and observing us
+hand the books about in a careless manner, ventured to ask for one, by
+drawing it towards himself with a begging look. As he happened to select
+a volume of the Encyclopædia Britannica, I was under the necessity of
+refusing; but offered in its stead a less valuable, though more showy
+book, which he accepted with much gratitude. No return, of course, had
+been looked for, and I was for a moment at a loss to understand what my
+friend meant, by slipping his fan into my hand, under the table. He did
+this in so mysterious a way, when the Chief was looking in another
+direction, that I saw it was his wish to conceal what he had done, and
+the fan was sent privately away. But unfortunately, my precaution was
+fruitless, for a few minutes afterwards, on finding the crowded cabin
+very hot, I called for a fan, and the servant, unconscious of the
+mischief he was doing, brought the Courtier's present; which no sooner
+met the old man's eye, than he rose half off his chair, and gave his
+unhappy companion such a look of furious anger, as made him tremble from
+top to toe: but he was soon pacified when he saw that we took an
+interest in the question, and the Courtier was allowed to keep his book.
+
+After sitting half an hour, and drinking a glass of Constantia, the old
+man proposed to go upon deck. I accordingly led the way, and had gone
+some steps up the ladder, in advance, before I perceived that he had
+stopped at the door of the gun-room, where the officers mess, and was
+looking in, with his usual curiosity. I begged him to go in, which he
+accordingly did, and entertained himself for some time, with looking
+over the different cabins of the officers. From having observed the
+pleasure which he took in the sight of any thing new, I was induced to
+propose his going round the lower deck, and he looked quite pleased when
+I pointed along the passage. The state hat, which had been resolutely
+kept on during all this time, notwithstanding its perpetual
+inconvenience to himself and every one around him, was here destined to
+come off; for after making two or three attempts, he found it impossible
+to get along and wear the hat too; and being of a very inquisitive
+disposition, he chose the degrading alternative of being uncovered, and
+his researches proceeded without interruption. Nothing escaped the old
+man's observation; whatever was shut or tied up, he requested to have
+opened; and in this way he rummaged the midshipmen's chests, and the
+sailors' bags, all along the lower deck. He looked into the holds, took
+the lid off the boilers, and turned every thing topsy-turvy. Seeing a
+cutlass tied to the deck, overhead, he took it down, and on drawing it
+from the scabbard, its lustre, and the keenness of its edge, surprised
+and delighted him so much, that I asked him to accept it. At first he
+seemed willing enough, but after holding a consultation with the
+Courtier for five minutes, he reluctantly put it back again. As he went
+along, he took samples of every thing that he could easily put into his
+sleeve, which served him instead of a sack; so that when he came upon
+deck, he was pretty well loaded, and looked about with the satisfaction
+of a school-boy, on having visited a show for the first time in his
+life.
+
+Whilst we were below, one of the natives had been busily employed in
+taking the dimensions of the ship with a string, and another person was
+engaged under him, taking an account of the guns, shot, and rigging, all
+which details he wrote down; but not being able to ascertain, himself,
+the exact number of people on board, he had recourse to me for the
+information; this I communicated by opening eight times the fingers of
+both hands. The only part of the ship to which he had not free access
+was the cabin under the poop, and from which he felt much annoyed at
+being excluded: but when told that a gentleman was shaving there, he
+shewed himself quite satisfied with the explanation, and waited
+patiently until the door was opened to him.
+
+The old gentleman and his followers appearing anxious to see a shot
+fired, an eighteen pound carronade was loaded before them, and
+discharged with the muzzle so much depressed, that the shot struck the
+water close to us, and then rose and fell eight or ten times, to the
+great entertainment and surprise of the whole party. In the mean time,
+Captain Maxwell had come on board, and breakfast being ready, we
+prevailed upon the Chief to sit down with us. He ate heartily of our
+hashes, and of every thing else that was put before him, using a knife,
+fork, and spoon, which he now saw, probably, for the first time in his
+life, not only without awkwardness, but to such good purpose, that he
+declined exchanging them for Chinese chopsticks, which were provided for
+him. In fact, he was so determined to adopt our customs in every
+respect, that when the tea was offered to him in the Chinese way, he
+looked to the right and left, and seeing ours differently prepared, held
+up his cup to the servant, for milk and sugar, which being given to him,
+the old gentleman remained perfectly satisfied.
+
+The politeness and ease with which he accommodated himself to the habits
+of people so different from himself, were truly admirable; and when it
+is considered, that hitherto, in all probability, he was ignorant even
+of our existence, his propriety of manners should seem to point, not
+only to high rank in society, but to imply also a degree of civilization
+in that society, not confirmed by other circumstances. Be this as it
+may, the incident is curious, as shewing, that however different the
+state of society may be in different countries, the forms of politeness
+are much alike in all. This polished character was very well sustained
+by the old Chief; as he was pleased with our attempts to oblige him, and
+whatever we seemed to care about, he immediately took an interest in. He
+was very inquisitive, and was always highly gratified when he discovered
+the use of any thing which had puzzled him at first. But there was no
+idle surprise, no extravagant bursts of admiration, and he certainly
+would be considered a man of good breeding, and keen observation, in any
+part of the world. Towards his own people, indeed, he was harsh and
+impatient at all times; but this may have arisen from his anxiety that
+no offence should be given to us by the other natives, whom he might
+know were less delicate and considerate than himself, and therefore
+required constant control.
+
+When breakfast was over, and the old man once more upon deck, we
+endeavoured to signify to him that we meant to land, according to our
+engagement yesterday evening; but this he either did not, or would not
+comprehend; for whenever we pointed towards the shore, he directed our
+attention to the frigate. At length he got into his boat, pushed off,
+and was making for the Alceste, when Captain Maxwell followed in his
+boat, and drawing up alongside of him, tried to prevail upon him to
+accompany us to the village: the Chief shook his head by way of
+disapprobation, and turning towards his attendants, entered into a
+discussion with them, which terminated by the Courtier and himself
+stepping into Captain Maxwell's boat.
+
+We ascribed this measure to a desire on the Chief's part to show
+publicly that he had not himself invited us on shore, and had only
+acceded to our request to land. We had not proceeded far before the
+Chief repented of his ready compliance, and tried to persuade us to
+return; but finding the ordinary signs of no avail, he held his head
+down and drew his hand across his throat, as if his head was to be cut
+off. It was now our turn not to comprehend signs, and thinking it would
+be idle to lose so favourable an opportunity, spared no pains to
+reconcile the old man to our landing. In this, however, we did not
+succeed, for, as we approached the shore, his anxiety increased, and he
+frequently drew his hand across his neck, as if to shew that he would
+lose his head if we persisted. We again tried to re-assure him, by
+explaining that we had no intention of going near the village, but
+merely desired to walk about for a short time, and then to go to the
+frigate to dine. He was of course included in this invitation; but his
+only answer consisted in pointing to us and making signs of eating, and
+then drawing his hand across his throat; by which he was understood to
+mean, that it might be very well for us to talk of eating, but, for his
+part, he was taken up with the danger of losing his head. We could not
+but laugh at this, as we had no notion of any such apprehension being
+well grounded; and, in a short time, landed at the distance of half a
+mile from the village.
+
+The old man was lifted out of the boat by several of his people, and we
+were amazed to find, when they set him down, that he was in tears, and
+looking altogether very unhappy. In a few minutes a crowd, consisting of
+more than a hundred people, assembled round us, and we began to think
+we should pay dearly for our curiosity. But the poor old man had no
+thoughts of vengeance, and was no better pleased with the crowd than we
+were; for turning to his soldiers, he desired them to disperse the mob,
+which they did in a moment by pelting them with great stones. The Chief
+now began crying violently, and turning towards the village walked away,
+leaning his head on the shoulder of one of his people. As he went along,
+he not only sobbed and wept, but every now and then bellowed aloud. We
+had been nowise prepared for such a scene, and were extremely sorry for
+having pushed matters to this extremity. It had never occurred to us
+that the old Chief's head was really in danger; and even now we could
+not satisfy ourselves whether he was sincere, or merely acting in order
+to prevail on us to retire. The perfect tranquillity, nay even
+cheerfulness of the Courtier, who staid with us all this time, puzzled
+us extremely: nor could we account for the indifference of the other
+attendants, who looked on with as much composure as if such scenes were
+every day occurrences. But at all events, it was necessary before
+proceeding any further, that the old man should be pacified; and in
+order to effect this, we sat down on the beach, upon which he turned
+about and came crying back again. He seated himself by us, and waited
+very patiently whilst we remonstrated on the unreasonableness of his
+conduct, and contrasted the reception he had met with from us, with his
+present unaccountable behaviour. This was expressed by a dumb show
+acting of all that had taken place since we came to anchor in the bay;
+and these signs we thought might be intelligible to the Chief, because
+they were so to all of us, although no words were used. The signs used
+by different nations, however, are often dissimilar when the same thing
+is to be expressed: and it happened frequently with us that all attempts
+at explanation failed, on both sides, though the signs used appeared to
+be understood by all the people of the same nation with the person
+making the signs.
+
+The old man made a long speech in reply; in the course which the
+beheading sign was frequently repeated. It is curious that he invariably
+held his hands towards his throat after he had gone through this motion,
+and appeared to wash his hands in his blood: probably he did this in
+imitation of some ceremony used at executions.
+
+Upon one occasion the Chief endeavoured to explain something to us which
+had a reference to a period of two days; this he did by pointing to the
+sun, making a motion twice from east to west, and, at the end of each
+time, closing his eyes as if asleep. This sign was variously
+interpreted: some believed it to mean that in two days his head would be
+taken off: others imagined that in two days a communication might be
+made to his government, and that orders for our reception would be
+transmitted. Whatever might have been meant by this particular sign, it
+seems very probable that some general instructions were in force along
+the whole of this coast by which the treatment of strangers is
+regulated. The promptitude with which we were met at this place, where,
+perhaps, no ship ever was before, and the pertinacity with which our
+landing was opposed, seem to imply an extraordinary degree of vigilance
+and jealousy on the part of the government.
+
+We expressed a desire to eat and drink, in the hopes of working on the
+old man's hospitality, and, perhaps, inducing him to entertain us in his
+house; but he made no motion towards the village, and merely sent off a
+servant for some water and a few small cockles. When this sorry fare was
+laid on the beach, the old gentleman made signs for us to begin; but we
+did not choose to be pleased either with the entertainment itself, or
+with the place and manner in which it had been served. We explained to
+him that the proper place to eat was in a house, and not on a wet dirty
+beach; he made no offer, however, of any other; but leaning his head
+pensively on his hands, seemed entirely resigned to his fate.
+
+The case was now utterly hopeless; and after an ineffectual attempt to
+cheer him up, we went on board, as the last, and indeed only favour we
+could grant him. Thus we quitted this inhospitable shore, after a stay
+of not quite an hour, in which time we had never been twenty yards from
+our own boats. We saw the village, however, to some advantage; it is
+neatly built, and very pleasantly situated under fine trees, in a valley
+cultivated like a garden, in small square patches.
+
+It was now determined to prosecute the voyage to the southward, and the
+Lyra was accordingly ordered to proceed as usual to sound the passages
+a-head of the frigate, but had not gone far before the Alceste, still at
+anchor, was observed to be surrounded with boats. In about an hour she
+weighed and stood to sea. Captain Maxwell had received another visit
+from the old Chief, whose appearance was described as being quite
+altered; his sprightliness and curiosity all gone, and his easy
+unceremonious manner exchanged for cold and stately civility: he looked
+embarrassed and unhappy, as it appeared, from an apprehension of having
+offended Captain Maxwell. When this was discovered, no pains were spared
+to convince him that, in this respect, there was not the slightest cause
+for uneasiness. He would not accept any presents, but appeared much
+relieved by the unexpected kindness with which he was received, and
+before he went away, was restored, in some degree, to his wonted
+spirits. When looking over the books in the cabin, he was a good deal
+taken with the appearance of a Bible, but when offered to him he
+declined it, though with such evident reluctance, that it was again
+shewn to him just as he was pushing off in his boat, and he now received
+it with every appearance of gratitude, and took his leave in a manner
+quite friendly.
+
+We quitted this bay without much regret. The old Chief, indeed, with his
+flowing beard, and pompous array, and engaging manners, had made a
+strong impression upon us all; but his pitiable and childish distress,
+whatever might have been the cause, took away from the respect with
+which we were otherwise disposed to regard him: yet this circumstance,
+though it makes the picture less finished, serves to give it additional
+interest; whilst every thing ridiculous in the old man's character is
+lost in the painful uncertainty which hangs over his fate.
+
+From this bay we steered amongst the islands, during all the 6th and
+7th, to the S.W. before the natives were met with again; we saw them
+indeed, but never got near enough to converse with them. They were
+frequently observed seated in groups watching us on the islands which we
+passed. We saw several fishing-boats, with a crew of about a dozen men,
+crowded on a sort of poop. At a little distance these boats appeared to
+be formed of two vessels lashed together. This appearance we believe to
+be caused by their having an outrigger on one side, on which their oars,
+sails, and masts are piled, in order probably to keep the boat clear
+when they are at anchor fishing. Their mast is lowered down and hoisted
+up by means of a strong tackle from the mast-head to the stern, as in
+the barges on the Thames.
+
+We threaded our way for upwards of a hundred miles amongst islands which
+lie in immense clusters in every direction. At first we thought of
+counting them, and even attempted to note their places on the charts
+which we were making of this coast, but their great number completely
+baffled these endeavours. They vary in size, from a few hundred yards in
+length to five or six miles, and are of all shapes. From the mast-head
+other groups were perceived lying one behind the other to the east and
+south as far as the eye could reach. Frequently above a hundred islands
+were in sight from deck at one moment. The sea being quite smooth, the
+weather fine, and many of the islands wooded and cultivated in the
+valleys, the scene was at all times lively, and was rendered still more
+interesting by our rapid passage along the coast, by which the
+appearances about us were perpetually changing. Of this coast we had no
+charts possessing the slightest pretensions to accuracy, none of the
+places at which we touched being laid down within sixty miles of their
+proper places. Only a few islands are noticed in any map; whereas the
+coast, for near two hundred miles, is completely studded with them, to
+the distance of fifteen or twenty leagues from the main land. These
+inaccuracies in the charts naturally gave a very high degree of interest
+to this part of the voyage; yet the navigation being at all times
+uncertain, and often dangerous, considerable anxiety necessarily mingled
+itself with the satisfaction produced by so new and splendid a scene. We
+always anchored during the night, or when the tides, which were very
+rapid, prevented our proceeding in the deliberate manner absolutely
+required by the nature of the circumstances. An instance of the
+necessity of these precautions occurred on the 7th of September, at four
+o'clock in the afternoon, when, it being quite calm, we were drifting
+along with the tide, which suddenly shifted and carried us rapidly
+towards a reef of rocks, which was invisible till the strong rippling of
+the water shewed us our danger: we let go the anchor immediately, but
+the jerk was so great, as to break the Lyra's cable. A second anchor,
+however, brought her up at a sufficient distance from the reef.
+
+As soon as the tide slacked, a boat was dispatched to examine the
+anchorage on the other side of an island near us. The officer landed
+about sunset, and from the top of the island could discover a village on
+the other side, on the shores of a fine large bay. He afterwards sounded
+the anchorage, and found it of a convenient depth. On his way back he
+landed near the village, but though it was bright moonlight he saw none
+of the inhabitants.
+
+8th of September.--About noon we weighed and sailed round the north end
+of the island, which had been visited last night. The Alceste anchored
+nearly in the middle between the two islands which form the anchorage;
+but as the Lyra draws less water, she was placed as close off the
+village as was safe, being then about a quarter of a mile from the
+beach. At this distance, by means of a telescope fixed on a table on the
+poop, we were enabled to see what was going on in the village, while the
+people were unconscious of being observed. Mr. Clifford, who was too
+unwell to land with Captain Maxwell and myself, placed himself at the
+glass, and made many observations which must otherwise have escaped
+notice.
+
+At first the only inhabitants visible were seated on the top of the hill
+watching us, the village itself being quite deserted; but shortly after
+our anchoring, the inhabitants began to assemble from different parts of
+the island. Of these several were women, some of whom had children on
+their backs, and others carried them in their arms. They looked stout,
+were fairer in complexion than the men, and were dressed in a long white
+robe, loose and open in front, with a petticoat of the same colour
+reaching a little below the knees; their hair was tied in a large knot
+behind; a small piece of white cloth was thrown loosely over the head to
+protect them from the rays of the sun. Some women were engaged in
+husking rice in a mortar with a wooden beater; these had no dress above
+the waist. The men and boys were seen carrying loads on a wooden frame
+hooked to the shoulders.
+
+In a square flat place near the village a number of women and children
+were employed winnowing corn by pouring it from a height, so that the
+husks blew away. Fishing-nets were spread to dry on most of the houses.
+We landed about five o'clock, and found in the village only two men, who
+obstinately remained at one place without speaking, and looking anxious
+that we should go away; they refused the buttons which we offered them,
+and resisted our persuasions to accompany us to the upper part of the
+village, which we were anxious they should do, to shew that we had no
+intention of hurting any thing, but merely to look about us. We went on
+alone, and on reaching a deserted house thought it a good opportunity to
+examine it. Before the door, on a neat clean level space, enclosed by a
+hedge covered with a sweet-scented white flower, we found several heaps
+of corn and straw, and several of the wooden mortars in which the rice
+is pounded, also a number of vessels, some filled with water and others
+with rice. Cooking utensils were lying about, and a number of fishing
+lines coiled neatly in baskets, and split fish spread out to dry on the
+top of little corn ricks on one side of the court. The inside was dark
+and uncomfortable; the mud floor was full of hollow places; the walls
+were black with soot, and every thing looked dirty. On the left of the
+entrance two large metal boilers, twenty inches deep, were sunk in the
+brickwork, the upper part being about a foot above the floor. The
+fire-place was between the boilers, and on the hot embers lay three
+split fish. On the wall opposite to the fire were shelves, having a
+number of cups, basons, and cooking utensils, principally of coarse
+stone ware, and some few of a sort of bell-metal. The number of
+inhabitants in one house must be considerable, if we can form an
+estimate from the quantity of their dishes and vessels. There were three
+neat small pieces of furniture on one of the shelves, the use of which
+we could not discover; they were made of wood, elegantly carved and
+varnished, with a round top about a foot in diameter, and four legs a
+foot and a half long. The roof was well constructed, the rafters being
+mortised into the ends of the horizontal beams, and tied to the middle
+by a perpendicular beam or King-Post. Over the rafters is laid a
+net-work of rods, to which the thatch is tied. There was no chimney to
+this house, and only one window made of slender bars of wood, forming
+square spaces three inches by two, covered by a thin semi-transparent
+paper defended by the roof, which extends so far beyond the wall as to
+shelter it not only from the rain but from the sun. Most of the houses
+had a sort of raised verandah under the eaves, about a foot or more
+above the ground, extending from the door on either hand to the end of
+the house; these places were neatly levelled, and must afford a cool
+seat. The walls of the houses are from six to eight feet high, and from
+fourteen to twenty feet long; the top of the roof being about fourteen.
+The walls are of stone and mud, the door moves on the bar, which forms
+one of its sides; this bar is prolonged, and works in holes in the beam
+above, and a stone below. There was a back door to the house which we
+examined. On opening this we found a bare bank of earth as high as the
+house, at the distance of three feet from the walls, and a hedge rising
+still higher on the top; this effectually excluded all light.
+
+This minute survey of the house being completed, we returned to our
+friends, who seemed in some measure re-assured. We tried to prevail upon
+them to accompany us in our walk, in hopes that the rest of the
+cottagers might be induced to return when they saw how peaceably we were
+disposed. Captain Maxwell used every sign he could think of to no
+purpose, and tired at length of these attempts, took hold of the oldest
+man's hand, drew it through his arm, and walked off with him. I followed
+his example with the other; and this familiarity amused the natives, who
+now accompanied us in perfect good humour. The ease and apparent
+indifference with which they walked along with us was curious, and had
+so little of awkwardness in it, that one might have supposed it to be
+the fashion of Corea to walk arm in arm. Having reached the house which
+we had before examined, we sat down in the verandah, and made signs that
+we wished to smoke a pipe with them. In the meantime a boat was observed
+to come to the landing-place; the crew quitted her and came towards us
+at a rapid pace. The quick manner of these people, so different from the
+ordinary behaviour of the Coreans we had seen, made us apprehend that
+some violence was meditated; but in this we were mistaken, for they sat
+down with us, gave us their pipes to smoke, and laughed immoderately at
+some of our words: we took the hint from them, and laughed heartily
+whenever we observed that any thing good had been said amongst them;
+this was well received, and proved afterwards a good mode of
+introduction.
+
+Their curiosity was strongly excited by our clothing, which they
+examined minutely; they wished to see some parts of our dress taken off,
+and in order to gratify them they were allowed to have our coats, shoes,
+stockings, hats, &c. They were more struck with the stockings than with
+any thing else, frequently shouting "Hota! Hota!" This word, which is
+pronounced with a strong aspiration, was noted down in our list as the
+Corean word for stockings; but it was found afterwards to be an
+expression of approbation, applied indiscriminately to whatever they
+consider remarkably good. After sitting some time with these people, and
+smoking several pipes with them, we gave up all hopes of seeing the
+villagers return while we were there, and as the night was falling we
+proposed taking a short walk with our friends, and then going on board.
+But as soon as they saw us go up the hill instead of returning to the
+boat, they became very uneasy, and wanted us to turn back. As we had
+reason, however, to conjecture that the women and children were on the
+other side of the hill, we went on in the expectation of getting a sight
+of them before dark. This the Coreans prevented by following us with
+shouts wherever we went, so as to give warning of our approach. The
+women and children probably retreated before us to a ravine on the north
+side of the island, for when we approached it the Coreans became more
+anxious than ever for our return; and one man seeing us still advance,
+took hold of my arm and gave it a sharp pinch. I turned round and
+exclaimed, "Patience, Sir!" He drew back on observing my displeasure,
+and a moment after called out himself, "Patience, Sir!" The others
+hearing this caught the words too, and nothing was heard for some time
+amongst them but "Patience, Sir," pronounced in every instance with
+perfect propriety. They seemed surprised themselves on discovering
+powers of imitation hitherto in all probability unexercised. This
+incident brought us better acquainted, and we remained on the top of the
+hill teaching them English words till it was dark. They were certainly
+entertained with our instructions, but nevertheless shewed much more
+satisfaction in attending us down hill again to our boats. Before going
+on board we invited them to come to the ship next day, which one of the
+party was supposed to comprehend: he first made preparations for going
+to bed, then closed his eyes, hung his head on his hand, and snored very
+properly; after a time he opened his eyes, started and looked about him,
+then laid his hands on Captain Maxwell's shoulders with an air of
+welcome. This was interpreted by some into a wish for our departure
+till the morning, and by others that he himself would visit us at
+daylight. As he never came on board, and received us on landing next day
+with any thing but welcome, probably both guesses were wrong: of one
+thing there was no doubt, his anxiety to get rid of us; and his signs
+may have meant that it was time for all honest people to be in bed.
+
+9th of September.--At sunrise we landed at the same village, and found
+it deserted as before. We left it and made for the highest peak on the
+island, accompanied by a few of the Coreans, who did not interfere with
+us till about halfway up, when on our entering a grove of fir trees,
+with the appearance of which we had been struck, one of the Coreans
+objected; we went on, however, and upon reaching the stump of an old
+tree the Corean fell on his knees, bowed his head to the ground, and as
+he raised it again held his hands closed and pressed together towards
+the stump. This had very much the air of a stratagem to dissuade us from
+going further in that direction, where the women probably were
+concealed. Admitting this to have been the motive, it is curious that he
+should have supposed such a shew of religious form calculated to
+restrain us. It is further remarkable as being the only circumstance
+which we have seen on this coast implying a knowledge of religion or
+religious ceremony. There are here no temples, idols, nor tombs, whereas
+in China, villages much smaller than these of Corea have them in every
+corner. The other Coreans took no notice of the stump, and the man who
+was prostrating himself before it finding that his behaviour produced
+nothing but a number of questions from us concerning the nature of the
+tree, got on his legs and walked sulkily away. In the course of our walk
+we saw six bullocks of a small breed and very fat, but which the Coreans
+were not to be tempted to sell by any thing which we had to give them.
+Dogs were the only quadrupeds besides that we saw. There were pigeons,
+hawks, and eagles, but few small birds. Crows were as numerous here as
+in every other part of the world. We returned on board to breakfast, and
+afterwards set out on an excursion to the top of a high island lying
+some leagues to the south-east of us. On our way we landed, and observed
+the sun's meridian altitude with an artificial horizon, by which we
+ascertained the latitude to be 34º 22' 39" north, the longitude by the
+mean of two chronometers is 126º 2' 45" east.
+
+We passed, for the distance of five miles, amongst islands, all, except
+the very smallest, inhabited. The villages are built in the valleys,
+where the houses are nearly hid by trees and hedges. The sides of the
+hills are cultivated with millet and a species of bean; and in the
+numerous small gardens near the villages, we saw a great variety of
+plants.
+
+As the peaked island which we had undertaken to climb was steep, and
+covered with a long coarse grass, it cost us a tiresome scramble to gain
+the top, which is about six hundred feet above the level of the sea. The
+main land of Corea is just discernible in the north-east and east, from
+this elevation; but it commands a splendid view of the islands, lying in
+thick clusters, as far as the eye can reach, from north-west quite round
+by east to south. We endeavoured to count them. One person, by reckoning
+only such as were obviously separate islands, made their number one
+hundred and twenty. Two other gentlemen, by estimating the numbers in
+each connected cluster, made severally, one hundred and thirty-six, and
+one hundred and seventy; a difference, which at once shews the
+difficulty of speaking with precision on this subject. But when it is
+considered, that from one spot, which though considerably elevated, was
+not centrical, one hundred and twenty islands could be counted, and that
+our course for upwards of one hundred miles had been amongst islands no
+less crowded than these, some idea may be formed of this great
+Archipelago.
+
+After enjoying this scene for some time, we went down on the other side
+of the peak, which is much less steep. We found the boat's crew
+preparing dinner for us, under some trees, close to a well of cool
+water. The village to which the well belonged not being many yards off,
+we proceeded to explore it, and found it deserted by all except an old
+woman and a man. The woman, seated on a pile of stones, in the middle of
+the village, took no notice of us as we passed; and indeed, she was
+herself so very homely, as to occupy but little of our attention. The
+man was seated at the door of a cottage, making a straw sandal: on our
+entering his inclosure, he looked up for an instant, and immediately
+resumed his work, with as much composure as if we had been a party of
+the villagers. A button was offered to him, which he accepted without
+scruple: he agreed, with equal readiness, to exchange his unfinished
+sandal for another button, which having carelessly put away, in a bag
+lying near him, he took some straw and re-commenced his business,
+without seeming to notice that we were rummaging his house. He is the
+only Corean we have met with, who has not shewn some slight symptoms of
+curiosity: indeed, he seemed totally indifferent about our staying or
+going, or about what we were doing in his house; and we left him without
+knowing whether to ascribe his apathy to fear, or to absolute
+stupidity.
+
+On returning from the village, we saw a party of the natives assembled
+on a rising ground near us; they were invited, by signs, to join us at
+dinner, but they kept their places unmoved. While we were at dinner, the
+sailors, who had been rambling about, joined the natives, and in a few
+minutes became very good friends with them; the natives giving up their
+pipes, and the sailors in return supplying them with tobacco. We have
+frequently remarked during this voyage, that the sailors make
+acquaintance with the natives much sooner than the officers. This seems
+the natural effect of the difference in our manners. On meeting with
+natives, we feel so anxious to conciliate, and to avoid giving offence,
+that our behaviour, thus guarded and circumspect, has an air of
+restraint about it, which may produce distrust and apprehension on their
+part; whilst, on the other hand, Jack, who is not only unreflecting and
+inoffensive himself, but never suspects that others can possibly
+misconstrue his perfect good-will and unaffected frankness, has an easy,
+disengaged manner, which at once invites confidence and familiarity.
+
+In about an hour after we had sat down, one of the natives hastily rose,
+and without appearing to deliberate, but as if actuated by a sudden
+impulse, strode rapidly down to us, and in the most unceremonious way
+possible, presented his lighted pipe for us to smoke. We received him
+as kindly as we could, and prevailed upon him to take a glass of wine;
+which he had no sooner drank off, than he roared out, "Hota! Hota!"
+
+This exclamation brought the rest down, who seating themselves by us,
+drank freely, and became very cheerful and communicative, telling us the
+Corean names of every thing we pointed to, and asking, in return, the
+English names for our clothes.[5] But though the wine made these people
+far more sociable than any we had yet seen, they never forgot the
+principal object of their thoughts, and suggested, every now and then,
+by pointing to our boats, the propriety of our going away. After sunset,
+they became very impatient and uneasy at our stay; but when at length we
+yielded to their entreaties, the whole party accompanied us to the
+water's side, and took leave with the most lively marks of satisfaction
+at our departure.
+
+10th of September.--This morning, about ten o'clock, we got under weigh,
+and stood to the southward. By sunset we were clear of all the islands,
+and could just distinguish the island of Quelpaert in the south-east
+quarter.
+
+The shortness of our stay on this coast, and the difficulty we
+experienced in communicating with the inhabitants, will account for the
+scanty and disjointed nature of the information obtained. A future
+voyager would do well to be accompanied by a person who can write the
+Chinese character, and should have full leisure to overcome, by patient
+management, the distrust of strangers evinced by this unsociable people.
+
+A chart of our track along this coast is subjoined to this work, in the
+hope that it may prove useful to a future voyager. As it was constructed
+under circumstances of great haste, it is necessarily incomplete; yet it
+will probably be found more accurate than any maps or charts hitherto
+published.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 1: A servant of the embassy, left behind by accident at the
+Pei-ho river.]
+
+[Footnote 2: We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grained
+granite; the middle of the island of a brittle micaceous schistus of a
+deep blue colour; the strata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little to
+the S.W. This body of strata is cut across by a granite dyke, at some
+places forty feet wide, at others not above ten; the strata in the
+vicinity of the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner; this
+dislocation and contortion does not extend far from the walls of the
+dyke, but veins of granite branch out from it to a great distance,
+varying in width from three feet to the hundredth part of an inch: the
+dyke is visible from the top of the cliff to the water's edge, but does
+not re-appear on the corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it,
+though distant only thirty yards. This island is composed of the same
+schistus, and is cut in a vertical direction by a whin dyke, four feet
+wide, the planes of whose sides lie N.E. and S.W., being at right angles
+to those of the great granite dyke in the neighbourhood, which run S.E.
+and N.W. The strata contiguous to the whin dyke are a good deal twisted
+and broken, but not in the same degree as at their contact with the
+granite dyke.
+
+The whin dyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laid across in
+the usual way. Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at the
+distance of only forty or fifty feet, we came to an island rising
+abruptly out of the sea, and presenting a high rugged cliff of breccia,
+fronting that on which the granite dyke is so conspicuous: the junction
+of this rock with the schistus cut by the granite and the whin would
+have been interesting; but although we must have been at times within a
+few yards of it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea.
+
+The whole of the S.W. end of this island is formed of breccia, being an
+assemblage of angular and water-worn pieces of schistus, quartz, and
+some other rocks, the whole having the appearance of a great shingle
+beach. The fragments of the schistus in this rock are similar to that
+which forms the cliff first spoken of.
+
+The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was, that the great
+mass of strata which forms the centre of the island was formerly at the
+bottom of the ocean; and that the western part, which is now a firm
+breccia, had been a beach shingle produced by the action of the waves on
+the strata: the granite which forms the eastern end of the island had
+been forced into its present situation from beneath the strata, with
+sufficient violence to dislocate and contort the beds nearest to it, and
+to inject the liquid granite into the rents formed by the heaving action
+of the strata as they were raised up. It is natural to suppose that the
+ragged edges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks would be
+subjected to a grinding action, from which the strata more remote might
+be exempted; and in this way we may account for the extraordinary
+twisting, and separation of masses along the whole course of the granite
+dyke. In the dyke, as well as in the veins which branch from it, there
+are numerous islands of schistus. That this last was softened, seems to
+follow from the frequent instances which occur of its being bent back
+upon itself without producing cracks. The same heat, propagated by the
+melted granite in the neighbourhood, may also be supposed to have
+reduced the shingle beach to a state of semifusion by the aid of some
+flux contained in the sand scattered amongst it. We could not discover
+any circumstance by which the relative antiquity of the two dykes
+mentioned above, could be ascertained.]
+
+[Footnote 3: _Note on the peculiar character of the written language in
+that quarter of the globe._
+
+In China, Japan, Corea, and the islands in the adjacent seas, the spoken
+languages are different from one another; the written language, on the
+contrary, is the same in all. Thus a native of China is unintelligible
+to a Corean or Japanese, while he is speaking, but they mutually
+understand one another when their thoughts are expressed in writing. The
+cause of this may be thus explained. We in Europe form an idea in the
+mind, and this we express by certain sounds, which differ in different
+countries; these sounds are committed to writing by means of the letters
+of the alphabet, which are only symbols of sounds, and, consequently, a
+writing in Europe is unintelligible to every one who is ignorant of the
+spoken language in which it happens to be written. The Chinese and the
+other natives in these seas have, on the contrary, no alphabet; no
+symbols of sounds; their ideas are committed to writing at once without
+the intervention of sound, and their characters may therefore be called
+symbols of ideas. Now, as the same characters are adopted in all these
+countries to express the same ideas, it is clear that their writings
+will be perfectly intelligible to each other, although their spoken
+languages may be quite incomprehensible.
+
+The case of the Roman numerals in Europe furnishes a ready illustration
+of this symbolical language. There is nothing in the symbols 1, 2, 3,
+&c. by which their pronunciation can be ascertained when presented to
+the eye, yet they communicate meaning independent of sound, and are
+respectively intelligible to the inhabitants of the different countries
+of Europe; while, at the same time, the sounds by which a native of one
+country distinguishes the written symbols 1, 2, 3, &c. are
+unintelligible to all the rest.
+
+The knowledge of writing is supposed to be very generally diffused over
+the countries using what is called the Chinese character, and, as
+probably none but the lowest vulgar are ignorant of it, the surprise of
+these people on discovering our inability to read their papers is very
+natural. The case, we may imagine, had never occurred to them before,
+and it was highly interesting to watch the effect which so novel an
+incident produced. At first they appeared to doubt the fact of our
+ignorance, and shewed some symptoms of impatience; but this opinion did
+not last long, and they remained completely puzzled, looking at each
+other with an odd expression of surprise.]
+
+[Footnote 4: This paper, presented by the Corean Chief, has been
+translated by Mr. Morrison at Canton, and is as follows: "Persons, of
+what land--of what nation (are you)? On account of what business do you
+come hither? In the ship are there any literary men who thoroughly
+understand, and can explain what is written?"]
+
+[Footnote 5: See note at the end of the Loo-choo vocabulary.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+ Enter the Japan Sea--Sulphur Island--Volcano--See the Great Loo-Choo
+ Island--Lyra nearly wrecked--First Interview with the
+ Natives--Anchor at Napakiang--Natives crowd on Board--Their
+ interesting Appearance and Manners--Several Chiefs visit the
+ Alceste--Land to make Observations--Astonishment of the Natives--Six
+ Chiefs visit the Ships--Alceste and Lyra proceed farther in Shore--A
+ Chief of high Rank waits upon Captain Maxwell--Return his
+ Visit--Feast--Projected Survey of the Anchorage--Visit Reef
+ Island--The Lyra sent to look for another Harbour--Arrangements for
+ landing the Alceste's Stores--Description of the Temple and
+ Garden--First Acquaintance with Mádera--Study of the Language.
+
+
+After leaving Corea, we stood to the southward and eastward, with a
+strong breeze from the north, and a mountainous swell from the
+north-east. Shortly after daybreak on the 13th of September, we saw
+Sulphur Island, in the south-west quarter, and by eleven in the forenoon
+were close up to it. We intended to land, but were prevented by the high
+wind, which caused so great a surf all round the island, as to render
+this impracticable. The sulphuric volcano from which the island takes
+its name is on the north-west side; it emits white smoke, and the smell
+of sulphur is very strong on the lee side of the crater. The cliffs
+near the volcano are of a pale yellow colour, interspersed with brown
+streaks: the ground at this place is very rugged, as the strata lie in
+all directions, and are much broken; on the top is a thin coat of brown
+grass. The south end of the island is of considerable height, of a deep
+blood red colour, with here and there a spot of bright green: the
+strata, which are here nearly horizontal, are cut by a whin dyke running
+from the top to the bottom of the cliff, projecting from its face like a
+wall. As the weather still looked threatening, we gave up the intention
+of examining this spot, and proceeded to the southward till four
+o'clock, at which time land was seen in the south-west quarter; but as
+there was not sufficient daylight to close with it, we hauled off to the
+westward for the night. Shortly after sunset the sky became overcast,
+the wind veered about from one point to another, the air became suddenly
+quite chill, the sea rose high, and every thing, in short, seemed to
+indicate an approaching tyfoong or hurricane. All our preparations were
+made to encounter a violent tempest; but we were much pleased at finding
+it turn out nothing more than an ordinary gale of wind.
+
+14th of September.--The weather was still stormy, but being anxious to
+close with the land, we bore up, and steered in the supposed direction
+of the Great Lieou Kieou, or Loo-choo Island. At eight o'clock we saw
+the Sugar Loaf of Captain Broughton, which is a small green island,
+having a high remarkable cone in the middle. We left this to the
+eastward, and continued steering to the south south-west, hoping to get
+to leeward of the great island before night, where we might remain in
+smooth water till the weather became fine. While going along at a quick
+rate, we suddenly saw breakers close to us; we instantly hauled to the
+wind, and made all the sail we could carry. Our situation was now very
+critical, for the swell caused by the recent gale checked our way
+considerably, and a lee current drifted us gradually towards the reef.
+From the mast head we could look down upon the reef, which was of a
+circular form, with a low island on its southern side; the surf broke
+all round, but in the inside the water was quite smooth, and being only
+a few feet deep, the coral, which was of a bright green, appeared
+distinctly through it. At the distance of one-third of a mile from where
+we were, no bottom was to be found with our lead lines, so that
+anchoring was out of the question. After being in this unpleasant
+predicament for some time, we succeeded in weathering the western end of
+the reef, which we had no sooner done, than we saw a passage four or
+five miles wide, by which we proceeded to leeward of the reef island,
+where we found the water perfectly smooth. The Alceste rounded the reef
+without difficulty, being half a league farther off than the Lyra,
+which, as usual, had been stationed a-head to look out, but had not
+perceived the danger sooner, owing to the extreme haziness of the
+weather.
+
+15th of September.--In the morning, it was arranged that the Lyra should
+proceed in shore in search of a harbour, while the frigate remained in
+deep water. At ten o'clock I thought we had discovered a place of
+security, and having anchored the Lyra, sent three boats to examine it.
+A sort of harbour was found, formed by coral reefs; but the passages
+being all intricate for large ships, and the water shallow inside, it is
+by no means safe. We fell in with several people in canoes; one man, who
+seemed to know what we were searching for, directed us to a point of
+land to the northward, and waved for us to go round it. While the boats
+were away, several natives came off to the Lyra. No people that we have
+yet met with have been so friendly; for the moment they came alongside,
+one handed a jar of water up to us, and another a basket of boiled sweet
+potatoes, without asking or seeming to wish for any recompense. Their
+manners were gentle and respectful; they uncovered their heads when in
+our presence, bowed whenever they spoke to us; and when we gave them
+some rum, they did not drink it till they had bowed to every person
+round. Another canoe went near the Alceste, and a rope being thrown to
+them, they tied a fish to it, and then paddled away. All this seemed to
+promise well, and was particularly grateful after the cold repulsive
+manners of the Coreans.
+
+The day was spent in trying to beat round the point to windward, but the
+tide was too strong against us, and when it became dark, we found
+ourselves awkwardly situated. To the east and west of us there were
+islands at the distance of a few miles. To leeward was a circular coral
+reef, just appearing above the surface at low water; and to windward
+were seen the reefs upon which we were so nearly wrecked on Saturday. As
+the exact position of these numerous dangers was unknown to us, we were
+determined to anchor for the night, though in eighty fathoms water.
+
+16th of September.--At daylight we weighed, and beat to windward all the
+morning; but owing to the tide being contrary, it was two o'clock before
+we passed the point mentioned above; which we had no sooner done, than
+we came in sight of an extensive town, having a harbour filled with
+vessels at anchor. On steering towards the town, we had to sound our way
+cautiously amongst coral reefs, which were tolerably well defined by the
+surf breaking upon them[6]. The Alceste followed as soon as we had
+ascertained that the passage was clear, and both ships anchored at the
+distance of half a mile from the town.
+
+In a short time we were surrounded by canoes, full of the natives, who,
+with their children, flocked on board. They wear a loose dress, tied
+with a belt round their waist; their hair is brought tight up from all
+sides, and formed into a knot on the top of the head, with two metal
+pins stuck in it. In the course of an hour, a native came on board who
+appeared to be somewhat higher in rank than the rest; and we now
+discovered, to our great satisfaction, that this man understood our
+Chinese servant, who had been of no use to us at Corea. As it was found
+that there were other chiefs on shore superior in rank to this man,
+Captain Maxwell declined receiving his visit; as well with the view of
+inducing the principal people to come on board, as of maintaining an
+appearance of dignity, a point of great importance in all transactions
+with the Chinese and their dependents, who invariably repay
+condescension with presumption. As we had heard of these people being
+tributary to China, it was natural to conclude that there might be some
+similarity in manners. At all events, it was evidently much easier at
+any future time to be free and cordial with them, after having assumed a
+distance and reserve in the first instance, than it would be to repress
+insolence, if at first encouraged by too hasty familiarity.
+
+Before this man went on shore, he requested to know the reason of our
+coming into this port; the interpreter was instructed to acquaint him
+that the ships had experienced very bad weather, and had been a long
+time at sea; that the large ship had sprung a leak, and required repairs
+which could only be done in a secure harbour: further explanations, it
+was observed, would be given to the superior chiefs when they came on
+board. We had been prepared for these inquiries, not only from the
+reception we had met with at Corea, but from the well-known character of
+the nations in this quarter of the globe; and it was so far fortunate,
+that the Alceste was actually in want of repairs; because to have
+assigned curiosity, and a desire of gaining information as our object,
+to people wholly unconscious of such feelings, would naturally have led
+them to ascribe our actions to some more interested, and consequently
+more dangerous motive.
+
+The canoes which we have seen to-day are mostly made of one piece of
+wood; they have two sails, and are moved with considerable velocity, by
+two or more paddles, assisted by an oar over the stern, which acts both
+as a scull and a rudder. There is a neat low seat, made of rattans, for
+each person in the canoe. As the day closed, the fishing canoes came in
+great numbers from sea, and all came on board the ships on their way;
+some of the fishermen pulled up our lines and baited the hooks. The
+whole shore abreast of the ships was covered with people, but the crowd
+was greatest on two pier-heads, forming the entrance to the harbour; and
+the variety of colour in their dresses made this a very lively
+exhibition. In the evening, Captain Maxwell and I rowed round to examine
+the anchorage, which we found tolerably clear of rocks. An officer was
+at the same time sent to examine the inner harbour, but he did not go
+far within the entrance, which was much too shallow for the frigate.
+
+On returning to the Lyra, I found that Mr. Clifford had been
+entertaining several respectable looking natives who had paid him a
+visit. As they readily comprehended his desire to know their words for
+various things, he has succeeded in collecting a considerable number,
+among which we are surprised to find their name for tobacco the same as
+ours; all the others are quite new to us.
+
+17th of September.--I carried the interpreter to the Alceste, after
+breakfast, where I found two chiefs, who had been on board some time,
+and had been taken care of by the officers, as Captain Maxwell was not
+prepared to receive them. A message was then sent to intimate that the
+Ta-yin (a Chinese title, used also by these people to persons of rank)
+was desirous of seeing the chiefs, and they were introduced into the
+after-cabin, where they were received in form. They objected to sitting
+down, making at the same time many low obeisances, which they did by
+stooping the body, and raising the hands, closed one over the other, to
+their face. Their scruples about being seated were at length overcome,
+and the first chief took his place on Captain Maxwell's left hand, the
+next on my left, and a third, who was evidently of a lower rank, sat
+beyond the second. The chiefs sat respectfully silent, and Captain
+Maxwell finding that he was expected to speak first, communicated to
+them that the ships under his command belonged to the King of England;
+that they had gone to China with an Embassador, carrying presents to the
+Emperor, at Pekin; that on their way back to Canton, they had
+experienced very bad weather, and had been obliged to put in here to
+refit, and to procure supplies.
+
+In reply, they expressed their willingness to assist us as much as lay
+in their power, but said that the harbour was too shallow for so large a
+ship, and recommended our proceeding to another harbour called
+Kinching, which they described as being secure and commodious, and only
+a few hours sail from this anchorage: they offered to furnish pilots and
+a boat to conduct us. Captain Maxwell, however, was unwilling to quit
+this anchorage unless certain of finding a better; he therefore proposed
+to send the Lyra to examine and report upon the harbour alluded to. The
+chiefs paused upon this, and said they could not take upon them to send
+pilots to the Brig without consulting the Great Man on shore. We were
+very curious to know who this great personage might be, but they evaded
+all our inquiries. Captain Maxwell asked where the king resided, and
+intimated his intention of waiting upon him; to this they strongly
+objected, declaring moreover, that it was impossible, as his majesty
+lived a thousand miles off. They did not seem aware of their
+inconsistency, when they undertook, immediately afterwards, to get an
+answer from court about pilots for the Lyra, in a few hours.
+
+We had been led to hope, from the frankness and kindness of these
+people, that no restraint would be imposed on us; and we were the more
+disappointed at observing, that whenever we spoke of landing, or asked
+any questions about the king, the chiefs became uneasy, and replied in a
+mysterious manner. We consoled ourselves, however, with the
+supposition, that upon further acquaintance their apprehension would
+wear off.
+
+Business being over, the chiefs were asked to walk round the cabin, an
+invitation which they accepted with manifest satisfaction. During the
+conference they had preserved a gravity suited to an important ceremony,
+and, though surrounded by new and curious objects, had never expressed
+the least curiosity. They were now no longer formal, and looked over the
+various articles with attention, taking particular notice of the globes,
+books, and mirrors. Their manners are remarkably gentle and unassuming.
+They are observant, and not without curiosity, but they require
+encouragement to induce them to come forward, being restrained, it would
+seem, by a genteel self-denial, from gratifying curiosity, lest it might
+be thought obtrusive. Their dress is singularly graceful; it consists of
+a loose flowing robe, with very wide sleeves, tied round the middle by a
+broad rich belt or girdle of wrought silk, a yellow cylindrical cap, and
+a neat straw sandal, over a short cotton boot or stocking. Two of the
+chiefs wore light yellow robes, the other dark blue streaked with white,
+all of cotton. The cap is flat at top, and appears to be formed by
+winding a broad band diagonally round a frame, in such a manner, that at
+each turn a small portion of the last fold shall be visible above in
+front, and below at the hinder part. The sandal is kept on by a stiff
+straw band passing over the instep, and joining the sandal near the
+heel; this band is tied to the forepart by a slight string, drawn
+between the great toe and the next, the stocking having a division like
+the finger of a glove for the great toe. They all carry fans, which they
+stick in their girdles when not in use, and each person has a short
+tobacco pipe in a small bag, hanging, along with the pouch, at the
+girdle. When they had satisfied themselves with looking over the cabin,
+they went away, with a promise of returning in the evening as soon as
+the answer from the Great Man should arrive.
+
+During all this morning, the whole space between the ships and the shore
+has been covered with canoes, each containing about ten persons. The
+scene was very lively, for few of the parties which came to visit the
+ships remained long on board, so that the canoes were continually
+passing backwards and forwards, and the number which came in this way
+must have been immense. They all seemed highly gratified at being
+allowed to go wherever they liked over the ships, nor was this liberty
+ever abused. The manners even of the lowest classes are genteel and
+becoming; their curiosity is great, but it never makes them rudely
+inquisitive: their language is musical, and in most cases easy of
+pronunciation. We heard a boat song to-day, the air of which was sweet
+and plaintive; we tried in vain to catch the words, and unfortunately,
+none of us had skill enough to note down the air. We observed several
+people in canoes, making drawings of the ships, but they hid their work
+when they were observed. In consequence of what had been said last night
+of our wanting repairs, a party of shipwrights and caulkers was sent on
+board the Alceste this morning, but their tools were of a Lilliputian
+order, and quite unsuited to the rough work required.
+
+The variety of colour and pattern in the dresses of the people to-day,
+is remarkable. Many wear printed cottons, others have cotton dresses
+with the pattern drawn on it by hand, instead of being stamped; but
+blue, in all its shades, is the prevalent colour, though there were many
+dresses resembling in every respect Highland tartans. The children, in
+general, wear more shewy dresses than the men, and of the dress of the
+women we can say nothing, as none have yet been seen. Every person has
+one of the girdles before described, which is always of a different
+colour from the dress, and is, in general, richly ornamented with
+flowers in embossed silk, and sometimes with gold and silver threads.
+This dress is naturally so graceful, that even the lowest boatmen have
+a picturesque appearance. Their hair, which is of a glossy black, is
+shaved off the crown, but the bare place is concealed by their mode of
+dressing the hair in a close knot over it. Their beards and mustachios
+are allowed to grow, and are kept neat and smooth. They are rather low
+in stature, but are well formed, and have an easy graceful carriage,
+which suits well with their flowing dress. Their colour is not good,
+some being very dark and others nearly white, but in most instances they
+are of a deep copper. This is fully compensated for by the sweetness and
+intelligence of their countenance. Their eyes, which are black, have a
+placid expression, and their teeth are regular and beautifully white. In
+deportment they are modest, polite, timid, and respectful, and in short,
+appear to be a most interesting and amiable people.
+
+Two of our friends who had visited us in the morning, and whose names we
+have discovered to be Ookooma and Jeema, came on board again about half
+past five, and staid an hour; they had not received any answer, they
+said, from the Great Man, and therefore could not send pilots to the
+"hoonee gua," or little ship. They were accompanied by a chief whom we
+took to be a Chinese from his looks, and his appearing to understand the
+interpreter better than the others. His formal and suspicious manner did
+not promise so well as that of the others. They came to say that a
+present of stock and vegetables had been sent to the ships. It was
+intimated to them that we intended to land the next day, and upon their
+objecting to this, we said that our wish was to wait upon the Great Man;
+to which they replied, that no person answering to this description
+resided here. We then said, that it was right we should return their
+visit. This argument they combated by saying that they were men of
+unequal rank to us, and therefore nowise entitled to such an honour; and
+that we, at the same time, would be degrading ourselves by such undue
+condescension. This having failed, Captain Maxwell told them of his
+illness; upon which, our new acquaintance, who seemed more earnestly
+bent against our landing than the others, offered to send a physician on
+board to see him. Captain Maxwell replied, that his own doctor had
+recommended a ride on shore; upon which they laughed, and turned the
+discourse to something else.
+
+In this way every proposal to land, or even allusion to the shore, was
+industriously put aside; and as it was our wish to gain their good will,
+the matter was dropped for the present. Before they went away, Captain
+Maxwell, pointing to their pipes, begged them to smoke if they wished
+it; they were grateful for this considerate attention, but would not on
+any account begin till we shewed them the example, by smoking with
+pipes which they prepared for us. They appeared more at their ease after
+this incident, and after sitting for some time, took leave for the night
+on the most friendly terms.
+
+18th of September.--Captain Maxwell sent to me to say that he meant to
+land on a point at some distance from the town, in order to observe the
+sun's meridian altitude with an artificial horizon. Just as I was
+setting out to accompany him, I was taken by surprise by two
+well-dressed natives, who were halfway down the cabin ladder before I
+knew of their approach. One came to superintend the measurement of the
+Lyra, and the other, who seemed of inferior rank, to explain why some
+poultry, only then sent, had not come on the preceding night, along with
+the other presents. I forgot to mention, that a bullock, two hogs, two
+goats, a dozen and a half of fowls, some candles, wood, and water, were
+sent to each of the ships. I asked them to sit down, and they were so
+well satisfied with the Constantia which I gave them, that they remained
+for some time; owing to which delay, I did not reach the shore till the
+time for observing the sun had gone by. I found Captain Maxwell with
+Ookooma and several of the chiefs, and an immense crowd of the natives,
+all of whom had left the town on seeing the boat put off, and had
+hastened to this spot, either out of curiosity or respect, or more
+probably to watch our proceedings. At our request, Ookooma, who appears
+to possess considerable authority, made the whole crowd, chiefs and all,
+sit down on the grass in a circle round us. Their astonishment at our
+operations was strongly expressed in their countenances, and, indeed,
+our apparatus and behaviour must have looked, to perfect strangers,
+somewhat magical.
+
+In the first place the quicksilver, which to them would appear like
+melted metal, was poured into a trough, in a fine stream from a wooden
+bottle; while it was running out the people repeated in an under tone
+"yi, yi, yi, yi!" but were silent when the glass roof was placed over
+the trough. The circular instrument and sextant, fixed on stands, next
+attracted their notice, and they looked on in profound silence while we
+were taking the sun's altitude. As we were too late for the desired
+observation, we amused the natives by letting them look at the two
+reflected images of the sun through the telescope of the instruments.
+Ookooma was the first who looked, and being quite unprepared for what he
+saw, started back in astonishment, as if he had unconsciously beheld
+something supernatural and forbidden. The other chiefs, in their turn,
+placed themselves at the instrument, as well as several old men who
+stepped forward from the crowd. Some testified their surprise by a
+sudden exclamation; others were perfectly calm, so that we could not
+guess what they thought; and some held up their hands, and looked as if
+the whole matter was totally beyond the reach of their comprehension.
+When this was over, and there was no longer any necessity for the crowd
+being seated, they closed round and watched us while we were putting the
+instruments up. Some of the boys held out their hands for quicksilver,
+with which they ran off, quite happy.
+
+During this time we were about fifty yards from the foot of a cliff, on
+the brow of which was posted a group of women with baskets on their
+heads; we were unfortunately not near enough to discern their features,
+nor to make out their dress distinctly; it appeared, however, to be like
+that of the men, though somewhat shorter, and without any girdle round
+the waist.
+
+The rock here rises in perpendicular rugged cliffs of coral, with a
+number of rude square excavations on its face, which, at first sight,
+appear to have been worn by the elements, but on examination shew
+evident traces of art. Most of these caves are closed up by a wall of
+loose stones, but in one, of which the mouth was open, several human
+bones were found lying amongst the sand. On removing a stone from a
+closed cave, a vase was observed in the inside, of an elegant shape; the
+people signified to us that these were the remains of the dead, but we
+did not make out distinctly whether the bones or the ashes only were
+thus preserved. They made no objections to our examining these caves,
+though they certainly were not pleased with it. No notice was taken of
+what Captain Maxwell and I did; but Mr. Clifford, who had remained below
+collecting words from some intelligent natives, was strongly recommended
+by Ookooma to go back to the boat; he walked up, however, without
+opposition, to the cave which we had been examining, and they ceased to
+importune him. A number of little boys who had observed us occasionally
+pulling flowers and plants, ran about collecting for us, and after
+presenting what they had gathered, with much politeness, ran away
+laughing with an arch expression of ridicule at our curiosity.
+
+On our way back, instead of going directly off to the ships, we coasted
+along shore in our boats, which gave us a new view of a stone bridge, of
+one arch, connecting two parts of the town. On the south side of the
+bridge we passed a space of considerable extent, probably set apart as a
+burying ground. We saw here a number of large horse-shoe tombs like
+those used in China, whitewashed, and apparently kept in good repair.
+Most of the tombs, however, are in the form of small square houses, with
+low pyramidal roofs; some of these were tiled, others thatched. It is
+evident that, in what relates to the dead, they follow, in some
+respects, the Chinese customs.
+
+[Illustration: NAPAKIANG.]
+
+The whole coast at this place is of coral cliffs, the base of which
+appears to have been scooped out by the action of the sea. As this
+excavation is at some places higher than the waves of the sea can be
+supposed to have ever reached, there is difficulty in assigning the sea
+as the cause; yet the roof of the excavation is horizontal for a great
+extent, and its appearance, in every other respect, suggests that it has
+been formed by the dashing of the waves. There is, moreover, some
+difficulty in accounting for coral cliffs being so much above the level
+of the sea, in which, according to every supposition, they must have
+been formed.
+
+The scenery here, as in most countries in these climates, does not admit
+of a satisfactory description. It may be said, however, that it is more
+pleasing to the eye than that of islands near the equator, where the
+vegetation is so profusely luxuriant, as to overload the picture with
+foliage to the exclusion of every thing else. Here there is much
+variety; the numerous groves of pine-trees give some parts of it an
+English air, but the style of landscape is what is called tropical. The
+general character of the scenery at this spot is faithfully preserved in
+the drawing of Napakiang.
+
+19th of September.--No answer having yet come from the Great Man, we
+begin to apprehend that they are going to treat us in Chinese style, and
+exclude us from their country altogether. We have tried in vain to
+discover whether the King is at this place, or a hundred, or as some
+maintain, a thousand miles off; in the mean time, as we know the island
+to be not more than sixty miles long, it is fair to suppose that they
+wish to deceive us.
+
+We conjecture that a large building on a rising ground, three or four
+miles from us in an eastern direction, with two flag-staffs near it, is
+the palace mentioned in the account quoted by Pere Gaubil, Lettres
+Edifiantes et Curieuses, Tom. XXIII. The natives always refuse to give
+any information when asked about this building.
+
+Whenever the natives come on board, if at all well dressed, they are
+asked into the cabin, where we treat them with cherry brandy and
+Constantia. In the course of conversation they contribute a number of
+new words, and, in general, when they see what the object is, are very
+willing to lend their assistance, and take much pains to teach us the
+true pronunciation of their words. One man, however, who was not so
+quick as they generally are, was in the cabin to-day for some time; Mr.
+Clifford was getting from him the Loo-choo words for sour, sweet, salt,
+&c.; and in order to make him comprehend the questions, made him taste
+different things that were sour, sweet, and so on: the poor fellow stood
+this very well, till some quassia was given to him to get the word
+"bitter;" he had no sooner tasted it, than he ran off quite astonished
+at the manner in which he had been entertained.
+
+It blew hard this morning, so that there was little intercourse with the
+shore; but towards sunset it moderated, and Ookooma, Jeema, and four
+other Chiefs, came on board, bringing with them a present of a bullock,
+two hogs, goats, and vegetables. The Chief whose name is Shayoon is the
+most clever of them all; he is next in rank to Ookooma, but he generally
+takes the lead in discussion; he has a quick intelligent look, with more
+determination in his manner than any of the others. They were very
+particular on all these state occasions to observe the order of
+precedence, and no one sat down till his superior was seated. When any
+subject was discussed, one at a time rose to speak, but not in order of
+rank, and they never attempted to interrupt one another.
+
+The weather at this moment looked so stormy, that I went on board the
+Lyra to prepare for a gale; by which I lost a very interesting
+conference with the chiefs. I learnt from Captain Maxwell afterwards,
+that he had remonstrated with them on their inconsistency and the
+pretended difficulty of getting answers from court; he gave them to
+understand, that he did not conceive it was treating the King of England
+with due respect to deny his officers permission to walk on shore.
+Again, that they had promised to send pilots, but that none had come;
+and that many other promises had not been performed. He desired the
+interpreter to say, that he was not pleased with their telling him so
+many different stories, all of which could not be true; first they said
+that the bullocks, hogs, &c. were gifts from themselves; then, that they
+were sent by the Great Man; then, that there was no Great Man here: in
+fine, he urged them strongly to tell him the truth on all points. They
+made the interpreter repeat six times over what Captain Maxwell had
+desired him to say; they then consulted amongst themselves a long time,
+and at last assured Captain Maxwell, that a reply to the communications
+made by them to government would reach this place next day.
+
+As the stock and vegetables received by the ships had, by this time,
+amounted to a considerable quantity, a bag of dollars was offered to
+them, and they were urged to take payment for what had been sent on
+board; this offer, which had been made more than once before, was still
+declined; upon which they were informed, that we considered it improper,
+as servants of government, to receive presents to such an extent from
+individuals. Upon this they gave their assurance, that the stock had
+been sent on board by order of the Loo-choo government, on their being
+informed that the King of another country's ships had arrived. No
+payment they said could therefore be taken. With this Captain Maxwell
+was satisfied. Their wish seems to be, to prevent our opening any
+communication with their government, and they appear so decided upon
+these matters, that they will probably succeed, notwithstanding all our
+efforts.
+
+The chiefs have dresses adapted to the state of the weather; yesterday
+being cold and threatening, they all came on board with a sort of cloak
+or great coat made of a thick blue stuff like woollen cloth, buttoned in
+front. It is tighter than the ordinary dress, and is worn over it. It is
+only in fine weather, and on state occasions, that they wear the band
+turban, called by them "hatchee matchee;" at all other times they go
+uncovered, having their hair dressed like the rest of the people.
+
+20th of September.--The mercury in the barometer fell last night from
+29. 72, to 29. 51, and the sky assumed a yellow appearance. We expected
+a heavy gale, more particularly as it was so near the equinox, but we
+were so sheltered by the land, that though it appeared to blow hard at
+sea, we felt nothing of it where we lay.
+
+Three or four canoes came round the south-west point of land this
+forenoon; the people in them were supposed to have come from the other
+side of the island, for they did not appear to have seen the ships
+before. One of these people was much delighted with a looking-glass
+which was shewn to him; he took it in his hands, and calling his
+companions about him, shewed them in turn its effect. Having done so
+several times, he held it opposite to his own face for four or five
+minutes without altering his countenance in the least; at last he
+smiled, and immediately and involuntarily nodded assent to the image in
+the glass, which had so exactly expressed what he felt himself; he
+seemed, however, aware, that it was a reflection of his own countenance,
+as he pointed to himself, yet he could not restrain his curiosity from
+looking behind, but instantly turned it round again. While the glass was
+in his hands, he made us several long speeches, in which he frequently
+repeated the word "Kagung," the Loo-choo name for mirror; but, from his
+behaviour, it is probable he knew it only by name. One of this party
+sold his "Jeewa" or head ornaments for a wine glass. Sometime
+afterwards, the others saw a bottle, which they wished to purchase in
+the same way; it was, however, given to them as a present, and they went
+away very well satisfied. These canoes were of pine, from twelve to
+twenty feet long, and from two to four wide; their anchor is made of
+wood loaded with stones.
+
+As no answer came this morning from the Great Man, Captain Maxwell took
+the ships into a more secure anchorage at the north-east corner of the
+bay; our first anchorage being too close to a reef, and moreover open to
+the south-west winds. The place we had now shifted to, though apparently
+exposed, is, in fact, sheltered by a chain of reefs under water outside
+of us to the westward. By this change, we have been brought close to the
+bridge spoken of before, and are now abreast the east end of the town:
+the Lyra not being more than a quarter of a mile from the shore. A
+strict watch is kept on shore, so that no boat leaves the ships without
+being observed. Orders have been given for the whole anchorage to be
+carefully sounded; in doing this, the boats often approach the shore,
+and whenever this happens, a crowd of the natives, headed by one or
+other of the chiefs, repair to the spot, and wave them to keep farther
+off.
+
+21st of September.--There appears to be some embargo upon the canoes,
+for there has not been one near us this morning, and only one on board
+the Alceste. It was found necessary to-day to move the frigate still
+farther in, and four or five hawsers were laid out for the purpose of
+warping her a-head. While this was going on, the beach, and all the
+heights near us, were crowded with people, wondering, no doubt, how the
+ship was made to move without sails, for the hawsers were low down, and
+might have escaped their observation. In the canoe which visited the
+Alceste, there came two men, who had not been seen before; they remained
+but a short time, which was spent in examining the hawsers and the mode
+of warping the ship. As soon as they had made themselves master of this
+subject, they went on shore, as if to make a report. During their visit
+they said little, being intent upon what was going on; but the
+interpreter learnt from one of them, that a Great Man had actually come,
+or was expected in the town to-day. A report prevails, that the King of
+the island has lately been on board in disguise. We cannot trace the
+report to any good foundation, and it is probably false. At the same
+time, if his Majesty has any curiosity, it is not unlikely that he may
+have come near enough to see such a strange sight as we must be.
+
+It is possible that our moving up so close to the town has alarmed the
+people, and may have prevented their visiting us as heretofore; at all
+events, it is very unfair in our friends, the Chiefs, neither to let the
+people come on board, nor to allow us to go on shore to look at them.
+
+Our occupation in the mean time is to observe the natives through the
+telescope placed on a table on the Lyra's poop. The stone bridge appears
+to be a great thoroughfare, several roads from the country leading to
+it; it seems also to be the only entrance to the town on this side.
+Nobody crosses it without stopping to look at us, and a crowd of idle
+people have taken post on and about it. We see a number of women coming
+from the country with baskets on their heads. Their outer dress differs
+from that of the men, it is open in front, and they have no girdle; they
+have an under dress, or sack, which is also loose, but not open; in some
+we can see that this comes nearly to the feet, in others just to the
+knee, and we imagine that those who work in the fields have the short
+dress: most of them allow their upper garment to flow out with the wind
+behind them. We observe a woman carrying a child across the hip as in
+India, with its hands on its mother's shoulder, while her arm is round
+the child's waist. One young lady has been seen for some time amusing
+herself by making a dog bark at the ships. We see women beating rice in
+wooden mortars. On the banks of the stream which the bridge crosses,
+there are a number of people washing clothes, which they perform in the
+Indian way, by dipping the clothes in water and beating them on stones.
+From one end of the beach to the other there is a range of people
+watching us, they are formed here and there into groups; one of which,
+on a craggy knoll abreast of the ships, has struck us as being
+particularly interesting. A fine majestic looking man, whose full beard
+and flowing garments remind us of a figure in the Cartoons of Raphael,
+is standing in the middle of a circle of old men, who are lying on the
+grass, and appear to be listening to him.
+
+22nd of September.--This morning brings us no news, no permission to
+land! A number of flags and streamers are displayed on the masts of the
+vessels in the inner harbour, and there seems to be something going on
+on shore; no boats have come to us, and we have no occupation but
+looking through the glass, which, however, affords a good deal of
+entertainment, particularly as the people whom we see with it act in the
+usual way, being unconscious of our scrutiny.
+
+In the afternoon a number of boats left the shore and proceeded to the
+Alceste in procession. In the foremost boat there seemed to be a person
+of consequence, whom we immediately conjectured to be the Great Man
+alluded to by the people yesterday. He got on board the Alceste before
+us, and the natives also had left their canoes, so that we found the
+ship's decks crowded with people. The Chief, whom we found seated in the
+cabin, was clothed in purple silk, with a light purple hatchee matchee.
+An official communication of our history was now repeated at the old
+man's request. He listened with great attention till Captain Maxwell
+concluded his statement, by informing him that the ship was leaky and
+required frequent pumping. He then begged permission to see this
+operation, if it would not give too much trouble. As this was exactly
+what we wished, the chain pumps were ordered to be got ready, and the
+conference went on, consisting principally of compliments. Observing
+that we took notice of his being a little deaf, he seemed anxious to
+explain that this was the effect of age. He made us feel his pulse, and
+look at the withered state of his hand, then taking ours and feeling the
+pulse, held them up along with his own, and laughed with great good
+humour at the contrast which age had produced. He was about sixty years
+old, and his beard of thin hair was as white as snow: he had a
+cheerfulness of expression, and a liveliness of manner, which are
+remarkable for a man of his years. His manners were graceful and
+elegant, and from the first moment he seemed quite at his ease. Every
+thing about him, in short, indicated good-breeding, and a familiarity
+with good society; and we could not help remarking his decided
+superiority in appearance over the other chiefs.
+
+When the pumps were ready, he was escorted to the main deck, where he
+sat for some time in great admiration of the machinery; and seeing the
+labour required to work it, he seemed really affected at our situation,
+which he naturally thought must be very bad, from the immense quantity
+of water thrown out by the pumps. The ship being upright, the water did
+not run off freely from the deck, and in a short time it flowed round
+the chair in which the old man was seated. Three or four of the sailors
+seeing him somewhat uneasy at this inundation, took him up chair and
+all, and placed him on a dry spot. The old gentleman was surprised, not
+displeased, and very graciously replied to the low bows which the
+sailors made him. On returning to the cabin, they were all entertained
+as usual with sweet wine, cherry brandy, and pipes. The old man filled
+pipes for us, and as soon as this part of the ceremonial had been gone
+through, a formal request was made for permission to land the Alceste's
+casks and stores, in order to stop the leak and make other repairs. This
+produced a long discussion amongst the chiefs, in which the old man
+joined but little; he spoke, however, now and then, and whatever he
+said, appeared to be to the purpose. Whenever the chiefs spoke, they
+rose and addressed themselves to him in a most respectful manner. At
+length, having agreed about an answer, they communicated to Captain
+Maxwell that there was no good place here for the purposes he wanted,
+and that as our present anchorage was unsafe, they recommended our going
+round to the harbour alluded to on a former occasion. At this place,
+which they call Winching or Oonching, he said we might put on shore
+whatever we chose. On our asking if in Winching the water was deep
+enough to admit a large ship, a long discussion arose, during which they
+appeared to be considering the merits of the harbour. They seemed
+apprehensive of giving it too high a character, and that on our reaching
+it we should be disappointed. The old man at length suggested sending
+the "little ship" to see whether it would answer. To this Captain
+Maxwell agreed, only requesting that a person might accompany us, in
+order to save time in the search. Simple as this appears, they took a
+long time to consider it, and ended by saying that no reply could be
+given till the next day.
+
+While the subject of this harbour was under discussion, the old man drew
+on a sheet of paper, a chart of the island, and pointed out the place
+where the harbour lay. It proved afterwards, when we had surveyed the
+island, that this sketch possessed considerable accuracy, as the
+situation of the harbour of which they spoke corresponds exactly with
+that of Port Melville, discovered in the Lyra. It is much to be
+regretted that this curious sketch is lost.
+
+The Chief now walked about the cabin, examined the globes, books, and
+pictures, with great attention. The wainscot struck him particularly, as
+well as the machinery and finish of the windows and sliding shutters.
+Captain Maxwell tried to make him comprehend our track on the globe. He
+had felt it becoming to preserve some state while business was going on,
+but he now became quite chatty and familiar. He went all over the ship,
+accompanied by the other chiefs and his own personal suite, consisting
+of a pipe bearer, a man who carried his large camp chair, another with a
+cover of red cloth for the chair, and a man who carried a round Japan
+box for the hatchee-matchee. Two others took it in turn to fan him, and
+to hold his arm by the elbow and wrist whenever he walked about;
+probably as a piece of state, for the ship had very little motion: these
+fanners were very expert at their business, for not content with cooling
+his face and neck, they lifted up his large sleeves and fanned his arms.
+On returning to the cabin, he saw Mr. Clifford using gloves, and begged
+leave to try them on; with the right one he succeeded very well, but the
+nails of his left hand being about an inch long, he found it not so easy
+a matter: he seemed to think them the oddest things he had met with, and
+laughing much, held them up repeatedly to the other chiefs.
+
+The old man brought a present for Captain Maxwell, and sent another to
+the Lyra, consisting of a hog, a kid, two bags of potatoes, a basket of
+charcoal, thirty bundles of eggs (five in each), a bundle of vermicelli,
+and a jar of an ardent spirit called samchew. All the chiefs, who were
+in their best attire, were severally accompanied by a man carrying a box
+for the hatchee-matchee; their dresses were of various colours, and
+their sandals and stockings all alike. On rising to go away, the old man
+bowed to me, and said that he meant to visit my ship; but this being
+evidently complimentary, I begged him not to take so much trouble: he,
+in return, expressed himself obliged to me for being satisfied with the
+politeness intended. The Embassador's barge was manned to take him on
+shore, but as soon as he saw what was intended, he drew back, and
+declared that he could not land in any boat but his own. As it was
+supposed that his modesty prevented his accepting this offer, he was
+urged to overcome his scruples, and land in the manner proposed; he
+still, however, declined the honour, but at last went down the ladder,
+and having stepped into the barge, made a bow to Captain Maxwell, as if
+in acknowledgment of the attention, but immediately afterwards went into
+his own boat and pushed off, under a salute of three guns from each
+ship.
+
+Our intention of returning this visit the next day was not mentioned
+during the discussions in the cabin, from the certainty of its being
+combated, and perhaps overruled: but when the last of the chiefs was
+getting into the boat, the interpreter was desired to tell him, in a
+careless way, as a matter of course, that next morning this visit would
+be returned on shore. As had been foreseen, this did not receive their
+approbation; the interpreter went into the boat, where every persuasion
+was used to convince him of the impropriety of our intention: they could
+not succeed, however, in making him yield this point, and at length went
+away. This interpreter is called "John" by all parties, and though
+merely an under servant of the factory at Canton, he is a very shrewd
+fellow. His English is certainly not the best, and probably the Chinese
+he speaks is the base provincial language of Canton; so that
+misunderstandings are no doubt often caused by his erroneous
+interpretation.
+
+John's report after the boat had put off, and from which we gather that
+we shall be expected, was as follows: "They ax me, 'what for my Ta-yin
+come sho?' I say, 'to make chin-chin[7] they Ta-yin;' they tell me, 'You
+Ta-yin too much great mandarine, no can come sho;' I say, 'What for my
+Ta-yin no come sho? He great man; he[8] Ta-wang-tee too much great man;
+he let you Ta-yin come board ship, and you no let him come sho,
+chin-chin you Ta-yin; what for this?' Then they speak long time
+together; by and by ax me, 'how many people bring sho you Ta-yin?' So I
+shake my head, I no like give answer long time, (they always take long
+time answer me). When they ax me again, I say, 'Ta-yin bring five people
+mo besides me.' They say, 'too much men come;' I say, 'No, no too much.'
+They ax, 'What time come?' I give no answer."
+
+23d September.--As we had not contemplated such adventures as these, we
+had made no preparations for them; and now that it was necessary to make
+some return to the chief whom we were going to visit, we found great
+difficulty in preparing a suitable present. Captain Maxwell took with
+him several dozens of wine, some books, glasses, various trinkets, and a
+large piece of blue broad cloth. I took half the quantity of Captain
+Maxwell's other presents, and a table cloth in place of the broad cloth.
+Smaller presents were also made up for each of the chiefs. At one
+o'clock we set out in the barge, with a large union jack flying, and as
+it blew fresh, we soon reached the harbour. As we rowed past the shore,
+the people were seen running along all the roads leading to the town, so
+that by the time we reached the harbour, the crowd on both sides was
+immense: the trees, walls, and house tops, and in short every spot from
+which we could be seen, was literally covered with people, forming a
+sight as striking and animated as can well be conceived. As we entered
+the harbour several of the chiefs were observed to come down to a point,
+and wave for us to go round the end of a pier or mole, forming the inner
+harbour, where there was a good landing-place.
+
+The chiefs helped us out, and then led us along, Ookooma taking Captain
+Maxwell's hand, Shayoon mine, and Jeema Mr. Clifford's; the others,
+according to their rank, conducted Mr. M'Leod of the Alceste, Mr.
+Maxwell, and another midshipman, Mr. Browne. They held our hands nearly
+as high as the shoulder, while a lane was formed for us through the
+crowd of people, who were perfectly silent. The children were placed in
+front, and the next rank sat down, so that those behind could see us in
+passing. At about a hundred and fifty yards from the landing-place, we
+came to the gate of a temple, where we were met by the Chief, who stood
+just on the outside of the threshold, on a small raised pavement: he
+took Ookooma's place, and conducted Captain Maxwell up a few steps into
+the temple, which was partly open on two sides, with deep verandahs,
+which made the interior shady and cool. A large table, finely japanned,
+was spread, and two ornamented chairs were placed for us. The Chief
+seated himself at one end of the table, and placed Captain Maxwell on
+his left.
+
+He expressed himself much gratified and honoured by the visit, asked our
+ages, and if we were married. He was greatly pleased with Captain
+Maxwell's account of his family, which nearly corresponded with his own.
+He guessed Mr. Maxwell's age to be twenty-seven, and was with difficulty
+persuaded to believe that a person six feet high could be only sixteen.
+The same mistake was made by all the natives, who invariably judged of
+the age of our young men by their height alone. An entertainment was now
+served, beginning with a light kind of wine, called sackee, which was
+handed round in very diminutive cups, filled by Issacha, from a small
+high pot in which the sackee was kept hot. They insisted on our emptying
+the cup every time, shewing us a fair example themselves. During the
+whole feast the sackee never left the table, being considered apropos to
+all the strange dishes which we partook of. The first of these consisted
+of hard boiled eggs, cut into slices, the outside of the white being
+coloured red. A pair of chopsticks[9] was now given to each person, and
+these were not changed during the feast. Next came fish fried in batter,
+which we found an excellent dish; then sliced smoked pork, next pig's
+liver sliced. After this, tea was handed round in cups of a moderate
+size; the tea was quite new, resembling, as was observed, an infusion of
+hay. Pipes and tobacco served to fill up the short intervals between the
+courses. A man attended behind each of our chairs, whose sole business
+it was to fill and light the pipes. The next dish was the strangest of
+any, and disgusted most of the party; it consisted of a mass of coarse,
+soft, black sugar, wrapped up in unbaked dough, powdered over with rice
+flour, dyed yellow. After this we had dishes of round cakes, like
+gingerbread nuts; then cakes made in the form of wreaths, and in a
+variety of other shapes. There was something like cheese given us after
+the cakes, but we cannot form a probable conjecture of what it was made.
+Most of the dishes were so good that we soon made a hearty dinner, but
+the attendants still brought in more, till the Chief seeing that we did
+not eat, recommended the sackee to us. The old gentleman's eyes at
+length began to glisten, and observing that we felt it hot, he requested
+us to uncover, shewing the example himself. He seized the doctor's
+cocked hat and put it on, while the doctor did the same with his
+hatchee-matchee. The oddity of the Chief's appearance produced by this
+change overcame the gravity of the attendants, and the mirth became
+general; nor was the joke relished by any body more than the Chief's two
+sons, who stood by his chair during all the entertainment: they were
+pretty little boys, with gaudy dresses, and their hair dressed in high
+shewy top-knots.
+
+[Illustration: LOO-CHOO CHIEF and his TWO SONS.]
+
+During the early part of the feast, our presents were brought in on
+trays, and laid at the feet of the Chief: the old man rose and saw them
+arranged, he then made a graceful bow, and acknowledged his
+satisfaction, observing that we had sent him too much, and had done him
+more honour than he was entitled to, and that he could not think of
+accepting the whole. This we considered matter of form, and in reply
+lamented our inability to make suitable presents; upon which he sat
+down and said no more. The other chiefs ran about shewing the list of
+their presents to their friends among the crowd.
+
+The room in which this entertainment was given was open at first on two
+sides only, but afterwards the partitions on the other two sides were
+taken down, being contrived to slide in grooves; thus the rooms are
+enlarged or diminished at pleasure. When the partition behind us was
+removed, several strange looking figures made their appearance, who we
+found were Bodezes or priests. Their heads and faces were shaved, their
+feet bare, and their dress different from that worn by the rest of the
+people, being somewhat shorter, and much less free and flowing, without
+any belt round the waist, the robe being merely tightened a little by a
+drawing string tied at the side; over the shoulders hangs an embroidered
+band or belt, like that used by drummers: the colour of their dress is
+not uniform, some wearing black, others yellow, and some deep purple.
+They have a timorous, patient, subdued sort of look, with a languid
+smile, and ghastly expression of countenance. They are low in stature,
+and generally look unhealthy; they all stoop more or less, and their
+manners are without grace, so that a more contemptible class of people
+cannot easily be imagined. Along with the Bodezes were several boys,
+whom we took to be their children from the resemblance they bore to
+them; but this mistake must have arisen from these boys being dressed
+like the priests, for the Bodezes are strictly confined to a life of
+celibacy. From the circumstance of our being in a temple, as well as
+from our general habits of respect to persons filling sacred stations,
+we felt at first disposed to treat these Bodezes with attention, but
+this was looked upon as ridiculous by the chiefs, who seeing us bowing
+to them, begged we would take no further notice of them. Instead of
+being the class most respected, they are considered the lowest, and if
+not held in contempt, are at least neglected by all other ranks.
+
+During all the time we were at table, the crowd pressed round the
+verandahs, and perched themselves upon the walls and house-tops in the
+vicinity, or wherever they could get a peep at us. The satisfaction here
+was mutual, as we were anxious to make the most of the opportunity, not
+knowing if we should ever be allowed to land again. After sitting two
+hours we rose, and were escorted to the boats in the same order as when
+we landed. An attempt had been made during the feast, when the whole
+party were in good humour, to prevail upon the old gentleman to sanction
+our taking a walk into the town; but the bare mention of such a thing
+sobered the whole party in an instant, and the subject was accordingly
+dropped. The sailors, who had been kept in the boats for fear of their
+doing mischief, had not been neglected by the Chief, who had sent them
+part of the feast, nor did it seem that they had any objection to the
+sackee. We looked anxiously on the right and left as we passed through
+the crowd, in hopes of seeing some of the women, but in this expectation
+we were disappointed. At a considerable distance indeed, on the opposite
+side of the harbour, we saw a group of women, several of whom came down
+to the causeway to obtain a better view of the boats as they passed. Six
+or eight young girls ran to the pier head, round some rocks near the
+end; they reached this spot just as we rowed past, but looked quite
+frightened at finding themselves so near us, and immediately drew back
+out of our sight. We fancied that we could discover a good deal of
+beauty in some of their faces, and that their figures were handsome; but
+as we had not seen a fair lady's face for nearly half a year before, our
+judgment in this case is not perhaps to be depended on. Ookooma and his
+associates put off to accompany us in one of their own boats, but as it
+blew hard, they came no farther than the pier head: Jeeroo, however, was
+sent along with us, to see that there were no stray sheep.
+
+What is to follow is uncertain, but it is clear that we have made little
+progress of late, while fresh obstacles have been hourly rising against
+our landing; in the meantime, the Loo-chooans shew no little sagacity
+and kindness of disposition in supplying us liberally with all kinds of
+stock.
+
+24th of September.--Last night and to-day it has blown a hard gale of
+wind, beginning at north north-east, and shifting to north-west, but the
+reefs and the land break its force, and enable us to ride in perfect
+security: in all probability it blew severely in the open sea. The
+barometer fell from 29.62, to 29.50, yesterday; in the evening it had
+reached 29.48, and this morning stood at 29.40. About four in the
+morning it began to rise rapidly, and the severity of the gale did not
+come on till it had risen a good deal. The thermometer both in the day
+and night stands at 82º, with very little variation, but the sky being
+constantly clouded, no observations could be made.
+
+25th of September.--Jeeroo came on board this morning with a present of
+vegetables and fruit, and afterwards went on board the Alceste to join
+Ookooma and Jeema. They had preceded him with a present from the Chief,
+by whose desire they made a number of kind inquiries, and repeatedly
+expressed, in his name, surprise and satisfaction at our having been
+able to ride out the gale. They also apologized for not visiting us
+yesterday, which the gale had rendered impossible. It was represented in
+the conference to-day, that our limbs were getting quite stiff for want
+of exercise, and that it became absolutely necessary for us to land, on
+account of our health: they debated amongst themselves for some time,
+and then said that a final answer would be given to-morrow. They have
+quite forgotten their promise to send a pilot for the harbour to the
+northward: they wish also that we should forget it, since they change
+the subject whenever it is spoken of, and affect total ignorance of our
+meaning. The government probably think it best to keep us where we are,
+and therefore discourage our investigating the island any further.
+
+Jeeroo, who begins to get quite familiar with us all, is a laughing
+good-humoured man, about thirty: he shakes every one cordially by the
+hand when he comes on board, and engages in all our amusements with
+great cheerfulness. He is very useful to us, because the anxiety he has
+to learn English makes him communicate freely the knowledge of his own
+language: thus there is little difficulty in fixing him over a glass of
+Constantia, upon which occasions he contributes largely to Mr.
+Clifford's vocabulary. Some of our words the Loo-chooans cannot
+pronounce; the letter _l_ preceded by _c_ appears the most difficult;
+they call Clifford "Criffar," and even this requires many efforts: not
+one of the natives has yet been able to make any thing of child; they
+call it shoidah, choiah, and chyad.
+
+26th of September.--No boats have been near us to-day, and we might
+readily land if we chose it; but Captain Maxwell is resolved not to do
+so till he gets the consent of the natives.
+
+27th of September.--As we were still prevented from going on shore, we
+amused ourselves by examining a reef which forms the north side of the
+anchorage. We found a field of coral about half a mile square, dry at
+low water, with the surf breaking very high on the outer edge, which
+lies exposed to the waves from the north. The surface of the rock is
+every where worn into small holes, which being left full of water as the
+tide goes out, are occupied by a number of beautiful blue fish. The
+coral is exceedingly hard, and though at many places it sticks up in
+sharp points, it requires a hammer of considerable weight to break it,
+and emits sparks like flint when struck; in a short time it entirely
+defaces the hammer. This extent of level space has suggested the idea of
+measuring a base on it in order to survey the anchorage, since there
+appears so little chance of our being allowed to land for this purpose
+on the beach.
+
+While we were deliberating on this matter, we had a striking proof of
+the inconvenience to which we were likely to be exposed during this
+survey, by the tide rising and fairly washing us off. Notwithstanding
+this, we determined to commence next morning, and returned to make
+preparations, in high spirits at the prospect of an occupation, if not
+on terra firma, at least out of the ship, within whose sides we had been
+confined so long. On returning, we found that Captain Maxwell had
+arranged a party to visit the small island and reef which we were so
+close to on the 14th instant; the survey was therefore postponed.
+
+Jeeroo sent us off some fresh fish to-day; some were red, and one or two
+blue: he came himself afterwards, and was happy to find us much
+gratified by his present. A formal message was sent to-day to the chiefs
+in attendance, stating that both ships were in want of fresh water, and
+that the boats must go on shore with casks to bring some off. In a short
+time after this message had been delivered, a number of canoes came
+alongside with large tubs of water; a strong proof of their alertness in
+getting rid of all our excuses for landing, and at the same time, it
+must be owned, of their readiness to supply our wants. An elderly
+gentleman, not a chief, visited us to-day, accompanied by his secretary.
+His appearance and manners being greatly in his favour, we paid him all
+the attention in our power. His wish was to be permitted to go all over
+the ship at his leisure; and in this way he examined every thing on
+board with far more attention than any body had done before him. His
+secretary, who was equally inquisitive, accompanied him in order to take
+notes. He employed himself for about six hours in examining the upper
+deck, and never quitted any thing till he understood its use. While he
+was thus occupied, he was attended by the sailors, who were pleased with
+his reverend appearance, and very readily assisted the old man in his
+enquiries.
+
+It was interesting to observe, indeed, how early the gentle and engaging
+manners of all classes here won upon the sailors, no less than upon the
+officers. The natives from the first were treated with entire
+confidence; no watch was ever kept over them, nor were they excluded
+from any part of the ships; and not only was nothing stolen, but when
+any thing was lost, nobody even suspected for an instant, that it had
+been taken by them.
+
+The old man next came down to the cabin, where he remained a long time
+examining the books and furniture, and occasionally engaging in
+conversation with Mr. Clifford, for whose Vocabulary he supplied many
+new words, and corrected others which had been written down erroneously.
+He would not accept any thing valuable, but was grateful for samples of
+rope, canvas, and cloth. This old gentleman renewed his examination of
+the brig next day; nor was it till the third day that he completed his
+survey.
+
+28th of September.--At sunrise we set out for Reef Island, which lies
+about six miles from the anchorage: we reached it in about an hour, but
+as it was low water, the coral was left almost bare for a considerable
+way out, and our large boat could not get near the beach. In this
+dilemma we took possession of a canoe which was at anchor, and in
+several trips all the party landed. Near a hut we saw about a dozen
+people who stood looking at us till we landed, and then ran away,
+leaving their tobacco-pipes, pouches, and various other things on the
+ground about the hut, in which we found a pot of boiled sweet potatoes
+and several jars of water. Having, in vain, tried to allay the
+apprehensions of the natives by waving to them, to induce them to
+approach us, we sat down to breakfast; which we had hardly done, when
+two of them, an old man and a boy, came to the door of our tent and
+prostrated themselves before us, apparently in great alarm, for they
+answered incoherently, "ooa" (yes) to every question we asked them. At
+last we raised the old man on his knees, but he would not quit this
+posture till we gave him a glass of rum, which re-assured him a little,
+and shortly afterwards he consented to stand on his legs. Having thus
+gradually gained confidence, he made signs that we had taken his canoe:
+upon which an order was given to the coxswain to restore it. He guessed
+immediately what was said, and in the joy of his heart was proceeding to
+prostrate himself again, but was stopped by our holding out buttons and
+some pieces of meat and bread to him, which he received in both hands,
+and touching his head each time with the presents, made three low
+obeisances and retired.
+
+On rising from breakfast we found, near the tent, about a dozen natives,
+who, in most respects, resembled our friends at Napakiang, but were not
+so neatly dressed; and their hair, instead of being formed into a knot,
+was allowed to fly loose. During the morning the party amused themselves
+in various ways. Some took their guns and went in search of curlews and
+sea-snipes: others set out to explore the reefs; and two or three
+remained near the tent, for the purpose of making observations on the
+sun at noon; but as it became cloudy about this time, the latter party
+failed in their object. The rest were more successful; the sportsmen
+having shot some game for dinner; and the other party having found all
+things favourable for inspecting the reef.
+
+The examination of a coral reef during the different stages of one
+tide, is particularly interesting. When the tide has left it for some
+time it becomes dry, and appears to be a compact rock, exceedingly hard
+and ragged; but as the tide rises, and the waves begin to wash over it,
+the coral worms protrude themselves from holes which were before
+invisible. These animals are of a great variety of shapes and sizes, and
+in such prodigious numbers, that, in a short time, the whole surface of
+the rock appears to be alive and in motion. The most common worm is in
+the form of a star, with arms from four to six inches long, which are
+moved about with a rapid motion in all directions, probably to catch
+food. Others are so sluggish, that they may be mistaken for pieces of
+the rock, and are generally of a dark colour, and from four to five
+inches long, and two or three round. When the coral is broken, about
+high water mark, it is a solid hard stone, but if any part of it be
+detached at a spot which the tide reaches every day, it is found to be
+full of worms of different lengths and colours, some being as fine as a
+thread and several feet long, of a bright yellow, and sometimes of a
+blue colour: others resemble snails, and some are not unlike lobsters in
+shape, but soft, and not above two inches long[10].
+
+The growth of coral appears to cease when the worm is no longer exposed
+to the washing of the sea. Thus, a reef rises in the form of a
+cauliflower, till its top has gained the level of the highest tides,
+above which the worm has no power to advance, and the reef of course no
+longer extends itself upwards. The other parts, in succession, reach the
+surface, and there stop, forming in time a level field with steep sides
+all round. The reef, however, continually increases, and being prevented
+from going higher, extends itself laterally in all directions. But this
+growth being as rapid at the upper edge as it is lower down, the
+steepness of the face of the reef is still preserved. These are the
+circumstances which render coral reefs so dangerous in navigation; for,
+in the first place, they are seldom seen above the water; and, in the
+next, their sides are so steep, that a ship's bows may strike against
+the rock before any change of soundings has given warning of the danger.
+
+The island at high water is formed into three parts, which at low water
+are joined by reefs; the whole being about two and a half or three miles
+from east to west, and tolerably clear of rocks on the south side; but
+on the north it is guarded by a semicircle of coral extending upwards of
+a mile from the shore. On the centre island is only one hut, which, as
+there was reason to believe it to be the actual abode of the
+inhabitants, it may be allowable to describe. The walls were sunk under
+ground, so that only the roof appeared from without, the inside was
+fifteen feet by six: the walls of neatly squared stones, being two feet
+high, and the roof in the middle about six or seven high, formed of a
+ridge pole supported in the centre by a forked stick; the rafters of
+rough branches were covered with reeds, and thatched over with the leaf
+of the wild pine, which grows on all the coral islands. The fire-place
+was at one end on a raised part of the floor, and the other end appeared
+to be the sleeping place. It was conjectured, that this wretched place
+could only be meant as a temporary residence of fishermen, whose nets we
+saw lying about; but the number of water jars and cooking utensils which
+we found in and about it, gave it the appearance of a fixed habitation.
+
+It was almost dark when we quitted the island, and the tide carrying us
+out of our proper course, we missed the ships and grounded on the reefs
+near the town; but as the tide was flowing, we easily got off, and by
+coasting along, soon gained the anchorage.
+
+Sunday, 29th of September.--This day is memorable, on account of its
+being the first on which we were permitted to land.
+
+Yesterday, when we were absent at Reef Island, the chiefs had come on
+board to say that we might land, but that our walk must be confined to
+the beach, and that we were neither to enter the town, nor to go into
+the country. At one o'clock several of the chiefs came on board and
+accompanied us to the beach, where we landed amidst an immense crowd,
+and were handed along by Ookooma and the rest, who, in their desire to
+be civil, held us by the arms. The day, however, being excessively hot,
+and the sand deep, we found this troublesome, and begged leave to walk
+alone, to which they reluctantly consented, and we proceeded along the
+beach for a quarter of a mile.
+
+Beginning to get tired of our walk, we stopped and expressed some
+surprise at such a reception, and told them how disagreeable it was to
+us to be in the sun at such an hour. But our remonstrances did not
+produce much effect, for, on our objecting particularly to the heat,
+they shewed us to a sort of cave in a rock on the beach, where they put
+down a mat and wished us to drink tea in the shade, since we disliked
+the sun. This could not be submitted to, however, and we told them that
+our object in landing was not to sit down on the beach to drink tea, but
+to walk about under the trees in order to recover our health, impaired
+by a long stay on board ship. They tried all their eloquence to persuade
+us that our walk, thus limited, was perfectly pleasant; till at length
+Captain Maxwell gave them to understand, that he wished to go to the top
+of the hills under the trees; but that, as he did not mean to advance a
+single step beyond what was approved of, he would return instantly to
+the ship if they persisted in confining him to the beach. A consultation
+was held upon this, during which, frequent reference was made to several
+elderly men, whose opinions appeared to have great weight. They did not
+wear the dress of chiefs, but, from all that passed, we suspected them
+to be persons about court, who had been sent to assist the councils of
+the local commission, without superseding its authority. They at last
+agreed to our going to the top of the hill, taking the precaution before
+we set out, of sending on a couple of runners, probably to give warning
+to the women who might be in that direction. About half way up the road,
+which winds along a steep face, there is a neatly-built well, supplied
+by a stream which runs along a carved water-course, and near it were
+three or four rudely carved stones about a foot long and four inches
+across, with slow matches and a small quantity of rice laid upon each.
+Mr. Clifford distinctly made out that this was meant as a religious
+offering, but its precise object could not be discovered, though it was
+conjectured that the guardian deity of the well might have some title to
+the honour. The side of the hill is cut into horizontal irregular
+terraces, which are cultivated with apparent care, and irrigated by
+means of ditches leading from the well. On gaining the brow of the hill
+which overlooks the anchorage, the chiefs stopped, but as we were within
+a few yards of the summit, where we saw a shady grove, we begged them to
+proceed, to which, after a short deliberation, they consented. By
+gaining this eminence, we commanded a view of an extensive valley more
+beautiful than any thing we had ever seen; and on the side opposite to
+us we saw the large building spoken of before, generally suspected to be
+the King's palace: our questions, however, on this subject were always
+answered in so evasive a manner, and with such apparent distress, that
+we seldom made any allusion either to it or to the King.
+
+Here we remained under the trees for an hour, drinking tea and smoking
+pipes in company with all the chiefs, besides four or five of the old
+men mentioned before. We amused them by lighting their pipes with a
+burning glass; but one old gentleman, who suspected some trick, and did
+not join in the surprise shewn by the rest, held out his hand that it
+might be exposed to the focus; and he was soon undeceived, to the great
+amusement of the circle. The magnifying power of the glass engaged the
+attention of them all, but they were differently affected by it: a
+start and an exclamation of pleased surprise was the most usual effect;
+some laughed immoderately at every experiment, while others were made
+very grave by it, who had not been particularly serious before.
+Advantage was taken of the moment when their admiration of the glass was
+at the highest, to present it to Jeeroo, whose good-will it was thought
+expedient to conciliate: he had not expected this, and felt obliged to
+us for so public a mark of our esteem.
+
+A man on horseback happening to ride by, it was gravely suggested to the
+chiefs that nothing would so materially contribute to the establishment
+of our health as this species of exercise; but they insisted upon
+treating our request as a mere joke. On the way back an attempt was made
+to vary the walk by turning to the left on reaching the brow of the
+hill, and so walking along the edge of the cliff to another road; the
+chiefs observed upon this that we should infallibly tumble down and kill
+ourselves; affecting, notwithstanding the absurdity of any such
+apprehensions, to be greatly distressed at our danger: so we turned
+back, after having had a short interview with an old man seated in a
+shed on the edge of the precipice. His white beard, which covered his
+breast, suited well with his sedate and contemplative air, and gave him
+much the aspect of a hermit. Our appearance did not in the least
+discompose him, nor did he take any notice of us till desired to do so
+by Ookooma; he then bowed slightly, but immediately resumed his fixed
+look, as if he had been quite alone.
+
+As we drew near to the place where we had landed, our companions
+surprised us by an invitation to a feast, prepared, they said, on our
+account in a temple close to the shore. Here they gave us painted eggs,
+smoked salt pork, and various preparations of eggs and fish, with sweet
+cakes in numberless forms, besides tea, pipes, and sackee, a light kind
+of wine made hot. Nothing could be more cheerful than they all were
+to-day: they placed us on the floor at the upper end of the room, and,
+for some time, they would not allow us to move; but Mr. Clifford, who,
+from the progress he has made in their language, has become a great
+favourite, was invited to join a merry party in the verandah, to which
+they brought flowers, fruits, and every thing they could think of, in
+order to learn their English names, and give in return those of
+Loo-choo.
+
+On reaching the boats, Jeeroo and two of his friends seemed disposed to
+go on board; they were accordingly invited to do so, which made him so
+happy, that he took a rudely-carved ivory ornament, in the shape of a
+monkey, from his tobacco-pouch, and gave it to me. Dinner was on table
+when they came on board, but there was time before taking my friends
+below, to intimate to the servants, that these gentlemen were going to
+dine with me, so that when we reached the cabin, three plates were laid
+in addition. They had probably not expected to find dinner ready for
+them on board, for they expressed surprise at these preparations having
+been made, and would not sit down for some time. When the covers were
+removed, they became silent, and looked on either hand for directions
+how to proceed. On being helped to soup, they did not stir till they saw
+us take spoons, in the management of which they shewed but little
+awkwardness. The knife and fork gave them more trouble, but they set
+seriously about acquiring a knowledge of their use, and, in a short
+time, found no difficulty.
+
+Their grave propriety on this occasion is the more worthy of remark,
+from its standing in some measure opposed to our own behaviour under
+similar circumstances: for instance, when we first tried to eat with
+their chopsticks: on that occasion there was a sort of giggling
+embarrassment shewn by some of us, a contempt as it were of ourselves,
+for condescending to employ an effort to acquire the use of a thing
+apparently so unimportant. Their diminutive cups and odd dishes, too,
+sometimes excited mirth amongst us. Our Loo-choo friends, however, never
+committed themselves in this way; a difference of manners, which may
+arise from their looking upon us as their superiors, and vice versâ; but
+even admitting this, which we were sufficiently disposed to do, it is
+certainly no excuse for us.
+
+On this occasion Jeeroo and his friends had evidently made up their
+minds to find every thing quite new, for all three made a slight
+involuntary exclamation when one of the covers was lifted up, and shewed
+a dish of their own sweet potatoes. They ate of every thing, using a
+great deal of salt, with the fineness and whiteness of which they were
+much pleased. A tart, however, being put on the table, they all objected
+at first to touching it; they would not say why: they were at length
+prevailed upon to taste it, which they had no sooner done, than they
+exclaimed that it was "masa! masa!" (good! good!) It was made of Scotch
+marmalade, and Jeeroo, in recommending it to his friends, told them it
+was "injássa, amása," (bitter, sweet), a union which they appeared not
+to have met with before. They drank wine with us, but said they feared
+it would make them tipsy; upon which we shewed them our mode of mixing
+it with water, which was evidently new to them, for they relished it so
+much in this form, that they were in a fair way of running unconsciously
+into the very excess which they dreaded. As soon as the cloth was
+removed, they rose, and went to walk about the ship: on our shewing a
+wish to accompany them, they intreated us to keep our seats.
+
+During dinner, though it was the first they had ever seen in the
+European style, these people not only betrayed no awkwardness, but
+adopted our customs, such as drinking wine with each other, so readily,
+that we were frequently at a loss to determine whether they had but just
+learned these customs, or whether their own usages in these cases were
+similar to ours. As they pushed off in their boat they were asked to
+sing, which they did at once, and by their manner we suspected that the
+song had some allusion to us, but we could not make out the words.
+
+30th of September.--During the whole of this morning we were engaged in
+the survey, accompanied by several of the midshipmen of both ships. We
+measured a base, and continued taking angles till the tide rose and
+drove us off.
+
+1st of October.--As a free intercourse was now established with the
+natives at this place, and little doubt remained of our being able to
+gain their permission in a day or two for landing the Alceste's stores,
+it became an object to ascertain, without further delay, whether or not
+this anchorage was better than the harbour described by the natives as
+being a few miles only to the northward. While any apprehensions existed
+of our not being able to land here, it was not thought prudent to send
+the Lyra to look for that harbour, lest the chiefs should become still
+more suspicious of our intentions. At this moment, however, there was
+reason to believe that the chiefs wished the Alceste to remain where she
+was, and it was expected that any show of moving to another harbour
+would stimulate their exertions to render our present situation
+agreeable.
+
+The Lyra was accordingly ordered to weigh this morning at daylight, for
+the purpose of examining the coast for ten or twelve leagues to the
+northward. We went out by a narrow passage through the reefs, and in the
+course of the morning beat up to Sugar Loaf Island. We did not land upon
+it, but passed near enough to see that it is richly cultivated on the
+lower parts, and that all the houses are collected into villages, shaded
+as usual by large trees round the bottom, and for one-third of the way
+up the sides of the peak. As this was our furthest point in the present
+survey, we tacked on reaching the Sugar Loaf, and coasted round the
+shores of a large square bay on the west side of the great island. The
+wind shifted gradually as we sailed along, blowing directly off the
+shore at every place, by which means we were enabled to complete the
+circuit of the bay before dark, after which we anchored in sixty-five
+fathoms water. Next morning we resumed our examination of the coast,
+but as the weather was fine, we hoisted out a boat and pulled close
+along the shore, while the brig kept her course at the distance of
+several miles. In this manner we traced the whole shore, till we came
+close to Napakiang, without seeing any port. We tried to land at several
+places, but were every where kept off by coral reefs stretching along
+the coast, at the distance of two or three hundred yards, and forming,
+to strangers at least, an impenetrable barrier. The canoes of the
+natives paddled away from us, and passed through the surf by passages
+which we were afraid to approach. We returned to the brig about two
+o'clock, and at three anchored in our former place at Napakiang.
+
+The departure of the Lyra had excited a great sensation on shore; the
+chiefs came off to inquire of Captain Maxwell where the "honee gua"
+(little ship) was; but he did not choose to satisfy them, except by
+saying that they had trifled with him so long, and refused to let him
+land his casks and stores with such obstinacy, that he must endeavour to
+find some more favourable place at which to refit his ship. The effect
+was exactly what he wished; they intreated him not to think of moving
+from Napakiang; offered him not only large boats to put his stores in,
+but said he should have store-rooms on shore for whatever he desired,
+while his ship was refitting. They moreover granted him permission to
+land with his officers, and to go to the top of the hill without being
+guarded as formerly.
+
+On the Lyra's anchoring, the chiefs came on board in great agitation,
+desiring to know what we had discovered. As we had actually nothing to
+relate, there was little difficulty in keeping our secret. They
+accompanied me on board the Alceste when I went to make my report, but
+Captain Maxwell, having found the advantage he had already gained by
+keeping them in ignorance of his intentions, was nowise communicative.
+They now offered to allow his people to land for the purpose of washing
+their clothes, which they had before refused to do, and in short, were
+in a mood to grant any thing, provided we were willing to remain at this
+part of the island. They did not pretend that this was out of regard for
+us, and it was easy to see that they apprehended more trouble in
+managing us any where else than at this place. Amongst the arguments
+used by them to dissuade us from going to the other end of the island,
+they said it was inhabited by savages. It came out accidentally too,
+that in the event of the ship's actually proceeding to other parts of
+the island, the six chiefs were to accompany us: so that they were
+probably influenced by considerations of personal convenience to make
+every exertion to prevent our moving.
+
+3d of October.--The Lyra's crew were allowed to go on shore to-day to
+wash their clothes, and amuse themselves by running about on the side of
+the hill. Two of the sailors of this party, who happened to be singing
+near the well, drew a number of natives round them, who expressed great
+pleasure at hearing their songs. At first the crowd consisted entirely
+of the peasantry, who listened with great attention, and never
+interrupted the sailors; but in about half an hour, a person of some
+rank, with a number of attendants, came up, and begged them to sing
+several of their songs over again: we could not find out who this person
+was, but it was probably one of the chiefs, some of whom are remarkably
+fond of our music.
+
+4th of October.--The survey on the reef was completed to-day: the only
+inconvenience we had experienced here, was the limited time which the
+tide allowed us each day, otherwise the situation was well adapted for a
+base, from its commanding a view of all parts of the anchorage. During
+the progress of the principal survey, the young gentlemen sent by
+Captain Maxwell, in conjunction with the midshipmen of the Lyra,
+completed a survey of the reef itself. A native of a genteel appearance,
+but not in the dress of a chief, visited the Lyra to-day, and gave me a
+present of two pipes and two bags of sweet potatoes.
+
+5th of October.--Captain Maxwell called for me this morning at sunrise,
+on his way to the shore. The chiefs had not expected us so early, and
+our only companion for some time was an old peasant, who now and then
+ran on before to give notice of our approach. Two well dressed people
+shortly afterwards came up, and continued with us during our walk, which
+at first lay along the beach, but afterwards led into the country; some
+exception was taken to this by our companions, but as no attention was
+paid to them, they desisted.
+
+After walking about a mile, we passed through a grove of young trees,
+and found ourselves close to a village, which lies in the bottom of a
+glen highly cultivated, the houses being almost entirely hid by trees,
+of which the bamboo is the most conspicuous.
+
+This village is surrounded by a close hedge, and every separate house
+also has an inclosure: some of the houses have attached to them neat
+arbours, formed of a light frame of bamboo covered with a variety of
+creepers. The rice fields are divided by small banks of earth, made to
+retain the water, and along the top of each bank there is a foot-path;
+the whole valley having much the air of a scene in India. A number of
+the villagers, accompanied by their children, came out to meet us, but
+there were no women amongst them: we passed on, as they were evidently
+averse to our entering the village.
+
+On our way across the valley we were attracted by the appearance of a
+cottage, so buried in foliage as to be completely hid from our view till
+we were within a few paces of the door. It was surrounded by a slight
+fence of rods, about an inch apart, with a line of creepers along the
+top, and hanging down on both sides: a wicker gate admitted us, and we
+entered the house, which we found divided into two apartments, eight
+feet square, besides a small verandah at one end. The floors, which were
+made of slips of bamboo, were raised about six inches from the ground,
+and covered with a straw mat. The walls were five feet high, being
+neatly wattled with split bamboo, above which rose a pointed thatched
+roof. It was occupied by an old man, whom we appeared to have disturbed
+at breakfast, for cups and tea-things were arranged on the floor; he
+asked us to sit down, and gave us pipes and tea. The little apartment we
+were in was as neat as any thing we had ever seen: on one side there was
+a set of shelves, with cups, bowls, and cooking utensils; on the others
+were hung various implements of husbandry, with hats and various
+dresses, all clean and in order. Higher up was a sort of loft or garret,
+formed by bamboo poles, laid horizontally from the top of the walls; on
+this were placed various tools, nets, and baskets. The fire-place was in
+the middle of one side, and sunk below the level. On the outside, in the
+space between the house and the fence, there was a pigeon house and a
+poultry yard, and close to the little verandah spoken of before, there
+stood two spinning-wheels of a light and ingenious construction. All
+round on the outside of the fence, the trees were high and thick; and
+though the sun was above the hills, the house was completely shaded
+except at the end, where a small opening admitted the rays into the
+verandah. We staid some time with the old farmer, trying to express our
+admiration of the simplicity and beauty of his cottage, and then went up
+the opposite side of the valley.
+
+Here we found a road like a dressed walk in a garden: following this, we
+passed through a series of beautiful groves of bamboo and other trees,
+till at length, after winding about a good deal, we came to a double row
+of tall pine trees, interspersed with many others whose names we did not
+know, so as to form a walk which must be shady at all hours of the day.
+This road we knew would lead to the town, and therefore when we had
+reached the highest point we turned to the right, and after a short walk
+reached the grove of trees which had been made the limit to our first
+walk on the 29th ultimo. At this place Captain Maxwell surprised the
+natives a good deal by shooting several birds on the wing, but they
+could not be prevailed upon to fire themselves, nor even to pull the
+trigger when no powder was in the pan.
+
+6th of October.--After divine service to-day on board the Alceste, a
+long conference was held between Captain Maxwell and the five chiefs,
+when, after a good deal of discussion, it was agreed on their part to
+allow the Alceste's stores to be landed, for the purpose of getting at
+the leak. Our means of interpreting on these occasions are not the best
+that could be wished; but John, our Chinese, is nevertheless a keen
+fellow, and very ready with answers when pressed. We generally explain
+as fully as possible to John what our wishes are, and then leave him to
+communicate them the best way he can. An instance of his quickness
+occurred to-day, which seems worth mentioning. John had communicated to
+them, by Captain Maxwell's desire, that as the leak complained of was in
+the magazine, it would be necessary to land the powder: they debated a
+long time upon this, and then asked John "Why the powder was not put on
+board the little ship?" John, who was not aware of any good reason,
+affected to be surprised at this question, which he refused to
+interpret, saying that if Captain Maxwell thought such a measure right,
+he would surely not have waited till they suggested it. The light in
+which he had thus put the question, made them earnestly desire him not
+to mention any thing about it, declaring at the same time, that they
+would willingly give a place for the powder, and for any other stores
+which Captain Maxwell might wish to land.
+
+To-day for the first time they talked unreservedly of the king, whose
+name even they had hitherto studiously avoided: they spoke freely of his
+majesty's having sent all the stock and vegetables with which we were
+daily supplied. Captain Maxwell, who of course was very desirous of
+opening a communication with the court, intimated his wish to pay his
+respects as soon as might be convenient. They heard this with apparent
+satisfaction, and signified that his request should be made known to the
+king. We are at a loss to discover what can have caused this change of
+manner. We can only conjecture, that perhaps the king, on hearing so
+many reports about us, may have become desirous of seeing us himself. At
+all events it is clear that some alteration in the instructions to the
+chiefs must have been made, otherwise they would have shewn their usual
+reserve when the king's name was mentioned, and would on no account have
+allowed us to talk of visiting him.
+
+At one o'clock we went on shore to look at the place assigned by the
+chiefs for the reception of the Alceste's stores. It is an oblong
+inclosure, sixty yards by forty, surrounded by a wall twelve feet high,
+rather well built with squared coral: the entrance is by a large gate on
+the south side, from which there extends raised gravel walks, with
+clipped hedges, the intermediate spaces being laid out in beds, like a
+garden. The temple in which we were feasted on the day of our first
+visit, occupies one corner of the inclosure; it is completely shaded by
+a grove of trees, which also overhang the wall. In that part of the
+garden directly opposite to the gate, at the upper end of the walk
+there is a smaller temple, nearly hid by the branches of several large
+banyan trees; and before it, at the distance of ten or twelve paces, a
+square awkward looking building, with a raised terrace round it. The
+temple first spoken of is divided by means of shifting partitions into
+four apartments, and a verandah running all round, having a row of
+carved wooden pillars on its outer edge to support the roof, which
+extends considerably beyond it. The floor of the verandah is two feet
+from the ground, the roof is sloping and covered with handsome tiles,
+those forming the eaves being ornamented with flowers and various
+figures in relief; there are also several out-houses, and a kitchen
+communicating with them by covered passages. In one of the inner
+apartments, at the upper end, there is a small recess containing a green
+shrub, in a high narrow flower-pot, having a Chinese inscription on a
+tablet hanging above it on the wall. On another side of the same room,
+there hangs the picture of a man rescuing a bird from the paws of a cat;
+the bird seems to have been just taken from a cage, which is tumbling
+over, with two other birds fluttering about in the inside: it is merely
+a sketch, but is executed in a spirited manner. In one of the back
+apartments we find three gilt images, eighteen inches high, with a
+flower in a vase before them. The roof of the temple within is ten feet
+high, and all the cornices, pillars, &c. are neatly carved into flowers
+and the figures of various animals. The ground immediately round it is
+divided into a number of small beds, planted with different shrubs and
+flowers; and on a pedestal of artificial rock, in one of the walks close
+to it, is placed a clay vessel of an elegant form, full of water, with a
+wooden ladle swimming on the top. On a frame near one of the out-houses,
+hangs a large bell, three feet high, of an inelegant shape, resembling a
+long bee-hive; the sides are two inches thick, and richly ornamented:
+its tone is uncommonly fine.
+
+It was determined to appropriate part of the large temple to the use of
+the sick and their attendants; the assistant surgeon of the Alceste
+taking one room, and the gunner, who was to have the whole inclosure in
+his charge, another. The small temple at the upper end, being a retired
+spot, was fixed upon for the Lyra's observatory; the square building in
+the centre seemed well adapted for a magazine. At the gate a notice was
+hung up, both in English and Loo-choo, signifying that no person was to
+enter without a written pass from Captain Maxwell, or from one of the
+chiefs.
+
+7th and 8th of October.--These days have been occupied in carrying the
+arrangements of Sunday into effect. It was very interesting to observe
+the care which the natives took of the sick, whom they assisted all the
+way from the beach to the temple; a number of people attended to support
+such of them as had barely strength enough to walk. When they were
+safely lodged, eggs, milk, fowls, and vegetables, were brought to them;
+and whenever any of them were tempted by the beauty of the scenery to
+walk out, several of the natives were ready to accompany them.
+
+The powder was landed, and Mr. Holman, the gunner of the frigate, began
+the operation of drying it on hides spread in the sun round the
+magazine. The cows and other stock were also landed. One of the cows
+calved that night, to the surprise of every body, and the great joy of
+the natives, who took a great fancy to the little bull born amongst
+them. Mr. Mayne, the master of the Alceste, took up his quarters in the
+temple, in order to be near his observatory, which was in the centre of
+the garden. The stores of all kinds were sent on shore from the Alceste,
+which produced an apparent confusion, and the chiefs, seeing so many
+valuable things lying about, began to fear that they would be taken
+away; at least, it was supposed that they had such an apprehension, for
+the wall of the temple was immediately fenced in by a sort of net-work
+of long bamboo poles, the ends of which were fixed in the ground at the
+foot of the wall on the outside, and the tops made to cross one another
+four or five feet above the wall. This contrivance, instead of rendering
+the place more secure, made it more accessible; but as our opinion was
+not asked, and we had no apprehensions of theft, we let them proceed in
+their own way.
+
+Mrs. Loy, wife of the boatswain of the Alceste, was the only female in
+our squadron, and as such excited no small interest at this place. She
+was a perfectly well behaved person, and sufficiently neat in her dress,
+but without great pretensions to good looks. The natives, who from the
+first paid her much attention, shewed at all times their desire of
+granting her every indulgence. They even went so far as to say she might
+go into the city; but, upon consulting with her husband, who was
+apprehensive of some accident, she declined it. When this circumstance
+became known to us, we easily convinced the boatswain that no mischief
+could possibly arise from trusting his wife amongst such kind people;
+but Mrs. Loy could not be persuaded of this; and thus was lost the only
+opportunity of seeing the town which occurred during all our stay.
+
+Two of the natives have been studying English with great assiduity, and
+with considerable success. One is called Mádera, the other Anya. They
+carry note books in imitation of Mr. Clifford, in which they record in
+their own characters every word they learn. They are both keen fellows,
+and are always amongst the strangers. From the respect occasionally paid
+to them, it is suspected that their rank is higher than they give out,
+and that their object in pretending to be people of ordinary rank, is to
+obtain a more free intercourse with all classes on board the ships.
+Mádera, by his liveliness and his propriety of manners, has made himself
+a great favourite; he adopts our customs with a sort of intuitive
+readiness, sits down to table, uses a knife and fork, converses, and
+walks with us, in short, does every thing that we do, quite as a matter
+of course, without any apparent effort or study. He is further
+recommended to us by the free way in which he communicates every thing
+relating to his country; so that as he advances in English, and we in
+Loo-choo, he may be the means of giving us much information. As an
+instance of his progress in English, it may be mentioned, that one day
+he came on board the Lyra, and said, "The Ta-yin speak me, 'you go ship,
+John come shore;'" by which we understood that Captain Maxwell had sent
+him on board the brig for the interpreter. This was about three weeks
+after our arrival.
+
+[Illustration: PRIEST and GENTLEMAN of LOO-CHOO.]
+
+Most of the natives have acquired a little English, so that Mr. Clifford
+has now no difficulty in finding people willing to instruct him, and to
+take pains in correcting his pronunciation. One of his teachers, called
+Yáckabee Oomeejeéro, will not permit him to write down a single word
+till he has acquired the exact Loo-choo sound: but he is like the rest
+in shewing an invincible objection to giving any information about the
+women. He admits that he is married, and gives the names of his sons:
+but when his wife or daughters are alluded to, he becomes uneasy, and
+changes the subject. On Mr. Clifford's gravely telling him that he
+believed there were no women on the island, he was thrown off his guard,
+and answered hastily, that he had both a wife and daughter, but
+instantly checking himself, turned the conversation another way. On the
+picture of an English lady being shewn to him, he commended it highly,
+saying, at the same time, "Doochoo innágo whoóco oorung" (Loo-choo
+women are not handsome.) This old gentleman is a better teacher than
+scholar; he calls the letter L "airoo;" veal, "bairoo;" flail,
+"frayroo;" in which instances of mispronunciation, we may recognize a
+difficulty not uncommon amongst English children.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 6: This circumstance is by no means common, and therefore
+cannot be depended on. In fine weather these reefs give no warning
+whatever, and a ship on approaching them ought invariably to have a boat
+a-head.]
+
+[Footnote 7: Chin-chin in the corrupt dialect of Canton, means the
+ceremony of salutation, which consists in the action of holding up the
+closed hands, pressed together before the face, and bowing at the same
+time.]
+
+[Footnote 8: Ta-whang-tee is Chinese for Emperor, King.]
+
+[Footnote 9: Chopsticks are two pieces of ivory or wood, about a foot in
+length, of the thickness of a quill; they serve in China instead of a
+knife and fork, and are held in the right hand. Until the difficult art
+of holding them is attained, they are perfectly useless. The Chief at
+this feast, seeing that we made little progress, ordered sharp pointed
+sticks to be brought, which he good humouredly recommended our using
+instead of the chopsticks.]
+
+[Footnote 10: A large collection, which was at this time made of these
+Zoophites, was unfortunately lost in the Alceste.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+ The Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo--Discovery of Port
+ Melville--Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its
+ Banks--Lyra nearly wrecked--Interview with Natives at the South
+ Point--Return to Napakiang--Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's
+ Funeral--Mádera's Character and Conduct--Sociable Habits of the
+ Natives--Dinner given to the Chiefs of the Island by Captain
+ Maxwell--Mádera's Behaviour on this Occasion--Two Women seen--A Lady
+ of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife--Captain Maxwell fractures his
+ Finger--Loo-choo Surgeon--Concern of the Natives--Visit of the
+ Prince--Discussion about the King of Loo-choo's Letter--Mádera
+ appears in a new Character--Feast given by the Prince--List of
+ Supplies given to the Ships--Behaviour of the Prince on taking
+ Leave--Preparations for Departure--Mádera's Distress--Last Interview
+ with the Chiefs--Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and
+ Customs of Loo-choo--Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island.
+
+
+As soon as the survey of Napakiang anchorage was completed, and a
+perfectly good understanding established with the natives, it was
+determined to make a survey of the whole island, and the Lyra was
+ordered upon this service. She were absent about a week, during which
+period the general chart of the island was constructed. It will be
+obvious to every one acquainted with the subject, that, in so short a
+time, a very exact survey of the coast of an island nearly sixty miles
+long could not have been made: yet, as the weather was in general fine,
+and other circumstances favourable, the chart will be found sufficiently
+correct for most practical purposes. As the chart and the nautical and
+hydrographical details are given in the Appendix, I propose at present
+to relate only such particulars of the cruise as seem likely to interest
+the general reader.
+
+9th of October.--At daybreak we got under weigh and stood to sea through
+a passage discovered by the boats; it was so extremely narrow, that the
+least deviation from the course brought us close to the rocks. We were
+regulated in steering by two marks on the land, which lie in the same
+straight line with the centre of the passage; these it is necessary to
+keep always together: but not conceiving that such nicety was required
+while sailing out, the marks were allowed to separate, by which we found
+ourselves in a minute or two within a few yards of a coral reef, the
+ragged tops of which were distinctly seen two or three feet below the
+surface, whilst, at the same time, the leadsman on the opposite side
+sounded in nine fathoms. This early proof of the danger of navigating
+amongst coral, by teaching us the necessity of extreme caution, was of
+great importance to us in our future operations.
+
+As the coast lying between Napakiang and the Sugar Loaf had already been
+examined, we proceeded at once round that island, which, from its having
+the same aspect on every bearing, and being quite different in shape
+from any land in this quarter, is an excellent land-mark for navigators.
+The natives call it Eegooshcoond, or castle[11]. The English name was
+given, I believe, by Captain Broughton.
+
+Having rounded this peak and stood in for the north-west side of the
+Great Loo-choo, where there is a deep bight, a small island was observed
+close in shore, behind which it was thought there might be shelter for
+ships; the coast, however, being unknown to us, it was not thought safe
+to carry the brig very close in, and a boat was therefore dispatched
+with an officer to reconnoitre: he returned at eight o'clock to say that
+there was a harbour in the main land, the entrance to which lay on the
+inside of the small island mentioned before; but that the passages were
+narrow and winding, and that a more careful examination was necessary
+before the brig could venture in.
+
+11th of October.--In the morning we again stood in, using the
+precaution of sending a boat a-head to sound the way; when we had nearly
+reached the entrance we anchored, and proceeded in three boats to
+examine the harbour discovered last night. As it was near noon when we
+passed the small island, we landed and observed the meridian altitude of
+the sun; after which we entered the harbour in the main island, by an
+intricate passage of about a quarter of a mile in length, and at one
+place not two hundred yards wide. Here we found ourselves in a circular
+bason upwards of half a mile across, with deep water, and completely
+sheltered from all winds. On its western shore we saw a large and
+beautiful village almost hid amongst trees, with a high wooded range
+behind it stretching to the south. The eastern shore was low and laid
+out in salt fields, with a few huts here and there. At first sight this
+bason did not appear to have any outlet except by the one we had
+examined; but on rowing to its upper or southern side, we found that it
+joined by a narrow channel with another harbour still larger, and if
+possible more beautiful than the first, for here the land was high on
+both sides, and richly wooded from top to bottom. Proceeding onwards
+through this bason, which had all the appearance of an inland lake, we
+came to another outlet, not above a hundred yards wide, formed by cliffs
+rising abruptly out of the water to the height of a hundred feet. Both
+sides being covered with trees, which almost met overhead, the space
+below was rendered cool and pleasant, and the water, thus sheltered from
+every wind, was as smooth as glass. We rowed along for some time by
+various windings through this fairy scene in total uncertainty of what
+was to come next, and at last, after advancing about three miles, it
+opened into an extensive lake several miles in length, studded with
+numerous small islands.
+
+The depth of water in the lake varied from four to six fathoms; but in
+the narrow neck which connects it with the sea the depth is from ten to
+twenty fathoms, being deepest at the narrowest parts. Ships might ride
+in any part of this extraordinary harbour, in perfect safety during the
+most violent tempests: and the shores are so varied, that every purpose
+of re-equipment might be served. At some places natural wharfs are
+formed by the rocks, and eight and ten fathoms water close to them.
+Ships might lie alongside these places, or might heave down by them:
+there are also shallow spots on which ships might be careened. Many of
+the cliffs are hollowed into caves, which would answer for storehouses;
+and in the numerous lawns on both sides encampments might be formed of
+any number of people.
+
+We rowed directly across, and landed at the southern side at the foot
+of a wooded range of hills, which forms the southern boundary of the
+lake. As no road was observed, it was resolved to go directly up the
+hill, and, in about an hour, after a good deal of scrambling amongst the
+bushes and long grass, we gained the top, where we found a neat pathway
+with a ditch on each side, and a hedge growing on the top of the mound,
+formed of the earth from the ditch; it resembled not a little an English
+lane. Without knowing where this might take us to, we followed it, in
+the hope of meeting some of the people, but in this we were
+disappointed. Yet this place must, at times, be frequented, as we
+observed a number of similar paths leading to the right and left.
+
+The trees on this range of hills are low, and of no great beauty; the
+fir is the most common, but we did not know the names of the rest. After
+walking about a mile, our path took an abrupt turn down the brow of the
+hill, and appeared to lead to a large village at some distance. The view
+from this elevation was very satisfactory, as it enabled us to check our
+rough eye draught of the harbour and coast. The road down the hill was
+so steep that it was just possible to stand upon it, being inclined, as
+was conjectured on the spot, at an angle of 45º. At the foot of the hill
+there was a little cottage, consisting of two parts, made of wattled
+rattans, connected by a light open bamboo roof, so covered with a large
+leaved creeper as to afford a complete shelter from the sun. The
+cottage, which was thatched, was enveloped in creepers, encircled by the
+usual rattan fence at two or three yards distance. One of the wings was
+occupied by goats; the other, which was dark, seemed to belong to the
+people, who had deserted it on our approach. There being only a small
+hole in the wall to admit light and air, and to allow the smoke to
+escape, every thing inside was black and dirty. Two spears hung on one
+side, which, upon enquiry afterwards, we were told were for striking
+fish.
+
+On coming to our boats, we found them surrounded by a party of the
+natives, smaller in stature than our friends at Napakiang, and shewing
+less curiosity: probably their surprise at our sudden appearance had not
+subsided sufficiently to allow of their indulging curiosity in detail. A
+large party of them watched attentively while a musket was loaded, and
+when pointed over their heads in the air, they seemed aware that
+something was going to happen, but from their not shrinking or removing
+out of the way, it seemed they knew not what. When it was fired, the
+whole party fell as if they had been shot, but rose instantly again, and
+looking to the right and left of each other, indulged in a timorous
+laugh. A cartridge was given to one man, with which he was nearly
+blowing himself up by placing it on his lighted pipe. The officer of the
+boat informed us that a gentleman had come to him and offered his horse
+to ride; he had dismounted for that purpose, but the horse was
+frightened, and would not suffer the officer to get upon him. We saw
+this person riding along when we were at the top of the hill; he called
+out to us repeatedly, probably to offer his horse, but we thought he
+wished to dissuade us from walking over the hill, and accordingly took
+no notice of him.
+
+In the meantime Mr. Clifford, who had been unwell, and felt unequal to
+the labour of climbing the hill, proceeded in one of the boats towards a
+large village on the eastern side of the lake. He was met by a number of
+the inhabitants, whose dress and appearance were inferior to what we had
+been accustomed to see at Napakiang; on his asking them in Loo-choo for
+some water, they gave it cheerfully; but they shewed little curiosity,
+and the party which followed wherever he went, seemed to have no other
+object than to prevent disturbance. They made no objection to his going
+into the village, where he saw in one inclosure a complete farm-yard.
+The principal house was closed, but to the offices there was free
+access. In the stable were two handsome bay ponies; there was also a
+well stocked pig-sty, and a poultry-house. In another quarter stood a
+mill for husking corn, consisting of a grooved solid cylinder of wood,
+fitting neatly into a hollow cylinder, the sides of which were also
+grooved; near this lay a hand flour-mill and several baskets of cotton.
+In another part of the court was a granary erected on posts about six
+feet above the ground, having billets of fire-wood piled below it. At
+another place, under a tree in the village, he saw a blacksmith's anvil
+fixed in a block; the forge was of masonry, having an air hole, but the
+bellows was wanting.
+
+In the centre of the village stood a building like a temple, surrounded
+by a stone wall. It was filled with elegant vases of different shapes
+and sizes, closed up and ranged in rows on the floor; the verandah
+encircling the building was also covered with vases. According to the
+account of the natives, the remains of the dead are deposited in these
+jars. Round the building bamboo poles were placed so as to lean against
+the thatched roof, having notches cut in them, to which bundles of
+flowers were hung, some fresh, others decayed, apparently funereal
+offerings; but their exact import Mr. Clifford was not able to learn.
+The elegant shape of the vases, and the tasteful way in which they were
+arranged, with the flowers hanging all round, gave to this cemetery an
+air of cheerfulness, which we are in the habit of thinking unsuitable
+to a depository of the dead.
+
+This village, which is at the head of a bay, is sheltered from the north
+wind by a row of trees between it and the beach; behind it is sheltered
+by a range of hills. A broad road runs between it and the water; trees
+are planted among the houses, so as nearly to conceal them. In the
+middle of the village near the cemetery, in an open square, there is a
+cluster of granaries like the one described above; the walls are made of
+wattled rattan, and overhang the lower part.
+
+Mr. Clifford tried in vain to see the Chief of the village; but either
+there was no such person, or he was out of the way: the inhabitants
+pointed out a man on horseback as a Chief, who passed on to another
+village; this was probably the same man who offered his horse to Mr.
+Hall, the officer of the boat. Mr. Clifford went to the top of the range
+behind the village, and afterwards into the valley on the other side,
+which he found highly cultivated.
+
+From the heights we saw that the large space which was at first
+considered a lake, communicates with the sea to the north-eastward, as
+well as by the narrow passage through which we had come, but there was
+not time to allow of its being fully examined. As we returned by the
+narrow straits, we called at some of the small villages on the eastern
+side. At one of these, the people of the village, headed by a man who
+appeared to be superior to the rest, came towards the boat, and stopped
+for some minutes at the distance of fifty yards; after which, appearing
+to have gained confidence, they came on, with the old man in front,
+carrying a green bough in his hand. He would not come close, however,
+till invited by Mr. Clifford in Loo-choo to look at the boat; he then
+advanced and presented his bough, in return for which we broke a branch
+from a tree, and gave it to him with the same formality he had used
+towards us. Soon after this exchange was made, they left us, and went to
+examine the boat, to fishermen always an object of great interest.
+
+On our entering the village we were met by a man who appeared to be the
+principal person of the place; he was very polite, shewed us through the
+village, and took us over his garden, where he had some sugar-cane
+growing; this we admired very much, upon which he ordered one of the
+finest of the canes to be taken up by the roots and presented to us; we
+immediately gave him a few buttons off our jackets, with which he was
+quite pleased. On its beginning to rain while we were in the garden, he
+invited us into his house, which, from the walls being of wattled cane,
+looked like a large basket. Rude pictures and carved wood-work figures
+were hanging on the walls, together with some inscriptions in Chinese
+characters.
+
+On returning to the lower harbour of all, we went to the large village
+before spoken of, which is by far the most finished of any that we have
+seen on this island. The streets are regular and clean swept; each house
+has a neat cane wall, as well as a screen before the door; plantain and
+other trees are growing so thickly in the inside of the fence, that they
+completely shade the house. Near the beach were several large houses, in
+which a number of people were seated writing: on going up to them they
+gave us tea and cakes, and afterwards allowed us to go over the village
+without restraint; they were curious to know whether the brig was coming
+into the harbour or not, and if so, how many days we meant to stay; they
+expressed neither pleasure nor regret when we said that we were not
+coming in. In front of the village, and parallel with the beach, there
+is a splendid avenue thirty feet wide, formed by two rows of large
+trees, whose branches join overhead, and effectually screen the walk
+from the sun; here and there are placed wooden benches, and at some
+places stone seats are fixed near the trees: this space, which is about
+a quarter of a mile long, is probably used as a public walk.
+
+A range of hills of a semicircular form embraces the village, and limits
+its extent: at most places it is steep, but at the point where the north
+end joins the harbour, there is an overhanging cliff about eighty feet
+high, the upper part of which extends considerably beyond the base; at
+eight or ten yards from the ground on this inclined face, a long
+horizontal gallery has been hewn out of the solid rock: it communicates
+with a number of small square excavations still deeper in the rock, for
+the reception of the vases containing the bones of the dead.
+
+The trees and creepers on the edge of the precipice hung down so as to
+meet the tops of those which grew below, and thus a screen was formed
+which threw the gallery into deep shade: every thing here being
+perfectly still, the scene was very solemn and imposing. It took us
+somewhat by surprise, for nothing in its external appearance indicated
+the purpose to which the place was appropriated: happening to discover
+an opening amongst the trees and brushwood, and resolving to see what it
+led to, we entered by a narrow path winding through the grove. The
+liveliness of the scenery without, and the various amusements of the
+day, had put us all into high spirits, but the unexpected and sacred
+gloom of the scene in which we suddenly found ourselves had an
+instantaneous effect in repressing the mirth of the whole party.
+
+This village is called Oonting, and is certainly the same that is
+alluded to by the chiefs, and which we formerly wrote down Winching and
+Oonching.
+
+This excellent harbour, which we discovered, has been named Port
+Melville, in honour of Lord Viscount Melville, First Lord of the
+Admiralty.
+
+It was quite dark when we reached the brig. As a heavy swell was rolling
+in, no time was lost in getting under weigh, but before we could succeed
+in running well off the reefs, the wind suddenly changed, and the
+weather, which before had been fine, became so dark and squally, that we
+almost lost sight of the shore. Our situation was now very critical, for
+we had just sufficient knowledge of the coast, to be sensible how
+extremely dangerous it was; and the wind, which blew directly on the
+shore, came in such violent gusts, that there was every reason to
+apprehend the loss of our topmasts; to reef the sails was impossible, as
+the delay which this operation must have caused would have been fatal.
+While things were in this state, it became necessary to tack, but owing
+to the heavy and irregular swell, the brig came round again against our
+will, and before the sails could be properly trimmed, she had gone stern
+foremost almost to the verge of the reef, on which the sea was breaking
+to a great height. Had this occurred a second time, nothing could have
+prevented our being wrecked. After beating about in this awkward
+predicament for two hours, the wind shifted a little, and enabled us to
+stretch off clear of all danger.
+
+12th of October.--It blew so hard that we kept out at sea clear of the
+shore.
+
+13th of October.--As the weather had become moderate, we stood in, and
+determined the position of five islands which lie to the northward of
+Port Melville.
+
+14th of October.--During this day the whole of the east side of the
+great island was explored. The north and north-east sides are high, and
+destitute of cultivation; nearly in the middle, on this side, there is a
+deep indenture on the coast, and the wind being such as to admit of
+sailing out again, we ran in under low sail with the usual precautions;
+notwithstanding which we were very nearly on the reefs, for the water
+shoaled suddenly from twenty-four to eight fathoms; and although the
+brig was instantly tacked, the soundings as she came round were only
+five fathoms, and to leeward of us the ragged tops of a rock just level
+with the surface were discovered at the distance of only fifty yards. In
+exploring such places there ought to be a boat on each bow, as well as
+one a-head. The coast from this bay to the south point of the island has
+a belt of coral reefs at the distance of ten and fifteen miles from the
+shore, and therefore cannot be approached by a ship without great
+danger. The extreme south point is comparatively clear of coral; we
+therefore anchored off it at sunset, proposing to land next day to
+determine its position. We found the iron cables of great use when
+anchoring amongst coral reefs.
+
+15th of October.--It blew hard last night, but in the forenoon it
+moderated sufficiently to allow of our landing. We ascertained the
+latitude of the extreme south point with precision, and made several
+other observations, all circumstances being favourable.
+
+We had scarcely landed when the natives began to assemble in groups on
+the top of the cliffs, and in a short time they came down to us, most of
+them carrying long poles in their hands; we were sufficiently aware of
+their inoffensive character to have no apprehension of their intentions,
+otherwise their appearance would have been somewhat formidable. There
+was no person of rank among them; they were communicative and full of
+curiosity, which difference in manner from the inhabitants on the shores
+of Port Melville may have arisen from these people knowing something of
+us by reports from Napakiang, which is not above ten miles distant. It
+was to be expected that we should have become a topic of discourse at
+so short a distance, and probably what was said of us would be
+favourable, or at all events such as would excite curiosity rather than
+fear. Most of these people had fish spears tatooed on their arms in the
+form of a trident, with rude barbs. When drawn on the right arm it is
+called "Oódeemaw;" when on the left, "Toóga." This is the only instance
+we have met with of this practice. Our curiosity was farther excited by
+the appearance of these spears, from the circumstance of our never
+having seen any warlike weapon on this island; but the people invariably
+called them "Eéo stitchee" (fish spear). Several of the tallest of these
+people were measured, but none were above five feet six inches; they
+are, however, strong limbed and well proportioned. One of them wore a
+ring on his finger, which is the only instance we have met with of any
+ornament being worn at Loo-Choo. The ring finger is called in the
+Loo-choo language, "Eébee gánnee," finger of the ring; and it seems a
+fair inference from this, that amongst some part of the community rings
+are habitually worn; probably by the women. The coast here is formed of
+cliffs, about seventy or eighty feet high, with numerous caverns
+hollowed out by the waves. The pools of water left by the tide were full
+of beautiful fish of a great variety of colours.
+
+16th of October.--In the morning we weighed and stood to the westward,
+among the group of islands called Amakírrima by the natives. At one of
+these there seemed at first sight to be a harbour for ships; but on
+sending the boats to explore, it proved only safe for small vessels
+being filled in every part with coral. On our way across from the south
+point of the great island to the Amakírrimas, we passed near a coral
+reef exactly circular, and half a mile in diameter; it is just level
+with the water's edge at half ebb, so that in fine weather the sea does
+not break upon any part of it. As it is upwards of seven miles from any
+land, and lies directly in the passage towards Napakiang, it is
+exceedingly dangerous, and ought not to be approached in the night by a
+stranger.
+
+At four o'clock we anchored in our old place in-shore of the Alceste. As
+we stood towards the anchorage we could see the coral from the mast-head
+so distinctly as to be able to trace the forms of all the reefs as we
+passed among them. This can rarely be done, although the water is always
+clear, because an unusual degree of smoothness in the surface is
+requisite to make the rocks visible; and the sun must also shine upon
+the water at a particular angle. A stranger cannot therefore calculate
+upon having the danger pointed out in this way; but when such
+circumstances do occur they may be taken advantage of to check the
+surveys of reefs made in boats.
+
+We find things at Napakiang nearly as we left them; the best
+understanding seems to exist between Captain Maxwell and the chiefs.
+Every body is allowed to walk about and do as he likes. The frigate has
+been bountifully supplied with stock and vegetables; and the sick on
+shore are rapidly recovering under the kind care of the natives, who
+take a peculiar interest in their comfort.
+
+A young man belonging to the Alceste had died during our absence. When
+the natives were informed of this circumstance, they requested
+permission to make the grave, and begged Captain Maxwell to point out a
+place for this purpose. Captain Maxwell said that no situation could be
+more appropriate than under the grove of trees near the temple, a spot
+already rendered sacred by many Loo-choo tombs.
+
+Next day the body was carried to the grave with all the formalities
+usual on such occasions, Captain Maxwell, according to custom, walking
+last, with the officers and crew before him. The ready politeness of the
+natives was never more strikingly displayed than now; for perceiving
+that those who were of the highest rank walked in the rear, they
+considered that their station must of course be in front; and they
+accordingly placed themselves at the head of the procession, and
+preserved throughout the ceremony the most profound silence. They were
+all dressed in white robes, which we have reason to believe is their
+mourning.
+
+On the next day the natives requested leave to raise a tomb over the
+grave; this was of course agreed to, and when it was completed, they
+performed their own funeral service over it, by sacrificing a large hog,
+and burning a quantity of spirits. Jeeroo officiated on this occasion,
+and when he had done, he carried the hog to the sick in the hospital.
+
+The chiefs also gave directions for a small square stone to be smoothed
+and prepared for an epitaph; which being traced upon the stone by Mr.
+Taylor, the clergyman of the Alceste, was carved very neatly by the
+natives. The epitaph, after mentioning the name and age of the deceased,
+stated briefly, that he and his companions in his Britannic majesty's
+ships Alceste and Lyra, had been kindly treated by the inhabitants of
+this island. When the purport of the writing was interpreted to the
+chiefs, they appeared very much gratified at our acknowledging their
+attentions.
+
+18th of October.--Our friends expressed much pleasure on meeting us
+again, particularly Jeeroo, who seems to take great interest in our
+concerns: he carried us up to the sailor's tomb, where we were joined by
+Ookooma, Jeema, and some of the others, who unaffectedly expressed
+their sorrow for this man's untimely fate. I found my people who had
+been landed previous to our sailing on the survey, much recovered, and
+very grateful for the kindness of the natives. Milk, eggs, meat, and
+vegetables, had been brought to them every day, and whenever they felt
+disposed to walk they were accompanied by one or two of the natives, who
+took their arms on coming to rough ground, and often helped them up the
+steep side of the hill behind the hospital, to a pleasant grassy spot on
+the summit, where the natives lighted pipes for them: in short, I
+suppose sailors were never so caressed before.
+
+The chiefs were anxious to know what we had been doing during the week
+in which we had been absent. From an apprehension that they might be
+displeased at our having instituted a regular examination of the whole
+island, we said we had been looking at the harbour they had spoken of;
+they immediately mentioned the village of Oonting, and asked how we
+liked it. But they guessed that we had been round the island, from
+seeing that we returned by the south, though we had sailed to the north;
+they said repeatedly, that the island was very small, appearing to be
+anxious to depreciate it; our reply of course was, that it was very
+large and beautiful.
+
+Mádera has made great improvement in English, and his character is
+altogether more developed. He is quite at his ease in our company, and
+seems to take the most extraordinary interest in every thing belonging
+to us; but his ardent desire to inform himself on all subjects sometimes
+distresses him a good deal; he observes the facility with which we do
+some things, and his enterprising mind suggests to him the possibility
+of his imitating us; but when he is made sensible of the number of steps
+by which alone the knowledge he admires is to be attained, his despair
+is strongly marked. He sometimes asks us to read English aloud to him,
+to which he always listens with the deepest attention. One day, on
+shore, he saw me with a book in my hand: he begged me to sit down under
+a tree, and read: Jeeroo was the only chief present, but there were
+several of the peasants in attendance upon him; they all lay down on the
+grass, and listened with an attention and interest which are natural
+enough: every one expressed himself pleased and satisfied except Mádera,
+whose anxiety was to read in the same manner himself. From the earnest
+way in which he inquired into every subject, we were sometimes inclined
+to think that he must have been directed by the government to inform
+himself on these topics; and certainly a fitter person could not have
+been selected; for he adapted himself so readily to all ranks, that he
+became at once a favourite, and every person took pleasure in obliging
+him.
+
+Jeeroo is esteemed in another way; he is uniformly good humoured and
+obliging, and not without curiosity; but he is not clever, and has none
+of the fire and enthusiasm of Mádera. We all think kindly of Jeeroo, and
+shake him cordially by the hand when we meet him; but Mádera is admired
+and respected, as well as esteemed, and his society is courted for his
+own sake.
+
+Mádera is about twenty-eight years of age, of a slender figure, and very
+active; his upper teeth project in front over the lower ones, giving his
+face a remarkable, but not a disagreeable expression. He is always
+cheerful, and often lively and playful, but his good sense prevents his
+ever going beyond the line of strict propriety. When required by
+etiquette to be grave, no one is so immoveably serious as Mádera, and
+when mirth rules the hour, he is the gayest of the gay: such indeed is
+his taste on these occasions, that he not only catches the outward tone
+of his company, but really appears to think and feel as they do. His
+enterprising spirit and versatility of talent have led him to engage in
+a number of pursuits; his success, however, is the most remarkable in
+his acquisition of English. About a month after our arrival, he was
+asked what had become of his companion Anya; he replied, "Anya, him
+mother sick, he go him mother house;" and when asked if he would return,
+he said, "Two, three day time, him mother no sick, he come ship." With
+all these endowments and attainments he is unaffectedly modest, and
+never seems aware of his being superior to the rest of his countrymen.
+We were a long time in doubt what was his real rank; for at first he
+kept himself back, so that he was well known to the midshipmen, before
+the officers were at all acquainted with him: he gradually came forward,
+and though he always wore the dress of the ordinary respectable natives,
+his manners evidently belonged, to a higher rank, but he never associated
+with the chiefs, and disclaimed having any pretensions to an equality
+with them. Notwithstanding all this, there were occasional
+circumstances, which, by shewing his authority, almost betrayed his
+secret. One morning a difficulty arose about some supplies which the
+chiefs had engaged to procure, but which they had neglected to send; as
+soon as Mádera was told of the circumstance, he went to Captain Maxwell,
+and undertook to arrange it to his satisfaction, at the same time
+begging that if any difficulty occurred in future, he might be applied
+to. Whatever may be Mádera's rank in his own society, it is highly
+curious to discover in a country so circumstanced, the same politeness,
+self-denial, and gracefulness of behaviour which the experience of
+civilized nations has pointed out as constituting the most pleasing and
+advantageous form of intercourse.
+
+The great interest which Mádera took in the English, and the curiosity
+he always expressed about our customs at home, suggested the idea of
+taking him with us to England, where he would have been an interesting
+specimen of a people so little known; and he also might have carried
+back knowledge of the greatest use to his country. When it was proposed
+to him, he paused for some minutes, and then, shaking his head, said, "I
+go Injeree,--father, mother, childs, wife, house, all cry! not go; no,
+no, all cry!"
+
+In our absence a number of watch-houses had been erected on the heights
+round the anchorage; they are mere sheds of cane thatched over, in which
+three or four of the natives remain, day and night, in order to be ready
+to accompany any person who may happen to land, wherever it be. They
+have also erected a long shed, with a floor of split bamboo; in this
+place, which is on the top of the hill above the usual landing place,
+the chiefs generally assemble in the morning; they invite every one who
+passes to drink tea and smoke pipes, which is very convenient when the
+boats happen not to be ready to take us on board. Each of the chiefs is
+attended by a boy, generally his son, whose business it is to carry a
+little square box, in which there are several small drawers, divided
+into compartments, filled with rice, sliced eggs, small squares of
+smoked pork, cakes, and fish; and in one corner a small metal pot of
+sackee, besides cups and chopsticks. By having this always with them,
+they can dine when and where they choose. They frequently invite us to
+dine with them, and if we agree to the proposal, they generally ask any
+other of the chiefs whom they meet to be of the party and join dinners.
+The place selected for these pic-nics is commonly under the trees, in a
+cool spot, where a mat is spread on the grass; and every thing being
+laid out in great order, the party lies down in a circle, and seldom
+breaks up till the sackee pot is empty.
+
+An artist of the island brought a drawing of the Alceste on board to-day
+for Captain Maxwell: it is about two feet by one and a half, and is
+altogether a most extraordinary production, in which perspective and
+proportion are curiously disregarded. The captain and officers are
+introduced in full uniform, and a number of the sailors on the rigging
+and masts. With all its extravagance, however, it has considerable
+merit; there is nothing slovenly about it, and there is enough of truth
+in it to shew that it was sketched on the spot.
+
+A dispute has arisen between John the interpreter and the chiefs, who it
+seems had positively promised to get a horse for Captain Maxwell to
+ride; as they have not kept their word, John declares that he will have
+nothing to say to people who do not speak truth. They have again
+promised, however, that a horse will be got ready, and in the mean time,
+a fresh stock of beef and vegetables has been sent to both ships, which
+has pacified John a little. We have had much occasion to lament not
+having been accompanied by one of the gentlemen of the factory
+acquainted with the Chinese language, for although to have John is much
+better than to be without any interpreter, it is probable that he is not
+very delicate in his requests, and makes use of expressions and
+arguments unsuited to our character, and contrary to our wishes and
+instructions.
+
+19th of October.--In the morning, before breakfast, Captain Maxwell was
+informed by one of the chiefs, that a horse was ready for him on the
+beach; he landed accordingly, and found a little pony saddled, and two
+of the chiefs mounted. They objected to his riding in the country, where
+the roads were uneven, so that for the present his ride was confined to
+the beach. The saddle is made of wood, and so uneven as to be very
+unpleasant: it is proposed to have one made of a blanket and mats in
+future. To the stirrup there is tied a box, large enough to receive the
+whole foot.
+
+A dinner was given to-day by Captain Maxwell to the chiefs Ookooma,
+Shayoon, Issacha Sandoo, Jeema, and Issacha Hackeeboocoo; Jeeroo was
+also invited to it, but did not attend; being the junior, he had
+probably been left in charge of the beach and store-rooms. Mádera also
+made one of the party, though not originally included in the invitation.
+As he had never laid any claim to an equality in rank with the chiefs,
+it had not been thought right to invite him along with them: but Mádera,
+who probably knew that he would be very welcome, put himself in Captain
+Maxwell's way just before dinner, and was prevailed upon, after a little
+persuasion, to remain.
+
+Dinner was served at five o'clock in as sumptuous a style as possible.
+Ookooma was placed on Captain Maxwell's right, and Shayoon on his left;
+I sat beside the former, and Mr. Clifford next the other; then the two
+chiefs next in rank, and beside them two of the officers of the ship:
+the first lieutenant, Mr. Hickman, sat at the foot of the table, with
+Hackeeboocoo on his right, and Mádera on his left. They were all in
+great spirits, and ate and drank freely, and though they complained of
+the size of the glasses, and of the strength of the wine, tasted every
+thing from punch to champagne: the briskness of the last indeed
+surprised them not a little, and effectually muddled two of them for
+some time. Cheese was the only thing they all objected to, probably on
+account of its being made of milk, which they never taste. The
+interpreter not being present, the conversation was carried on through
+Mr. Clifford and Mádera, and partly by signs. Whether intelligibly or
+not, every body was talking. Mádera has dined often on board the ship,
+and is quite perfect in our customs. On this occasion he took great
+charge of the chiefs at his end of the table, speaking sometimes in one
+language and sometimes in the other. Observing Jeema eating ham without
+mustard, he called to Captain Maxwell's servant, and pointing to Jeema,
+said, "Tom, take mustard to him." When the desert was put on table, and
+the wine decanters ranged in a line, they exclaimed in astonishment,
+"Moo eeyroo noo sackee," six kinds or colours of wine; but the
+sweetmeats and prepared confectionary pleased them most.
+
+After sitting about an hour and a half after dinner, and drinking with
+tolerable spirit, they rose to depart; but this they were not allowed to
+do, and they were informed that it was the English custom to sit a much
+longer time. They represented that the sun had set, and they would never
+be able to find their way on shore, but would all be drowned in
+attempting it. This alarming difficulty was easily overruled by a
+promise of the barge, and they sat down again. While the discussion was
+going on between Captain Maxwell and his guests, Mádera kept his seat,
+and looked about him in his keen observant way, to discover, if he
+could, what was likely to be the issue of this adventure. Having
+observed that in general we were anxious to keep our company at table as
+long as we could, he naturally enough thought that we would not let this
+opportunity pass of entertaining the chiefs according to our fashion. He
+appeared to have settled this question with himself just as the chiefs
+resumed their seats, for rising half off his chair, and with a mixture
+of archness and simplicity, as if he had made an amusing discovery,
+cried out in English, "When all drunk then go ashore!" Though Mádera, as
+will be seen, was not quite right in his guess, there was enough of
+truth in his remark to raise a hearty laugh among those who understood
+him; and as he joined in this laugh at his own joke, it was some time
+before he could explain what he had said to the chiefs, who, being in a
+merry humour themselves, took it in perfect good part, though their
+mirth was evidently dashed by a little apprehension of the fate which
+Mádera had anticipated for them.
+
+The health of his Royal Highness the Prince Regent was then given, all
+the company standing in the most respectful manner. This was followed by
+the health of the King of Loo-choo, which was drank with similar
+observances. On sitting down after the latter toast, the chiefs
+conferred a few minutes across the table, and then all rose to propose
+Captain Maxwell's health; their wishes being explained by Mádera. When
+they sat down, Captain Maxwell proposed the health of Ookooma and the
+other chiefs, but as we in return stood up to drink to them, their
+modesty disclaimed this part of the compliment, and they rose likewise;
+nor was it till a good deal of persuasion had been used, that they
+consented to be seated while we were standing.
+
+These four bumpers made the party very merry, and it now was intimated
+to them, that as all the usual formalities had been observed, they might
+drink just as much as they liked, or pass the bottle altogether; a
+permission of which few of them took advantage. They lighted their
+pipes, laughed, joked, and seemed so happy, that it was agreed on all
+hands, that conviviality is no where better understood than at Loo-choo.
+After a time, at our request, they played some games, of which we had
+heard them speak. The object of these games was drinking; a cup of wine
+being the invariable forfeit. That every thing might be in character
+during the games, some of their own little cups were put on table. One
+person holds the stalk of his tobacco-pipe between the palms of his
+hands, so that the pipe rolls round as he moves his hands, which he is
+to hold over his head, so as not to see them. After turning it round for
+a short time, he suddenly stops, and the person to whom the bowl is
+directed has to drink a cup of wine. Another is a Chinese game: one
+person holds his hand closed over his head, he then brings it quickly
+down before him with one or more fingers extended; the person he is
+playing with calls out the number of them, and if he guesses right, he
+has to drink the cup of wine. These and other games caused a good deal
+of noisy mirth, and at length it was proposed by them to go out, in
+order to look at the sailors who were dancing on deck. Before leaving
+the cabin, they shewed us a Loo-choo dance round the table: Mádera
+placed himself at the head before Ookooma, while the others ranged
+themselves in a line behind him; he began by a song, the air of which
+was very pretty, and nearly at the same time commenced the dance, which
+consisted principally in throwing the body into a variety of postures,
+and twisting the hands about. Sometimes the hands were placed flat
+together, at others separate, but generally the former; the movements
+both of the body and hands were regular and of a waving description. The
+head was made to incline slowly from side to side, so as almost to
+touch the shoulders; the feet were moved with a slight shuffling motion,
+with an occasional long sweeping step to one side and then back again;
+but the perfection of the dance appeared to be in the proper use of the
+hands and body. The words of the dance song were "Sasa sangcoomah,
+sangcoomee ah! sangcoomee ah! kadee yooshee daw;" when they came to the
+last word they all joined in the chorus and clapped their hands.
+Although Mádera was the leader both in the dance and song, he was
+occasionally joined in the latter by several of the others, the whole
+party repeating the last word several times over. In this way they went
+several times round the table. Mádera had a graceful carriage, and his
+dancing, though fantastic, was really elegant; his singing too was in
+good taste. The others danced clumsily, though in perfect good time, and
+joined with some spirit in the chorus.
+
+The ship was illuminated, and the sailors were dancing on the upper
+deck. The chiefs were much pleased with this scene, which was lively
+enough. After watching the dance of the sailors for a few minutes,
+Mádera, who, to use a common phrase, "was up to every thing," ran among
+the sailors, and seizing one of them by the shoulders, put him out of
+the dance, took his place, and kept up the reel with the same spirit,
+and exactly in the same style and step as the sailors. The other dances
+were left off, and the whole ship's company assembling round Mádera,
+cheered and clapped him till the dance was done. The chiefs joined in
+the applause, seeming no less surprised than ourselves at Mádera's
+skill, for his imitation of the sailors' odd steps and gestures was as
+exact as if he had lived amongst seamen all his life. The officers then
+danced a country dance, after which the chiefs, unasked, and with a sort
+of intuitive politeness, which rendered every thing they did
+appropriate, instantly stepped forward and danced several times round
+the quarter-deck, to the infinite gratification of the sailors.
+
+On returning to the cabin to tea, they were all in high spirits, and
+while amusing themselves with a sort of wrestling game, Ookooma, who had
+seen us placing ourselves in the boxer's sparring attitudes, threw
+himself suddenly into the boxer's position of defence, assuming at the
+same time a fierceness of look which we had never before seen in any of
+them. The gentleman to whom he addressed himself, thinking that Ookooma
+wished to spar, prepared to indulge him; but Mádera's quick eye saw what
+was going on, and by a word or two made him instantly resume his wonted
+sedateness. We tried in vain to make Mádera explain what were the
+magical words which he had used to Ookooma. He appeared anxious to turn
+our thoughts from the subject, by saying, "Loo-choo man no fight;
+Loo-choo man write--no fight, no good, no, no. Ingerish very good, yes,
+yes, yes; Loo-choo man no fight." Possibly he considered that Ookooma
+was taking too great a liberty; or, perhaps, he thought even the
+semblance of fighting unsuitable with the strict amity subsisting
+between us.
+
+Before they went away, Captain Maxwell, who had remarked the
+satisfaction with which the chiefs received any attention shewn to their
+children, ordered a large cake to be brought him, which he divided into
+portions for the family of each. The chiefs were in a proper mood to
+feel this kindness, and they expressed themselves, as may be supposed,
+very warmly upon the occasion. When they put off for the shore they
+began singing, and never left off till they landed.
+
+20th of October.--The forenoon was passed at the Observatory, and
+afterwards we walked in the country without being observed, for the
+chiefs had not yet recovered from the effects of last night's gaiety:
+but we had not gone a mile before Jeeroo overtook us. We were very
+anxious to gain the brow of a neighbouring hill, from which we imagined
+there would be a good view of the palace; but although Jeeroo was the
+most obliging creature in the world on every other occasion, he was
+resolute now in not letting us go far beyond our usual limits; we tried
+to overrule his objections by telling him that we should do no
+mischief, and would not go farther than the adjoining height. He would
+listen, however, to nothing; and as we still walked slowly on, he at
+last sent off a messenger for assistance, but before this reinforcement
+arrived we had turned back, to Jeeroo's great relief. Although the
+object proposed had not been accomplished, we got a better sight of the
+palace than we had yet obtained. It is so much enclosed by trees that
+parts only can be seen, but it is undoubtedly a very large building. On
+returning we met Hackeeboócoo, the fat chief, coming puffing and blowing
+up the hill; he had set out to overtake us on being told by Jeeroo's
+messenger what we were proposing to do. He had drank a good deal of wine
+yesterday on board, and said he had been "weetee" (drunk), and that his
+head ached very much. After he joined us we passed near a village, where
+we met two women at the turning of a road: they did not see us till
+within a few yards, and their alarm was great; they threw down the
+baskets, which they were carrying on their heads, and fled into the
+wood. Our two companions were very uneasy at this rencontre, and would
+not listen to our reasoning upon the absurdity of their apprehensions,
+looking quite miserable till the subject, which seems to be an
+interdicted one, was changed. We went afterwards to the high ground
+behind the hospital, in order to fill up by eye the edges of the reefs
+in our charts, for which regular triangles could not be taken in the
+survey. While I was thus engaged, Mr. Clifford endeavoured to learn from
+Jeeroo whether or not the King lived in the large house spoken of
+before; Jeeroo as usual denied any knowledge of the King, and could not
+be prevailed upon to say what the house was, or who resided there; a
+peasant, however, who happened to be along with us was more
+communicative, and was giving all the information desired, when Jeeroo,
+observing what he was about, reprimanded him sharply. On coming down
+from the height we found all the chiefs seated in a long room erected on
+the outside of the garden gate: they were very merry on the subject of
+last night's adventure.
+
+21st of October.--While Mrs. Loy was employed at the well to-day washing
+clothes, at a moment when every body else was out of the way, she was
+visited by a Loo-choo lady, accompanied by a numerous guard of men. She
+describes her as being about eighteen years of age, well dressed, fair
+in complexion, with small dark eyes, and not without beauty; her hair
+was of a glossy jet black, made up into a knot on one side of the head.
+She wore a girdle tied at the side, and had on sandals like the men.
+Mrs. Loy wished to touch her, but she shrunk back in alarm. Whether
+these details be quite correct or not, the circumstance of a lady of
+rank having visited Mrs. Loy is so far interesting as it denotes a
+considerable degree of curiosity on the lady's part, together with the
+power of gratifying it, which, in a country where the women are strictly
+secluded, perhaps would not be allowed.
+
+22d of October.--Ookooma and Jeeroo came to the Observatory to-day,
+together with a number of the most respectable of the natives; they were
+desirous of seeing the reflected images of the sun in the artificial
+horizon through the telescope of the sextant. As this was placed on a
+stand there was no difficulty in satisfying their curiosity, for they
+had only to place their eye to the tube, the angle having been
+previously arranged. Many of them were amused by the changes of colour
+in the reflected images by means of the different shades; others were
+more struck with the apparent motion of the two suns, which is very
+perceptible when a high magnifying power is used; a few endeavoured to
+understand the meaning of what they saw, but with the exception of
+Jeeroo, I think they had no conception of its cause. Jeeroo appeared to
+have some notion of astronomy; his idea of eclipses was more accurate
+than could have been expected. From him Mr. Clifford got the names of
+the days and months, and the various points of information respecting
+Time, which will be found in the Vocabulary. Whenever we were actually
+taking observations, the natives invariably remained at a considerable
+distance. They had been told that the least motion disturbed the surface
+of the quicksilver, and prevented our taking observations. They had much
+patience, and sometimes sat quite still and silent for several hours,
+till invited to come forward to look at the instruments. When Ookooma
+and Jeeroo came to us, we observed that they were in great distress, and
+upon our asking the cause, the former explained that Captain Maxwell
+during his ride this morning had fallen down, or rather that his horse,
+which was too weak for his weight, had fallen with him, and that his
+finger was broken: "Tayin ma tawrittee, Tayin no eebee ootee" (the
+Tayin's horse fell, Tayin's finger broke). A Loo-choo doctor, he said,
+had gone on board, who would soon cure it.
+
+On going to the Alceste we found that the Loo-choo surgeon had placed
+Captain Maxwell's broken finger in a thick paste made of eggs, flour,
+and some other substance which he brought along with him. He then
+wrapped the whole in the skin of a newly-killed fowl. This skin dried in
+a short time and held the paste firm, by which the broken finger was
+kept steady. The doctor went through a number of ceremonies, such as
+feeling the pulse, looking at the tongue, and so on. He had a box along
+with him, containing upwards of a hundred medicines.
+
+Captain Maxwell mentioned, that while he was sitting in a shed after the
+accident, he was surprised to see a person enter the door crawling on
+all fours, and half dead with terror. This it appeared was the surgeon,
+who had been sent for by the chiefs. He was horror-struck at the
+accident, but soon recovered himself on observing Captain Maxwell's
+perfect tranquillity.
+
+Captain Maxwell's gentleness and forbearance, and his uniform attention
+to the wishes of the natives, and the great personal kindness which he
+had shewn to so many of them, had very early won their confidence and
+esteem. As our intercourse became more intimate, these feelings
+naturally became stronger, and the concern which the natives felt upon
+this occasion was very general, and was expressed, not only by Mádera
+and the chiefs, but by the lower orders, in a manner highly flattering
+to Captain Maxwell.
+
+23d of October.--A deputation of the chiefs went on board the Alceste
+early this morning to say, that the Prince of the island, who was the
+next person in rank to the King, and heir to the throne, meant to come
+on board the frigate this afternoon, as well for the purpose of paying
+a visit of ceremony, as of enquiring into the state of Captain Maxwell's
+health after the accident.
+
+At noon the four senior chiefs, dressed in their state robes and
+hatchee-matchees, came to announce the Prince's approach, and in about
+half an hour afterwards he was brought in a closed sedan-chair to the
+boat, through a concourse of people, to whom he seemed as much a show as
+to us. The state boat was a large flat-bottomed barge, covered with an
+awning of dark blue, with white stars on it, the whole having much the
+appearance of a hearse. It was preceded by two boats bearing flags with
+an inscription upon them, having in the bow an officer of justice
+carrying a lackered bamboo, and in the stern a man beating a gong. A
+vast number of boats were in attendance, some bearing presents, and
+others following out of mere curiosity. One of the Chiefs came on board
+with the Prince's card, which was of red paper forty-eight inches long,
+and eleven wide[12], and shortly afterwards the Prince's barge put off
+from the shore; upon which the rigging of both ships was manned, and a
+salute of seven guns fired; when he came on board he was received with a
+guard, and under a like salute. Captain Maxwell, who had been confined
+to the cabin ever since his accident, desired me to receive the Prince.
+No arrangement having been made with us respecting the ceremony of
+reception, I merely took off my hat and bowed: but all the chiefs fell
+on their knees the instant he came on the quarter-deck. I took his hand
+from one of the chiefs who had assisted him up the accommodation ladder,
+and led him to the cabin.
+
+When seated beside Captain Maxwell, the Prince made several anxious
+enquiries about his finger, expressing much regret that so disagreeable
+an accident should have occurred at Loo-choo. He then called to his
+pipe-bearer, and having prepared a pipe, presented it to Captain
+Maxwell, who returned him this compliment, by giving him one of his own.
+The usual questions as to our ages and families, and various
+complimentary speeches, having passed, he said he had heard much of the
+wonders of the ship, and should like to see them himself: he rose upon
+this and went to the globes, which he examined with great care. He
+begged to be shewn Ingeree, Loo-choo, Quantoong (China); Niphon (Japan);
+Manilla, and Pekin. The chiefs would not sit down in his presence, and
+never spoke to him without kneeling. On his expressing a wish to look at
+the different parts of the ship, he was conducted all round the decks.
+He observed every thing with attention, but without betraying any great
+degree of curiosity: he had heard of the boatswain's wife, and asked to
+see her; the lady, in her best dress, was presented to him; he stood for
+about half a minute looking at her with a sort of pleased surprise, and
+then, as if suddenly recollecting that this was somewhat rude, he drew
+his fan from his breast, and with an air of the utmost politeness, held
+it towards her, and upon Mrs. Loy curtsying in acknowledgment, he sent
+it to her by Mádera. He asked to see the fire-engine worked, and
+appeared much gratified by seeing the water thrown to so great a
+height. He had heard of the African negro, and begged that he might be
+sent for. When the black man was brought before him he looked
+exceedingly surprised, and probably was in doubt whether the colour was
+natural, as one of his people was sent to rub his face, as if to
+discover whether it was painted or not. The natives, who had flocked on
+board in crowds, fell on their knees whenever the Prince passed.
+
+[Illustration: THE PRINCE of LOO-CHOO.]
+
+On returning to the cabin, the Prince was invited to a collation
+prepared for him in the foremost cabin: for a long time he refused to
+sit down, nor could we conjecture what his objection was; at length,
+however, he complied, while the chiefs, who are neither allowed to sit
+down nor eat in his presence, retired to the after-cabin. He tasted
+every thing which was offered him, but seemed afraid of the wines,
+having probably heard of the proceedings on the evening of the 19th. In
+about half an hour he rose and went to the after-cabin; the chiefs and
+the people of his suite, to the number of fifteen, then sat down at the
+table he had left, and made ample amends for the temperance and
+moderation of his royal highness.
+
+As soon as they rejoined the party in the after-cabin, business was
+entered upon by Captain Maxwell's returning thanks, in the name of the
+English government, for the liberal way in which we had been supplied
+with every kind of refreshment, and for the other assistance which had
+been given to us. The Prince replied, that the King of Loo-choo was
+anxious to do every thing in his power for the King of England's ships.
+Upon this Captain Maxwell observed, that he was very desirous of seeing
+his majesty, for the purpose of expressing in person his gratitude for
+the kindness we had received in this country. The Prince answered, that
+it was contrary to the laws and customs of Loo-choo, for any foreigner
+to see the king, unless sent by his own sovereign, and charged with
+complimentary presents. Coming from such high authority, this assurance
+was conclusive, and as nothing further could now be said on the subject,
+the hope of opening a communication with this court, which had been so
+anxiously desired, seemed now destroyed. The Prince, however,
+unexpectedly resumed the subject, by saying that a letter would be
+written to the King of England, if Captain Maxwell would undertake to
+deliver it; his answer was, that nothing could give him more
+satisfaction than being made the bearer of such a communication: that he
+had earnestly desired the honour of paying his respects to his majesty,
+but from the moment that he had heard that it was contrary to the
+customs of the country, he had ceased to think of it. As soon as it was
+interpreted that Captain Maxwell was willing to carry the letter alluded
+to, and that he no longer urged his desire to see the King, the Prince
+rose and pressed Captain Maxwell's hand and mine between his, while all
+the chiefs fell on their knees in a circle round us, shewing by the
+expression of their countenances, how great the anxiety had been from
+which they were relieved by Captain Maxwell's ready acquiescence with
+their wishes: the Prince in particular, who had hitherto looked full of
+anxiety, became all cheerfulness, and his manner assumed a totally
+different character.
+
+The inference from this curious scene is, that the real object of the
+Prince's visit was to dissuade Captain Maxwell from urging his request
+to be allowed an interview with the King; and we conjectured that the
+circumstance of his accident was taken advantage of to pay a visit to
+the Alceste, where they naturally thought that the remonstrances of a
+man of such high rank as the Heir Apparent to the throne, would carry
+more weight than any which had yet been tried.
+
+When the Prince again alluded to the letter, it appeared that it was to
+be written by the minister, and not by the King. This altered the case
+materially, and Captain Maxwell most respectfully informed the Prince,
+that such a letter as he described could not be received, as it would be
+an indignity to our sovereign to offer his majesty a letter written by
+another king's minister. The Prince at once seemed sensible of the
+propriety of what Captain Maxwell had said, and calling the chiefs round
+him, entered into a long discussion with them: at the close of which, he
+declared himself incompetent to decide upon so important an occasion,
+but said that he would consult with the King, whose pleasure would be
+communicated in a few days. Captain Maxwell expressed his willingness to
+abide by his majesty's decision as far as was consistent with the
+respect due to his own sovereign. The Prince seemed entirely satisfied
+with this answer, and said something to the chiefs, upon which they
+again fell on their knees before Captain Maxwell, notwithstanding all
+his efforts to prevent them. Nothing more of any consequence passed.
+
+In the early part of the interview the present was brought in, or at
+least such parts of it as were capable of being thus displayed. The
+whole consisted of two bullocks, three hogs, three goats, and a quantity
+of vegetables and fruit; besides fifteen webs of the cloth of the
+island, thirty fans, and twelve pipes. The Prince said he had sent a
+present to me, which I found to consist of half the above mentioned
+things. He shortly afterwards rose to take leave. The rigging was manned
+on his going away, and similar honours were paid him as were shewn when
+he came on board.
+
+The Prince of Loo-choo, whose name is Shang Pung Fwee, and title Pochin
+Tay Foo, belongs to the highest of the nine orders of chiefs on the
+islands, the distinction of which rank is a hatchee-matchee of a pink
+ground, with perpendicular rows of black, yellow, blue, white, and green
+spots. He was clothed in a robe of light blue silk, lined with silk a
+shade lighter, over which he wore a girdle richly embossed with flowers
+of gold and different coloured silks: in other respects his dress was
+like that of the chiefs. He is about fifty years old, his beard is full
+and white, and his figure well proportioned. In manners he is genteel
+and sedate, but occasionally a little awkward, which his retired habits
+sufficiently account for. Towards the close of his visit, when his
+reserve had in some degree worn off, we observed him smile for an
+instant, now and then, with a shrewd expression in his eyes, as if he
+was observing what was passing more narrowly than we at first suspected.
+It was thought, too, that in making inquiries about different things on
+board, he shewed more discrimination than most of those who had preceded
+him; but on the whole, there was nothing very interesting in him besides
+his rank. While he was looking over the books and other things in the
+cabin, a picture of his majesty King George the Third was shewn to him.
+As the interpreter was not present, we could not immediately explain who
+it was intended to represent, till it occurred to us to join our hands
+and bow to it in the Loo-choo manner: the Prince instantly saw what was
+meant, and turning towards the picture, made a low and respectful
+obeisance.
+
+His suite consisted of several chiefs whom we had not seen before, and
+six or seven personal attendants, two of whom stood behind to fan him
+and light his pipe. It is curious that these men, who from their dress
+and manner were certainly servants, derived a sort of rank from being
+about the Prince's person; for when the chiefs sat down to table after
+he had left it, they all stood by as if expecting to be invited to sit
+down also; but Mr. Clifford, to whom Captain Maxwell had given the party
+in charge, having observed how particular they were with respect to the
+distinctions of rank, did not think of asking them to be seated, till
+Jeema requested him to do so; still suspecting some mistake, he applied
+to Mádera, who said it was perfectly correct, and they were accordingly
+asked to sit down with the rest.
+
+We had never been able to obtain from the natives any clear account of
+former visitors, and as the Prince was thought a likely person to be in
+possession of the desired information, questions were asked him upon
+this subject. He said that a vessel had been here about twenty years
+ago, and that she went away immediately without holding any
+communication with the court. This must have been the schooner in which
+Captain Broughton visited Napakiang in July, 1797, after he had been
+wrecked in his majesty's ship Providence, on the island of Typinsan[13].
+He said that he knew of no other stranger who had visited Loo-choo. On
+being interrogated as to the knowledge of other countries, he declared
+that they knew nothing of the English or French, or any nation indeed
+but the Chinese, Corean, and Japanese. Something was said about Manilla,
+and from its not being very remote, it is possible that some
+communication may have existed between that place and Loo-choo. Their
+accounts, however, were vague and unsatisfactory, and it is not
+impossible that we ourselves may have first suggested the name, and
+afterwards ascribed the use of it to them[14].
+
+Nothing, however, that occurred to-day, attracted more notice than
+Mádera's assumption of his long concealed rank. He came for the first
+time dressed in the robes and hatchee-matchee of a chief, and not only
+took precedence of all our old friends, but during the discussion in the
+cabin with the Prince, maintained a decided superiority over them all.
+While all the rest were embarrassed in the Prince's presence, and
+crouching on their knees every time they spoke, Mádera, though always
+respectful, was quite at his ease; and we could not help fancying that
+he addressed the Prince as if accustomed to his society. It was no less
+remarkable, that the Prince referred much oftener to him than to any of
+the rest, and listened to what he said with greater attention. Whether
+Mádera owed such distinction to his actual rank, which may have placed
+him about the court, or to the ascendancy of his talents, or to the
+accidental circumstance of his having had better opportunities of
+knowing us than any other of the natives, we could never discover. He
+admitted, when interrogated, that he had often seen the Prince before,
+while the other chiefs confessed their ignorance even of his person,
+before to-day.
+
+As soon as the Prince was placed in his chair and carried away, Mádera
+came on board, and entered with great good humour into all the jokes
+which were made upon his new character. He declined telling why he had
+kept his rank so long out of sight, but it was sufficiently obvious that
+his main object was to establish an intimacy with all the different
+classes on board the ships, and in this he completely succeeded; for he
+had gradually advanced in his acquaintance, first with the sailors, then
+the midshipmen, next with the officers, and last of all with the
+captains. By this means he gained the confidence and good will of each
+class as he went along; and by rising in consequence every day, instead
+of putting forward all his claims at once, acquired not only substantial
+importance with us, but gained a much more intimate knowledge of our
+character and customs than he could have hoped to do in any other way.
+
+24th of October.--Mr. Clifford went along with me to-day for the purpose
+of sketching the bridge, which, though not above three hundred yards
+from the landing place, the chiefs have always objected to our
+examining. We took Jeeroo with us without telling him our object, which
+he no sooner discovered than he became quite alarmed, and sent off for
+Mádera, who came to us immediately, and upon learning that nothing
+further was proposed than a mere examination of the bridge, he said that
+we might go on; having first made us promise solemnly not to go any
+further. While Mádera was binding us down in this way, I expressed some
+little impatience at his doubting our simple declaration of nothing more
+being intended than what we avowed; but his duty I suppose was
+imperative, and he would not leave us till the matter was arranged in
+his own way. As soon as he was satisfied on this point he said something
+to Jeeroo and left us; but turning back again, he came up to Mr.
+Clifford, and whispered, "captain no sulky?" meaning, we supposed, to
+express his apprehension that I had been angry at the stipulations so
+positively required by him. Mr. Clifford, having assured him that I was
+not sulky with him, detained him to ask him what it was he feared? what
+he had seen in us to excite such dread of our going near the town? He
+replied, "Loochoo woman see Ingeree man, Loochoo woman cry!" He then
+returned; and Jeeroo, who remained in a boat close to the bridge while I
+was employed measuring it and drawing it stone by stone, was greatly
+interested by Mr. Clifford's account of the great age of our venerable
+Sovereign, and the number of his family, which excited his astonishment
+and admiration. He conversed freely while the subject was the King of
+England, but the moment the slightest turn in the discourse was made
+towards the King of Loo-choo he drew up, and became impenetrable. "He
+did not know," he said, "how old he was, nor how many children he had;"
+in short he seemed scarcely to admit that he had ever heard any thing
+about him.
+
+From Mádera, however, who had no concealments, we learnt afterwards that
+the King has only one wife, but has twelve concubines; he is an old man,
+and has seven children. It is curious that none of the chiefs will
+inform Captain Maxwell whether or not the Prince who visited the ships
+yesterday has any children; it is hardly possible that they can be
+ignorant of the fact; but either they are kept strangely in the dark as
+to what passes in the palace, or they carry their reserve on royal
+topics to a singular length.
+
+From the bridge we went to the top of the hill above the well, where
+Jeeroo sung several songs. On the way up we stopped at one of the large
+horse-shoe tombs mentioned before, which resembles in all respects the
+tombs of China. On this similarity being pointed out to Jeeroo, he
+became anxious to explain that it was a Loo-choo tomb, and not
+exclusively Chinese; meaning probably that Loo-choo persons were
+contained in it. He informed us that these tombs did not contain a
+single person only, or a single generation, but were used as cemeteries
+from age to age. The bodies, according to his account, are put into
+coffins, and allowed to lie untouched for seven years, by which time the
+flesh is entirely decayed; the bones are then collected, and being put
+into cases are preserved by the families of the deceased with great
+care.
+
+25th of October.--This being the anniversary of His Majesty's accession
+to the throne, the ships were dressed in colours, and a royal salute
+fired. Upon the natives this produced a great effect; they had never
+seen any other flags than the single ensigns hoisted on Sundays, and
+this display of several hundred flags was well calculated to surprise
+and delight them. They were informed some days before that there would
+be some ceremonies in honour of our King, and great numbers of people
+had assembled on the shore in consequence. This morning had also been
+fixed upon for returning the Prince's visit; accordingly we left the
+Alceste at one o'clock, forming a procession of four boats, with flags
+in each. Captain Maxwell took twelve of his officers and young
+gentlemen, and six accompanied me from the Lyra, all being dressed in
+full uniform. We entered the harbour, and landed at the same part of the
+causeway as before, where the chiefs were in attendance, as on the
+occasion of our visit on the 23d ult.
+
+The Prince advanced a few yards on the outside of the gate, and having
+taken Captain Maxwell's hand, conducted him to the temple, where an
+ingenious device was adopted to preserve the etiquette, requiring that
+none of inferior rank shall sit down in the Prince's company. The temple
+was divided into three rooms by ranges of columns, which were deemed a
+sufficient separation; and, at the same time, no person in the other
+rooms could feel himself slighted by the exclusion, since the division
+by the pillars was merely nominal. The feast was sumptuous, consisting
+of twelve regular courses, besides tea and sackee. There were many new
+dishes, principally of meat, dressed in various ways in large bowls. We
+saw what seemed to be wheaten bread for the first time to-day. It being
+necessary to make some return for the presents brought on board by the
+Prince two days ago, Captain Maxwell now gave him several pieces of
+scarlet and blue superfine cloth, and samples of every species of
+cloths, from the finest damask to the coarsest sail canvas; also a set
+of cut crystal decanters and glasses, and three dozen of wine of ten
+different sorts, with several books, and a number of smaller articles.
+It was also stated to the Prince, that a cow and calf had been left on
+shore in order to be offered to the King as a small mark of our sense of
+the kindness which we had experienced. The Prince expressed much
+satisfaction at this gift, as the calf had become a great favourite with
+the natives. My present consisted of half the quantity of wine given by
+Captain Maxwell, a mirror taken from a dressing-stand, samples of
+English stationary, Cary's map of England, an atlas, and a small brass
+sextant; which latter present had been suggested by the wonder which it
+had invariably excited at the observatory. Mr. John Maxwell, to whom the
+Prince had sent a present of cloth and pipes after he landed yesterday,
+gave him a spy-glass and a map of London; the map was coloured, and
+round the edges were the palaces, Greenwich Hospital, and other public
+buildings, all of which he examined with great attention. After he had
+looked over most of the things, and was satisfied with the explanations,
+he rose and said that a great deal too much had been given, to which it
+was replied, that a great deal too little had been given, and that they
+were not offered as being, in any respect, an equivalent for the
+supplies sent on board, but merely to shew our sense of the kindness
+and attention with which we had been received[15]. During the time that
+we sat at table to-day, the interpreter was hardly ever called in, as
+Mádera and Mr. Clifford contrived between them to explain every thing,
+if not as clearly as could have been wished, yet in a more satisfactory
+manner than could have been done through the medium of John the
+Chinaman, of whose fidelity we were nowise certain, and whose taste and
+delicacy in conveying our sentiments we had great reason to doubt.
+
+The Prince, after a time, rose and proposed the King of England's
+health, which was accordingly drank in a cup of sackee. In return we
+gave the King of Loo-choo. As the surgeon had desired Captain Maxwell to
+drink no wine, there was very little drank at the Prince's table; but at
+the others every art was used to circulate the sackee pot. Indeed,
+little persuasion was required, for the sackee, though not strong, was
+very good. Ookooma presided at the table occupied by the officers, and
+Jeero at that where the midshipmen sat.
+
+Ookooma having remarked on board, that whenever the King's health was
+drank, whether his Majesty of England, or of Loo-choo, the cups were
+always freely emptied, took advantage of this loyalty of sentiment, and
+gave "The King of Injeree's health" three or four times over, to which,
+of course, the officers were obliged to reply, by giving "The King of
+Loo-choo" as often. He carried this rather farther than is customary
+with us on similar occasions, for observing that the company were rather
+backward in eating a bowl of sweet rice-meal porridge, he stood up with
+his bowl in his hand, and calling out "King of Injeree health!"
+swallowed the whole of it, and invited the rest to follow his example.
+
+The Prince seemed to enjoy the mirth of the other tables very much; he
+was himself more cheerful and disengaged than when we first saw him,
+though he appears to be naturally a silent man. Ookooma, by overacting
+his part, got, we thought, a little tipsy, and came several times into
+the state chamber, talking louder than was proper, but of this the
+Prince took no notice. When Ookooma came near my chair, I whispered to
+him, "Ya weetee," (you are drunk;) he turned round, and affecting to be
+angry, called out, "Weetee nang," (I am not drunk) in a voice and manner
+which were in direct contradiction to his assertion: his subsequent
+behaviour, however, was so correct and sedate when the feast broke up,
+and all were again upon duty, that he was probably merely pretending to
+be tipsy, in order to suit what was considered to be the humour of the
+company.
+
+On rising to depart, the Prince led Captain Maxwell by the hand, not
+only through the gate, but about twenty yards along the causeway; here
+he stopped and took leave. Captain Maxwell availed himself of this
+opportunity to repeat, for the last time, his thanks in the name of his
+government, for the numerous attentions and marks of kindness which we
+had received. He requested that what he had said might be communicated
+to the King, and assured the Prince, in the most earnest and respectful
+manner, that all the circumstances of our reception and entertainment
+should be stated to our own government. The Prince bowed to this in a
+manner which seemed to express his satisfaction at what was promised.
+Captain Maxwell next observed, that besides the high public benefits of
+which he had just been speaking, he felt individually greatly honoured
+and obliged by the particular attention which had been shewn to himself,
+and to the captain of the little ship, and hoped that the Prince would
+accept from himself a small mark of his respect and gratitude. As soon
+as this was interpreted to the Prince, Captain Maxwell took from his
+neck a small thermometer, set in silver, and presented it to the Prince,
+who leaned his head forward, and requested that it might be hung round
+his neck.
+
+This may be supposed a curious place to hang a thermometer, but we had
+learned during our intercourse with the chiefs, that some management of
+this kind was necessary whenever it was intended to offer them presents;
+for their extreme delicacy made them unwilling to accept any thing of
+value, lest it might appear in the light of remuneration for their
+hospitality. Whenever any thing merely ornamental, or of little value,
+was offered, and particularly if worn about the person, no objection was
+made to receiving it. It thus became the practice, as being the most
+convenient method, to tie the proposed gift by a ribbon round the neck;
+and after a time, every one had rings, seals, watch-keys, or bank tokens
+with holes drilled in them, prepared for these occasions. The
+thermometer which was given to the Prince had particularly attracted his
+notice when he was on board.
+
+After Captain Maxwell had given his present, the Prince turned to me,
+and I put over his neck a cornelian ornament, suspended by a ribbon, in
+the same manner as the thermometer.
+
+He was greatly delighted with these compliments, and immediately
+resuming Captain Maxwell's hand, led him along the whole length of the
+causeway to the boat, and then stepped upon the top of the parapet to
+see us row away.
+
+As soon as we had put off, every one in the boats stood up and gave
+three cheers; to which the Prince bowed several times, with his hands
+closed and raised to his breast. He remained on the parapet, and
+continued waving his fan to us as we rowed down the harbour, as long as
+we could see him. As the boats rowed in procession out of the harbour,
+all the chiefs ran along to the end of the causeway, where they
+continued, along with a vast crowd of natives, waving their
+handkerchiefs and fans till we were a great way from the shore. On each
+side of this group of chiefs a gong was beat incessantly. On every side,
+the rocks, the trees, houses, and boats, in short, every spot was
+crowded with people, waving their hands, and cheering us as we went
+along. This brilliant scene had less of novelty in it, to be sure, than
+what we had witnessed at the same place on the twenty-third of last
+month, but it was still more pleasing, for we had now become acquainted
+with many of the individuals forming this assemblage, and could feel
+assured that their expressions of kindness and respect were sincere. On
+the first occasion, too, the natives being ignorant of our intentions,
+were very generally alarmed at our appearance; and accordingly, though
+there was much curiosity shewn, a profound silence and stillness
+prevailed over the whole crowd, very different from the friendly shouts
+and signs with which they greeted us as we passed among them to-day.
+
+Precautions had been taken to prevent the ladies from indulging their
+curiosity as they had done on the first visit, not a female being seen
+any where.
+
+26th of October.--Last night both the Alceste and Lyra were illuminated.
+At nine o'clock a _feu de joie_ was fired, and a number of fire-works
+let off from the yard-arms. A great concourse of the natives, who had
+been apprised of our intentions, assembled on the shore, and were very
+highly delighted with this brilliant exhibition.
+
+[Illustration: SCENE after the PRINCE of LOO CHOO'S FEAST.]
+
+The sick, as well as the remaining stores belonging to the Alceste, were
+removed on board this morning, and every preparation made for sea. While
+employed in completing the series of observations at the observatory,
+Mádera joined us, having in his hand the sextant which I had given to
+the Prince yesterday. It seemed that he had been ordered to make himself
+acquainted with the use of it; and a more hopeless enterprise could not
+have been proposed to any man. But Mádera was not a man to be thrown
+into despair by difficulty; on the contrary, he persevered in observing
+with this sextant, and the more the difficulty was made apparent, the
+more keenly he laboured to overcome it. The progress which he made in a
+few hours in the mere practical operation of taking angles and altitudes
+was not surprising, because there is in fact not much difficulty in it;
+but he was nowise satisfied with this proficiency, and seemed anxious to
+apply his knowledge to some useful purpose.
+
+With a sextant on a stand, I made him take the distance between the sun
+and moon, four or five times; on every occasion he was wonderfully near
+the truth. We endeavoured to confine him to one object, merely to
+ascertain the time of apparent noon; and I think we succeeded in
+explaining to him how this was to be done. He expressed repeatedly his
+regret at our approaching departure, in which sentiment he was joined by
+Jeeroo and the rest of the chiefs, who were quite out of spirits.
+Jeeroo, poor fellow, had prepared a handsome dinner for us under a tree
+near the observatory. He made us drink what he called "wackaríttee," or
+the parting cup, several times over. We had a number of visitors at the
+observatory, who saw the instruments packed up and sent off with looks
+of real regret. They all said they were sorry we were going away. One
+man gave Mr. Clifford, as a farewell gift, a curious drawing of the
+Alceste dressed in flags, and executed, he said, by his son. The
+children, too, were all much affected by our preparations, and the
+wonted hilarity of the lower orders was quite gone.
+
+Having taken our final leave of the shore, we went to the Alceste, where
+we found the chiefs in conference with Captain Maxwell, who made each of
+the chiefs a present of a cut wine glass, which he knew they had long
+desired to possess. To Ookooma he gave a finely cut tumbler, in a red
+morocco case. This was much beyond his expectations, and perhaps his
+wishes, for he appeared to observe the wine glasses of the others with
+somewhat of a disappointed look. Captain Maxwell perceiving in a moment
+that Ookooma had set his heart upon a wine glass, opened the case, and
+placed one inside the tumbler, to Ookooma's great satisfaction; and soon
+afterwards the whole party went on shore, saying, before they left the
+ship, that in the morning the Bodzes would come on board in order to
+perform some sacrifice. As they never came, it is probable that the
+interpreter misunderstood them, particularly as Isaacha Sandoo said to
+Mr. Clifford, "Acha hoonee nittee Doochoo mang hoonee oocooyoong."
+"To-morrow the ships will go, and all the Loo-choo people will pray for
+them, or wish them well;" which was probably what was meant when the
+interpreter reported that the Bodzes were to come on board.
+
+While we were at dinner, Mádera came into the Alceste's cabin for the
+purpose of asking some questions about the sextant. He had not been
+aware of our being at dinner, and looked shocked at having intruded; and
+when invited to sit down, politely, but firmly declined. From the cabin
+he went to the gun room, to see his friend Mr. Hoppner, the junior
+lieutenant of the Alceste, with whom he had formed a great friendship.
+Mr. Hoppner gave him a picture of the Alceste and some other presents;
+upon which Mádera, who was much affected, said, "To-morrow ship go sea;
+I go my father house, two day distance: when I see my father, I show him
+your present, and I tell him, me, Henry Hoppner all same (as) brother,"
+and burst into tears!
+
+Sunday, 27th of October.--At daybreak we unmoored, and the natives, on
+seeing us take up one of our anchors, thought we were going to get under
+weigh immediately, and give them the slip, which was not at all
+intended. This alarm, however, brought the chiefs off in a great hurry;
+not in a body in their usual formal way, but one by one, in separate
+canoes. Old Jeema called on board the Lyra on his way to the frigate; he
+was a good deal agitated, and the tears came into his eyes when I put a
+ring on his finger. He gave me in return his knife.
+
+The other chiefs called alongside on their way to the frigate, but went
+on when I told them that I was just going to the Alceste myself. In the
+mean time Mádera came on board, with the sextant in his hand; he was in
+such distress that he scarcely knew what he was about. In this
+distracted state he sat down to breakfast with us, during which he
+continued lighting his pipe and smoking as fast as he could; drinking
+and eating whatever was placed before him. After he had a little
+recovered himself, he asked what books it would be necessary to read to
+enable him to make use of the sextant; I gave him a nautical almanack,
+and told him that he must understand that in the first instance: he
+opened it, and looking at the figures, held up his hands in despair, and
+was at last forced to confess that it was a hopeless business. He
+therefore put the sextant up and bade us farewell. Before he left the
+Lyra he gave Mr. Clifford his pipe, tobacco pouch, and a crystal
+ornament; saying, as he held out the last, "You go Ingeree, you give
+this to your childs."
+
+Mr. Clifford gave him a few presents in return, and expressed his
+anxiety to be considered his friend. Mádera, with the tears streaming
+down his cheeks, placed his hand several times upon his heart, and
+cried, "Eedooshee, edooshee!" My friend, my friend!
+
+To me he gave a fan and a picture of an old man looking up at the sun,
+drawn, he said, by himself: he probably meant in his picture some
+allusion to my usual occupation at the observatory. After he had put off
+in his boat, he called out, "Ingeree noo choo sibittee yootoosha," I
+shall ever remember the English people. When he went to the Alceste, one
+of the chiefs remarked that he had neither his hatchee-matchee on nor
+his robes, and told him that it was not respectful to wait upon Captain
+Maxwell for the last time, in his ordinary dress; particularly as all
+the others were in full array. Mádera, who, poor fellow, had been too
+much concerned about other matters to think of dress, was shocked at
+this apparent want of politeness, and went immediately to apologize to
+Captain Maxwell, who took him by the hand, and gave him a present,
+telling him, at the same time, that he was always too happy to see him,
+to notice what dress he had on.
+
+On going into the cabin, I found the chiefs seated in a row, all very
+disconsolate, and apparently trying to conceal emotions different, in
+all probability, from any which they had ever before experienced.
+Captain Maxwell had made them his parting present, and I therefore gave
+to each chief some trifle, receiving from them in return, their knives,
+pipes, pouches, and fans. In the mean time the anchor was hove up, and
+every thing being ready for making sail, the chiefs rose to take leave.
+Ookooma wished to say something, but was too much affected to speak, and
+before they reached their boats they were all in tears.
+
+Mádera cried bitterly as he shook hands with his numerous friends, who
+were loading him with presents.
+
+The chiefs, as well as the people in the numerous canoes which had
+assembled round the ships, stood up, and continued waving their fans and
+handkerchiefs till we were beyond the reefs, and could see them no
+longer.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+Almost every thing respecting the manners and customs of Loo-choo, with
+which we have had an opportunity of becoming acquainted, has been laid
+before the reader in the foregoing narrative. It is proposed to insert
+here a few particulars which in the hurry of the moment were noted down
+without date. They might easily have been embodied with the narrative,
+but it has been considered of less consequence to sacrifice arrangement,
+than to interfere in any way with the integrity of the Journal, in which
+nothing has been inserted out of the exact order in which it is known to
+have happened.
+
+The religion of Loo-choo appears to be that of Fo, said to be introduced
+by the bodzes one thousand years ago[16]. We found great difficulty in
+discovering any thing precise on this subject from the natives; but from
+all that we could gather, religion does not appear to be made a matter
+of general instruction as in Europe, being left, as in China, to the
+priests. This we infer from the careless way in which the subject was at
+all times treated by the natives, and the ignorance which they
+professed of the forms and ceremonies used in the temples. The bodzes
+are not respected or esteemed in society; they are prevented from
+marrying, and are not allowed to eat meat: few people associate with
+them, and even the children turn them into ridicule. On the occasion of
+the Loo-choo funeral service over the grave of the seaman, the bodzes
+stood behind, and were not called upon to officiate, the service being
+entirely performed by Jeeroo.
+
+In the large temple we saw three gilt idols and various pictures; but
+with the exception of the funeral service just alluded to, we never met
+with any thing in the least degree resembling a religious ceremony. The
+bodzes kept the temple clean swept, and took care of the walks and
+hedges, and this appeared to be their only employment. It is fair to
+suppose, however, that the occupation of the temple by us may have
+caused a temporary cessation of their religious observances.
+
+They have large tombs or cemeteries for their dead, being mostly of the
+Chinese form, viz. that of a horse-shoe. They are formed of stones and
+mortar, and are covered with a coat of cheenam, (shell lime), which is
+always kept nicely whitewashed and clean swept: some are more highly
+finished than others; their size varies from twenty to thirty feet in
+length, by twelve to fourteen broad. The coffin, when closed, is placed
+in the vault under the tomb, and is not touched for six or seven years,
+by which time the flesh is found to have separated and wasted away; the
+bones are then collected, and put into jars ranged in rows on the inside
+of the vault. Burning is never used at any stage of the proceedings, nor
+under any circumstances. In the course of time, when these vaults become
+crowded, the vases are removed to houses appropriated to their reception
+above ground: such must have been the building described by Mr. Clifford
+in the village near Port Melville. The lower orders, who cannot afford
+these expensive tombs, take advantage of hollow places in the rocks,
+which by a little assistance are made secure vaults. In the cliffs
+behind the village of Oonting, the galleries cut for the reception of
+the vases must have been the work of men possessed of power and
+authority. Not being fully aware what the Chinese customs are with
+respect to the dead, in ordinary cases, it is impossible for us to say
+how nearly they resemble those of Loo-choo, but there are certainly some
+points of resemblance.
+
+From Mr. Clifford's notes on the Loo-choo inscriptions, I have extracted
+the following particulars.
+
+"A number of carved stones, called by the natives Kawroo, were found at
+many places, particularly in the groves on the hill. The Kawroo is two
+feet long, by one wide, and one high; it is excavated a little on the
+upper part, on which an offering of rice is placed. On the sides of this
+stone are carved a variety of characters, denoting the rank of the
+person who makes the offering, as well as the object of his petition,
+together with the date.
+
+"Two of these inscriptions, copied at the time, have since been
+translated by a gentleman acquainted with the Chinese characters. The
+first gives an account of a man about to sail for China, in the reign of
+Kien Lung, the late monarch of that country; this person implores the
+divine aid in protecting him during his voyage. The other is dated in
+the twenty-first year of the reign of Kia-King, the present emperor of
+China, answering to the year 1816, in which we visited Loo-choo. This is
+an invocation to the deity for success in a literary pursuit.
+
+"Two narrow strips of paper, with characters inscribed on them, which by
+consent of the natives were taken from a pillar in the temple, and which
+have since been translated, prove to be invocations, one to the supreme
+deity, and the other to the evil spirit. The first is on a slip of
+paper, two feet long, by two inches wide, and contains a supplication
+for pardon. The latter invocation begins by seven rows of the character
+symbolical of the Devil. In the upper line there are seven, and in the
+last one, so that a triangular page is formed of twenty-eight
+characters, each signifying the Devil; and the prayer itself is written
+in a narrow perpendicular line underneath; the whole inscription
+resembling in form a kite with a long tail attached to it."
+
+Polygamy is not allowed in Loo-choo as in China, and the king, it
+appears, is the only person permitted by law to have concubines; they
+invariably spoke with horror of the Chinese practice, which allows a
+plurality of wives, and were much gratified on learning that the English
+customs in this respect were similar to those of Loo-choo. The women are
+not treated so well as we were led to expect from the mildness of
+character in the men, and their liberality of thinking in general. The
+upper classes of women are confined a good deal to their houses, and the
+lower orders perform much of the hard work of husbandry. We saw them at
+a distance, in great numbers, carrying loads on their heads. Mádera says
+that the women are not treated with much indulgence, being even
+restricted from using fans; and that when they are met out of doors by
+the men, they take no notice of one another, whatever may be the degree
+of relationship or intimacy subsisting between them. The perseverance
+with which they kept the women from our sight is curious, and leads us
+to conjecture that the general practice of the island is to seclude the
+women at all times. In this respect they differ from the Japanese, who
+are said to allow wives to every stranger. This degree of seclusion
+does not prevail in China, as we had opportunities of observing at
+several places never before visited by Europeans. The Chinese account
+quoted in the Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses, vol. 23, states that the
+young men and women marry on this island by choice, and not, as in
+China, by a contract made without any personal knowledge of each other.
+We took every opportunity of interrogating them on this subject, but as
+the question was always evaded, we fear that their practice in this
+respect is not so praiseworthy as that account would make it appear.
+
+Of their literature we could get but few satisfactory accounts; they say
+that they have few books in their own language, the greater number on
+the island being Chinese. The young men of rank are sometimes sent to
+China to be educated. Jeeroo had been there when a boy. None but the
+upper classes understand the spoken Chinese, and the peasantry are in
+general ignorant both of the spoken and written Chinese language.
+
+They appear to have no money, and from all we could see or hear, they
+are even ignorant of its use. Those, however, who have visited China
+cannot be so ill informed, and yet none of them set any value upon
+Spanish dollars, or upon any gold coins that we had. Though we were
+incessantly trying to make out from Mádera and the others, what their
+medium of exchange was, we could never learn any thing distinct upon the
+subject, nor could they be made to comprehend our questions about money;
+a difficulty, it may be observed, which we should expect to meet with
+among people whose only mode of purchase was by barter. The only
+circumstance which came to our knowledge bearing at all upon this
+question, was during the time when the garden was under preparation for
+the reception of the Alceste's stores; it was then remarked that each of
+the labourers employed had a little piece of paper stuck in his hair,
+with a single character written on it; this naturally excited our
+curiosity, but the inquiries we were enabled to make at that early stage
+of our knowledge of the language, led to nothing conclusive. Afterwards,
+when our means in this respect were more ample, we could not recall the
+circumstance to the recollection of the chiefs. As these papers were
+called by the people wearing them, "hoonátee," and as "hoónee" means
+ship, Mr. Clifford has conjectured that they may have been written
+passes to enable them to enter the gate on the ship's business.
+
+We saw no arms of any kind, and the natives always declared that they
+had none. Their behaviour on seeing a musket fired certainly implied an
+ignorance of fire-arms. In a cottage at the north end of the island, we
+saw a spear which had the appearance of a warlike weapon, but we had
+every reason to believe that this was used for the sole purpose of
+catching fish, having seen others not very dissimilar actually employed
+in this way. They looked at our swords and cutlasses, and at the Malay
+creeses and spears, with equal surprise, being apparently as little
+acquainted with the one as with the other. The chiefs carried little
+case knives in the folds of their robes, or in the girdle, and the lower
+orders had a larger knife, but these were always of some immediate
+practical utility, and were not worn for defence nor as ornaments. They
+denied having any knowledge of war either by experience or by tradition.
+
+We never saw any punishment inflicted at Loo-choo: a tap with the fan,
+or an angry look, was the severest chastisement ever resorted to, as far
+as we could discover. In giving orders, the chiefs were mild though
+firm, and the people always obeyed with cheerfulness. There seemed to be
+great respect and confidence on the one hand, and much consideration and
+kind feeling on the other. In this particular, more than in any other
+that fell under our notice, Loo-choo differs from China, for in the
+latter country we saw none of this generous and friendly understanding
+between the upper and lower classes.
+
+One day when we were drinking tea and smoking pipes with the chiefs, on
+the top of the hill, a boy began to exhibit feats of tumbling before us;
+in a short time all eyes were turned towards him, and his modesty caused
+him to desist. We offered him buttons and various things, but he would
+not resume his tumbling: we then asked Jeema to interfere; he did so,
+and told the youngster to go on; but he kept his seat, and Jeema became
+angry, or rather pretended to be so, yet the tumbler sat obstinately
+still. "Well," said Jeema to us, "what is to be done? It was for his own
+amusement that he began, and probably for his amusement he will do so
+again." The boy, when left alone, in a short time resumed his tumbling.
+I mention this to shew Jeema's good sense in not forcing the boy to do
+that as a task, which he had begun as an amusement, and which he had
+discernment enough to know would be unpleasant for us to witness in any
+other way. By this treatment of their children, mutual cordiality and
+freedom of intercourse are encouraged. It was probably owing to this
+mode of education that the children became at once familiar with us. One
+day while I was employed sketching the village and trees near the
+bridge, a boy stopped near me, and without saying any thing, endeavoured
+to attract my notice by performing various gambols before me. I took no
+notice of him for some time, but at last looked up and smiled; upon
+which the boy cried out in perfectly good English, "How do you do? Very
+well, I thank you;" and ran off, quite delighted at having displayed his
+proficiency in English.
+
+The chiefs were generally accompanied by one or two of their sons, who
+took their places near them, and were always put forward when there was
+any thing curious to be seen. In this way they were encouraged to make
+themselves acquainted with every thing, and yet nothing could be more
+respectful or affectionate than they always were. Great pains were taken
+to form the manners of the children, and we never observed an instance
+of rudeness in any one of them, though they were as full of life and
+spirits as the wildest English school-boys. John the Chinaman afforded
+them much amusement: he was a great coxcomb, and therefore fair game for
+the boys; they used to surround him and pretend to pull his long tail;
+but they never actually pulled it, but merely teazed him a little, and
+then ran away. These little traits seem worthy of notice, as they belong
+to a style of education quite different from what we had seen in China
+and some other eastern countries, where the children are made to look
+like men in miniature.
+
+During our intercourse with these people, there did not occur one
+instance of theft. They were all permitted to come on board
+indiscriminately; to go into the cabins, store-rooms, and wherever they
+liked, unattended. At the temple the Alceste's stores of every kind were
+lying about, as well as the carpenter's and armourer's tools; and in the
+observatory, the instruments, books, and pencils were merely placed
+under cover; yet there was not a single article taken away, though many
+hundreds of people were daily admitted, and allowed to examine whatever
+they pleased. This degree of honesty is a feature which distinguishes
+the people of Loo-choo from the Chinese, as well as from the inhabitants
+of the islands in the South Sea and of the Malay Archipelago; among whom
+even fear, as was ascertained by Captain Cook and other voyagers, is
+altogether insufficient to prevent theft. At Loo-choo the people are
+considerably civilised; but they have few wants, and they appear to be
+perfectly contented. Honesty is perhaps the natural consequence of such
+a state of society.
+
+We saw no musical instruments of any kind; they were, however, aware of
+their use. The natives almost all sing, and we heard several very sweet
+airs, principally plaintive: they had many jovial drinking songs, one of
+which we wrote down from their singing; it was inscribed on a drinking
+cup, and is as follows:
+
+ "Ty´wack koo, tawshoo, shee kackoofing,
+ "Chaw ung, itchee shaw, shooha neebooroo;
+ "Ting shee, you byee, chee taroo shoo ninnee
+ "Nooboo cadsee meesee carra shaw jeeroo
+ "Shing coodee sackee oochee noo shing."
+
+The Chinese characters on the drinking-cup were thus translated in
+China, "Tywack hoo[17], inspired by a jar of wine, writes an hundred
+pages of odes or verses without end. At the market town of Chaw-ung[18]
+he entered a wine shop to sleep. The Emperor summoned him to appear; in
+his haste to obey the summons, he forgot to put on his neckcloth, and
+rushing into the royal presence, exclaimed, 'I am the wine-loving
+immortal.'"
+
+The Loo-choo dress has been so frequently mentioned, that a brief
+notice, in recapitulation, will suffice in this place. Their loose robe
+was generally made of cotton, and of a great variety of colours. The
+robe of a grown up person was never flowered or printed over with
+figures, being generally of a uniform colour, though instances occurred
+of striped cloths being worn by the chiefs. This robe opened in front,
+but the edges overlapped, and were concealed by the folds, so as to
+render it difficult to say whether or not the robe was continued all
+round: the sleeves were about three feet wide: round the middle was
+bound a belt or girdle about four or five inches wide, always of a
+different colour from the dress, and in general richly ornamented with
+wrought silk and gold flowers. The folds of the robe overhang the belt,
+but not so much as to hide it: the whole of the dress folds easily, and
+has a graceful and picturesque appearance. The garments worn by the
+children were often gaudily printed with flowers. In rainy or cold
+weather, a sort of great coat was worn by the chiefs only, of thick blue
+cloth, buttoning in front over the robe, and tighter both in body and
+sleeves than the other. This cloth resembled the coarse cloth used in
+China; and it looked like woollen manufacture, and may possibly have
+been originally brought from England. The sandals worn by all ranks were
+exactly the same; they were formed of straw wrought into a firm mat to
+fit the sole of the foot, smooth towards the foot, and ragged
+underneath: a stiff smooth band of straw, about as thick as one's little
+finger, passes from that part of the sandal immediately under the ancle
+and over the lower part of the instep, so as to join the sandal at the
+opposite side; this is connected with the foremost part of the sandal by
+a short small straw cord which comes between the great toe and the
+next one. The upper classes wore stockings of white cotton, not unlike
+our half stockings, except that they button at the outside, and have a
+place like the finger of a glove for the great toe.
+
+[Illustration: GENTLEMAN of LOO CHOO in his CLOAK.]
+
+Their hair is of a jet black, and is kept glossy by juice expressed
+from a leaf. There is no variety in the fashion of dressing it; it is
+pulled tight up all round, and is formed at top into a compact knot, so
+as to conceal the crown of the head, which is shaved; through the knot
+are thrust two metal pins, one of which has a square point and flowered
+head consisting of six leaves or divisions: the other pin has one end
+sharp, and the other shaped like a scoop: the length of these pins is
+from four to six inches. We did not see the Prince's, as he remained
+covered during all the time of his visit; but the Chief of high rank,
+who visited the Alceste on the 23d of September, had the flowered end of
+one pin studded with precious stones. The higher orders wear, on state
+occasions, what they called a "hatchee-matchee," which is a kind of
+turban, apparently made by winding a broad band round a cylinder, in
+such a way, that a small segment of each fold is shewn at every turn, in
+front above, and behind below; this is effected by giving a slight
+diagonal direction to each fold. The lower orders occasionally tie a
+coloured cloth or handkerchief round the head; this they call "sadjee:"
+next the body they wear a thin cotton dress. The men wear no ornaments
+through their flesh, nor are they tattooed: we saw, indeed, some
+fishermen who had fish spears marked on their arms, but this does not
+prevail generally. An etching of these marks is given by Mr. Clifford in
+the second part of the Vocabulary.
+
+The cattle on this island, which are of a small black breed, are used
+exclusively for agricultural purposes. Hogs, goats, and poultry, with
+rice and a great variety of vegetables, form the food of the
+inhabitants: milk is never used. We saw no geese, so that those left by
+Captain Broughton most probably did not thrive. They have no sheep nor
+asses. Their horses are of a small slight make, and the natives are very
+fond of riding. We saw no carts or wheeled carriages of any kind, horses
+being used to carry loads; for this purpose the roads are numerous, and
+kept in excellent order, being from six to ten feet wide.
+
+Their mode of dressing the ground is neat, and resembles the Chinese,
+particularly in manuring and irrigating it. This is most attended to
+where the sugar-cane is cultivated: they have, besides, tobacco, wheat,
+rice, Indian corn, millet, sweet potatoes, brinjals, and many other
+vegetables. The fields, which are nicely squared, have convenient walks
+on the raised banks running round each. Along the sides of the hills,
+and round the villages, the bamboo and rattan grow to a considerable
+size. The pine is the most conspicuous tree on the island, growing to a
+great height and size, which we infer from seeing canoes built with
+planks several feet wide; the trees, however, near the temple at
+Napakiang were not above ninety feet high, and from three to four in
+girt. The banyan-tree of India was seen at several places; the finest
+one overhung the small temple at Napakiang, which circumstance led to
+the enquiry whether, as in India, this tree is held sacred, but we could
+gain no information on this subject.
+
+In a little plot of ground in the temple garden, Mr. Phillips, purser of
+the Alceste, sowed mustard-seed, peas, and a variety of other seeds, the
+natives taking his directions for their culture. Our total ignorance of
+botany prevented our making any observations on this subject while at
+Loo-choo; but to supply this deficiency, we collected specimens of every
+plant at the place. These were preserved between sheets of brown paper,
+and given afterwards to Mr. Abel, the naturalist of the embassy, in
+order to be arranged; but they were subsequently lost, along with the
+whole of that gentleman's collection.
+
+Of their manufactures it is difficult to speak with certainty. By their
+own account the silks which they wear are Chinese, but the cotton cloths
+are made on this and the neighbouring islands; the printed patterns of
+these are not without elegance. We saw no weaving looms, but as we were
+only in a few houses, this is not surprising: the webs are thirty-six
+feet long, and fourteen inches broad. Tobacco-pipes and fans are made at
+Loo-choo; as well as the sepulchral vases, of which there is a
+manufactory at Napakiang, from whence they are exported to Oonting, and
+other parts of the island. Some of the pouches of the chiefs were made
+of cloth, which they say comes from China; it is exactly like our broad
+cloth. We tried in vain to learn what goods they send to China in
+exchange for silks: perhaps sulphur forms a part, which these islands
+are said to produce, as well as tin. From the number of vessels
+constantly sailing out and in, it appears that they must have some
+trade, but our enquiries on this and many other topics, though
+sedulously pursued, led to nothing satisfactory, owing probably rather
+to our ignorance of the language, than to any wish on their part to
+withhold information; because, on topics which had no reference to the
+royal family or the women, they in general spoke freely.
+
+We had frequent opportunities of seeing their method of making salt, and
+an account of it may, perhaps, be interesting. Near the sea, large level
+fields are rolled or beat so as to have a hard surface. Over this is
+strewn a sort of sandy black earth, forming a coat about a quarter of an
+inch thick. Rakes and other implements are used to make it of a uniform
+thickness, but it is not pressed down. During the heat of the day, men
+are employed to bring water in tubs from the sea, which is sprinkled
+over these fields by means of a short scoop. The heat of the sun, in a
+short time, evaporates the water, and the salt is left in the sand,
+which is scraped up and put into raised receivers of masonry about six
+feet by four, and five deep. When the receiver is full of the sand, sea
+water is poured on the top, and this, in its way down, carries with it
+the salt left by evaporation. When it runs out below at a small hole, it
+is a very strong brine; this is reduced to salt by being boiled in
+vessels about three feet wide and one deep. The cakes resulting from
+this operation are an inch and a half in thickness.
+
+Of the population of this island we know nothing satisfactory: the
+natives invariably pleaded ignorance themselves; and as we had no
+precise data, our estimates were made at random, and as they never
+agreed with each other, they are not worthy of notice. From the south
+point of this island, to five or six miles north of Napakiang, an extent
+of sixteen or eighteen miles, the country is highly cultivated, and is
+almost entirely covered with villages. All round Port Melville too there
+are populous villages, but the north, north-east and eastern places are
+thinly peopled, and not cultivated to any extent. We saw nothing like
+poverty or distress of any kind: every person that we met seemed
+contented and happy. We saw no deformed people, nor any who bore
+indications of disease, except a few who were marked with the small-pox.
+
+The style of living of those with whom we associated is generous and
+free; their custom of carrying about their dinner in boxes, and making
+little pic-nic parties, is peculiarly striking, and they appeared fully
+sensible of the advantage of bringing people together in this way, and
+expressed much satisfaction at the ready way in which we fell into a
+custom from which all formality was dismissed. They shewed, moreover, a
+good deal of discernment, and could adapt themselves to the character of
+the particular persons they happened to be in company with, in a manner
+very remarkable; but this was evidently the result not of cunning, but
+of correct feelings, and of a polite habit of thinking.
+
+Of their manners, little need be added here to what every page of the
+narrative will show. It ought to be particularly noticed, however, that
+they are an exceedingly timorous people, and naturally suspicious of
+foreigners. A stranger visiting Loo-choo ought therefore to keep these
+features of their character constantly in mind. By imitating Captain
+Maxwell's wise plan of treating the natives with gentleness and
+kindness, and shewing every consideration for their peculiarities, he
+will stand the best chance of gaining their good-will and confidence.
+But if he should betray any impatience, or be at all harsh in treating
+with them, he may rest assured that he will lose much time, and in all
+probability fail at last in his attempts to establish an unreserved and
+friendly intercourse.
+
+As Loo-choo, however, lies quite out of the track of trading ships, and
+does not appear to produce any thing of value itself, and as the
+inhabitants seem indifferent about foreign commodities, and if they
+wished to possess them are without money to make purchases, it is not
+probable that this island will be soon revisited.
+
+[Illustration: BRIDGE AT NAPAKIANG.]
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 11: We first discovered the meaning of this word by hearing
+one of the natives apply it to the castle on the chess board: he used
+the same term when drawings of towers and castles were shewn to him.]
+
+[Footnote 12: The literal translation of the card is "Loo-choo nation,
+extender of laws, Great Person (called Ko), Heang, bows his head and
+worships," (the common visiting expression among the Chinese.) It ought
+to be remarked, that the Prince's name is placed on one corner of the
+card, which is the most respectful mode that can be used, according to
+Chinese usage.]
+
+[Footnote 13: See Broughton's Voyage, Book II. Chap. 2. for a very
+interesting account of the natives of Typinsan, who appear to resemble
+the people of the Great Loo-choo Island. In Book II. Chap. 3. Captain
+Broughton gives an account of his visit to Napachan. He was received by
+the inhabitants with great kindness; they supplied his wants, but
+objected to his landing, and sent back to the schooner some of the
+officers who had been sent on shore to examine the town. We found
+Captain Broughton's account of the people quite accurate.]
+
+[Footnote 14: At Manilla we found that the Great Loo-choo Island was
+known only by name. There appeared to be no intercourse between the two
+places.]
+
+[Footnote 15: LIST OF SUPPLIES RECEIVED AT LOO-CHOO BY H.M. SHIPS.
+
+ |Alceste. | Lyra. |
+ Bullocks | 19 | 8 |
+ Pigs | 23 | 10 |
+ Goats | 15 | 7 |
+ Fowls | *216 | 102 |*Not including
+ Fish | 29 | 12 |extra supplies
+ Eggs | 920 | 455 |to the officers.
+ Bags of sweet potatoes | *59 | 27 |*Not including
+ Squashes | 34 | 14 |ditto.
+ Jars of Samchoo, each containing about | | |
+ fifteen gallons | 6 | 3 |
+ Baskets of oranges | 9 | 4 |
+ Bundles of gingerbread | 8 | 3 |
+ -----------Onions | 16 | 8 |
+ -----------Radishes | 30 | 12 |
+ -----------Celery | 12 | 5 |
+ -----------Garlick | 8 | 4 |
+ -----------Candles | 7 | 3 |
+ -----------Wood | 16 | 8 |
+ Pumpkins | 60 | 30 |
+ Baskets of vermicelli | 7 | 3 |
+ Boxes of sugar | 2 | 1 |
+ Rolls of printed linen | 14 | 7 |
+ Bundles of paper | 6 | 3 |
+]
+
+[Footnote 16: See Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses, vol. 23.]
+
+[Footnote 17: A man celebrated in the Tung dynasty for his convivial
+disposition: he is known in China by the name of Jai-pe.]
+
+[Footnote 18: The town of Chang-ngan in China, near the Great Wall.]
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX:
+
+CONTAINING
+
+
+CHARTS
+
+OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THE GREAT LOO-CHOO
+ISLAND, NAPAKIANG ROADS, AND PORT MELVILLE: WITH BRIEF EXPLANATORY
+NOTICES.
+
+
+TABLE OF OBSERVATIONS
+
+MADE WITH DR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR: WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND A
+DESCRIPTION OF THIS INSTRUMENT, AND DIRECTIONS FOR ITS USE.
+
+
+METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,
+
+FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 1816, WHILE THE SHIPS WERE IN THE YELLOW AND JAPAN
+SEAS.
+
+
+ABSTRACT OF THE LYRA'S VOYAGE,
+
+FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN; SHEWING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE
+DIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICH SHE TOUCHED, AND THE TIME TAKEN IN PERFORMING
+EACH PASSAGE.
+
+
+GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM;
+
+BEING A DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKS COLLECTED ON THE SHORES OF
+THE YELLOW SEA, COREA, LOO-CHOO, MACAO, AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS.
+
+
+
+
+CHARTS
+
+OF THE
+
+GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND,
+NAPAKIANG ROADS, AND PORT MELVILLE.
+
+WITH BRIEF EXPLANATORY NOTICES.
+
+[Illustration: Track of His Majesty's Sloop LYRA _and Honble. Comps.
+Ship INVESTIGATOR_ _along the Shores of the_ GULPH OF PETCHELEE By
+Captain Basil Hall R.N. 1816.
+
+_East of Greenwich_]
+
+
+
+
+NOTICE EXPLANATORY OF A CHART
+
+OF
+
+THE SOUTH SIDE OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, YELLOW SEA.
+
+
+[Sidenote: First meridian used in constructing the chart.]
+
+In constructing this chart, I have assumed the longitude of the fort at
+the mouth of the Pei-ho to be 117º 49' east of Greenwich, or 11' west of
+the place where the squadron lay at anchor. From this the difference of
+longitude was measured by two chronometers. The latitudes were
+ascertained by frequent observations of the stars, as well as of the
+sun.
+
+[Sidenote: Aspect of the south and south-west coasts.]
+
+[Sidenote: Soundings.]
+
+The coast on the south and south-west sides of this Gulf is very low,
+resembling, in this respect, the shore at the entrance of the Pei-ho, or
+Pekin river, where it is uniformly low and sandy; occasionally a few
+houses are to be seen, and also square mounds or buildings like forts,
+but generally, a low white beach is all that can be discovered. The
+coast is not visible till within about three leagues distance, and the
+eye elevated eighty feet from the sea, which is the height of the Lyra's
+foretop-gallant yard. The depth of water when the land first came in
+sight, was generally five fathoms; at some places only four fathoms, and
+at the very bottom of the Gulf, it could not be discerned till in three
+and a half fathoms. It may be said generally, that at ten miles distance
+the soundings are from four and a half to six fathoms; at twelve miles,
+from six to eight fathoms. There is a wonderful uniformity in the depth
+from the Pei-ho round to the south-east corner of the Gulf; the bottom
+is mud, sometimes a little gritty, particularly towards the southern
+parts.
+
+[Sidenote: Colour of the water.]
+
+The colour of the water was mostly of the same dirty yellow or green
+which was observed off the Pei-ho, but we did not observe any red
+coloured water, as was frequently noticed at that place; at the bottom
+of the Gulf, indeed, there were several changes in the colour of the
+water, accompanied by long lines of foam, indicating, it would seem,
+the vicinity of a great river.
+
+[Sidenote: Tides on the western side of the Gulf.]
+
+On the west side of the Gulf the ebb tide runs to the south-east by
+south, and the flood north-west by west; the periods are very regular,
+being generally about six hours: they vary, however, in rapidity. As we
+anchored on the flood we were enabled to measure its velocity; as we got
+deep in the Gulf it decreased: at the Pei-ho it frequently ran two and
+two and a half knots, but far south it was sometimes hardly perceptible;
+it is worthy of notice, too, that the perpendicular rise and fall
+decreased from ten feet off the Pei-ho, to one, or at most two feet, in
+the bottom of the Gulf.
+
+[Sidenote: Bottom of the Gulf.]
+
+The most southern point of our track was 37º 15' north; at this time we
+could perceive the low coast stretching to the east and west; the
+distance it is difficult to assign very accurately, but it was probably
+seven or eight miles, for with a glass we could perceive a number of
+people on the shore. I took great pains to ascertain the latitude stated
+above, by the meridian altitudes of several stars; the longitude is 1º
+39' east of the Pei-ho, or 119º 28' east of Greenwich.
+
+[Sidenote: South-eastern side different from the opposite.]
+
+The coast from the south-west corner of the Gulf to the peninsula of
+Teu-choo-foo, is of a totally different character from that opposite to
+it, for it is high, and well marked: a range of mountains stretches from
+south-west to north-east, at the distance of three or four leagues
+inland; their outline is peaked, and they are intersected by deep
+ravines without any verdure; the summits are also barren.
+
+[Sidenote: Mount Ellis.]
+
+One of these mountains is very remarkable, having two peaks or paps by
+which it can be distinguished at the distance of fifty miles, and bears
+the same aspect when viewed from all parts of the Gulf. It lies in 37º
+6' north, and 2º 11' east of the Pei-ho, or 120º east of Greenwich. It
+has been called Mount Ellis, in honour of Mr. Ellis, the third
+commissioner of the Embassy.
+
+[Sidenote: Aspect of the coast.]
+
+[Sidenote: Jane's Isle.]
+
+[Sidenote: Douglas Island.]
+
+Between this range of hills and the shore, there is a lower belt of
+elevated ground in a state of high cultivation, covered with many towns
+and villages, and interspersed with scattered trees and several
+extensive woods; the ground, too, presents a varied surface, so that the
+whole offers a pleasing contrast with the rugged land behind. There are
+two small islands on this line of coast; the southern one lies in 37º
+21' north, and 2º 5' east of the Pei-ho; the other is in 37º 28' north,
+and 2º 19' east of the Pei-ho.
+
+[Sidenote: Dangerous shoal.]
+
+There is a dangerous shoal about five leagues off the shore, abreast of
+these islands, upon which the Lyra nearly struck at midnight on the
+17th instant. When at anchor just outside the shoal, the south island
+bore south 20º east, and the other, east 21º south; on the shoal there
+was two and a half fathoms, hard bottom. It seems to extend in a north
+and south direction, and is very narrow. It lies in 37º 32' north, which
+I ascertained by altitudes of the pole star, under favourable
+circumstances. It is 1º 58' 30" east of the Pei-ho.
+
+[Sidenote: Soundings and tides.]
+
+The soundings on this side of the Gulf are somewhat deeper than on the
+other, but not so deep as might have been expected from the bold nature
+of the land. The ebb tide runs to the north-eastward, and the flood into
+the Gulf.
+
+[Sidenote: Winds.]
+
+[Sidenote: Melville Point.]
+
+[Sidenote: Teu-choo-foo city.]
+
+The wind was south-east and quite light, from the 11th August to the
+17th, when it shifted to north north-east till about eight P.M. when
+close in shore near the southern of the two islands; it then blew off,
+with all the appearance of a regular land breeze. On the 19th it blew a
+gale of wind from the north-east, with a short, high sea; during the
+gale we lay at anchor off a remarkable point, connected with the main
+land by a low sandy neck; the ground felt soft to the lead, but it was
+probably rocky under the mud, as both ships lost a bower anchor by the
+cables being cut. This point lies in 37º 42' north, and 2º 35' east of
+the Pei-ho. We found the city of Teu-choo-foo to lie in 3º 4' east of
+the Pei-ho. The latitude observed in Teu-choo-foo roads was 37º 53'
+north, and the longitude 2º 54' east of the Pei-ho. The western Meadow
+Island bearing north.
+
+[Sidenote: Cheatow Bay.]
+
+The latitude of a small island at the north-east corner of the Bay of
+Cheatow or Zee-a-tow, was determined by the sun's meridian altitude on
+shore, to be 37º 35' 52" north, and longitude east of the Pei-ho 3º
+45', or in 121º 34' east of Greenwich.
+
+[Sidenote: Oei-hai-oei.]
+
+The latitude of Oei-hai-oei was observed on shore to be 37º 30' 40"
+north, and lies 4º 25' east of the Pei-ho.
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+The variation of the compass in the Yellow Sea was found to be 2º 16'
+westerly.
+
+The rise and fall of the tide at the anchorage of the squadron off the
+Pei-ho was twelve feet. It was high water at full, and change at III.
+The flood tide runs to the west-south-west, and the ebb generally about
+east and east-south-east. Its strength and direction are a good deal
+influenced by the prevalent winds.
+
+
+
+
+NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART OF THE WEST COAST OF COREA.
+
+
+[Sidenote: Inadequate time allowed for so extensive a survey.]
+
+This chart extends from 34º to 38º north latitude, and from 124º to 127º
+east longitude. The time of our stay on the coast being only nine days,
+no great accuracy is to be expected, and this chart pretends to be
+little more than an eye-draught, checked by chronometers and meridian
+altitudes of the sun and stars. Under circumstances of such haste, much
+has unavoidably been left untouched, and what is now given is presented
+with no great confidence.
+
+[Sidenote: General remarks on the methods followed in the survey.]
+
+What follows is extracted from notes made at the time by Mr. Clifford
+and myself. The longitudes by chronometer have all been carefully
+recomputed, and the greatest care was taken in ascertaining the various
+latitudes. The true bearings are in every instance set down, the
+variation being allowed for at the moment. The variation of the compass
+recorded in this notice, was determined by two azimuth compasses, and
+the method recommended by Captain Flinders, of repeating the
+observations by turning the compass first one way and then the other,
+was invariably followed.
+
+[Illustration: Track _of His Majesty's Ship_ ALCESTE _and_ LYRA _Sloop
+along the Western Coast of the PENINSULA of_ COREA by _Captain Basil Hall R.N._]
+
+[Sidenote: The ships leave China.]
+
+[Sidenote: Make the coast of Corea.]
+
+[Sidenote: Sir James Hall's group.]
+
+[Sidenote: Anchorage on the south side of an island.]
+
+His Majesty's ships Alceste and Lyra, after quitting the port of
+Oei-hai-oei, which is in latitude 37º 30' 40" north, and longitude 122º
+16' east, on the north coast of Shantung Promontory, stood to the
+northward and eastward till in latitude 38º north, and then ran to the
+eastward. On the morning of the 1st of September, 1816, we saw the land,
+bearing about east. By sights with chronometer on the meridian of these
+islands, we ascertained that the west end of the northern one lies in
+124º 44-1/2' east. The latitude of the south end of the eastern island
+was ascertained by meridian altitude of the sun to be 37º 44-1/2' north.
+There is a rocky white islet off the west end of the middle island. We
+had from twenty to thirty fathoms on rounding the south-west end of the
+islands, but on the south side of the southern one there is a bight with
+seven fathoms, black sand in the centre: here we anchored. There is good
+anchorage all over the bay, which is sheltered from all winds except
+between west south-west and south-east, being open to the southward.
+There are two villages here. From the top of the highest peak on this
+island, which is about seven or eight hundred feet high, we could
+discern the main land of Corea, high and rugged, stretching north
+north-west and south south-east, distant from eight to ten leagues.
+Along the coast abreast of us there were seen many islands. The channel
+between the middle island of the group and the one we were upon appeared
+clear and broad; but the northern and middle islands seemed connected by
+a reef which shews above water at several places.
+
+[Sidenote: Character of the inhabitants.]
+
+The inhabitants were suspicious and unfriendly: we saw some cattle and
+many fowls, but neither money nor any thing else that we had could
+induce them to part with either.
+
+[Sidenote: Lose sight of the coast.]
+
+In the evening we weighed and stood to the southward; next morning there
+was no land in sight. At noon we were in longitude 124º 47' 52" east,
+and latitude 36º 44-1/2' north, no land in sight. We hauled in shore to
+the eastward, and anchored in the night in deep water.
+
+[Sidenote: Group of five islands.]
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+3rd of September.--Weighed at 3.30 and stood in shore; at 7.45 A.M. we
+were due south of the western of a group of islands. Many sights were
+taken as we passed to settle the place of this group: it lies between
+125º 42-1/2' east, and 125º 57-1/2' east, and in latitude 36º 44' north.
+After passing this group we stood to the south-east towards a vast
+cluster of islands: at noon, when we were just entering the cluster, the
+latitude was observed 36º 18' 21" north, and longitude 126º 10' east.
+The south-west extreme of the islands bore south 40º west. There were
+eight islands near us between south-east and south-west, and a high
+bluff dark rock south one-quarter east, four miles: and on the main land
+a very high hill, east 19º north. When we had got well among the islands
+it fell calm, and we anchored in eight and a half fathoms. It remained
+calm during the night.
+
+[Sidenote: Run among the islands.]
+
+4th of September.--Weighed on a breeze springing up, and stood in shore.
+Observed in 36º 13' north, longitude 126º 30' east; at this time the
+following bearings were taken.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+A remarkable peak on the main land, east.
+
+High mountain on the main land, east 38-1/2º north.
+
+White cliff on the east end of the fourth island to the left of the wide
+entrance into the cluster, north.
+
+Small round island, north 30º west.
+
+Another, north 35º west.
+
+Extremes of a large bluff island from north 38º west, to north 32-1/2º
+west.
+
+Rock, north 72º west.
+
+Outer island, north 75º west.
+
+Extremes of the outer cluster, from north 77-1/2 west, to west 1º south.
+
+Large island, from west 14º 30' south, to west 18º south.
+
+[Sidenote: Basil's Bay.]
+
+[Sidenote: Unsocial disposition of the inhabitants.]
+
+These islands being within from ten to fifteen miles, were laid down by
+estimated distances, but it was quite impossible to assign places to the
+immense number of others which stretched away to the south and
+south-east, as far as the eye could reach. We stood in shore for the
+purpose of discovering whether there was any place of shelter in the
+main land, but in general it proved shallow and unsafe. At length we
+discovered a bay which promised shelter, but on running into it, the
+depth was found not to exceed three or four fathoms. This bay is open
+towards the south, and is formed by a curved tongue of land on the north
+and west. The longitude of the south end of this point is 126º 42' 22"
+east, and latitude 36º 7' 38" north. We remained here during the night,
+and the forenoon of the 5th. The natives came on board, but made great
+objections to our landing.
+
+[Sidenote: Tides.]
+
+The tide rose and fell fifteen feet and a half; it was low water at 8
+P.M., and high water at 2.30 A.M. This was two and a half days before
+full moon.
+
+The Alceste's boats were sent to sound in the eastern quarter, but they
+found shoal water every where.
+
+[Sidenote: Proceed to the south-westward.]
+
+5th of September.--At 11 A.M. we got under weigh and stood to the
+south-west among the islands, carrying seven, eight, nine, ten, to
+fifteen fathoms, and occasionally deepening to seventeen fathoms. At
+4.45 we observed in longitude 126º 24-1/2' east, and latitude 35º 52'
+north at this time.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+Two islands bore north half east, seven miles.
+
+A remarkable small black island, west 32º, north four miles.
+
+Another, west 22º north, seven miles.
+
+A range of islands, from east 10º north, to east 16º south.
+
+A long island, from south 25º east, to south 11º east.
+
+The islands off which we anchored on the 2nd instant bearing about north
+10º west.
+
+Two islands, from south 16º west, to south 25º west.
+
+[Sidenote: Main land.]
+
+The main land from south south-east to north-east, high and rugged.
+
+We had a sea breeze to-day, and fine weather. Variation 2º 10' westerly.
+We ran on by moonlight till 11 P.M., and then anchored among the
+islands. Latitude, observed by Polaris 35º 26' north. Longitude, at
+anchor by chronometer next morning 126º 23' 22" east. From this spot the
+main land was seen from east 12º north, to south 20º east.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+A rock, west 7º south, four miles.
+
+An island, from west 15º north, to west 31º north, 4-1/2'.
+
+Three islands, extending from west 36º south, to west 45º south, 3'.
+
+Two distant ones in the same direction.
+
+Cluster of islands, from west 64º south, to west 84-1/2º south.
+
+Large island, north 12º west, ten or twelve miles.
+
+A cluster of islands, from north 15º east, to north 28º east.
+
+Two distant islands, north 32º east.
+
+Two others, north 42º east.
+
+[Sidenote: Channels between the islands generally deep.]
+
+6th of September.--Weighed and stood to the southward. At noon observed
+in 35º 17' north, longitude 126º 28-1/2' east, being then in the centre
+of a semicircle of islands, extending from north-east to south-east and
+south-west. During the forenoon the flood tide set strong to the north
+north-east against us. Most of the channels between the islands were
+deep, but to-day we tried one which had not more than five and a half
+fathoms. At 4.30. took sights, when a long bluff island bore east
+north-east a quarter of a mile. Longitude 126º 6' 37" east; latitude 35º
+6' north. This island is the most westerly of the range of islands which
+lie between the latitude 35º and 36º north. High and connected land was
+faintly discernible to the eastward. The soundings were generally from
+nine to fifteen fathoms, deepening in most cases on approaching the
+bluff islands.
+
+[Sidenote: Flood tide runs to the northward.]
+
+[Sidenote: Windsor Castle.]
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+7th of September.--We anchored last night about ten o'clock in seventeen
+fathoms; the flood tide had made; it ran north nearly three miles an
+hour, till four A.M. when we got under weigh, and drifted fast to the
+southward with the ebb. At 9.30. got sights, which gave longitude 125º
+52' 45" east, latitude 34º 42' north; at this time a very remarkable
+hill on an island bore east 8º south; it has the appearance of a turret
+or large chimney. The other bearings from this spot were--
+
+Western extreme of a large island stretching west north-west, and east
+south-east; north 27º, east 4 or 5'.
+
+Round rock, north 18º east, 8'.
+
+Cluster of islands from north 50º west, to north 74º west.
+
+Round bluff small island, west 9º south.
+
+Large island, west 42º south, 7 or eight leagues.
+
+Two small distant islands, west 53º south, 10' leagues.
+
+Small island, south 11º east.
+
+[Sidenote: Soundings.]
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+Extreme of distant land, south 37º east: besides, as usual, innumerable
+distant islands. The flood tide made against us between ten and eleven.
+The soundings this morning have been from twenty-three to nineteen
+fathoms. The weather extremely hot and the water smooth. The ebb made
+about four, and there being no wind, it carried us rapidly towards some
+rocks joining two islands. We anchored in twenty-one fathoms. The
+variation of the compass 2-1/2º westerly. The bearings at anchor this
+evening were as follows:
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+Small island, south 3º 22' east.
+
+Large island, from south to south 20-1/2º east.
+
+A small island, south 22º east.
+
+Another, south 28-1/2º east.
+
+High bluff island, south 31º east.
+
+Island from south 9º east, to south 18º west.
+
+Sharp peaked rock, south 25º 40' west.
+
+Island from south 63º west, to south 65º west.
+
+Distant island, from south 63-1/2º west, to south 66º west, nine or ten
+leagues.
+
+Distant small island, west 1º 10' north, seven or eight leagues.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+Distant island, from west 6º 39' north, to west 9º north, formed of one
+large flat space and five hummocks, eight or nine leagues.
+
+Island, west 28º 50' north.
+
+Large island, from west 31º north, to west 38º 19' north.
+
+Round bluff island, off which we observed at noon to-day, west 39º 52'
+north.
+
+Distant small island, west 44º 28' north, four or five leagues.
+
+Large island, from west 71º north, to west 81º 30' north.
+
+An island, afterwards called Thistle Island, south 79º east, to east 14º
+52' north, besides numberless islands, in thick clusters, extending as
+far as the eye could reach, in the north-east and east quarters. In the
+afternoon a boat went inside Thistle Island, and reported that there was
+a clear anchorage.
+
+[Sidenote: Sail into Murray's Sound.]
+
+[Sidenote: Latitude observed on shore.]
+
+[Sidenote: Longitude.]
+
+[Sidenote: Tides.]
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+8th of September.--At noon we weighed and sailed round the north end of
+Thistle Island, carrying seventeen fathoms, till the north end bore
+south; we then shoaled to ten and eleven, and one cast nine fathoms. On
+rounding the island we steered south, and anchored in eleven fathoms,
+soft bottom, about four hundred yards from the middle part of the
+island. The islands at this place are so situated as to form a capacious
+and secure anchorage, with passages among the islands in all directions.
+The latitude observed with an artificial horizon on shore, was 34º 22'
+39" north; longitude by mean of two chronometers, agreeing nearly, 126º
+2' 52" east. The tides run at the springs at the rate of three and four
+knots, the flood to the north north-east; the rise and fall is fifteen
+feet. Strong eddies are felt among the islands. The variation of the
+compass is 2º 30' westerly.
+
+[Sidenote: Appearance of the Amherst Isles, from the top of a peaked
+island.]
+
+On the 9th of September Captain Maxwell and a party went to the summit
+of a high peak, on an island to the south-east of the ships, in latitude
+34º 20' north, and longitude 126º 6' east. From this spot, elevated
+about seven or eight hundred feet above the sea, the view of the islands
+was very striking: we endeavoured to number them, but our accounts
+varied, owing to the difficulty of estimating the number in the distant
+groups; it will serve, however, to give some idea of this splendid
+scene, to say that the lowest enumeration gave one hundred and twenty
+islands.
+
+Many of these islands are large and high, almost all are cultivated, and
+their forms present an endless diversity.
+
+High land was seen to rise above the distant islands in the east and
+north-east; this probably was the main land of Corea, for it seemed more
+extensive and connected than any group of islands we had seen.
+
+[Sidenote: Difficulty of estimating the number of islands on this
+coast.]
+
+We had now ran along upwards of two hundred miles of this coast, and at
+every part which we approached, the islands were no less thickly sown
+than here; so that our attempts to enumerate them all, or even to assign
+places on the chart to those which we passed the nearest to, became
+after a time quite hopeless.
+
+[Sidenote: Winds and weather.]
+
+During our stay upon the coast of Corea, between the 1st and 10th of
+September, the winds were principally from the northward; the weather
+was moderate and clear; and occasionally calm during the heat of the
+day.
+
+[Sidenote: Barometer and thermometer.]
+
+The barometer rose and fell gradually between 29. 78. and 29. 98. The
+thermometer was never above 82º, and never, even at night, under 72º For
+further details respecting the winds and weather, see the Meteorological
+Journal.
+
+[Illustration: Chart of GREAT LOO CHOO Island
+
+_Surveyed in H.M. Sloop LYRA by Captain Basil Hall_
+
+1816]
+
+
+
+
+NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE GENERAL CHART OF THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, AND
+THE CHARTS OF NAPAKIANG, AND PORT MELVILLE.
+
+
+[Sidenote: Different names of this island.]
+
+This island is called Loo-choo, and sometimes Doo-choo, by the natives.
+In our maps it is variously written, but mostly Lekayo: the Chinese know
+it by the name of Low-kow. The spelling used by Mr. Horsburgh in his
+directions, Lieou-kieou, or Lieu-chew.
+
+[Sidenote: Geographical limits and general aspect.]
+
+The island lies between 26º 4-3/4' and 26º 52-1/2', north, and between
+127º 34' and 128º 18' east, being very nearly sixty miles long in a
+north-east direction, and preserving a tolerably uniform breadth of
+about ten or twelve miles. The north end is high and bold, with wood on
+the top of the hills. The north-east coast is also abrupt, but quite
+barren. The south-east side is low, with very little appearance of
+cultivation. The south, south-west, and western faces, particularly the
+two former, are of moderate height, and present a scene of great
+fertility and high cultivation: it is to this quarter that the mass of
+population have resorted. The north-west side is generally rugged and
+bare.
+
+[Sidenote: Deep bay.]
+
+[Sidenote: Barrow's Bay.]
+
+There are two deep indentures, one on each side of the island; that on
+the west has at least one hundred fathoms depth, and appears to have no
+coral in it: while the eastern bight is extremely shallow, and is not
+only skirted by a broad fringe of coral, but has reefs in the centre;
+and these last are very dangerous, for they give no warning either by
+breakers or discoloration of the water, or by soundings: and this remark
+will apply generally to all the reefs round this island, rendering the
+navigation, particularly at night, very dangerous.
+
+[Sidenote: General caution respecting coral reefs.]
+
+[Sidenote: Sugar Loaf or Eegooshcoond.]
+
+The most remarkable headland is the island called by Captain Broughton
+the Sugar Loaf, and by the natives Eegooshcoond (tower or castle); it
+can be seen distinctly at the distance of twenty-five miles when the eye
+is elevated only fifteen feet. It is a high conical mountain, varying
+very little in its aspect when viewed from different quarters: as there
+is no other peak like it on or near this island, it cannot be mistaken.
+The latitude of the peak is 26º 43' north; and I have reason to believe
+that this is within one mile of the truth. Its longitude is 127º 44', or
+6' east of the observatory at Napakiang, by two chronometers. The base
+of the cone and one-third of the way up is covered with houses; and the
+whole island has the appearance of a garden. When nearly on the meridian
+of the Sugar Loaf its top seems rounded off.
+
+[Sidenote: Two safe anchoring places.]
+
+[Sidenote: Geographical position of Napakiang.]
+
+There are two places where ships can ride in safety, Napakiang Roads
+on the south-west, and Port Melville on the north-west side of the
+island. The first of these is the one in which his majesty's ships
+Alceste and Lyra lay for upwards of a month. By means of a base of 1319
+feet on a coral reef, which dried at half ebb, we were enabled to make
+the survey which accompanies this notice. The latitude of the
+observatory was determined to be 26º 13' 34" north, the mean of three
+meridian altitudes of the sun by a sextant of Cary's, and five by a
+circle of Troughton's, the extreme difference being 20". The longitude
+is 127º 38' east; this was ascertained by measuring the difference of
+longitude between the observatory and Lintin Island off Canton river in
+a run of six days; on which occasion two chronometers on board the Lyra
+gave within one mile the same difference of longitude, viz. 13º 50',
+with that shewn by two others on board his majesty's ship Alceste; the
+longitude of Lintin being 113º 48' east of Greenwich. The longitude, by
+lunar observations, is 127º 37' 28". The plan of Napakiang roads will be
+found sufficient without many directions for ships wishing to enter it.
+The principal danger lies in the outer reefs, which do not show when the
+weather is very fine and there is little swell; on such occasions a boat
+ought to go a-head at least a quarter of a mile, and the ship should put
+about instantly upon approaching the reefs, which are every where bold.
+A ship coming from the westward ought to steer between the north-eastern
+of the group of high islands to the south-westward, and a low green
+island with extensive reefs to the northward, in latitude 26º 15' north.
+On passing which she should haul up east by south, giving Reef Island a
+birth of at least a mile.
+
+[Sidenote: Plan of Napakiang.]
+
+[Sidenote: Directions on approaching Napakiang.]
+
+[Sidenote: Reef Island.]
+
+[Illustration]
+
+[Sidenote: Directions for entering Napakiang roads.]
+
+[Illustration: NAPAKIANG ROADS
+
+_on the S.W. Side of the_ GREAT LOO CHOO Island
+
+_Laid down from actual survey by Captain Basil Hall R.N. H.M. Sloop
+LYRA_ 1816]
+
+[Sidenote: Capstan Rock.]
+
+[Sidenote: Best anchorage off the mouths of two rivulets.]
+
+[Sidenote: The northern entrance.]
+
+On approaching the main land a conspicuous wooded point will be seen,
+having rocks on its summit like the ruins of an abbey; this forms the
+south side of the anchorage, and is considerably more to the westward
+than the north-east side. The harbour of Napakiang will soon be seen at
+the south side of the bay; steer directly in for this, giving Abbey
+Point a birth of half a mile, and when directly between the south end of
+the outer reefs and Abbey Point haul up east by north. There is a very
+remarkable rock on the south-east side of the anchorage resembling the
+head of a capstan. It would be safest to anchor when this bears about
+south-south-east half a mile at most, in order to avoid a dangerous
+coral tongue, which lies north a little easterly from it, three-quarters
+of a mile; but as this anchorage is exposed, the ship may proceed
+farther in as soon as the exact place of the reef has been ascertained
+by boats; and if she proposes staying any time, she may warp into
+Barnpool, taking the precaution of placing a boat on each side of the
+entrance. There are two rivulets at this place, and probably the best
+anchorage is off their mouths, the bottom consisting of the mud brought
+down by the stream. There is a well on the eastern side supplied by a
+spring, and there are landing places at the entrance of both harbours.
+There is a safe passage between the reef, on which the base was
+measured, and the outer ones. The Lyra passed through this three times;
+and if the object is to go to the northward it ought to be followed,
+provided the wind will admit of steering north and two points on each
+side of it. The leading mark for going by this passage is Capstan Fort
+or Rock, on with a remarkable nose formed by the trees on the highest
+distant land; these are on when they bear about south by east half east.
+It would certainly not be advisable for a stranger to enter by this
+passage, but he may run on coming from the northward along the shore at
+the distance of two or three miles till Reef Island bears west, and then
+he should look sharply out for the reefs, keeping outside them till near
+Abbey Point, then act as before directed. On running down towards
+Napakiang from the northward a remarkable bluff table land will be seen
+to the southward of Abbey Point. The west face of Abbey Point ought to
+be kept just on with the east end of the table land; this will take you
+further out than is absolutely necessary; but it is safe; and when Reef
+Island is just on with the northern of the group of distant islands you
+will be exactly off the north entrance.
+
+[Sidenote: Appearance of land in coming from the northward towards
+Napakiang.]
+
+[Sidenote: Not to be attempted by a stranger.]
+
+[Sidenote: Dangerous coral reef about four leagues south-west by west
+from Napakiang.]
+
+On coming from the southward the only danger that lies in the way is a
+coral reef even with the water's edge; it is of a circular form, and at
+low water several rocks shew on it. On every occasion that we passed the
+sea broke high upon it; but from what we saw of other similar reefs, it
+seems very probable that when the water is smooth it will give no
+warning: it is about eight miles west, 15º north of the extreme south
+point of the island, and lies in latitude 26º 7' north, and longitude
+127º 26' east of Greenwich.
+
+[Sidenote: Port Melville.]
+
+[Sidenote: Directions to approach it, and to anchor previous to entering
+the harbour.]
+
+Port Melville is on the north-west side of the island. A ship wishing to
+enter it ought to make the Sugar Loaf Peak, and steer between it and the
+cluster of islands to the northward, directly for the bottom of the
+bight, which lies between the Sugar Loaf and the north end of the
+island; here Herbert's Island will be seen close to the shore, run in
+towards its western end, anchor when it bears east one-third of a mile,
+and the Sugar Loaf west one-quarter north, barely shut in with a low
+dark green point of land; here you will have from seventeen to twenty
+fathoms.
+
+[Sidenote: Boats should be sent to buoy the channel.]
+
+The entrance of the harbour is narrow, and ought not to be attempted
+without previous examination by the boats of a ship wishing to enter it.
+With a very little trouble the passage might be buoyed: a large ship
+will probably find it expedient to warp in and out.
+
+[Sidenote: Eye-draught of Port Melville.]
+
+The eye-draught, with the directions on it, render much further notice
+here superfluous. The harbour is secure, and sufficiently capacious for
+a numerous fleet. It extends in a north and south direction for about
+two miles, varying in breadth and form in a very remarkable manner; at
+the lower or north end there are two basons of a circular form, and have
+from nine to fifteen fathoms, soft bottom; these are about one-third of
+a mile across. At some places the steep rocks which form the banks
+approach within an hundred yards of one another; here the water is
+sixteen, eighteen, and twenty fathoms. There are many fine coves, some
+with shelving shores, and others steep-to. Every part of the harbour is
+secured from the sea, and many parts from all winds: it is well
+calculated for the re-equipment of ships, for it is not only secure as
+an anchorage, but offers conveniences for landing men and stores, and
+also for heaving down or careening a ship.
+
+[Sidenote: Villages of Cooee and of Oonting.]
+
+There are several large villages on the shores of an extensive bay,
+communicating with the sea to the north-eastward, at the upper or south
+end of the line of harbours, and one called Oonting on the west side of
+the lower harbour; there is another of some extent, on the south side of
+Herbert's Island, called Cooee.
+
+By permission of Captain Maxwell, I have named this excellent harbour,
+Port Melville, in honour of Lord Viscount Melville, First Lord of the
+Admiralty.
+
+[Illustration: _Draught_ _of_ PORT MELVILLE _on the N.W. side of_ _GREAT
+LOO-CHOO_ Island _by_ _Captain Basil Hall_ _and_ _the_ OFFICERS _of_
+_His Majesty's Sloop_ LYRA _11th Octr. 1816._]
+
+From the top of a range of hills which we ascended, rising on the south
+side of the upper bay of Port Melville, we could see the south-west
+corner of the great western bay, the whole range of Port Melville, and
+the coasts adjacent.
+
+[Sidenote: Geographical position of Port Melville.]
+
+The latitude of Herbert's Island, which lies directly off the entrance
+of Port Melville, is 26º 42-2/3' north, by meridian altitude of the sun
+observed on shore. Its longitude, which is also the longitude of Port
+Melville, is 127º 55' east, or 17' east of Napakiang observatory. The
+Sugar Loaf bears from the centre of the island, west 4-1/2º north, about
+ten miles.
+
+[Sidenote: Coast skirted by coral reefs.]
+
+As the whole part of this coast is skirted by dangerous coral reefs, the
+greatest attention should be paid to the lead, and the ship ought to
+be put about the instant that the water shoals to eight, seven, or six
+fathoms. On running in for the west end of Herbert's Island, on the
+morning of the 11th of October, we passed over a coral ledge having nine
+fathoms on it. The west point of Herbert's Island bore at this time
+south 8º 40' west, distant four or five miles. Before and after passing
+this we had from thirty to sixty fathoms; whether it was shoaler than
+nine fathoms at any place, was not ascertained, but the circumstance is
+deserving of notice, and ought to teach the necessity of constant
+vigilance, when near coral reefs.
+
+[Sidenote: Montgomery islands.]
+
+The cluster of islands to the northward of Port Melville lies between
+26º 54' and 27º 4-1/2' north, the north end of the northern one being in
+longitude 127º 57' east, or 19' east of the observatory. It does not
+appear that there is any good anchorage about them; and there are
+dangerous reefs off the south and south-western ones.
+
+[Sidenote: Hope Point.]
+
+The north end of the Great Loo-choo lies in 26º 52-1/2' north, and this
+is probably within one, or at most two miles of the truth. We observed
+in 27º 00' 15" north, at which time the northern extreme bore east 59º
+south, nine miles by estimation, an inference which was checked by the
+distance run on a direct course afterwards. The longitude is 128º 9'
+east, or 31' east of the observatory.
+
+[Sidenote: Sidmouth Point.]
+
+The coast from the north point runs south-east by east, with some minor
+deviations, nearly four leagues: great pains were taken to ascertain
+this precisely, as the former charts not only place it many miles
+further north, but make the coast at this end lie east and west. The
+north-east point lies in 26º 47' north, and longitude 128º 18' east, or
+40' east of the observatory. The latitude was determined by the meridian
+altitude of Sirius and an altitude of Polaris, so near daylight that the
+horizon was well defined; but as this point, off which there is a small
+island, was some miles north of the ship at the time of observation, the
+above latitude may err possibly two miles. It was intended to have
+examined two islands which lie to the north-eastward of the north point,
+but a strong current in the night carried us so far to leeward, that we
+could not effect this object; the situation, therefore, of these two
+islands, may perhaps not be accurately laid down in the chart.
+
+[Sidenote: Barrow's Bay.]
+
+The deep indenture about the middle of the east side of the island is
+unsafe to enter during the north-east monsoon: as the wind, however, had
+westing in it, we sailed up to within three or four miles of the top,
+carrying from thirty to twenty fathoms water; but when about to haul in
+for the north side, where there appeared to be a bay, we shoaled
+suddenly from twenty-four to eight fathoms: the helm was instantly put
+down, and when head to wind, we had only five fathoms. While in stays
+the water was observed to wash on a rock not a hundred yards to leeward
+of us, on which we must infallibly have struck, had we bore up instead
+of tacking.
+
+[Sidenote: South-east coast dangerous.]
+
+From the north-east to the south-east point, the coast runs south 40º
+west; the shore to the north-east of this deep bight is bold, and seems
+clear; that on the south-west side of it presents a formidable barrier
+of islands and coral reefs, which break to a great distance: in fine
+weather this part of the coast ought to be approached very cautiously.
+
+[Sidenote: South Point.]
+
+[Sidenote: Reef.]
+
+The southern extreme of this island lies in latitude 26º 4' 46" north,
+determined with great care by the meridian altitude of the sun on shore;
+and in longitude 127º 35' east, or 3' west of the observatory. There is
+good anchorage from twenty to thirty fathoms, south a little easterly,
+of this point. Between this point and the group of islands to the
+westward, there is a dangerous reef, already spoken of; it lies in 26º
+7' north, and 127º 26' east; it bears 26' west, 15º north from the south
+point of the island, distant eight miles. Immediately round the point on
+the west side there is a shallow harbour, formed by coral reefs, but the
+entrance is narrow and intricate.
+
+[Sidenote: South-western group.]
+
+We stood over to the largest of the south-west group, on the east side
+of which there stands out a conical rock, behind which it was thought
+that a harbour might lie, but upon examination, it proved only fit for
+boats; it lies in 26º 11' north.
+
+[Sidenote: Reef Island.]
+
+Reef Island lies west by north, about two leagues from Napakiang Roads;
+on the north side the reefs stretch a great way, but the south is more
+clear.
+
+Between Napakiang and the Sugar Loaf there is no place for ships to lie
+in safety; the bay immediately to the north was examined by Mr. Mayne,
+master of his Majesty's ship Alceste, when two shallow harbours were
+found.
+
+[Sidenote: Tides.]
+
+The flood runs to the northward and eastward, along shore, and the ebb
+in an opposite direction. The rise and fall is about nine feet
+perpendicular. High water at full and change IX.
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+The variation of the compass, determined with great precision by the
+transit azimuth instrument, was 52' westerly.
+
+The longitude of the Lyra's observatory at Napakiang by the mean of
+thirty-six lunar observations on both sides of the moon, is 127º 37' 28"
+east; by four chronometers, agreeing nearly, 127º 38' 30" east. The
+latitude is 26º 13' 39" north.
+
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: Crescent moons are denoted by [((] or [))]; a circle
+with a period therein is denoted by [(.)]]
+
+
+OBSERVATIONS MADE AT NAPAKIANG OBSERVATORY, GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.
+
+ Lunars with a Sextant. Lunars with a Sextant.
+ [(.)] West of [((] *[Greek: a] Arietis, East of [))]
+
+ 25th September, 1816. 4th October, 1816
+
+ [(.)] [((] 127º. 38'. 15" East. * [))] 127º. 31'. 00" East.
+ 35 . 15 37 . 00
+ 36 . 15 43 . 00
+ 34 . 45 52 . 30
+ 33 . 00 54 . 30
+ 36 . 00 38 . 45
+ 30 . 45 52 . 45
+ 28 . 30 50 . 15
+ 32 . 15 50 . 30
+ 31 . 30 127º. 33'. 39" Mean 41 . 45
+ 40 . 30
+ 26th October, 1816. 34 . 15
+ 43 . 15
+ [(.)] [((] 127 . 38 . 30 39 . 45
+ 39 . 45 ------------
+ 41 . 30 Mean by sextant 127 . 43. 20 * East of [))]
+ 44 . 15
+ 44 . 30 Lunars by Circle.
+ 32 . 15 [(.)] West of [((]
+ 33 . 00
+ 31 . 45 4th October, 1816
+ 31 . 15 [(.)] [((] 127º. 38'. 45"
+ 27 . 30 127º 36'. 16" Mean 32 . 30
+ ------------- -------------
+ Mean by sextant 127 . 34 . 58
+ [(.)] W. [((] Mean 127 . 35 . 37 by circle.
+
+
+ Mean by sextant [(.)] west [))] 127º 34'. 58"
+ * East [((] 127 . 43 . 20
+ --------------
+ Mean longitude by sextant [(.)] * [))] 127 . 39 . 9
+ by circle [(.)] * [((] 127 . 35 . 37
+ --------------
+ Mean longitude by 36 lunars 127 . 37 . 28
+ Longitude by chronometers 127 . 38 . 30 east of Greenwich.
+
+
+
+
+LATITUDE OF NAPAKIANG.
+
+_By Meridian Altitudes of the Sun and Altitudes taken near Noon._
+
+ By meridian altitudes observed. By meridian altitudes deduced in the
+ usual way from sights taken near noon.
+
+ 1816. 1816.
+ Sextant. 8th Oct. mean of 3 A.M.} 26º. 13'. 30" circle.
+ 17th Oct. 26º. 13'. 43" and 3 P.M. }
+
+ 20th Oct. 26 . 13 . 44 20th Oct. A.M.{ 26 . 13 . 46} sext.
+ { 26 . 13 . 44}
+
+ Circle.
+ 26th Oct. 26 . 13 . 29 20th Oct. P.M.{ 26 . 13 . 58}
+ { 26 . 13 . 47} sext.
+ { 26 . 13 . 57}
+
+ 22d mean 2 A.M.& 2 P.M. 26 . 13 . 24} circle.
+ 26th 3 P.M. 26 . 13 . 29}
+
+ Latitude by mean of 3 meridian altitudes 26º. 13'. 39" sextant and circle.
+ mean of 5 altitudes near noon 26 . 13 . 50 sextant.
+ mean of 3 do. do. 26 . 13 . 28 circle.
+ ------------
+ Mean latitude 26 . 13 . 39 north.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+VARIATION OF THE COMPASS AT NAPAKIANG.
+
+The declination of the magnetic meridian was ascertained with
+considerable precision by means of the transit azimuth instrument: the
+needle seldom showed the same variation, as it oscillated about ten
+minutes, but the mean position of the magnetic meridian was 52' 10" west
+of the true. A coral reef was selected for the place of these
+observations, in order to avoid the attraction arising from buildings,
+or from inequalities in the ground.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ _Variation observed on board by Walker's Azimuth Compass._
+
+ 29th Sept. 1816, P.M. ship's head W. by S. variation by
+
+ 1st azimuth 0º. 51'. 30" west.
+ 2nd 0 . 53 . 30
+ 3rd 1 . 17 . 30
+ Amplitude 1 . 15 . 00
+ 30th A.M. 1st azimuth 0 . 55 . 30
+ 2nd 0 . 34 . 15
+ 3d Oct. A.M. ship's head E.N.E. 1st azimuth 0 . 37 . 00
+ 2nd 0 . 48 . 00
+ -----------
+ Variation by mean of 7 azimuths and 1 amplitude 0 . 52 . 39 west.
+
+
+
+
+TABLE OF OBSERVATIONS
+
+MADE WITH
+
+DR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR:
+
+WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND A DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTRUMENT, AND DIRECTIONS
+FOR ITS USE.
+
+[Illustration: Wollaston's Dip Sector]
+
+EXPLANATION OF THE DIP SECTOR,
+
+AND
+
+REMARKS ON THE OBSERVATIONS MADE WITH IT IN HIS MAJESTY'S SLOOP LYRA.
+
+
+In our tables for apparent dip of the visible horizon at different
+heights from the sea, as calculated from the known curvature of the
+earth, allowance is made for the refraction of the atmosphere, on a
+supposition of its being constant, but as it is known to vary, the
+tabular dip will often be erroneous, and, consequently, altitudes taken
+under different states of the atmosphere, will exhibit different instead
+of corresponding results.
+
+It is foreign to the present purpose to shew what the causes are which
+have most effect in raising or depressing the apparent horizon. It may
+be sufficient to mention, that changes in the relative temperature of
+the air and the sea must produce changes in the refraction near the
+surface. Dr. Wollaston has published two papers in the Philosophical
+Transactions on this subject, in the volumes for 1800 and 1803, and to
+these I beg to refer the reader for precise information upon this very
+curious subject.
+
+The object which this sector proposes to attain, is the actual
+admeasurement of the dip angle; that is, to ascertain how much the
+visible horizon is depressed below the horizontal plane passing through
+the eye of the observer. The instrument is so contrived as to measure
+double the dip angle twice over, so that we obtain four times the
+required dip, and one quarter of this angle is what must be applied to
+vertical angles, measured from that part of the horizon which has been
+observed.
+
+Figure I. is the instrument seen in perspective, and Fig. II. is a plan
+of it with the telescope removed. In order to explain its use, let A and
+B (Fig. II.) represent the two reflecting glasses at right angles to the
+plane of the instrument, and also nearly at right angles to each other.
+It is clear that when the plane of the instrument is held vertically, an
+eye situated at E, and looking through the unsilvered part of the glass
+A at a distant point C, will at the same time see by joint reflection
+from both glasses, another distant point D at 180º from C; and D will
+appear to correspond with C, if a suitable motion be given to the index
+glass B by the tangent screw F.
+
+The instrument may now be supposed to measure the arc CZD. If the points
+C and D be each three minutes farther from the zenith than 90º, the
+entire angle will then exceed 180º by double that quantity. The relative
+position of the glasses then corresponds to 180º 6', and the six minutes
+of excess would be shewn on the arc at F if there were no index error.
+But, by reason of the index error, the real quantity will not be known
+till a similar observation has been made with the instrument in an
+opposite direction.
+
+If the instrument be now inverted, so that the unsilvered glass is
+uppermost, the arc intended to be measured is CND, or the sum of the
+distances of the points C and D from the Nadir instead of the Zenith,
+which of course falls short of 180º by as much as the former arc
+exceeded that quantity.
+
+The difference of the two arcs is consequently twelve minutes, and if
+the index be now moved till the objects C and D appear to correspond,
+the amount of this double difference will be shewn by the _change of
+position_ of the vernier.
+
+Hence it is evidently unnecessary that the index error should be
+previously known, and even preferable that its amount should be such as
+to avoid the needless introduction of negative quantities by positions
+on different sides of zero.
+
+In the preceding description, it is supposed that the eye is looking
+directly through the unsilvered glass at the horizon, and that it also
+perceives the opposite horizon after two reflections; but an inspection
+of the figure will shew that the observer's head would necessarily
+intercept the rays from the horizon behind him. To obviate this, both
+the direct and the reflected rays are received in coming from the
+unsilvered glass, (and after passing through the field-glass of the
+telescope) on a mirror placed at an angle of 45º, which reflects them to
+the eye. By this ingenious contrivance, the obstruction is removed, and
+the opposite points of the horizon may be both seen at one moment.
+
+In practice, it is most convenient to direct the telescope to the same
+part of the horizon in both cases. Thus, if the east and west parts of
+the horizon be observed, and that the index glass be uppermost, and
+telescope pointing to the west, the observer is on the south side, and
+his face must be turned to the north. When the instrument is inverted,
+if the observer turn himself round at the same time, so as to face the
+south, then the telescope will be pointed as before to the west; but
+since the index glass is now undermost, the inferior arc will now be
+measured precisely as if his face were to the north, but with the
+advantage of the same lights seen in the erect position of the
+instrument.
+
+In using this instrument at sea for the first time, considerable
+difficulty arises from the constant change in the plane of the
+instrument from the perpendicular position, in which it is absolutely
+necessary that it should be held, in order to obtain a correct
+observation. What at first appears to be a defect, however, is a real
+advantage, namely, that whenever it is held in the least degree out of
+the vertical plane, the two horizons (that seen direct, and the
+reflected one) cross each other, and it is only when the plane is
+vertical that the horizons can appear parallel.
+
+The object is to get the two horizons to coincide exactly, and for this
+purpose it will often be necessary to have them of different shades.
+This is managed, as in the sextant, by means of the screw, which raises
+or lowers the telescope. When the telescope is brought nearer to the
+plane of the instrument, the reflected horizon becomes dark and
+distinct, but when screwed off it becomes fainter, and is not so well
+defined. Practice alone can teach the degree of intensity which is most
+favourable. In general it is best to have one horizon dark, and the
+other light; then bring them very nearly to coincide, and wait till the
+ship is steady, at which moment a slight touch of the tangent screw
+brings them exactly to cover one another. It will happen, of course,
+that when the coincidence is perfect, there is only one horizon to be
+seen, and a doubt remains whether all is right, but a slight motion of
+the instrument, by making the horizons cross each other, defines them at
+once.
+
+It is advisable to take several observations, and the safest way is to
+take one first with the index glass uppermost, and then with the
+instrument inverted, after which to return to the first, and so on for
+two or three times each way.
+
+In the pages which follow, there is given a table containing the result
+of all the observations made during this voyage, preceded by several
+sets of observations in the fullest detail. From the table it will be
+observed how seldom the dip, actually measured, agrees with that
+inferred from the mean refraction. Some of these experiments shew very
+remarkable differences, and point out the great utility of this
+instrument.
+
+The practical navigator, particularly if he has been in hot climates,
+will recollect how discordant his observations for latitude always were,
+and how few even of the best observers agree in their determination of
+the latitude of the same place, simple as the observation is thought to
+be. The cause is quite clear; and though it equally affects altitudes
+taken for absolute time, the disagreement is less obvious, and it will
+often happen that a chronometer going extremely well appears to vary
+every day from inaccuracy in the observations. Thus it is, I think,
+generally admitted, that it is almost impossible to rate a chronometer
+from altitudes observed with the sea horizon. Nor is this difficulty
+removed by taking equal altitudes, because the refraction in all
+probability will be different at the two observations. With an
+artificial horizon, indeed, the changes in refraction are not felt,
+because, at a considerable elevation above the horizon, the changes are
+very trifling. But it often happens in practice, that the artificial
+horizon cannot be used, and we are then reduced to the sea horizon,
+where the changes of refraction are always the greatest. In the Yellow
+Sea, for instance, we had no opportunity of landing during all the time
+that the squadron was at anchor, till the day before we sailed. So that
+during nearly a fortnight that the ships were at anchor, the sea horizon
+was necessarily used. I need only to refer to the observations taken off
+the Pei-ho, viz. from No. 37 to 62, to shew how extremely fallacious the
+results must have been.
+
+It is much to be wished that this excellent instrument should be brought
+into general use in navigation.
+
+
+
+
+THE FOLLOWING EIGHT OBSERVATIONS ARE SET DOWN IN THE FULLEST DETAIL, IN
+ORDER TO SHEW THE METHOD USED IN RECORDING THEM.
+
+
+No. 31.
+
+YELLOW SEA.
+
+_July 23, 1816._--6 P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 8'. 10" B - 7'. 10"
+ 8 . 05 7 . 10
+ 8 . 00 7 . 10
+ ------ ------
+ Mean 8 . 05 Mean 7 . 10 B.
+ Mean + 8 . 05 A.
+ -------
+ 15 . 15
+ -------
+ 3 . 49 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 Difference.
+ -------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+
+ Parts of the horizon observed, WSW. and ENE.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 78 inches
+ Thermometer {Air 82º
+ {Sea 77º
+ Latitude 35º north.
+ Longitude 124º east.
+
+Wind light from south; horizon uncommonly well defined and sharp; sky
+clear, and sea perfectly smooth.
+
+
+No. 40.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_July 29, 1816._--9 A.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 8'. 20" B - 11'. 40"
+ 8 . 45 11 . 35
+ 8 . 30 11 . 50
+ ------ -------
+ Mean 8 . 32 Mean 11 . 42 B.
+ Mean + 8 . 32 A.
+ -------
+ 4) 20 . 14
+ 5 . 3 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 . 13 Difference +
+ -------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, NW. and SE.
+ The low land just visible in the NW. distant 12 or 14 miles.
+
+ Depth of the sea, 18 feet.
+ Barometer 29 . 60 inches.
+ Thermometer {Air 81º
+ {Sea 84º
+ Latitude 38º. 50' north.
+ Longitude 118º. 00' east.
+
+There has been little wind this morning, after a very close night.
+
+
+ No. 43.
+
+ OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+ _August 6, 1816._--1 P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 7'. 48" B - 11'. 55"
+ 7 . 48 11 . 45
+ 7 . 55 11 . 45
+ ------ -------
+ Mean 7 . 50 Mean 11 . 48 B.
+ Mean + 7 . 50 A.
+ -------
+ 4) 19 . 38
+ -------
+ 4 . 54 Dip.
+ 3 . 53 Tabular.
+ 1 . 1 Difference +
+ -------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 6 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, SW. by S. and NE. by N.
+ Depth of the sea, 29 feet.
+
+ Barometer - 29 . 64 inches.
+ Thermometer { Air 83-1/2º
+ { Sea 81-1/2º
+ Latitude - 38º 50' north.
+ Longitude - 118º 00' east.
+
+Moderate breeze from SE. by S.; rather hazy, but the horizon sharp and
+distinct.
+
+
+No. 50.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 8, 1816._--6.15. A.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+ A + 10'. 20" B - 12'. 50"
+ 10 . 18 12 . 45
+ 10 . 35 13 . 00
+ ---------- ----------
+ Mean 10 . 24, 3 Mean 12 . 51.7 B.
+ Mean + 10 . 24.3 A.
+ ----------
+ 4) 23 . 16
+ 5 . 49 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 . 59 Difference +
+ ----------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, NNE. and SSW. clear of the land.
+ Depth of the sea, 26 feet.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 65 inches.
+ Thermometer { Air 69-1/2º
+ { Sea 78º
+
+ Wind NNW. moderate.
+ Latitude - 38º. 50' north.
+ Longitude - 118º. 00' east.
+
+ _Mem._--The top of the fort at the mouth of the river, is just visible at 30
+ feet from the surface of the water.
+
+
+No. 53.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 10, 1816._--6.10. A.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted
+ A + 13'. 55" B - 7'. 30"
+ 13 . 50 7 . 15
+ 13 . 45 7 . 25
+ ------- ---------
+ Mean 13 . 50 Mean 7 . 23.3 B.
+ ---------
+ Mean + 13 . 50 A.
+ ---------
+ 4) 21 . 13.3
+ 5 . 18.3 Dip.
+ 2 . 20 Tabular.
+ 2 . 58 Difference +
+
+ Height of the eye, 5 feet, 6 inches.
+ Depth of the water, 5 feet.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, N. by E. and S. by W. just clear of the land.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 69 inches. } On board His Majesty's ship Lyra,
+ Thermometer { Air 75º } distant three or four miles.
+ { Sea 77º }
+ Wind WNW.
+
+About one mile from the fort of Tung-coo, at the entrance of the Pei-ho
+river. _Note._--Instrument readjusted.
+
+
+No. 58.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 10, 1816._--2 P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 15'. 40" B - 8'. 50"
+ 15 . 30 8 . 50
+ 15 . 35 8 . 50
+ -------- --------
+ Mean 15 . 35 Mean 8 . 50 B.
+ Mean + 15 . 35 A.
+
+ 4) 24 . 25
+ 6 . 6.3 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 2 . 16 Difference +
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, N. by E. and S. by W.
+ Depth of the sea, 27 feet.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 68 inches.
+ Thermometer } Air 84º
+ } Sea 83º
+
+ Latitude 38º . 50' north.
+ Longitude 118º . 00' east.
+
+
+No. 59.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 10, 1816._--2. 15. P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted
+ A + 15'. 10" B - 7'. 50"
+ 15 . 10 8 . 10
+ 15 . 10 8 . 05
+ --------- ---------
+ Mean 15 . 13.3 Mean 8 . 01.7 B.
+ Mean + 15 . 13.3 A.
+ ---------
+ 4) 21 . 15
+ 5 . 48.7 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 . 59 Difference.
+ ---------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, NW. by N. and SE. by S.
+ Depth of the water, 27 feet.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 68 inches.
+ Thermometer { Air 84º
+ { Sea 83º
+
+ Latitude 38º. 50' north.
+ Longitude 118º. 00' east.
+
+The vessels in all parts of the horizon have an inverted image under
+them; this is very considerable, some having about a third of the sail,
+others only the hull.
+
+
+No. 110.
+
+OFF THE CAPE.
+
+_July 28, 1817._--2.30. P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+ A + 6'. 35" B - 5'. 00"
+ 6 . 35 4 . 55
+ 6 . 40 5 . 00
+ -------- ---------
+ Mean 6 . 36.7 Mean 4 . 58.3 B.
+ Mean + 6 . 36.7 A.
+ ---------
+ 4) 11 . 35
+ 2 . 53.7 Dip.
+ 3 . 49 Tabular.
+ 55 Difference -
+ ---------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, SE. and NW.
+
+ Thermometer { Air 64º
+ { Sea 59º
+ Depth of the sea, 222 feet.
+
+ Latitude 34º. 57' south.
+ Longitude 20º. 15' east.
+
+Cape Lagullus due north, distant 6 or 8 miles.
+
+Calm all day; sky clear, and weather hazy.
+
+On the 29th and 30th of July we were off the Cape, but the weather was
+so bad as to prevent any sights being taken.
+
+[Transcriber's Note: The final column of each of the following
+tables is transcribed beneath the table.]
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+-----+-------+-------+-----+-------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff.|Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+--+--+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.|+ |- |Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat. | East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+--+--+---+---+---+---+-----+-------+------+------+
+ |1816. |f. i|' " |' "| "| "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 18|June 16.|15 3|4 35.0|3 50|45| |83 |82-|1/2| |29.86| 5 11 S|106 3 | 60 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | |
+ 19|June 16.|15 3|4 33.0|3 50|43| |83-|82 | 1-| |29.86| 5 05 S|106 10| 56 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|sh.|1/2| | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | |{85| | | | | | |
+ 20|June 16.|14 0|3 59 |3 41|18| |84-|{sh|1/2| |29.83| 5 05 S|106 10| 48 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|{95| | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | |{su| | | | | | |
+ 21|June 16.|14 |4 01 |3 41|20| |83 |81 | 2 | |29.85| 5 05 S|106 10| 57 |
+ 22|June 27.|16 |4 21.0|3 56|25| |84 |82 | 2 | |29.81| 6 49 N|107 49| |
+ 23|June 28.|16 |4 22.2|3 56|26| |84 |82 | 2 | |29.80| 8 00 |108 10| |
+ 24|July 3. |16 |4 08.2|3 56|12| |84-|81 | 3-| |29.77|13 29 |112 59| |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 25|July 6. |16 |3 53 |3 56| | 3|84 |83-|1/4| |29.75|20 00 |114 | |
+ | | | | | | | |3/4| | | | | | |
+ 27|July 7. |15 3|4 3 |3 50|13| |85 |85 | | |29.79|21 11 |114 | |
+ 28|July 8. |14 6|3 49 |3 45| 4| |84-|82 | 2-| |29.72| | | |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 29|July 16.|15 3|3 27 |3 50| |23|79 |79 | | |29.75|24 37 |118 56| |
+ 30|July 21.|15 3|3 44 |3 50| | 6|77-|76 | 1-| |29.78|34 |124 | 270 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 31|July 23.|15 3|3 49 |3 50| | 1|77 |82 | |5 |29.78|35 |124 | |
+ 32|July 23.|15 3|3 49 |3 50| | 1|77 |82 | |5 |29.78|35 |124 | |
+ 33|July 23.|15 3|3 44 |3 50| | 6|77 |82 | |5 |29.78|35 |124 | |
+ 35|July 27.|15 3|4 02 |3 50|12| |76 |76 | | |29.70|38 55 |118 50| 72 |
+ 36|July 27.|13 |3 35 |3 33| 2| |76 |76 | | |29.70|38 55 |118 50| 78 |
+ 37|July 28.|15 3|4 21 |3 50|31| |83 |84 | |1 |29.62|38 50 |118 00 20 |
+ 38|July 28.|15 3|4 06 |3 50|16| |83 |84 | |1 |29.62|38 50 |118 00| 20 |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+--+--+---+---+---+---+-----+-------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ ---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 18 |Weather hazy. The low land of Sumatra just visible. The land wind has |
+ |been blowing gently for about four hours. |
+ 19 |East and west parts of the horizon observed. Coast of Sumatra just |
+ |visible. Hazy. The land-wind dying away. |
+ 20 |The day has been extremely hot, and almost a calm. The sea-breeze not yet |
+ |set in, only a few light flaws. |
+ 24 |A fresh breeze from WNW. The sun set in fiery dirty red clouds. Weather |
+ |squally, with occasional showers of rain. Parts of the horizon observed |
+ |east and west. |
+ 25 |Weather remarkably fine; sky clear; and a gentle breeze from the south. |
+ |The sun set about five minutes after these observations were taken. |
+ |Parts of the horizon observed east and west. |
+ 27 |The forenoon has been extremely hot and oppressive. A rolling swell from |
+ |the SW. |
+ 28 |Parts of the horizon observed SSW and NNE, the first clear to seaward, |
+ | the other clear horizon, but the mainland of China behind it, and |
+ |various islands on each side of the NNE line. |
+ 29 |Very hazy weather: sky fiery. |
+ 30 |Clear weather, with a light breeze from the eastward. Sun set behind a |
+ |low range of dark clouds: sky in that quarter was unusually red. A long |
+ |swell from the northward. |
+ 31 |Wind light from south; horizon uncommonly well defined and sharp; sky |
+ |clear; and the sea perfectly smooth. These sights, and the two following, |
+ |may be depended on, I think, within ten seconds. |
+ 32 |Circumstances similar to No. 31. |
+ 33 |Parts of the horizon observed were that immediately under the setting |
+ |sun; viz. W 21º N, and the opposite E 21º S, the sun being about 4º high. |
+ |Day has been remarkably clear, although the wind has been from the |
+ |southward, which in these seas is said generally to bring fogs. |
+ 35 |Weather somewhat hazy; wind easterly. |
+ 36 |Wind easterly. |
+ 37 |These sights were taken while at anchor off the mouth of the Pei-ho. The |
+ |fort of Tung-coo, on the south bank of the river, bearing W 50º N, distant|
+ |about four or five miles. |
+ ---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+------+--------+------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+----+-+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| + |-|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ |1816. |f. i|' " |' "|' " |"| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 39|July 28.|15 3|3 46 |3 50| |4|82 |83-| | 1-|29.61|38 50 |118 | 23 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | |
+ 40|July 29.|15 3|5 3 |3 50|1 13| |84 |81 | 3 | |29.60|38 50 |118 | 18 |
+ 41|July 29.|15 3|4 00.9|3 50| 10| |84 |83 | 1 | |29.58|38.50 |118 | 20 |
+ 42|Aug. 6. |15 3|5 09 |3 50|1 29| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.64|38 50 |118 | 22-|
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1/2|
+ 43|Aug. 6. |15 6|4 54 |3 53|1 1| |81-|83-| | 2 |29.64|38 50 |118 | 29 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | |
+ 44|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 47 |3 50 57| |81-|83-| | 2 |29.64|38 50 |118 | 29 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | |
+ 45|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 59 |3 50|1 9| |81-|83-| | 1-|29.64|38 50 |118 | 29-|
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| |1/2| | | | 1/2|
+ 46|Aug. 6. | 3 9|2 39 |1 54| 45| |81 |84-| | 3-|29.62|38 50 |118 | 30 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | |
+ 47|Aug. 6. | 6 |3 26 |2 25|1 1| |81 |84-| | 3-|29.62|38 50 |118 | 30-|
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | 1/2|
+ 48|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 59.2|3 50|1 9| |82 |80 | 2 | |29.59|38 50 |118 | 30 |
+ 49|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 47 |3 50|1 57| |78 |69-| 8-| |29.65|38 50 |118 | 26 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ 50|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 49 |3 59|1 59| |78 |69-| 8-| |29.65|38 50 |118 | 26 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ 51|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 47 |3 50|1 57| |77-|73 | 4-| |29.66|38 50 |118 | 24 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 52|Aug. 9. |15 3|4 30.4|3 59| 40| |79-|75 | 4-| |29.72|38 50 |118 | |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 53|Aug.10. | 5 6|5 18.3|2 20|2 58| |77 |75 | 2 | |29.69|38 50 |118 | 5 |
+ 54|Aug.10. | 5 6|4 28.3|2 20|2 8| | | | | | |38 50 |117 55| |
+ 55|Aug.10. | 5 6|4 7 |2 20|1 47| |77 |75 | 2 | |29.69|38 50 |117 55| 12 |
+ 56|Aug.10. | 5 6|3 55 |2 20|1 35| |77 |75 | 2 | |29.69|38 50 |118 | 13 |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 39|The day has been exceedingly close with little wind. |
+ 40|There has been little wind this morning, after a very close night. |
+ 41|Nearly calm, there being only a very light air from the SE.--Day sultry. |
+ 42|Weather hazy; sky clear overhead; sea remarkably smooth; wind north. |
+ 43|Moderate breeze from SE by S; rather hazy; but the horizon sharp and |
+ |distinct. And this together with the four following observations, may be |
+ |taken as very accurate, every circumstance being most favourable. |
+ 45|Parts of the horizon observed E by N and W by S. |
+ 46|Parts of the horizon observed SSE and NNW. Wind SE. |
+ 47|Wind SE. |
+ 48|Parts of the horizon observed E and W. The day, which has been remarkably |
+ |fine, has resumed towards sunset a wild, stormy aspect. Wind fresh at SE. |
+ 49|Parts of the horizon observed E by S and W by N. This morning unusually |
+ |clear; so that when the sun's semi-diameter only was above the horizon, |
+ |it was painful to look at him. The horizon has a rugged appearance. |
+ 50|Parts of the horizon observed NNE and SSW. Wind NNW, moderate. |
+ 51|Weather remarkably clear; horizon still rugged; wind NNW, moderate. |
+ 52|This morning cloudy, and looks rainy but the air seems clear. Parts of the |
+ |horizon observed NW by W and SE by E. |
+ 53|Parts of the horizon observed N by E and S by W. Instrument readjusted. |
+ |Wind WNW. |
+ 54|Parts of the horizon observed WSW and ENE. Wind NW. These observations |
+ |were taken close to the low land, near the mouth of the Pei-ho. The night |
+ |had been cold, and the morning was still keen; but unfortunately there |
+ |was no thermometer in the boat; I suppose, however, that the air was |
+ |about 66º At the time these sights were taken, I observed a vessel bearing |
+ |N by W, the lower half of whose sail was inverted. |
+ 55|Wind NW. |
+ 56|Wind NW. Parts of the horizon observed NW and SE. During these |
+ |observations,(53, 54, 55, 56) the vessels near the land had more or less |
+ |an inverted image under them. |
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+------+--------+------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+----+-+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| + |-|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ |1816. |f. i| ' " |' "|' " |"| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 57|Aug. 10.|15 3| 5 37 |3 50|1 47| |78 |76-| 1-| |29.70|38 50 |118 | 26 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ 58|Aug. 10.|15 3| 6 6 |3 50|2 16| |83 |84 | | 1 |29.68|38 50 |118 | 27 |
+ 59|Aug. 10.|15 3| 5 49 |3 50|1 59| |83 |84 | | 1 |29.68|38 50 |118 | 27 |
+ 60|Aug. 11.|15 3| 5 3 |3 50|1 13| |79 |76 | 3 | |29.72|38 50 |118 | 26-|
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1/2|
+ 61|Aug. 11.|15 3| 5 13 |3 50|1 23| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.73|38 50 |118 | 24 |
+ 62|Aug. 12.|16 | 4 52 |3 56| 56| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.79|38 50 |118 | 24 |
+ 63|Aug. 12.|15 3| 4 35 |3 50| 45| |81 |79-| 1-| |29.77|38 36 |117 56| 29-|
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | 1/2|
+ 64|Aug. 13.|16 | 4 4 |3 56| 8| |79 |78 | 1 | |29.80|38 31 |118 09| 42 |
+ 65|Aug. 13.|16 | 4 6 |3 56| 10| |79 |78 | 1 | |29.80|38 31 |118 09| 42 |
+ 66|Aug. 13.|16 | 4 20 |3 56| 24| |81 |83 | | 2 |29.80|38 21 |118 04| 44 |
+ 67|Aug. 14.|15 3| 4 30 |3 30|1 | |78 |79 | | 1 |29.71|38 30 |118 24| |
+ 68|Aug. 14.|15 3| 4 25 |3 30| 55| |79-|80-| | 1 |29.70|38 30 |118 35| 50 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | |
+ 69|Aug. 15.|15 3| 4 39 |3 30|1 9| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.77|38 00 |118 35| 48 |
+ 70|Aug. 15.|15 3| 4 53 |3 30|1 23| |81-|79 | 2-| |29.76|38 00 |118 54| 44 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 71|Aug. 15.|15 3| 5 4 |3 30|1 34| |82 |79 | 3 | |29.70|37 54 |118 56| 40 |
+ 72|Aug. 16.|15 3| 4 43 |3 30|1 13| |81 |76 | 5 | |29.17|37 38 |118 57| 39 |
+ 73|Aug. 17.|15 3| 4 38 |3 30|1 8| |80 |79-|1/2| |29.73|37 21 |119 28| 30 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | |
+ 74|Aug. 17.|14 | 4 29 |3 41| 48| |81-|81 |1/2| |29.75|37 19 |119 44| 33 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | |
+ 75|Aug. 17.|15 3| 4 42 |3 30|1 12| |81-|82 | |1/2|29.70|37 21 |119 44| 30 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | |
+ 76|Aug. 18.|16 | 4 39 |3 56| 43| |80 |77 | 3 | |29.76|37 29 |119 37| 48 |
+ 77|Aug. 20.|16 | 4 20 |3 56| 24| |77 |72 | 5 | |29.85|37 50 |120 16| |
+ 79|Aug. 21.|15 3| 4 42 |3 50| 52| |77 |71 | 6 | |29.80|37 52 |120 27| |
+ 80|Aug. 21.| 4 | 2 37 |1 58| 39| |77 |79 | | 2 |29.80|37 52 |120 27| 60 |
+ 81|Aug. 21.|15 3| 4 6 |3 50| 18| |77 |76 | 1 | |29.76| | | 60 |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 57|Weather very clear. Parts of the horizon observed ENE and WSW. |
+ 58|Parts of the horizon observed N by E and S by W. |
+ 59|The vessels in all parts of the horizon have an inverted image under them; |
+ |this is very considerable, some having about one-third of the sail, others |
+ |only the hull. |
+ 60|Light wind from SE. Sky cloudy, somewhat hazy; but the horizon sharp and |
+ |unbroken. |
+ 61|The inversion of the vessels as conspicuous as before. Parts of the |
+ |horizon observed ESE and WNW. |
+ 62|A light breeze from the SE. Cloudy and close.--N.B. Instrument readjusted. |
+ 63|Part of the horizon observed N and S. |
+ 64|Part of the horizon observed E and W. A moderate breeze from the SW. Clear |
+ |overhead; hazy in the horizon. |
+ 65|Parts of the horizon observed N and S. |
+ 66|Wind SE. Sky clear, and the horizon sharp. |
+ 67|Light breeze from ESE. Parts observed NE and SW. |
+ 68|Light breeze at ESE. Cloudy, with a haze in the horizon. Parts observed NE |
+ |and SW. |
+ 69|Parts of the horizon observed E and W. Moderate breeze from ENE. |
+ |Remarkably clear weather. |
+ 70|Steady moderate breeze at ENE. Very clear. Horizon sharp, and well defined.|
+ 72|Wind at East. Sky cloudy and rather hazy. |
+ 73|Light wind at SW. Hazy weather. |
+ 74|Light breeze from the Northward. Weather hazy. Parts of the horizon |
+ |observed SE and NW. |
+ 75|Parts of the horizon observed NE by E and SW by W. |
+ 76|Moderate breeze from East. Parts of the horizon observed WNW and ESE. |
+ 77|The wind has been blowing hard for two days from NE; this evening it has |
+ |lulled, and the weather has cleared off: there remains however a high |
+ |swell. |
+ 79|Land-wind South. Fine clear morning. |
+ 80|Parts of the horizon observed SW by S and NE by N. |
+ 81|The inversions which were so conspicuous this morning have been entirely |
+ |removed since the sea breeze set in. In some distant islands there is a |
+ |slight inversion at the ends, but very trifling. |
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+-------+-------+-------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+----+--+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| + | -|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+--+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ | 1816. |f. i| ' " |' "|' " | "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 82|Aug. 21.|14 | 3 26 |3 41| |15|76 |75 | 1 | |29.74| | | |
+ 83|Aug. 21.|15 3| 3 29 |3 41| |12|76 |75 | 1 | |29.74| | | |
+ 84|Aug. 22.|16 | 3 52 |3 56| | 4|75 |76 | 1 | |29.80| | | |
+ 85|Sept. 4.|12 | 3 46 |3 25| 21| |81 |83 | | 2 |29.86| 36 10|126 30| 56 |
+ 86|Sept. 4.|12 | 3 42 |3 25| 17| |81 |83 | | 2 |29.86| 36 8|126 35| 56 |
+ 87|Sept. 5.|15 | 3 47 |3 49| | 2|79 |80 | | 1 |29.80| 35 40|126 17| |
+ 88|Sept. 7.|15 3| 3 33 |3 41| | 8|74 |80 | | 6 |29.84| 34 32|126 34| |
+ 89|Sept. 7.|15 3| 3 27 |3 41| |14|74 |80 | | 6 |29.84| 34 32|126 34| |
+ | 1817. | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+ 90|Mar. 3. |14 | 3 57 |3 41| 16| |82 |84-| | 2-|29.74| 2 18|102 20| |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | |
+ 91|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 49 |3 46| 1 3| |83 |85 | | 2 |29.73| 3 40|100 35| |
+ 92|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 50 |3 46| 1 4| |83 |85 | | 2 |29.73| | | 165 |
+ 93|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 53 |3 46| 1 7| | | | | | | | | |
+ 94|Mar. 8. |14 8| 4 33 |3 46| 47| |84 |84 | | |29.86| 5 12|100 14| 120 |
+ a)| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+ 94|Mar. 8. |14 8| 4 58 |3 46|1 12| |84 |82-| 1-| |29.86| | | 120 |
+ b)| | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+--+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ --+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 82|This and the following were observed towards sunset; they exhibit a |
+ |considerable degree of refraction above what is usual. The sights on this |
+ |morning in the same place gave upwards of 1' greater dip. |
+ 83|All other circumstances the same as in No. 82. |
+ 84|Fresh breeze from SE, with a remarkably clear sky. The horizon uncommonly |
+ |sharp. |
+ 85|Wind moderate from WNW. Clear weather. |
+ 86|All other circumstances the same as in No. 85. Parts of the horizon |
+ |observed SSW and NNE. |
+ 87|Parts of the horizon observed WNW and ESE. |
+ 88|The morning has been exceedingly hot before the breezes set in from sea at |
+ |11 A.M. |
+ 89|All other circumstances the same as in No. 89. |
+ 90|After a very hot day. |
+ 91|Parts of the horizon observed ESE and WNW. See further remarks under 93. |
+ |Instruments readjusted. |
+ 92|Parts of the horizon observed NE and SW. All other circumstances as in No. |
+ |91. |
+ 93|Parts of the horizon observed SSE and NNW. These three observations (Nos. |
+ |91, 92, and 93) were made under the most favourable circumstances, and may |
+ |be considered as shewing the accuracy which the instrument is capable of |
+ |attaining. The sea was so perfectly smooth, that not the slightest motion |
+ |could be detected. The horizon at all the parts observed was sharp, and |
+ |better defined than I recollect to have seen it; and, what is not often the |
+ |case, the opposite parts were alike in strength of light &c. The day has |
+ |been hot, but not close, with a light breeze from the Southward. The dip is |
+ |very great, but the observations were made with such care, that there can |
+ |be no doubt of their accuracy. |
+ 94|There had been a light breeze from the North in the morning, but for an |
+ a)|hour before these sights were taken it had been calm. |
+ 94|Nearly the same place as No. 94(a); but the other circumstances were |
+ b)|changed, as the sea breeze at NW had set in about a quarter of an hour, |
+ |whereas in the last instance it was calm. The above angles were taken with |
+ |great care. The horizon sharp. Parts of the horizon observed NW and SE. |
+ --+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ---+--------+----+-----------+------+-------+-------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. | Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+--+---+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No.| Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| +| - |Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ ---+--------+----+------+----+--+---+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ | 1817. |f. i|' " |' "| "|' "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 95|Mar. 19.|14 8| 3 51 |3 46| 5| |80 |82 | | 2 |29.84| | | |
+ 96|Mar. 19.|14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |80 |82 | | 2 |29.78|13 30 | 89 30| |
+ 97|Mar. 20.|14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |79-|82 | | 2-|29.83|14 30 | 89 15| |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | |1/2| | | | |
+ 98|Mar. 21.|14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |80 |82 | | 2 |29.84|15 00 | 89 00| |
+ 99|Mar. 22.|14 8| 3 39 |3 46| | 7|79 |79-| |1/2|29.84|16 00 | 88 30| |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | |
+ 100|Mar. 23.|14 8| 3 47 |3 46| 1| |78-|79 | |1/2|29.80|17 00 | 88 00| |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | |
+ 101|Mar. 24.|14 8| 3 53 |3 46| 7| |78 |80 | | 2 |29.78|17 30 | 88 15| |
+ | | | | | | | | | | | |South.| | |
+ 102|July 22 |15 | 3 36 |3 49| | 13|71 |72 | | 1 | |34 0 | 26 | 400 |
+ 103|July 24.|15 | 3 16 |3 49| | 33|59 |62 | | 3 | |34 25 | 24 56| 372 |
+ 104|July 25.|15 | 3 36 |3 49| | 13|62 |63 | | 1 | |35 S | 23 45| 462 |
+ 105|July 26.|15 | 3 30 |3 49| | 19|58 |60 | | 2 | |35 S | 23 | 462 |
+ 106|July 26.|15 | 3 30 |3 40| | 19|60 |63 | | 3 | |34 52 | 22 23| 420 |
+ 107|July 27.|15 | 2 55 |3 49| | 54|56 |59 | | 3 | |35 | 21 | 24 |
+ 108|July 27.|15 | 2 47 |3 49| |1 2|56 |59 | | 3 | |35 | 21 | 240 |
+ 109|July 28.|15 | 3 17 |3 19| | 32|58 |64 | | 6 | |34 58 | 20 15| |
+ 110|July 28.|15 | 2 54 |3 49| | 55|59 |64 | | 5 | |34 57 | 20 15| 222 |
+ ---+--------+----+------+----+--+---+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ ---+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 95|The wind steady and moderate at NE; atmosphere clear; horizon well defined;|
+ |a long swell from SW. This swell, which was not high, produced an obvious |
+ |effect on the dip angle, as observed, the two horizons alternately |
+ |separating and overlapping; this change was however so slight that I have |
+ |not been able to measure it. |
+ 96|All other circumstances as in Nov. 95. Parts of the horizon observed NE |
+ |and SW. |
+ 97|During the night there has been a light breeze from the East; at this |
+ |moment it is freshening up a little. The atmosphere is clear; horizon |
+ |sharp; a long low swell from SW, as yesterday. |
+ 98|It has been calm, or nearly so, during the night; occasionally a light air |
+ |from SE and S. All circumstances favorable. |
+ 99|During the night there has been a light wind from SW. The weather is more |
+ |hazy than when the wind was from the Eastward, and the horizon not so |
+ |distinctly marked; but the above sights are good. There is still a swell |
+ |from SW, which causes some little uncertainty as to the exact moment of |
+ |taking the angle. |
+ 100|In the night there has been a light breeze from W by S. Weather hazy; but |
+ |the horizon sharper than yesterday morning. |
+ 101|During the night almost calm; just now a light air from the NE. Parts of |
+ |the horizon observed NE and SW. |
+ 102|Fine fair clear weather, but with so high a swell as to render the |
+ |observation difficult. Wind light from N, after having been blowing fresh. |
+ 103|Light breezes from the North-eastward; smooth water, and a clear cool air; |
+ |hazy about the land. The distance from the South cost of Africa was about |
+ |8 or 9 leagues. All circumstances seem favourable. No current; we have |
+ |probably been too near shore for it. |
+ 104|Light breeze from the SW, with a long swell. Hazy weather. The wind has |
+ |been from the West for 24 hours; at first blowing hard, but latterly |
+ |moderate, the current setting us to the SW about a mile an hour. A very |
+ |heavy dew falling this evening. Parts of the horizon observed East and |
+ |West. |
+ 105|Moderate breeze from the NE; air hazy; long high swell from the Westward. |
+ |From observations by stars and chronometers, it has been ascertained that |
+ |there is not the least current. Distance from the South coast of Africa |
+ |about 50 miles. A high range in sight to the Northward. Parts of the |
+ |horizon observed North and South. |
+ 106|A light breeze from the NE; air hazy; a long swell from the Westward. |
+ |About 50 miles distant from the land. |
+ 107|The wind has been moderate from the land all night; air hazy; weather raw; |
+ |a very heavy dew falling all night. The land in sight to the Northward, |
+ |distant about 40 miles, is inverted from one end to the other. |
+ 108|Parts of the horizon observed NNE and SSW. All other circumstances as in |
+ |No. 107. |
+ 109|Parts of the horizon observed NE and SW. Cape Lagullas North 2 or 3 |
+ |leagues. A light breeze from the Eastward. Air hazy. |
+ 110|Parts of the horizon observed SE and NW. Cape Lagullas due North, distant |
+ |6 or 8 miles. Calm all day; sky clear; and weather hazy. |
+ | |
+ |N.B. On the 29th and 30th of July we were off the Cape, but the weather |
+ |was so bad as to prevent any sights being taken. |
+ ---+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+
+
+METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,
+
+FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 1816, WHILE THE SHIPS WERE IN THE YELLOW AND JAPAN
+SEAS.
+
+
+
+
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ | | Thermom.| | | |
+ | +----+----+ | | |
+ Hour.|Barom. |Air.|Sea.| Winds.| Lat. | Long. |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | South | | |_Sunday, July 14, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | SSW | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued quite
+ 4 | | | | | | |light during the night, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |one or two slight showers, but
+ 6 | | | | | | |no squalls.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30i.01h| | | SW | | |About 8 A.M. the wind
+ 9 | | | | | | |hauled to about SW, from
+ 10 | | | | | | |which quarter it blew a light
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |breeze.
+ Noon.|30 .01 | 83º| 84º| |22º 07'|115º 26'|
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Coast of |
+ 3 | | | | | China. |
+ 4 |29 .94 | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |_Monday, July 15, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The same winds during the
+ 4 | | | | | | |night.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Found that we had been
+ 10 |29 .89 | | |SW by W| | |driven by a current,
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |setting about E by N, 2-1/2
+ Noon.|29 .89 | 82 | 83 | WNW |22 .43 |117 .30 |miles an hour.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | West | |
+ 2 | | | | | SE Coast |
+ 3 | | | | | of China. |About 3 o'clock it became
+ 4 | | | | | |extremely hazy; the sun set
+ 5 | | | | | |in fiery clouds, and a blood
+ 6 | | | | WSW | |red tint was given to the low
+ 7 | | | | | |clouds all round the horizon.
+ 8 |29 .76 | | | SW | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, July 16, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | WSW | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During this day there has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been a moderate breeze from
+ 6 | | | | West | | |the SSW, with a thick haze,
+ 7 | | | | | | |and dew at night.
+ 8 |29 .74 | | | WSW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Soundings from 32 to 26
+ 10 | | | | SW | | |fathoms: dark fine sand.
+ 11 |29 .83 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 83 | | |24 .37 |118 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Straits of |We have seen no land all
+ 3 | | | | | Formosa, |day, having ran along nearly
+ 4 | | | | | China. |parallel with the coast
+ 5 | | | | | |of about 30 or 40 about
+ 6 |29 .75 | | | | |Chusan, at the distance
+ 7 | | | | | |leagues.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 80 | 79 | SW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .76 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, July 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 80 | SSW | | |The weather is remarkably
+ | | |-1/2| | | |hazy, and there is a very
+ 5 | | | | | | |disagreeable sea coming after
+ 6 |29 .76 | | | | | |us.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 82 | 81 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .81 | | | SW | | |
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .81 | 82 | 80 |SW by S| 26 .1 |122 .6 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |29 .80 | | | SSW | |
+ 2 | | | | | Straits of |At night hazy with a heavy
+ 3 | | | | | Formosa, |dew; soundings 52 fathoms.
+ 4 |29 .76 | 82 | 81 | | China. |To-day we quitted the Straits
+ 5 |29 .76 | | | | |of Formosa, and stood towards
+ 6 | | | | | |the Yellow Sea. Last evening
+ 7 |29 .76 | | | | |we were among a cluster of
+ 8 |29 .79 | 82 | 80 | South | |large islands near the coast
+ 9 | | | | | |of China, about two-thirds of
+ 10 | | | | | |the way through the Straits
+ 11 | | | | | |of Formosa.
+ Mid.|29 .80 | 81 | 80 |S by W | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |_Thursday, July 18, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind during all this day
+ 4 | | | | | | |has been from the South
+ 5 |29 .78 | | | | | |Westward.
+ 6 | | | | | | | From noon till midnight it
+ 7 | | | | | | |continued fresh and steady,
+ 8 |29 .80 | 81 | 80 | WSW | | |after which it lulled.
+ 9 | | | | | | |Weather very hazy, and at
+ 10 |29 .86 | | | SW | | |night a heavy dew falling.
+ 11 | | | | | N | | Depth of water from 35 to
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 81 | 79 | SSW |26 .21 | |37 fathoms.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | SW | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | |To the northward|
+ 3 | | | | |of the Straits |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 81 | 80 |SW by W|of Formosa. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .76 | | | SW | |No land seen to-day, being
+ 7 | | | | | |about 30 leagues off shore,
+ 8 |29 .76 | 81 | 79 | SSW | |to the Northward of the
+ 9 | | | | | |Straits of Formosa.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, July 19, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .78 | 79 | 78 |S by W | | |During this day there has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been a moderate breeze from
+ 6 |29 .75 | | | | | |the SSW, with a thick haze
+ 7 | | | | | | |and dew at night.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 78 | 78 | SSW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Soundings from 32 to 26
+ 10 |29 .78 | | | SW | | |fathoms: fine dark sand.
+ 11 |29 .78 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .78 | 78 | 79 |SW by W|30 .54 |123 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .75 | | | |Off the Islands |
+ 3 | | | | |of Chusan 30 or |
+ 4 |29 .72 | 80 | 80 | SSW |40 leagues. |
+ 5 | | | | | |We have seen no land this
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | |day, having ran along nearly
+ 7 | | | | | |parallel with the coast about
+ 8 |29 .72 | 79 | 80 | South | |Chusan, at the distance of
+ 9 | | | | | |about 30 or 40 leagues.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .74 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |S by W | | |_Saturday, July 20, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Light SSW winds, with thick
+ 4 |29 .69 | 79 | 76 | | | |haze and dew at night. Regular
+ 5 | | | | | | |soundings 20 fathoms: mud and
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | | |black sand.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 79 | 77 | South | | |
+ 9 | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 80 | 78 |S by W |32 .35 |123 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |To-day we are about halfway
+ 2 |29 .70 | | |SW by W| Entering the |between the SE part of
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |Corea and the Chusan islands,
+ 4 |29 .66 | 80 | 77 | WSW | |each being about 50 leagues
+ 5 | | | | | |distant; the mouth of the
+ 6 |29 .68 | | | | |great river Yang-tse-kiang is
+ 7 | | | | | |nearly W 50 leagues, and the
+ 8 |29 .66 | 79 | 77 |SW by W| |promontory of Shan-tung N by
+ 9 | | | | | |W 100 leagues.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .69 | 78 | 77 | WSW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |W by N | | |_Sunday, July 21, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | NNW | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind after noon yesterday
+ 5 | | | | | | |freshened up towards sunset
+ 6 | | | | | | |from the WSW, and in the
+ 7 | | | | | | |night it hauled to the NW
+ 8 |29 .76 | 75 | 76 |N by W | | |gradually, and so to North;
+ 9 | | | | | | |about noon it became quite
+ 10 |29 .78 | | | | | |light as it drew to the
+ 11 |29 .79 | | | | N | E |northward.
+ Noon.|29 .79 | 76 | 77 | North |33 .55 | 124 |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+The weather has become quite
+ 1 |29 .78 | | | | |clear since the change of the
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | | Yellow Sea. |wind.
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .78 | 77 | 77 | NNW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Land in sight to-day about
+ 6 |29 .79 | | |E by N | |East from us, supposed to be
+ 7 | | | | | |the islands off the South end
+ 8 |29 .79 | 77 | 77 | East | |of Corea.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | |E by S | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | SE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SSE | | |_Monday, July 22, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |In the night there was a
+ 4 |9 .69 | 75 | 77 |S by W | | |breeze from the SSW with
+ 5 | | | | | | |very thick weather, and
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | | |much lightning all round.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .71 | 77 | 76 |SW by W| | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .71 | | | SW | | |
+ 11 |29 .75 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .75 | 78 | 77 | SSW |34 .44 |123 .55 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | SW | Yellow Sea. |After noon it fell calm till
+ 3 | | | | | |about 6 P.M. when there came
+ 4 |29 .75 | 79 | 79 | Calm | |light breeze from the westward
+ 5 | | | | | |which hauled to north, and
+ 6 |29 .73 | | | NNE | |about morning fell nearly calm.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .73 | 76 | 77 |N by E | |Regular soundings from 44 to
+ 9 | | | | | |43 fathoms: mud.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .74 | 75 | 76 | North | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |N by W | | |_Tuesday, July 23, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | West | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .76 | 75 | 76 | Calm | | |About 8 this morning a
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze sprung at South, which
+ 6 | | | | | | |lasted during the day,
+ 7 | | | | | | |freshening very gradually--sky
+ 8 |29 .78 | 77 | 77 | SSE | | |clear.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | SE | | |Regular soundings 43
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |fathoms: mud.
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 78 | South |35 .06 |123 .06 |
+ -----+-------+----+--- +-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .79 | | | | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .79 | 81 | 78 | SSW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |A moderate breeze from the
+ 6 |29 .78 | | | | |Southward, and fine clear
+ 7 | | | | | |weather.
+ 8 |29 .76 | 78 | 77 | SE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | SSE | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .77 | 77 | 76 |S by E | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SSE | | |_Wednesday, July 24, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind during these 24
+ 4 | | | | | | |hours has been moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |from the Southward.--Quite
+ 6 | | | | | | |clear, not the least
+ 7 | | | | | | |appearance of fog.
+ 8 |29 .75 | 77 | 76 |SE by S| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 |29 .77 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | |S by E | | |
+ 11 |29 .86 | | | NW | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .88 | 75 | 78 |NW by W|36 .27 |123 .01 |A very curious assemblage
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+of clouds passed over us at
+ 1 | | | | | |noon from the NW.
+ 2 |29 .70 | | |E by S | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .69 | 76 | 74 |SE by E| |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | SSE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 75 | 72 |S by E | |Soundings 40, 38, and 37
+ 9 | | | | | |fathoms: brown mud.
+ 10 | | | |S by W | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, July 25, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 70 | 71 | SSW | | |The wind during the night
+ 5 | | | | | | |hung to the SW, with rain
+ 6 | | | | | | |occasionally.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 71 | 66 | Calm | | |After daybreak the
+ 9 | | | | WNW | | |weather cleared up, and the
+ 10 |29 .70 | | |NW by W| | |breeze fell gradually as we
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | NW | N | E |rounded the NE point of the
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 74 | 73 | |37 .32 |122 .37 |promontory of Shan-tung.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .70 | | | East |Nearly on the |
+ 3 | | | | |meridian of the |
+ 4 |29 .66 | 77 | 72 | SE |NE point of |
+ 5 | | | | |Shan-tung |
+ 6 |29 .66 | | | SSE |promontory, |
+ 7 | | | | |Yellow Sea. |In the forenoon it felt
+ 8 |29 .61 | 76 | 72 | | |calm, and towards sunset a
+ 9 | | | | | |breeze sprung up from ESE
+ 10 | | | | | |and SE which lasted during
+ 11 | | | | | |the night.
+ Mid |29 .61 | 75 | 75 |S by W | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |S by W | | |_Friday, July 26, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | South | | |As the day broke, the
+ 4 |29 .61 | 74 | 72 | SSE | | |breeze which had been light
+ 5 | | | | | | |during the night, freshened
+ 6 | | | | | | |up, and the weather, hitherto
+ 7 | | | | South | | |clear, became suddenly quite
+ 8 |29. 61 | 74 | 72 | SSW | | |foggy; this however lasted
+ 9 | | | | | | |only half an hour, and we
+ 10 |29. 62 | | | | | |enjoyed during the day the
+ 11 |29. 62 | | | | N | E |same fine clear weather,
+ Noon.|29. 62 | 74 | 72 |S by W |38 .07 |122 .00 |with the exception indeed of
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+one thunder squall, which
+ 1 | | | | SSW | |lasted only a few minutes,
+ 2 |29. 62 | | | SW | |and passed over, going towards
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |the SE.
+ 4 |29. 59 | 76 | 66 | WNW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |N.B. This was the only
+ 6 |29. 60 | | |SE by S| |instance of fog during the
+ 7 | | | | SE | |six weeks that the ships were
+ 8 |29. 60 | 73 | 68 | | |in the Yellow Sea.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29. 60 | 75 | 74 |SE by E| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | South | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, July 27, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | SSE | | |During the whole of this
+ 5 | | | | | | |day we had a fresh breeze
+ 6 | | | | | | |from East and ESE, with dark
+ 7 | | | | | | |cloudy weather. As we drew
+ 8 |29. 69 | 77 | 77 | SE | | |across the Gulf of Petchelee
+ | | |-1/2| | |we had the wind much stronger.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 69 | | | East | | |
+ 11 |29. 70 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29. 70 | 76 | 76 | ENE |38 .52 |117 .49 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 68 | | |E by S | |
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |We anchored at seven
+ 4 |29. 61 | 76 | 77 |E by N | |o'clock in 3-1/2 fathoms water.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29. 61 | | | East | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 80 | 77 | 82 |E by N | |
+ 9 | | | | | |In the night it blew hard
+ 10 |29. 84 | | |SE by E| |from the East, and at sunrise
+ 11 | | | | | |we had a violent thunder
+ Mid.| | | | | |storm.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |SE by E| | |_Sunday, July 28, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After the thunder storm had
+ 4 |29 .70 | 80 | 80 |SE by S| | |passed the weather cleared up,
+ | | |-1/2| | | |and became quite fine.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .63 | 82 | 82 | SW | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .61 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .62 | | | | N | |
+ Noon.|29 .60 | 83 | 82 |W by N |38.52.42| |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | |N by E | |
+ 2 |29 .60 | | | North | Pei-ho, |During the day the breeze
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |has been moderate, with fine
+ 4 |29 .61 | 81 | 82 |E by S | |clear weather.
+ 5 | | | | SSE | |
+ 6 |29 .62 | | |S by E | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | |
+ 9 |29 .61 | 83 | 82 | South | |
+ 10 | | | |S by E | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .60 | 80 | 82 | SW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, July 29, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | WSW | | |
+ 4 |29 .59 | 79 | 81 | NNW | | |Light breezes and cloudy
+ | | |-1/2| | | |weather.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .60 | 82 | 82 |E by N | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it fell calm.
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .62 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .60 | 82 | 84 | NE |38 .56 |118 .00 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .59 | | | SE | |At anchor off the mouth of the
+ 3 | | | | | |Pei-ho river, Yellow Sea.
+ 4 |29 .53 | 83 | 84 | ESE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .55 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .55 | 82 | 82 | SE | |During the night a moderate
+ | |-1/2| | | |breeze from the Eastward.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .63 | 80 | 82 |SE by E| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, July 30, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |SE by E| | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During this day there has
+ 4 | | | | | | |been a light air from the
+ 5 | | | | | | |Eastward, and fine clear
+ 6 | | | | East | | |weather.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .50 | 82 | 82 | ENE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .63 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .63 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .62 | 81 | |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .65 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .68 | 81 | 84 |SE by E|Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .61 | 82 | 83 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |At midnight it fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .69 | 83 | 82 | Calm | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, July 31, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |This morning there is a
+ 5 | | | | | | |light air from the eastward,
+ 6 | | | | | | |inclining to calm.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | 88 | 82 | SW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 84 | 85 | WNW | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .70 | | | ESE |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .61 | 83 | 86 SE |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .71 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 82 | 82 | SSE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards night the breeze
+ 10 | | | | | |freshened up from the SE.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .84 | 83 | 82 | South | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 1, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | SW | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night there has
+ 4 |29 .69 | 83 | 84 | West | | |been a fresh breeze from the
+ 5 | | | | | | |SW, with rain and lightning.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 81 | 82 |SW by S| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .69 | | | SSW | | |Towards noon it became more
+ 11 | | | | | | |moderate.
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 81 | 82 |SW by S| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .63 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .66 | 82 | 82 |S by E |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 | | | | SE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 80 | 82 |S by E | |And at night it was very
+ 9 | | | | SSW | |squally, with rain.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .65 | 79 | 82 | SW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |W by S | | |_Friday, August 2, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the whole of the night
+ 5 | | | | | | |it rained.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | 78 | 82 | | | |Towards morning it blew fresh
+ | |-1/2| | | | |from the Westward.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .68 | | | SSW | | |
+ Noon.|29 .67 | 79 | 82 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |S by W | |
+ 2 |29 .63 | | | SE |At anchor off |During the whole of the day
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|it has been very hazy with
+ 4 |29 .68 | 78 | 83 | East |Pei-ho, Yellow |slight showers of rain.
+ | |-1/2| | |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .63 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .65 | 78 | 82 | SSE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Midnight, fresh breezes and
+ 10 | | | | | |clear.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .70 | 79 | 82 | East | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, August 3, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |E by N | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Fresh breezes and cloudy
+ 4 |29 .72 | 77 | 81 | NE | | |weather.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .84 | 77 | 81 | ENE | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Strong breezes and cloudy,
+ 10 | | | | | | |with slight showers of rain
+ 11 |29 .84 | | | NE | | |at intervals.
+ Noon.|29 .82 | 79 | 82 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .80 | 76 | 82 |NE by N|Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .84 | | | | |Towards evening it cleared
+ 7 | | | | | |up.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 76 | 80 | ENE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |A short swell from the NE.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ Mid.| | 75 | 80 |NE by N| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | North | | |_Sunday, August 4, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |Light airs and fine weather.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | NW | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .69 | 78 | 80 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ Noon |29 .70 | 78 | 81 | West | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | NW | |Cloudy, with slight showers
+ 2 |29 .68 | | | WNW |At anchor off |of rain at intervals.
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .68 | 78 | 81 | WSW |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .68 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .68 | 78 | 80 | West | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .68 | 77 | 81 | SW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, August 5, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |W by S | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ 4 |29 .68 | 77 | 80 | WSW | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .68 | 78 | 80 |W by N | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .69 | | | | | |In the forenoon we had a
+ 11 | | | | | | |slight shower.
+ Noon.|29 .68 | 78 | 81 | SW | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .68 | | |W by S |At anchor off |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .66 | 81 | 81 | WSW |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | | |-1/2| |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .65 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Light breezes and cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .59 | | |W by S | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | SW | | |_Tuesday, August 6, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | NE | | |
+ 4 |29 .65 | 71 | 79 | North | | |Alight breeze from the SW.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |Towards 4 A.M. the wind
+ 7 | | | | | | |shifted round to NW, and
+ 8 |29 .64 | 73 | 77 | NNW | | |freshened up.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .64 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | WSW | | |
+ Noon.|29 .63 | 76 | 81 |SW by W| | |Noon, a moderate breeze and
+ | | | | | | |fine weather.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .64 | 83 | 81 | SSE |At anchor off |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| |the mouth of the|
+ 3 | | | | |Pei-ho, Yellow |After noon the breeze, which
+ 4 |29 .60 | 82 | 81 | |Sea. |had hauled round to SE,
+ 5 | | | | | |freshened up considerably.
+ 6 |29 .62 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards sunset dark slaty
+ 8 |29 .66 | 79 | 82 | SE | |clouds drew over us from the
+ 9 | | | | | |land, moving in a contrary
+ 10 | | | | | |direction from that of the wind
+ 11 | | | | | |which we had.
+ Mid.|29 .66 | 80 | 81 |S by E | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, August 7, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | South | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |At sunrise it was moderate,
+ 4 | | | |E by N | | |but about nine o'clock the
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze freshened, and towards
+ 6 | | | | | | |noon blew fresh from the
+ 7 | | | | | | |Eastward.
+ 8 |29 .67 | 79 | 81 | East | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .95 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 77 | 80 |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .92 | 76 | 80 | NE |Pei-ho, Yellow |Fresh breezes and cloudy.
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .82 | | | | |Towards night it moderated.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .81 | 73 | 78 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |At midnight a moderate breeze.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 8, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .65 | 71 | 78 | North | | |Moderate and cloudy.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 73 | 77 | NNW | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .67 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .68 | 76 | 81 | | | |Moderate and fine.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .66 | | | NNW |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .65 | 81 | | |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | |-1/2| | |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 79 | 80 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |Light airs.
+ Mid.|29 .71 | 77 | 79 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 9, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |N by E | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Light airs and cloudy.
+ 4 |29 .73 | 75 | 77 | NW | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .74 | 76 | 79 | | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |2 A.M. a moderate breeze
+ 11 | | | | | | |sprung up at NW.
+ Noon.|29 .77 | 80 | 79 | ESE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .76 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .70 | 79 | 77 | SSE |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | | |-1/2| |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | | | | |Moderate breezes.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .70 | 76 | 78 | NW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NW | | |_Saturday, August 10, 1816_
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | WNW | | |Moderate breezes and clear.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .60 | 75 | 77 | NW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | | | |Calm and fine weather.
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 81 | 79 | Calm | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .69 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .67 | 79 | 78 | SSE |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | | |-1/2| |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .65 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 76 | 78 | SW | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | Moderate and cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .74 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, August 11, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | SE | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 75 | 78 | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | |SE by S| | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 76 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .75 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 79 | 80 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ Moderate and clear weather.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | SE |Off the River |
+ 3 | | | | |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 4 |29 .72 | 79 | 78 | |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | 75 | 79 | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .75 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, August 12, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | 75 | 78 | SE | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Moderate breezes from the
+ 10 | | | | | | |SE, with fine clear weather:
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |lightning at times.
+ Noon.|29 .79 | 79 | 79 |S by E |38 .38 |117 .44 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .79 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .78 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Moderate and fine weather.
+ 6 |29 .78 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 79 | 81 | SE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Moderate breezes and clear,
+ 10 | | | | | |with lightning.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .80 | 79 | 80 |SE by S| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 13, 1816._
+ 3 | | | |S by W | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |In the evening we had fresh
+ 6 | | | | | | |breezes from the SE--sky
+ 7 | | | | | | |assuming a threatening
+ 8 |29 .79 | 89 | 79 | SSW | | |appearance. Towards midnight
+ 9 | | | | | | |it moderated, at which time it
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | | |fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 83 | 81 | SE | 38 .34| 118 .08|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .77 | 80 | 80 | ESE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | SE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .79 | 79 | 78 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | |SE by S| |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | Calm | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |SE by S| | |_Wednesday, August 14, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | SE | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 77 | 78 | WSW | | |After midnight a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze sprung up from the SE.
+ 6 |29 .71 | 79 | 78 | South | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 79 | 78 | SSE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | |About 4 A.M. it shifted
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |more to the Southward, and
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 79 | 78 | |38 .29 |118.20 |remained so the rest of the day.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ Weather fine.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .71 | | |S by E | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 80 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 79 | 80 |E by N | |
+ 9 | | | |E by S | |
+ 10 | | | | ESE | |At midnight the wind drew
+ 11 | | | | | |round to the Eastward.
+ Mid.|29 .75 | 76 | 79 |E by S | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 15, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | 76 | 79 | SE | | |Moderate and fine weather.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | East | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .77 | 78 | 80 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .79 | | | | N | E |During the day the wind
+ Noon.|29 .78 | 78 | 81 | | 37.58 | 118.49 |remained at East and ENE,
+ | |-1/2| | | | ||blowing a moderate breeze.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .76 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 82 | ENE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .74 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it freshened
+ 8 |29 .76 | 78 | | | |up, and remained quite steady.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .86 | 77 | 80 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 16, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day the wind continued at
+ 5 | | | | | | |East, the same as yesterday.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .79 | 79 | 81 |E by N | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | |E by S | | |
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 81 |E by N | 37 .30| 118.57 |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |E by S | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |In the evening it became
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 81 | ENE | |squally, with rain.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .74 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .74 | 79 | 80 SE by S| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind
+ 10 | | | | | |hauled to the Southward.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | |S by W | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | S by W| | |
+ 2 | | | | SSW | | |_Saturday, August 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 78 | 80 |SW by S| | |To-day we have had a breeze
+ | |-1/2| | | | |from the SW.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 |29 .74 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | | |
+ 9 |29 .74 | 79 | 84 | SW | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .74 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .75 | 81 | 81 | | 37 .20| 119.33 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |During the afternoon the
+ 4 | | | | | |wind shifted to the Eastward,
+ 5 | | | | | |where it remained, and blew a
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | |steady breeze.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 79 | 80 | East | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .71 | 79 | 80 |E by S | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | East | | |_Sunday, August 18, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .72 | 79 | 80 |E by N | | |After midnight we had a
+ | |-1/2| | | | |moderate breeze from the
+ 5 | | | | | | |Eastward, and at 4 A.M. it
+ 6 | | | | | | |freshened up at ENE, where it
+ 7 | | | | | | |continued until the evening, at
+ 8 |29 .80 | 79 | 80 | | | |which time it shifted to the
+ 9 | | | | | | |SE, with rain.
+ 10 |29 .81 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 79 | | 37 .47| 119 .37|
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |NE by E| |
+ 2 |29 .82 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |At eight it was nearly calm.
+ 4 |29 .88 | 78 | 79 | ENE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |About nine a breeze sprung
+ 6 |29 .82 | | | | |up from the Eastward,
+ 7 | | | |SE by S| |accompanied by rain.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 78 | 78 | Calm | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .98 | 78 | 78 | East | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NNE | | |_Monday, August 19, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |A light air.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 78 | 78 | ENE | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .92 | | | | N | E |Towards noon the breeze
+ Noon.|29 .92 | 74 | 77 | NE | 37. 40| 119.44 |freshened up at North-easterly,
+ | | |-1/2| | | |where it continued all day, and
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+blew rather fresh, with a short
+ 1 | | | | | |swell.
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | Gulf of |
+ 4 |29 .92 | 75 | 77 | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .94 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 74 | 76 |NE by N| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 20, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .95 | 76 | 78 | N by E| | |During the night it blew a
+ 5 | | | | | | |steady fresh breeze from NNE,
+ 6 | | | | | | |in which quarter it continued
+ 7 | | | | | | |all this day.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 76 | 77 | NNE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |The sky having a threatening
+ 9 | | | | | | |appearance.
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .03 | 75 | | | 37 .46| 120 .08|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |Towards the evening moderated.
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | Gulf of |
+ 4 |29 .90 | 74 | 78 | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Near midnight the wind came
+ 8 |29 .90 | 74 | 77 |NE by N| |round to the SW, and blew a
+ | | |-1/2| | |moderate breeze.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |_Wednesday, August 21, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The early part of the day the
+ 4 | | | | | | |wind has been moderate from the
+ 5 | | | | SSW | | |Southward.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 74 | 77 |S by W | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |About noon it died away, but
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |shortly after a breeze sprung
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 77 | Calm | 37 .51| 120 .33|up from the Eastward, and blew
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+pretty steady from that quarter
+ 1 | | | | | |till the evening, when it
+ 2 |29 .78 | | | East | Gulf of |hauled round to the SE.
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .76 | 76 | 77 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .76 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .74 | 75 | 77 |SE by S| |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .82 | 74 | 73 |S by E | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 22, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .80 | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |During the early part of the
+ 6 | | | | | | |day we had a moderate breeze
+ 7 | | | | | | |from the SE.
+ 8 |29 .80 | 77 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 80 | 78 | SE | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Off Cheatow, |After noon it hauled to the
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |Southward.
+ 4 |29 .74 | 78 | 78 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 77 | 78 | SSE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 23, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind has
+ 4 |29 .70 | 78 | 78 | NE | | |been moderate, and steady
+ 5 | | | | | | |from the Southward.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 80 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .72 | 81 | 78 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |SE by E| At anchor in |In the forenoon it veered to
+ 3 | | | | | Cheatow Bay, |the NE, and towards night to
+ 4 |29 .70 | 80 | 78 | SE | Yellow Sea. |the Southward.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .68 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 79 | 78 | Calm | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .66 | 77 | 78 | South | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | South | | |_Saturday, August 24, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 77 | 78 | | | |During the morning the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |was steady from the Southward.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .68 | 78 | 78 | S by E| | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .68 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .68 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |29 .68 | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .66 | | | | Che-a-tow, |
+ 3 |29 .66 | | | | Yellow Sea. |
+ 4 |29 .66 | 79 | 78 | | |Towards night the wind hauled
+ 5 |29 .64 | | | | |to the Eastward, blowing a
+ 6 |29 .64 | | | | |moderate breeze, and steady.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | 78 | 78 | East | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .62 | 78 | 77 | E by S| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Sunday, August 25, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | E by S| | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued to blow
+ 4 |29 .74 | | | | | |from the NE quarter all the
+ 5 | | | | | | |forenoon.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 78 | 78 | N by E| | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | NE | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .66 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NE | Che-a-tow, |
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |In the afternoon it hauled
+ 4 | | | | N by E| |more to the Northward.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | E by S| |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 78 | 77 | | |At midnight it hauled to the
+ | | |-1/2| | |SW, with fine clear weather.
+ 9 | | | | | |A heavy dew falling.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | SW | | |_Monday, August 26, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .56 | 77 | 77 | WNW | | |After midnight it continued
+ | | |-1/2| | | |to blow a moderate breeze from
+ 5 | | | | | | |the SW.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .56 | 78 | 77 |W by N | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .56 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .56 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |About 4 A.M. it shifted to
+ 2 |29 .64 | | | | Che-a-tow, |the NW, from which quarter it
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |blew the whole of the day.
+ 4 |29 .52 | 79 | 78 | NW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .52 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .54 | 79 | 78 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .56 | 78 | 78 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 27, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | NW | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Towards noon the wind hauled
+ 4 |29 .58 | 77 | 77 | North | | |more to the Westward, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain, thunder, and lightning.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .64 | 78 | 78 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .62 | | |S by W | At anchor in |
+ 3 | | | | | Oie-hai-oie |
+ 4 |29 .62 | 76 | 77 | | harbour, |
+ 5 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .62 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .61 | 76 | 77 | NNE | |In the evening the wind came
+ 9 | | | | | |to the NNE.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .64 | 75 | 77 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, August 28, 1816._
+ 3 | | | |NE by N| | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been
+ 5 | | | | | | |moderate and steady from the
+ 6 | | | | | | |North-eastward.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 75 | 77 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .72 | 77 | 76 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NE | Oie-hai-oie |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour, |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 77 | 76 | ENE | Yellow Sea. |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night the breeze
+ 8 |29 .70 | 77 | 76 | NE | |freshened, and the sky became
+ 9 | | | | | |cloudy, assuming a threatening
+ 10 | | | | | |appearance.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .74 | 79 | 76 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 29, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind hauled
+ 4 |29 .78 | 77 | 76 |E by N | | |to the Eastward, blowing fresh,
+ 5 | | | | | | |the weather still looking very
+ 6 | | | | | | |black.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 78 | 76 |S by E | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 81 | 77 | South | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | | Oie-hai-oie |After 4 it moderated, and the
+ 3 | | | | | harbour, |weather cleared up and became
+ 4 |29 .90 | 81 | 78 | SSE | Yellow Sea. |quite fine.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |About 8 P.M. the wind came
+ 8 |29 .92 | 78 | 77 | SW | |to the Southward. Towards
+ 9 | | | | | |midnight it drew round to the
+ 10 | | | | | |SW, and then to South again.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .94 | 79 | 77 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 30, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .96 | 78 | 77 |S by W | | |All the forenoon the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |has been light from the
+ 6 | | | | | | |Southward and SW.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 78 | 77 | SW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .98 | | | West | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .96 | 80 | 76 | Calm |37 .58 |122 .58 |About noon it fell calm.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | |Calm| | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .92 | 80 | 81 | NNE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |At 2 a breeze sprung up from
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |the NE, with small drizzling
+ 7 | | | | | |rain, and thick weather.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 79 | 79 | ENE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, August 31, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 |29 .90 | 79 | 79 |W by N | | |After midnight a light breeze
+ 6 | | | | | | |from the Eastward, inclining
+ 7 | | | | | | |to calm.
+ 8 |29 .92 | 80 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .96 | 80 | 79 |NW by N|37 .55 |123 .37 |About noon a breeze sprung up
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+from the Westward; weather
+ 1 | | | | | |cloudy.
+ 2 |29 .94 | | | NW | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .94 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |In the afternoon it died away
+ 6 |29 .92 | | | | |quite light.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .92 | 79 | 79 | Calm | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Towards midnight a moderate
+ 11 | | | | | |breeze from the Northward.
+ Mid. | | | | NW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |NE by N| | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 1, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 |29 .90 | 76 | 78 | N by E| | |During this day there has been
+ 6 | | | | | | |a steady breeze at North and
+ 7 | | | | | | |North by East.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 76 | 76 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .92 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .90 | 76 | 76 | |37 .45 | 124 .48|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | North | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | | Yellow Sea. |Towards night the wind
+ 3 | | | | | |freshened up.
+ 4 | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 75 | 75 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 2, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |About 2 A.M. the wind shifted
+ 4 | | | | | | |to the Eastward, where it
+ 5 | | | | | | |freshened.
+ 6 | 29.82 | 78 | 79 | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 | 29.82 | 80 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | 29.82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.| 29.82 | 81 | 80 |NW by N|36 .45 |124 .51 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |S by W | West Coast of |
+ 2 | 29.96 | | | | Corea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon it freshened
+ 4 | 29.98 | 80 | 80 | SSE | |and shifted to the Southward,
+ 5 | | | | | |accompanied by a slight shower
+ 6 | 29.98 | | | | |of rain.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | 30.04 | 80 | 80 |S by W | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | South | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 3, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | 30.02 | | | South | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |The wind during all the night
+ 6 | | | | | | |has been steady from the
+ 7 | | | | | | |Southward, and remained so all
+ 8 | 30.04 | 77 | 79 |S by W | | |day until the evening, when it
+ 9 | | | | | | |shifted to the Westward.
+ 10 | 30.04 | | | SSW | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.| 30.00 | 79 | 78 | |36 .18 |126 .09 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | 29.98 | | | SW | |
+ 3 | | | | WSW | |
+ 4 | 29.95 | 81 | 78 | West | |About sunset it fell calm.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | 29.94 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | 29.92 | 80 | 77 | Calm | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, September 4, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | Calm | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |It continued calm all night.
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .95 | 78 | 78 | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .95 | 79 | 78 | West | | |About 8 A.M. a light breeze
+ 9 | | | | | | |from the Westward.
+ 10 |29 .95 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .92 | 80 | 82 | NW |36 .13 | 126 .34|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+At noon it freshened, hauling
+ 1 | | | | | |from W to NW.
+ 2 |29 .85 | | | West | West Coast of |
+ 3 | | | | | Corea. |
+ 4 |29 .84 | 81 | 82 | WSW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .84 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .84 | 79 | 80 |N by E | |Towards night the wind shifted
+ 9 | | | | | |to the Northward, and
+ 10 | | | | | |continued to blow steady.
+ 11 | | | | N | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | N | | |_Thursday, September 5, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .82 | 78 | 79 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |About 7 it fell calm.
+ 8 |29 .82 | 80 | 79 | Calm | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .82 | 80 | 80 | WNW |36 .05 |126 .42 |Towards noon a breeze sprung
+ | | |-1/2| | | |up from WNW, with fine clear
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+weather.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .82 | | | WNW | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind came
+ 10 | | | | | |to the Northward.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 6, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | |N by E | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The most part of this day the
+ 5 | | | | | | |wind has been from the
+ 6 |29 .86 | 78 | 78 | NNE | | |Northward, blowing a steady
+ | |-1/2| | | | |moderate breeze.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .86 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .88 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .88 | 79 | 78 | |35 .17 |126 .24 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |North | |
+ 2 |29 .89 | | | | West Coast of |
+ 3 | | | | | Corea. |
+ 4 |29 .90 | 79 | 77 | | |Towards night the wind drew
+ | | |-1/2| | Corea. |round to ENE, and became quite
+ 5 | | | |N by E | |light.
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .88 | 77 | 74 | ENE | |At midnight it fell calm.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | Calm | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |NNW | | |_Saturday, September 7, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight a light breeze
+ 4 | | | | | | |sprung up from NNW.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .82 | | |N by E | | |About 4 it hauled round to NE,
+ 7 | | | | | | |and at noon it was at North.
+ 8 |29 .82 | 76 | 75 | | | |
+ 9 | | | |ENE | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N. | E. |
+ Noon |29 .88 | 79 | 78 | |34 .32 |125 .50 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | N | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | NNE | |At 2 the wind shifted to NE,
+ 4 |29 .82 |80 | 72 | Calm | |and by 4 it fell calm.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |Towards 8 P.M. a breeze sprung
+ 7 | | | | | |up from the Northward, and
+ 8 |29 .82 |78 | 82 | N | |continued so the remainder of
+ 9 | | | | | |the night.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | Calm | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Sunday, September 8, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | North | | |Shortly after midnight it fell
+ 4 | | | | | | |calm; this did not last above
+ 5 | | | | Calm | | |half an hour, before a breeze
+ 6 | | | | NNW | | |sprung up from the Northward,
+ 7 | | | | | | |which continued so all day. In
+ 8 |29 .86 | 74 | 70 | North | | |the night a heavy dew fell; and
+ 9 | | | | | | |much lightning was observed in
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |the NE quarter.
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon |29 .81 | 78 | 71 | |34.22.30|126 .03|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | |N by E | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | |Moored in |
+ 3 | | | | |Murray's Sound, |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 76 | 70 | |among the |
+ 5 | | | | |islands which |
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | |lie off the SW |
+ 7 | | | | |extreme of |
+ 8 |29 .79 | 74 | 70 | NNE |Corea. |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |N by W | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 9, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |In the forenoon the wind came
+ 5 | | | | | | |to NW, and continued so all
+ 6 |29 .78 | 74 | 70 | | | |day, with a steady moderate
+ 7 | | | | | | |breeze, and fine clear weather.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 76 | 70 | NNW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon |29 .80 | 75 | 78 | |34.22.30|126 .03|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NW | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 74 | 71 | NNW | |A heavy dew fell during the
+ 5 | | | | | |night.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 74 | 70 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .78 | 73 | 69 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 10, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The breeze continued at NW
+ 4 |29 .76 | 72 | 68 | NW | | |until the afternoon, when it
+ 5 | | | | | | |drew round to the Northward,
+ 6 | | | | | | |and freshened up from that
+ 7 | | | | | | |quarter, looking threatening
+ 8 |29 .76 | 73 | 68 | | | |and squally.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 77 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29. 76 | 73 | 68 | | N | E |
+ Noon.| | | | |34 .19 |126 .05 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 74 | 72 | 68 |North |Got under weigh |
+ 3 | | | | |from Murray's |
+ 4 |29. 78 | 76 | 80 |N by W |Sound, and stood|Midnight, strong breezes with
+ 5 |29. 90 | | | |to the Southward|occasional showers of rain, and
+ 6 |29. 90 | | | |into the Japan |a very high irregular swell from
+ 7 | | | | |Sea. Saw |the NE. This seems to be the
+ 8 |29. 74 | 76 | 80 | |Quelpaert. |NE monsoon, which sets in to
+ 9 | | | | | |the Northward much earlier than
+ 10 | | | | | |in lower latitudes.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29. 76 | 76 | 80 | North | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | _Wednesday, September 11, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |To-day we have had a strong
+ 4 | | | | | | |breeze from the N by W, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |a high irregular swell setting
+ 6 | | | | | | |after us. In the afternoon the
+ 7 | | | | | | |wind hauled round to NW.
+ 8 |29. 73 | 80 | 80 |N by W | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 72 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29. 71 | 81 | 83 | NNW |31 .41 |126 .44 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 71 | | | | Japan Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29. 71 | 82 | 82 | NW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight it
+ 6 |29. 71 | | | | |moderated: weather cloudy.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 73 | 79 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29. 80 | | |North | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 12, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | North | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |shifted to the Northward, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |a moderate breeze, and fine
+ 6 |29 .74 | 80 | 82 | | | |clear weather.
+ 7 |29. 75 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 75 | 82 | 82 | | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 75 | 82 | 83 | |29 .38 |127 .56 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |In the afternoon it became
+ 2 | | | | | Japan Sea. |squally, with a heavy shower
+ 3 | | | | | |of rain.
+ 4 |29. 70 | 83 | 83 |N by E | |
+ 5 | | | |NE by N| |This wind, though not fixed,
+ 6 |29. 72 | | | NE | |has much the appearance of
+ 7 | | | | | |the monsoon.
+ 8 |29. 78 | 83 | 83 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Latitude by Polaris 30º 3 min.
+ 10 | | | | | |30 in. at 2 h. 57 min. A.M.
+ 11 | | | | | |13th.
+ Mid. |29. 78 | 82 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 13, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NE,
+ 3 | | | | | | |with a steady fresh breeze;
+ 4 | | | | | | |which towards noon freshened
+ 5 | | | | | | |considerably, and a swell got
+ 6 |29. 72 | | | N by E| | |up from the NE. At noon
+ 7 | | | | | | |observed in 27º 48' N latitude.
+ 8 |29. 70 | 83 | 84 | | | |stormy 2º 30' it became dark
+ 9 | | | | | | |and in the NE, and the signal
+ 10 |29. 70 | | | | | |being made to shorten sail, we
+ 11 |29. 76 | | | | N | E |brought the ship under the main
+ Noon.|29. 78 | 84 | 84 | |27 .48 |128 .20 |topsail and foresail, and made
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+preparations for a gale. At 4
+ 1 |29. 60 | | | NE | |we saw the Loo-choo Islands SW
+ 2 |29. 74 | | | | Off Sulphur |by S 20 miles. At 5 the wind
+ 3 |29. 75 | | | | Island, Japan |shifted from N to NE, and the
+ 4 |29. 80 | | | | Sea. |mountainous swell which we had
+ 5 |29. 90 | | | | |experienced during the day
+ 6 |29. 95 | | | | |rose still higher. The wind did
+ 7 |29. 94 | | | | |not blow fresh except in short
+ 8 | | | | | |rainy squalls. After 8 P.M. it
+ 9 | | | | | |blew at times very fresh, and
+ 10 | | | | | |also in the night, but when the
+ 11 | | | | | |moon got up it became clear.
+ Mid. |29. 52 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 14, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |shifted from NE to NW, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |continued to blow fresh with a
+ 6 |29 .52 | | | | | |high irregular swell.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .52 | 83 | 82 | NW | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 |29 .54 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .54 | | |NW by W| | |
+ 11 |29 .56 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .60 | 83 | 82 | |27 .44 |127 .35 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |29 .58 | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .60 | | | | Off Loo-Choo, |Towards evening it became
+ 3 |29 .64 | | | | Japan Sea. |moderate and clear.
+ 4 |29 .52 | 83 | 82 |NW by N| |
+ 5 |29 .54 | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .66 | | | NW | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 82 | 82 |NW by N| |
+ 9 | | | | | |In the night fine clear
+ 10 | | | | | |weather.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .74 | 81 | | NW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 15, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |A moderate breeze from NNW,
+ 5 | | | | | | |with a clear sky; the swell
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | NNW | | |much less, though still
+ 7 | | | | | | |considerable.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 80 |83 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .76 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .71 | | |NW by N| N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .75 | 83 |84 | |26 .44 |127 .32 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .75 | | | | Off Loo-Choo, |
+ 3 | | | | | Japan Sea. |
+ 4 |29 .75 | 83 | 88 |N by W | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards night the wind veered
+ 6 |29 .75 | | | | |to NNE.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 81 | |North | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .81 | | | NNE | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .80 | 81 | 84 |NE by N| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 16, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NNE.
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |About 4 A.M. we had several
+ 6 |29 .84 | | | NNE | | |showers of rain, but soon
+ 7 | | | | | | |cleared off.
+ 8 |29 .84 | 81 | 83 |N by E | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .90 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |About noon the breeze
+ Noon.|29 .90 | 82 | 83 | |26.13.39|127 .38|freshened.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | | At anchor in |
+ 3 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 82 | 83 | NE |harbour, Great |In the afternoon we had a
+ 5 | | | | |Loo-choo Island.|shower.
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 80 | 83 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, clear weather, with
+ 11 | | | | | |lightning in the SW.
+ Mid.| 2 9.8 | 80 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NE, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |a moderate breeze. At 4 there
+ 6 | | | | | | |was a slight shower of rain
+ 7 | | | | | | |but it cleared up again in a
+ 8 |29 .79 | 81 | 82 |NE by E| | |short time.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .82 | 83 | 82 |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .78 | | | | Moored in |After noon the wind shifted
+ 3 | | | | | Napakiang |to the Eastward: squally with
+ 4 |29 .77 | 82 | 82 | | harbour. |showers of rain.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .78 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 81 | 82 | ESE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, clear: moderate
+ 11 | | | | | |weather.
+ Mid.|29 .78 | 81 | 82 |E by N | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | _Wednesday, September 18, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | ENE | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been at NNE.
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |After 4 A.M. we had several
+ 7 | | | | | | |showers of rain.
+ 8 |29 .72 | 80 | 82 |NE by E| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 75 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |Towards noon the breeze
+ Noon.|29. 75 | 82 | 82 | ENE | | |freshened.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 70 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29. 72 | 82 | 82 |NE by E| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29. 74 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | 82 |82 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |At night squally, with rain.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29. 72 | | | NNE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 19, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it continued to
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain, with occasional squalls.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 63 | 81 |82 | NNE | | |As the day advanced it cleared
+ 9 | | | | | | |up.
+ 10 |29. 62 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29. 62 | 82 |83 | | | |At noon quite moderate.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 50 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the evening it looked very
+ 4 |29. 58 | 82 | 83 | NE | |black all round, and fell calm.
+ | | |-1/2| | |About 7 a breeze sprung up from
+ 5 | | | | | |the Eastward, and it commenced
+ 6 |29. 56 | | | Calm | |lightning. About 8 the wind
+ 7 | | | | | |shifted to SSE, and freshened,
+ 8 |29. 54 | | | East | |with squalls.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 54 | | | SSE | |Towards midnight heavy squalls,
+ 11 | | | | | |with rain: thunder and
+ Mid. |29. 54 | | | | |lightning.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 20, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the same
+ 4 | | | | | | |squally weather continued. As
+ 5 | | | | | | |the day advanced it cleared up.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .60 | 80 | 83 | SSE | | |In the afternoon it became
+ | |-1/2| | | | |squally, with slight showers
+ 9 | | | | | | |of rain. Towards evening it
+ 10 | | | | | | |looked very black all round.
+ 11 |29 .62 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .63 | 84 | 83 |S by E | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .63 | | | SSE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |It seems probable that this
+ 6 |29 .64 | | | | |is the breaking up of the
+ 7 | | | | | |monsoon. We were so completely
+ 8 |29 .69 |82 | 82 |E by S | |sheltered by the land, that we
+ | | |-1/2| | |did not feel the wind much;
+ 9 | | | | | |but it was evidently blowing
+ 10 | | | | | |hard outside.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .69 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 21, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .68 | | | | | |During the day the wind has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been South-easterly, with
+ 6 | | | | | | |occasional squalls and showers
+ 7 | | | | | | |of rain, and lightning.
+ 8 |29 .69 |80 |82 | SE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |In the forenoon the wind
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |hauled to the Eastward, and
+ 11 | | | | | | |cleared up.
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 83 | 83 |E by S | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .70 | | | ESE | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 83 | 83 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | |E by S | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .70 | 80 | 82 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 22, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight squally, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain and lightning.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 81 | 82 | ENE | | |About 7 the wind hauled to the
+ 9 | | | | | | |ENE, and cleared up, and
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |continued fine all day.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 83 | 82 |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .68 | 82 | 82 | ENE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .66 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .66 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 23, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been about
+ 4 | | | | | | |NE; squally at times, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |showers of rain, and every
+ 6 | | | | | | |appearance of approaching bad
+ 7 | | | | | | |weather.
+ 8 |29 .62 | 80 | 82 |NE by E| | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .62 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .62 | 81 | 82 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .60 | | | ENE | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .58 | 81 | 82 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |During all this day the
+ 6 |29 .50 | | | | | |barometer continued falling,
+ 7 | | | | | | |in the evening it had reached
+ 8 |29 .50 | | |NE by N| | |29.50. The wind in the early
+ 9 | | | | | | |part of the night hauled to
+ 10 | | | | | | |NNE, and towards morning to
+ 11 | | | | | | |the Northward.
+ Mid.| | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 24, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | NNE | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |In the night the wind has been
+ 4 | | | |NE by N| | |about NNE. About 4 A.M. it
+ 5 | | | | | | |began to blow very fresh, with
+ 6 |29 .43 | | | | | |squalls.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .42 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |About noon the wind shifted
+ 11 | | | | | | |to NNW, and increased in
+ Noon.|29 .40 | 81 | 81 | | | |strength.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .40 | | | NNW | Napakiang |During the afternoon it blew
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |hard, and gradually shifted to
+ 4 |29 .44 | 81 | 81 | | |the North-westward, with fresh
+ | | |-1/2| | |squalls of short duration. At
+ 5 |29 .50 | | | | |3 30 P.M. the mercury began
+ 6 |29 .55 | | |NW by N| |to rise, and continued rising
+ 7 |29 .56 | | | | |very rapidly.
+ 8 |29 .63 | 79 | 81 | | |
+ 9 |29 .65 | | | |The weather at sunset assumed
+ 10 | | | | | |a very stormy appearance.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .66 | 78 | 80 | NW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, September 25, 1816.
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |Shortly after midnight it
+ 5 | | | | | | |cleared up and moderated.
+ 6 |29 .72 | | |NW by W| |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 78 | 80 | NW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .86 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .86 | 79 | 80 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |During the day it has been
+ 2 |29 .84 | | | | |blowing a steady moderate
+ 3 | | | | | |breeze from the NW.
+ 4 |29 .84 | 78 | 80 |NW by W| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .86 | | | NW | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .92 | 77 | 79 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, moderate and cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .95 | 77 | 78 |NW by N| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 26, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued about NNW
+ 4 | | | | | | |all day, blowing a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze, with fine weather.
+ 6 |29 .96 | | | NNW | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | 78 | 80 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .99 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 79 | 81 |NW by W| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | 30.00 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .99 | 83 | 81 | | |8 P.M. it fell calm.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .99 | | | Calm | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 79 | 81 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Towards midnight a light
+ 11 | | | | | |breeze sprung up from NNE.
+ Mid.|29 .99 | 79 | 80 | NNE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NNE | | |Friday, September 27, 1816.
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind died
+ 5 | | | | | | |away.
+ 6 |29 .99 | 70 | | Calm | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 76 | 81 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .99 | | | | | |Towards noon a breeze sprung
+ 11 |29 .99 | | | | | |up from the Northward.
+ Noon.|29 .99 | 80 | 81 | North | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon it shifted to
+ 4 |29 .96 | 79 | 80 | ENE | |ENE.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .96 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .94 | 78 | 80 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, calm and cloudy
+ 11 | | | | | |weather.
+ Mid.|29 .94 | 77 | 79 | Calm | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 28, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |All the early part of the
+ 4 | | | | | | |morning it was quite calm.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .90 | 76 | 79 | Calm | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |About 8 A.M. a breeze sprung
+ 11 |29 .94 | | | | | |up about ESE; in the afternoon
+ Noon.|29 .94 | 81 | 81 | | | |it hauled round to East.
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .90 | | | ESE | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .92 | 81 | 81 | | |
+ 5 | |-1/2| | | |
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .90 | 80 | 81 | East | |
+ 9 | | |-1/2| | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, the breeze shifted
+ 11 | | | | | |to NE, and was moderate.
+ Mid.|29 .90 | 76 | 79 | NE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 29, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .90 | 75 | 79 | NE | | |During this day the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |shifted occasionally from NE to
+ 6 | | | | | | |ENE, blowing a moderate breeze,
+ 7 | | | | | | |with fine clear weather.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 80 | 81 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .92 | | | ENE | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .92 | 82 | 81 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | | |NE by E| |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .94 | 81 | 81 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .95 | | | | |Towards night it became cloudy.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .95 | 80 | 80 | NE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .95 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |NE by E| | |_Monday, September 30, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the forenoon the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |has been light from the NE.
+ 6 |29 .96 | 79 | 80 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it freshened up.
+ 10 |29 .97 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .98 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .98 | 82 | 81 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |NE by N| |
+ 2 |29 .91 | | | | Napkiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .96 | 81 | 81 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .95 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .95 | 80 | 80 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |Midnight, cloudy weather.
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 1, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind drew
+ 5 | | | | | | |more to the Eastward, and the
+ 6 |29 .95 | | | | | |sky became very black all
+ 7 | | | | | | |round: squally, with rain at
+ 8 |30 .02 | 79 | 80 | East | | |intervals.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |We got under weigh at daylight,
+ 10 |30 .07 | | | | | |and proceeded along shore to
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |the Northward.
+ Noon.|30 .07 | 80 | 80 | ESE | 26 .34| 127 .38|
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | | | | Sugar Loaf |The wind continued to the
+ 3 | | | | |Point. N .24º E.|Eastward.
+ 4 |29 .94 | 79 | 80 |E by S | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .94 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .94 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .92 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 2, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .91 | | | | | |The whole of this day the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |has been from the Eastward,
+ 6 | | | | | | |blowing a moderate breeze,
+ 7 | | | | | | |with fine weather.
+ 8 |29 .91 | 78 | 80 |E by S | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .96 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .96 | 79 | 80 | | 26 .25| 127 .38|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .89 | 80 | 81 | East | |Towards night cloudy weather.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .88 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 79 | 81 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .90 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | |_Thursday, October 3, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 5 | | | | | |shifted to NE by E.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards noon it shifted to
+ 8 |29 .87 | 78 | 81 |NE by E| |East, and in the evening to
+ 9 | | | | | |ENE again.
+ 10 |29 .87 | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .87 | 81 | 81 |E by S | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | East | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |20 .86 | 80 | 81 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | ENE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .86 | 78 | 81 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .86 | 78 | 80 |E by N | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, October 4, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day we had a light breeze
+ 5 | | | | | | |from the NE, until the
+ 6 | | | | | | |afternoon, when it shifted to
+ 7 | | | | | | |SE by E, but only remained a
+ 8 |29 .87 | 78 | 81 | NE | | |short time, coming back to NE
+ 9 | | | | | | |again, where it continued until
+ 10 | | | | | | |near midnight, when it fell
+ 11 | | | | | | |calm.
+ Noon.|29.87 | 79 | 84 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .86 | | | ENE | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .86 | 79 | 80 |SE by E| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .85 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .85 | 79 | 80 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .85 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 5, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |In the morning a breeze sprung
+ 5 | | | | | | |up from the Eastward, where it
+ 6 | | | | | | |remained until noon; then
+ 7 | | | | | | |shifted to NE, and continued
+ 8 |29 .86 | 78 | 80 | E by N| | |to blow from that quarter all
+ | | |-1/2| | | |the rest of the day.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .87 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .87 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .85 | 81 | 81 |NE by E| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .84 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .82 | 81 | 81 | N by E| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .82 | | | NE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .83 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .83 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 6, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The early part of the day from
+ 5 | | | | | | |wind has been moderate from the
+ 6 | | | | | | |NE.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .83 | 78 | 80 |NE by N| | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .84 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |About noon the wind shifted to
+ Noon.|29 .84 | 80 | 81 | North | | |the Northward.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .83 | | | | |At night it came back to NE,
+ 5 | | | | | |with rain.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .83 | 79 | 80 | NE | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .86 | | | NNE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |NE by E| | |_Monday, October 7, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 6 | | | | | | |continued at NE by E, with
+ 7 | | | | | | |showers of rain.
+ 8 |29 .80 | 78 | 80 | North | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .95 | 79 | 80 |N by E | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | N by E| |At 4 A.M. the wind came to
+ 3 | | | | | |north, and the weather cleared
+ 4 |29 .93 | 79 | 80 | | |up: it blew a fresh breeze from
+ 5 | | | | | |that quarter all day.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .93 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight it moderated.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .96 | 78 | 79 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 8, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day we have had a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze at NE by N.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 78 | 79 |NE by N| | |Squally at times.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .02 | 78 | 79 | NNE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30. 00 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |30. 00 | 78 | 79 |NE by N| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight fine clear
+ 6 | | | | | |weather.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30. 00 | 76 | 78 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |30 00 | 75 | 78 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 9, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the morning a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze from NE by E.
+ 6 |30 .00 | | |NE by E| | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |About 6 A.M. we got underweigh,
+ 8 |30 .04 | 75 | 78 | | | |and stood to the Northward.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .10 | | | ENE | | |
+ 11 |30 .10 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 77 | 78 | | 26 .34| 127 .26|
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .06 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon the wind
+ 4 |30 .00 | 78 | 78 | East | |shifted to the Eastward, and
+ 5 | | | | | |continued so the remainder of
+ 6 |30 .06 | | | | |the day.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .13 | 77 | 78 | E by S| |
+ 9 | | | | | |At night, cloudy weather.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 10, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |been moderate from the
+ 7 | | | | | | |Eastward.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 77 | 79 | ESE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .01 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | East | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .01 | 78 | 79 | E by N| 26 .50| 127 .50|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | ENE | Off the Great |
+ 3 | | | | |Loo-choo Island.|
+ 4 |29 .98 | 79 | 79 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | NE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |At night fine clear weather.
+ 8 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .96 | 78 | 79 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NE | | |_Friday, October 11, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | | |shifted from NE to SE, with a
+ 7 | | | | | | |light air.
+ 8 |29 .97 | 78 | 79 | SE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .97 | | | | | |Ten A.M. it fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .97 | 80 | 80 | | 26 .42| 127 .53|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .96 | | | | Off Port |
+ 3 | | | | | Melville. |
+ 4 |29 .96 | 80 | 80 | West | |
+ 5 | | | | | |In the afternoon a breeze
+ 6 |29 .96 | | | N by E| |sprung up from the Westward;
+ 7 | | | | | |about 8 it looked very dark all
+ 8 |29 .94 | | | NNE | |round, and shortly afterwards
+ 9 | | | | | |began to blow fresh from N by
+ 10 | | | | | |E, and continued so all night.
+ 11 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 12, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |NE by E| | |
+ 3 | | | | NE | | |During the night the wind came
+ 4 | | | | | | |to NE with a fresh breeze, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain at intervals.
+ 6 |30 .30 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .26 | 76 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .26 | | | | | |
+ 11 |30 .22 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .22 | 76 | 79 | |25 .33 |127 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .20 | | | |Off Loo-choo. |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon a swell got up
+ 4 |30 .20 | 76 | 79 | ENE | |from the NE; the wind
+ 5 | | | | | |moderated, and drew round to
+ 6 |30 .30 | | | | |ENE.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .34 | 76 | 79 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Midnight, fresh breezes and
+ 10 | | | | | |cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .20 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | ENE | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 13, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it became quite
+ 5 | | | | | | |moderate, with rain at times.
+ 6 |30 .10 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .06 | 75 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .04 | | | | | |In the forenoon it fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .04 | 75 | 78 | Calm |27 .00 |128 .03 |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |During the afternoon a breeze
+ 4 |30 .00 | 75 | 78 | NE | |sprung up at NE.
+ 5 | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards midnight it freshened
+ 8 |30 .02 | 75 | 78 |NE by E| |considerably.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .02 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |NE by N| | |_Monday, October 14, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |moderated.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .04 | 75 | 79 | | | |About 8 A.M. it fell nearly
+ | | |-1/2| | | |calm, but shortly after it
+ 9 | | | | | | |freshened at NNE.
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 75 | 79 | NNE |26 .36 |127 .56 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | | | North |Off Loo-choo. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .97 | 75 | 79 | NNW | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |shifted to NNW, and continued
+ 7 | | | | | |to blow fresh.
+ 8 |30 .02 | 75 | 79 | N by W| |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .18 | | | NNW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 15, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been from the N by W, blowing
+ 6 | | | | | | |a fresh breeze, with occasional
+ 7 | | | | | | |squalls.
+ 8 |30 .10 | | 78 |N by W | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 74 | 78 | North |26 .02 |127 .35 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .08 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .08 | 74 | 78 | | |At midnight it moderated.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | North | |
+ 6 |30 .08 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .10 | 74 |79 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 16, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the night the wind drew
+ 6 | | | | | | |round to N by E, with a
+ 7 | | | | | | |moderate breeze. About 7 A.M.
+ 8 |30 .20 | 73 | 77 |N by E | | |we weighed and stood to the
+ 9 | | | | | | |NW, shortly after the breeze
+ 10 |30 .20 | | | | | |freshened, with squalls; at
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |2 P.M. anchored in Napakiang
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 74 | 77 | |26 .11 |127 .30 |harbour.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | Off Loo-choo. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 74 | 77 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |Towards midnight the breeze
+ 7 | | | | | |freshened.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 74 | 77 | N by W| |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |The whole of this day we have
+ 6 | | | | | | |had a breeze from the NNE, with
+ 7 | | | | | | |fine clear weather.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 71 | 76 | NNE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 75 | 77 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | |NE by N| Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 75 | 77 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .01 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .02 | 75 | 76 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .00 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, October 18, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued about NE by
+ 4 | | | | | | |N.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 73 | 76 |NE by N| | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | E by N| | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .02 | 74 | 75 | | | |Towards noon it came to the
+ | | |-1/2| | | |eastward with a moderate
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+breeze.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .02 | | | | Moored in |
+ 3 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 4 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | |NE by E| |At night it shifted to the NE.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 71 | 75 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NE | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 19, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | | | | | |During all this day the wind
+ 9 | | | | | | |has been moderate and steady
+ 10 | | | | | | |at NE, with fine clear weather.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .98 |76 | 76 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | NE | |
+ 2 | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .98 |73 | 75 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 |73 | 75 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 20, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 72 | 75 | NE | | |The breeze still continues at
+ | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |NE, with the same fine clear
+ 10 |29 .98 | | | | | |weather as yesterday.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .98 | 73 | 75 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .98 | 73 |75 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 72 |75 |NE by N| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, October 21, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |shifted to the N by E, with a
+ 6 | | | | | | |moderate breeze.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 73 | 75 |N by E | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 74 | 75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 73 |75 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it fell almost
+ 8 |30 .04 | 72 | 74 | NNE | |calm.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNE | | |_Tuesday, October 22, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the breeze
+ 4 | | | | | | |freshened up at NNE, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |continued so all day, with
+ 6 | | | | | | |fine clear weather.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .06 | 72 | 74 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |30 .06 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .06 | 73 | 75 |NE by N| | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |30 .08 | 73 | 74 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .08 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 72 | 74 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |NE by N| | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 23, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind continued steady at
+ 5 | | | | | | |NNE, with the same fine weather
+ 6 | | | | | | |as yesterday.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 73 |75 | NNE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 74 |75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .10 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .10 | 73 |74 |N by E | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .12 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .12 | 72 | 73 | | |
+ 7 | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 24, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight we had a
+ 4 | | | | | | |moderate breeze at NNE.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .04 | | |N by E | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it shifted to
+ 10 | | | | | | |north, and freshened up in
+ 11 | | | | | | |that quarter.
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 72 | 75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .99 | | |North | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |After noon we had a slight
+ 4 |29 .98 | | | | |shower of rain, but soon after
+ 5 | | | | | |it cleared up.
+ 6 |29 .98 | 72 | 74 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |North | | |_Friday, October 25, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |At daylight the breeze
+ 5 | | | | | | |freshened.
+ 6 |30 .05 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 74 | 75 | | | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |At 9 the weather became
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |squally, with a shower of rain.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | NNW | |
+ 3 | | | | | |After noon the wind hauled
+ 4 |30 .00 | 74 | 74 | | |to NNW, and continued to blow
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |a fresh breeze all day.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | 73 | 74 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Saturday, October 26, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has
+ 4 | | | | | | |been at north, blowing a fresh
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze, with occasional
+ 6 | | | | | | |squalls.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .04 | 74 | 74 | North | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 74 |75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .99 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .98 | | 74 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight it moderated.
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | 74 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | Calm | | |_Sunday, October 27, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it fell calm.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .05 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 68 |73 | NNE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |About 9 A.M. a breeze sprung up
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |from NNE. Weighed and stood out
+ 11 | | | | | | |of the harbour.
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 70 | 74 |N by E | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 71 |74 | NNE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | 72 |74 | | |Towards night the breeze
+ 9 | | | | | |freshened.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Monday, October 28, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During all this day the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |has been at NNE, blowing a
+ 5 | | | | | | |steady fresh breeze.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .10 | 72 | 77 | North | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .08 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.| | | | |24 .41 |126 . 00|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .99 | | | | Japan Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .98 |74 | 79 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it shifted to NE.
+ 8 |30 .05 | 74 | 79 | | |
+ 9 | |-1/2| | | |
+ | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | Calm | | |_Tuesday, October 29, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind has been from the NE,
+ 5 | | | | | | |and a swell rising from that
+ 6 | | | | | | |quarter.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .02 | 76 | 79 | NNE | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .02 | 76 | 79 |N by E |23 .24 |124 .01 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .95 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .99 | 76 | 79 | NNE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |Towards night the sky
+ 7 | | | | | |assumed a threatening
+ 8 |30 .00 | 76 | 79 | | |appearance.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Wednesday, October 30, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |shifted to the Northward, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |continued to blow fresh, with
+ 6 | | | | | | |a heavy swell. Saw the islands
+ 7 | | | | | | |of Botel-Tobago-Zima, and
+ 8 |30 .50 | 72 | 77 | North | | |Formosa.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .30 | | | | | |
+ 11 |30 .00 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .92 | | | |24 .41 |126 .00 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .50 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .85 |74 | 79 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |31 .10 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it shifted to NE.
+ 8 |31 .00 | 74 | 79 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 31, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |Passed Formosa, and entered
+ 5 | | | | | | |the China sea.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.| | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+
+
+
+
+ABSTRACT OF THE LYRA'S VOYAGE, FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN;
+
+SHEWING
+
+THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE DIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICH SHE TOUCHED, AND THE
+TIME TAKEN IN PERFORMING EACH PASSAGE.
+
+
+
+
+ABSTRACT
+OF THE
+VOYAGES OF HIS MAJESTY'S SHIP LYRA,
+In 1816 and 1817.
+
+
+The Lyra, in the short space of twenty months, viz. from the 9th of
+February 1816, to the 14th of October 1817, visited Madeira, the Cape,
+Java, Macao, the Yellow Sea, the West Coast of Corea, the Great Loo-choo
+Island, Canton, Manilla, Prince of Wales's Island, Calcutta, Madras, the
+Mauritius, and St. Helena; having run, in direct courses, a distance of
+11,940 nautic leagues, or 41,490 statute miles.
+
+An abstract of the various passages, from place to place, during this
+voyage, illustrated by brief remarks on the particular circumstances of
+each, will probably be considered interesting.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+[Sidenote: England to Madeira and Cape, 2520 leagues.]
+
+1.
+
+Sailed through the Needles passage on the 9th of February, 1816.
+
+ Arrived at Madeira, 18th of February 9 days
+ Crossed the equator in longitude 25º 20' west, 4th March 15
+ Reached the Cape of Good Hope, 14th April 41
+ ---
+ From England to the Cape, in 9 weeks, 2 days, or 65 days.
+
+This is not a very good passage, considering that we carried the
+north-east trade wind to the latitude of 4º north, and longitude 23º
+west, where we got the south-east trade, without any interval of calms.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+2.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape to Java, 1800 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from the Cape on the 26th April 1816.
+
+ Arrived at Anjier Point, Java, 7th June. 42 days.
+ ---
+ Six weeks.
+
+After leaving the Cape we had strong westerly winds, with which we ran
+the longitude down, in the parallel of 38º and 39º south, till in
+longitude 57º east, where the weather being very stormy, we hauled to
+the north-east till in 35º south latitude, and then ran east till in 90º
+east, when we steered to the east-north-east, and crossed the tropic in
+102º east, which was probably too far west. The south-east trade hung
+far to the eastward, and made it difficult to fetch Java Head, which had
+we not succeeded in doing at first, might have caused considerable
+delay, as the wind still blew out of the Straits of Sunda.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+3.
+
+[Sidenote: Java to China, 600 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from Anjier Point, Java, on the 12th June, 1816.
+
+ Reached Gaspar Straits on the 17th June 1816 5 days.
+ Arrived off Macao, 8th July 21
+ ---
+ From Java to Macao in 3 weeks 5 days, or 26 days.
+
+This passage was unusually bad, it being nearly a week before we reached
+Gaspar Straits, an ordinary run of one day: in the south part of the
+China sea the south-west monsoon was very light. An American brig, which
+sailed only one day before us from Anjier Point, carried the breeze
+along with her, and reached Macao twelve days before us.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+4.
+
+[Sidenote: Ladrone Islands to the Yellow Sea, 520 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from the Ladrone Islands off Macao, on the 13th July 1816.
+
+ Rounded the promontory of Shantung and entered the
+ Yellow Sea, 25th July 12 days.
+ From thence to the anchorage off the Pei-ho
+ or Pekin River, 27th July 2
+ ---
+ Macao to Pekin River, in 2 weeks, or 14 days.
+
+This voyage can be compared only with that of the Lion on the occasion
+of the former embassy. The Lion was nearly three weeks, exclusive of the
+time at anchor at Chusan. We had fine weather and steady south-west
+winds, with very heavy dews at night. When nearly abreast of the south
+point of Corea, the wind became variable from the south-east and
+southward. In the Yellow Sea we had easterly winds and no fogs.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+5.
+
+[Sidenote: Pei-ho to Oei-hai-oei in the Yellow Sea, 90 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from the anchorage off the Pei-ho on the 11th August, 1816.
+
+ Arrived at Cheatow Bay, after having coasted from the
+ anchorage along the south side of the Gulf of
+ Pe-che-lee, 22d August 11 days.
+ From thence to the harbour of Oei-hai-oei, 23d August 1
+ ---
+ From Pekin River to harbour of Oei-hai-oei, 1 week
+ 5 days, or 12 days.
+
+In this cruise round the Gulf of Pe-che-lee we had constant easterly
+winds, which obliged us to tide the whole way. It blew a gale of wind on
+the 19th from the north-east, with a high short sea. With this
+exception, and a fresh breeze on the 3d and 6th, the weather was
+uniformly fine during our stay in the Yellow Sea, and we never
+experienced any fogs.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+6.
+
+[Sidenote: Yellow Sea to Corea, 40 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from Oei-hai-oei, in China, on the 29th August, 1816.
+
+ Made the islands off the coast of Corea, 1st September 3 days.
+ Running along the coast of Corea till the 10th September 9
+ ----
+ 12 days.
+
+On the coast of Corea the winds were mostly from the northward, and the
+weather uniformly fine, with heavy dews at night.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+7.
+
+[Sidenote: Corea to Loo-choo, 240 leagues.]
+
+ From the south-west end of Corea to the Great Loo-choo
+ Island, on the 14th September, 1816, 4 days.
+
+
+From Corea to the Great Loo-choo Island we had northeasterly and
+northerly winds, with one gale from the northward.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+8.
+
+[Sidenote: Loo-choo to China, 320 leagues.]
+
+ From Loo-choo to Lintin, off Canton.
+ 27th October to the 2d November, 1816 6 days.
+
+As the north-east monsoon was blowing fresh, this quick passage was to
+be expected.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+9.
+
+[Sidenote: China to Manilla, 200 leagues.]
+
+ From Lemma Islands to Manilla.
+ 2d February to the 5th February, 1817 3 days.
+
+A good passage for this season of the year.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+10.
+
+[Sidenote: Manilla to Penang, 600 leagues.]
+
+ From Manilla to Prince of Wales's Island.
+ 21st February to 8th March, 1817 15 days.
+
+In the north-east monsoon this is somewhat under the average passage.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+11.
+
+[Sidenote: Penang to Bengal, 400 leagues.]
+
+ From Prince of Wales's Island to Saugor Roads, Bengal.
+ 13th March to the 27th March, 1817 14 days.
+
+The average at this season is twenty-one days, consequently this passage
+is very good. At this season of the year the north-east monsoon has
+entirely ceased in the centre of the Bay of Bengal; so that a ship which
+steers well out between the Nicobars and Andamans need not apprehend
+northerly winds; whereas in the north-eastern parts of the bay, the
+monsoon still blows faintly, with long intervals of calm. A merchant
+brig, reputed a good sailer, left Prince of Wales's Island 6 days before
+us, and followed the inner route, while we went outside, and arrived 10
+days before her at Calcutta.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+12.
+
+[Sidenote: Calcutta to Madras, 300 leagues.]
+
+Sand Heads off Calcutta to Madras, against the south-west monsoon.
+
+ From 19th April to the 7th May, 1817 18-1/2 days.
+
+Three weeks is said to be a good passage. We beat down as far as the
+latitude 11º north, and longitude 87º east, before we hauled across. We
+had fine weather all the way.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+13.
+
+[Sidenote: Madras to Mauritius, 1140 leagues.]
+
+From Madras to the Mauritius.
+
+ 1st June to the 1st July, 1817 30 days.
+
+We were driven by the south-west monsoon as far as longitude 92º east,
+before crossing the equator; here we had a constant high swell. We were
+much baffled, and did not get the steady south-east trade till in 7º
+south, and longitude 88º east. The average passage is between five and
+six weeks at this season of the year.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+14.
+
+[Sidenote: Mauritius to rounding the Cape, 800 leagues.]
+
+From Mauritius to making the land of Africa, about Algoa Bay.
+
+ 8th July to the 22d July, 1817 14 days.
+ Thence to rounding the Cape on the 30th July 8
+ ---
+ Mauritius till round the Cape, 3 weeks 1 day, or 22 days.
+
+The average from the Mauritius to rounding the Cape, is twenty-eight
+days; on this occasion we kept close in-shore: we had no current, and
+though in the depth of winter, the weather was invariably fine, and the
+water smooth. At night a breeze generally blew off shore. There was a
+heavy dew every night.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+15.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape to St. Helena, 570 leagues.]
+
+ From off the Cape to St. Helena on the 11th August 12 days.
+ Mauritius to the Cape (see above) 22 days.
+ ---
+ From Mauritius to St. Helena in 4 weeks 6 days, or 34 days.
+
+[Sidenote: Mauritius to St. Helena, 1370 leagues.]
+
+This is an excellent passage. It appears to be a great object in making
+a passage from India to England, to pass the Cape without going in; for
+it is often easy to round the Cape and go to St. Helena, when it is
+difficult and tedious either to go to Simon's or Table Bay, and much
+delay is produced by the difficulty of getting out of the former
+anchorage.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+16.
+
+[Sidenote: St. Helena to Ireland, 1800 leagues.]
+
+ From St. Helena to Bantry Bay in Ireland.
+ Sailed from St. Helena on the 14th August, 1817.
+ Arrived off Bantry Bay, 14th October, 1817 61 days.
+
+This passage was unusually long, owing to a succession of hard gales
+from north-east to south-east, which we encountered in latitude 47º
+north, longitude 13º west, beginning on the 27th of September, and
+continuing, with little intermission, till the 8th of October; after
+which period the weather became fine, but the wind hung constantly to
+the eastward, so as to render it difficult to fetch Ireland.
+
+
+
+
+GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM;
+BEING
+A DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKS
+COLLECTED AT
+MACAO AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS, AND ON THE SHORES OF
+THE YELLOW SEA, THE WEST COAST OF COREA,
+AND THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.
+
+
+GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM.
+
+It is greatly to be regretted, that, during this voyage, our means of
+gaining information on this interesting subject were so limited. In
+China we were restrained, sometimes by the jealousy of the Chinese, and
+sometimes by an apprehension on our part of giving offence, or of
+exciting suspicion, by following up enquiries, the nature of which it
+was impossible to explain when interrogated by the inhabitants. On the
+coast of Corea, the still greater jealousy of the natives rendered it
+impossible to prosecute geological investigations beyond the beach. Both
+in China and on the coast of Corea our stay at each place was very
+short, and our time being often necessarily occupied by avocations
+foreign to such enquiries, many opportunities were lost merely for want
+of time. Even at the Great Loo-choo Island, where we remained much
+longer, our researches were confined to a coast which offered nothing
+interesting.
+
+Having therefore nothing of a general or striking nature to offer to the
+scientific world on this subject, I shall merely give an account of the
+specimens collected at the various places which we touched at during
+this voyage, accompanied by brief explanations from memorandums made on
+the spot.
+
+The geologist will be struck with the resemblance which the rocks in
+this remote quarter of the globe bear to those with which he has been
+familiarly acquainted.
+
+
+
+
+
+SPECIMENS FROM CHINA.
+
+
+MACAO.
+
+1. Granite, composed of white quartz, porcelain clay, and greenish
+steatite, with veins of white quartz intersecting each other.
+
+2. Fine-grained granite, composed of yellowish feldspar, white quartz,
+and black mica.
+
+Quartz dykes of great magnitude traverse the granite which forms this
+peninsula.
+
+
+HONG-KONG, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS, OFF MACAO.
+
+3. Lead-coloured compact quartz rock, with imbedded crystals of
+flesh-coloured feldspar.
+
+
+GREAT LEMMA, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS, OFF MACAO.
+
+4. Coarse-grained granite, with distinct crystals of feldspar.
+
+
+
+
+SOUTHERN SHORE OF THE YELLOW SEA.
+
+
+CHE-A-TOW.
+
+5. Fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz, white feldspar, and
+black mica, with a vein containing hornblend and crystals of feldspar.
+
+6. The strata are here very much contorted; the cliffs at some places
+being folded up like webs of cloth.
+
+7. Granular primitive lime-stone, containing greenish steatite.
+
+8. Quartz rock, alternating with gneiss.
+
+9. A specimen containing amorphous pieces of iron.
+
+
+CUNG-CUNG-CHEEN ISLANDS.
+
+10. Very fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz, flesh-coloured
+feldspar, and black mica.
+
+11. Coarser variety of the same.
+
+12. Compact blueish-grey feldspar, with grains of quartz.
+
+
+OEI-HAI-OEI.
+
+13. Gneiss, composed of yellowish feldspar, white quartz, and black
+mica.
+
+
+LUNG-CUNG-TAO ISLANDS.
+
+14. Coarser variety of the rock described above.
+
+
+
+
+WEST COAST OF COREA.
+
+
+From an Island in Latitude 37º 45' North.
+
+1. Compact stratified pale-pink lime-stone; variegated in colour; strata
+highly inclined.
+
+2. Very compact slaty light-grey rock; strata inclined at an angle of
+75º, dipping towards the north-east.
+
+3. Dark olive steatitic rock, containing fragments of granular marble.
+
+4. Very fine-grained greenish hornblend rock.
+
+5. Vine-grained purplish slate; the strata highly inclined.
+
+6. Greenish-grey slate, containing crystals of white feldspar and specks
+of hornblend: strata highly inclined, dipping towards the north-east.
+
+
+
+SPECIMENS FROM HUTTON'S ISLAND, COAST OF COREA.
+
+Latitude 36º 10' north, longitude 126º 13' east.
+
+The following note is taken from the narrative at page 8.
+
+We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grained granite[19]; the
+middle of the island of a brittle micaceous schistus of a deep blue
+colour[20]; the strata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little to the
+south-west. This body of strata is cut across by a granite dyke[21], at
+some places forty feet wide, at others not above ten; the strata in the
+vicinity of the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner: this
+dislocation and contortion does not extend far from the walls of the
+dyke, though veins of granite branch out from it to a great distance,
+varying in width from three feet to the hundredth part of an inch: the
+dyke is visible from the top of the cliff to the water's edge, but does
+not re-appear on the corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it,
+though distant only thirty yards. This island is composed of the same
+schistus, and is cut in a vertical direction by a whin dyke[22], four
+feet wide, the planes of whose sides lie north-east and south-west,
+being at right angles to those of the great granite dyke in the
+neighbourhood, which run south-east and north-west. The strata
+contiguous to the whin dyke are a good deal twisted and broken, but not
+in the same degree as at their contact with the granite dyke. The whin
+dyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laid across in the usual
+way.
+
+Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at the distance of only
+forty or fifty feet, we came to an island rising abruptly out of the
+sea, and presenting a high rugged cliff of breccia[23], fronting that on
+which the granite dyke is so conspicuous: the junction of this rock with
+the schistus cut by the granite and the whin would have been
+interesting; but although we must have been at times within a few yards
+of it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea.
+
+The whole of the south-west end of this island is formed of breccia,
+being an assemblage of angular and water-worn pieces of schistus,
+quartz, and some other rocks, the whole having the appearance of a
+great shingle beach and cliffs. The fragments of the schistus in this
+rock are similar to that which forms the cliff first spoken of.
+(Specimen 8.)
+
+The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was, that the lower
+part of the great mass of strata which now forms the centre of the
+island was formerly at the bottom of the ocean; and that the western
+part, now a firm breccia, had been a beach of shingle produced by the
+action of the waves on the upper strata, which may have formed a coast
+above the sea: the granite of the eastern end of the island had been
+forced into its present situation from beneath the strata, with
+sufficient violence to dislocate and contort the beds nearest to it, and
+to inject the liquid granite into the rents formed by the heaving action
+of the strata as they were raised up. It is natural to suppose that the
+ragged edges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks would be
+subjected to a grinding action, from which the strata more remote might
+be exempted; and in this way we may account for the extraordinary
+twisting, and separation of masses along the whole course of the granite
+dyke. In the dyke, as well as in the veins which branch from it, there
+are numerous insulated portions of schistus. That this last was
+softened, seems to follow from the frequent instances which occur of its
+being bent back upon itself without producing cracks. The same heat,
+generated by the melted granite in the neighbourhood, and which appears
+to have been just sufficient to soften the schistus, may be supposed to
+have reduced the shingle beach to a state of semi fusion by the aid of
+some flux contained in the sand scattered amongst the fragments. We
+could not discover any circumstance by which the relative antiquity of
+the two dykes mentioned above could be inferred.
+
+The junction of the granite and schistus above described, resembles very
+much the well known junction at the Lowrin mountain, in Galloway,
+described by my father, Sir James Hall, in the 7th vol. of the Edinburgh
+Transactions. It is also very like the junctions at the Cape of Good
+Hope, described in the same volume. The same theory has been found to
+explain them all.
+
+Specimen 7. Fine-grained granite, composed of white quartz, white
+feldspar, and olive-green mica. This rock (7) forms the eastern end of
+the island; the schistus next described (8) the centre, and the breccia
+mentioned immediately afterwards (9) the western end.
+
+8. Fine-grained compact micaceous schistus: some of the specimens appear
+to contain plumbago. The strata lie north-west and south-east, dipping
+only a few degrees from the horizontal line.
+
+9. Breccia, composed of angular and contorted fragments of micaceous
+schistus, and angular pieces of feldspar and quartz. This rock forms the
+western end of Hutton's Island[24]: it rises in high rugged cliffs. The
+angular pieces of schistus are of a similar rock to that described above
+(8).
+
+10. Dyke, porphyritic granite, composed of white quartz, white feldspar,
+and bronze-coloured mica. This dyke cuts across the schistus last
+mentioned, in a direction north-east and south-west. It is nearly
+vertical, and varies in breadth from nine to forty feet, with numerous
+ramifications.
+
+11. Dyke of compact whin stone. This dyke is composed of five layers of
+prisms, whose length is at right angles to the walls of the dyke. It is
+nearly vertical. Its direction north and south, and is about five feet
+thick.
+
+
+MAIN LAND OF COREA.
+
+12. Lead-coloured, fine-grained, micaceous schistus. From the main land
+of Corea, latitude 36º 10' north, longitude 126º 48' east. The strata
+lie north-west and south-east, and are nearly vertical; the natives
+objected to our examining the cliffs, though distant less than a quarter
+of a mile from the beach.
+
+
+ANOTHER ISLAND OFF THE COAST OF COREA.
+
+Latitude 34º 23' north, longitude 126º east.
+
+13. Decomposing fine-grained rock; composed of flesh-coloured feldspar,
+white quartz, and porcelain clay.
+
+
+ANOTHER ISLAND NEAR THE ABOVE.
+
+14. Rock composed of white feldspar and quartz. The strata of this rock
+were very much contorted.
+
+This rock is the most general of any in this range of islands, at least
+as far as we had opportunities of examining them. The islands on this
+coast are very numerous; they lie in great clusters along a line of
+three degrees and a half of latitude. The islands vary in length from
+five or six miles to as many yards, and are of all forms. We saw none
+that were remarkably high, and none which seemed volcanic. As our stay
+on the coast was only nine days, and as the ships were almost always
+under weigh except at night, it was quite impossible to make any careful
+or valuable geological observations. It offers a splendid field to
+future voyagers.
+
+
+GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.
+
+1. Grey stratified lime-stone without shells. This specimen was taken
+from the north end of the island, where the ranges of hills were mostly
+composed of it: the strata being highly inclined. The hills rise to the
+height of four or five hundred feet, and present nothing interesting.
+
+2. Fawn-coloured, cellular, granular lime-stone. The cliffs at Napakiang
+are composed of this rock; it also appears to stretch along the whole of
+the south-west and south parts of the coast. In the narrative, this rock
+has been erroneously called coral. These cliffs are curiously hollowed
+out into horizontal caves, which have all the appearance of having been
+worn by the dashing of the waves; but as it is obvious, that in their
+present situation the sea can never have reached the face of the cliffs,
+it seems probable that the whole coast may have been raised up, by a
+gentle movement, without dislocating the strata, or disturbing the
+horizontal position, in which it seems probable that these caves were
+formed.
+
+The variety of coralines which girt the shores of this island was very
+great, and large collections were made, as well of these as of the
+numerous zoophites which filled up every part of the reefs below
+high-water mark. This collection, of which unfortunately no duplicates
+were kept, was afterwards lost.
+
+
+SULPHUR ISLAND
+
+Lies in latitude 27º 5' north, and longitude 128º 25' east. An accurate
+representation of it is given as a frontispiece.
+
+We attempted to land, but the surf broke every where so high against the
+rock that this was impossible. There is a crater on the left side with
+white smoke issuing from it; this has a strong sulphuric smell. The
+sides of the crater are stratified. The south end of the island is about
+four or five hundred feet high, and is formed of a dark dingy red rock
+distinctly stratified; at several places it is cut vertically by great
+dykes, which being more durable than the strata which they intersect,
+stand out from the face of the cliffs to a considerable distance.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 19: Specimen 7, infra.]
+
+[Footnote 20: Specimen 8.]
+
+[Footnote 21: Specimen 10.]
+
+[Footnote 22: Specimen 11, infra.]
+
+[Footnote 23: Specimen 9.]
+
+[Footnote 24: The island above described was so named by Captain
+Maxwell, in compliment to the memory of the distinguished philosopher
+whose theory has been used to explain the curious phenomena which it
+exhibits.]
+
+
+
+END OF THE APPENDIX.
+
+
+
+
+VOCABULARY OF THE LANGUAGE
+SPOKEN AT
+THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, IN THE
+JAPAN SEA.
+
+
+COMPILED BY
+HERBERT JOHN CLIFFORD, ESQ.
+LIEUTENANT, ROYAL NAVY.
+
+
+IN TWO PARTS.
+
+
+
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+ON
+THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.
+
+
+Of the grammar of this language I pretend to little knowledge, but the
+following observations upon some points may perhaps be worth attending
+to. The most striking circumstance, is the frequent use of the words
+_noo_ and _ka_; the former of which seems to signify _of_, or the _'s_
+of the English language, as will appear in _choo noo ka_, a man's skin,
+or the skin of a man; _oóshee noo stínnoo_, the bullock's horn, or the
+horn of the bullock; and in _moo noo kee saw'teeyoong_, to dig potatoes
+out of the ground, or, literally, potatoes of the earth to dig out.
+
+_Ka_, it will be observed, is used to denote skin, and also seems to
+signify a receiver or enclosure, as is expressed in the words _meézee
+ka_, a well of water, _meézee_ being water, and _ka_, the place
+containing the water; and in _ya ka saut eéchoong_, to go out of a
+place, _ka_ in this instance expressing the enclosure, _ya_ you, and
+_sawt eéchoong_ to go out from, as _eéchoong_ signifies to go.
+
+The adjective is for the most part placed before the substantive, as
+_teeshoóee íckkeega_, an old man; _wúsa ya_, a mean house; and _wóckka
+innágo_, a young woman.
+
+There is little variety in the termination of the verb, the tenses being
+expressed by other means. I have throughout the vocabulary considered
+the termination _oong_ to denote the infinitive, and have translated it
+as such, even when the sense points to another mood, merely to preserve
+consistency; there are, however, a few exceptions to this, and some of
+the verbs will be found to terminate in _ang_, _ing_, _awng_, _ong_, and
+_ung_. Those ending in _oong_ seem generally to make the participle
+terminate in _ee_, as _wóckkayoong_, to separate, makes the participle
+_wóckkatee_, separated. The negative termination of the verb is
+generally _nang_ or _rang_, as _noómang_, not to drink, is the negative
+of _noómoong_, to drink; _meérang_, the negative of _meéoong_, to see;
+and _noóboorang_, the negative of _noóbooyoong_, to climb or ascend.
+_Na_ is also used as a negative, _coónsoona_, not to rub out, being the
+negative of _coónshoong_, to rub out.
+
+_Nang_, _nárang_, and _náshee_ are negatives used with a substantive,
+and are always placed after it, as _koómoo nang_, no clouds; _meézee
+nárang_, no water; and _feéjee náshee_, no beard.
+
+Some peculiarities will be found by referring to the following words:
+deaf; the sole of the foot; head-ache; palm of the hand; the toe; and
+the wrist.
+
+
+
+
+PART I.
+
+VOCABULARY OF ENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO WORDS ALPHABETICALLY ARRANGED, WITH
+NOTES, AND OCCASIONAL REFERENCES TO THE SENTENCES IN THE SECOND PART.
+
+
+
+
+VOCABULARY
+OF THE
+LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.
+
+Note on the orthography used in the following vocabulary.--The sounds in
+the Loo-Choo words are expressed by the letters which in English
+correspond nearest to those sounds. There are no mute vowels. The letter
+_a_ is invariably sounded as in the English word _far_. The emphasis is
+marked by an accent over the last vowel of the accented syllable. _Ee_
+and _oo_, whether accented or not, always express one syllable.
+
+ _English._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ Above, or the top of a thing Wee.
+ Alive Itch-it´chee.
+ Alive, to be It´ch-chawng.
+ All (every one) Eénea, or I´gnea
+ (Italian gn[25].)
+ All drink, every one drinks I´gnea noódung.
+ Anchor Eéki.
+ Angry Neétsa.
+ Ankle Shánna go oóshee.
+ Answer, to Aree ga aányoong.
+ Arm Teénoo.
+ Arrow Eéa.
+ Awake, to Oóking.
+ Awaking Oócatee.
+ Bad Neésha.
+ Bad man Yáwna moon, or Yánna choo.
+ Bad building Wása ya.
+ Bailer of a canoe Yoo-toóee.
+ Baize, red Moóshung.
+ Bake, to I´rreechang.
+ Bake bread, to Quáshee soókooyoong.
+ Bamboo-cane Dákee.
+ Bamboo (instrument of punishment) Boóchee.
+ Basket Teéroo.
+ Beads Támma.
+ Beard Feéjee.
+ Beardless Feéjee náshee.
+ Beat, to Soó-go-yoong.
+ ----, as the heart Nácoo-choong.
+ ---- on the gong Tánna óchoong (lit. to
+ play on the gong.)
+ ---- to, with the bamboo Chíbbee oótchoong.
+ Bed Coócha.
+ Bell St´chee-gánnee.
+ Belly Wátta.
+ Belly, big Wátta mágesa.
+ Below, or the bottom of a thing Stcha.
+ Bend to, a thing Támmeeoong.
+ Bird Hótoo.
+ Birdcage Hótoo-coo.
+ Bishop at chess (lit. priest) B[=o]dsee, or B[=o]dzee[26].
+ Bite to, as a dog Coóyoong[27].
+ Bitter Injássa.
+ Black Korósa.
+ Bleed, to, (lit. to draw blood) Chee-hoóga-choong.
+ Blind Meégua.
+ Blind man Akee meégua.
+ Block Kooroóma.
+ Blood Chee[28].
+ Blow up, to, or light a fire Foó-tchoong.
+ Blowing (through a musical instrument) Gácoo.
+ Blue (colour) Táma-eeroo.
+ Blue (light colour) Meéz-eeroo.
+ Blunt Chírrarung.
+ Blush (lit. red) Akássa.
+ Boat Tímma, or Sabánnee,
+ Boat, the bottom of a Nakámma.
+ Boil, to Tájeeing.
+ Book Sheémootsee[29].
+ Bone Coótsee.
+ Bonnet, or head-dress worn by the natives Hat´chee Mat´chee.
+ Both alike, or all the same Neéchawng, or Yoónoomoong.
+ Bow to, to a person passing Deéshoong.
+ Bow Yoómee.
+ Bow, to pull a Yoómee feétchoong.
+ Bower Tánnan.
+ Boy (lit. a man child) Ic´kkeega wárrabee.
+ Brass Cheéjackko, or Toong.
+ Bread Quáshee.
+ Bread-basket, or tray Quáshee boong.
+ Breadth Hábba.
+ Break, to, a stick Oóyoong[30].
+ ---------- a tea-cup Wy´oong.
+ Breakers Námee.
+ Breast Moónee.
+ Breathe, to It´chee shoong[31].
+ Bridge Háshee[32].
+ Bring here Moot´chee coo.
+ Bring fire here Feetoótee coo.
+ Brinjal (an Indian vegetable) Nasíbbee.
+ Broke Oótee, Chírreetee.
+ Brother Weékee.
+ Bucket Tágoo.
+ Bull Woo Oóshee.
+ Burn, to Yáddee, or A´kka.
+ Butterfly Habároo.
+ Button Hogánnee, or kánnee.
+ By and by A´tookára[33].
+ Cake, a sweet flowered Magía quáshee.
+ Calf Oóshee gua.
+ Calf of the leg Koónda.
+ Candle Daw.
+ Candlestick Soócoo[34].
+ Candle and stick together Daw´secoo.
+ Cannon I´shee-beéa.
+ Cap Cammoódee, Maw´tsee.
+ Carpenter's black line box Stínseeboo.
+ [35]Carry to, or take away Moótchee eéchoong.
+ ------------, a basket on the head Téeroo kámmeetong[35].
+ ------------, a child in the arms Dáchoong.
+ ------------, with a bar on the shoulders[35] Katam´meeoong.
+ Carrying a basket on the arm Téeroo tenakíkakíttee.
+ Cask Soócoo.
+ Castle Eegoósecoo, or Gooseécoo.
+ Cat Mía, or My´a (Chinese).
+ Cat, to mew as a Náchoong deéoong.
+ Catch, to Kaoótoochung.
+ Catch, to, a butterfly Kabároo skéhdang.
+ Chair Ee (Chinese).
+ Charcoal Chácheejing.
+ Cheeks Hoo.
+ Cheese (literally cow's milk and fat) Oóshee noo[36] chee quátee.
+ Chessmen Choónjee.
+ Child (infant) Wórrabee.
+ Child, male (literally man-child) I´ckkeega wórrabee.
+ Child, female (literally woman-child) Innágo wórrabee.
+ Children Qua.
+ Chin Oootoóga.
+ Chin, the beard of the (lit. lower beard) Stcha feéjee.
+ Chopsticks Fáshay, or May´shung.
+ Climb, to, a pine-tree Mátsee kee noóbooyoong.
+ Cloth, or clothes Ching.
+ Cloth, red Akássa nónoo.
+ Clouds Koómoo.
+ Cock Toóee.
+ Cocoa-nut tree Nash´ikee.
+ Cocoa-nuts Náee.
+ Cold Feésa.
+ Cold water Feézeeroo Meézee.
+ Colours Eéroo eéroo.
+ Come, to Choong[37].
+ Come here Cung coo.
+ Come, to, down a hill Oódeeyoong.
+ --------- on board Choó-oong.
+ Coming up from below Nooboóteecoo.
+ Compass Kárahigh, or Kássee toóee[38].
+ Conk shell Neénya goóroo.
+ Cool Seedásha.
+ Copper Acoógannee.
+ Coral Oóroo
+ Cover, to, over with sand Sínna sheeóstang.
+ Cough, to Sáck-quee.
+ Count, to Oohaw´koo-oong[39].
+ Country A´whfee.
+ Cow Mee Oóshee.
+ Crab Gaánnee.
+ Crab, to crawl as a Hóyoong.
+ Creep, to Haw´yoong.
+ Crow, to O´tayoong.
+ Crow Gárrasee.
+ Cry, to Nachoong.
+ Curlew U´nguainan.
+ Cut, to Cheéoong, or feéoong, or
+ feéjoong.
+ Dance Oodoóee, or Makátta.
+ Dark Coórasing.
+ Daughter Innágo oóngua, or úngua.
+ Day (at Napakiang) Nit´chee[40].
+ ---- (in the north of the island) I´sheeree.
+ ---- after to-morrow Asáttee.
+ ---- the following Asá tínnacha.
+ Daylight Heéroo.
+ Dead Sheénoong, or gang.
+ Deaf (literally, ear not to hear) Mímmee chee karung.
+ Deep Fookássa.
+ Deity (the Indian God Boudha) Boósa (Chinese).
+ Dice Sheégo roócoo.
+ Dice, to play with Sheégo roócoo ochoong.
+ Die, to Níntoong.
+ Dig, to, up the ground Oóchoong.
+ ----, potatoes Moo noo kee saúteeyoong.
+ Directly (by and by) Atookar´ree, or Atookára.
+ Dive, to, under water Seénoong.
+ Dog Ing.
+ Dog barks I´nnoo nachoong.
+ Don't stir (said to a person rising to Wfay´sa[41].
+ depart)
+ Door Hasbírree.
+ Draw, to, a picture Eé-katchoong[42].
+ --------- blood Chee na by´oong.
+ Dress, to Ching cheéoong.
+ Drink Noómoo.
+ Drink, to Noómoong[43].
+ --------- wine Sack´kee noómoong.
+ -----, not to, wine Sack´kee noómang.
+ Drop, to, a thing Oocheérooshoong.
+ Drunk Weétee[44].
+ -----, to get Weéoong.
+ Dry, to Karacháoong.
+ -------, powder Eénshoo foóshoong.
+ Dung, cow, for manure Oóshee noo coósoo.
+ Duck, a tame A´feeroo.
+ Eagle Hack´ka.
+ Ear Mímmee.
+ ---, left Feéjeeree noo mímmee.
+ ---, right Meéjeree noo mímmee.
+ Ears, to pull the Mímmee feéoong, or feétchoong.
+ Earth Jee.
+ East Fingássee.
+ Eat, to Kámoong[45].
+ ---, I Moónoo kámoong.
+ ---, to, boiled rice Méeshee kámoong, or kánoung.
+ Eggs Coóga.
+ Eight [46]Kwat´chee, or fat´chee
+ (Loo-Choo); Eeyat´see
+ (Japan.)
+ Eighteen Kwat´chee joo, or fat´chee joo.
+ Eighty Hapáck coo, or Habbáck coo.
+ Elbow Teénoo feéjee.
+ Eleven Too.
+ Empty, to, or pour out Hárashoong.
+ Ends of a thing Yoókoo.
+ Every thing A´dee-coódee[47]?
+ Exchange, to, fans Káyra.
+ Exclamation of surprise Yeéah, or Cheé-oo-oo.
+ ----------------------- I´yi-yi-yi-yi.
+ Expression of respect, or salutation Taw.
+ ------------- thanks in returning How.
+ any thing
+ Eye Mee.
+ Eyebrows Maí-oh.
+ Eyelashes Matsídjee.
+ Eyes, to open the Mee hoóra choong.
+ ----, closing the Neeboóee.
+ Face Steéra, or Skeéra[48].
+ Fall, to Taw´shoong, or Taw´ring[49].
+ Fan O´jee.
+ ---, to, one's self O´jeeshoong.
+ ---, to offer a O´jee kára.
+ Fat Quaítee.
+ Father Shoo.
+ Feathers of a fowl Toóee noo han´nee.
+ Female Mee.
+ Fence of bamboo Dack´kee gat´chee.
+ Fiddle Neéshing.
+ ------, to play on the Feétchoong (lit. to pull.)
+ ------ strings Cheéroo.
+ Fifteen Goónjoo.
+ Fifty Gooshácoo, or gooyácoo.
+ Fill, to I´ddeecoong.
+ Find, to Toómatung[50].
+ Finger Eébee.
+ ------, fore Choo sháshee.
+ ------, little Eébeegwaw.
+ ------, middle Nack´ka eébee.
+ ------ ring Nanna shee.
+ ------ nail Thímmee.
+ Fire Fee.
+ ----, to put out Fee cha-chee.
+ ----, to, a gun Narashoong.
+ Fish Eeo[51].
+ ----, a small Coosa eeo.
+ ------------- blueish Tamung eeo.
+ ----, a large red Matchee eeo.
+ ----, the back of a Kánjee.
+ ----, the fin of a Hannay.
+ ----, the gills of a Ajee.
+ ----, the head of a Chee-boo-soo.
+ ----, the tail of a Dzoo.
+ ----, to catch Eéo kákeeoong.
+ ---- hook and line Cheéna.
+ ---- spear Eéo stit´chee.
+ Five Goo (Loo-Choo); Ittítsee
+ (Japan)[52].
+ ---- sided figure Roo-ka-coo.
+ Flag Háta.
+ Flail[53] Coóra ma baw[53].
+ Flesh Shíshee.
+ Flesh, no Shíshee ning.
+ Flower, a red, the name of A´ckka hanna.
+ Flower of a plant Fánna.
+ Flute, to play on the Hánshaw.
+ Fly Háyeh.
+ Fly, to, as a bird Toóbeeoong.
+ Foot Shánna.
+ ----, the sole of the Shánna watta (lit. belly of
+ the foot).
+ ----, of a bird Físha.
+ Forehead Fitcháyeh.
+ Forty Speéakoo, or Sábacoo.
+ Four [54]Shee (Loo-Choo); Eéots see,
+ or joo (Japan).
+ Four-sided figure Sícca Coódair.
+ Fourteen Sheénjoo.
+ Friend Eedoóshee.
+ Frog A´tta beétsee.
+ Full Meetchíttee.
+ ----, half Ham´boong.
+ Get up Tá-tee.
+ Girdle O´bee.
+ Girl Tack´kee.
+ Give, to Queéoong[55].
+ Glass Kágung.
+ Go, to Eéchoong[56].
+ ------, away Haddee.
+ ------, in a boat Tímma ki eéchoong.
+ Go, to, fast Háyee sit´choong.
+ ------, up a hill Noóbooyoong (lit. to climb,).
+ --, not to, up a hill Noóboorang.
+ --, to, slow Yaw´na eéchoong.
+ ------, on shore Amáki eéchoong, or moódoeéong.
+ Goat Feéja.
+ ----, he Woo Feéja.
+ ----, she Mee Feéja.
+ Going down below Oórittee coo.
+ Gold Ching.
+ Good (for eating) Mása.
+ ---- (proper) Choorása.
+ ---- man Yoókachoo, or Eéchoo.
+ ---- bye (taking leave) Wóckkatee.
+ ---- for nothing Máconárang.
+ ----, not Worroósa.
+ Grand-children Soong mága.
+ Grass Goosit´chee, or Coosá.
+ -----, to cut Coosá cheéoong.
+ Grasshopper Sheéto, or Sáyeh.
+ Grave Háka.
+ Greybeard Feéjee sheerájee.
+ Great coat (made of straw, worn also New.
+ by the Chinese)
+ Great man (Chinese Tajin) A´jee, or Páychin.
+ ----- many Oowhóko.
+ Green O´sa.
+ Grind, to, the teeth Ha gíssee gíssee.
+ Groaning Doónee.
+ Hair Kurrázzee[57].
+ Hammer Goóshung.
+ ------ of a stone-cutter Oónoo.
+ Hand Kee[58].
+ ----, right Meéjeeree.
+ ----, left Feéjeeree.
+ Handkerchief Tee-sádjee[59].
+ Handsome Choorása.
+ Harp San´gshing.
+ Hat, worn by the natives Kássa.
+ ---------------- English Kamoóree.
+ Have not got Nang[60], or Nárang.
+ ------------ water Meézee[61] nárang.
+ Head, human Boósee.
+ Head-ache (lit. sick head) Seeboóroo yádong.
+ Head, of a bird Tseeboóroo.
+ Hear, to Sit´choong, or Skit´choong.
+ ----, I Moónoo sit´choong[62].
+ ----, I cannot (or understand) Sit´cheerang, or
+ Sit´cheekárang.
+ Heart Nácoo.
+ Heaven Ting.
+ ------, praying to Ting oóneewhfa[63].
+ Heavy Boósa.
+ Heel of the foot Shánna-a-roo.
+ Here Coo.
+ Hide, to, or cover (lit. cannot see) Meérang.
+ ---- of a bullock Oóshee noo ka.
+ Him (a third person) A´ree (meéchay)[64].
+ Hips Gammácoo.
+ Hissing Seésee.
+ Hoe Quáya.
+ Hold, to take, of a person Kat´sameéoong.
+ Holding a thing (a butterfly) Meecháwree[65].
+ (Letting a thing escape) Oótoo Batch[65].
+ Hole A´nna.
+ ---- to make in the ground A´nna hoóyoong.
+ ---- in the jeeshee, or urn Mee hoojíttee[66].
+ Hoop of a cask Obee[67]
+ Horn of a bullock Oóshee noo stínnoo.
+ Horse Ma[68] (Chinese).
+ Hot A´tteesa.
+ Hour Twit´chee[69].
+ House Ya, or Kat´chee.
+ House where salt is made Máshoo ya.
+ Hundred Sing.
+ Hungry Yása.
+ I, or me (a first person) Wang[70] (choóee).
+ Jar, a large earthen Kámee.
+ ---, its top or cover Hoóta.
+ Inch, one Eésing.
+ Inches, ten; Eesháckkoo.
+ Infant Wórrabee.
+ Ink Sim´mee.
+ Inkstand Sim´mee shee.
+ Inside Oóchee.
+ ----, or soft of bread Mee.
+ Iron Títzee.
+ Jump, to Móyoong.
+ Key Quaw.
+ Kick, to, with the foot King.
+ Kid (lit. small goat) Feéja água.
+ Kill, to Sheémoong, or Koórashoong[71]
+ ----, birds Hótoo eéchung.
+ ----, by the fire of a gun Doogaítee sheénoung.
+ King, or monarch Kówung (Chinese).
+ King's palace Oogoós-coo.
+ Kiss, to, (lit. kissing the mouth) Coóchee spoótee[72].
+ Kiss Sheemir´ree.
+ Knee Stínsee.
+ Kneel, to Shúmma git´cheeoong.
+ Kneeling Shúmma git´chee.
+ Knife, crooked, for cutting grass Eeránna.
+ -----, small (a penknife) Seégo.
+ Knight, at chess Samoóree.
+ Knot Coónja coótchee.
+ ----, to tie a Coónjoong.
+ Knuckles Foóshee.
+ Lacker, to Noóyoong.
+ Ladder Háshee.
+ Lake, or light purple Coonmoóla sat´chee.
+ Land, or shore Amáki.
+ Lantern Tíndoo.
+ -------, folding Cháwching.
+ Lantern, glass Támma-doóroo.
+ Large Weésa.
+ Laugh, to Wárrayoong.
+ Laughing Wárratee.
+ Lead (metal) Meéjee kan´nee.
+ Leaf (of a tree) Wha.
+ ----, green (lit. the leaf of a tree) Kee noo wha.
+ ----, withered (lit. a dried leaf) Kárree wha.
+ Lean (not fat) Yaítee.
+ ----, to, against a thing Yookátatoong[73].
+ Learning, or studying Cootooba[74].
+ Let, to, fall a thing Nágeeoong.
+ Letter, or character Jee.
+ ------, to seal a Ing sit´choong.
+ ------, to write a Jee kátchoong.
+ Letting go a thing O´too batch.[75]
+ Loo-Choo song Loóchoo, or Doóchoo oóta.
+ Lift, to, a thing Moóchoong.
+ Light, not dark (daylight) Feéroo, or Heéroo.
+ -----, not heavy Gása.
+ -----, to, a pipe Sheéoong.
+ Lips Seéba.
+ Lip, lower Stit´cha seéba.
+ ---, upper Quaw seéba.
+ ---, the beard on the lower Coofeéjee.
+ Liquor Sac´kkeedia, or Sam´tchoo
+ (Chinese).
+ Live, or reside, to Sim´matong[76].
+ Lizard U´ndlecha.
+ Look, or see, to Meéoong, or Meéing[77].
+ ----, to, at, or see the sun Teéda meéing.
+ ----, at a distance Han´na-rat´chee.
+ Look, to, closely Teétsheeoong.
+ Looking-glass Kágung.
+ Long, or length Nagása.
+ Lose, to Oótoochung.
+ Make, to, clothes Ching náwyoong[78].
+ Make, a noise Hábbeecoong.
+ Make, a rope Cheéna oótchoong[79].
+ Make, salt Máshoo tátchoong.
+ Make, sugar Sáta skóyoong[80].
+ Make, a tea-pot Tácoo soókooyoong[80].
+ Making a false step Koonsínda dakat´chee.
+ Male Woo.
+ Mallet, wooden Cheé-chee.
+ Man (homo) Choo.
+ Man (vir) I´ckkeega[81].
+ Man, medical I´shsha.
+ Man, of rank Páychin, or Quángning
+ (Chinese).
+ Man, short Injása.
+ Man, sick I´ckkeega yádong.
+ Man, the skin of a Choo-noo-ka.
+ Man, small Feecoósa.
+ Mast of a ship, or boat Hásseeda.
+ Mat Mooshoóroo, or Hátung.
+ Match, or fire-stick used in the temples Kaw[82].
+ Me, or I Wang.
+ Meal, 1st (at sunrise) Stim´mee teémoong.
+ Meal, 2nd (two hours after) A´ssa bung.
+ Meal, 3rd (at noon) Feéra moómoong.
+ ----, 4th (at sunset) Yoó bung.
+ Measure, to Gáwjee háckkiyoong.
+ Melon Toóqua.
+ Men, a great many Oowhóko Ickkeega.
+ Mew, to, as a cat Nachoong deeoong.
+ Midday, or noon Teéda mátchoo.
+ Milk Chee.
+ ----, to draw Chee háyoong.
+ Million Chaw.
+ Mine Coóra wa moong.
+ Mixed Bátee.
+ Moon, the Stchay.
+ ----, or month, one It´chee stit´chee, or
+ gwaútsee[83].
+ ----, full Oostit´chee, or Mároo.
+ ----, half Mécasit´chee.
+ Monkey Sároo.
+ More Gnáfing.
+ Morrow A´cha.
+ Mother Um´ma.
+ Mud Doóroo.
+ Musical instrument, to play on a Koótoo feétchoong.
+ Mustachios Wa feéjee.
+ Nail to hang things on Coójee.
+ Naked Harráka.
+ Name Na.
+ ----, my Wa na.
+ ----, your Ya na.
+ ----, his A´rree ga na.
+ Navel Whoósoo[84].
+ Neck Coóbee.
+ ----, short (lit. no neck) Coóbee nang[85].
+ Needle Háyee skíttee.
+ Net, fishing Sheébee.
+ Night Yoóroo.
+ -----, one It´chee yoóroo.
+ Nine Coo[86] (Loo-Choo), Koónitsee
+ (Japan).
+ Nineteen Coónjoo.
+ Ninety Coohácoo, or Queeshácoo.
+ Nipples Chee.
+ No Oóngba, or Oomba[87].
+ Nod, to Nájeechoong.
+ North Cheéta.
+ Nose Hónna.
+ Nostrils Hónnakee.
+ Octagon Hacac´koo.
+ Offer, to Ozágadee.
+ -----, wine Ozágadee sac´kkee.
+ -----, more, or again Mátta ozágadee.
+ Old Teeshoóee.
+ --- man Teeshoóee ic´kkeega.
+ Olives Kárang.
+ One It´chee (Loo-Choo), Teétesee,
+ or ta (Japan[88].)
+ Onions Dehchaw.
+ Open, to, or unlock A´keeoong[89].
+ Open it Akírree[2].
+ Orange, fruit Koóneeboo.
+ ------, the rind of an Koóneeboo noo ka.
+ ------, divisions Mee.
+ ------, the seed of an Tánee.
+ Overturn, to, or upset Koóroobáshoong.
+ Outside Foóca.
+ -------, of bread (lit. skin) Ka.
+ Paddle of a canoe Wayácoo.
+ Paint, to Oóroo[90] sheenoóstang.
+ Palanquin chair Kágoo.
+ Palm of the hand (lit. belly of the hand) Tee noo wátta[91].
+ Pant, to Eétchee hoótoong.
+ Panting Eétchee.
+ Paper of any kind Kábee.
+ Path Yamána meetchee.
+ Paupaw apple Wangshoóee.
+ Pawns at chess Toómoo.
+ Pencil Hoódee.
+ Perspiration Ac´kkaddee[92].
+ Pepper pod Quáda coósha.
+ Pick up any thing, to Moóchoong.
+ Picture Keé-ee, or Kackkeé-ee.
+ Pig Boóta.
+ Pin worn in the hair of boys Jeépha, or Jeéwa.
+ --- flower head worn by men Kam´mashíshee.
+ ---, ladle head, do. Oósheethúshee.
+ Pinch, to Kátcheemeéoong[93].
+ Pine, the wild Adánnee.
+ ----, leaves of the Wha.
+ ----, fruit of the Adánnee nay.
+ ---- tree Mátesee kee.
+ Pipe Shírree.
+ ----, the mouth-piece of a Quee coótchee.
+ ----, wooden part of a Saw.
+ ----, bowl of a Sárra.
+ ----, case of a Shírree bookoóroo.
+ Pitchfork Feéra.
+ Pivot on which the scull of a boat traverses Jeéco[94].
+ Place Skáta.
+ Plank of a boat Fánna[95].
+ Plant Mee boósha.
+ Plantain, leaf of a Woo noo fa.
+ Play, to, at chess Choónjee óchoong.
+ ----, with dice Sheégo roócoo óchoong.
+ ----, on a musical instrument Koótoo feétchoong[96].
+ ----, on the flute Hánshaw.
+ ----, on the violin Feétchoong.
+ Pleased Oósha.
+ Plough Sit´chee.
+ ------, to Sit´choong.
+ Point, to, with the finger Noóchoong.
+ Potatoes, sweet Moo, or Moóndee.
+ Pour in, to I´rreeing.
+ ---- out, to Cheéjoong.
+ Pouring Cheéjee.
+ Praying to the Deity Boósa, or Bósa meéwhfa[97].
+ ------- to Heaven Ting oóneewhfa.
+ Powder Eéenshoo.
+ ------, to dry or air Eénshoo foóshoong.
+ Pregnant Kássee jeétawng.
+ Press, to, or squeeze Sheétskeeoong.
+ Prick, to, with a knife Hoogáshoong[98].
+ Pricking Yátee.
+ Prickly pear bush Cooroójee.
+ Priest (Bonzes of China) Bódzee.
+ ------, the silk dress of a Eéchoo coóroom.
+ ------, the cotton dress of a Básha coóroom.
+ ------, the belt of silk of a Quára.
+ Pull, to, or draw out Injat´chee.
+ ----, out of the ground Noójoong.
+ ----, a person Feétchoong, or fit´choong.
+ Purple Moóla sat´chee.
+ Push, to, with the hand Koóroo báshoong[99].
+ Put, to, a thing above or upright I´sheeoong.
+ -------, up a thing above, high Injáshoong.
+ -------, on the hat Kánjoong.
+ -------, or lay a thing down Oócheeking.
+ -------, a thing in I´ttee.
+ ---------------- under Kásseemeéoong.
+ -------, on clothes Ching cheéoong.
+ -------, out fire Fee cháchee.
+ -------, a ring on the finger Eébee gánnee sáshoong.
+ Quack, to, like a duck Náchoong.
+ Quarrel, to Títskoong.
+ Queen, also at chess Oónajerra.
+ Quick Háyee.
+ Quick, to be Yooháoong
+ Rain A´mee.
+ ----, to A´mee foóyoong.
+ ----, heavy Sheejeékoo foóyoong.
+ ----, lightly Koókoo foóyong.
+ Rainbow Noo-oójee.
+ Rat A´ck-a-sa.
+ Read, to Yoómoong, or Yoóno-oong.
+ Red Akása.
+ Rind of a shaddock Pow noo ka.
+ ------- an orange Koóneeboo noo ka.
+ ---- (lit. skin) Ka.
+ Ribbon, silk Eéchoo.
+ Ribs Sáwkee.
+ Rice Coómee.
+ ----, boiled U´mbang, or bang, or
+ oómbang[100].
+ Ride, to, a horse Man´ayoong.
+ Right, in writing characters Kátchee yánjee.
+ Ring Coósayee.
+ ---- for the finger Eébee gánnee.
+ ----, to put on a Eébee gánnee sáshoong.
+ Rise, to, from a chair Tátchoong.
+ Road Meéchee.
+ Rock See, or Weésa is´hee.
+ Root (bulb) Weé-ee.
+ Rope Chínna.
+ ----, to make Chínna oóchoong.
+ Rough Soóroo soóroo.
+ Round Morroósa.
+ -----, a circle Maroódair.
+ Round, all round Maroóee.
+ Rowing in a boat Coójee.
+ Rub, to Soósooing, or soósootee
+ oótooshung.
+ ---, out Seéree oótooshoong, or
+ Soósootee; oóteetung, or
+ coónshoong.
+ ---, not out Coónsoona.
+ Rubber, Indian Neéka.
+ Rum, or spirits Káraboo.
+ Run, to Háyay sit´choong[101].
+ Running Háyay.
+ Sail of a ship or boat Foo.
+ Sail, to, in a boat Hárashoong.
+ Salt Máshoo.
+ ---- water Spookarása Meézee.
+ ---- to the taste Spookarása
+ Salute, to, a person Kámeeoong.
+ Sand Sínna.
+ Say it, I can Ang.
+ ------, I cannot Nárang[102].
+ Sea Námmee.
+ ---, the, or ocean Oóshoo.
+ ---, shore Háma, or Oómee.
+ --- weed Moo[103].
+ ---, high Oonámmee.
+ Seal of a watch Ing, or Fang.
+ Seam between two planks Nágo.
+ Scrape, to Sájoong.
+ Scratching Weégosa.
+ Screw, to Meégoorashoong[104].
+ Screw Jírree.
+ Scull of a boat Doo.
+ Scull, to, a boat Meégoorashoong.
+ See to, or look, (lit. to eye) Meéoong[105].
+ See, I cannot Meérang.
+ Seed Nigh.
+ Separate, to Wóckkayoong.
+ Seven Sit´chee(Loo-Choo); Nánnatsee
+ (Japan).
+ Seventeen Sit´chee joo.
+ Seventy Sit´chee hácoo.
+ Servant Toómoo, or Eéree, or Sad´ge-ee.
+ Sew, to Náwyoong, or No-á-yoong.
+ Shade, or shady Kájee.
+ Shake, to Kátcheeming.
+ Shaking a thing Yoótoo yoótoo.
+ Shallow Asássa.
+ Sharp Aka, or chírraring?
+ Shave, to Soóyoong.
+ Shell Oósheemaw.
+ Shell fish (like a crab) A´mang.
+ Shield Timbáyee.
+ Ship Hoónee[106].
+ ----, large Hooboónee, or Wesára Hoónee.
+ ----, small Hoónee gua, or Coosára Hoónee.
+ ---- goes away Hoónee eéchoong.
+ ---- returns Moóchee eéchoong.
+ Shoes, or sandals Sábock, or Sabaugh.
+ Short Injása.
+ Shoulders Kútta.
+ Shrub, with leaves resembling a Sootítsee.
+ palm tree, probably sago tree
+ Shut, to Meecheéoong.
+ Shut it Mechírree.
+ Skin Ka.
+ Skin, of a bullock Oóshee noo ka.
+ ----, of a man Choo noo ka.
+ Sick Yádong.
+ ---- man Ic´kkeega yádong.
+ ---- belly Wátta éddee.
+ Side, of a person Hárraga.
+ ----, of a thing Táttee.
+ Sigh, to Hoóee eéchee.
+ Silk Eéchoo.
+ Silver Jing.
+ Sing, to Oótashoong, or oótayooshoong,
+ or oótayoong.
+ Sister O'nigh.
+ Sit down, to Eéoong.
+ --------, in a chair Eéchawng, or Eeree.
+ --------, on the ground Eémeesháwdee, or Eédee.
+ --------, or be seated Yoocoótee.
+ Six Roócoo (Loo-Choo); Moótsee
+ (Japan).
+ Sixteen Roócoojoo.
+ Sixty Rookpáckcoo.
+ Sleep, to Nínjoong.
+ Sleeping Níntee.
+ Slow Yoóna, or Yáwna.
+ Small Coósa.
+ Smell, to Kánnoong, or Kasháshoong.
+ Smell Kabbásha[107].
+ Smoke, to Foótchoong, or koótchoong.
+ Smoke Kínsee.
+ Smoking tobacco Tobácco foókee.
+ Smooth Nándooroosa.
+ Smooth down, to Nádeeyoong.
+ Snake Háboo.
+ Snake stings Háboo coótee.
+ Snatch, to Kátayoong.
+ Sneeze, to Hónna feéoong.
+ Snore, to Níntoong.
+ Snuff (lit. nose tobacco) Spáchee, or Hónna Tobácco.
+ Sole of the foot (lit. belly of the foot) Shánna wátta.
+ Son Ic'kkeega oóngua.
+ Song Oóta[108].
+ Sore from riding Náutee.
+ Sorry Natskásha.
+ Sour Seésa.
+ South Whfa or fa.
+ Speak, to Moónooyoong[109].
+ Spear to catch fish with Toóga oóyoong.
+ Spectacles (lit. eye-glass) Mee kágung.
+ Spider Coóba.
+ Spider's web Coóba mang.
+ Spit, to Simpáy-oong.
+ Spittle Simpáyee.
+ Spoon Káa.
+ Spy glass Toómee kágung.
+ Square Káckkoo.
+ ------, of a stone mason Bánjaw gaúnnee.
+ Squeeze, to Mímmeejoong.
+ Stab, to Choong.
+ Stand up, to Tátteeoong.
+ Stand back to back Coósee noóchasa.
+ Stars Foóshee.
+ Stay on board ship Hoónee oótee.
+ Stem of a boat Oomoótee.
+ Stern of a boat Coóma toómo.
+ Stone Is´hee.
+ ----- cutter's hammer Oong.
+ -----, carved Káwroo[110].
+ Stop Mátee[111].
+ Straw Wárra.
+ Strike, to Réjeecoong.
+ String Ko-eéroo.
+ Strong Choósa.
+ ------ wine Choozáckkee, or Sáckkeechoo.
+ Sucking Noódee[112].
+ Sugar Sáta.
+ ----- cane Oójee.
+ -----, to make Sáta skóyoong.
+ Sulky Hárradat´chee.
+ -----, not Hárradat´chee soóna.
+ Sun Teéda.
+ Sunset Teéda ságayoong[113].
+ Sunshine Teéda téttee.
+ Sunrise Teéda ágayoong.
+ Swallowing Noónootoósha.
+ Sweet Amása.
+ ----- wine A´mazac´kkee[114].
+ ----- potatoes Moo, or Moóndee.
+ Swim, to Weéjoong.
+ Swimming Weéjee.
+ Sword Tat´chee.
+ A flight of stone steps Keesíee.
+ A single step Coodámmee.
+ To stick a thing in the ground Táteeing.
+ Table, round Mádooee.
+ Tail of a bird Dzoo.
+ Take off the hat, to Hásseeoong.[115]
+ Tattoo marks on the right arm Oódeemaw.
+ --------------- on the left arm Toóga.
+ Tea cup Cháwung.
+ -------, to break a Wy´oong.
+ --- pot Tácoo.
+ ---, in an octagon bucket Tácoo cee.
+ ---, the metal pot in the inside of Tácoo mee.
+ the bucket
+ ---, the cover of a Tácoo whfoóta.
+ ---, the handle of a Tácoo tee.
+ ---, the ears of the bucket of a Tácoo toódee.
+ Tear, to Yáyoong.
+ ---- a thing in pieces Cheéreetawng.
+ Tears Náda.
+ Teeth Há (an aspirate).
+ -----, to set on edge Ha gíshee gish.
+ Temple Meéa (Chinese).
+ ------ yard Tírra.
+ Temples, human Koómeegung.
+ Ten Joo (Loo-Choo);
+ Too (Japan).
+ Thank you Ka foóshee.
+ That A´ddee.
+ There Ic´kkee.
+ Thigh Moómoo.
+ Thirteen Sanjoo.
+ Thirty Sangbácoo.
+ This Coódee.
+ Thousand Mang.
+ --------, ten O´koo.
+ Three Sang (Loo-Choo);
+ Meétesee (Japan).
+ Three sided figure Sang cac´kkoo.
+ Thread, sewing Eéchoo[116].
+ Thresh, to Oótchoong[117].
+ Throat Noódee[118].
+ Throw to, a stone at a mark Náging.
+ --------, away any thing Oóchung-ging.
+ Thumb Hoóee Eébee.
+ Tie to, a knot Coónjoong.
+ Tide Kádezee.
+ Tin Sheédookánnee.
+ Tired, or fatigued Amus´heenoo.
+ Tobacco Tobácco[119] (as in England).
+ ------- pouch Coóshee sat´chee, or foósa.
+ To-day A´choo.
+ To-morrow A´cha.
+ Toe Shánna eébee (lit. foot
+ finger).
+ Toe-nail Shánna thímmee.
+ Tomb Háka.
+ Tomb-stone Coóroo ishee.
+ Tongue Stcha.
+ Torn, part of any thing Yádee tung.
+ Touch, to Sáyoong, or sit´choong.
+ Town Meéattoo, or Métto.
+ Tray, or waiter Chírreedeh.
+ Tread, to Koóraming.
+ Tremble to, with cold Koórooyoong.
+ Tree Kee.
+ ----, branch of a Eéda.
+ ----, Banyan Gádesee mároo kee.
+ ----, with red and white flowers Hoóyoo.
+ Tree, with large red flowers, which Dee-eégo-kee.
+ are called _acka banna_
+ Trowsers Coo, or Hackkáma.
+ Turban worn by the lower order of the Sájee.
+ natives
+ Turn round to Meégoyoong.
+ Two Nee (Loo-Choo); tátesee
+ (Japan).
+ Twelve Neéjoo.
+ Twenty Hácoo.
+ ------ one Hácoo it´cheejoo.
+ ------ two Hácoo neéjoo.
+ ------ three Hácoo sánjoo.
+ ------ four Hácoo sheénjoo, or sheehácoo.
+ ------ five Hácoo goónjoo, or goohacoo.
+ ------ six Hácoo roócoojoo.
+ ------ seven Hácoo sit´cheejoo.
+ ------ eight Hácoo fat´cheejoo.
+ ------ nine Hácoo coójoo.
+ Tyger Toóra.
+ Vase, or urn Jeéshee.
+ Veins Kájee.
+ Very well (speaking of health) Oogánjoo.
+ --------- (well done, good) Eétshang.
+ Victual or dinner box Píntaw.
+ -------, the drawers in it Joobáckkoo.
+ Ugly Ootooroósa.
+ Umbrella Shássee kássa.
+ Undress, to Ching hájeeing.
+ Untie, to, a knot Hoótoochoong.
+ Upper garment Eéshaw, or Hoónta.
+ Water Meézee, or Meésee.
+ -----, hot A´tsee meézee, or átcheeroo.
+ -----, cold Feésa meézee, or feézeeroo
+ meézee.
+ -----, salt Spookoorása meézee.
+ -----, a large jar containing Tookoóee.
+ Water tub Meez-ofwhókee (cont. of meézee
+ and ofoowookee).
+ Walk, to At´choong.
+ ----, or crawl as a butterfly Seégatong.
+ ----, slow Yáwna eéchoong.
+ ----, quick Háyee sit´choong.
+ Walking hand in hand, as the natives Teefeécha.
+ Wash, to A´rayoong.
+ ----, or bathe Indeetáwoong.
+ ----, clothes Ching árayoong.
+ Washing clothes Ching áratee.
+ Watch Kárahigh.
+ ----- key Sásee noo quaw.
+ We, or a fourth person Yoótay.
+ Weather Tínsee, or tínchee.
+ -------, fine Yetínsee[120], or tínchee.
+ -------, foul or bad Yánna tínsee, or tínchee.
+ Web-footed bird Itchoóma.
+ ---------------, beak of a Coóchee (lit. mouth).
+ --------------- head Makarájjee.
+ --------------- leg Sha.
+ --------------- two legs Shándee.
+ --------------- tail Májoo.
+ --------------- wing Hónnee.
+ Well (lit. water's skin) Meézee ka.
+ West Neéshee.
+ Wet Inneétee.
+ Wet, to I´ndeetáoong.
+ What do you call this? Noóndeega.
+ Wheel of a ship Cooroóma.
+ Whiskers Bínta.
+ Whisper, to Mónotitchoong.
+ Whistling Feéfee.
+ ---------, as a bird Hoósa.
+ White Sheeroósa.
+ Wick of a candle Skeecoótshee.
+ Will you give me Wang yee quírree[121].
+ Wind Kássee, or Kázzee.
+ ---- to come in Kássee noóchoong.
+ ---- to go out Kássee eéchoong.
+ ----, little Kássee gua.
+ ----, great Weésa kássee, or táychfoo[122].
+ Wind, to, up a watch Feénoyoong.
+ --------, a string round the finger Káramachoong.
+ Winking Mee oóchee.
+ Wine Sáckkee.
+ ---- glass Támma sáckka sit´chee.
+ ---- kettle Dáckkeezitza.
+ ----, sweet Amazack´kee, compounded of
+ amása and sackee.
+ ----, strong Choozáckkee, or sáckkeechoo.
+ ----, weak Eéawzáckkee, or sáckkee ya.
+ Wing of a bird Hánnay.
+ ---- feathers of a bird Kee.
+ Wipe, to, the face Soósooyoong.
+ Wish, to, or bid good bye Wóckkayoong.
+ Wrist (lit. neck of the arm) Tee noo coóbee.
+ Write, to Kátchoong[123].
+ Writing-desk Sheékoo.
+ Wrong in writing characters Náwshoong.
+ Woman Innágo.
+ -----, plain Ootooroósa innágo.
+ -----, old Teeshoóee innágo.
+ -----, handsome Choorása innágo.
+ -----, young Wóckka innágo.
+ Wood of any kind Támoong.
+ Yawning A´coobee.
+ Year[124] Ning.
+ ----, one It´chee ning.
+ Years, eighteen, of age Joo hat´chee.
+ -----, fourteen Joó shee.
+ -----, thirty Sánjoo.
+ -----, twenty-five Neéjoo goo.
+ Yellow Cheéroo.
+ ------, dark Kássa cheéroo, or áka cheéroo.
+ ------, dirty or dingy Cheéroo díngee.
+ Yes Oo.
+ Yesterday Cheénoo.
+ Yoke, across the shoulders of porters Baw.
+ You (a second person) Ya (tay).
+ Young Wock´ka.
+ ----- woman Wock´ka innágo.
+ Yours Coóra ya moong.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 25: This sound is the same as the Italian _gn_, and will be
+found in the words _Gnafing_, signifying more; _Quangning_, a man of
+rank; and also in _Neesa_, bad, and _Nee_, two, which are most commonly
+pronounced as if a _g_ were prefixed to the _n_.]
+
+[Footnote 26: The _o_ in this word is sounded as in the English word
+_Bode_.]
+
+[Footnote 27: See sentence No. 101, Part II.]
+
+[Footnote 28: This word also signifies milk, and the female breast.]
+
+[Footnote 29: In speaking of books with reference to their number, they
+say _teetsee sheemootsee_, one book; _tatsee sheemootsee_, two books;
+but of a single book they only say _sheemootsee;_ and we never found
+that they had any plural termination.]
+
+[Footnote 30: See sentence No. 111.]
+
+[Footnote 31: There is a great similarity between this word and that
+which signifies _to be alive_, (Itch-chawng).]
+
+[Footnote 32: This word signifies both a ladder and a bridge.]
+
+[Footnote 33: See Sentences Nos. 25 and 41.]
+
+[Footnote 34: This word signifies both a cask and a candlestick.]
+
+[Footnote 35: See Sentence No. 70.]
+
+[Footnote 36: _Noo_ seems to express _of_, or the _'s_ used in the
+English language: as _Ooshee noo chee_, the cow's milk, or the milk of
+the cow; _Ooshee noo ka_, the bullock's skin, or the skin of the
+bullock; _Doochoo noo choe_, Loo-choo's people, or the people of
+Loo-choo; and will be found in a variety of other instances.]
+
+[Footnote 37: See Sentences Nos. 18, 19, and 21.]
+
+[Footnote 38: The compass was generally called _Kassee tooee_, which two
+words signify wind and a cock or fowl; but the landsmen called it
+_Karahigh_, which signifies a watch.]
+
+[Footnote 39: This is probably _Oowhoko_, signifying a great many
+persons.]
+
+[Footnote 40: The day at Loo-Choo is divided into six hours, as also the
+night. In counting a number of days they apply the numerals in a similar
+manner to that which will be found in a note on _Twitchee_, an hour; but
+they did not seem to have any names to denote the days of the week.]
+
+[Footnote 41: This word is generally used by the master of the house
+when his guest announces his intended departure, by saying, _Cung,
+cung_.]
+
+[Footnote 42: See Sentences Nos. 74 and 76.]
+
+[Footnote 43: See Sentences Nos. 29, 32, 33, and 37.]
+
+[Footnote 44: See Sentences Nos. 24 and 107.]
+
+[Footnote 45: See Sentences Nos. 31, 36, and 27.]
+
+[Footnote 46: See Numerals, Loo-Choo and Japan, Part II. after the
+Sentences.]
+
+[Footnote 47: This word, which is composed of _addee_, this, and
+_coodee_, that, I am not positive of, and I have therefore affixed a
+query against it.]
+
+[Footnote 48: This is a very difficult word to pronounce, and I am not
+certain of having conveyed its true sound.]
+
+[Footnote 49: See Sentence No. 111.]
+
+[Footnote 50: See Sentence No. 55.]
+
+[Footnote 51: See Sentence No. 20.]
+
+[Footnote 52: See note on Numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 53: The nearest sound to that of _flail_ which a native of
+Loo-Choo could utter was that of _Freyroo_; generally speaking they
+found great difficulty in pronouncing English words. The nearest sound
+to that of our _l_ was _Airoo_, and to that of _vil_ was _Bayroo_.]
+
+[Footnote 54: See note on Numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 55: See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48.]
+
+[Footnote 56: The intention of departing from a house is generally
+announced by _Cung, cung_.]
+
+[Footnote 57: The hair of the natives is formed into a knot on the crown
+of the head, and fastened by two pins of silver or brass, the one
+ornamented by a flowered head, called _kamma-shishee_, and the other
+_ooshee-thushee_. That worn by the children is called _jeefa_.]
+
+[Footnote 58: This word is used to denote a _tree_ as well as a _hand_;
+this probably arises from the similarity; considering the _hand_ as the
+trunk, and the fingers the branches of the _tree_.]
+
+[Footnote 59: A piece of China crape, or very fine paper, is used as a
+handkerchief by the superior classes of the natives, and is generally
+worn in the bosom: the lower orders substitute a coarser kind of paper.]
+
+[Footnote 60: A negative in frequent use.]
+
+[Footnote 61: This word may be applied to being in want of water.]
+
+[Footnote 62: See Sentence No. 2.]
+
+[Footnote 63: A strong aspirate.]
+
+[Footnote 64: See note on _I_ or _me_ (first person) next page.]
+
+[Footnote 65: These two expressions were obtained by catching a
+butterfly and then letting it go.]
+
+[Footnote 66: The _jeeshee_, or _vase_, is a stone jar in which the
+bones of the dead are deposited at the expiration of seven years after
+burial.]
+
+[Footnote 67: The same word (_obee_) signifies both the hoop of a cask
+and the girdle worn round the waist; this probably originated in the
+girdle being substituted for the hoop, which appears to have been worn
+formerly.]
+
+[Footnote 68: _Ma_, signifying a horse, is a Chinese word, and was
+probably introduced into Loo-Choo with that animal.]
+
+[Footnote 69: The names of the hours will be found in the second part;
+the divisions of time will be found under their different heads of
+day, month, year, &c.]
+
+[Footnote 70: While seeking to obtain from the natives the pronouns _I_,
+_you_, and _him_, I at first got _chooee, lay_, and _meechay;_ but on
+further enquiry I found that these had not that meaning, they were
+superseded by _wang_, _ya_, and _aree_, for _I_, _you_, and _him;_ but
+as I heard _chooee_, _lay_, and _meechay_ repeated in enumerating
+persons, I have set them down as first, second, and third persons, that
+being the sense which they seem to bear. The word _chooee_, or _choo_,
+it would seem signifies man (homo) in a general sense.]
+
+[Footnote 71: See Sentence No. 96.]
+
+[Footnote 72: See Sentence No. 99.]
+
+[Footnote 73: See Sentence No. 101.]
+
+[Footnote 74: See Sentence No. 6.]
+
+[Footnote 75: See note, "Holding a thing."]
+
+[Footnote 76: See Sentences Nos. 81 and 82.]
+
+[Footnote 77: See Sentences Nos. 38 to 44.]
+
+[Footnote 78: Literally to sew clothes.]
+
+[Footnote 79: Literally to work rope.]
+
+[Footnote 80: _Skoyoong_, or _Sookooyoong_, signifies to bake.]
+
+[Footnote 81: This word, which is composed of _ickkee_ and _ya_
+(_ickkee_ signifying _there_, and _ga_, which may possibly have been
+originally _ya, you_), appeared to me to bear a similar meaning to our
+_you, sir_, or _you, there_, as the natives invariably called out
+_ickkeega_, when wishing to attract the attention of any one.]
+
+[Footnote 82: See note on the _kawroo_. The _kaw_ is also burned when an
+offering of rice is made on the _kawroo_.]
+
+[Footnote 83: The following are the names of the months or moons.
+
+ January Shaw gwautsee.
+ February Nee gwautsee (lit. 2d month).
+ March Sang gwautsee (lit. 3d).
+ April Shee gwautsee (lit. 4th).
+ May Goo gwautsee (lit. 5th).
+ June Roocoo gwautsee (lit. 6th).
+ July Sitchee gwautsee (lit. 7th).
+ August Fatchee gwautsee (lit. 8th).
+ September Coo gwautsee (lit. 9th).
+ October Joo gwautsee (lit. 10th).
+ November Shee moo stitchee, or joo itchee gwautsee.
+ December Shee wasee, or joo nee gwautsee.
+
+The twentieth day of the tenth month (October), _Joo gwautsee, neejoo
+nitchee_, was, according to Loo-Choo time, the second day of the tenth
+month, _joo gwautsee, nee nitchee_.]
+
+[Footnote 84: A strong aspirate on the first syllable.]
+
+[Footnote 85: The negative is almost invariably placed after the word.]
+
+[Footnote 86: See note on numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 87: The sound of the _oong_, or _oomb_, is very difficult, and
+can only be approximated by closing the teeth firmly and compressing the
+sound of _oong_.]
+
+[Footnote 88: See note on Numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 89: See Sentences Nos. 49 to 53.]
+
+[Footnote 90: _Sheenoostang_ signifies to _cover over_, and possibly
+_ooroo_ should have been written _eeroo_, which is _colour_; and this
+word, signifying _painting_, would then be literally _to cover over with
+colour_.]
+
+[Footnote 91: This is literally the _belly of the hand_, or the _hand's
+belly_. For an explanation of the _noo_ see observations on the Loo-Choo
+language at the beginning.]
+
+[Footnote 92: This word seems to derive its origin from _ackka_,
+_burning_.]
+
+[Footnote 93: This word, _Katcheemeeoong_, to pinch, appears to be
+formed of the words _Ka_, skin, _chee_, blood, and _meeoong_, to see;
+and may be translated to _see the blood through the skin_, or _in the
+skin_.]
+
+[Footnote 94: This sound is not unlike that which the screwing about the
+scull of a boat on the pivot causes.]
+
+[Footnote 95: The same word signifies a flower.]
+
+[Footnote 96: _Feetchoong_ signifies to pull, so that it may with more
+propriety be applied to the harp, or touching the strings of the violin
+with the fingers.]
+
+[Footnote 97: A strong aspirate on the last syllable.]
+
+[Footnote 98: See Sentence No. 105.]
+
+[Footnote 99: Literally, to upset.]
+
+[Footnote 100: For the sound of this word see note on the English word
+_no_.]
+
+[Footnote 101: See Sentence No. 8.]
+
+[Footnote 102: _Narang_, or _nang_, is used on most occasions as the
+negative.]
+
+[Footnote 103: The same word signifies _sweet potatoes_.]
+
+[Footnote 104: This word it will be observed signifies both _to screw_
+and _to scull;_ this may originate in the screwing motion of the oar
+from side to side of the boat.]
+
+[Footnote 105: See Sentences No. 38 to 44.]
+
+[Footnote 106: The similarity in sound of this word to that of a
+character (_Hoonatee_) written on a piece of paper in the hats of the
+men employed working for the ships, has suggested the idea that the
+meaning of the character may have some reference to a ship.]
+
+[Footnote 107: See Sentences Nos. 102 and 103.]
+
+[Footnote 108: Words of Loo-Choo songs:
+
+"Sasa sangcoomeh sangcoomeah kadee yooshee daw, tantoong tantoong tang."
+
+A boat song: "Whee yo ee.--Whee yo ee." The steersman gave "Whee," and
+was followed by the other men with a repetition of "Whee yo ee."
+
+Another boat song: "Quee yay hanno ha.--Quee yay hanno ha." To both
+these airs the rowers kept very good time.]
+
+[Footnote 109: See Sentences Nos. 1 to 7.]
+
+[Footnote 110: The _kawroo_ is a small square stone excavated a little
+on the upper part, in which an offering of rice is made. On the face of
+this stone is carved a variety of characters denoting the rank, &c. of
+the person who makes the offering.]
+
+[Footnote 111: See Sentences in Part II.]
+
+[Footnote 112: See Sentences Nos. 29, 32, 33, and 37.]
+
+[Footnote 113: See Sentences Nos. 108, 109, and 110.]
+
+[Footnote 114: _Amazackkee_ is a contraction of the words _amasa_,
+sweet, and _sackkee_, wine; the latter always changing _s_ into _z_ when
+preceded by any other word. See _wine_, _strong_, _weak_, &c.]
+
+[Footnote 115: Tattoo marks will be found in Part II.]
+
+[Footnote 116: _Eechoo._ This word is used to denote _thread_, silk_,
+and _ribbon._]
+
+[Footnote 117: _Ootchoong_, or _oochoong_, signifies _to work_, _to
+play_, and _to make_.]
+
+[Footnote 118: Possibly this word implies the act of swallowing.]
+
+[Footnote 119: The sound of this word is precisely the same as that of
+our _tobacco_. I have, therefore, spelt it in the same manner.]
+
+[Footnote 120: See Sentence No. 109.]
+
+[Footnote 121: See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48.]
+
+[Footnote 122: This is probably the _tae fung_ (great wind of the
+Chinese, called by us _tyfoon_), a severe gale of wind in the China
+Sea.]
+
+[Footnote 123: See Sentence No. 73.]
+
+[Footnote 124: The year at Loo-Choo, according to Jeeroo's account, is
+divided into twelve months of thirty days each, making in all 360 days,
+and every sixth year one month is intercalated.]
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTE.
+
+
+In the following Sentences the English is given before the Loo-Choo. No
+Sentence has been inserted the meaning of which was not distinctly
+ascertained; but it happened frequently that the precise import of some
+words in a Sentence was not made out, and in order to enable the reader
+to judge to what extent this took place, a literal translation of the
+words in each Sentence is given in the last column; and where a word
+occurs, the meaning of which is doubtful, an asterisk is put in its
+place.
+
+In the last column it will be observed that every verb having the
+termination _oong_, _ung_, &c. is translated as if it were the
+infinitive, although the sense, as denoted in the first column, points
+to another mood.
+
+
+
+
+SENTENCES, ENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO.
+
+ _Of Speaking._
+
+ No. _English._ _Loo-Choo._ _Literal Translation._
+
+ 1. I speak Moónooyoong I to speak.
+
+ 2. I speak, you hear Moónooyoong, ya sit´choong, I speak, you to hear,
+ or Chickkee or hearing.
+
+ 3. I speak to you Ya, or ea moónooyoong, or You to speak, or I.
+ wang. Ya too moónooyoong You * to speak.
+
+ 4. I speak Chinese Wang Quántoong I Chinese to speak.
+ moónooyoong
+
+ 5. I cannot speak Chinese Wang Quántoong moónoorang I Chinese cannot speak.
+
+ 6. I am learning to speak Wang Doóchoo cootoóba I Loo-Choo learning or
+ Loo-Choo yoóshoong[125] studying to *.
+
+ 7. Mádera speaks English I´ngere Mádera moónooyoong English Mádera to
+ speak.
+
+ _Of Going and Coming._
+
+ 8. A man running to the Háyay tímma ic´kkeega Running boat man.
+ boat
+
+ 9. I am going on shore Wang amáki eéchoong I shore to go.
+
+ 10. To-morrow I will return A´cha choó-oong To-morrow to come.
+
+ 11. To come back again A´mma ka choong[126] * * to come.
+
+ 12. I am going on board Timma ki eéchoong Boat * to go.
+
+ 13. I came yesterday Cheénoo chung Yesterday came.
+
+ 14. Go down there Amúnka ic´kkee * there.
+
+ 15. Come up here Nooboótee coo Ascend here.
+
+ 16. You go below Yá oódee meéshawdee You * *.
+
+ 17. To go out of a place Yá ka saut eéchoong * * * to go.
+
+ 18. To come into a place Yá ka saut choong * * * to come.
+
+ 19. Tayin[127] returns Tayin[127] choo-oong The great man to come.
+
+ 20. To go in a boat to Doóchoo timma eéchoong Loo-Choo boat to go
+ Loo-Choo to carry fish eéo katámmeeoong fish to carry.
+
+ 21. To go to sea in a Timma eéchoong oóshoo Boat to go sea fish to
+ boat to catch fish eéo cheéoong catch
+
+ 22. Where is Tayin gone Táyin makáyee ga ímjara Tayin * * *.
+
+ 23. Tayin has gone to Táyin eéchoong hooboónee Tayin to go large ship
+ the other ship to meéyoong Sheenoóma to see *.
+ pay his respects
+
+ 24. When all are drunk I´gnea weétee amáki All drunk shore *
+ we shall be permitted moótotee yoótoosha *.
+ to go on shore
+
+ 25. I am going now, he Atookárra wang eéchoong By and by I to go, by
+ will come presently atookárra eéchoong and by to go.
+
+ 26. I am going on shore Wang amáki eéchoong I shore to go I to
+ to dinner moónookámoong eat.
+
+ 27. I am going on board Wang hoónee ki eéchoong I ship * to go I to
+ to dinner moónoo kámoong eat.
+
+ 28. When the ships depart A´cha hoónee níttee Doóchoo To-morrow ship *
+ to-morrow all the mang hoónee Loo-Choo thousand
+ Loo-Choo people will oócooyoong ship *.
+ pray
+
+
+ _Of Eating and Drinking._
+
+ 29. To drink wine Sac´kkee noómoong Wine to drink.
+
+ 30. Sweet wine Amazac´kkee Sweet wine.
+
+ 31. I eat Moónoo kámoong I to eat.
+
+ 32. I never drink tea Cha noódee nárang Tea drinking never.
+
+ 33. Tayin and you never Táyin ya sac´kkee noódee Tayin you wine drink
+ drink wine nárang never.
+
+ 34. The parting glass Wóckkarittee Departing.
+
+ 35. It is good (to eat) Coódee mása This good (to eat).
+
+ 36. It is bad, throw it Neésba is´kung Bad *.
+ away
+
+ 37. It is tea, to drink Meézee tájeeing cha noódee Water to boil tea
+ drinking.
+
+
+ _Of Looking and Seeing._
+
+ 38. To look at the sun Teéda meéoong kágung Sun to see glass.
+ through a glass
+
+ 39. I look, or I see Moónoomeéoong I to see.
+
+ 40. The English gentleman I´ngere táyin meésheeoong English great man to
+ is looking look at.
+
+ 41. Stop, you shall look Mátee*, atookárra ya Stop, by and by you
+ presently meésheeoong to look at.
+
+ 42. Clouds obscure the Koómoo teéda oósooóstang Clouds sun to cover
+ sun over.
+
+ 43. The branches of the Toómee kágung kee noo Spy-glass trees
+ tree obstruct the káttakáshee meérang branches to hide.
+ sight
+
+ 44. If a Loo-Choo woman Doóchoo innágo I´ngere Loo-Choo woman English
+ should see you she meéoong náchoong to see, to cry.
+ will be alarmed
+
+
+ _Of Giving._
+
+ 45. Will you give me that Wang yee quírree I * giving.
+
+ 46. Give me that pencil Hoódee moot´choo Pencil bring.
+
+ 47. I gave him some paper A´ree nee queétang Him * giving.
+
+ 48. By and by I will give Atookárra qua gnee queéoong By and by children *
+ it to my children to give.
+
+
+ _Of Opening and Shutting._
+
+ 49. Shut this, or it Akíttee nínjoong Shutting to sleep.
+
+ 50. Open this, or it Akíttee mírree, or Opening it.
+ akátindee
+
+ 51. Do you open this, Akátindee, or ya akírree Opening, or you
+ or it opening.
+
+ 52. Open this book Ya sheémootsee akírree You book opening.
+
+ 53. Open your watch that Akátindee kárahigh meéoong Opening watch to see.
+ I may look at it
+
+
+ _Of Losing and Finding._
+
+ 54. To lose a pencil Hoódee oótoochung Pencil to lose.
+
+ 55. To find a pencil Hoódee toómatung Pencil to find.
+
+
+ _Of Quantity._
+
+ 56. Two small suns Tátsee teéda gua Two suns small.
+
+ 57. A few boys Coósa wárrabee Few boys.
+
+ 58. A few Men Ic´kkeekoósa Men few.
+
+ 59. A great many men Ic´kkeerássa Men many.
+
+ 60. A few books Sheémootsee sánsatche Books few.
+
+ 61. A great many books Sheémootsee tóro Books many.
+
+ 62. Six kinds of wine Moóeeyroo noo sáckkee * of wine.
+
+
+ _Of Making._
+
+ 63. Making a false step Koónsinda dákatchee * *.
+
+ 64. Vases made at Napa Nápa jeéshee scoótee Napa vases made.
+
+ 65. Sand spread on a level Sínna oóshoo sháee máshoo Sand sea * salt
+ plain on which water tátchoong to make.
+ is sprinkled for
+ making salt
+
+ 66. Sing a song Ya oóta yoóshoong You song to sing.
+
+ 67. Jeeroo sings well, Jeéroo oóta yoóshoong Jeeroo song to sing *
+ or with good taste cheécheegoótoo * *.
+
+
+ _Of Bringing and Carrying._
+
+ 68. Bring your children Ya qua saúteecoo You children bring.
+
+ 69. Bring fire here Fee toóteecoo Fire bring.
+
+ 70. This vessel carries Hoónee jeéshee káttamittee Ship vases * Oonting.
+ vases to Oonting Oónting
+
+ 71. Boy, bring fire to I´rree fee toóteecoo tobácco Boy fire bring,
+ light my pipe foókee tobacco smoke.
+
+ 72. Bring a cup of water Cháwung náki meézee eéteecoo Teacup * water *
+ here here.
+
+
+ _Of Writing and Sketching_
+
+ 73. To write a letter Jee kátchoong A character to write.
+
+ 74. Tayin is sketching Táyin háshee noo Tayin bridge of to
+ the bridge eékatchoong sketch.
+
+ 75. Tayin sketches very Táyin yoókatchee choorása Tayin * sketches
+ well handsome.
+
+ 76. To sketch a Loo-Choo Doóchoo meéa eékatchoong Loo-Choo temple to
+ temple sketch.
+
+
+ _Of Compliment._
+
+ 77. Thank you Ká foóshee * * *.
+
+ 78. How do you do Yoo ky´moong * * *.
+
+ 79. Very well Oogánjoo * * *.
+
+ 80. I am very sorry Oomoótee shangcoómeh * * *.
+
+
+ _Of Living or Residing._
+
+ 81. Tayin lives here Táyin simmájoo coo Tayin lives here.
+
+ 82. A man living in the Ickkeegá simmá áwhfee A man living country.
+ country
+
+ 83. I live on board the Wang hoónee gua ímmatong I ship small to live.
+ brigs
+
+
+ _Of Burning and Scalding._
+
+ 84. Fire will burn you Fee yáddee Fire burns.
+
+ 85. Water will scald you Meésee yáddee Water burns.
+
+ 86. Scalding oneself with Meézee fidgeroósa yoo Water hot * burns.
+ hot water yáddee
+
+
+ _Of Enquiry and Reply._
+
+ 87. What is the name of Noóndeega coóra na What is this name.
+ this
+
+ 88. The name of this is Coóra ga na ya This * name *.
+
+ 89. How many children Qui eecootiéga * * *.
+ have you
+
+ 90. How old are you or Eecoótseega * * *.
+ they
+
+ 91. I am fourteen years Joóshee Fourteen.
+ of age
+
+ 92. I am eighteen years Joohatc´hee Eighteen.
+ of age
+
+ 93. ---- twenty-five, &c. Neéjoogoo Twenty-five.
+
+
+ _Miscellaneous._
+
+ 94. To boil potatoes Mootájeeing Potatoes to boil.
+
+ 95. I am very busy Yoo joónatan * * *.
+
+ 96. The sting of a snake Háboo coótee sheénoong Snake sting to kill.
+ will kill
+
+ 97. Sucking milk at the Chee noóma chee Milk * breast.
+ breast
+
+ 98. A child drinking milk Chee noódee wárrabee Milk drinking child.
+ at the breast
+
+ 99. A child kissing its Wárrabee úmma coóchee Child mother mouth
+ mother spoótee kissing.
+
+ 100. A woman leaning Innágo kákatong eéki Woman to lean anchor.
+ on an anchor
+
+ 101. A live shell-fish Amang it´chchawng Shell-fish to be alive
+ will bite coóyoong to bite.
+
+ 102. This flower has a Fánna mása kabásha Flower sweet smell.
+ pleasant smell
+
+ 103. This flower has no Fánna nang kabásha Flower no smell.
+ smell
+
+ 104. Loo-Choo women Doóchoo innágo fwhoóco Loo-choo woman great
+ are not very ooórung many *.
+ handsome
+
+ 105. The sootitsee (sago Sootítsee wang tseéchoong Sootitsee I * *.
+ tree) pricked me yátee
+
+ 106. To plant potatoes Moo jee hoótee céyoong Potatoes ground * *.
+
+ 107. Drunk, I vomit Weétee moónoo háchoong Drunk I vomit.
+
+ 108. After sunset it is Teéda ságatee seedásha Sun setting cool.
+ cool
+
+ 109. When the sun Teéda téttee, koómoo nang, Sunshine, clouds none,
+ shines, and there yaytínchee fine weather.
+ are no clouds, it
+ is fine weather
+
+ 110. The sun sets at six Roócoo twit´chee teéda Six hours sun to set.
+ o'clock ságayoong
+
+ 111. The horse fell down, Ma táwrittee táyin noo Horse fell down,
+ and the tayin eébee oótee tayin's finger broke.
+ broke his finger
+
+ 112. After seven years Sítchee ning, coótsee Seven years' bones
+ we wash the bones arátee jeéshee ittee washing vase putting
+ and put them into in.
+ a vase
+
+ 113. Without any flesh Shíshee ning Flesh none.
+
+ 114. The people of Doóchoo noo choo sibíttee Loo-choo people
+ Loo-Choo I shall yoótoosha remember * *.
+ never forget
+
+ 115. You will soon Sibíttee wása Remember bad.
+ forget them
+
+ 116. Twelve hours make Joo nee twit´chee, it´chee Ten two hours, one
+ one day nit´chee day.
+
+ 117. Thirty days make one Sánjoo nit´chee, it´chee Thirty days one month
+ moon, or month gwaútsee
+
+ 118. One year consists of It´chee ning, joo nee One year, ten two
+ twelve months gwaútsee months.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 125: _Yooshoong_ probably signifies _to recite_, as it is used in
+requesting a person to sing as well as in this instance.]
+
+[Footnote 126: Probably instead of _amma ka_, this should have been _amaki_
+(shore), which would makeit coming to the shore, which was the case.]
+
+[Footnote 127: _Ta-jin_, in Chinese, signifies a _great man;_ it is translated
+ by Mr. Morrison _his excellency_.]
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: Japanese characters in the table below are denoted as such.]
+
+ NUMERALS.
+
+ _English._ _Loo-Choo._ _Characters._ _Japan._
+
+ 1 One It´chee [Japanese character] Teétsee, or te 1.
+
+ 2 Two Nee, or gnee [Japanese character] Tátsee, or ta 2.
+
+ 3 Three Sang [Japanese character] Meétsee, or mee 3.
+
+ 4 Four Shee [Japanese character] Eéotsee[128], or yoo 4.
+
+ 5 Five Goo, or go [Japanese character] I´ttitsee 5.
+
+ 6 Six Roóko [Japanese character] Moótsee 6.
+
+ 7 Seven St´chee [Japanese character] Nánnatsee 7.
+
+ 8 Eight Fat´chee, or [Japanese character] Eeyátsee 8.
+ kwat´chee
+
+ 9 Nine Coo [Japanese character] Koónnitsee 9.
+
+ 10 Ten Joo, or dzoo [Japanese character] Too 10.
+
+Both sets of these numerals are in common use at Loo-Choo, though it
+would not perhaps be correct to apply them to the same word, as I never
+recollect having heard a native say "itchee sheemootsee," one book, or
+"teétsee twit´chee," one hour, but always "teétsee sheémootsee," one
+book, and "itchee twitchee," one hour. I at first imagined "teetsee,
+tatsee," &c. were ordinals, but I have since found from Captain
+Broughton's Voyage that they bear a great resemblance to the numerals of
+Japan, and as such I have inserted them.
+
+The characters, of which the above are copies, were written by a native.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 128: The _o_ in this word is to be pronounced as the diphthong
+_oa_ in boat.]
+
+
+
+NAMES OF PERSONS.
+
+ The Kowung, or King - Sháng fwee.
+
+ The Pochin ta foo, or Prince - Shang pung-fwee.
+
+ The Chief of the Paychins who attended the ship - Oókooma Mowchowshoóa.
+
+ The second Paychin - Madáyra Sháyoon.
+
+ The third do. - I´ssacha Sándoo.
+
+ The fourth do. - Jeéma Tsí-se-eu.
+
+ His eldest son - Maátsee Tsí-chee.
+
+ His friend (an elderly man) - Oóhoomee Chínchawhee.
+
+ The fifth Paychin - I´ssecha Háckkeeboócoo.
+
+ The sixth do. - Jeéroo Jeéda.
+
+ The first Linguist - Mádera Káwsheeoong.
+
+ The second Linguist - A´nya Toónshoonfa.
+
+ His wife - Oóshee.
+
+ One of the junior Paychins - Yáma Too.
+
+ The teacher (an old man) - Yáckkabee Oómeejeéroo.
+
+ His eldest son - Yáckkabee Oómee-nee whaw.
+
+ A boy - O´seejee.
+
+ One of the principal attendants of the}
+ Pochin ta foo } - Mádam Báshee.
+
+ Another - Eévaroo.
+
+
+ NAMES OF PLACES.
+
+ Corea - Córay.
+
+ Pekin - Péking.
+
+ Fokien - Fótchien.
+
+ China - Quántoong.
+
+ Chusan - Choósan.
+
+ England - I´ngeree.
+
+ The island of Loo-Choo - Loo-Choo, or Doó-Choo.
+
+ The town of Napakiang - Nápa ummeátto.
+
+ The high distant islands seen from Napa - A´makírreema.
+
+ The Sugar Loaf Island - Eégoos eécoondee.
+
+ Japan - Níphon.
+
+ Canton - Cánton.
+
+
+NAMES OF THE DAYS OF THE MOON FROM NEW TO FULL.
+
+1. Chee tátchee.
+
+2. Hádjee mee nitchee.
+
+3. Hádjee mee san nit´chee.
+
+4. Hádjee mee noo ka.
+
+5. Hádjee mee goo nit´chee.
+
+6. Hádjee mee roócoo nit´chee.
+
+7. Hádjee mee sit´chee nit´chee.
+
+8. Hádjee mee fatchee nit´chee.
+
+9. Hádjee mee coo nit´chee.
+
+10. Yoóka.
+
+11. Joo it´chee nit´chee.
+
+12. Joo nee nit´chee.
+
+13. Joo san nit´chee.
+
+14. Joo yoóka.
+
+15. Joo goo nit´chee.
+
+
+
+
+THE NINE ORDERS OF RANK OF PAYCHINS, OR CHIEFS, WHO ARE DISTINGUISHED BY THE
+COLOUR OF THEIR BONNETS, CALLED HATCHEE MATCHEE.
+
+
+ { A pink ground with spots, circles,
+ 1st. Ching neéstchoo noo Hat´chee { and diamonds, of black, yellow, blue,
+ mat´chee { white, and green.
+
+ 2nd. A´cadjee noo Hat´chee mat´chee { A pink ground with spots, &c. of red
+ { and yellow, blue and black.
+
+ 3rd. O´jee noo Hat´chee mat´chee { A green ground with spots, &c. of
+ { red, yellow, blue, and black.
+
+ 4th. Moóla sat´chee noo Hat´chee { A pink or light purple ground, with
+ mat´chee { spots of the same colour.
+
+ 5th. Cheéroo dínjee noo Hat´chee { A dingy yellow ground, with spots of
+ mat´chee { the same colour.
+
+ 6th. Cheéroo sy ya noo Hat´chee { A bright yellow ground without
+ mat´chee { spots.
+
+ 7th. Chíddeeming noo Hat´chee { A red ground without spots.
+ mat´chee
+
+ 8th. Akása noo Hat´chee mat´chee - A red ground without spots.
+
+ 9th. O´sa noo Hat´chee mat´chee - A green ground without spots.
+
+The attendants of the chiefs wear a red Hatchee matchee of a coarser
+texture.
+
+
+TATTOO MARKS ON THE ARMS OF SOME OF THE NATIVES OF THE GREAT LOO-CHOO
+ISLAND.
+
+ 1. 3.
+ Right arm. Right arm. Left arm.
+ This man had [Illustration: [Illustration: [Illustration:
+ not any mark Oódeemaw.] Oódeemaw.] toóga.]
+ on the left
+ arm.
+
+ 2. 4.
+ Right arm. Right arm. Left arm.
+ [Illustration: [Illustration] [Illustration:
+ Coódee Oódemaw.] toóga.]
+
+The four men, whose arms were marked in the above manner, were young and
+of the lower order, probably fishermen. It appeared to have been done by
+puncturing the skin, and staining it with Indian ink in the manner
+practised by our seamen.
+
+The above marks are quite as large as the originals; they were on the
+inner part of the fore arm, close up to the elbow joint. Some were
+marked on both arms, others only on the right, but we did not observe
+any who had them only on the left arm.
+
+
+NAMES OF THE HOURS.
+
+ One hour, or one o'clock It´chee twit´chee }
+ Two hours, or two Nee twit´chee }
+ Three Sang twit´chee } The day
+ Four Shee twit´chee }
+ Five Goo twit´chee }
+ Six Roócoo twit´chee }
+ Seven Sit´chee twit´chee }
+ Eight Fat´chee twit´chee }
+ Nine Coo twit´chee } The night.
+ Ten Joo twit´chee }
+ Eleven Joo it´chee twit´chee}
+ Twelve Joo nee twit´chee }
+
+The day at Loo-Choo, i.e. between sunrise and sunset, is divided into
+six hours, as is also the night.
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE JAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.
+
+
+
+
+NOTE.
+
+
+The following comparisons are given, with the view of pointing out as
+nearly as circumstances will permit what resemblance there is between
+the languages of the islands of Loo-Choo, Niphon, or Japan, and Insu,
+lying in the Japan Sea, and which by some voyagers have been considered
+the same language.
+
+In the first comparison, viz. that between the languages of Loo-Choo and
+Japan, the Japanese words are extracted from the translation of
+Thunberg's Voyage to Japan, printed in London 1795, 2d edit. vol. iii.
+
+In the second, viz. that between Loo-Choo and Insu, the Insu words are
+taken from Broughton's Voyage.
+
+A third comparison is given between the languages of Loo-Choo, Niphon,
+and Insu, together with the two sets of Numerals in use at Loo-Choo, the
+Japanese from Thunberg, and the Insu from Broughton.
+
+It ought to be recollected that as Mr. Thunberg was a foreigner, and
+wrote in a different language from that in which the Loo-Choo words have
+been recorded, a difference of sound may be suspected between them when
+no material difference really exists between the two languages.
+
+The letter _u_ has been substituted in the spelling of the Japanese
+words for the _v_ used by Thunberg.
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE JAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.
+
+
+ _English._ _Japanese[129]._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ All Mei Innea.
+ Anchor Ikari Eki.
+ Angry Fandatsuru Neetsa.
+ Answer, to Fento suru Aree ga aanyoong.
+ Arm Ude Teenoo.
+ Arrow Ja Eea.
+ Attendant Sairio Eeree.
+ Bad Warikakuse Neesha, or Wasa.
+ Bake, to Jaku Irree-chang.
+ Bare (naked) Haguru Harraka.
+ Bed Nedokuri Coocha.
+ Belly Stabara Watta.
+ Bend, to Oru Tammeeoong.
+ Bird Tori Hotoo.
+ Birdcage Tori no su Hotoo coo.
+ Bitter Nigaka Injassa.
+ Blood Tji, or Kjets Chee.
+ Blow, up the fire, to Fuku Footchoong.
+ Boat Temma Timma.
+ Boil, to Tagiru Tajeeing.
+ Bone Fone Cootsee.
+ Book Somots Sheemootsee.
+ Bow Jumi Yoomee.
+ Branch of a tree Jeda Kee.
+ Brass Sintju Cheejackkoo.
+ Breadth Jakohaba Habba.
+ Breast Mone Moonee.
+ Breathe, to Ikitsuku Itchooshoong.
+ Bridge Fae, hae Hashee.
+ Brother Kiodai Weekee.
+ Bucket Tango Tagoo.
+ Button Botan Kogannee.
+ Calf of the leg Stosone Koonda.
+ Candle Rosoku Daw.
+ Candlestick Rosoks tatti Soo-coo.
+ Cannon Issibia Isheebeea.
+ Carry away, to Mootsu Mootchee eechoong.
+ Cat Mio Mia.
+ Charcoal Sumi Chacheejing.
+ Cheeks Hogeta, fo Hoo.
+ Child Kodoma Warrabee.
+ Circle Maru Maroodair.
+ Castle, or tower Siro, so Eegooscoo.
+ Climb, to Nagoru Noobooyoong.
+ Cloth So king Ching.
+ Cock Otori Woo tooee.
+ Cold Samka kang Feesa.
+ Compass Fobari Karahigh.
+ Colour Iro Eeroo ceeroo.
+ Come, to Kuru Choong.
+ Cool Sususi Seedasha.
+ Copper Akaganni Acoogannee.
+ Count, to Kansju Oohawkoo-oong.
+ Cow Us Mee ooshee.
+ Creep, to Fau Hawyoong.
+ Cup, tea Tiawang Chawung.
+ Dark Mime Coorasing.
+ Daughter Musme, gogo Innago oongua.
+ Deep Fukai Fookassa.
+ Dig, to Foli Ooehoong.
+ Die Sinnoru sinu Nintoong.
+ Dice Saii Sheego roocoo.
+ Door To Hashirree.
+ Dog Inu Ing.
+ Drink Nomimono Noomoo.
+ Drink, to Nomu Noomoong.
+ Drunk, to be Namoji jeikfsari Weeoong.
+ Duck, tame Afiru Afeeroo.
+ Dry, to Karruru Karachoong.
+ Earth, the Tji dsi Jee.
+ Ear Mimi Mimmee.
+ East Figasi Fingassee.
+ Egg Tamago Cooga.
+ Elbow Ude, fisi Tenoo feejee.
+ Empty, to Akwuru Karashoong.
+ Exchange, to Kajuru Kayra (fans); to exchange
+ fans at Loo-Choo.
+ Face Tsera Steera.
+ Fall, to Tawareta Tawshoong.
+ Fan Oge Ojee.
+ Farewell Kingo, nigoserru Wockkatee.
+ Father Tete, toto Shoo.
+ Fat Kojuru Quaitee.
+ Feather Tori no fa Tooee noo hannee.
+ Fin, a fin Jokofiri fire Hannay.
+ Finger Jubi Eebee.
+ Find, to Midassu Toomatung.
+ Fire Fi, finoko Fee.
+ Fish Iwo, sakkana Eeo.
+ Fish Iwo tsuru Eeo kakeeoong.
+ Fishing net Ami Sheebee.
+ Flag, a Hato Hata.
+ Flower Fanna Fanna.
+ Fly, a Hai Hayeh.
+ Fly, to Toobu Toobeeoong.
+ Friend Ftoobai Eedooshee.
+ Foot Assi Shanna.
+ Firewood Takigi Tamoong.
+ Full Mits Meetchetee.
+ Girl Komusime Tackkee.
+ Girdle Skimmawas sansakagi Obee.
+ Give, to Fureru, jaru Queeoong.
+ Go down to Ururu, iru Ooritteo coo.
+ Go up to Aguru Noobooyoong.
+ Goat, he Jagi Woo feeja.
+ Gold Sin Ching.
+ Good Jukka Choorasa.
+ Good man Jukka fito Yookachoo.
+ Good for nothing Jonaka Maconarang.
+ Hair Kami Kurrazzee.
+ Hammer Kanatsutji Gooshung.
+ Hand Tee Kee.
+ Handkerchief Te no goi Teesadgee.
+ Hat Kasa Kassa.
+ Head Kubi Boosee.
+ Head-ache Attamanna, itama, Seebooroo yadong.
+ dutso
+ Heart Kokurro, sing Nacoo.
+ singnoso
+ Hear, to Kikf Sitchoong, or skitchoong.
+ Heavens Ten Ting.
+ Heavy Omoka, omotaka Boosa.
+ Hen, a Mendori, metori Meetooee.
+ Hide, to Kaksu Meerang.
+ Hip Momo Gammacoo.
+ Hole, or cavity Anna Anna.
+ Horn Tsunno, kaku Stinnoo.
+ Horse Aki uma Ma.
+ Hot Atska Atteesa.
+ House Je Ya, or katchee.
+ Ink Sum, sumi Simmee.
+ Inkstand Susumi hake Simmee shee.
+ Iron Tets, furoganni Titzee.
+ Key Kagi Quaw.
+ Kill, to Korossu Sheenoung, or
+ Koorashoong.
+ Kiss Umakutji, or Sheemirree.
+ Kwutjisu
+ Kiss, to Umakutji suru Coochee spootee.
+ Knife Haka Seego.
+ Knee Fisa, fisa no sarra Stinsee.
+ Kneel, to Fisatatsuru Shumma gitcheeoong.
+ Knot, a Fimmo Coonja cootchee.
+ Laugh, to Warau Worrayoong.
+ Learning, or studying Narau, Kicku Cootooba.
+ Letter, or character Moisi, tsi mousi Jee.
+ Lift to, a thing Motjiagaru Moochoong.
+ Light to, a pipe Fitobusu, fitomusu Sheeoong.
+ Lip Tsuba Seeba.
+ Liquor Sakki Sackkeedia, or
+ Samtchoo (Chinese).
+ Look to, or see Miru Meeoong, or meeing.
+ Looking-glass Kagami Kagung.
+ Long, or length Nagai Nagása.
+ Lose, to Song suru, makuru Ootoochung.
+ Live, to Inotji Simmatong.
+ Lacker, to Makie saru Nooyoong.
+ Man (homo) Momo Choo.
+ Man (vir) Otoko Ickkeega.
+ Mast Hobasi Hasseeda.
+ Mat Tattami Mooshooroo, or Hatung.
+ Match (fire-stick) Skedakki, skegi Kaw.
+ Measure, to Siakf, monosasa Gaujee hackkiyoong.
+ Mew, to (like a cat) Neko, naku Nachoong deeoong.
+ Milk Tji tji tji Chee.
+ Monkey Saru, salu Saroo.
+ Moon Tsuki Stchay.
+ ----, full Mangets Oostitchee, or maroo.
+ Mother Fasa kasa Umma.
+ Mud Noro Dooroo.
+ Nail, finger Tsume, jassuru Thimmee.
+ Naked Hadaka Harraka.
+ Name Na Na.
+ Navel Fosso, feso Whoosoo.
+ Neck Kwabi, nodor Coobee.
+ Needle Fari Hayee skittee.
+ Night Josari, joru Yooroo.
+ Nipples Tjibusa Chee.
+ Nod, to Gatting suru Najeechoong.
+ North Kitta Cheeta.
+ Nose Fanna Honna.
+ Nostrils Fanna nosu Honnakee.
+ Offer, to Okuru, agurujasiagu- Ozagadee.
+ ru, nedoaskuru
+ Old Tassijori, furuje Teeshooee.
+ furuke
+ Open, to Akuru Akeeoong.
+ Overturn, to Tawaruru Kooroobashoong.
+ Paper Kami Kabee.
+ Pencil Fuda Hoodee.
+ Physician Isa Ishsha.
+ Pinch, to Nesumu Katcheemeeoong.
+ Pipe (tobacco) Kiseru Shirree.
+ Play to, with dice Sugoroko utsu Sheegoroocoo ochoong.
+ Plough Seri, seribetta, Sitchee.
+ tsuku tauts
+ Plough, to Togajassu Sitchoong.
+ Pour in, to Tsugu Irreeing.
+ Powder (gun) Jenso Eenshoo.
+ Pregnant Mimotji, farami Kassee jeetaung.
+ Press, to Siburu Sheetskeeoong.
+ Priest Boos Bodzee.
+ Push, to Sukikakaru Kooroobashoong.
+ Quarrel, to Ijou Titskoong.
+ Quick Faijo, faijaki Hayee.
+ Rain Ame Amee.
+ Rain, to Ame no fiuru Amee fooyoong.
+ Rainbow Nisi Noo, oojee.
+ Rat Nisumi Ack a-sa.
+ Read, to Jomu Yoomoong.
+ Rice Kome Coomee.
+ Rice, boiled Mes Umbang.
+ Ride, to, a horse Noru Manayoong.
+ Ring (finger) Ibiganni Eebee gannee.
+ Root Ne Wee-ee.
+ Rope Tsuna no na Chinna.
+ Round Mami Marroosa.
+ Row, to, in a boat Roosu Coojee.
+ Run, to Ajiubu Hayay sitchoong.
+ Sail Hoo Foo.
+ Salt Siwo Mashoo.
+ Salt water Siwo mis usiwo Spookarasa meezee.
+ Salute, to Resuru Kameeoong.
+ Sand Tsunna Sinna.
+ Scrape, to Kusagu Sajoong.
+ Screw Nesi Jirree.
+ Sea Ume Ooshoo.
+ Seal Fang hang ingjo Ing, or fang.
+ See, to Miru Meeoong.
+ Seed Tanna Ni.
+ Separate, to Saru Wockkayoong.
+ Serpent Kutjinawa hebi Haboo.
+ Sew, to No, noi Nawyoong, or noayoong.
+ Shallow Assai assaka Assassa.
+ Shave, to Soru Sooyoong.
+ Shell Kai Oosheemaw.
+ Ship Fune Hoonee.
+ Shoe Kwutsu Sabock.
+ Shoulders Kata Kutta.
+ Sick Itami mono, bioki Yadong.
+ mono, jamai mono
+ Silk Kinno Eechoo.
+ Silver Gin Jing.
+ Sing, to Utau Ootashoong, or ootayoong.
+ Sister (eldest) Musme are Oui.
+ Sleep Nur Nintee.
+ Sleep, to Nuru Ninjoong.
+ Slow Sisukamai, jojajora Yoona, yawna.
+ Small Ko, komaka Coosa.
+ Smell Nivi, niwoi Kabbasha.
+ Smell, to Kusamu Kannoung, kashashoong.
+ Smoke Honoo Kinsee.
+ Smoke, to Kemoli Footchoong.
+ Smoke tobacco, to Tabaco, nomu Tobacco, footchoong.
+ Sneeze, to Aksingu Honna feeoong.
+ Snore, to Ibikikaku Nintoong.
+ Snuff Fanna, tabak, kagi Spachee, honna, tob*
+ Sour Suika Seesa.
+ South Minami Whfa, or fa.
+ Speak, to Monoju, musmasu, Moonooyoong.
+ ju, moosuru
+ Spectacles Meganni, fanna, Meekagung.
+ meganni
+ Spider Kwumo Cooba.
+ Spittle Subakki Simpaee.
+ Spit, to Subakki, hawk Simpayoong.
+ Spoon Saisi Kaa.
+ Square Sikaku Kackkoo.
+ Stand up, to Okiru Tatteeoong.
+ Stars Fosi Fooshee.
+ Stone Isi iwa Ishee.
+ Strike, to Wutsu, utsu, tataku Rejeecoong.
+ Sugar Satto Sata.
+ Sun Fi, nitji Teeda.
+ Sunset Fi no iri Teeda sagayoong.
+ Sunrise Fino, de, fino, Teeda agayoong.
+ agaru
+ Swallow, to Nomikomu Noonootoosha.
+ Sweet Amaka, amai Amasa.
+ Swim, to Ojugu Weejoong.
+ Thigh Momo, solomomo Moomoo.
+ Thread Ito Eechoo.
+ Throw, to Naguru Naging.
+ Thumb Ojajubi, ojubi Hooee eebee.
+ Tiger Tora Toora.
+ Tin Susu Sheedookannee.
+ Tongue Sta, sita Stcha.
+ Tooth Jea Ha.
+ Touch, to Kamau, kakaru, Sayoong, or Sitchoong.
+ ateru
+ Tower To Eegooscoo.
+ Town Matji, sotomatji Mecatto, metto.
+ Tremble Fururu Koorooyoong.
+ Ugly Kisannai Ootooroosa.
+ Umbrella Fisasi Shassee kassa.
+ Vein Susi Kajee.
+ Wake, to Okiteoru Ooking.
+ Waken, to Okusu Oocatee.
+ Walk, to Ita Atchoong.
+ Warm Nakka, atska Attesa.
+ Wash Arau Arayoong.
+ Watch Tokei Karahigh.
+ Water Mis Meezee.
+ Water tub Furo Meezofwokee.
+ Weather, fine Jukka, fiuri, jui Yeetinchee, or tinsee.
+ teng
+ Weather, foul Warri fiuri Yannatinchee, or tinsee.
+ Well, a Jgawa Meezee ka.
+ West Nis Neeshee.
+ Wet Naroru Inneetee.
+ Wet, to Narassu Indeetaoong.
+ Wheel Kuruma Coorooma.
+ Wick of a candle Suku, saku Skee cootshee.
+ Wind Kase Kassee.
+ Wind up, to Sutsumu Feenoyoong.
+ Wing Toobu fanne Hannay.
+ Wink, to Manaku Meeoochee.
+ Wood Tagi Tamoong.
+ Write Kaku Katchoong.
+ Writing desk Fikidassi Sheekoo.
+ Year Fosi Ning.
+ Young Wakai Wockka.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 129: From Thunberg's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+NUMERALS.
+
+ _Japan_. _Insu[130]._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ 1 Stozee Sheeneap Stitz Itchee Teetsee, tee.
+ 2 Statze Too Statz Nee Tatsee, ta.
+ 3 Mitzee Liep Mitz Sang Meetsee, mee.
+ 4 Yeatze Eenep Yeatze Shee Eotsee, yoo.
+ 5 Idotzee Asheak Itseitzy Goo Ittitsee.
+ 6 Nitzee Ewan Nitz Roocoo Mootsee.
+ 7 Nanatzee Arrawan Nanatzy Stehee Nannatsee.
+ 8 Iosee Toopish Yeatz Fatchee Eyatsee.
+ 9 Kikonitz Lepish Kokonitz Coo Koonnitsee.
+ 10 Yoo Wanna Too Joo Too.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 130: From Broughton's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE LANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO AND INSU. AN ISLAND IN THE
+JAPAN SEA.
+
+ _English._ _Insu[131]._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ Come here Arkee Cung coo.
+ To walk Appeass Atchoong.
+ To enquire the name of Tambene Noondeega.
+ any thing
+ A ship Penzy, or Foonil. Hoonee.
+ A bow Koo Yoomee.
+ An arrow Ay Eea.
+ The beard Creak Feejee.
+ The teeth Meemack Ha.
+ A man Oikyo Ickkeega.
+ A woman Meanako Innago.
+ Fish net Ya Sheebee.
+ Tobacco pipe Tsheeree Shirree.
+ Water Wakha Meezee.
+ To drink Horopsee Noomoong.
+ A book Shoomootza Sheemootsee.
+ The finger Yewbee Eebee.
+ The thumb O yewbee Hoee eebee.
+ The thigh Momo Moomoo.
+ The arm Oondee Teenoo.
+ The middle finger Nagayewbee Nackkaeebee.
+ Paper Kame Kabee.
+ A dog Enoo Ing.
+ A cat Necko Mia.
+ A child Vasasso Warrabee.
+ The foot Assee Shanna.
+ The chin Olongyse Ootooga.
+ The ear Meemee Mimmee.
+ Yes O Oo.
+ No Ny Oongba.
+ Hair Kamu Kurrazzee.
+ A boat Timma Timma.
+ Tea Tcha Cha.
+ Sugar Sado Sata.
+ Tobacco Tabacco Tobacco.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 131: From Broughton's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE LANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO, JAPAN, AND INSU.
+
+
+ _English._ _Japanese[132]._ _Loo-Choo._ _Insu[133]._
+
+ To walk Ita Atchoong Appeass.
+ A ship Fune Hoonee Penzy, or foonil.
+ A bow Jumi Yoomee Koo.
+ An arrow Ja Eea Ay.
+ The finger Jubi Eebee Askippi, yewbee.
+ The teeth Ha Ha Meemack.
+ A man Otoko Ickkeega Oikyo.
+ A fish net Ami Sheebee Ya.
+ A knife Haka Seego Magiddee.
+ An oar Ro Wayacoo Kanzee.
+ Water Mis Meezee Wakha.
+ To drink Nomu Noomoong Horopsee.
+ A book Somots Sheemootsee Shomotza.
+ The thumb Ojajubi, ojubi Hooee eebee O yewbee.
+ The thigh Momo, soto momo Moomoo Momo.
+ The arm Ude Teenoo Oondee.
+ Paper Kami Kabee Kame.
+ A dog Inu Ing Enoo.
+ A cat Mio, neko Mia Necko.
+ A child Kodoma Warrabee Vassasso.
+ The lips Tsuba Seeba Koodge.
+ The foot Assi Shanna Assee.
+ The ear Mimi Mimmee Meemee.
+ The hair Kami Kurrazzee Karnu.
+ A boat Temma Timma Timma.
+ Tea Tsjaa Cha Tcha.
+ Sugar Satto Sata Sado.
+ Tobacco Tabako Tobacco Tabacco.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 132: From Thunberg's Voyage.]
+
+[Footnote 133: From Broughton's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+WORDS OBTAINED FROM THE INHABITANTS OF THE WEST COAST OF COREA.
+
+
+ _English._ _Corean._
+
+ No Poodong.
+ Water Bool.
+ A pipe Dewton.
+ Hair Bodee.
+ Eyes Doon.
+ Mouth Jeep.
+ Nose Ko.
+ Hand So-an.
+ Beard Shee-om.
+ Tongue Chay.
+ Ear Quee.
+ Teeth Jee.
+ Tree[134] Phang na moo.
+ Grass[134] Phee.
+ Good[134] Hota.
+ Earth[134] K,hool.
+ Knife[134] Khul.
+ Jacket Chouksa.
+ Trowsers Choongay.
+ Shoe Po schien.
+ Stockings, or boots Hung inn.
+ Tobacco pouch Samb-jee.
+ Rice (food) Pa-ap.
+ Fan Pootsa.
+ Stove Tok.
+ White hat Pan-a-ee.
+ Black hat Kat.
+ A cock Tac.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 134: These five words have the _h_ so strongly aspirated that
+it was rarely we could pronounce them to the satisfaction of the
+natives.
+
+Their language, upon the whole, is not unpleasing, and it has none of
+the harsh Chinese sounds. The natives have a remarkable facility in
+imitating our sounds, and they in general speak in a very loud tone of
+voice.]
+
+
+THE END.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+T. DAVISON, Lombard-street, Whitefriars, London.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Account of a Voyage of Discovery, by
+Captain Basil Hall
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 29051-8.txt or 29051-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/2/9/0/5/29051/
+
+Produced by Jane Hyland and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/29051-8.zip b/29051-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a5c8de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/29051-8.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/29051.txt b/29051.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7193ba3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/29051.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13663 @@
+Project Gutenberg's Account of a Voyage of Discovery, by Captain Basil Hall
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Account of a Voyage of Discovery
+ to the West Coast of Corea, and the Great Loo-Choo Island
+
+Author: Captain Basil Hall
+
+Release Date: June 6, 2009 [EBook #29051]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jane Hyland and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: SULPHUR ISLAND.
+
+_Published Jany. 1. 1818. by John Murray, Albemarle Street, London._]
+
+
+
+
+ACCOUNT
+
+OF
+
+A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY
+
+TO THE
+
+WEST COAST OF COREA,
+
+AND
+
+THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND;
+
+WITH
+
+AN APPENDIX,
+
+CONTAINING
+
+CHARTS, AND VARIOUS HYDROGRAPHICAL AND SCIENTIFIC NOTICES.
+
+
+BY CAPTAIN BASIL HALL,
+
+ROYAL NAVY, F.R.S. LOND. & EDIN.
+MEMBER OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF CALCUTTA, OF THE LITERARY SOCIETY OF
+BOMBAY, AND OF THE SOCIETY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES AT BATAVIA.
+
+
+AND
+
+A VOCABULARY OF THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE,
+
+BY H.J. CLIFFORD, ESQ.
+
+LIEUTENANT ROYAL NAVY.
+
+
+LONDON
+JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE-STREET.
+1818.
+
+
+
+
+TO
+CAPTAIN MURRAY MAXWELL,
+Knight Companion to the Bath,
+TO WHOSE
+ABILITY IN CONDUCTING THIS VOYAGE,
+ZEAL IN GIVING ENCOURAGEMENT TO EVERY INQUIRY,
+SAGACITY IN DISCOVERING THE DISPOSITION OF THE NATIVES,
+AND ADDRESS IN GAINING THEIR CONFIDENCE AND GOOD WILL,
+IS TO BE ATTRIBUTED
+WHATEVER MAY BE FOUND INTERESTING OR USEFUL
+IN THE FOLLOWING PAGES,
+THIS WORK
+IS MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED,
+BY
+THE AUTHORS.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+The following work contains a Narrative of the Voyage to the West Coast
+of Corea, and the Great Loo-choo Island; an Appendix, containing
+Nautical details; and a Vocabulary of the Language spoken at Loo-choo.
+
+In drawing up the Narrative from journals written at the time, I have
+derived great assistance from notes made by Lieutenant H.J. Clifford, of
+the Navy. This officer obtained permission from the Admiralty to
+accompany me, though on half pay, and having no specific duty to
+perform, he was enabled to devote himself entirely to the acquisition of
+knowledge; and had it in his power to record many interesting
+occurrences of the voyage, which the numerous duties of my station left
+me but little leisure to observe or describe.
+
+All the Charts, Tables, and Nautical Notices have been placed in an
+Appendix, in order to avoid the interruption which such details are apt
+to occasion when inserted in a journal; and the Nautical reader will
+perhaps consider it advantageous, to have this part of the subject set
+apart, and condensed, instead of being scattered over the pages of the
+narrative.
+
+I am indebted to Mr. Clifford for very important assistance in
+collecting and arranging the materials which form this Appendix.
+
+The northern part of the Chart of the Yellow Sea, given in the Appendix,
+was taken from a Chart by Captain Daniel Ross, of the Bombay marine, the
+scientific and able surveyor commanding the squadron which the
+Honourable East India Company, in the spirit of a liberal and enlarged
+policy, have employed for upwards of nine years, in surveying the China
+Seas.
+
+The Vocabulary is exclusively compiled by Mr. Clifford, who took the
+greatest pains to collect words and sentences in common use; and though,
+from the shortness of our stay, this part of the work is necessarily
+incomplete, it is hoped that a future voyager will derive considerable
+assistance from it, in his intercourse with the natives.
+
+The drawings of scenery and costume were made by Mr. William Havell, the
+eminent artist who accompanied the Embassy, from sketches taken on the
+spot, by Mr. C.W. Browne, midshipman of the Alceste, and myself.
+
+Nothing respecting the west side of Corea has hitherto been accurately
+known to Europeans. The coast laid down in most Charts has been taken
+from the celebrated map of the Jesuits, which is very correct in what
+relates to China, but erroneous with respect to Corea. The Jesuits,
+indeed, did not survey this country, but have inserted it in their map,
+I believe, from Japanese authorities.
+
+Captain Broughton in his voyage to the North Pacific Ocean visited the
+South Coast of Corea, and his account of the inhabitants agrees with
+ours in most particulars.
+
+The same distinguished voyager visited the Great Loo-choo Island in
+1797, after having been shipwrecked near Typinsan, one of its dependant
+islands. He was at Napakiang for a few days, and his account of the
+natives is highly interesting.
+
+There is an article by Pere Gaubil, a missionary, on the subject of the
+Loo-choo Islands, in the 23d vol. of the "Lettres Edifiantes et
+Curieuses." It is a translation from the official report of a Chinese
+embassador sent to Loo-choo by the Emperor Kang Hi; our opportunities,
+however, were not sufficient to enable us to judge of the accuracy of
+this curious memoir.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+ NARRATIVE.
+
+ CHAPTER I.
+
+ H.M.S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of
+ Discovery--Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea--Unsociable
+ Character of the Natives--Hutton's Island--Interesting geological
+ Structure--Anchor near the Main Land--Corean Chief's Visit--Objections
+ made to Strangers landing--Distress of the Chief--His
+ Character--Departure from Basil's Bay--Clusters of Islands--Murray's
+ Sound--Deserted Corean Village--View from the Summit of a high
+ Peak--Interview with the Coreans--Peculiarities of their
+ Character--Language--Erroneous geographical Position of this
+ Coast--Leave Corea Page 1
+
+
+ CHAPTER II.
+
+ Enter the Japan Sea--Sulphur Island--Volcano--See the Great Loo-choo
+ Island--Lyra nearly wrecked--First Interview with the Natives--Anchor
+ at Napakiang--Natives crowd on Board--Their interesting Appearance
+ and Manners--Several Chiefs visit the Alceste--Land to make
+ Observations--Astonishment of the Natives--Six Chiefs visit the
+ Ships--Alceste and Lyra proceed farther in Shore--A Chief of high Rank
+ waits upon Captain Maxwell--Return his Visit--Feast--Projected Survey
+ of the Anchorage--Visit Reef Island--The Lyra sent to look for another
+ Harbour--Arrangements for landing the Alceste's Stores--Description of
+ the Temple and Garden--First Acquaintance with Madera--Study of the
+ Language 58
+
+
+ CHAPTER III.
+
+ The Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo--Discovery of Port
+ Melville--Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its
+ Banks--Lyra nearly wrecked--Interview with Natives at the South
+ Point--Return to Napakiang--Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's
+ Funeral--Madera's Character and Conduct--Sociable Habits of the
+ Natives--Dinner given to the Chiefs of the Island by Captain
+ Maxwell--Madera's Behaviour on this Occasion--Two Women seen--A Lady
+ of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife--Captain Maxwell fractures his
+ Finger--Loo-choo Surgeon--Concern of the Natives--Visit of the
+ Prince--Discussion about the King of Loo-choo's Letter--Madera appears
+ in a new Character--Feast given by the Prince--List of Supplies given
+ to the Ships--Behaviour of the Prince on taking Leave--Preparations
+ for Departure--Madera's Distress--Last Interview with the
+ Chiefs--Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and Customs of
+ Loo-choo--Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island 135
+
+
+ APPENDIX.
+
+ Notice explanatory of a Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-lee v
+
+ Notice to accompany the Chart of the West Coast of Corea x
+
+ Notice to accompany the general Chart of the Great Loo-choo Island
+ in the Japan Sea, and the Charts of Napakiang Roads and Port
+ Melville xvii
+
+ Observations made at the Observatory at Napakiang xxix
+
+ Table of Observations made with Dr. Wollaston's Dip Sector: with
+ an Engraving, and a Description of this Instrument, and
+ Directions for its Use xxxi
+
+ Meteorological Journal, from July to November 1816, while the
+ Ships were in the Yellow and Japan Seas li
+
+ Abstract of the Lyra's Voyage, from leaving England till her
+ Return; shewing the Distance between the different Places at
+ which she touched, and the Time taken in performing each Passage cix
+
+ Geological Memorandum; being a Description of the Specimens of
+ Rocks collected at Macao and the Ladrone Islands, on the Shores
+ of the Yellow Sea, the West Coast of Corea, and the Great Loo-choo
+ Island cxix
+
+
+ VOCABULARY.
+
+ PART I.--English and Loo-choo words.
+
+ PART II.--Sentences in English and Loo-choo, with a literal Translation.
+
+ Loo-choo and Japanese Numerals--Names of Persons at Napakiang--Names of
+ Places--Days of the Moon--Orders of Rank--Tattoo Marks--Hours of the
+ Day.
+
+ Comparison between the Japanese and Loo-choo Languages.
+
+ Comparison between the Loo-choo and Insu Languages.
+
+ Comparison between the Loo-choo, Japanese, and Insu Languages.
+
+ Corean Words.
+
+
+
+
+ DIRECTIONS FOR PLACING THE PLATES.
+
+
+ Sulphur Island, to face the Title Page.
+ Corean Chief and Secretary To face Page 16
+ Napakiang 77
+ Loo-choo Chief and his two Sons 97
+ Priest and Gentleman of Loo-choo 132
+ The Prince of Loo-choo 176
+ Scene after the Prince's Feast 196
+ Gentleman of Loo-choo in his Cloak 215
+ Bridge of Napakiang 222
+
+
+ APPENDIX.
+
+ Chart of the Gulf of Pe-chee-lee v
+ Coast of Corea x
+ Chart of the Great Loo-choo Island xix
+ Napakiang Roads xxi
+ Port Melville xxiv
+ Wollaston's Dip Sector xxxiii
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+[Transcriber's note: The following errors have been corrected in the text.]
+
+ERRATA.
+
+Page 1, line 2 from bottom, for _11th August_, read _9th August_.
+
+Page 60, top line, for _was_, read _saw_.
+
+
+APPENDIX.
+
+Meteorological Journal.--Longitude on the 1st Sept. for 124.20,
+read 124.48.
+
+The longitudes in the Met. Journ. from the 3d to the 7th of Sept. inclusive
+are too small by 15'.
+
+
+VOCABULARY.
+
+ For _Tatesee_, read _Tatsee_.
+ For _Teetesee_, read _Teetsee_.
+ For _Meetesee_, read _Meetsee_.
+ For _Eeotesee_, read _Eeotsee_.
+ For _Eeyatesee_, read _Eeyatsee_.
+ For _opposite_, read _under_, in the note on the word Hour.
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: a letter with a macron above it is denoted by [=x].]
+
+
+VOYAGE TO THE WEST COAST OF COREA AND THE LOO-CHOO ISLANDS.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+ H.M.S. Alceste and Lyra leave the Yellow Sea on a Voyage of
+ Discovery--Sir James Hall's Group on the Coast of Corea--Unsociable
+ Character of the Natives--Hutton's Island--Interesting geological
+ Structure--Anchor near the Main Land--Corean Chiefs
+ Visit--Objections made to Strangers landing--Distress of the
+ Chief--His Character--Departure from Basil's Bay--Clusters of
+ Islands--Murray's Sound--Deserted Corean Village--View from the
+ Summit of a high Peak--Interview with the Coreans--Peculiarities of
+ their Character--Language--Erroneous geographical Position of this
+ Coast--Leave Corea.
+
+
+The embassy to China, under the Right Honourable Lord Amherst, left
+England in his Majesty's frigate Alceste, Captain Murray Maxwell, C.B.,
+on the 9th of February, 1816, and landed near the mouth of the Pei-ho
+river, in the Yellow Sea, on the 9th of August. Shortly afterwards the
+Alceste and Lyra sloop of war, which had accompanied the embassy,
+proceeded to the coast of Corea, the eastern boundary of the Yellow Sea;
+for as these ships were not required in China before the return of the
+Embassador by land to Canton, it was determined to devote the interval
+to an examination of some places in those seas, of which little or no
+precise information then existed. The following pages give the details
+of this voyage.
+
+1st of September.--This morning at daylight the land of Corea was seen
+in the eastern quarter. Having stood towards it, we were at nine o'clock
+near three high islands, differing in appearance from the country we had
+left, being wooded to the top, and cultivated in the lower parts, but
+not in horizontal terraces as at the places we had last visited in
+China. We proceeded to the southward of the group, and anchored in a
+fine bay at the distance of two or three miles from the southern island.
+Shortly after anchoring, a boat came from the shore with five or six
+natives, who stopped, when within fifty yards of the brig, and looking
+at us with an air of curiosity and distrust, paid no attention to the
+signs which were made to induce them to come alongside. They expressed
+no alarm when we went to them in our boat; and on our rowing towards the
+shore, followed us till we landed near a village. The inhabitants came
+in a body to meet us, forming an odd assemblage, different in many
+respects from any thing we had seen; their colour was a deep copper, and
+their appearance forbidding, and somewhat savage. Some men, who appeared
+to be superior to the rest, were distinguished by a hat, the brim of
+which was nearly three feet in diameter, and the crown, which was about
+nine inches high, and scarcely large enough to admit the top of the
+head, was shaped like a sugar-loaf with the end cut off. The texture of
+this strange hat is of a fine open work like the dragon-fly's wing; it
+appears to be made of horse-hair varnished over, and is fastened under
+the chin by a band strung with large beads, mostly black and white, but
+occasionally red or yellow. Some of the elderly men wore stiff gauze
+caps over their hair, which was formed into a high conical knot on the
+top of the head. Their dress consisted of loose wide trowsers, and a
+sort of frock reaching nearly to the knee, made of a coarse open grass
+cloth, and on their feet neat straw sandals. They were of the middle
+size, remarkably well made, and robust looking. At first they expressed
+some surprise on examining our clothes, but afterwards took very little
+interest in any thing belonging to us. Their chief anxiety was to get
+rid of us as soon as possible. This they expressed in a manner too
+obvious to be mistaken; for, on our wishing to enter the village, they
+first made motions for us to go the other way; and when we persevered,
+they took us rudely by the arms and pushed us off. Being very desirous
+to conciliate them, we shewed no impatience at this treatment; but our
+forbearance had no effect; and after a number of vain attempts to make
+ourselves understood, we went away not much pleased at their behaviour.
+A Chinese[1], who accompanied us, was of no use, for he could not read
+what the Coreans wrote for him, though in the Chinese character; and of
+their spoken language he did not understand a word.
+
+On leaving these unsociable villagers, we went to the top of the highest
+peak on the island, the ascent being easy by a winding foot-path. From
+this elevation we saw a number of islands to the eastward, and the main
+land at a great distance beyond them. The top of the hill being covered
+with soft grass and sweet-smelling shrubs, and the air, which had been
+of a suffocating heat below, being here cool and refreshing, we were
+tempted to sit down to our pic-nic dinner. We returned by the other side
+of the hill; but there being no path, and the surface rocky and steep,
+and covered with a thick brushwood, we were not a little scratched and
+bruised before we reached a road which runs along the north face of the
+hill about midway. By following this, we came to a spot from whence we
+were enabled to look down upon the village, without being ourselves
+perceived by the natives. The women, who had deserted the village on
+our landing, had now returned; most of them were beating rice in wooden
+mortars, and they had all children tied on their backs. On a sudden they
+quitted their work and ran off to their huts, like rabbits in a warren;
+and in a few minutes we saw one of the ship's boats row round the point
+of land adjacent to the village, which explained the cause of their
+alarm. After remaining for some time in expectation of seeing the women
+again, we came down to the village, which the natives now permitted us
+to pass through. On this occasion one of the gentlemen of our party saw,
+for an instant, a woman at no great distance, whose feet he declared
+were of the natural size, and not cramped as in China. The village
+consists of forty houses rudely constructed of reeds plaistered with
+mud, the roofs are of all shapes, and badly thatched with reeds and
+straw, tied down by straw ropes. These huts are not disposed in streets,
+but are scattered about without order, and without any neatness, or
+cleanliness, and the spaces between them are occupied by piles of dirt
+and pools of muddy water. The valley in which this comfortless village
+is situated is, however, pretty enough, though not wooded; the hills
+forming it are of an irregular shape, and covered at top with grass and
+sweet-scented flowers; the lower parts are cultivated with millet,
+buckwheat, a kind of French bean, and tobacco, which last grows in great
+quantity; and here and there is a young oak-tree.
+
+We saw bullocks and poultry, but the natives would not exchange them
+for our money, or for any thing we had to offer. They refused dollars
+when offered as a present, and, indeed, appeared to set no value upon
+any thing we shewed them, except wine glasses; but even these they were
+unwilling to receive. One of the head men appeared particularly pleased
+with a glass, which, after a good deal of persuasion, he accepted, but,
+in about five minutes after, he, and another man to whom a tumbler had
+been given, came back and insisted upon returning the presents; and
+then, without waiting for further persuasion, returned to the village,
+leaving with us only one man, who, as soon as all the rest were out of
+sight, accepted one of the glasses with much eagerness.
+
+These people have a proud sort of carriage, with an air of composure and
+indifference about them, and an absence of curiosity which struck us as
+being very remarkable. Sometimes when we succeeded, by dint of signs and
+drawings, in expressing the nature of a question, they treated it with
+derision and insolence. On one occasion, being anxious to buy a clumsy
+sort of rake made of reeds, which appeared to me curious, I succeeded in
+explaining my wish to the owner, one of the lowest class of villagers;
+he laughed at first good humouredly, but immediately afterwards seized
+the rake which was in my hand, and gave it a rude push towards me with a
+disdainful fling of the arm, accompanying this gesticulation by words,
+which seemed to imply a desire to give any thing upon condition of our
+going away. One man expressed the general wish for our departure, by
+holding up a piece of paper like a sail, and then blowing upon it in the
+direction of the wind, at the same time pointing to the ships, thereby
+denoting that the wind was fair, and that we had only to set sail and
+leave the island. Several of the people were marked with the small-pox.
+The children kept out of our reach at first, but before we went away,
+their fears had, in some degree, subsided, for the boys, who, from their
+feminine appearance, were mistaken at first for girls, accompanied us to
+some distance from the village.
+
+Captain Maxwell named these islands Sir James Hall's group, in
+compliment to the President of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. They lie
+in longitude 124º 46' E. and latitude 37º 50' N.
+
+At eight o'clock in the evening we weighed and stood to the southward,
+but as the coast was quite unknown, we kept rather off shore during the
+night, and in the morning no land was in sight. On the 2d we stood to
+the eastward, but not having daylight enough to get in with the coast,
+it became necessary to anchor for the night, though in deep water.
+
+3d of September.--Having reached nearly lat. 36-1/3 N. and long. 126 E.
+we sailed this morning amongst a range of islands extending as far as
+the eye could reach, both to the southward and northward, at the
+distance of six or seven leagues from the main land. By two o'clock we
+were close to the outer cluster of the islands, and the passages
+appearing clear between them, we sailed through and anchored inside.
+While passing one of these islands in the ships, at no great distance,
+it looked so curiously formed, that, on anchoring, we went in the boats
+to examine its structure more minutely[2]. While we were thus engaged,
+the natives had assembled in a crowd on the edge of the cliff above us;
+they did not seem pleased with our occupation of breaking their rocks,
+for, from the moment we landed, they never ceased to indicate by shouts,
+screams, and all kinds of gesticulations, that the sooner we quitted the
+island the better; the cliff being 200 feet high, and nearly
+perpendicular, it was fortunate for us that they confined themselves to
+signs and clamour, and did not think of enforcing their wishes by a
+shower of stones.
+
+As soon as we had completed our investigation of this spot, we went
+round in the boats to a small bay where there was good landing. Here we
+were met by the natives, who addressed several long speeches to us in a
+very loud tone of voice; to which we replied in English, that our wish
+was merely to look at the island, without interfering with any body; at
+the same time we proceeded up a foot-path to the brow of a hill. This
+the natives did not seem at all to relish, and they made use of a sign
+which was sufficiently expressive of their anxiety, though we could not
+determine exactly to whom it referred. They drew their fans across their
+own throats, and sometimes across ours, as if to signify that our going
+on would lead to heads being cut off; but whether they or we were to be
+the sufferers was not apparent. It was suggested by one of our party
+that they dreaded being called to account by their own chiefs for
+permitting us to land. All these signs, however, did not prevent our
+advancing till we had reached the brow of the hill to which the path
+led; from this place we had a view of a village at the distance of half
+a mile, of a much better appearance than that above described. Trees
+were interspersed among the houses, which were pleasantly situated at
+the bottom of a little cove, with fishing-boats at anchor near it. We
+explained readily enough that our wish was to go to the village, but it
+was all in vain, for their anxiety increased every moment, and we
+desisted from any further attempts to advance.
+
+The dress of these people is a loose white robe, cloth shoes, and a few
+wear the broad hats before described; by most the hair is tied in a high
+conical knot on the top of the head, but by others it is allowed to fly
+loose, so as to give them a wild appearance. Some confine the short hair
+by a small gauze band with a star on one side, forming, along with the
+top knot, rather a becoming head-dress. Their beards and whiskers which,
+apparently, had never been cut, and their fans and long tobacco-pipes,
+and their strange language and manners, gave a grotesque air to the
+whole group, which it is impossible to describe. They crowded about us,
+and, by repeated shouts, manifested their surprise at the form and
+texture of our clothes; but on a watch being shewn, they disregarded
+every thing else, and entreated to be allowed to examine it closely. It
+was evidently the first they had seen, and some of them while watching
+the second-hand, looked as if they thought it alive. From the watch they
+proceeded to examine the seals and keys; with the former they shewed
+themselves acquainted by pressing them on their hands, so as to cause an
+impression. Their attention was drawn away from the watch by our firing
+a musket, which made the whole party fall back several paces.
+
+After amusing ourselves in this manner for some time, we walked back to
+the boats, to the great joy of the natives, who encouraged us by all
+means to hasten our departure. They took our hands and helped us over
+the slippery stones on the beach; and, on perceiving one of the boats
+aground, several of them stript and jumped into the water to push her
+off. This gave us an opportunity of observing their remarkable symmetry
+and firmness of limb; yet, as their long hair was allowed to flow about
+their neck and shoulders, their appearance was truly savage. During this
+visit we saw no women; but the children came round us without shewing
+any symptoms of fear. The people, upon the whole, are more free, and not
+so surly as our acquaintance on Sir James Hall's group. They have a
+singular custom of speaking with a loud tone, amounting almost to a
+shout. Captain Maxwell named this island after Dr. Hutton the geologist.
+
+4th of September.--During all last night it remained perfectly calm. At
+nine o'clock in the morning we got under weigh with a fine sea breeze,
+and stood in for the land, leaving on either hand many well cultivated
+islands. The main land seems to be populous, from the number of large
+villages which we passed, and the cultivation which extends a
+considerable way up the mountains. Our object this morning was to
+discover some safe anchoring place in the main land, but we were obliged
+to coast along for a considerable distance before any opening appeared.
+About three o'clock we sailed round a point of land and discovered a
+bay, which, at first sight, promised shelter, but the water proved too
+shallow even for the Lyra, and we anchored far out in five fathoms. The
+natives who had assembled in crowds on the point shouted to us as we
+passed, in seeming anger at our approaching so near. This bay is about
+four miles in diameter, and is skirted by large villages built amongst
+trees, and surrounded by cultivated districts, forming altogether a
+scene of considerable beauty.
+
+As soon as the Alceste had anchored, Captain Maxwell, Mr. Clifford, and
+I, went towards the nearest village in the bay. On approaching the shore
+we observed a great bustle among the inhabitants on the shore, as well
+as in the boats at anchor off the village. The people on the beach
+hastily jumped into canoes, whilst those in the large boats weighed the
+anchors, and pulled out with such expedition, as to meet us in a body
+before we were near the landing-place. Every boat was crowded with
+people, and ornamented with numerous flags and streamers; but one of
+them being distinguished by a large blue umbrella, we steered towards
+it, on the supposition that this was an emblem of rank; in which opinion
+we were soon confirmed by the sound of music, which played only on board
+this boat. On coming closer, we saw a fine patriarchal figure seated
+under the umbrella; his full white beard covered his breast, and reached
+below his middle; his robe or mantle, which was of blue silk, and of an
+immense size, flowed about him in a magnificent style. His sword was
+suspended from his waist by a small belt, but the insignia of his office
+appeared to be a slender black rod tipped with silver, about a foot and
+a half long, with a small leather thong at one end, and a piece of black
+crape tied to the other: this he held in his hand. His hat exceeded in
+breadth of brim any thing we had yet met with, being, as we supposed,
+nearly three feet across.
+
+As this was evidently the chief of the party, we pulled alongside and
+got into his boat, where he received us with much politeness; but as he
+looked dissatisfied at this proceeding, we returned to our own boat, and
+there carried on the conference. While we were endeavouring to make
+ourselves understood, the other boats gradually separated, and began to
+form a circle round us. Apprehending treachery, we prepared our arms,
+and pushed off to a little distance. The old gentleman, perceiving this,
+looked about very innocently to discover the cause of our alarm; and at
+length being made aware by our signs of what was the matter, he
+commanded all the boats to go to the other side. We now remained a
+considerable time without being able to make ourselves understood; for
+the Chinese whom we had with us was quite ignorant of their language. We
+endeavoured, by pointing to the shore, to signify our desire to land,
+while the old Chief, by similar signs, expressed his wish to go to the
+ships. We accordingly rowed to the Lyra, which lay nearer to the shore
+than the Alceste. When the Chief's boat was within ten yards of the
+brig, they let go their anchor, and threw a rope on board her, by which
+they drew the boat alongside in a very seaman-like style. The old man
+did not find it an easy matter to get up the ship's side, encumbered as
+he was with his splendid robes; he was no sooner on board, however, than
+we were crowded with the natives, who boarded us on all sides. Some
+climbed up the rigging, so as to overlook the quarter-deck; others got
+on the poop, and a line was formed along the hammock netting from one
+end of the brig to the other. As the evening was fine, it was thought
+best to entertain the venerable Chief upon deck, rather than give him
+the trouble of going down to the cabin, which, indeed, we had reason to
+fear would prove too small for the party. Chairs were accordingly placed
+upon the deck; but the Chief made signs that he could not sit on a
+chair, nor would he consent for a time to use his mat, which was brought
+on board by one of his attendants. He seemed embarrassed and displeased,
+which we could not at the moment account for, though it has since
+occurred to us that he objected to the publicity of the conference. At
+length, however, he sat down on his mat, and began talking with great
+gravity and composure, without appearing in the smallest degree sensible
+that we did not understand a single word that he said. We of course
+could not think of interrupting him, and allowed him to talk on at his
+leisure; but when his discourse was concluded, he paused for our reply,
+which we made with equal gravity in English; upon this he betrayed great
+impatience at his harangue having been lost upon us, and supposing that
+we could, at all events, read, he called to his secretary, and began to
+dictate a letter. The secretary sat down before him with all due
+formality, and having rubbed his cake of ink upon a stone, drawn forth
+his pen, and arranged a long roll of paper upon his knee, began the
+writing, which was at length completed, partly from the directions of
+the Chief, and partly from his own ideas, as well as the occasional
+suggestions of the bystanders. The written part was then torn off from
+the scroll and handed to the Chief, who delivered it to me with the
+utmost confidence of its being understood: but his mortification and
+disappointment were extreme on perceiving that he had overrated our
+acquirements[3].
+
+[Illustration: _Drawn by Wm. Havell, Calcutta._ _Engraved by
+Robt Havell & Son._
+
+COREAN CHIEF and his SECRETARY.
+
+_Published Jany, 1, 1818, by John Murray, Albemarle Street, London._]
+
+A debate now appeared to take place between the Chief and his followers,
+as to the mode of communicating with us; meanwhile, as we ourselves were
+equally at a loss, we became anxious to relieve the old man's
+embarrassment, by shewing him all the attention in our power, and
+completely succeeded in putting him into a good humour, by giving him
+some cherry brandy, and distributing rum to his people.
+
+While these attempts at explanation were going on, the crowd of natives
+increased, and their curiosity became so great, that they pressed round
+us in a way nowise agreeable. Some of them roved about the ship, and
+appeared highly entertained with every thing they saw. The Chief
+himself, however, did not appear at ease, but continued giving
+directions to his officers and people about him with an air of
+impatience. He more than once ordered them all into their boats, but
+they always returned after a few minutes. One man persevered in climbing
+over the hammocks, close to the Chief, to see what was going on. The
+noise made to keep him back attracted the Chief's attention, who
+immediately gave orders to one of the attendants for his being taken
+away; it will be seen by and by what was his fate.
+
+The persons forming the suite of the Chief were dressed nearly in the
+same manner as himself, excepting that their robes were white, and did
+not contain such a profusion of cloth. They wore the large hats and wide
+trowsers tied above the ancle, with cotton shoes turned up a little at
+the toe. The immediate attendants, who seemed also to be soldiers, were
+differently clothed: over a loose pink frock with wide sleeves, they
+have another which fits closer, and is without sleeves, the corners
+being tucked up, like the skirts of some military uniforms. Their hat is
+a broad flat cone made of thick grass, the under part being embossed
+with different coloured silks, and from a gilt ornament on the peak
+there hangs a tassel made of peacock's feathers, and another of hair
+dyed red: some are armed with bows and arrows, others with only a
+straight sword, having no guard for the hand. A coarse frock without
+sleeves, and trowsers, or rather drawers, covering the thigh, are worn
+by the lower orders.
+
+It was nearly dark when the Chief gave directions for preparing the
+boats, at the same time calling to two of his attendants to assist him
+to get on his legs. Each took an arm, and in this way succeeded in
+raising him up, which was no sooner observed by the people, than they
+jumped into their boats with the utmost alacrity, and the Chief, after
+many bows and salams, walked into his boat. This did not give him so
+much trouble as he had experienced on coming on board, for a platform of
+gratings and planks had been prepared for his accommodation during his
+visit, an attention with which he seemed much pleased. So far all seemed
+well; but there was still something amiss, for the old man, seated in
+state under his umbrella, remained alongside with his attendants ranged
+on the deck about him, he and his people preserving the most perfect
+silence, and making no signs to explain his wishes. We were greatly
+puzzled to discover what the old gentleman wanted, till at length it was
+suggested, that having paid us a visit, he expected a similar compliment
+in return. This idea was no sooner started, than we proceeded to pay our
+respects to him in his boat. He made signs for us to sit down, honouring
+us at the same with a corner of his own mat. When we were seated, he
+looked about as if in distress at having nothing to entertain us with,
+upon which a bottle of wine was sent for and given to him. He ordered an
+attendant to pour it into several bowls, and putting the bottle away,
+made signs for us to drink, but would not taste it himself till all of
+us had been served. He was nowise discomposed at being obliged to
+entertain his company at their own expense; on the contrary, he carried
+off the whole affair with so much cheerfulness and ease, as to make us
+suspect sometimes that he saw and enjoyed the oddity of the scene and
+circumstances, as fully as we did ourselves.
+
+After sitting about ten minutes, we left the Chief in great good humour,
+and returned on board, thinking, of course, that he would go straight to
+the shore; but in this we were much mistaken, for we had no sooner left
+him, than he pushed off to the distance of ten or twelve yards, and
+calling the other boats round him, gave orders for inflicting the
+discipline of the bamboo upon the unfortunate culprit, who had been
+ordered into confinement during the conference. This exhibition, which
+it was evidently intended we should witness, had a very ludicrous
+effect, for it followed so much in train with the rest of the ceremony,
+and was carried on with so much gravity and order, that it looked like
+an essential part of the etiquette. During the infliction of this
+punishment, a profound silence was observed by all the party, except by
+five or six persons immediately about the delinquent, whose cries they
+accompanied by a sort of song or yell at each blow of the bamboo. This
+speedy execution of justice was, no doubt, intended to impress us with
+high notions of Corean discipline.
+
+As it was now quite dark, we did not expect the Chief to pay any more
+visits this evening; but we underrated his politeness, for the moment
+the above scene was concluded, he steered for the Alceste. Captain
+Maxwell, who during all the time had been on board the Lyra, hurried
+into his boat to be prepared to give him a proper reception in his ship,
+and had just time to change his jacket for a coat and epaulettes before
+the Chief arrived. After climbing up the ship's side with some
+difficulty, and being received in due form on the quarter-deck, which
+was lighted up, he was handed into the foremost cabin, where he was met
+by Captain Maxwell, and conducted to a seat in the after cabin. As he
+declined sitting on a chair, he was obliged to wait for his mat, and, in
+the meantime, looked round him in amaze at the magnificence of the
+apartments. The change of dress made him behave towards Captain Maxwell
+as to a perfect stranger; but the moment he recognised him, he appeared
+much amused with his mistake, and his manners became less reserved. He
+now turned about to see what was become of his mat, and was astonished
+to find himself alone with us in the cabin. It was then discovered that
+the sentry at the door, in repressing the crowd of his followers, had
+found it impossible to distinguish his more immediate attendants, and
+had therefore allowed nobody to pass.
+
+The door being opened, the mat-bearer and four of the principal people
+were called in by the Chief; and when we were all fairly seated on the
+deck, the secretary was directed to prepare a writing, which was
+dictated and delivered much in the same manner as before. Whether the
+presentation of a written paper was considered by the Chief as a
+necessary piece of etiquette, or whether he really had more hopes of
+being understood on this occasion than before, was quite uncertain; but
+the mode adopted by Captain Maxwell to undeceive him was conclusive. He
+immediately called for paper, and wrote upon it in English, "I do not
+understand one word that you say," and presented this paper in return,
+with all the forms and ceremonies that had been adopted towards himself.
+The Chief, on receiving it, examined the characters with great
+attention, and then made signs that it was wholly unintelligible,
+alternately looking at the paper and at Captain Maxwell with an
+inquiring air, and was only made sensible of the awkward dilemma in
+which we were placed, by observing Captain Maxwell repeat all his looks
+and gestures as equally applicable to the Corean writing which he held
+in his hand[4].
+
+The Chief had now recourse to signs, which he used ever afterwards. He
+was in great spirits, and seemed entertained with the efforts which were
+made to please him. He asked to look at a mirror which had caught his
+attention; when it was put into his hands, he seemed very well satisfied
+with the figure which it presented, and continued for some time pulling
+his beard from side to side with an air of perfect complacency. One of
+the attendants thought there could be no harm in looking at the mirror
+likewise, but the Chief was of a different opinion, and no sooner
+observed what he was doing, than he very angrily made him put down the
+glass and leave the cabin. The secretary too fell under his displeasure,
+and was reprimanded with much acrimony for overlooking our paper when we
+were writing. Scarcely five minutes elapsed, in short, during his stay,
+without his finding some cause of complaint against his people; but we
+could not determine whether this arose from mere captiousness, or was
+done to give us a higher notion of his consequence, because, in the
+intervals, he was all cheerfulness and good humour. He was offered tea
+and cherry brandy, which he took along with us, and appeared at his ease
+in every respect. We thought that he made signs, implying a wish for us
+to visit him on shore; to this we cheerfully assented, and an
+arrangement for landing in the morning was made accordingly by means of
+similar signs, with which the Chief appeared much pleased, and rose to
+go away.
+
+He had not got much beyond the cabin-door, however, before the serenity
+of his temper was once more overturned. On passing the gun-room
+sky-light, he heard the voices of some of his people whom the officers
+had taken below, and who were enjoying themselves very merrily amongst
+their new acquaintance. The old Chief looked down, and observing them
+drinking and making a noise, he called to them in a loud passionate
+voice, which made them leave their glasses, and run up the ladder in
+great terror. From thence the alarm spread along the lower deck, to the
+midshipmen's berth, where another party was carousing. The grog and wine
+with which they had been entertained was too potent for this party, as
+they did not seem to care much for the old Chief, who, posting himself
+at the hatchway, ascertained, by personal examination, who the offenders
+were. On this occasion, his little rod of office was of much use; he
+pushed the people about with it to make them speak, and used it to turn
+them round, in order to discover their faces. One man watching his
+opportunity when the Chief was punching away at somebody who had just
+come up, slipped past and ran off; but the quick eye of the old man was
+not so easily deceived, and he set off in chase of him round the
+quarter deck. The man had an apron full of biscuit, which had been
+given to him by the midshipmen; this impeded his running, so that the
+Chief, notwithstanding his robes, at last came up with him; but while he
+was stirring him up with his rod, the fellow slipped his cargo of bread
+into a coil of rope, and then went along with the Chief quietly enough.
+The old man came back afterwards, and found the biscuit, which he
+pointed out to us, to shew that it had not been taken away.
+
+He continued for some time at the hatchway, expecting more people; but
+finding none come up, he went below himself, to the main deck, and
+rummaged under the guns and round the main-mast, to discover whether any
+one was concealed; but finding no person there, he came again upon deck,
+and shortly after went into his boat.
+
+On returning to the Lyra, we found a number of boats anchored round her,
+which looked as if they meant to keep strict watch over us. We went in
+our boat to one of them, where we found the crew asleep. They seemed to
+have had orders not to follow the Chief to the frigate, and were here
+waiting his return. On our pointing to the shore, and making signs that
+the old man with the long beard and large hat had landed, they began
+immediately to get their anchor up, and called to the other boats to do
+the same. In a few minutes they were all at work, and every person in
+the boats joined in repeating the two words "ho ya, ho ya," the effect
+of which, from a great many voices, was not unpleasing.
+
+The cable in these boats is wound round a large reel or barrel; to the
+ends of which two wheels with handles are fitted, which enables a
+considerable number to apply their strength at the same moment. The
+anchor is made of a dark coloured, heavy wood, with a long shank and
+flukes, and a short stock crossing the former, near the crown of the
+anchor, and not at the end of the shank, as with us in Europe. The mat
+sails are divided into horizontal divisions by slender pieces of bamboo.
+When not under sail, the boats are moved by oars having a circular piece
+of wood tied to the end, and are steered by a large scull over the
+stern. The bow is square above, but rises from the water in a slope,
+making a small angle with the water, like the end of a coal barge, but
+overhanging more. The planks are fastened together by means of square
+tree-nails, which pass in a slanting direction through the plank, and
+not straight, as with us.
+
+5th of September.--A considerable bustle was observed on shore at
+daybreak this morning; and shortly afterwards, we saw the old Chief and
+his suite embark, and pull towards us, accompanied by a numerous fleet
+of smaller boats, all ornamented with showy flags, and crowded with
+people in gay and bright coloured garments, forming, upon the whole, a
+splendid and imposing scene. As the procession moved slowly along, the
+band in the Chief's boat struck up a lively, martial sort of air, on
+instruments similar to those we had heard last night; the tone of which
+is not unlike the drawling sound of the bagpipe, the bass or drone being
+produced by a long horn, and the squeaking sounds by four trumpets, two
+of which have stops in the middle, by which the notes are distinctly
+marked.
+
+The Chief's visit was so unexpectedly early, that we had not put things
+in order for his reception, before he was alongside: he came on board,
+however, and seemed happy at being allowed to walk about the decks, and
+examine every thing at his leisure. When the cabin was ready, and the
+Chief seemed to have satisfied himself with looking round the upper
+deck, he was asked to walk down; which he complied with as soon as he
+understood what was meant. But he found it no easy matter to get down
+the narrow hatchway, in which there was barely room for his hat; but
+this he would by no means take off. As he entered the cabin, his robes
+and hat completely filled the door-way; and when seated at the table,
+(for he now made no objection to a chair) he occupied no inconsiderable
+portion of the whole apartment. He sat here for some time, and examined
+every thing in the cabin with great attention, pointing with the little
+stick whenever he saw any thing which he wanted to look at more closely.
+In this way, the books, globes, glasses, &c. were put into his hands;
+and it was not a little amusing to see the old gentleman wheeling the
+globes round, and hunting over the books for pictures, like a child. A
+person of rank who accompanied the Chief this morning, was asked to the
+cabin along with him; and was no sooner seated, than we observed that he
+had a very sickly look; which circumstance was the cause of a curious
+mistake. It had been supposed that the Chief, during last night's
+conference, made allusions to some friend of his who was unwell; and
+accordingly, in our arrangements for the morning, it was proposed to
+take the doctors of both ships on shore, to visit him. As the Chief had
+himself come on board, our plans for landing were interrupted, and we
+ascribed this early visit to his anxiety on account of his friend's
+health.
+
+It was therefore taken for granted, that this sickly looking companion
+of the Chief, who, some how or other, got the title of the "Courtier,"
+amongst us, was the patient alluded to last night; and no sooner were
+the first compliments over in the cabin, than the doctor was sent for to
+prescribe. On his being introduced, the Courtier was made to hold out
+his tongue, have his pulse felt, and submit to various interrogatories,
+the object of which the unfortunate man could not divine, particularly
+as there was nothing at all the matter with him. He submitted with so
+much patience to all these forms, and the Chief looked on with such
+grave propriety during all the examination, that they evidently
+considered the whole scene as a part of our ceremonial etiquette. When
+this gentleman was released from the doctor's hands, he began to examine
+the books with the air of a person who understands what he is about. He
+appeared desirous of passing for a literary character; and observing us
+hand the books about in a careless manner, ventured to ask for one, by
+drawing it towards himself with a begging look. As he happened to select
+a volume of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, I was under the necessity of
+refusing; but offered in its stead a less valuable, though more showy
+book, which he accepted with much gratitude. No return, of course, had
+been looked for, and I was for a moment at a loss to understand what my
+friend meant, by slipping his fan into my hand, under the table. He did
+this in so mysterious a way, when the Chief was looking in another
+direction, that I saw it was his wish to conceal what he had done, and
+the fan was sent privately away. But unfortunately, my precaution was
+fruitless, for a few minutes afterwards, on finding the crowded cabin
+very hot, I called for a fan, and the servant, unconscious of the
+mischief he was doing, brought the Courtier's present; which no sooner
+met the old man's eye, than he rose half off his chair, and gave his
+unhappy companion such a look of furious anger, as made him tremble from
+top to toe: but he was soon pacified when he saw that we took an
+interest in the question, and the Courtier was allowed to keep his book.
+
+After sitting half an hour, and drinking a glass of Constantia, the old
+man proposed to go upon deck. I accordingly led the way, and had gone
+some steps up the ladder, in advance, before I perceived that he had
+stopped at the door of the gun-room, where the officers mess, and was
+looking in, with his usual curiosity. I begged him to go in, which he
+accordingly did, and entertained himself for some time, with looking
+over the different cabins of the officers. From having observed the
+pleasure which he took in the sight of any thing new, I was induced to
+propose his going round the lower deck, and he looked quite pleased when
+I pointed along the passage. The state hat, which had been resolutely
+kept on during all this time, notwithstanding its perpetual
+inconvenience to himself and every one around him, was here destined to
+come off; for after making two or three attempts, he found it impossible
+to get along and wear the hat too; and being of a very inquisitive
+disposition, he chose the degrading alternative of being uncovered, and
+his researches proceeded without interruption. Nothing escaped the old
+man's observation; whatever was shut or tied up, he requested to have
+opened; and in this way he rummaged the midshipmen's chests, and the
+sailors' bags, all along the lower deck. He looked into the holds, took
+the lid off the boilers, and turned every thing topsy-turvy. Seeing a
+cutlass tied to the deck, overhead, he took it down, and on drawing it
+from the scabbard, its lustre, and the keenness of its edge, surprised
+and delighted him so much, that I asked him to accept it. At first he
+seemed willing enough, but after holding a consultation with the
+Courtier for five minutes, he reluctantly put it back again. As he went
+along, he took samples of every thing that he could easily put into his
+sleeve, which served him instead of a sack; so that when he came upon
+deck, he was pretty well loaded, and looked about with the satisfaction
+of a school-boy, on having visited a show for the first time in his
+life.
+
+Whilst we were below, one of the natives had been busily employed in
+taking the dimensions of the ship with a string, and another person was
+engaged under him, taking an account of the guns, shot, and rigging, all
+which details he wrote down; but not being able to ascertain, himself,
+the exact number of people on board, he had recourse to me for the
+information; this I communicated by opening eight times the fingers of
+both hands. The only part of the ship to which he had not free access
+was the cabin under the poop, and from which he felt much annoyed at
+being excluded: but when told that a gentleman was shaving there, he
+shewed himself quite satisfied with the explanation, and waited
+patiently until the door was opened to him.
+
+The old gentleman and his followers appearing anxious to see a shot
+fired, an eighteen pound carronade was loaded before them, and
+discharged with the muzzle so much depressed, that the shot struck the
+water close to us, and then rose and fell eight or ten times, to the
+great entertainment and surprise of the whole party. In the mean time,
+Captain Maxwell had come on board, and breakfast being ready, we
+prevailed upon the Chief to sit down with us. He ate heartily of our
+hashes, and of every thing else that was put before him, using a knife,
+fork, and spoon, which he now saw, probably, for the first time in his
+life, not only without awkwardness, but to such good purpose, that he
+declined exchanging them for Chinese chopsticks, which were provided for
+him. In fact, he was so determined to adopt our customs in every
+respect, that when the tea was offered to him in the Chinese way, he
+looked to the right and left, and seeing ours differently prepared, held
+up his cup to the servant, for milk and sugar, which being given to him,
+the old gentleman remained perfectly satisfied.
+
+The politeness and ease with which he accommodated himself to the habits
+of people so different from himself, were truly admirable; and when it
+is considered, that hitherto, in all probability, he was ignorant even
+of our existence, his propriety of manners should seem to point, not
+only to high rank in society, but to imply also a degree of civilization
+in that society, not confirmed by other circumstances. Be this as it
+may, the incident is curious, as shewing, that however different the
+state of society may be in different countries, the forms of politeness
+are much alike in all. This polished character was very well sustained
+by the old Chief; as he was pleased with our attempts to oblige him, and
+whatever we seemed to care about, he immediately took an interest in. He
+was very inquisitive, and was always highly gratified when he discovered
+the use of any thing which had puzzled him at first. But there was no
+idle surprise, no extravagant bursts of admiration, and he certainly
+would be considered a man of good breeding, and keen observation, in any
+part of the world. Towards his own people, indeed, he was harsh and
+impatient at all times; but this may have arisen from his anxiety that
+no offence should be given to us by the other natives, whom he might
+know were less delicate and considerate than himself, and therefore
+required constant control.
+
+When breakfast was over, and the old man once more upon deck, we
+endeavoured to signify to him that we meant to land, according to our
+engagement yesterday evening; but this he either did not, or would not
+comprehend; for whenever we pointed towards the shore, he directed our
+attention to the frigate. At length he got into his boat, pushed off,
+and was making for the Alceste, when Captain Maxwell followed in his
+boat, and drawing up alongside of him, tried to prevail upon him to
+accompany us to the village: the Chief shook his head by way of
+disapprobation, and turning towards his attendants, entered into a
+discussion with them, which terminated by the Courtier and himself
+stepping into Captain Maxwell's boat.
+
+We ascribed this measure to a desire on the Chief's part to show
+publicly that he had not himself invited us on shore, and had only
+acceded to our request to land. We had not proceeded far before the
+Chief repented of his ready compliance, and tried to persuade us to
+return; but finding the ordinary signs of no avail, he held his head
+down and drew his hand across his throat, as if his head was to be cut
+off. It was now our turn not to comprehend signs, and thinking it would
+be idle to lose so favourable an opportunity, spared no pains to
+reconcile the old man to our landing. In this, however, we did not
+succeed, for, as we approached the shore, his anxiety increased, and he
+frequently drew his hand across his neck, as if to shew that he would
+lose his head if we persisted. We again tried to re-assure him, by
+explaining that we had no intention of going near the village, but
+merely desired to walk about for a short time, and then to go to the
+frigate to dine. He was of course included in this invitation; but his
+only answer consisted in pointing to us and making signs of eating, and
+then drawing his hand across his throat; by which he was understood to
+mean, that it might be very well for us to talk of eating, but, for his
+part, he was taken up with the danger of losing his head. We could not
+but laugh at this, as we had no notion of any such apprehension being
+well grounded; and, in a short time, landed at the distance of half a
+mile from the village.
+
+The old man was lifted out of the boat by several of his people, and we
+were amazed to find, when they set him down, that he was in tears, and
+looking altogether very unhappy. In a few minutes a crowd, consisting of
+more than a hundred people, assembled round us, and we began to think
+we should pay dearly for our curiosity. But the poor old man had no
+thoughts of vengeance, and was no better pleased with the crowd than we
+were; for turning to his soldiers, he desired them to disperse the mob,
+which they did in a moment by pelting them with great stones. The Chief
+now began crying violently, and turning towards the village walked away,
+leaning his head on the shoulder of one of his people. As he went along,
+he not only sobbed and wept, but every now and then bellowed aloud. We
+had been nowise prepared for such a scene, and were extremely sorry for
+having pushed matters to this extremity. It had never occurred to us
+that the old Chief's head was really in danger; and even now we could
+not satisfy ourselves whether he was sincere, or merely acting in order
+to prevail on us to retire. The perfect tranquillity, nay even
+cheerfulness of the Courtier, who staid with us all this time, puzzled
+us extremely: nor could we account for the indifference of the other
+attendants, who looked on with as much composure as if such scenes were
+every day occurrences. But at all events, it was necessary before
+proceeding any further, that the old man should be pacified; and in
+order to effect this, we sat down on the beach, upon which he turned
+about and came crying back again. He seated himself by us, and waited
+very patiently whilst we remonstrated on the unreasonableness of his
+conduct, and contrasted the reception he had met with from us, with his
+present unaccountable behaviour. This was expressed by a dumb show
+acting of all that had taken place since we came to anchor in the bay;
+and these signs we thought might be intelligible to the Chief, because
+they were so to all of us, although no words were used. The signs used
+by different nations, however, are often dissimilar when the same thing
+is to be expressed: and it happened frequently with us that all attempts
+at explanation failed, on both sides, though the signs used appeared to
+be understood by all the people of the same nation with the person
+making the signs.
+
+The old man made a long speech in reply; in the course which the
+beheading sign was frequently repeated. It is curious that he invariably
+held his hands towards his throat after he had gone through this motion,
+and appeared to wash his hands in his blood: probably he did this in
+imitation of some ceremony used at executions.
+
+Upon one occasion the Chief endeavoured to explain something to us which
+had a reference to a period of two days; this he did by pointing to the
+sun, making a motion twice from east to west, and, at the end of each
+time, closing his eyes as if asleep. This sign was variously
+interpreted: some believed it to mean that in two days his head would be
+taken off: others imagined that in two days a communication might be
+made to his government, and that orders for our reception would be
+transmitted. Whatever might have been meant by this particular sign, it
+seems very probable that some general instructions were in force along
+the whole of this coast by which the treatment of strangers is
+regulated. The promptitude with which we were met at this place, where,
+perhaps, no ship ever was before, and the pertinacity with which our
+landing was opposed, seem to imply an extraordinary degree of vigilance
+and jealousy on the part of the government.
+
+We expressed a desire to eat and drink, in the hopes of working on the
+old man's hospitality, and, perhaps, inducing him to entertain us in his
+house; but he made no motion towards the village, and merely sent off a
+servant for some water and a few small cockles. When this sorry fare was
+laid on the beach, the old gentleman made signs for us to begin; but we
+did not choose to be pleased either with the entertainment itself, or
+with the place and manner in which it had been served. We explained to
+him that the proper place to eat was in a house, and not on a wet dirty
+beach; he made no offer, however, of any other; but leaning his head
+pensively on his hands, seemed entirely resigned to his fate.
+
+The case was now utterly hopeless; and after an ineffectual attempt to
+cheer him up, we went on board, as the last, and indeed only favour we
+could grant him. Thus we quitted this inhospitable shore, after a stay
+of not quite an hour, in which time we had never been twenty yards from
+our own boats. We saw the village, however, to some advantage; it is
+neatly built, and very pleasantly situated under fine trees, in a valley
+cultivated like a garden, in small square patches.
+
+It was now determined to prosecute the voyage to the southward, and the
+Lyra was accordingly ordered to proceed as usual to sound the passages
+a-head of the frigate, but had not gone far before the Alceste, still at
+anchor, was observed to be surrounded with boats. In about an hour she
+weighed and stood to sea. Captain Maxwell had received another visit
+from the old Chief, whose appearance was described as being quite
+altered; his sprightliness and curiosity all gone, and his easy
+unceremonious manner exchanged for cold and stately civility: he looked
+embarrassed and unhappy, as it appeared, from an apprehension of having
+offended Captain Maxwell. When this was discovered, no pains were spared
+to convince him that, in this respect, there was not the slightest cause
+for uneasiness. He would not accept any presents, but appeared much
+relieved by the unexpected kindness with which he was received, and
+before he went away, was restored, in some degree, to his wonted
+spirits. When looking over the books in the cabin, he was a good deal
+taken with the appearance of a Bible, but when offered to him he
+declined it, though with such evident reluctance, that it was again
+shewn to him just as he was pushing off in his boat, and he now received
+it with every appearance of gratitude, and took his leave in a manner
+quite friendly.
+
+We quitted this bay without much regret. The old Chief, indeed, with his
+flowing beard, and pompous array, and engaging manners, had made a
+strong impression upon us all; but his pitiable and childish distress,
+whatever might have been the cause, took away from the respect with
+which we were otherwise disposed to regard him: yet this circumstance,
+though it makes the picture less finished, serves to give it additional
+interest; whilst every thing ridiculous in the old man's character is
+lost in the painful uncertainty which hangs over his fate.
+
+From this bay we steered amongst the islands, during all the 6th and
+7th, to the S.W. before the natives were met with again; we saw them
+indeed, but never got near enough to converse with them. They were
+frequently observed seated in groups watching us on the islands which we
+passed. We saw several fishing-boats, with a crew of about a dozen men,
+crowded on a sort of poop. At a little distance these boats appeared to
+be formed of two vessels lashed together. This appearance we believe to
+be caused by their having an outrigger on one side, on which their oars,
+sails, and masts are piled, in order probably to keep the boat clear
+when they are at anchor fishing. Their mast is lowered down and hoisted
+up by means of a strong tackle from the mast-head to the stern, as in
+the barges on the Thames.
+
+We threaded our way for upwards of a hundred miles amongst islands which
+lie in immense clusters in every direction. At first we thought of
+counting them, and even attempted to note their places on the charts
+which we were making of this coast, but their great number completely
+baffled these endeavours. They vary in size, from a few hundred yards in
+length to five or six miles, and are of all shapes. From the mast-head
+other groups were perceived lying one behind the other to the east and
+south as far as the eye could reach. Frequently above a hundred islands
+were in sight from deck at one moment. The sea being quite smooth, the
+weather fine, and many of the islands wooded and cultivated in the
+valleys, the scene was at all times lively, and was rendered still more
+interesting by our rapid passage along the coast, by which the
+appearances about us were perpetually changing. Of this coast we had no
+charts possessing the slightest pretensions to accuracy, none of the
+places at which we touched being laid down within sixty miles of their
+proper places. Only a few islands are noticed in any map; whereas the
+coast, for near two hundred miles, is completely studded with them, to
+the distance of fifteen or twenty leagues from the main land. These
+inaccuracies in the charts naturally gave a very high degree of interest
+to this part of the voyage; yet the navigation being at all times
+uncertain, and often dangerous, considerable anxiety necessarily mingled
+itself with the satisfaction produced by so new and splendid a scene. We
+always anchored during the night, or when the tides, which were very
+rapid, prevented our proceeding in the deliberate manner absolutely
+required by the nature of the circumstances. An instance of the
+necessity of these precautions occurred on the 7th of September, at four
+o'clock in the afternoon, when, it being quite calm, we were drifting
+along with the tide, which suddenly shifted and carried us rapidly
+towards a reef of rocks, which was invisible till the strong rippling of
+the water shewed us our danger: we let go the anchor immediately, but
+the jerk was so great, as to break the Lyra's cable. A second anchor,
+however, brought her up at a sufficient distance from the reef.
+
+As soon as the tide slacked, a boat was dispatched to examine the
+anchorage on the other side of an island near us. The officer landed
+about sunset, and from the top of the island could discover a village on
+the other side, on the shores of a fine large bay. He afterwards sounded
+the anchorage, and found it of a convenient depth. On his way back he
+landed near the village, but though it was bright moonlight he saw none
+of the inhabitants.
+
+8th of September.--About noon we weighed and sailed round the north end
+of the island, which had been visited last night. The Alceste anchored
+nearly in the middle between the two islands which form the anchorage;
+but as the Lyra draws less water, she was placed as close off the
+village as was safe, being then about a quarter of a mile from the
+beach. At this distance, by means of a telescope fixed on a table on the
+poop, we were enabled to see what was going on in the village, while the
+people were unconscious of being observed. Mr. Clifford, who was too
+unwell to land with Captain Maxwell and myself, placed himself at the
+glass, and made many observations which must otherwise have escaped
+notice.
+
+At first the only inhabitants visible were seated on the top of the hill
+watching us, the village itself being quite deserted; but shortly after
+our anchoring, the inhabitants began to assemble from different parts of
+the island. Of these several were women, some of whom had children on
+their backs, and others carried them in their arms. They looked stout,
+were fairer in complexion than the men, and were dressed in a long white
+robe, loose and open in front, with a petticoat of the same colour
+reaching a little below the knees; their hair was tied in a large knot
+behind; a small piece of white cloth was thrown loosely over the head to
+protect them from the rays of the sun. Some women were engaged in
+husking rice in a mortar with a wooden beater; these had no dress above
+the waist. The men and boys were seen carrying loads on a wooden frame
+hooked to the shoulders.
+
+In a square flat place near the village a number of women and children
+were employed winnowing corn by pouring it from a height, so that the
+husks blew away. Fishing-nets were spread to dry on most of the houses.
+We landed about five o'clock, and found in the village only two men, who
+obstinately remained at one place without speaking, and looking anxious
+that we should go away; they refused the buttons which we offered them,
+and resisted our persuasions to accompany us to the upper part of the
+village, which we were anxious they should do, to shew that we had no
+intention of hurting any thing, but merely to look about us. We went on
+alone, and on reaching a deserted house thought it a good opportunity to
+examine it. Before the door, on a neat clean level space, enclosed by a
+hedge covered with a sweet-scented white flower, we found several heaps
+of corn and straw, and several of the wooden mortars in which the rice
+is pounded, also a number of vessels, some filled with water and others
+with rice. Cooking utensils were lying about, and a number of fishing
+lines coiled neatly in baskets, and split fish spread out to dry on the
+top of little corn ricks on one side of the court. The inside was dark
+and uncomfortable; the mud floor was full of hollow places; the walls
+were black with soot, and every thing looked dirty. On the left of the
+entrance two large metal boilers, twenty inches deep, were sunk in the
+brickwork, the upper part being about a foot above the floor. The
+fire-place was between the boilers, and on the hot embers lay three
+split fish. On the wall opposite to the fire were shelves, having a
+number of cups, basons, and cooking utensils, principally of coarse
+stone ware, and some few of a sort of bell-metal. The number of
+inhabitants in one house must be considerable, if we can form an
+estimate from the quantity of their dishes and vessels. There were three
+neat small pieces of furniture on one of the shelves, the use of which
+we could not discover; they were made of wood, elegantly carved and
+varnished, with a round top about a foot in diameter, and four legs a
+foot and a half long. The roof was well constructed, the rafters being
+mortised into the ends of the horizontal beams, and tied to the middle
+by a perpendicular beam or King-Post. Over the rafters is laid a
+net-work of rods, to which the thatch is tied. There was no chimney to
+this house, and only one window made of slender bars of wood, forming
+square spaces three inches by two, covered by a thin semi-transparent
+paper defended by the roof, which extends so far beyond the wall as to
+shelter it not only from the rain but from the sun. Most of the houses
+had a sort of raised verandah under the eaves, about a foot or more
+above the ground, extending from the door on either hand to the end of
+the house; these places were neatly levelled, and must afford a cool
+seat. The walls of the houses are from six to eight feet high, and from
+fourteen to twenty feet long; the top of the roof being about fourteen.
+The walls are of stone and mud, the door moves on the bar, which forms
+one of its sides; this bar is prolonged, and works in holes in the beam
+above, and a stone below. There was a back door to the house which we
+examined. On opening this we found a bare bank of earth as high as the
+house, at the distance of three feet from the walls, and a hedge rising
+still higher on the top; this effectually excluded all light.
+
+This minute survey of the house being completed, we returned to our
+friends, who seemed in some measure re-assured. We tried to prevail upon
+them to accompany us in our walk, in hopes that the rest of the
+cottagers might be induced to return when they saw how peaceably we were
+disposed. Captain Maxwell used every sign he could think of to no
+purpose, and tired at length of these attempts, took hold of the oldest
+man's hand, drew it through his arm, and walked off with him. I followed
+his example with the other; and this familiarity amused the natives, who
+now accompanied us in perfect good humour. The ease and apparent
+indifference with which they walked along with us was curious, and had
+so little of awkwardness in it, that one might have supposed it to be
+the fashion of Corea to walk arm in arm. Having reached the house which
+we had before examined, we sat down in the verandah, and made signs that
+we wished to smoke a pipe with them. In the meantime a boat was observed
+to come to the landing-place; the crew quitted her and came towards us
+at a rapid pace. The quick manner of these people, so different from the
+ordinary behaviour of the Coreans we had seen, made us apprehend that
+some violence was meditated; but in this we were mistaken, for they sat
+down with us, gave us their pipes to smoke, and laughed immoderately at
+some of our words: we took the hint from them, and laughed heartily
+whenever we observed that any thing good had been said amongst them;
+this was well received, and proved afterwards a good mode of
+introduction.
+
+Their curiosity was strongly excited by our clothing, which they
+examined minutely; they wished to see some parts of our dress taken off,
+and in order to gratify them they were allowed to have our coats, shoes,
+stockings, hats, &c. They were more struck with the stockings than with
+any thing else, frequently shouting "Hota! Hota!" This word, which is
+pronounced with a strong aspiration, was noted down in our list as the
+Corean word for stockings; but it was found afterwards to be an
+expression of approbation, applied indiscriminately to whatever they
+consider remarkably good. After sitting some time with these people, and
+smoking several pipes with them, we gave up all hopes of seeing the
+villagers return while we were there, and as the night was falling we
+proposed taking a short walk with our friends, and then going on board.
+But as soon as they saw us go up the hill instead of returning to the
+boat, they became very uneasy, and wanted us to turn back. As we had
+reason, however, to conjecture that the women and children were on the
+other side of the hill, we went on in the expectation of getting a sight
+of them before dark. This the Coreans prevented by following us with
+shouts wherever we went, so as to give warning of our approach. The
+women and children probably retreated before us to a ravine on the north
+side of the island, for when we approached it the Coreans became more
+anxious than ever for our return; and one man seeing us still advance,
+took hold of my arm and gave it a sharp pinch. I turned round and
+exclaimed, "Patience, Sir!" He drew back on observing my displeasure,
+and a moment after called out himself, "Patience, Sir!" The others
+hearing this caught the words too, and nothing was heard for some time
+amongst them but "Patience, Sir," pronounced in every instance with
+perfect propriety. They seemed surprised themselves on discovering
+powers of imitation hitherto in all probability unexercised. This
+incident brought us better acquainted, and we remained on the top of the
+hill teaching them English words till it was dark. They were certainly
+entertained with our instructions, but nevertheless shewed much more
+satisfaction in attending us down hill again to our boats. Before going
+on board we invited them to come to the ship next day, which one of the
+party was supposed to comprehend: he first made preparations for going
+to bed, then closed his eyes, hung his head on his hand, and snored very
+properly; after a time he opened his eyes, started and looked about him,
+then laid his hands on Captain Maxwell's shoulders with an air of
+welcome. This was interpreted by some into a wish for our departure
+till the morning, and by others that he himself would visit us at
+daylight. As he never came on board, and received us on landing next day
+with any thing but welcome, probably both guesses were wrong: of one
+thing there was no doubt, his anxiety to get rid of us; and his signs
+may have meant that it was time for all honest people to be in bed.
+
+9th of September.--At sunrise we landed at the same village, and found
+it deserted as before. We left it and made for the highest peak on the
+island, accompanied by a few of the Coreans, who did not interfere with
+us till about halfway up, when on our entering a grove of fir trees,
+with the appearance of which we had been struck, one of the Coreans
+objected; we went on, however, and upon reaching the stump of an old
+tree the Corean fell on his knees, bowed his head to the ground, and as
+he raised it again held his hands closed and pressed together towards
+the stump. This had very much the air of a stratagem to dissuade us from
+going further in that direction, where the women probably were
+concealed. Admitting this to have been the motive, it is curious that he
+should have supposed such a shew of religious form calculated to
+restrain us. It is further remarkable as being the only circumstance
+which we have seen on this coast implying a knowledge of religion or
+religious ceremony. There are here no temples, idols, nor tombs, whereas
+in China, villages much smaller than these of Corea have them in every
+corner. The other Coreans took no notice of the stump, and the man who
+was prostrating himself before it finding that his behaviour produced
+nothing but a number of questions from us concerning the nature of the
+tree, got on his legs and walked sulkily away. In the course of our walk
+we saw six bullocks of a small breed and very fat, but which the Coreans
+were not to be tempted to sell by any thing which we had to give them.
+Dogs were the only quadrupeds besides that we saw. There were pigeons,
+hawks, and eagles, but few small birds. Crows were as numerous here as
+in every other part of the world. We returned on board to breakfast, and
+afterwards set out on an excursion to the top of a high island lying
+some leagues to the south-east of us. On our way we landed, and observed
+the sun's meridian altitude with an artificial horizon, by which we
+ascertained the latitude to be 34º 22' 39" north, the longitude by the
+mean of two chronometers is 126º 2' 45" east.
+
+We passed, for the distance of five miles, amongst islands, all, except
+the very smallest, inhabited. The villages are built in the valleys,
+where the houses are nearly hid by trees and hedges. The sides of the
+hills are cultivated with millet and a species of bean; and in the
+numerous small gardens near the villages, we saw a great variety of
+plants.
+
+As the peaked island which we had undertaken to climb was steep, and
+covered with a long coarse grass, it cost us a tiresome scramble to gain
+the top, which is about six hundred feet above the level of the sea. The
+main land of Corea is just discernible in the north-east and east, from
+this elevation; but it commands a splendid view of the islands, lying in
+thick clusters, as far as the eye can reach, from north-west quite round
+by east to south. We endeavoured to count them. One person, by reckoning
+only such as were obviously separate islands, made their number one
+hundred and twenty. Two other gentlemen, by estimating the numbers in
+each connected cluster, made severally, one hundred and thirty-six, and
+one hundred and seventy; a difference, which at once shews the
+difficulty of speaking with precision on this subject. But when it is
+considered, that from one spot, which though considerably elevated, was
+not centrical, one hundred and twenty islands could be counted, and that
+our course for upwards of one hundred miles had been amongst islands no
+less crowded than these, some idea may be formed of this great
+Archipelago.
+
+After enjoying this scene for some time, we went down on the other side
+of the peak, which is much less steep. We found the boat's crew
+preparing dinner for us, under some trees, close to a well of cool
+water. The village to which the well belonged not being many yards off,
+we proceeded to explore it, and found it deserted by all except an old
+woman and a man. The woman, seated on a pile of stones, in the middle of
+the village, took no notice of us as we passed; and indeed, she was
+herself so very homely, as to occupy but little of our attention. The
+man was seated at the door of a cottage, making a straw sandal: on our
+entering his inclosure, he looked up for an instant, and immediately
+resumed his work, with as much composure as if we had been a party of
+the villagers. A button was offered to him, which he accepted without
+scruple: he agreed, with equal readiness, to exchange his unfinished
+sandal for another button, which having carelessly put away, in a bag
+lying near him, he took some straw and re-commenced his business,
+without seeming to notice that we were rummaging his house. He is the
+only Corean we have met with, who has not shewn some slight symptoms of
+curiosity: indeed, he seemed totally indifferent about our staying or
+going, or about what we were doing in his house; and we left him without
+knowing whether to ascribe his apathy to fear, or to absolute
+stupidity.
+
+On returning from the village, we saw a party of the natives assembled
+on a rising ground near us; they were invited, by signs, to join us at
+dinner, but they kept their places unmoved. While we were at dinner, the
+sailors, who had been rambling about, joined the natives, and in a few
+minutes became very good friends with them; the natives giving up their
+pipes, and the sailors in return supplying them with tobacco. We have
+frequently remarked during this voyage, that the sailors make
+acquaintance with the natives much sooner than the officers. This seems
+the natural effect of the difference in our manners. On meeting with
+natives, we feel so anxious to conciliate, and to avoid giving offence,
+that our behaviour, thus guarded and circumspect, has an air of
+restraint about it, which may produce distrust and apprehension on their
+part; whilst, on the other hand, Jack, who is not only unreflecting and
+inoffensive himself, but never suspects that others can possibly
+misconstrue his perfect good-will and unaffected frankness, has an easy,
+disengaged manner, which at once invites confidence and familiarity.
+
+In about an hour after we had sat down, one of the natives hastily rose,
+and without appearing to deliberate, but as if actuated by a sudden
+impulse, strode rapidly down to us, and in the most unceremonious way
+possible, presented his lighted pipe for us to smoke. We received him
+as kindly as we could, and prevailed upon him to take a glass of wine;
+which he had no sooner drank off, than he roared out, "Hota! Hota!"
+
+This exclamation brought the rest down, who seating themselves by us,
+drank freely, and became very cheerful and communicative, telling us the
+Corean names of every thing we pointed to, and asking, in return, the
+English names for our clothes.[5] But though the wine made these people
+far more sociable than any we had yet seen, they never forgot the
+principal object of their thoughts, and suggested, every now and then,
+by pointing to our boats, the propriety of our going away. After sunset,
+they became very impatient and uneasy at our stay; but when at length we
+yielded to their entreaties, the whole party accompanied us to the
+water's side, and took leave with the most lively marks of satisfaction
+at our departure.
+
+10th of September.--This morning, about ten o'clock, we got under weigh,
+and stood to the southward. By sunset we were clear of all the islands,
+and could just distinguish the island of Quelpaert in the south-east
+quarter.
+
+The shortness of our stay on this coast, and the difficulty we
+experienced in communicating with the inhabitants, will account for the
+scanty and disjointed nature of the information obtained. A future
+voyager would do well to be accompanied by a person who can write the
+Chinese character, and should have full leisure to overcome, by patient
+management, the distrust of strangers evinced by this unsociable people.
+
+A chart of our track along this coast is subjoined to this work, in the
+hope that it may prove useful to a future voyager. As it was constructed
+under circumstances of great haste, it is necessarily incomplete; yet it
+will probably be found more accurate than any maps or charts hitherto
+published.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 1: A servant of the embassy, left behind by accident at the
+Pei-ho river.]
+
+[Footnote 2: We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grained
+granite; the middle of the island of a brittle micaceous schistus of a
+deep blue colour; the strata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little to
+the S.W. This body of strata is cut across by a granite dyke, at some
+places forty feet wide, at others not above ten; the strata in the
+vicinity of the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner; this
+dislocation and contortion does not extend far from the walls of the
+dyke, but veins of granite branch out from it to a great distance,
+varying in width from three feet to the hundredth part of an inch: the
+dyke is visible from the top of the cliff to the water's edge, but does
+not re-appear on the corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it,
+though distant only thirty yards. This island is composed of the same
+schistus, and is cut in a vertical direction by a whin dyke, four feet
+wide, the planes of whose sides lie N.E. and S.W., being at right angles
+to those of the great granite dyke in the neighbourhood, which run S.E.
+and N.W. The strata contiguous to the whin dyke are a good deal twisted
+and broken, but not in the same degree as at their contact with the
+granite dyke.
+
+The whin dyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laid across in
+the usual way. Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at the
+distance of only forty or fifty feet, we came to an island rising
+abruptly out of the sea, and presenting a high rugged cliff of breccia,
+fronting that on which the granite dyke is so conspicuous: the junction
+of this rock with the schistus cut by the granite and the whin would
+have been interesting; but although we must have been at times within a
+few yards of it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea.
+
+The whole of the S.W. end of this island is formed of breccia, being an
+assemblage of angular and water-worn pieces of schistus, quartz, and
+some other rocks, the whole having the appearance of a great shingle
+beach. The fragments of the schistus in this rock are similar to that
+which forms the cliff first spoken of.
+
+The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was, that the great
+mass of strata which forms the centre of the island was formerly at the
+bottom of the ocean; and that the western part, which is now a firm
+breccia, had been a beach shingle produced by the action of the waves on
+the strata: the granite which forms the eastern end of the island had
+been forced into its present situation from beneath the strata, with
+sufficient violence to dislocate and contort the beds nearest to it, and
+to inject the liquid granite into the rents formed by the heaving action
+of the strata as they were raised up. It is natural to suppose that the
+ragged edges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks would be
+subjected to a grinding action, from which the strata more remote might
+be exempted; and in this way we may account for the extraordinary
+twisting, and separation of masses along the whole course of the granite
+dyke. In the dyke, as well as in the veins which branch from it, there
+are numerous islands of schistus. That this last was softened, seems to
+follow from the frequent instances which occur of its being bent back
+upon itself without producing cracks. The same heat, propagated by the
+melted granite in the neighbourhood, may also be supposed to have
+reduced the shingle beach to a state of semifusion by the aid of some
+flux contained in the sand scattered amongst it. We could not discover
+any circumstance by which the relative antiquity of the two dykes
+mentioned above, could be ascertained.]
+
+[Footnote 3: _Note on the peculiar character of the written language in
+that quarter of the globe._
+
+In China, Japan, Corea, and the islands in the adjacent seas, the spoken
+languages are different from one another; the written language, on the
+contrary, is the same in all. Thus a native of China is unintelligible
+to a Corean or Japanese, while he is speaking, but they mutually
+understand one another when their thoughts are expressed in writing. The
+cause of this may be thus explained. We in Europe form an idea in the
+mind, and this we express by certain sounds, which differ in different
+countries; these sounds are committed to writing by means of the letters
+of the alphabet, which are only symbols of sounds, and, consequently, a
+writing in Europe is unintelligible to every one who is ignorant of the
+spoken language in which it happens to be written. The Chinese and the
+other natives in these seas have, on the contrary, no alphabet; no
+symbols of sounds; their ideas are committed to writing at once without
+the intervention of sound, and their characters may therefore be called
+symbols of ideas. Now, as the same characters are adopted in all these
+countries to express the same ideas, it is clear that their writings
+will be perfectly intelligible to each other, although their spoken
+languages may be quite incomprehensible.
+
+The case of the Roman numerals in Europe furnishes a ready illustration
+of this symbolical language. There is nothing in the symbols 1, 2, 3,
+&c. by which their pronunciation can be ascertained when presented to
+the eye, yet they communicate meaning independent of sound, and are
+respectively intelligible to the inhabitants of the different countries
+of Europe; while, at the same time, the sounds by which a native of one
+country distinguishes the written symbols 1, 2, 3, &c. are
+unintelligible to all the rest.
+
+The knowledge of writing is supposed to be very generally diffused over
+the countries using what is called the Chinese character, and, as
+probably none but the lowest vulgar are ignorant of it, the surprise of
+these people on discovering our inability to read their papers is very
+natural. The case, we may imagine, had never occurred to them before,
+and it was highly interesting to watch the effect which so novel an
+incident produced. At first they appeared to doubt the fact of our
+ignorance, and shewed some symptoms of impatience; but this opinion did
+not last long, and they remained completely puzzled, looking at each
+other with an odd expression of surprise.]
+
+[Footnote 4: This paper, presented by the Corean Chief, has been
+translated by Mr. Morrison at Canton, and is as follows: "Persons, of
+what land--of what nation (are you)? On account of what business do you
+come hither? In the ship are there any literary men who thoroughly
+understand, and can explain what is written?"]
+
+[Footnote 5: See note at the end of the Loo-choo vocabulary.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+ Enter the Japan Sea--Sulphur Island--Volcano--See the Great Loo-Choo
+ Island--Lyra nearly wrecked--First Interview with the
+ Natives--Anchor at Napakiang--Natives crowd on Board--Their
+ interesting Appearance and Manners--Several Chiefs visit the
+ Alceste--Land to make Observations--Astonishment of the Natives--Six
+ Chiefs visit the Ships--Alceste and Lyra proceed farther in Shore--A
+ Chief of high Rank waits upon Captain Maxwell--Return his
+ Visit--Feast--Projected Survey of the Anchorage--Visit Reef
+ Island--The Lyra sent to look for another Harbour--Arrangements for
+ landing the Alceste's Stores--Description of the Temple and
+ Garden--First Acquaintance with Madera--Study of the Language.
+
+
+After leaving Corea, we stood to the southward and eastward, with a
+strong breeze from the north, and a mountainous swell from the
+north-east. Shortly after daybreak on the 13th of September, we saw
+Sulphur Island, in the south-west quarter, and by eleven in the forenoon
+were close up to it. We intended to land, but were prevented by the high
+wind, which caused so great a surf all round the island, as to render
+this impracticable. The sulphuric volcano from which the island takes
+its name is on the north-west side; it emits white smoke, and the smell
+of sulphur is very strong on the lee side of the crater. The cliffs
+near the volcano are of a pale yellow colour, interspersed with brown
+streaks: the ground at this place is very rugged, as the strata lie in
+all directions, and are much broken; on the top is a thin coat of brown
+grass. The south end of the island is of considerable height, of a deep
+blood red colour, with here and there a spot of bright green: the
+strata, which are here nearly horizontal, are cut by a whin dyke running
+from the top to the bottom of the cliff, projecting from its face like a
+wall. As the weather still looked threatening, we gave up the intention
+of examining this spot, and proceeded to the southward till four
+o'clock, at which time land was seen in the south-west quarter; but as
+there was not sufficient daylight to close with it, we hauled off to the
+westward for the night. Shortly after sunset the sky became overcast,
+the wind veered about from one point to another, the air became suddenly
+quite chill, the sea rose high, and every thing, in short, seemed to
+indicate an approaching tyfoong or hurricane. All our preparations were
+made to encounter a violent tempest; but we were much pleased at finding
+it turn out nothing more than an ordinary gale of wind.
+
+14th of September.--The weather was still stormy, but being anxious to
+close with the land, we bore up, and steered in the supposed direction
+of the Great Lieou Kieou, or Loo-choo Island. At eight o'clock we saw
+the Sugar Loaf of Captain Broughton, which is a small green island,
+having a high remarkable cone in the middle. We left this to the
+eastward, and continued steering to the south south-west, hoping to get
+to leeward of the great island before night, where we might remain in
+smooth water till the weather became fine. While going along at a quick
+rate, we suddenly saw breakers close to us; we instantly hauled to the
+wind, and made all the sail we could carry. Our situation was now very
+critical, for the swell caused by the recent gale checked our way
+considerably, and a lee current drifted us gradually towards the reef.
+From the mast head we could look down upon the reef, which was of a
+circular form, with a low island on its southern side; the surf broke
+all round, but in the inside the water was quite smooth, and being only
+a few feet deep, the coral, which was of a bright green, appeared
+distinctly through it. At the distance of one-third of a mile from where
+we were, no bottom was to be found with our lead lines, so that
+anchoring was out of the question. After being in this unpleasant
+predicament for some time, we succeeded in weathering the western end of
+the reef, which we had no sooner done, than we saw a passage four or
+five miles wide, by which we proceeded to leeward of the reef island,
+where we found the water perfectly smooth. The Alceste rounded the reef
+without difficulty, being half a league farther off than the Lyra,
+which, as usual, had been stationed a-head to look out, but had not
+perceived the danger sooner, owing to the extreme haziness of the
+weather.
+
+15th of September.--In the morning, it was arranged that the Lyra should
+proceed in shore in search of a harbour, while the frigate remained in
+deep water. At ten o'clock I thought we had discovered a place of
+security, and having anchored the Lyra, sent three boats to examine it.
+A sort of harbour was found, formed by coral reefs; but the passages
+being all intricate for large ships, and the water shallow inside, it is
+by no means safe. We fell in with several people in canoes; one man, who
+seemed to know what we were searching for, directed us to a point of
+land to the northward, and waved for us to go round it. While the boats
+were away, several natives came off to the Lyra. No people that we have
+yet met with have been so friendly; for the moment they came alongside,
+one handed a jar of water up to us, and another a basket of boiled sweet
+potatoes, without asking or seeming to wish for any recompense. Their
+manners were gentle and respectful; they uncovered their heads when in
+our presence, bowed whenever they spoke to us; and when we gave them
+some rum, they did not drink it till they had bowed to every person
+round. Another canoe went near the Alceste, and a rope being thrown to
+them, they tied a fish to it, and then paddled away. All this seemed to
+promise well, and was particularly grateful after the cold repulsive
+manners of the Coreans.
+
+The day was spent in trying to beat round the point to windward, but the
+tide was too strong against us, and when it became dark, we found
+ourselves awkwardly situated. To the east and west of us there were
+islands at the distance of a few miles. To leeward was a circular coral
+reef, just appearing above the surface at low water; and to windward
+were seen the reefs upon which we were so nearly wrecked on Saturday. As
+the exact position of these numerous dangers was unknown to us, we were
+determined to anchor for the night, though in eighty fathoms water.
+
+16th of September.--At daylight we weighed, and beat to windward all the
+morning; but owing to the tide being contrary, it was two o'clock before
+we passed the point mentioned above; which we had no sooner done, than
+we came in sight of an extensive town, having a harbour filled with
+vessels at anchor. On steering towards the town, we had to sound our way
+cautiously amongst coral reefs, which were tolerably well defined by the
+surf breaking upon them[6]. The Alceste followed as soon as we had
+ascertained that the passage was clear, and both ships anchored at the
+distance of half a mile from the town.
+
+In a short time we were surrounded by canoes, full of the natives, who,
+with their children, flocked on board. They wear a loose dress, tied
+with a belt round their waist; their hair is brought tight up from all
+sides, and formed into a knot on the top of the head, with two metal
+pins stuck in it. In the course of an hour, a native came on board who
+appeared to be somewhat higher in rank than the rest; and we now
+discovered, to our great satisfaction, that this man understood our
+Chinese servant, who had been of no use to us at Corea. As it was found
+that there were other chiefs on shore superior in rank to this man,
+Captain Maxwell declined receiving his visit; as well with the view of
+inducing the principal people to come on board, as of maintaining an
+appearance of dignity, a point of great importance in all transactions
+with the Chinese and their dependents, who invariably repay
+condescension with presumption. As we had heard of these people being
+tributary to China, it was natural to conclude that there might be some
+similarity in manners. At all events, it was evidently much easier at
+any future time to be free and cordial with them, after having assumed a
+distance and reserve in the first instance, than it would be to repress
+insolence, if at first encouraged by too hasty familiarity.
+
+Before this man went on shore, he requested to know the reason of our
+coming into this port; the interpreter was instructed to acquaint him
+that the ships had experienced very bad weather, and had been a long
+time at sea; that the large ship had sprung a leak, and required repairs
+which could only be done in a secure harbour: further explanations, it
+was observed, would be given to the superior chiefs when they came on
+board. We had been prepared for these inquiries, not only from the
+reception we had met with at Corea, but from the well-known character of
+the nations in this quarter of the globe; and it was so far fortunate,
+that the Alceste was actually in want of repairs; because to have
+assigned curiosity, and a desire of gaining information as our object,
+to people wholly unconscious of such feelings, would naturally have led
+them to ascribe our actions to some more interested, and consequently
+more dangerous motive.
+
+The canoes which we have seen to-day are mostly made of one piece of
+wood; they have two sails, and are moved with considerable velocity, by
+two or more paddles, assisted by an oar over the stern, which acts both
+as a scull and a rudder. There is a neat low seat, made of rattans, for
+each person in the canoe. As the day closed, the fishing canoes came in
+great numbers from sea, and all came on board the ships on their way;
+some of the fishermen pulled up our lines and baited the hooks. The
+whole shore abreast of the ships was covered with people, but the crowd
+was greatest on two pier-heads, forming the entrance to the harbour; and
+the variety of colour in their dresses made this a very lively
+exhibition. In the evening, Captain Maxwell and I rowed round to examine
+the anchorage, which we found tolerably clear of rocks. An officer was
+at the same time sent to examine the inner harbour, but he did not go
+far within the entrance, which was much too shallow for the frigate.
+
+On returning to the Lyra, I found that Mr. Clifford had been
+entertaining several respectable looking natives who had paid him a
+visit. As they readily comprehended his desire to know their words for
+various things, he has succeeded in collecting a considerable number,
+among which we are surprised to find their name for tobacco the same as
+ours; all the others are quite new to us.
+
+17th of September.--I carried the interpreter to the Alceste, after
+breakfast, where I found two chiefs, who had been on board some time,
+and had been taken care of by the officers, as Captain Maxwell was not
+prepared to receive them. A message was then sent to intimate that the
+Ta-yin (a Chinese title, used also by these people to persons of rank)
+was desirous of seeing the chiefs, and they were introduced into the
+after-cabin, where they were received in form. They objected to sitting
+down, making at the same time many low obeisances, which they did by
+stooping the body, and raising the hands, closed one over the other, to
+their face. Their scruples about being seated were at length overcome,
+and the first chief took his place on Captain Maxwell's left hand, the
+next on my left, and a third, who was evidently of a lower rank, sat
+beyond the second. The chiefs sat respectfully silent, and Captain
+Maxwell finding that he was expected to speak first, communicated to
+them that the ships under his command belonged to the King of England;
+that they had gone to China with an Embassador, carrying presents to the
+Emperor, at Pekin; that on their way back to Canton, they had
+experienced very bad weather, and had been obliged to put in here to
+refit, and to procure supplies.
+
+In reply, they expressed their willingness to assist us as much as lay
+in their power, but said that the harbour was too shallow for so large a
+ship, and recommended our proceeding to another harbour called
+Kinching, which they described as being secure and commodious, and only
+a few hours sail from this anchorage: they offered to furnish pilots and
+a boat to conduct us. Captain Maxwell, however, was unwilling to quit
+this anchorage unless certain of finding a better; he therefore proposed
+to send the Lyra to examine and report upon the harbour alluded to. The
+chiefs paused upon this, and said they could not take upon them to send
+pilots to the Brig without consulting the Great Man on shore. We were
+very curious to know who this great personage might be, but they evaded
+all our inquiries. Captain Maxwell asked where the king resided, and
+intimated his intention of waiting upon him; to this they strongly
+objected, declaring moreover, that it was impossible, as his majesty
+lived a thousand miles off. They did not seem aware of their
+inconsistency, when they undertook, immediately afterwards, to get an
+answer from court about pilots for the Lyra, in a few hours.
+
+We had been led to hope, from the frankness and kindness of these
+people, that no restraint would be imposed on us; and we were the more
+disappointed at observing, that whenever we spoke of landing, or asked
+any questions about the king, the chiefs became uneasy, and replied in a
+mysterious manner. We consoled ourselves, however, with the
+supposition, that upon further acquaintance their apprehension would
+wear off.
+
+Business being over, the chiefs were asked to walk round the cabin, an
+invitation which they accepted with manifest satisfaction. During the
+conference they had preserved a gravity suited to an important ceremony,
+and, though surrounded by new and curious objects, had never expressed
+the least curiosity. They were now no longer formal, and looked over the
+various articles with attention, taking particular notice of the globes,
+books, and mirrors. Their manners are remarkably gentle and unassuming.
+They are observant, and not without curiosity, but they require
+encouragement to induce them to come forward, being restrained, it would
+seem, by a genteel self-denial, from gratifying curiosity, lest it might
+be thought obtrusive. Their dress is singularly graceful; it consists of
+a loose flowing robe, with very wide sleeves, tied round the middle by a
+broad rich belt or girdle of wrought silk, a yellow cylindrical cap, and
+a neat straw sandal, over a short cotton boot or stocking. Two of the
+chiefs wore light yellow robes, the other dark blue streaked with white,
+all of cotton. The cap is flat at top, and appears to be formed by
+winding a broad band diagonally round a frame, in such a manner, that at
+each turn a small portion of the last fold shall be visible above in
+front, and below at the hinder part. The sandal is kept on by a stiff
+straw band passing over the instep, and joining the sandal near the
+heel; this band is tied to the forepart by a slight string, drawn
+between the great toe and the next, the stocking having a division like
+the finger of a glove for the great toe. They all carry fans, which they
+stick in their girdles when not in use, and each person has a short
+tobacco pipe in a small bag, hanging, along with the pouch, at the
+girdle. When they had satisfied themselves with looking over the cabin,
+they went away, with a promise of returning in the evening as soon as
+the answer from the Great Man should arrive.
+
+During all this morning, the whole space between the ships and the shore
+has been covered with canoes, each containing about ten persons. The
+scene was very lively, for few of the parties which came to visit the
+ships remained long on board, so that the canoes were continually
+passing backwards and forwards, and the number which came in this way
+must have been immense. They all seemed highly gratified at being
+allowed to go wherever they liked over the ships, nor was this liberty
+ever abused. The manners even of the lowest classes are genteel and
+becoming; their curiosity is great, but it never makes them rudely
+inquisitive: their language is musical, and in most cases easy of
+pronunciation. We heard a boat song to-day, the air of which was sweet
+and plaintive; we tried in vain to catch the words, and unfortunately,
+none of us had skill enough to note down the air. We observed several
+people in canoes, making drawings of the ships, but they hid their work
+when they were observed. In consequence of what had been said last night
+of our wanting repairs, a party of shipwrights and caulkers was sent on
+board the Alceste this morning, but their tools were of a Lilliputian
+order, and quite unsuited to the rough work required.
+
+The variety of colour and pattern in the dresses of the people to-day,
+is remarkable. Many wear printed cottons, others have cotton dresses
+with the pattern drawn on it by hand, instead of being stamped; but
+blue, in all its shades, is the prevalent colour, though there were many
+dresses resembling in every respect Highland tartans. The children, in
+general, wear more shewy dresses than the men, and of the dress of the
+women we can say nothing, as none have yet been seen. Every person has
+one of the girdles before described, which is always of a different
+colour from the dress, and is, in general, richly ornamented with
+flowers in embossed silk, and sometimes with gold and silver threads.
+This dress is naturally so graceful, that even the lowest boatmen have
+a picturesque appearance. Their hair, which is of a glossy black, is
+shaved off the crown, but the bare place is concealed by their mode of
+dressing the hair in a close knot over it. Their beards and mustachios
+are allowed to grow, and are kept neat and smooth. They are rather low
+in stature, but are well formed, and have an easy graceful carriage,
+which suits well with their flowing dress. Their colour is not good,
+some being very dark and others nearly white, but in most instances they
+are of a deep copper. This is fully compensated for by the sweetness and
+intelligence of their countenance. Their eyes, which are black, have a
+placid expression, and their teeth are regular and beautifully white. In
+deportment they are modest, polite, timid, and respectful, and in short,
+appear to be a most interesting and amiable people.
+
+Two of our friends who had visited us in the morning, and whose names we
+have discovered to be Ookooma and Jeema, came on board again about half
+past five, and staid an hour; they had not received any answer, they
+said, from the Great Man, and therefore could not send pilots to the
+"hoonee gua," or little ship. They were accompanied by a chief whom we
+took to be a Chinese from his looks, and his appearing to understand the
+interpreter better than the others. His formal and suspicious manner did
+not promise so well as that of the others. They came to say that a
+present of stock and vegetables had been sent to the ships. It was
+intimated to them that we intended to land the next day, and upon their
+objecting to this, we said that our wish was to wait upon the Great Man;
+to which they replied, that no person answering to this description
+resided here. We then said, that it was right we should return their
+visit. This argument they combated by saying that they were men of
+unequal rank to us, and therefore nowise entitled to such an honour; and
+that we, at the same time, would be degrading ourselves by such undue
+condescension. This having failed, Captain Maxwell told them of his
+illness; upon which, our new acquaintance, who seemed more earnestly
+bent against our landing than the others, offered to send a physician on
+board to see him. Captain Maxwell replied, that his own doctor had
+recommended a ride on shore; upon which they laughed, and turned the
+discourse to something else.
+
+In this way every proposal to land, or even allusion to the shore, was
+industriously put aside; and as it was our wish to gain their good will,
+the matter was dropped for the present. Before they went away, Captain
+Maxwell, pointing to their pipes, begged them to smoke if they wished
+it; they were grateful for this considerate attention, but would not on
+any account begin till we shewed them the example, by smoking with
+pipes which they prepared for us. They appeared more at their ease after
+this incident, and after sitting for some time, took leave for the night
+on the most friendly terms.
+
+18th of September.--Captain Maxwell sent to me to say that he meant to
+land on a point at some distance from the town, in order to observe the
+sun's meridian altitude with an artificial horizon. Just as I was
+setting out to accompany him, I was taken by surprise by two
+well-dressed natives, who were halfway down the cabin ladder before I
+knew of their approach. One came to superintend the measurement of the
+Lyra, and the other, who seemed of inferior rank, to explain why some
+poultry, only then sent, had not come on the preceding night, along with
+the other presents. I forgot to mention, that a bullock, two hogs, two
+goats, a dozen and a half of fowls, some candles, wood, and water, were
+sent to each of the ships. I asked them to sit down, and they were so
+well satisfied with the Constantia which I gave them, that they remained
+for some time; owing to which delay, I did not reach the shore till the
+time for observing the sun had gone by. I found Captain Maxwell with
+Ookooma and several of the chiefs, and an immense crowd of the natives,
+all of whom had left the town on seeing the boat put off, and had
+hastened to this spot, either out of curiosity or respect, or more
+probably to watch our proceedings. At our request, Ookooma, who appears
+to possess considerable authority, made the whole crowd, chiefs and all,
+sit down on the grass in a circle round us. Their astonishment at our
+operations was strongly expressed in their countenances, and, indeed,
+our apparatus and behaviour must have looked, to perfect strangers,
+somewhat magical.
+
+In the first place the quicksilver, which to them would appear like
+melted metal, was poured into a trough, in a fine stream from a wooden
+bottle; while it was running out the people repeated in an under tone
+"yi, yi, yi, yi!" but were silent when the glass roof was placed over
+the trough. The circular instrument and sextant, fixed on stands, next
+attracted their notice, and they looked on in profound silence while we
+were taking the sun's altitude. As we were too late for the desired
+observation, we amused the natives by letting them look at the two
+reflected images of the sun through the telescope of the instruments.
+Ookooma was the first who looked, and being quite unprepared for what he
+saw, started back in astonishment, as if he had unconsciously beheld
+something supernatural and forbidden. The other chiefs, in their turn,
+placed themselves at the instrument, as well as several old men who
+stepped forward from the crowd. Some testified their surprise by a
+sudden exclamation; others were perfectly calm, so that we could not
+guess what they thought; and some held up their hands, and looked as if
+the whole matter was totally beyond the reach of their comprehension.
+When this was over, and there was no longer any necessity for the crowd
+being seated, they closed round and watched us while we were putting the
+instruments up. Some of the boys held out their hands for quicksilver,
+with which they ran off, quite happy.
+
+During this time we were about fifty yards from the foot of a cliff, on
+the brow of which was posted a group of women with baskets on their
+heads; we were unfortunately not near enough to discern their features,
+nor to make out their dress distinctly; it appeared, however, to be like
+that of the men, though somewhat shorter, and without any girdle round
+the waist.
+
+The rock here rises in perpendicular rugged cliffs of coral, with a
+number of rude square excavations on its face, which, at first sight,
+appear to have been worn by the elements, but on examination shew
+evident traces of art. Most of these caves are closed up by a wall of
+loose stones, but in one, of which the mouth was open, several human
+bones were found lying amongst the sand. On removing a stone from a
+closed cave, a vase was observed in the inside, of an elegant shape; the
+people signified to us that these were the remains of the dead, but we
+did not make out distinctly whether the bones or the ashes only were
+thus preserved. They made no objections to our examining these caves,
+though they certainly were not pleased with it. No notice was taken of
+what Captain Maxwell and I did; but Mr. Clifford, who had remained below
+collecting words from some intelligent natives, was strongly recommended
+by Ookooma to go back to the boat; he walked up, however, without
+opposition, to the cave which we had been examining, and they ceased to
+importune him. A number of little boys who had observed us occasionally
+pulling flowers and plants, ran about collecting for us, and after
+presenting what they had gathered, with much politeness, ran away
+laughing with an arch expression of ridicule at our curiosity.
+
+On our way back, instead of going directly off to the ships, we coasted
+along shore in our boats, which gave us a new view of a stone bridge, of
+one arch, connecting two parts of the town. On the south side of the
+bridge we passed a space of considerable extent, probably set apart as a
+burying ground. We saw here a number of large horse-shoe tombs like
+those used in China, whitewashed, and apparently kept in good repair.
+Most of the tombs, however, are in the form of small square houses, with
+low pyramidal roofs; some of these were tiled, others thatched. It is
+evident that, in what relates to the dead, they follow, in some
+respects, the Chinese customs.
+
+[Illustration: NAPAKIANG.]
+
+The whole coast at this place is of coral cliffs, the base of which
+appears to have been scooped out by the action of the sea. As this
+excavation is at some places higher than the waves of the sea can be
+supposed to have ever reached, there is difficulty in assigning the sea
+as the cause; yet the roof of the excavation is horizontal for a great
+extent, and its appearance, in every other respect, suggests that it has
+been formed by the dashing of the waves. There is, moreover, some
+difficulty in accounting for coral cliffs being so much above the level
+of the sea, in which, according to every supposition, they must have
+been formed.
+
+The scenery here, as in most countries in these climates, does not admit
+of a satisfactory description. It may be said, however, that it is more
+pleasing to the eye than that of islands near the equator, where the
+vegetation is so profusely luxuriant, as to overload the picture with
+foliage to the exclusion of every thing else. Here there is much
+variety; the numerous groves of pine-trees give some parts of it an
+English air, but the style of landscape is what is called tropical. The
+general character of the scenery at this spot is faithfully preserved in
+the drawing of Napakiang.
+
+19th of September.--No answer having yet come from the Great Man, we
+begin to apprehend that they are going to treat us in Chinese style, and
+exclude us from their country altogether. We have tried in vain to
+discover whether the King is at this place, or a hundred, or as some
+maintain, a thousand miles off; in the mean time, as we know the island
+to be not more than sixty miles long, it is fair to suppose that they
+wish to deceive us.
+
+We conjecture that a large building on a rising ground, three or four
+miles from us in an eastern direction, with two flag-staffs near it, is
+the palace mentioned in the account quoted by Pere Gaubil, Lettres
+Edifiantes et Curieuses, Tom. XXIII. The natives always refuse to give
+any information when asked about this building.
+
+Whenever the natives come on board, if at all well dressed, they are
+asked into the cabin, where we treat them with cherry brandy and
+Constantia. In the course of conversation they contribute a number of
+new words, and, in general, when they see what the object is, are very
+willing to lend their assistance, and take much pains to teach us the
+true pronunciation of their words. One man, however, who was not so
+quick as they generally are, was in the cabin to-day for some time; Mr.
+Clifford was getting from him the Loo-choo words for sour, sweet, salt,
+&c.; and in order to make him comprehend the questions, made him taste
+different things that were sour, sweet, and so on: the poor fellow stood
+this very well, till some quassia was given to him to get the word
+"bitter;" he had no sooner tasted it, than he ran off quite astonished
+at the manner in which he had been entertained.
+
+It blew hard this morning, so that there was little intercourse with the
+shore; but towards sunset it moderated, and Ookooma, Jeema, and four
+other Chiefs, came on board, bringing with them a present of a bullock,
+two hogs, goats, and vegetables. The Chief whose name is Shayoon is the
+most clever of them all; he is next in rank to Ookooma, but he generally
+takes the lead in discussion; he has a quick intelligent look, with more
+determination in his manner than any of the others. They were very
+particular on all these state occasions to observe the order of
+precedence, and no one sat down till his superior was seated. When any
+subject was discussed, one at a time rose to speak, but not in order of
+rank, and they never attempted to interrupt one another.
+
+The weather at this moment looked so stormy, that I went on board the
+Lyra to prepare for a gale; by which I lost a very interesting
+conference with the chiefs. I learnt from Captain Maxwell afterwards,
+that he had remonstrated with them on their inconsistency and the
+pretended difficulty of getting answers from court; he gave them to
+understand, that he did not conceive it was treating the King of England
+with due respect to deny his officers permission to walk on shore.
+Again, that they had promised to send pilots, but that none had come;
+and that many other promises had not been performed. He desired the
+interpreter to say, that he was not pleased with their telling him so
+many different stories, all of which could not be true; first they said
+that the bullocks, hogs, &c. were gifts from themselves; then, that they
+were sent by the Great Man; then, that there was no Great Man here: in
+fine, he urged them strongly to tell him the truth on all points. They
+made the interpreter repeat six times over what Captain Maxwell had
+desired him to say; they then consulted amongst themselves a long time,
+and at last assured Captain Maxwell, that a reply to the communications
+made by them to government would reach this place next day.
+
+As the stock and vegetables received by the ships had, by this time,
+amounted to a considerable quantity, a bag of dollars was offered to
+them, and they were urged to take payment for what had been sent on
+board; this offer, which had been made more than once before, was still
+declined; upon which they were informed, that we considered it improper,
+as servants of government, to receive presents to such an extent from
+individuals. Upon this they gave their assurance, that the stock had
+been sent on board by order of the Loo-choo government, on their being
+informed that the King of another country's ships had arrived. No
+payment they said could therefore be taken. With this Captain Maxwell
+was satisfied. Their wish seems to be, to prevent our opening any
+communication with their government, and they appear so decided upon
+these matters, that they will probably succeed, notwithstanding all our
+efforts.
+
+The chiefs have dresses adapted to the state of the weather; yesterday
+being cold and threatening, they all came on board with a sort of cloak
+or great coat made of a thick blue stuff like woollen cloth, buttoned in
+front. It is tighter than the ordinary dress, and is worn over it. It is
+only in fine weather, and on state occasions, that they wear the band
+turban, called by them "hatchee matchee;" at all other times they go
+uncovered, having their hair dressed like the rest of the people.
+
+20th of September.--The mercury in the barometer fell last night from
+29. 72, to 29. 51, and the sky assumed a yellow appearance. We expected
+a heavy gale, more particularly as it was so near the equinox, but we
+were so sheltered by the land, that though it appeared to blow hard at
+sea, we felt nothing of it where we lay.
+
+Three or four canoes came round the south-west point of land this
+forenoon; the people in them were supposed to have come from the other
+side of the island, for they did not appear to have seen the ships
+before. One of these people was much delighted with a looking-glass
+which was shewn to him; he took it in his hands, and calling his
+companions about him, shewed them in turn its effect. Having done so
+several times, he held it opposite to his own face for four or five
+minutes without altering his countenance in the least; at last he
+smiled, and immediately and involuntarily nodded assent to the image in
+the glass, which had so exactly expressed what he felt himself; he
+seemed, however, aware, that it was a reflection of his own countenance,
+as he pointed to himself, yet he could not restrain his curiosity from
+looking behind, but instantly turned it round again. While the glass was
+in his hands, he made us several long speeches, in which he frequently
+repeated the word "Kagung," the Loo-choo name for mirror; but, from his
+behaviour, it is probable he knew it only by name. One of this party
+sold his "Jeewa" or head ornaments for a wine glass. Sometime
+afterwards, the others saw a bottle, which they wished to purchase in
+the same way; it was, however, given to them as a present, and they went
+away very well satisfied. These canoes were of pine, from twelve to
+twenty feet long, and from two to four wide; their anchor is made of
+wood loaded with stones.
+
+As no answer came this morning from the Great Man, Captain Maxwell took
+the ships into a more secure anchorage at the north-east corner of the
+bay; our first anchorage being too close to a reef, and moreover open to
+the south-west winds. The place we had now shifted to, though apparently
+exposed, is, in fact, sheltered by a chain of reefs under water outside
+of us to the westward. By this change, we have been brought close to the
+bridge spoken of before, and are now abreast the east end of the town:
+the Lyra not being more than a quarter of a mile from the shore. A
+strict watch is kept on shore, so that no boat leaves the ships without
+being observed. Orders have been given for the whole anchorage to be
+carefully sounded; in doing this, the boats often approach the shore,
+and whenever this happens, a crowd of the natives, headed by one or
+other of the chiefs, repair to the spot, and wave them to keep farther
+off.
+
+21st of September.--There appears to be some embargo upon the canoes,
+for there has not been one near us this morning, and only one on board
+the Alceste. It was found necessary to-day to move the frigate still
+farther in, and four or five hawsers were laid out for the purpose of
+warping her a-head. While this was going on, the beach, and all the
+heights near us, were crowded with people, wondering, no doubt, how the
+ship was made to move without sails, for the hawsers were low down, and
+might have escaped their observation. In the canoe which visited the
+Alceste, there came two men, who had not been seen before; they remained
+but a short time, which was spent in examining the hawsers and the mode
+of warping the ship. As soon as they had made themselves master of this
+subject, they went on shore, as if to make a report. During their visit
+they said little, being intent upon what was going on; but the
+interpreter learnt from one of them, that a Great Man had actually come,
+or was expected in the town to-day. A report prevails, that the King of
+the island has lately been on board in disguise. We cannot trace the
+report to any good foundation, and it is probably false. At the same
+time, if his Majesty has any curiosity, it is not unlikely that he may
+have come near enough to see such a strange sight as we must be.
+
+It is possible that our moving up so close to the town has alarmed the
+people, and may have prevented their visiting us as heretofore; at all
+events, it is very unfair in our friends, the Chiefs, neither to let the
+people come on board, nor to allow us to go on shore to look at them.
+
+Our occupation in the mean time is to observe the natives through the
+telescope placed on a table on the Lyra's poop. The stone bridge appears
+to be a great thoroughfare, several roads from the country leading to
+it; it seems also to be the only entrance to the town on this side.
+Nobody crosses it without stopping to look at us, and a crowd of idle
+people have taken post on and about it. We see a number of women coming
+from the country with baskets on their heads. Their outer dress differs
+from that of the men, it is open in front, and they have no girdle; they
+have an under dress, or sack, which is also loose, but not open; in some
+we can see that this comes nearly to the feet, in others just to the
+knee, and we imagine that those who work in the fields have the short
+dress: most of them allow their upper garment to flow out with the wind
+behind them. We observe a woman carrying a child across the hip as in
+India, with its hands on its mother's shoulder, while her arm is round
+the child's waist. One young lady has been seen for some time amusing
+herself by making a dog bark at the ships. We see women beating rice in
+wooden mortars. On the banks of the stream which the bridge crosses,
+there are a number of people washing clothes, which they perform in the
+Indian way, by dipping the clothes in water and beating them on stones.
+From one end of the beach to the other there is a range of people
+watching us, they are formed here and there into groups; one of which,
+on a craggy knoll abreast of the ships, has struck us as being
+particularly interesting. A fine majestic looking man, whose full beard
+and flowing garments remind us of a figure in the Cartoons of Raphael,
+is standing in the middle of a circle of old men, who are lying on the
+grass, and appear to be listening to him.
+
+22nd of September.--This morning brings us no news, no permission to
+land! A number of flags and streamers are displayed on the masts of the
+vessels in the inner harbour, and there seems to be something going on
+on shore; no boats have come to us, and we have no occupation but
+looking through the glass, which, however, affords a good deal of
+entertainment, particularly as the people whom we see with it act in the
+usual way, being unconscious of our scrutiny.
+
+In the afternoon a number of boats left the shore and proceeded to the
+Alceste in procession. In the foremost boat there seemed to be a person
+of consequence, whom we immediately conjectured to be the Great Man
+alluded to by the people yesterday. He got on board the Alceste before
+us, and the natives also had left their canoes, so that we found the
+ship's decks crowded with people. The Chief, whom we found seated in the
+cabin, was clothed in purple silk, with a light purple hatchee matchee.
+An official communication of our history was now repeated at the old
+man's request. He listened with great attention till Captain Maxwell
+concluded his statement, by informing him that the ship was leaky and
+required frequent pumping. He then begged permission to see this
+operation, if it would not give too much trouble. As this was exactly
+what we wished, the chain pumps were ordered to be got ready, and the
+conference went on, consisting principally of compliments. Observing
+that we took notice of his being a little deaf, he seemed anxious to
+explain that this was the effect of age. He made us feel his pulse, and
+look at the withered state of his hand, then taking ours and feeling the
+pulse, held them up along with his own, and laughed with great good
+humour at the contrast which age had produced. He was about sixty years
+old, and his beard of thin hair was as white as snow: he had a
+cheerfulness of expression, and a liveliness of manner, which are
+remarkable for a man of his years. His manners were graceful and
+elegant, and from the first moment he seemed quite at his ease. Every
+thing about him, in short, indicated good-breeding, and a familiarity
+with good society; and we could not help remarking his decided
+superiority in appearance over the other chiefs.
+
+When the pumps were ready, he was escorted to the main deck, where he
+sat for some time in great admiration of the machinery; and seeing the
+labour required to work it, he seemed really affected at our situation,
+which he naturally thought must be very bad, from the immense quantity
+of water thrown out by the pumps. The ship being upright, the water did
+not run off freely from the deck, and in a short time it flowed round
+the chair in which the old man was seated. Three or four of the sailors
+seeing him somewhat uneasy at this inundation, took him up chair and
+all, and placed him on a dry spot. The old gentleman was surprised, not
+displeased, and very graciously replied to the low bows which the
+sailors made him. On returning to the cabin, they were all entertained
+as usual with sweet wine, cherry brandy, and pipes. The old man filled
+pipes for us, and as soon as this part of the ceremonial had been gone
+through, a formal request was made for permission to land the Alceste's
+casks and stores, in order to stop the leak and make other repairs. This
+produced a long discussion amongst the chiefs, in which the old man
+joined but little; he spoke, however, now and then, and whatever he
+said, appeared to be to the purpose. Whenever the chiefs spoke, they
+rose and addressed themselves to him in a most respectful manner. At
+length, having agreed about an answer, they communicated to Captain
+Maxwell that there was no good place here for the purposes he wanted,
+and that as our present anchorage was unsafe, they recommended our going
+round to the harbour alluded to on a former occasion. At this place,
+which they call Winching or Oonching, he said we might put on shore
+whatever we chose. On our asking if in Winching the water was deep
+enough to admit a large ship, a long discussion arose, during which they
+appeared to be considering the merits of the harbour. They seemed
+apprehensive of giving it too high a character, and that on our reaching
+it we should be disappointed. The old man at length suggested sending
+the "little ship" to see whether it would answer. To this Captain
+Maxwell agreed, only requesting that a person might accompany us, in
+order to save time in the search. Simple as this appears, they took a
+long time to consider it, and ended by saying that no reply could be
+given till the next day.
+
+While the subject of this harbour was under discussion, the old man drew
+on a sheet of paper, a chart of the island, and pointed out the place
+where the harbour lay. It proved afterwards, when we had surveyed the
+island, that this sketch possessed considerable accuracy, as the
+situation of the harbour of which they spoke corresponds exactly with
+that of Port Melville, discovered in the Lyra. It is much to be
+regretted that this curious sketch is lost.
+
+The Chief now walked about the cabin, examined the globes, books, and
+pictures, with great attention. The wainscot struck him particularly, as
+well as the machinery and finish of the windows and sliding shutters.
+Captain Maxwell tried to make him comprehend our track on the globe. He
+had felt it becoming to preserve some state while business was going on,
+but he now became quite chatty and familiar. He went all over the ship,
+accompanied by the other chiefs and his own personal suite, consisting
+of a pipe bearer, a man who carried his large camp chair, another with a
+cover of red cloth for the chair, and a man who carried a round Japan
+box for the hatchee-matchee. Two others took it in turn to fan him, and
+to hold his arm by the elbow and wrist whenever he walked about;
+probably as a piece of state, for the ship had very little motion: these
+fanners were very expert at their business, for not content with cooling
+his face and neck, they lifted up his large sleeves and fanned his arms.
+On returning to the cabin, he saw Mr. Clifford using gloves, and begged
+leave to try them on; with the right one he succeeded very well, but the
+nails of his left hand being about an inch long, he found it not so easy
+a matter: he seemed to think them the oddest things he had met with, and
+laughing much, held them up repeatedly to the other chiefs.
+
+The old man brought a present for Captain Maxwell, and sent another to
+the Lyra, consisting of a hog, a kid, two bags of potatoes, a basket of
+charcoal, thirty bundles of eggs (five in each), a bundle of vermicelli,
+and a jar of an ardent spirit called samchew. All the chiefs, who were
+in their best attire, were severally accompanied by a man carrying a box
+for the hatchee-matchee; their dresses were of various colours, and
+their sandals and stockings all alike. On rising to go away, the old man
+bowed to me, and said that he meant to visit my ship; but this being
+evidently complimentary, I begged him not to take so much trouble: he,
+in return, expressed himself obliged to me for being satisfied with the
+politeness intended. The Embassador's barge was manned to take him on
+shore, but as soon as he saw what was intended, he drew back, and
+declared that he could not land in any boat but his own. As it was
+supposed that his modesty prevented his accepting this offer, he was
+urged to overcome his scruples, and land in the manner proposed; he
+still, however, declined the honour, but at last went down the ladder,
+and having stepped into the barge, made a bow to Captain Maxwell, as if
+in acknowledgment of the attention, but immediately afterwards went into
+his own boat and pushed off, under a salute of three guns from each
+ship.
+
+Our intention of returning this visit the next day was not mentioned
+during the discussions in the cabin, from the certainty of its being
+combated, and perhaps overruled: but when the last of the chiefs was
+getting into the boat, the interpreter was desired to tell him, in a
+careless way, as a matter of course, that next morning this visit would
+be returned on shore. As had been foreseen, this did not receive their
+approbation; the interpreter went into the boat, where every persuasion
+was used to convince him of the impropriety of our intention: they could
+not succeed, however, in making him yield this point, and at length went
+away. This interpreter is called "John" by all parties, and though
+merely an under servant of the factory at Canton, he is a very shrewd
+fellow. His English is certainly not the best, and probably the Chinese
+he speaks is the base provincial language of Canton; so that
+misunderstandings are no doubt often caused by his erroneous
+interpretation.
+
+John's report after the boat had put off, and from which we gather that
+we shall be expected, was as follows: "They ax me, 'what for my Ta-yin
+come sho?' I say, 'to make chin-chin[7] they Ta-yin;' they tell me, 'You
+Ta-yin too much great mandarine, no can come sho;' I say, 'What for my
+Ta-yin no come sho? He great man; he[8] Ta-wang-tee too much great man;
+he let you Ta-yin come board ship, and you no let him come sho,
+chin-chin you Ta-yin; what for this?' Then they speak long time
+together; by and by ax me, 'how many people bring sho you Ta-yin?' So I
+shake my head, I no like give answer long time, (they always take long
+time answer me). When they ax me again, I say, 'Ta-yin bring five people
+mo besides me.' They say, 'too much men come;' I say, 'No, no too much.'
+They ax, 'What time come?' I give no answer."
+
+23d September.--As we had not contemplated such adventures as these, we
+had made no preparations for them; and now that it was necessary to make
+some return to the chief whom we were going to visit, we found great
+difficulty in preparing a suitable present. Captain Maxwell took with
+him several dozens of wine, some books, glasses, various trinkets, and a
+large piece of blue broad cloth. I took half the quantity of Captain
+Maxwell's other presents, and a table cloth in place of the broad cloth.
+Smaller presents were also made up for each of the chiefs. At one
+o'clock we set out in the barge, with a large union jack flying, and as
+it blew fresh, we soon reached the harbour. As we rowed past the shore,
+the people were seen running along all the roads leading to the town, so
+that by the time we reached the harbour, the crowd on both sides was
+immense: the trees, walls, and house tops, and in short every spot from
+which we could be seen, was literally covered with people, forming a
+sight as striking and animated as can well be conceived. As we entered
+the harbour several of the chiefs were observed to come down to a point,
+and wave for us to go round the end of a pier or mole, forming the inner
+harbour, where there was a good landing-place.
+
+The chiefs helped us out, and then led us along, Ookooma taking Captain
+Maxwell's hand, Shayoon mine, and Jeema Mr. Clifford's; the others,
+according to their rank, conducted Mr. M'Leod of the Alceste, Mr.
+Maxwell, and another midshipman, Mr. Browne. They held our hands nearly
+as high as the shoulder, while a lane was formed for us through the
+crowd of people, who were perfectly silent. The children were placed in
+front, and the next rank sat down, so that those behind could see us in
+passing. At about a hundred and fifty yards from the landing-place, we
+came to the gate of a temple, where we were met by the Chief, who stood
+just on the outside of the threshold, on a small raised pavement: he
+took Ookooma's place, and conducted Captain Maxwell up a few steps into
+the temple, which was partly open on two sides, with deep verandahs,
+which made the interior shady and cool. A large table, finely japanned,
+was spread, and two ornamented chairs were placed for us. The Chief
+seated himself at one end of the table, and placed Captain Maxwell on
+his left.
+
+He expressed himself much gratified and honoured by the visit, asked our
+ages, and if we were married. He was greatly pleased with Captain
+Maxwell's account of his family, which nearly corresponded with his own.
+He guessed Mr. Maxwell's age to be twenty-seven, and was with difficulty
+persuaded to believe that a person six feet high could be only sixteen.
+The same mistake was made by all the natives, who invariably judged of
+the age of our young men by their height alone. An entertainment was now
+served, beginning with a light kind of wine, called sackee, which was
+handed round in very diminutive cups, filled by Issacha, from a small
+high pot in which the sackee was kept hot. They insisted on our emptying
+the cup every time, shewing us a fair example themselves. During the
+whole feast the sackee never left the table, being considered apropos to
+all the strange dishes which we partook of. The first of these consisted
+of hard boiled eggs, cut into slices, the outside of the white being
+coloured red. A pair of chopsticks[9] was now given to each person, and
+these were not changed during the feast. Next came fish fried in batter,
+which we found an excellent dish; then sliced smoked pork, next pig's
+liver sliced. After this, tea was handed round in cups of a moderate
+size; the tea was quite new, resembling, as was observed, an infusion of
+hay. Pipes and tobacco served to fill up the short intervals between the
+courses. A man attended behind each of our chairs, whose sole business
+it was to fill and light the pipes. The next dish was the strangest of
+any, and disgusted most of the party; it consisted of a mass of coarse,
+soft, black sugar, wrapped up in unbaked dough, powdered over with rice
+flour, dyed yellow. After this we had dishes of round cakes, like
+gingerbread nuts; then cakes made in the form of wreaths, and in a
+variety of other shapes. There was something like cheese given us after
+the cakes, but we cannot form a probable conjecture of what it was made.
+Most of the dishes were so good that we soon made a hearty dinner, but
+the attendants still brought in more, till the Chief seeing that we did
+not eat, recommended the sackee to us. The old gentleman's eyes at
+length began to glisten, and observing that we felt it hot, he requested
+us to uncover, shewing the example himself. He seized the doctor's
+cocked hat and put it on, while the doctor did the same with his
+hatchee-matchee. The oddity of the Chief's appearance produced by this
+change overcame the gravity of the attendants, and the mirth became
+general; nor was the joke relished by any body more than the Chief's two
+sons, who stood by his chair during all the entertainment: they were
+pretty little boys, with gaudy dresses, and their hair dressed in high
+shewy top-knots.
+
+[Illustration: LOO-CHOO CHIEF and his TWO SONS.]
+
+During the early part of the feast, our presents were brought in on
+trays, and laid at the feet of the Chief: the old man rose and saw them
+arranged, he then made a graceful bow, and acknowledged his
+satisfaction, observing that we had sent him too much, and had done him
+more honour than he was entitled to, and that he could not think of
+accepting the whole. This we considered matter of form, and in reply
+lamented our inability to make suitable presents; upon which he sat
+down and said no more. The other chiefs ran about shewing the list of
+their presents to their friends among the crowd.
+
+The room in which this entertainment was given was open at first on two
+sides only, but afterwards the partitions on the other two sides were
+taken down, being contrived to slide in grooves; thus the rooms are
+enlarged or diminished at pleasure. When the partition behind us was
+removed, several strange looking figures made their appearance, who we
+found were Bodezes or priests. Their heads and faces were shaved, their
+feet bare, and their dress different from that worn by the rest of the
+people, being somewhat shorter, and much less free and flowing, without
+any belt round the waist, the robe being merely tightened a little by a
+drawing string tied at the side; over the shoulders hangs an embroidered
+band or belt, like that used by drummers: the colour of their dress is
+not uniform, some wearing black, others yellow, and some deep purple.
+They have a timorous, patient, subdued sort of look, with a languid
+smile, and ghastly expression of countenance. They are low in stature,
+and generally look unhealthy; they all stoop more or less, and their
+manners are without grace, so that a more contemptible class of people
+cannot easily be imagined. Along with the Bodezes were several boys,
+whom we took to be their children from the resemblance they bore to
+them; but this mistake must have arisen from these boys being dressed
+like the priests, for the Bodezes are strictly confined to a life of
+celibacy. From the circumstance of our being in a temple, as well as
+from our general habits of respect to persons filling sacred stations,
+we felt at first disposed to treat these Bodezes with attention, but
+this was looked upon as ridiculous by the chiefs, who seeing us bowing
+to them, begged we would take no further notice of them. Instead of
+being the class most respected, they are considered the lowest, and if
+not held in contempt, are at least neglected by all other ranks.
+
+During all the time we were at table, the crowd pressed round the
+verandahs, and perched themselves upon the walls and house-tops in the
+vicinity, or wherever they could get a peep at us. The satisfaction here
+was mutual, as we were anxious to make the most of the opportunity, not
+knowing if we should ever be allowed to land again. After sitting two
+hours we rose, and were escorted to the boats in the same order as when
+we landed. An attempt had been made during the feast, when the whole
+party were in good humour, to prevail upon the old gentleman to sanction
+our taking a walk into the town; but the bare mention of such a thing
+sobered the whole party in an instant, and the subject was accordingly
+dropped. The sailors, who had been kept in the boats for fear of their
+doing mischief, had not been neglected by the Chief, who had sent them
+part of the feast, nor did it seem that they had any objection to the
+sackee. We looked anxiously on the right and left as we passed through
+the crowd, in hopes of seeing some of the women, but in this expectation
+we were disappointed. At a considerable distance indeed, on the opposite
+side of the harbour, we saw a group of women, several of whom came down
+to the causeway to obtain a better view of the boats as they passed. Six
+or eight young girls ran to the pier head, round some rocks near the
+end; they reached this spot just as we rowed past, but looked quite
+frightened at finding themselves so near us, and immediately drew back
+out of our sight. We fancied that we could discover a good deal of
+beauty in some of their faces, and that their figures were handsome; but
+as we had not seen a fair lady's face for nearly half a year before, our
+judgment in this case is not perhaps to be depended on. Ookooma and his
+associates put off to accompany us in one of their own boats, but as it
+blew hard, they came no farther than the pier head: Jeeroo, however, was
+sent along with us, to see that there were no stray sheep.
+
+What is to follow is uncertain, but it is clear that we have made little
+progress of late, while fresh obstacles have been hourly rising against
+our landing; in the meantime, the Loo-chooans shew no little sagacity
+and kindness of disposition in supplying us liberally with all kinds of
+stock.
+
+24th of September.--Last night and to-day it has blown a hard gale of
+wind, beginning at north north-east, and shifting to north-west, but the
+reefs and the land break its force, and enable us to ride in perfect
+security: in all probability it blew severely in the open sea. The
+barometer fell from 29.62, to 29.50, yesterday; in the evening it had
+reached 29.48, and this morning stood at 29.40. About four in the
+morning it began to rise rapidly, and the severity of the gale did not
+come on till it had risen a good deal. The thermometer both in the day
+and night stands at 82º, with very little variation, but the sky being
+constantly clouded, no observations could be made.
+
+25th of September.--Jeeroo came on board this morning with a present of
+vegetables and fruit, and afterwards went on board the Alceste to join
+Ookooma and Jeema. They had preceded him with a present from the Chief,
+by whose desire they made a number of kind inquiries, and repeatedly
+expressed, in his name, surprise and satisfaction at our having been
+able to ride out the gale. They also apologized for not visiting us
+yesterday, which the gale had rendered impossible. It was represented in
+the conference to-day, that our limbs were getting quite stiff for want
+of exercise, and that it became absolutely necessary for us to land, on
+account of our health: they debated amongst themselves for some time,
+and then said that a final answer would be given to-morrow. They have
+quite forgotten their promise to send a pilot for the harbour to the
+northward: they wish also that we should forget it, since they change
+the subject whenever it is spoken of, and affect total ignorance of our
+meaning. The government probably think it best to keep us where we are,
+and therefore discourage our investigating the island any further.
+
+Jeeroo, who begins to get quite familiar with us all, is a laughing
+good-humoured man, about thirty: he shakes every one cordially by the
+hand when he comes on board, and engages in all our amusements with
+great cheerfulness. He is very useful to us, because the anxiety he has
+to learn English makes him communicate freely the knowledge of his own
+language: thus there is little difficulty in fixing him over a glass of
+Constantia, upon which occasions he contributes largely to Mr.
+Clifford's vocabulary. Some of our words the Loo-chooans cannot
+pronounce; the letter _l_ preceded by _c_ appears the most difficult;
+they call Clifford "Criffar," and even this requires many efforts: not
+one of the natives has yet been able to make any thing of child; they
+call it shoidah, choiah, and chyad.
+
+26th of September.--No boats have been near us to-day, and we might
+readily land if we chose it; but Captain Maxwell is resolved not to do
+so till he gets the consent of the natives.
+
+27th of September.--As we were still prevented from going on shore, we
+amused ourselves by examining a reef which forms the north side of the
+anchorage. We found a field of coral about half a mile square, dry at
+low water, with the surf breaking very high on the outer edge, which
+lies exposed to the waves from the north. The surface of the rock is
+every where worn into small holes, which being left full of water as the
+tide goes out, are occupied by a number of beautiful blue fish. The
+coral is exceedingly hard, and though at many places it sticks up in
+sharp points, it requires a hammer of considerable weight to break it,
+and emits sparks like flint when struck; in a short time it entirely
+defaces the hammer. This extent of level space has suggested the idea of
+measuring a base on it in order to survey the anchorage, since there
+appears so little chance of our being allowed to land for this purpose
+on the beach.
+
+While we were deliberating on this matter, we had a striking proof of
+the inconvenience to which we were likely to be exposed during this
+survey, by the tide rising and fairly washing us off. Notwithstanding
+this, we determined to commence next morning, and returned to make
+preparations, in high spirits at the prospect of an occupation, if not
+on terra firma, at least out of the ship, within whose sides we had been
+confined so long. On returning, we found that Captain Maxwell had
+arranged a party to visit the small island and reef which we were so
+close to on the 14th instant; the survey was therefore postponed.
+
+Jeeroo sent us off some fresh fish to-day; some were red, and one or two
+blue: he came himself afterwards, and was happy to find us much
+gratified by his present. A formal message was sent to-day to the chiefs
+in attendance, stating that both ships were in want of fresh water, and
+that the boats must go on shore with casks to bring some off. In a short
+time after this message had been delivered, a number of canoes came
+alongside with large tubs of water; a strong proof of their alertness in
+getting rid of all our excuses for landing, and at the same time, it
+must be owned, of their readiness to supply our wants. An elderly
+gentleman, not a chief, visited us to-day, accompanied by his secretary.
+His appearance and manners being greatly in his favour, we paid him all
+the attention in our power. His wish was to be permitted to go all over
+the ship at his leisure; and in this way he examined every thing on
+board with far more attention than any body had done before him. His
+secretary, who was equally inquisitive, accompanied him in order to take
+notes. He employed himself for about six hours in examining the upper
+deck, and never quitted any thing till he understood its use. While he
+was thus occupied, he was attended by the sailors, who were pleased with
+his reverend appearance, and very readily assisted the old man in his
+enquiries.
+
+It was interesting to observe, indeed, how early the gentle and engaging
+manners of all classes here won upon the sailors, no less than upon the
+officers. The natives from the first were treated with entire
+confidence; no watch was ever kept over them, nor were they excluded
+from any part of the ships; and not only was nothing stolen, but when
+any thing was lost, nobody even suspected for an instant, that it had
+been taken by them.
+
+The old man next came down to the cabin, where he remained a long time
+examining the books and furniture, and occasionally engaging in
+conversation with Mr. Clifford, for whose Vocabulary he supplied many
+new words, and corrected others which had been written down erroneously.
+He would not accept any thing valuable, but was grateful for samples of
+rope, canvas, and cloth. This old gentleman renewed his examination of
+the brig next day; nor was it till the third day that he completed his
+survey.
+
+28th of September.--At sunrise we set out for Reef Island, which lies
+about six miles from the anchorage: we reached it in about an hour, but
+as it was low water, the coral was left almost bare for a considerable
+way out, and our large boat could not get near the beach. In this
+dilemma we took possession of a canoe which was at anchor, and in
+several trips all the party landed. Near a hut we saw about a dozen
+people who stood looking at us till we landed, and then ran away,
+leaving their tobacco-pipes, pouches, and various other things on the
+ground about the hut, in which we found a pot of boiled sweet potatoes
+and several jars of water. Having, in vain, tried to allay the
+apprehensions of the natives by waving to them, to induce them to
+approach us, we sat down to breakfast; which we had hardly done, when
+two of them, an old man and a boy, came to the door of our tent and
+prostrated themselves before us, apparently in great alarm, for they
+answered incoherently, "ooa" (yes) to every question we asked them. At
+last we raised the old man on his knees, but he would not quit this
+posture till we gave him a glass of rum, which re-assured him a little,
+and shortly afterwards he consented to stand on his legs. Having thus
+gradually gained confidence, he made signs that we had taken his canoe:
+upon which an order was given to the coxswain to restore it. He guessed
+immediately what was said, and in the joy of his heart was proceeding to
+prostrate himself again, but was stopped by our holding out buttons and
+some pieces of meat and bread to him, which he received in both hands,
+and touching his head each time with the presents, made three low
+obeisances and retired.
+
+On rising from breakfast we found, near the tent, about a dozen natives,
+who, in most respects, resembled our friends at Napakiang, but were not
+so neatly dressed; and their hair, instead of being formed into a knot,
+was allowed to fly loose. During the morning the party amused themselves
+in various ways. Some took their guns and went in search of curlews and
+sea-snipes: others set out to explore the reefs; and two or three
+remained near the tent, for the purpose of making observations on the
+sun at noon; but as it became cloudy about this time, the latter party
+failed in their object. The rest were more successful; the sportsmen
+having shot some game for dinner; and the other party having found all
+things favourable for inspecting the reef.
+
+The examination of a coral reef during the different stages of one
+tide, is particularly interesting. When the tide has left it for some
+time it becomes dry, and appears to be a compact rock, exceedingly hard
+and ragged; but as the tide rises, and the waves begin to wash over it,
+the coral worms protrude themselves from holes which were before
+invisible. These animals are of a great variety of shapes and sizes, and
+in such prodigious numbers, that, in a short time, the whole surface of
+the rock appears to be alive and in motion. The most common worm is in
+the form of a star, with arms from four to six inches long, which are
+moved about with a rapid motion in all directions, probably to catch
+food. Others are so sluggish, that they may be mistaken for pieces of
+the rock, and are generally of a dark colour, and from four to five
+inches long, and two or three round. When the coral is broken, about
+high water mark, it is a solid hard stone, but if any part of it be
+detached at a spot which the tide reaches every day, it is found to be
+full of worms of different lengths and colours, some being as fine as a
+thread and several feet long, of a bright yellow, and sometimes of a
+blue colour: others resemble snails, and some are not unlike lobsters in
+shape, but soft, and not above two inches long[10].
+
+The growth of coral appears to cease when the worm is no longer exposed
+to the washing of the sea. Thus, a reef rises in the form of a
+cauliflower, till its top has gained the level of the highest tides,
+above which the worm has no power to advance, and the reef of course no
+longer extends itself upwards. The other parts, in succession, reach the
+surface, and there stop, forming in time a level field with steep sides
+all round. The reef, however, continually increases, and being prevented
+from going higher, extends itself laterally in all directions. But this
+growth being as rapid at the upper edge as it is lower down, the
+steepness of the face of the reef is still preserved. These are the
+circumstances which render coral reefs so dangerous in navigation; for,
+in the first place, they are seldom seen above the water; and, in the
+next, their sides are so steep, that a ship's bows may strike against
+the rock before any change of soundings has given warning of the danger.
+
+The island at high water is formed into three parts, which at low water
+are joined by reefs; the whole being about two and a half or three miles
+from east to west, and tolerably clear of rocks on the south side; but
+on the north it is guarded by a semicircle of coral extending upwards of
+a mile from the shore. On the centre island is only one hut, which, as
+there was reason to believe it to be the actual abode of the
+inhabitants, it may be allowable to describe. The walls were sunk under
+ground, so that only the roof appeared from without, the inside was
+fifteen feet by six: the walls of neatly squared stones, being two feet
+high, and the roof in the middle about six or seven high, formed of a
+ridge pole supported in the centre by a forked stick; the rafters of
+rough branches were covered with reeds, and thatched over with the leaf
+of the wild pine, which grows on all the coral islands. The fire-place
+was at one end on a raised part of the floor, and the other end appeared
+to be the sleeping place. It was conjectured, that this wretched place
+could only be meant as a temporary residence of fishermen, whose nets we
+saw lying about; but the number of water jars and cooking utensils which
+we found in and about it, gave it the appearance of a fixed habitation.
+
+It was almost dark when we quitted the island, and the tide carrying us
+out of our proper course, we missed the ships and grounded on the reefs
+near the town; but as the tide was flowing, we easily got off, and by
+coasting along, soon gained the anchorage.
+
+Sunday, 29th of September.--This day is memorable, on account of its
+being the first on which we were permitted to land.
+
+Yesterday, when we were absent at Reef Island, the chiefs had come on
+board to say that we might land, but that our walk must be confined to
+the beach, and that we were neither to enter the town, nor to go into
+the country. At one o'clock several of the chiefs came on board and
+accompanied us to the beach, where we landed amidst an immense crowd,
+and were handed along by Ookooma and the rest, who, in their desire to
+be civil, held us by the arms. The day, however, being excessively hot,
+and the sand deep, we found this troublesome, and begged leave to walk
+alone, to which they reluctantly consented, and we proceeded along the
+beach for a quarter of a mile.
+
+Beginning to get tired of our walk, we stopped and expressed some
+surprise at such a reception, and told them how disagreeable it was to
+us to be in the sun at such an hour. But our remonstrances did not
+produce much effect, for, on our objecting particularly to the heat,
+they shewed us to a sort of cave in a rock on the beach, where they put
+down a mat and wished us to drink tea in the shade, since we disliked
+the sun. This could not be submitted to, however, and we told them that
+our object in landing was not to sit down on the beach to drink tea, but
+to walk about under the trees in order to recover our health, impaired
+by a long stay on board ship. They tried all their eloquence to persuade
+us that our walk, thus limited, was perfectly pleasant; till at length
+Captain Maxwell gave them to understand, that he wished to go to the top
+of the hills under the trees; but that, as he did not mean to advance a
+single step beyond what was approved of, he would return instantly to
+the ship if they persisted in confining him to the beach. A consultation
+was held upon this, during which, frequent reference was made to several
+elderly men, whose opinions appeared to have great weight. They did not
+wear the dress of chiefs, but, from all that passed, we suspected them
+to be persons about court, who had been sent to assist the councils of
+the local commission, without superseding its authority. They at last
+agreed to our going to the top of the hill, taking the precaution before
+we set out, of sending on a couple of runners, probably to give warning
+to the women who might be in that direction. About half way up the road,
+which winds along a steep face, there is a neatly-built well, supplied
+by a stream which runs along a carved water-course, and near it were
+three or four rudely carved stones about a foot long and four inches
+across, with slow matches and a small quantity of rice laid upon each.
+Mr. Clifford distinctly made out that this was meant as a religious
+offering, but its precise object could not be discovered, though it was
+conjectured that the guardian deity of the well might have some title to
+the honour. The side of the hill is cut into horizontal irregular
+terraces, which are cultivated with apparent care, and irrigated by
+means of ditches leading from the well. On gaining the brow of the hill
+which overlooks the anchorage, the chiefs stopped, but as we were within
+a few yards of the summit, where we saw a shady grove, we begged them to
+proceed, to which, after a short deliberation, they consented. By
+gaining this eminence, we commanded a view of an extensive valley more
+beautiful than any thing we had ever seen; and on the side opposite to
+us we saw the large building spoken of before, generally suspected to be
+the King's palace: our questions, however, on this subject were always
+answered in so evasive a manner, and with such apparent distress, that
+we seldom made any allusion either to it or to the King.
+
+Here we remained under the trees for an hour, drinking tea and smoking
+pipes in company with all the chiefs, besides four or five of the old
+men mentioned before. We amused them by lighting their pipes with a
+burning glass; but one old gentleman, who suspected some trick, and did
+not join in the surprise shewn by the rest, held out his hand that it
+might be exposed to the focus; and he was soon undeceived, to the great
+amusement of the circle. The magnifying power of the glass engaged the
+attention of them all, but they were differently affected by it: a
+start and an exclamation of pleased surprise was the most usual effect;
+some laughed immoderately at every experiment, while others were made
+very grave by it, who had not been particularly serious before.
+Advantage was taken of the moment when their admiration of the glass was
+at the highest, to present it to Jeeroo, whose good-will it was thought
+expedient to conciliate: he had not expected this, and felt obliged to
+us for so public a mark of our esteem.
+
+A man on horseback happening to ride by, it was gravely suggested to the
+chiefs that nothing would so materially contribute to the establishment
+of our health as this species of exercise; but they insisted upon
+treating our request as a mere joke. On the way back an attempt was made
+to vary the walk by turning to the left on reaching the brow of the
+hill, and so walking along the edge of the cliff to another road; the
+chiefs observed upon this that we should infallibly tumble down and kill
+ourselves; affecting, notwithstanding the absurdity of any such
+apprehensions, to be greatly distressed at our danger: so we turned
+back, after having had a short interview with an old man seated in a
+shed on the edge of the precipice. His white beard, which covered his
+breast, suited well with his sedate and contemplative air, and gave him
+much the aspect of a hermit. Our appearance did not in the least
+discompose him, nor did he take any notice of us till desired to do so
+by Ookooma; he then bowed slightly, but immediately resumed his fixed
+look, as if he had been quite alone.
+
+As we drew near to the place where we had landed, our companions
+surprised us by an invitation to a feast, prepared, they said, on our
+account in a temple close to the shore. Here they gave us painted eggs,
+smoked salt pork, and various preparations of eggs and fish, with sweet
+cakes in numberless forms, besides tea, pipes, and sackee, a light kind
+of wine made hot. Nothing could be more cheerful than they all were
+to-day: they placed us on the floor at the upper end of the room, and,
+for some time, they would not allow us to move; but Mr. Clifford, who,
+from the progress he has made in their language, has become a great
+favourite, was invited to join a merry party in the verandah, to which
+they brought flowers, fruits, and every thing they could think of, in
+order to learn their English names, and give in return those of
+Loo-choo.
+
+On reaching the boats, Jeeroo and two of his friends seemed disposed to
+go on board; they were accordingly invited to do so, which made him so
+happy, that he took a rudely-carved ivory ornament, in the shape of a
+monkey, from his tobacco-pouch, and gave it to me. Dinner was on table
+when they came on board, but there was time before taking my friends
+below, to intimate to the servants, that these gentlemen were going to
+dine with me, so that when we reached the cabin, three plates were laid
+in addition. They had probably not expected to find dinner ready for
+them on board, for they expressed surprise at these preparations having
+been made, and would not sit down for some time. When the covers were
+removed, they became silent, and looked on either hand for directions
+how to proceed. On being helped to soup, they did not stir till they saw
+us take spoons, in the management of which they shewed but little
+awkwardness. The knife and fork gave them more trouble, but they set
+seriously about acquiring a knowledge of their use, and, in a short
+time, found no difficulty.
+
+Their grave propriety on this occasion is the more worthy of remark,
+from its standing in some measure opposed to our own behaviour under
+similar circumstances: for instance, when we first tried to eat with
+their chopsticks: on that occasion there was a sort of giggling
+embarrassment shewn by some of us, a contempt as it were of ourselves,
+for condescending to employ an effort to acquire the use of a thing
+apparently so unimportant. Their diminutive cups and odd dishes, too,
+sometimes excited mirth amongst us. Our Loo-choo friends, however, never
+committed themselves in this way; a difference of manners, which may
+arise from their looking upon us as their superiors, and vice versa; but
+even admitting this, which we were sufficiently disposed to do, it is
+certainly no excuse for us.
+
+On this occasion Jeeroo and his friends had evidently made up their
+minds to find every thing quite new, for all three made a slight
+involuntary exclamation when one of the covers was lifted up, and shewed
+a dish of their own sweet potatoes. They ate of every thing, using a
+great deal of salt, with the fineness and whiteness of which they were
+much pleased. A tart, however, being put on the table, they all objected
+at first to touching it; they would not say why: they were at length
+prevailed upon to taste it, which they had no sooner done, than they
+exclaimed that it was "masa! masa!" (good! good!) It was made of Scotch
+marmalade, and Jeeroo, in recommending it to his friends, told them it
+was "injassa, amasa," (bitter, sweet), a union which they appeared not
+to have met with before. They drank wine with us, but said they feared
+it would make them tipsy; upon which we shewed them our mode of mixing
+it with water, which was evidently new to them, for they relished it so
+much in this form, that they were in a fair way of running unconsciously
+into the very excess which they dreaded. As soon as the cloth was
+removed, they rose, and went to walk about the ship: on our shewing a
+wish to accompany them, they intreated us to keep our seats.
+
+During dinner, though it was the first they had ever seen in the
+European style, these people not only betrayed no awkwardness, but
+adopted our customs, such as drinking wine with each other, so readily,
+that we were frequently at a loss to determine whether they had but just
+learned these customs, or whether their own usages in these cases were
+similar to ours. As they pushed off in their boat they were asked to
+sing, which they did at once, and by their manner we suspected that the
+song had some allusion to us, but we could not make out the words.
+
+30th of September.--During the whole of this morning we were engaged in
+the survey, accompanied by several of the midshipmen of both ships. We
+measured a base, and continued taking angles till the tide rose and
+drove us off.
+
+1st of October.--As a free intercourse was now established with the
+natives at this place, and little doubt remained of our being able to
+gain their permission in a day or two for landing the Alceste's stores,
+it became an object to ascertain, without further delay, whether or not
+this anchorage was better than the harbour described by the natives as
+being a few miles only to the northward. While any apprehensions existed
+of our not being able to land here, it was not thought prudent to send
+the Lyra to look for that harbour, lest the chiefs should become still
+more suspicious of our intentions. At this moment, however, there was
+reason to believe that the chiefs wished the Alceste to remain where she
+was, and it was expected that any show of moving to another harbour
+would stimulate their exertions to render our present situation
+agreeable.
+
+The Lyra was accordingly ordered to weigh this morning at daylight, for
+the purpose of examining the coast for ten or twelve leagues to the
+northward. We went out by a narrow passage through the reefs, and in the
+course of the morning beat up to Sugar Loaf Island. We did not land upon
+it, but passed near enough to see that it is richly cultivated on the
+lower parts, and that all the houses are collected into villages, shaded
+as usual by large trees round the bottom, and for one-third of the way
+up the sides of the peak. As this was our furthest point in the present
+survey, we tacked on reaching the Sugar Loaf, and coasted round the
+shores of a large square bay on the west side of the great island. The
+wind shifted gradually as we sailed along, blowing directly off the
+shore at every place, by which means we were enabled to complete the
+circuit of the bay before dark, after which we anchored in sixty-five
+fathoms water. Next morning we resumed our examination of the coast,
+but as the weather was fine, we hoisted out a boat and pulled close
+along the shore, while the brig kept her course at the distance of
+several miles. In this manner we traced the whole shore, till we came
+close to Napakiang, without seeing any port. We tried to land at several
+places, but were every where kept off by coral reefs stretching along
+the coast, at the distance of two or three hundred yards, and forming,
+to strangers at least, an impenetrable barrier. The canoes of the
+natives paddled away from us, and passed through the surf by passages
+which we were afraid to approach. We returned to the brig about two
+o'clock, and at three anchored in our former place at Napakiang.
+
+The departure of the Lyra had excited a great sensation on shore; the
+chiefs came off to inquire of Captain Maxwell where the "honee gua"
+(little ship) was; but he did not choose to satisfy them, except by
+saying that they had trifled with him so long, and refused to let him
+land his casks and stores with such obstinacy, that he must endeavour to
+find some more favourable place at which to refit his ship. The effect
+was exactly what he wished; they intreated him not to think of moving
+from Napakiang; offered him not only large boats to put his stores in,
+but said he should have store-rooms on shore for whatever he desired,
+while his ship was refitting. They moreover granted him permission to
+land with his officers, and to go to the top of the hill without being
+guarded as formerly.
+
+On the Lyra's anchoring, the chiefs came on board in great agitation,
+desiring to know what we had discovered. As we had actually nothing to
+relate, there was little difficulty in keeping our secret. They
+accompanied me on board the Alceste when I went to make my report, but
+Captain Maxwell, having found the advantage he had already gained by
+keeping them in ignorance of his intentions, was nowise communicative.
+They now offered to allow his people to land for the purpose of washing
+their clothes, which they had before refused to do, and in short, were
+in a mood to grant any thing, provided we were willing to remain at this
+part of the island. They did not pretend that this was out of regard for
+us, and it was easy to see that they apprehended more trouble in
+managing us any where else than at this place. Amongst the arguments
+used by them to dissuade us from going to the other end of the island,
+they said it was inhabited by savages. It came out accidentally too,
+that in the event of the ship's actually proceeding to other parts of
+the island, the six chiefs were to accompany us: so that they were
+probably influenced by considerations of personal convenience to make
+every exertion to prevent our moving.
+
+3d of October.--The Lyra's crew were allowed to go on shore to-day to
+wash their clothes, and amuse themselves by running about on the side of
+the hill. Two of the sailors of this party, who happened to be singing
+near the well, drew a number of natives round them, who expressed great
+pleasure at hearing their songs. At first the crowd consisted entirely
+of the peasantry, who listened with great attention, and never
+interrupted the sailors; but in about half an hour, a person of some
+rank, with a number of attendants, came up, and begged them to sing
+several of their songs over again: we could not find out who this person
+was, but it was probably one of the chiefs, some of whom are remarkably
+fond of our music.
+
+4th of October.--The survey on the reef was completed to-day: the only
+inconvenience we had experienced here, was the limited time which the
+tide allowed us each day, otherwise the situation was well adapted for a
+base, from its commanding a view of all parts of the anchorage. During
+the progress of the principal survey, the young gentlemen sent by
+Captain Maxwell, in conjunction with the midshipmen of the Lyra,
+completed a survey of the reef itself. A native of a genteel appearance,
+but not in the dress of a chief, visited the Lyra to-day, and gave me a
+present of two pipes and two bags of sweet potatoes.
+
+5th of October.--Captain Maxwell called for me this morning at sunrise,
+on his way to the shore. The chiefs had not expected us so early, and
+our only companion for some time was an old peasant, who now and then
+ran on before to give notice of our approach. Two well dressed people
+shortly afterwards came up, and continued with us during our walk, which
+at first lay along the beach, but afterwards led into the country; some
+exception was taken to this by our companions, but as no attention was
+paid to them, they desisted.
+
+After walking about a mile, we passed through a grove of young trees,
+and found ourselves close to a village, which lies in the bottom of a
+glen highly cultivated, the houses being almost entirely hid by trees,
+of which the bamboo is the most conspicuous.
+
+This village is surrounded by a close hedge, and every separate house
+also has an inclosure: some of the houses have attached to them neat
+arbours, formed of a light frame of bamboo covered with a variety of
+creepers. The rice fields are divided by small banks of earth, made to
+retain the water, and along the top of each bank there is a foot-path;
+the whole valley having much the air of a scene in India. A number of
+the villagers, accompanied by their children, came out to meet us, but
+there were no women amongst them: we passed on, as they were evidently
+averse to our entering the village.
+
+On our way across the valley we were attracted by the appearance of a
+cottage, so buried in foliage as to be completely hid from our view till
+we were within a few paces of the door. It was surrounded by a slight
+fence of rods, about an inch apart, with a line of creepers along the
+top, and hanging down on both sides: a wicker gate admitted us, and we
+entered the house, which we found divided into two apartments, eight
+feet square, besides a small verandah at one end. The floors, which were
+made of slips of bamboo, were raised about six inches from the ground,
+and covered with a straw mat. The walls were five feet high, being
+neatly wattled with split bamboo, above which rose a pointed thatched
+roof. It was occupied by an old man, whom we appeared to have disturbed
+at breakfast, for cups and tea-things were arranged on the floor; he
+asked us to sit down, and gave us pipes and tea. The little apartment we
+were in was as neat as any thing we had ever seen: on one side there was
+a set of shelves, with cups, bowls, and cooking utensils; on the others
+were hung various implements of husbandry, with hats and various
+dresses, all clean and in order. Higher up was a sort of loft or garret,
+formed by bamboo poles, laid horizontally from the top of the walls; on
+this were placed various tools, nets, and baskets. The fire-place was in
+the middle of one side, and sunk below the level. On the outside, in the
+space between the house and the fence, there was a pigeon house and a
+poultry yard, and close to the little verandah spoken of before, there
+stood two spinning-wheels of a light and ingenious construction. All
+round on the outside of the fence, the trees were high and thick; and
+though the sun was above the hills, the house was completely shaded
+except at the end, where a small opening admitted the rays into the
+verandah. We staid some time with the old farmer, trying to express our
+admiration of the simplicity and beauty of his cottage, and then went up
+the opposite side of the valley.
+
+Here we found a road like a dressed walk in a garden: following this, we
+passed through a series of beautiful groves of bamboo and other trees,
+till at length, after winding about a good deal, we came to a double row
+of tall pine trees, interspersed with many others whose names we did not
+know, so as to form a walk which must be shady at all hours of the day.
+This road we knew would lead to the town, and therefore when we had
+reached the highest point we turned to the right, and after a short walk
+reached the grove of trees which had been made the limit to our first
+walk on the 29th ultimo. At this place Captain Maxwell surprised the
+natives a good deal by shooting several birds on the wing, but they
+could not be prevailed upon to fire themselves, nor even to pull the
+trigger when no powder was in the pan.
+
+6th of October.--After divine service to-day on board the Alceste, a
+long conference was held between Captain Maxwell and the five chiefs,
+when, after a good deal of discussion, it was agreed on their part to
+allow the Alceste's stores to be landed, for the purpose of getting at
+the leak. Our means of interpreting on these occasions are not the best
+that could be wished; but John, our Chinese, is nevertheless a keen
+fellow, and very ready with answers when pressed. We generally explain
+as fully as possible to John what our wishes are, and then leave him to
+communicate them the best way he can. An instance of his quickness
+occurred to-day, which seems worth mentioning. John had communicated to
+them, by Captain Maxwell's desire, that as the leak complained of was in
+the magazine, it would be necessary to land the powder: they debated a
+long time upon this, and then asked John "Why the powder was not put on
+board the little ship?" John, who was not aware of any good reason,
+affected to be surprised at this question, which he refused to
+interpret, saying that if Captain Maxwell thought such a measure right,
+he would surely not have waited till they suggested it. The light in
+which he had thus put the question, made them earnestly desire him not
+to mention any thing about it, declaring at the same time, that they
+would willingly give a place for the powder, and for any other stores
+which Captain Maxwell might wish to land.
+
+To-day for the first time they talked unreservedly of the king, whose
+name even they had hitherto studiously avoided: they spoke freely of his
+majesty's having sent all the stock and vegetables with which we were
+daily supplied. Captain Maxwell, who of course was very desirous of
+opening a communication with the court, intimated his wish to pay his
+respects as soon as might be convenient. They heard this with apparent
+satisfaction, and signified that his request should be made known to the
+king. We are at a loss to discover what can have caused this change of
+manner. We can only conjecture, that perhaps the king, on hearing so
+many reports about us, may have become desirous of seeing us himself. At
+all events it is clear that some alteration in the instructions to the
+chiefs must have been made, otherwise they would have shewn their usual
+reserve when the king's name was mentioned, and would on no account have
+allowed us to talk of visiting him.
+
+At one o'clock we went on shore to look at the place assigned by the
+chiefs for the reception of the Alceste's stores. It is an oblong
+inclosure, sixty yards by forty, surrounded by a wall twelve feet high,
+rather well built with squared coral: the entrance is by a large gate on
+the south side, from which there extends raised gravel walks, with
+clipped hedges, the intermediate spaces being laid out in beds, like a
+garden. The temple in which we were feasted on the day of our first
+visit, occupies one corner of the inclosure; it is completely shaded by
+a grove of trees, which also overhang the wall. In that part of the
+garden directly opposite to the gate, at the upper end of the walk
+there is a smaller temple, nearly hid by the branches of several large
+banyan trees; and before it, at the distance of ten or twelve paces, a
+square awkward looking building, with a raised terrace round it. The
+temple first spoken of is divided by means of shifting partitions into
+four apartments, and a verandah running all round, having a row of
+carved wooden pillars on its outer edge to support the roof, which
+extends considerably beyond it. The floor of the verandah is two feet
+from the ground, the roof is sloping and covered with handsome tiles,
+those forming the eaves being ornamented with flowers and various
+figures in relief; there are also several out-houses, and a kitchen
+communicating with them by covered passages. In one of the inner
+apartments, at the upper end, there is a small recess containing a green
+shrub, in a high narrow flower-pot, having a Chinese inscription on a
+tablet hanging above it on the wall. On another side of the same room,
+there hangs the picture of a man rescuing a bird from the paws of a cat;
+the bird seems to have been just taken from a cage, which is tumbling
+over, with two other birds fluttering about in the inside: it is merely
+a sketch, but is executed in a spirited manner. In one of the back
+apartments we find three gilt images, eighteen inches high, with a
+flower in a vase before them. The roof of the temple within is ten feet
+high, and all the cornices, pillars, &c. are neatly carved into flowers
+and the figures of various animals. The ground immediately round it is
+divided into a number of small beds, planted with different shrubs and
+flowers; and on a pedestal of artificial rock, in one of the walks close
+to it, is placed a clay vessel of an elegant form, full of water, with a
+wooden ladle swimming on the top. On a frame near one of the out-houses,
+hangs a large bell, three feet high, of an inelegant shape, resembling a
+long bee-hive; the sides are two inches thick, and richly ornamented:
+its tone is uncommonly fine.
+
+It was determined to appropriate part of the large temple to the use of
+the sick and their attendants; the assistant surgeon of the Alceste
+taking one room, and the gunner, who was to have the whole inclosure in
+his charge, another. The small temple at the upper end, being a retired
+spot, was fixed upon for the Lyra's observatory; the square building in
+the centre seemed well adapted for a magazine. At the gate a notice was
+hung up, both in English and Loo-choo, signifying that no person was to
+enter without a written pass from Captain Maxwell, or from one of the
+chiefs.
+
+7th and 8th of October.--These days have been occupied in carrying the
+arrangements of Sunday into effect. It was very interesting to observe
+the care which the natives took of the sick, whom they assisted all the
+way from the beach to the temple; a number of people attended to support
+such of them as had barely strength enough to walk. When they were
+safely lodged, eggs, milk, fowls, and vegetables, were brought to them;
+and whenever any of them were tempted by the beauty of the scenery to
+walk out, several of the natives were ready to accompany them.
+
+The powder was landed, and Mr. Holman, the gunner of the frigate, began
+the operation of drying it on hides spread in the sun round the
+magazine. The cows and other stock were also landed. One of the cows
+calved that night, to the surprise of every body, and the great joy of
+the natives, who took a great fancy to the little bull born amongst
+them. Mr. Mayne, the master of the Alceste, took up his quarters in the
+temple, in order to be near his observatory, which was in the centre of
+the garden. The stores of all kinds were sent on shore from the Alceste,
+which produced an apparent confusion, and the chiefs, seeing so many
+valuable things lying about, began to fear that they would be taken
+away; at least, it was supposed that they had such an apprehension, for
+the wall of the temple was immediately fenced in by a sort of net-work
+of long bamboo poles, the ends of which were fixed in the ground at the
+foot of the wall on the outside, and the tops made to cross one another
+four or five feet above the wall. This contrivance, instead of rendering
+the place more secure, made it more accessible; but as our opinion was
+not asked, and we had no apprehensions of theft, we let them proceed in
+their own way.
+
+Mrs. Loy, wife of the boatswain of the Alceste, was the only female in
+our squadron, and as such excited no small interest at this place. She
+was a perfectly well behaved person, and sufficiently neat in her dress,
+but without great pretensions to good looks. The natives, who from the
+first paid her much attention, shewed at all times their desire of
+granting her every indulgence. They even went so far as to say she might
+go into the city; but, upon consulting with her husband, who was
+apprehensive of some accident, she declined it. When this circumstance
+became known to us, we easily convinced the boatswain that no mischief
+could possibly arise from trusting his wife amongst such kind people;
+but Mrs. Loy could not be persuaded of this; and thus was lost the only
+opportunity of seeing the town which occurred during all our stay.
+
+Two of the natives have been studying English with great assiduity, and
+with considerable success. One is called Madera, the other Anya. They
+carry note books in imitation of Mr. Clifford, in which they record in
+their own characters every word they learn. They are both keen fellows,
+and are always amongst the strangers. From the respect occasionally paid
+to them, it is suspected that their rank is higher than they give out,
+and that their object in pretending to be people of ordinary rank, is to
+obtain a more free intercourse with all classes on board the ships.
+Madera, by his liveliness and his propriety of manners, has made himself
+a great favourite; he adopts our customs with a sort of intuitive
+readiness, sits down to table, uses a knife and fork, converses, and
+walks with us, in short, does every thing that we do, quite as a matter
+of course, without any apparent effort or study. He is further
+recommended to us by the free way in which he communicates every thing
+relating to his country; so that as he advances in English, and we in
+Loo-choo, he may be the means of giving us much information. As an
+instance of his progress in English, it may be mentioned, that one day
+he came on board the Lyra, and said, "The Ta-yin speak me, 'you go ship,
+John come shore;'" by which we understood that Captain Maxwell had sent
+him on board the brig for the interpreter. This was about three weeks
+after our arrival.
+
+[Illustration: PRIEST and GENTLEMAN of LOO-CHOO.]
+
+Most of the natives have acquired a little English, so that Mr. Clifford
+has now no difficulty in finding people willing to instruct him, and to
+take pains in correcting his pronunciation. One of his teachers, called
+Yackabee Oomeejeero, will not permit him to write down a single word
+till he has acquired the exact Loo-choo sound: but he is like the rest
+in shewing an invincible objection to giving any information about the
+women. He admits that he is married, and gives the names of his sons:
+but when his wife or daughters are alluded to, he becomes uneasy, and
+changes the subject. On Mr. Clifford's gravely telling him that he
+believed there were no women on the island, he was thrown off his guard,
+and answered hastily, that he had both a wife and daughter, but
+instantly checking himself, turned the conversation another way. On the
+picture of an English lady being shewn to him, he commended it highly,
+saying, at the same time, "Doochoo innago whooco oorung" (Loo-choo
+women are not handsome.) This old gentleman is a better teacher than
+scholar; he calls the letter L "airoo;" veal, "bairoo;" flail,
+"frayroo;" in which instances of mispronunciation, we may recognize a
+difficulty not uncommon amongst English children.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 6: This circumstance is by no means common, and therefore
+cannot be depended on. In fine weather these reefs give no warning
+whatever, and a ship on approaching them ought invariably to have a boat
+a-head.]
+
+[Footnote 7: Chin-chin in the corrupt dialect of Canton, means the
+ceremony of salutation, which consists in the action of holding up the
+closed hands, pressed together before the face, and bowing at the same
+time.]
+
+[Footnote 8: Ta-whang-tee is Chinese for Emperor, King.]
+
+[Footnote 9: Chopsticks are two pieces of ivory or wood, about a foot in
+length, of the thickness of a quill; they serve in China instead of a
+knife and fork, and are held in the right hand. Until the difficult art
+of holding them is attained, they are perfectly useless. The Chief at
+this feast, seeing that we made little progress, ordered sharp pointed
+sticks to be brought, which he good humouredly recommended our using
+instead of the chopsticks.]
+
+[Footnote 10: A large collection, which was at this time made of these
+Zoophites, was unfortunately lost in the Alceste.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+ The Lyra sent to survey the Island of Loo-choo--Discovery of Port
+ Melville--Description of that Harbour, and the Villages on its
+ Banks--Lyra nearly wrecked--Interview with Natives at the South
+ Point--Return to Napakiang--Behaviour of the Natives at a Seaman's
+ Funeral--Madera's Character and Conduct--Sociable Habits of the
+ Natives--Dinner given to the Chiefs of the Island by Captain
+ Maxwell--Madera's Behaviour on this Occasion--Two Women seen--A Lady
+ of Rank visits the Boatswain's Wife--Captain Maxwell fractures his
+ Finger--Loo-choo Surgeon--Concern of the Natives--Visit of the
+ Prince--Discussion about the King of Loo-choo's Letter--Madera
+ appears in a new Character--Feast given by the Prince--List of
+ Supplies given to the Ships--Behaviour of the Prince on taking
+ Leave--Preparations for Departure--Madera's Distress--Last Interview
+ with the Chiefs--Brief Memorandums upon the Religion, Manners, and
+ Customs of Loo-choo--Advice to a Stranger visiting this Island.
+
+
+As soon as the survey of Napakiang anchorage was completed, and a
+perfectly good understanding established with the natives, it was
+determined to make a survey of the whole island, and the Lyra was
+ordered upon this service. She were absent about a week, during which
+period the general chart of the island was constructed. It will be
+obvious to every one acquainted with the subject, that, in so short a
+time, a very exact survey of the coast of an island nearly sixty miles
+long could not have been made: yet, as the weather was in general fine,
+and other circumstances favourable, the chart will be found sufficiently
+correct for most practical purposes. As the chart and the nautical and
+hydrographical details are given in the Appendix, I propose at present
+to relate only such particulars of the cruise as seem likely to interest
+the general reader.
+
+9th of October.--At daybreak we got under weigh and stood to sea through
+a passage discovered by the boats; it was so extremely narrow, that the
+least deviation from the course brought us close to the rocks. We were
+regulated in steering by two marks on the land, which lie in the same
+straight line with the centre of the passage; these it is necessary to
+keep always together: but not conceiving that such nicety was required
+while sailing out, the marks were allowed to separate, by which we found
+ourselves in a minute or two within a few yards of a coral reef, the
+ragged tops of which were distinctly seen two or three feet below the
+surface, whilst, at the same time, the leadsman on the opposite side
+sounded in nine fathoms. This early proof of the danger of navigating
+amongst coral, by teaching us the necessity of extreme caution, was of
+great importance to us in our future operations.
+
+As the coast lying between Napakiang and the Sugar Loaf had already been
+examined, we proceeded at once round that island, which, from its having
+the same aspect on every bearing, and being quite different in shape
+from any land in this quarter, is an excellent land-mark for navigators.
+The natives call it Eegooshcoond, or castle[11]. The English name was
+given, I believe, by Captain Broughton.
+
+Having rounded this peak and stood in for the north-west side of the
+Great Loo-choo, where there is a deep bight, a small island was observed
+close in shore, behind which it was thought there might be shelter for
+ships; the coast, however, being unknown to us, it was not thought safe
+to carry the brig very close in, and a boat was therefore dispatched
+with an officer to reconnoitre: he returned at eight o'clock to say that
+there was a harbour in the main land, the entrance to which lay on the
+inside of the small island mentioned before; but that the passages were
+narrow and winding, and that a more careful examination was necessary
+before the brig could venture in.
+
+11th of October.--In the morning we again stood in, using the
+precaution of sending a boat a-head to sound the way; when we had nearly
+reached the entrance we anchored, and proceeded in three boats to
+examine the harbour discovered last night. As it was near noon when we
+passed the small island, we landed and observed the meridian altitude of
+the sun; after which we entered the harbour in the main island, by an
+intricate passage of about a quarter of a mile in length, and at one
+place not two hundred yards wide. Here we found ourselves in a circular
+bason upwards of half a mile across, with deep water, and completely
+sheltered from all winds. On its western shore we saw a large and
+beautiful village almost hid amongst trees, with a high wooded range
+behind it stretching to the south. The eastern shore was low and laid
+out in salt fields, with a few huts here and there. At first sight this
+bason did not appear to have any outlet except by the one we had
+examined; but on rowing to its upper or southern side, we found that it
+joined by a narrow channel with another harbour still larger, and if
+possible more beautiful than the first, for here the land was high on
+both sides, and richly wooded from top to bottom. Proceeding onwards
+through this bason, which had all the appearance of an inland lake, we
+came to another outlet, not above a hundred yards wide, formed by cliffs
+rising abruptly out of the water to the height of a hundred feet. Both
+sides being covered with trees, which almost met overhead, the space
+below was rendered cool and pleasant, and the water, thus sheltered from
+every wind, was as smooth as glass. We rowed along for some time by
+various windings through this fairy scene in total uncertainty of what
+was to come next, and at last, after advancing about three miles, it
+opened into an extensive lake several miles in length, studded with
+numerous small islands.
+
+The depth of water in the lake varied from four to six fathoms; but in
+the narrow neck which connects it with the sea the depth is from ten to
+twenty fathoms, being deepest at the narrowest parts. Ships might ride
+in any part of this extraordinary harbour, in perfect safety during the
+most violent tempests: and the shores are so varied, that every purpose
+of re-equipment might be served. At some places natural wharfs are
+formed by the rocks, and eight and ten fathoms water close to them.
+Ships might lie alongside these places, or might heave down by them:
+there are also shallow spots on which ships might be careened. Many of
+the cliffs are hollowed into caves, which would answer for storehouses;
+and in the numerous lawns on both sides encampments might be formed of
+any number of people.
+
+We rowed directly across, and landed at the southern side at the foot
+of a wooded range of hills, which forms the southern boundary of the
+lake. As no road was observed, it was resolved to go directly up the
+hill, and, in about an hour, after a good deal of scrambling amongst the
+bushes and long grass, we gained the top, where we found a neat pathway
+with a ditch on each side, and a hedge growing on the top of the mound,
+formed of the earth from the ditch; it resembled not a little an English
+lane. Without knowing where this might take us to, we followed it, in
+the hope of meeting some of the people, but in this we were
+disappointed. Yet this place must, at times, be frequented, as we
+observed a number of similar paths leading to the right and left.
+
+The trees on this range of hills are low, and of no great beauty; the
+fir is the most common, but we did not know the names of the rest. After
+walking about a mile, our path took an abrupt turn down the brow of the
+hill, and appeared to lead to a large village at some distance. The view
+from this elevation was very satisfactory, as it enabled us to check our
+rough eye draught of the harbour and coast. The road down the hill was
+so steep that it was just possible to stand upon it, being inclined, as
+was conjectured on the spot, at an angle of 45º. At the foot of the hill
+there was a little cottage, consisting of two parts, made of wattled
+rattans, connected by a light open bamboo roof, so covered with a large
+leaved creeper as to afford a complete shelter from the sun. The
+cottage, which was thatched, was enveloped in creepers, encircled by the
+usual rattan fence at two or three yards distance. One of the wings was
+occupied by goats; the other, which was dark, seemed to belong to the
+people, who had deserted it on our approach. There being only a small
+hole in the wall to admit light and air, and to allow the smoke to
+escape, every thing inside was black and dirty. Two spears hung on one
+side, which, upon enquiry afterwards, we were told were for striking
+fish.
+
+On coming to our boats, we found them surrounded by a party of the
+natives, smaller in stature than our friends at Napakiang, and shewing
+less curiosity: probably their surprise at our sudden appearance had not
+subsided sufficiently to allow of their indulging curiosity in detail. A
+large party of them watched attentively while a musket was loaded, and
+when pointed over their heads in the air, they seemed aware that
+something was going to happen, but from their not shrinking or removing
+out of the way, it seemed they knew not what. When it was fired, the
+whole party fell as if they had been shot, but rose instantly again, and
+looking to the right and left of each other, indulged in a timorous
+laugh. A cartridge was given to one man, with which he was nearly
+blowing himself up by placing it on his lighted pipe. The officer of the
+boat informed us that a gentleman had come to him and offered his horse
+to ride; he had dismounted for that purpose, but the horse was
+frightened, and would not suffer the officer to get upon him. We saw
+this person riding along when we were at the top of the hill; he called
+out to us repeatedly, probably to offer his horse, but we thought he
+wished to dissuade us from walking over the hill, and accordingly took
+no notice of him.
+
+In the meantime Mr. Clifford, who had been unwell, and felt unequal to
+the labour of climbing the hill, proceeded in one of the boats towards a
+large village on the eastern side of the lake. He was met by a number of
+the inhabitants, whose dress and appearance were inferior to what we had
+been accustomed to see at Napakiang; on his asking them in Loo-choo for
+some water, they gave it cheerfully; but they shewed little curiosity,
+and the party which followed wherever he went, seemed to have no other
+object than to prevent disturbance. They made no objection to his going
+into the village, where he saw in one inclosure a complete farm-yard.
+The principal house was closed, but to the offices there was free
+access. In the stable were two handsome bay ponies; there was also a
+well stocked pig-sty, and a poultry-house. In another quarter stood a
+mill for husking corn, consisting of a grooved solid cylinder of wood,
+fitting neatly into a hollow cylinder, the sides of which were also
+grooved; near this lay a hand flour-mill and several baskets of cotton.
+In another part of the court was a granary erected on posts about six
+feet above the ground, having billets of fire-wood piled below it. At
+another place, under a tree in the village, he saw a blacksmith's anvil
+fixed in a block; the forge was of masonry, having an air hole, but the
+bellows was wanting.
+
+In the centre of the village stood a building like a temple, surrounded
+by a stone wall. It was filled with elegant vases of different shapes
+and sizes, closed up and ranged in rows on the floor; the verandah
+encircling the building was also covered with vases. According to the
+account of the natives, the remains of the dead are deposited in these
+jars. Round the building bamboo poles were placed so as to lean against
+the thatched roof, having notches cut in them, to which bundles of
+flowers were hung, some fresh, others decayed, apparently funereal
+offerings; but their exact import Mr. Clifford was not able to learn.
+The elegant shape of the vases, and the tasteful way in which they were
+arranged, with the flowers hanging all round, gave to this cemetery an
+air of cheerfulness, which we are in the habit of thinking unsuitable
+to a depository of the dead.
+
+This village, which is at the head of a bay, is sheltered from the north
+wind by a row of trees between it and the beach; behind it is sheltered
+by a range of hills. A broad road runs between it and the water; trees
+are planted among the houses, so as nearly to conceal them. In the
+middle of the village near the cemetery, in an open square, there is a
+cluster of granaries like the one described above; the walls are made of
+wattled rattan, and overhang the lower part.
+
+Mr. Clifford tried in vain to see the Chief of the village; but either
+there was no such person, or he was out of the way: the inhabitants
+pointed out a man on horseback as a Chief, who passed on to another
+village; this was probably the same man who offered his horse to Mr.
+Hall, the officer of the boat. Mr. Clifford went to the top of the range
+behind the village, and afterwards into the valley on the other side,
+which he found highly cultivated.
+
+From the heights we saw that the large space which was at first
+considered a lake, communicates with the sea to the north-eastward, as
+well as by the narrow passage through which we had come, but there was
+not time to allow of its being fully examined. As we returned by the
+narrow straits, we called at some of the small villages on the eastern
+side. At one of these, the people of the village, headed by a man who
+appeared to be superior to the rest, came towards the boat, and stopped
+for some minutes at the distance of fifty yards; after which, appearing
+to have gained confidence, they came on, with the old man in front,
+carrying a green bough in his hand. He would not come close, however,
+till invited by Mr. Clifford in Loo-choo to look at the boat; he then
+advanced and presented his bough, in return for which we broke a branch
+from a tree, and gave it to him with the same formality he had used
+towards us. Soon after this exchange was made, they left us, and went to
+examine the boat, to fishermen always an object of great interest.
+
+On our entering the village we were met by a man who appeared to be the
+principal person of the place; he was very polite, shewed us through the
+village, and took us over his garden, where he had some sugar-cane
+growing; this we admired very much, upon which he ordered one of the
+finest of the canes to be taken up by the roots and presented to us; we
+immediately gave him a few buttons off our jackets, with which he was
+quite pleased. On its beginning to rain while we were in the garden, he
+invited us into his house, which, from the walls being of wattled cane,
+looked like a large basket. Rude pictures and carved wood-work figures
+were hanging on the walls, together with some inscriptions in Chinese
+characters.
+
+On returning to the lower harbour of all, we went to the large village
+before spoken of, which is by far the most finished of any that we have
+seen on this island. The streets are regular and clean swept; each house
+has a neat cane wall, as well as a screen before the door; plantain and
+other trees are growing so thickly in the inside of the fence, that they
+completely shade the house. Near the beach were several large houses, in
+which a number of people were seated writing: on going up to them they
+gave us tea and cakes, and afterwards allowed us to go over the village
+without restraint; they were curious to know whether the brig was coming
+into the harbour or not, and if so, how many days we meant to stay; they
+expressed neither pleasure nor regret when we said that we were not
+coming in. In front of the village, and parallel with the beach, there
+is a splendid avenue thirty feet wide, formed by two rows of large
+trees, whose branches join overhead, and effectually screen the walk
+from the sun; here and there are placed wooden benches, and at some
+places stone seats are fixed near the trees: this space, which is about
+a quarter of a mile long, is probably used as a public walk.
+
+A range of hills of a semicircular form embraces the village, and limits
+its extent: at most places it is steep, but at the point where the north
+end joins the harbour, there is an overhanging cliff about eighty feet
+high, the upper part of which extends considerably beyond the base; at
+eight or ten yards from the ground on this inclined face, a long
+horizontal gallery has been hewn out of the solid rock: it communicates
+with a number of small square excavations still deeper in the rock, for
+the reception of the vases containing the bones of the dead.
+
+The trees and creepers on the edge of the precipice hung down so as to
+meet the tops of those which grew below, and thus a screen was formed
+which threw the gallery into deep shade: every thing here being
+perfectly still, the scene was very solemn and imposing. It took us
+somewhat by surprise, for nothing in its external appearance indicated
+the purpose to which the place was appropriated: happening to discover
+an opening amongst the trees and brushwood, and resolving to see what it
+led to, we entered by a narrow path winding through the grove. The
+liveliness of the scenery without, and the various amusements of the
+day, had put us all into high spirits, but the unexpected and sacred
+gloom of the scene in which we suddenly found ourselves had an
+instantaneous effect in repressing the mirth of the whole party.
+
+This village is called Oonting, and is certainly the same that is
+alluded to by the chiefs, and which we formerly wrote down Winching and
+Oonching.
+
+This excellent harbour, which we discovered, has been named Port
+Melville, in honour of Lord Viscount Melville, First Lord of the
+Admiralty.
+
+It was quite dark when we reached the brig. As a heavy swell was rolling
+in, no time was lost in getting under weigh, but before we could succeed
+in running well off the reefs, the wind suddenly changed, and the
+weather, which before had been fine, became so dark and squally, that we
+almost lost sight of the shore. Our situation was now very critical, for
+we had just sufficient knowledge of the coast, to be sensible how
+extremely dangerous it was; and the wind, which blew directly on the
+shore, came in such violent gusts, that there was every reason to
+apprehend the loss of our topmasts; to reef the sails was impossible, as
+the delay which this operation must have caused would have been fatal.
+While things were in this state, it became necessary to tack, but owing
+to the heavy and irregular swell, the brig came round again against our
+will, and before the sails could be properly trimmed, she had gone stern
+foremost almost to the verge of the reef, on which the sea was breaking
+to a great height. Had this occurred a second time, nothing could have
+prevented our being wrecked. After beating about in this awkward
+predicament for two hours, the wind shifted a little, and enabled us to
+stretch off clear of all danger.
+
+12th of October.--It blew so hard that we kept out at sea clear of the
+shore.
+
+13th of October.--As the weather had become moderate, we stood in, and
+determined the position of five islands which lie to the northward of
+Port Melville.
+
+14th of October.--During this day the whole of the east side of the
+great island was explored. The north and north-east sides are high, and
+destitute of cultivation; nearly in the middle, on this side, there is a
+deep indenture on the coast, and the wind being such as to admit of
+sailing out again, we ran in under low sail with the usual precautions;
+notwithstanding which we were very nearly on the reefs, for the water
+shoaled suddenly from twenty-four to eight fathoms; and although the
+brig was instantly tacked, the soundings as she came round were only
+five fathoms, and to leeward of us the ragged tops of a rock just level
+with the surface were discovered at the distance of only fifty yards. In
+exploring such places there ought to be a boat on each bow, as well as
+one a-head. The coast from this bay to the south point of the island has
+a belt of coral reefs at the distance of ten and fifteen miles from the
+shore, and therefore cannot be approached by a ship without great
+danger. The extreme south point is comparatively clear of coral; we
+therefore anchored off it at sunset, proposing to land next day to
+determine its position. We found the iron cables of great use when
+anchoring amongst coral reefs.
+
+15th of October.--It blew hard last night, but in the forenoon it
+moderated sufficiently to allow of our landing. We ascertained the
+latitude of the extreme south point with precision, and made several
+other observations, all circumstances being favourable.
+
+We had scarcely landed when the natives began to assemble in groups on
+the top of the cliffs, and in a short time they came down to us, most of
+them carrying long poles in their hands; we were sufficiently aware of
+their inoffensive character to have no apprehension of their intentions,
+otherwise their appearance would have been somewhat formidable. There
+was no person of rank among them; they were communicative and full of
+curiosity, which difference in manner from the inhabitants on the shores
+of Port Melville may have arisen from these people knowing something of
+us by reports from Napakiang, which is not above ten miles distant. It
+was to be expected that we should have become a topic of discourse at
+so short a distance, and probably what was said of us would be
+favourable, or at all events such as would excite curiosity rather than
+fear. Most of these people had fish spears tatooed on their arms in the
+form of a trident, with rude barbs. When drawn on the right arm it is
+called "Oodeemaw;" when on the left, "Tooga." This is the only instance
+we have met with of this practice. Our curiosity was farther excited by
+the appearance of these spears, from the circumstance of our never
+having seen any warlike weapon on this island; but the people invariably
+called them "Eeo stitchee" (fish spear). Several of the tallest of these
+people were measured, but none were above five feet six inches; they
+are, however, strong limbed and well proportioned. One of them wore a
+ring on his finger, which is the only instance we have met with of any
+ornament being worn at Loo-Choo. The ring finger is called in the
+Loo-choo language, "Eebee gannee," finger of the ring; and it seems a
+fair inference from this, that amongst some part of the community rings
+are habitually worn; probably by the women. The coast here is formed of
+cliffs, about seventy or eighty feet high, with numerous caverns
+hollowed out by the waves. The pools of water left by the tide were full
+of beautiful fish of a great variety of colours.
+
+16th of October.--In the morning we weighed and stood to the westward,
+among the group of islands called Amakirrima by the natives. At one of
+these there seemed at first sight to be a harbour for ships; but on
+sending the boats to explore, it proved only safe for small vessels
+being filled in every part with coral. On our way across from the south
+point of the great island to the Amakirrimas, we passed near a coral
+reef exactly circular, and half a mile in diameter; it is just level
+with the water's edge at half ebb, so that in fine weather the sea does
+not break upon any part of it. As it is upwards of seven miles from any
+land, and lies directly in the passage towards Napakiang, it is
+exceedingly dangerous, and ought not to be approached in the night by a
+stranger.
+
+At four o'clock we anchored in our old place in-shore of the Alceste. As
+we stood towards the anchorage we could see the coral from the mast-head
+so distinctly as to be able to trace the forms of all the reefs as we
+passed among them. This can rarely be done, although the water is always
+clear, because an unusual degree of smoothness in the surface is
+requisite to make the rocks visible; and the sun must also shine upon
+the water at a particular angle. A stranger cannot therefore calculate
+upon having the danger pointed out in this way; but when such
+circumstances do occur they may be taken advantage of to check the
+surveys of reefs made in boats.
+
+We find things at Napakiang nearly as we left them; the best
+understanding seems to exist between Captain Maxwell and the chiefs.
+Every body is allowed to walk about and do as he likes. The frigate has
+been bountifully supplied with stock and vegetables; and the sick on
+shore are rapidly recovering under the kind care of the natives, who
+take a peculiar interest in their comfort.
+
+A young man belonging to the Alceste had died during our absence. When
+the natives were informed of this circumstance, they requested
+permission to make the grave, and begged Captain Maxwell to point out a
+place for this purpose. Captain Maxwell said that no situation could be
+more appropriate than under the grove of trees near the temple, a spot
+already rendered sacred by many Loo-choo tombs.
+
+Next day the body was carried to the grave with all the formalities
+usual on such occasions, Captain Maxwell, according to custom, walking
+last, with the officers and crew before him. The ready politeness of the
+natives was never more strikingly displayed than now; for perceiving
+that those who were of the highest rank walked in the rear, they
+considered that their station must of course be in front; and they
+accordingly placed themselves at the head of the procession, and
+preserved throughout the ceremony the most profound silence. They were
+all dressed in white robes, which we have reason to believe is their
+mourning.
+
+On the next day the natives requested leave to raise a tomb over the
+grave; this was of course agreed to, and when it was completed, they
+performed their own funeral service over it, by sacrificing a large hog,
+and burning a quantity of spirits. Jeeroo officiated on this occasion,
+and when he had done, he carried the hog to the sick in the hospital.
+
+The chiefs also gave directions for a small square stone to be smoothed
+and prepared for an epitaph; which being traced upon the stone by Mr.
+Taylor, the clergyman of the Alceste, was carved very neatly by the
+natives. The epitaph, after mentioning the name and age of the deceased,
+stated briefly, that he and his companions in his Britannic majesty's
+ships Alceste and Lyra, had been kindly treated by the inhabitants of
+this island. When the purport of the writing was interpreted to the
+chiefs, they appeared very much gratified at our acknowledging their
+attentions.
+
+18th of October.--Our friends expressed much pleasure on meeting us
+again, particularly Jeeroo, who seems to take great interest in our
+concerns: he carried us up to the sailor's tomb, where we were joined by
+Ookooma, Jeema, and some of the others, who unaffectedly expressed
+their sorrow for this man's untimely fate. I found my people who had
+been landed previous to our sailing on the survey, much recovered, and
+very grateful for the kindness of the natives. Milk, eggs, meat, and
+vegetables, had been brought to them every day, and whenever they felt
+disposed to walk they were accompanied by one or two of the natives, who
+took their arms on coming to rough ground, and often helped them up the
+steep side of the hill behind the hospital, to a pleasant grassy spot on
+the summit, where the natives lighted pipes for them: in short, I
+suppose sailors were never so caressed before.
+
+The chiefs were anxious to know what we had been doing during the week
+in which we had been absent. From an apprehension that they might be
+displeased at our having instituted a regular examination of the whole
+island, we said we had been looking at the harbour they had spoken of;
+they immediately mentioned the village of Oonting, and asked how we
+liked it. But they guessed that we had been round the island, from
+seeing that we returned by the south, though we had sailed to the north;
+they said repeatedly, that the island was very small, appearing to be
+anxious to depreciate it; our reply of course was, that it was very
+large and beautiful.
+
+Madera has made great improvement in English, and his character is
+altogether more developed. He is quite at his ease in our company, and
+seems to take the most extraordinary interest in every thing belonging
+to us; but his ardent desire to inform himself on all subjects sometimes
+distresses him a good deal; he observes the facility with which we do
+some things, and his enterprising mind suggests to him the possibility
+of his imitating us; but when he is made sensible of the number of steps
+by which alone the knowledge he admires is to be attained, his despair
+is strongly marked. He sometimes asks us to read English aloud to him,
+to which he always listens with the deepest attention. One day, on
+shore, he saw me with a book in my hand: he begged me to sit down under
+a tree, and read: Jeeroo was the only chief present, but there were
+several of the peasants in attendance upon him; they all lay down on the
+grass, and listened with an attention and interest which are natural
+enough: every one expressed himself pleased and satisfied except Madera,
+whose anxiety was to read in the same manner himself. From the earnest
+way in which he inquired into every subject, we were sometimes inclined
+to think that he must have been directed by the government to inform
+himself on these topics; and certainly a fitter person could not have
+been selected; for he adapted himself so readily to all ranks, that he
+became at once a favourite, and every person took pleasure in obliging
+him.
+
+Jeeroo is esteemed in another way; he is uniformly good humoured and
+obliging, and not without curiosity; but he is not clever, and has none
+of the fire and enthusiasm of Madera. We all think kindly of Jeeroo, and
+shake him cordially by the hand when we meet him; but Madera is admired
+and respected, as well as esteemed, and his society is courted for his
+own sake.
+
+Madera is about twenty-eight years of age, of a slender figure, and very
+active; his upper teeth project in front over the lower ones, giving his
+face a remarkable, but not a disagreeable expression. He is always
+cheerful, and often lively and playful, but his good sense prevents his
+ever going beyond the line of strict propriety. When required by
+etiquette to be grave, no one is so immoveably serious as Madera, and
+when mirth rules the hour, he is the gayest of the gay: such indeed is
+his taste on these occasions, that he not only catches the outward tone
+of his company, but really appears to think and feel as they do. His
+enterprising spirit and versatility of talent have led him to engage in
+a number of pursuits; his success, however, is the most remarkable in
+his acquisition of English. About a month after our arrival, he was
+asked what had become of his companion Anya; he replied, "Anya, him
+mother sick, he go him mother house;" and when asked if he would return,
+he said, "Two, three day time, him mother no sick, he come ship." With
+all these endowments and attainments he is unaffectedly modest, and
+never seems aware of his being superior to the rest of his countrymen.
+We were a long time in doubt what was his real rank; for at first he
+kept himself back, so that he was well known to the midshipmen, before
+the officers were at all acquainted with him: he gradually came forward,
+and though he always wore the dress of the ordinary respectable natives,
+his manners evidently belonged, to a higher rank, but he never associated
+with the chiefs, and disclaimed having any pretensions to an equality
+with them. Notwithstanding all this, there were occasional
+circumstances, which, by shewing his authority, almost betrayed his
+secret. One morning a difficulty arose about some supplies which the
+chiefs had engaged to procure, but which they had neglected to send; as
+soon as Madera was told of the circumstance, he went to Captain Maxwell,
+and undertook to arrange it to his satisfaction, at the same time
+begging that if any difficulty occurred in future, he might be applied
+to. Whatever may be Madera's rank in his own society, it is highly
+curious to discover in a country so circumstanced, the same politeness,
+self-denial, and gracefulness of behaviour which the experience of
+civilized nations has pointed out as constituting the most pleasing and
+advantageous form of intercourse.
+
+The great interest which Madera took in the English, and the curiosity
+he always expressed about our customs at home, suggested the idea of
+taking him with us to England, where he would have been an interesting
+specimen of a people so little known; and he also might have carried
+back knowledge of the greatest use to his country. When it was proposed
+to him, he paused for some minutes, and then, shaking his head, said, "I
+go Injeree,--father, mother, childs, wife, house, all cry! not go; no,
+no, all cry!"
+
+In our absence a number of watch-houses had been erected on the heights
+round the anchorage; they are mere sheds of cane thatched over, in which
+three or four of the natives remain, day and night, in order to be ready
+to accompany any person who may happen to land, wherever it be. They
+have also erected a long shed, with a floor of split bamboo; in this
+place, which is on the top of the hill above the usual landing place,
+the chiefs generally assemble in the morning; they invite every one who
+passes to drink tea and smoke pipes, which is very convenient when the
+boats happen not to be ready to take us on board. Each of the chiefs is
+attended by a boy, generally his son, whose business it is to carry a
+little square box, in which there are several small drawers, divided
+into compartments, filled with rice, sliced eggs, small squares of
+smoked pork, cakes, and fish; and in one corner a small metal pot of
+sackee, besides cups and chopsticks. By having this always with them,
+they can dine when and where they choose. They frequently invite us to
+dine with them, and if we agree to the proposal, they generally ask any
+other of the chiefs whom they meet to be of the party and join dinners.
+The place selected for these pic-nics is commonly under the trees, in a
+cool spot, where a mat is spread on the grass; and every thing being
+laid out in great order, the party lies down in a circle, and seldom
+breaks up till the sackee pot is empty.
+
+An artist of the island brought a drawing of the Alceste on board to-day
+for Captain Maxwell: it is about two feet by one and a half, and is
+altogether a most extraordinary production, in which perspective and
+proportion are curiously disregarded. The captain and officers are
+introduced in full uniform, and a number of the sailors on the rigging
+and masts. With all its extravagance, however, it has considerable
+merit; there is nothing slovenly about it, and there is enough of truth
+in it to shew that it was sketched on the spot.
+
+A dispute has arisen between John the interpreter and the chiefs, who it
+seems had positively promised to get a horse for Captain Maxwell to
+ride; as they have not kept their word, John declares that he will have
+nothing to say to people who do not speak truth. They have again
+promised, however, that a horse will be got ready, and in the mean time,
+a fresh stock of beef and vegetables has been sent to both ships, which
+has pacified John a little. We have had much occasion to lament not
+having been accompanied by one of the gentlemen of the factory
+acquainted with the Chinese language, for although to have John is much
+better than to be without any interpreter, it is probable that he is not
+very delicate in his requests, and makes use of expressions and
+arguments unsuited to our character, and contrary to our wishes and
+instructions.
+
+19th of October.--In the morning, before breakfast, Captain Maxwell was
+informed by one of the chiefs, that a horse was ready for him on the
+beach; he landed accordingly, and found a little pony saddled, and two
+of the chiefs mounted. They objected to his riding in the country, where
+the roads were uneven, so that for the present his ride was confined to
+the beach. The saddle is made of wood, and so uneven as to be very
+unpleasant: it is proposed to have one made of a blanket and mats in
+future. To the stirrup there is tied a box, large enough to receive the
+whole foot.
+
+A dinner was given to-day by Captain Maxwell to the chiefs Ookooma,
+Shayoon, Issacha Sandoo, Jeema, and Issacha Hackeeboocoo; Jeeroo was
+also invited to it, but did not attend; being the junior, he had
+probably been left in charge of the beach and store-rooms. Madera also
+made one of the party, though not originally included in the invitation.
+As he had never laid any claim to an equality in rank with the chiefs,
+it had not been thought right to invite him along with them: but Madera,
+who probably knew that he would be very welcome, put himself in Captain
+Maxwell's way just before dinner, and was prevailed upon, after a little
+persuasion, to remain.
+
+Dinner was served at five o'clock in as sumptuous a style as possible.
+Ookooma was placed on Captain Maxwell's right, and Shayoon on his left;
+I sat beside the former, and Mr. Clifford next the other; then the two
+chiefs next in rank, and beside them two of the officers of the ship:
+the first lieutenant, Mr. Hickman, sat at the foot of the table, with
+Hackeeboocoo on his right, and Madera on his left. They were all in
+great spirits, and ate and drank freely, and though they complained of
+the size of the glasses, and of the strength of the wine, tasted every
+thing from punch to champagne: the briskness of the last indeed
+surprised them not a little, and effectually muddled two of them for
+some time. Cheese was the only thing they all objected to, probably on
+account of its being made of milk, which they never taste. The
+interpreter not being present, the conversation was carried on through
+Mr. Clifford and Madera, and partly by signs. Whether intelligibly or
+not, every body was talking. Madera has dined often on board the ship,
+and is quite perfect in our customs. On this occasion he took great
+charge of the chiefs at his end of the table, speaking sometimes in one
+language and sometimes in the other. Observing Jeema eating ham without
+mustard, he called to Captain Maxwell's servant, and pointing to Jeema,
+said, "Tom, take mustard to him." When the desert was put on table, and
+the wine decanters ranged in a line, they exclaimed in astonishment,
+"Moo eeyroo noo sackee," six kinds or colours of wine; but the
+sweetmeats and prepared confectionary pleased them most.
+
+After sitting about an hour and a half after dinner, and drinking with
+tolerable spirit, they rose to depart; but this they were not allowed to
+do, and they were informed that it was the English custom to sit a much
+longer time. They represented that the sun had set, and they would never
+be able to find their way on shore, but would all be drowned in
+attempting it. This alarming difficulty was easily overruled by a
+promise of the barge, and they sat down again. While the discussion was
+going on between Captain Maxwell and his guests, Madera kept his seat,
+and looked about him in his keen observant way, to discover, if he
+could, what was likely to be the issue of this adventure. Having
+observed that in general we were anxious to keep our company at table as
+long as we could, he naturally enough thought that we would not let this
+opportunity pass of entertaining the chiefs according to our fashion. He
+appeared to have settled this question with himself just as the chiefs
+resumed their seats, for rising half off his chair, and with a mixture
+of archness and simplicity, as if he had made an amusing discovery,
+cried out in English, "When all drunk then go ashore!" Though Madera, as
+will be seen, was not quite right in his guess, there was enough of
+truth in his remark to raise a hearty laugh among those who understood
+him; and as he joined in this laugh at his own joke, it was some time
+before he could explain what he had said to the chiefs, who, being in a
+merry humour themselves, took it in perfect good part, though their
+mirth was evidently dashed by a little apprehension of the fate which
+Madera had anticipated for them.
+
+The health of his Royal Highness the Prince Regent was then given, all
+the company standing in the most respectful manner. This was followed by
+the health of the King of Loo-choo, which was drank with similar
+observances. On sitting down after the latter toast, the chiefs
+conferred a few minutes across the table, and then all rose to propose
+Captain Maxwell's health; their wishes being explained by Madera. When
+they sat down, Captain Maxwell proposed the health of Ookooma and the
+other chiefs, but as we in return stood up to drink to them, their
+modesty disclaimed this part of the compliment, and they rose likewise;
+nor was it till a good deal of persuasion had been used, that they
+consented to be seated while we were standing.
+
+These four bumpers made the party very merry, and it now was intimated
+to them, that as all the usual formalities had been observed, they might
+drink just as much as they liked, or pass the bottle altogether; a
+permission of which few of them took advantage. They lighted their
+pipes, laughed, joked, and seemed so happy, that it was agreed on all
+hands, that conviviality is no where better understood than at Loo-choo.
+After a time, at our request, they played some games, of which we had
+heard them speak. The object of these games was drinking; a cup of wine
+being the invariable forfeit. That every thing might be in character
+during the games, some of their own little cups were put on table. One
+person holds the stalk of his tobacco-pipe between the palms of his
+hands, so that the pipe rolls round as he moves his hands, which he is
+to hold over his head, so as not to see them. After turning it round for
+a short time, he suddenly stops, and the person to whom the bowl is
+directed has to drink a cup of wine. Another is a Chinese game: one
+person holds his hand closed over his head, he then brings it quickly
+down before him with one or more fingers extended; the person he is
+playing with calls out the number of them, and if he guesses right, he
+has to drink the cup of wine. These and other games caused a good deal
+of noisy mirth, and at length it was proposed by them to go out, in
+order to look at the sailors who were dancing on deck. Before leaving
+the cabin, they shewed us a Loo-choo dance round the table: Madera
+placed himself at the head before Ookooma, while the others ranged
+themselves in a line behind him; he began by a song, the air of which
+was very pretty, and nearly at the same time commenced the dance, which
+consisted principally in throwing the body into a variety of postures,
+and twisting the hands about. Sometimes the hands were placed flat
+together, at others separate, but generally the former; the movements
+both of the body and hands were regular and of a waving description. The
+head was made to incline slowly from side to side, so as almost to
+touch the shoulders; the feet were moved with a slight shuffling motion,
+with an occasional long sweeping step to one side and then back again;
+but the perfection of the dance appeared to be in the proper use of the
+hands and body. The words of the dance song were "Sasa sangcoomah,
+sangcoomee ah! sangcoomee ah! kadee yooshee daw;" when they came to the
+last word they all joined in the chorus and clapped their hands.
+Although Madera was the leader both in the dance and song, he was
+occasionally joined in the latter by several of the others, the whole
+party repeating the last word several times over. In this way they went
+several times round the table. Madera had a graceful carriage, and his
+dancing, though fantastic, was really elegant; his singing too was in
+good taste. The others danced clumsily, though in perfect good time, and
+joined with some spirit in the chorus.
+
+The ship was illuminated, and the sailors were dancing on the upper
+deck. The chiefs were much pleased with this scene, which was lively
+enough. After watching the dance of the sailors for a few minutes,
+Madera, who, to use a common phrase, "was up to every thing," ran among
+the sailors, and seizing one of them by the shoulders, put him out of
+the dance, took his place, and kept up the reel with the same spirit,
+and exactly in the same style and step as the sailors. The other dances
+were left off, and the whole ship's company assembling round Madera,
+cheered and clapped him till the dance was done. The chiefs joined in
+the applause, seeming no less surprised than ourselves at Madera's
+skill, for his imitation of the sailors' odd steps and gestures was as
+exact as if he had lived amongst seamen all his life. The officers then
+danced a country dance, after which the chiefs, unasked, and with a sort
+of intuitive politeness, which rendered every thing they did
+appropriate, instantly stepped forward and danced several times round
+the quarter-deck, to the infinite gratification of the sailors.
+
+On returning to the cabin to tea, they were all in high spirits, and
+while amusing themselves with a sort of wrestling game, Ookooma, who had
+seen us placing ourselves in the boxer's sparring attitudes, threw
+himself suddenly into the boxer's position of defence, assuming at the
+same time a fierceness of look which we had never before seen in any of
+them. The gentleman to whom he addressed himself, thinking that Ookooma
+wished to spar, prepared to indulge him; but Madera's quick eye saw what
+was going on, and by a word or two made him instantly resume his wonted
+sedateness. We tried in vain to make Madera explain what were the
+magical words which he had used to Ookooma. He appeared anxious to turn
+our thoughts from the subject, by saying, "Loo-choo man no fight;
+Loo-choo man write--no fight, no good, no, no. Ingerish very good, yes,
+yes, yes; Loo-choo man no fight." Possibly he considered that Ookooma
+was taking too great a liberty; or, perhaps, he thought even the
+semblance of fighting unsuitable with the strict amity subsisting
+between us.
+
+Before they went away, Captain Maxwell, who had remarked the
+satisfaction with which the chiefs received any attention shewn to their
+children, ordered a large cake to be brought him, which he divided into
+portions for the family of each. The chiefs were in a proper mood to
+feel this kindness, and they expressed themselves, as may be supposed,
+very warmly upon the occasion. When they put off for the shore they
+began singing, and never left off till they landed.
+
+20th of October.--The forenoon was passed at the Observatory, and
+afterwards we walked in the country without being observed, for the
+chiefs had not yet recovered from the effects of last night's gaiety:
+but we had not gone a mile before Jeeroo overtook us. We were very
+anxious to gain the brow of a neighbouring hill, from which we imagined
+there would be a good view of the palace; but although Jeeroo was the
+most obliging creature in the world on every other occasion, he was
+resolute now in not letting us go far beyond our usual limits; we tried
+to overrule his objections by telling him that we should do no
+mischief, and would not go farther than the adjoining height. He would
+listen, however, to nothing; and as we still walked slowly on, he at
+last sent off a messenger for assistance, but before this reinforcement
+arrived we had turned back, to Jeeroo's great relief. Although the
+object proposed had not been accomplished, we got a better sight of the
+palace than we had yet obtained. It is so much enclosed by trees that
+parts only can be seen, but it is undoubtedly a very large building. On
+returning we met Hackeeboocoo, the fat chief, coming puffing and blowing
+up the hill; he had set out to overtake us on being told by Jeeroo's
+messenger what we were proposing to do. He had drank a good deal of wine
+yesterday on board, and said he had been "weetee" (drunk), and that his
+head ached very much. After he joined us we passed near a village, where
+we met two women at the turning of a road: they did not see us till
+within a few yards, and their alarm was great; they threw down the
+baskets, which they were carrying on their heads, and fled into the
+wood. Our two companions were very uneasy at this rencontre, and would
+not listen to our reasoning upon the absurdity of their apprehensions,
+looking quite miserable till the subject, which seems to be an
+interdicted one, was changed. We went afterwards to the high ground
+behind the hospital, in order to fill up by eye the edges of the reefs
+in our charts, for which regular triangles could not be taken in the
+survey. While I was thus engaged, Mr. Clifford endeavoured to learn from
+Jeeroo whether or not the King lived in the large house spoken of
+before; Jeeroo as usual denied any knowledge of the King, and could not
+be prevailed upon to say what the house was, or who resided there; a
+peasant, however, who happened to be along with us was more
+communicative, and was giving all the information desired, when Jeeroo,
+observing what he was about, reprimanded him sharply. On coming down
+from the height we found all the chiefs seated in a long room erected on
+the outside of the garden gate: they were very merry on the subject of
+last night's adventure.
+
+21st of October.--While Mrs. Loy was employed at the well to-day washing
+clothes, at a moment when every body else was out of the way, she was
+visited by a Loo-choo lady, accompanied by a numerous guard of men. She
+describes her as being about eighteen years of age, well dressed, fair
+in complexion, with small dark eyes, and not without beauty; her hair
+was of a glossy jet black, made up into a knot on one side of the head.
+She wore a girdle tied at the side, and had on sandals like the men.
+Mrs. Loy wished to touch her, but she shrunk back in alarm. Whether
+these details be quite correct or not, the circumstance of a lady of
+rank having visited Mrs. Loy is so far interesting as it denotes a
+considerable degree of curiosity on the lady's part, together with the
+power of gratifying it, which, in a country where the women are strictly
+secluded, perhaps would not be allowed.
+
+22d of October.--Ookooma and Jeeroo came to the Observatory to-day,
+together with a number of the most respectable of the natives; they were
+desirous of seeing the reflected images of the sun in the artificial
+horizon through the telescope of the sextant. As this was placed on a
+stand there was no difficulty in satisfying their curiosity, for they
+had only to place their eye to the tube, the angle having been
+previously arranged. Many of them were amused by the changes of colour
+in the reflected images by means of the different shades; others were
+more struck with the apparent motion of the two suns, which is very
+perceptible when a high magnifying power is used; a few endeavoured to
+understand the meaning of what they saw, but with the exception of
+Jeeroo, I think they had no conception of its cause. Jeeroo appeared to
+have some notion of astronomy; his idea of eclipses was more accurate
+than could have been expected. From him Mr. Clifford got the names of
+the days and months, and the various points of information respecting
+Time, which will be found in the Vocabulary. Whenever we were actually
+taking observations, the natives invariably remained at a considerable
+distance. They had been told that the least motion disturbed the surface
+of the quicksilver, and prevented our taking observations. They had much
+patience, and sometimes sat quite still and silent for several hours,
+till invited to come forward to look at the instruments. When Ookooma
+and Jeeroo came to us, we observed that they were in great distress, and
+upon our asking the cause, the former explained that Captain Maxwell
+during his ride this morning had fallen down, or rather that his horse,
+which was too weak for his weight, had fallen with him, and that his
+finger was broken: "Tayin ma tawrittee, Tayin no eebee ootee" (the
+Tayin's horse fell, Tayin's finger broke). A Loo-choo doctor, he said,
+had gone on board, who would soon cure it.
+
+On going to the Alceste we found that the Loo-choo surgeon had placed
+Captain Maxwell's broken finger in a thick paste made of eggs, flour,
+and some other substance which he brought along with him. He then
+wrapped the whole in the skin of a newly-killed fowl. This skin dried in
+a short time and held the paste firm, by which the broken finger was
+kept steady. The doctor went through a number of ceremonies, such as
+feeling the pulse, looking at the tongue, and so on. He had a box along
+with him, containing upwards of a hundred medicines.
+
+Captain Maxwell mentioned, that while he was sitting in a shed after the
+accident, he was surprised to see a person enter the door crawling on
+all fours, and half dead with terror. This it appeared was the surgeon,
+who had been sent for by the chiefs. He was horror-struck at the
+accident, but soon recovered himself on observing Captain Maxwell's
+perfect tranquillity.
+
+Captain Maxwell's gentleness and forbearance, and his uniform attention
+to the wishes of the natives, and the great personal kindness which he
+had shewn to so many of them, had very early won their confidence and
+esteem. As our intercourse became more intimate, these feelings
+naturally became stronger, and the concern which the natives felt upon
+this occasion was very general, and was expressed, not only by Madera
+and the chiefs, but by the lower orders, in a manner highly flattering
+to Captain Maxwell.
+
+23d of October.--A deputation of the chiefs went on board the Alceste
+early this morning to say, that the Prince of the island, who was the
+next person in rank to the King, and heir to the throne, meant to come
+on board the frigate this afternoon, as well for the purpose of paying
+a visit of ceremony, as of enquiring into the state of Captain Maxwell's
+health after the accident.
+
+At noon the four senior chiefs, dressed in their state robes and
+hatchee-matchees, came to announce the Prince's approach, and in about
+half an hour afterwards he was brought in a closed sedan-chair to the
+boat, through a concourse of people, to whom he seemed as much a show as
+to us. The state boat was a large flat-bottomed barge, covered with an
+awning of dark blue, with white stars on it, the whole having much the
+appearance of a hearse. It was preceded by two boats bearing flags with
+an inscription upon them, having in the bow an officer of justice
+carrying a lackered bamboo, and in the stern a man beating a gong. A
+vast number of boats were in attendance, some bearing presents, and
+others following out of mere curiosity. One of the Chiefs came on board
+with the Prince's card, which was of red paper forty-eight inches long,
+and eleven wide[12], and shortly afterwards the Prince's barge put off
+from the shore; upon which the rigging of both ships was manned, and a
+salute of seven guns fired; when he came on board he was received with a
+guard, and under a like salute. Captain Maxwell, who had been confined
+to the cabin ever since his accident, desired me to receive the Prince.
+No arrangement having been made with us respecting the ceremony of
+reception, I merely took off my hat and bowed: but all the chiefs fell
+on their knees the instant he came on the quarter-deck. I took his hand
+from one of the chiefs who had assisted him up the accommodation ladder,
+and led him to the cabin.
+
+When seated beside Captain Maxwell, the Prince made several anxious
+enquiries about his finger, expressing much regret that so disagreeable
+an accident should have occurred at Loo-choo. He then called to his
+pipe-bearer, and having prepared a pipe, presented it to Captain
+Maxwell, who returned him this compliment, by giving him one of his own.
+The usual questions as to our ages and families, and various
+complimentary speeches, having passed, he said he had heard much of the
+wonders of the ship, and should like to see them himself: he rose upon
+this and went to the globes, which he examined with great care. He
+begged to be shewn Ingeree, Loo-choo, Quantoong (China); Niphon (Japan);
+Manilla, and Pekin. The chiefs would not sit down in his presence, and
+never spoke to him without kneeling. On his expressing a wish to look at
+the different parts of the ship, he was conducted all round the decks.
+He observed every thing with attention, but without betraying any great
+degree of curiosity: he had heard of the boatswain's wife, and asked to
+see her; the lady, in her best dress, was presented to him; he stood for
+about half a minute looking at her with a sort of pleased surprise, and
+then, as if suddenly recollecting that this was somewhat rude, he drew
+his fan from his breast, and with an air of the utmost politeness, held
+it towards her, and upon Mrs. Loy curtsying in acknowledgment, he sent
+it to her by Madera. He asked to see the fire-engine worked, and
+appeared much gratified by seeing the water thrown to so great a
+height. He had heard of the African negro, and begged that he might be
+sent for. When the black man was brought before him he looked
+exceedingly surprised, and probably was in doubt whether the colour was
+natural, as one of his people was sent to rub his face, as if to
+discover whether it was painted or not. The natives, who had flocked on
+board in crowds, fell on their knees whenever the Prince passed.
+
+[Illustration: THE PRINCE of LOO-CHOO.]
+
+On returning to the cabin, the Prince was invited to a collation
+prepared for him in the foremost cabin: for a long time he refused to
+sit down, nor could we conjecture what his objection was; at length,
+however, he complied, while the chiefs, who are neither allowed to sit
+down nor eat in his presence, retired to the after-cabin. He tasted
+every thing which was offered him, but seemed afraid of the wines,
+having probably heard of the proceedings on the evening of the 19th. In
+about half an hour he rose and went to the after-cabin; the chiefs and
+the people of his suite, to the number of fifteen, then sat down at the
+table he had left, and made ample amends for the temperance and
+moderation of his royal highness.
+
+As soon as they rejoined the party in the after-cabin, business was
+entered upon by Captain Maxwell's returning thanks, in the name of the
+English government, for the liberal way in which we had been supplied
+with every kind of refreshment, and for the other assistance which had
+been given to us. The Prince replied, that the King of Loo-choo was
+anxious to do every thing in his power for the King of England's ships.
+Upon this Captain Maxwell observed, that he was very desirous of seeing
+his majesty, for the purpose of expressing in person his gratitude for
+the kindness we had received in this country. The Prince answered, that
+it was contrary to the laws and customs of Loo-choo, for any foreigner
+to see the king, unless sent by his own sovereign, and charged with
+complimentary presents. Coming from such high authority, this assurance
+was conclusive, and as nothing further could now be said on the subject,
+the hope of opening a communication with this court, which had been so
+anxiously desired, seemed now destroyed. The Prince, however,
+unexpectedly resumed the subject, by saying that a letter would be
+written to the King of England, if Captain Maxwell would undertake to
+deliver it; his answer was, that nothing could give him more
+satisfaction than being made the bearer of such a communication: that he
+had earnestly desired the honour of paying his respects to his majesty,
+but from the moment that he had heard that it was contrary to the
+customs of the country, he had ceased to think of it. As soon as it was
+interpreted that Captain Maxwell was willing to carry the letter alluded
+to, and that he no longer urged his desire to see the King, the Prince
+rose and pressed Captain Maxwell's hand and mine between his, while all
+the chiefs fell on their knees in a circle round us, shewing by the
+expression of their countenances, how great the anxiety had been from
+which they were relieved by Captain Maxwell's ready acquiescence with
+their wishes: the Prince in particular, who had hitherto looked full of
+anxiety, became all cheerfulness, and his manner assumed a totally
+different character.
+
+The inference from this curious scene is, that the real object of the
+Prince's visit was to dissuade Captain Maxwell from urging his request
+to be allowed an interview with the King; and we conjectured that the
+circumstance of his accident was taken advantage of to pay a visit to
+the Alceste, where they naturally thought that the remonstrances of a
+man of such high rank as the Heir Apparent to the throne, would carry
+more weight than any which had yet been tried.
+
+When the Prince again alluded to the letter, it appeared that it was to
+be written by the minister, and not by the King. This altered the case
+materially, and Captain Maxwell most respectfully informed the Prince,
+that such a letter as he described could not be received, as it would be
+an indignity to our sovereign to offer his majesty a letter written by
+another king's minister. The Prince at once seemed sensible of the
+propriety of what Captain Maxwell had said, and calling the chiefs round
+him, entered into a long discussion with them: at the close of which, he
+declared himself incompetent to decide upon so important an occasion,
+but said that he would consult with the King, whose pleasure would be
+communicated in a few days. Captain Maxwell expressed his willingness to
+abide by his majesty's decision as far as was consistent with the
+respect due to his own sovereign. The Prince seemed entirely satisfied
+with this answer, and said something to the chiefs, upon which they
+again fell on their knees before Captain Maxwell, notwithstanding all
+his efforts to prevent them. Nothing more of any consequence passed.
+
+In the early part of the interview the present was brought in, or at
+least such parts of it as were capable of being thus displayed. The
+whole consisted of two bullocks, three hogs, three goats, and a quantity
+of vegetables and fruit; besides fifteen webs of the cloth of the
+island, thirty fans, and twelve pipes. The Prince said he had sent a
+present to me, which I found to consist of half the above mentioned
+things. He shortly afterwards rose to take leave. The rigging was manned
+on his going away, and similar honours were paid him as were shewn when
+he came on board.
+
+The Prince of Loo-choo, whose name is Shang Pung Fwee, and title Pochin
+Tay Foo, belongs to the highest of the nine orders of chiefs on the
+islands, the distinction of which rank is a hatchee-matchee of a pink
+ground, with perpendicular rows of black, yellow, blue, white, and green
+spots. He was clothed in a robe of light blue silk, lined with silk a
+shade lighter, over which he wore a girdle richly embossed with flowers
+of gold and different coloured silks: in other respects his dress was
+like that of the chiefs. He is about fifty years old, his beard is full
+and white, and his figure well proportioned. In manners he is genteel
+and sedate, but occasionally a little awkward, which his retired habits
+sufficiently account for. Towards the close of his visit, when his
+reserve had in some degree worn off, we observed him smile for an
+instant, now and then, with a shrewd expression in his eyes, as if he
+was observing what was passing more narrowly than we at first suspected.
+It was thought, too, that in making inquiries about different things on
+board, he shewed more discrimination than most of those who had preceded
+him; but on the whole, there was nothing very interesting in him besides
+his rank. While he was looking over the books and other things in the
+cabin, a picture of his majesty King George the Third was shewn to him.
+As the interpreter was not present, we could not immediately explain who
+it was intended to represent, till it occurred to us to join our hands
+and bow to it in the Loo-choo manner: the Prince instantly saw what was
+meant, and turning towards the picture, made a low and respectful
+obeisance.
+
+His suite consisted of several chiefs whom we had not seen before, and
+six or seven personal attendants, two of whom stood behind to fan him
+and light his pipe. It is curious that these men, who from their dress
+and manner were certainly servants, derived a sort of rank from being
+about the Prince's person; for when the chiefs sat down to table after
+he had left it, they all stood by as if expecting to be invited to sit
+down also; but Mr. Clifford, to whom Captain Maxwell had given the party
+in charge, having observed how particular they were with respect to the
+distinctions of rank, did not think of asking them to be seated, till
+Jeema requested him to do so; still suspecting some mistake, he applied
+to Madera, who said it was perfectly correct, and they were accordingly
+asked to sit down with the rest.
+
+We had never been able to obtain from the natives any clear account of
+former visitors, and as the Prince was thought a likely person to be in
+possession of the desired information, questions were asked him upon
+this subject. He said that a vessel had been here about twenty years
+ago, and that she went away immediately without holding any
+communication with the court. This must have been the schooner in which
+Captain Broughton visited Napakiang in July, 1797, after he had been
+wrecked in his majesty's ship Providence, on the island of Typinsan[13].
+He said that he knew of no other stranger who had visited Loo-choo. On
+being interrogated as to the knowledge of other countries, he declared
+that they knew nothing of the English or French, or any nation indeed
+but the Chinese, Corean, and Japanese. Something was said about Manilla,
+and from its not being very remote, it is possible that some
+communication may have existed between that place and Loo-choo. Their
+accounts, however, were vague and unsatisfactory, and it is not
+impossible that we ourselves may have first suggested the name, and
+afterwards ascribed the use of it to them[14].
+
+Nothing, however, that occurred to-day, attracted more notice than
+Madera's assumption of his long concealed rank. He came for the first
+time dressed in the robes and hatchee-matchee of a chief, and not only
+took precedence of all our old friends, but during the discussion in the
+cabin with the Prince, maintained a decided superiority over them all.
+While all the rest were embarrassed in the Prince's presence, and
+crouching on their knees every time they spoke, Madera, though always
+respectful, was quite at his ease; and we could not help fancying that
+he addressed the Prince as if accustomed to his society. It was no less
+remarkable, that the Prince referred much oftener to him than to any of
+the rest, and listened to what he said with greater attention. Whether
+Madera owed such distinction to his actual rank, which may have placed
+him about the court, or to the ascendancy of his talents, or to the
+accidental circumstance of his having had better opportunities of
+knowing us than any other of the natives, we could never discover. He
+admitted, when interrogated, that he had often seen the Prince before,
+while the other chiefs confessed their ignorance even of his person,
+before to-day.
+
+As soon as the Prince was placed in his chair and carried away, Madera
+came on board, and entered with great good humour into all the jokes
+which were made upon his new character. He declined telling why he had
+kept his rank so long out of sight, but it was sufficiently obvious that
+his main object was to establish an intimacy with all the different
+classes on board the ships, and in this he completely succeeded; for he
+had gradually advanced in his acquaintance, first with the sailors, then
+the midshipmen, next with the officers, and last of all with the
+captains. By this means he gained the confidence and good will of each
+class as he went along; and by rising in consequence every day, instead
+of putting forward all his claims at once, acquired not only substantial
+importance with us, but gained a much more intimate knowledge of our
+character and customs than he could have hoped to do in any other way.
+
+24th of October.--Mr. Clifford went along with me to-day for the purpose
+of sketching the bridge, which, though not above three hundred yards
+from the landing place, the chiefs have always objected to our
+examining. We took Jeeroo with us without telling him our object, which
+he no sooner discovered than he became quite alarmed, and sent off for
+Madera, who came to us immediately, and upon learning that nothing
+further was proposed than a mere examination of the bridge, he said that
+we might go on; having first made us promise solemnly not to go any
+further. While Madera was binding us down in this way, I expressed some
+little impatience at his doubting our simple declaration of nothing more
+being intended than what we avowed; but his duty I suppose was
+imperative, and he would not leave us till the matter was arranged in
+his own way. As soon as he was satisfied on this point he said something
+to Jeeroo and left us; but turning back again, he came up to Mr.
+Clifford, and whispered, "captain no sulky?" meaning, we supposed, to
+express his apprehension that I had been angry at the stipulations so
+positively required by him. Mr. Clifford, having assured him that I was
+not sulky with him, detained him to ask him what it was he feared? what
+he had seen in us to excite such dread of our going near the town? He
+replied, "Loochoo woman see Ingeree man, Loochoo woman cry!" He then
+returned; and Jeeroo, who remained in a boat close to the bridge while I
+was employed measuring it and drawing it stone by stone, was greatly
+interested by Mr. Clifford's account of the great age of our venerable
+Sovereign, and the number of his family, which excited his astonishment
+and admiration. He conversed freely while the subject was the King of
+England, but the moment the slightest turn in the discourse was made
+towards the King of Loo-choo he drew up, and became impenetrable. "He
+did not know," he said, "how old he was, nor how many children he had;"
+in short he seemed scarcely to admit that he had ever heard any thing
+about him.
+
+From Madera, however, who had no concealments, we learnt afterwards that
+the King has only one wife, but has twelve concubines; he is an old man,
+and has seven children. It is curious that none of the chiefs will
+inform Captain Maxwell whether or not the Prince who visited the ships
+yesterday has any children; it is hardly possible that they can be
+ignorant of the fact; but either they are kept strangely in the dark as
+to what passes in the palace, or they carry their reserve on royal
+topics to a singular length.
+
+From the bridge we went to the top of the hill above the well, where
+Jeeroo sung several songs. On the way up we stopped at one of the large
+horse-shoe tombs mentioned before, which resembles in all respects the
+tombs of China. On this similarity being pointed out to Jeeroo, he
+became anxious to explain that it was a Loo-choo tomb, and not
+exclusively Chinese; meaning probably that Loo-choo persons were
+contained in it. He informed us that these tombs did not contain a
+single person only, or a single generation, but were used as cemeteries
+from age to age. The bodies, according to his account, are put into
+coffins, and allowed to lie untouched for seven years, by which time the
+flesh is entirely decayed; the bones are then collected, and being put
+into cases are preserved by the families of the deceased with great
+care.
+
+25th of October.--This being the anniversary of His Majesty's accession
+to the throne, the ships were dressed in colours, and a royal salute
+fired. Upon the natives this produced a great effect; they had never
+seen any other flags than the single ensigns hoisted on Sundays, and
+this display of several hundred flags was well calculated to surprise
+and delight them. They were informed some days before that there would
+be some ceremonies in honour of our King, and great numbers of people
+had assembled on the shore in consequence. This morning had also been
+fixed upon for returning the Prince's visit; accordingly we left the
+Alceste at one o'clock, forming a procession of four boats, with flags
+in each. Captain Maxwell took twelve of his officers and young
+gentlemen, and six accompanied me from the Lyra, all being dressed in
+full uniform. We entered the harbour, and landed at the same part of the
+causeway as before, where the chiefs were in attendance, as on the
+occasion of our visit on the 23d ult.
+
+The Prince advanced a few yards on the outside of the gate, and having
+taken Captain Maxwell's hand, conducted him to the temple, where an
+ingenious device was adopted to preserve the etiquette, requiring that
+none of inferior rank shall sit down in the Prince's company. The temple
+was divided into three rooms by ranges of columns, which were deemed a
+sufficient separation; and, at the same time, no person in the other
+rooms could feel himself slighted by the exclusion, since the division
+by the pillars was merely nominal. The feast was sumptuous, consisting
+of twelve regular courses, besides tea and sackee. There were many new
+dishes, principally of meat, dressed in various ways in large bowls. We
+saw what seemed to be wheaten bread for the first time to-day. It being
+necessary to make some return for the presents brought on board by the
+Prince two days ago, Captain Maxwell now gave him several pieces of
+scarlet and blue superfine cloth, and samples of every species of
+cloths, from the finest damask to the coarsest sail canvas; also a set
+of cut crystal decanters and glasses, and three dozen of wine of ten
+different sorts, with several books, and a number of smaller articles.
+It was also stated to the Prince, that a cow and calf had been left on
+shore in order to be offered to the King as a small mark of our sense of
+the kindness which we had experienced. The Prince expressed much
+satisfaction at this gift, as the calf had become a great favourite with
+the natives. My present consisted of half the quantity of wine given by
+Captain Maxwell, a mirror taken from a dressing-stand, samples of
+English stationary, Cary's map of England, an atlas, and a small brass
+sextant; which latter present had been suggested by the wonder which it
+had invariably excited at the observatory. Mr. John Maxwell, to whom the
+Prince had sent a present of cloth and pipes after he landed yesterday,
+gave him a spy-glass and a map of London; the map was coloured, and
+round the edges were the palaces, Greenwich Hospital, and other public
+buildings, all of which he examined with great attention. After he had
+looked over most of the things, and was satisfied with the explanations,
+he rose and said that a great deal too much had been given, to which it
+was replied, that a great deal too little had been given, and that they
+were not offered as being, in any respect, an equivalent for the
+supplies sent on board, but merely to shew our sense of the kindness
+and attention with which we had been received[15]. During the time that
+we sat at table to-day, the interpreter was hardly ever called in, as
+Madera and Mr. Clifford contrived between them to explain every thing,
+if not as clearly as could have been wished, yet in a more satisfactory
+manner than could have been done through the medium of John the
+Chinaman, of whose fidelity we were nowise certain, and whose taste and
+delicacy in conveying our sentiments we had great reason to doubt.
+
+The Prince, after a time, rose and proposed the King of England's
+health, which was accordingly drank in a cup of sackee. In return we
+gave the King of Loo-choo. As the surgeon had desired Captain Maxwell to
+drink no wine, there was very little drank at the Prince's table; but at
+the others every art was used to circulate the sackee pot. Indeed,
+little persuasion was required, for the sackee, though not strong, was
+very good. Ookooma presided at the table occupied by the officers, and
+Jeero at that where the midshipmen sat.
+
+Ookooma having remarked on board, that whenever the King's health was
+drank, whether his Majesty of England, or of Loo-choo, the cups were
+always freely emptied, took advantage of this loyalty of sentiment, and
+gave "The King of Injeree's health" three or four times over, to which,
+of course, the officers were obliged to reply, by giving "The King of
+Loo-choo" as often. He carried this rather farther than is customary
+with us on similar occasions, for observing that the company were rather
+backward in eating a bowl of sweet rice-meal porridge, he stood up with
+his bowl in his hand, and calling out "King of Injeree health!"
+swallowed the whole of it, and invited the rest to follow his example.
+
+The Prince seemed to enjoy the mirth of the other tables very much; he
+was himself more cheerful and disengaged than when we first saw him,
+though he appears to be naturally a silent man. Ookooma, by overacting
+his part, got, we thought, a little tipsy, and came several times into
+the state chamber, talking louder than was proper, but of this the
+Prince took no notice. When Ookooma came near my chair, I whispered to
+him, "Ya weetee," (you are drunk;) he turned round, and affecting to be
+angry, called out, "Weetee nang," (I am not drunk) in a voice and manner
+which were in direct contradiction to his assertion: his subsequent
+behaviour, however, was so correct and sedate when the feast broke up,
+and all were again upon duty, that he was probably merely pretending to
+be tipsy, in order to suit what was considered to be the humour of the
+company.
+
+On rising to depart, the Prince led Captain Maxwell by the hand, not
+only through the gate, but about twenty yards along the causeway; here
+he stopped and took leave. Captain Maxwell availed himself of this
+opportunity to repeat, for the last time, his thanks in the name of his
+government, for the numerous attentions and marks of kindness which we
+had received. He requested that what he had said might be communicated
+to the King, and assured the Prince, in the most earnest and respectful
+manner, that all the circumstances of our reception and entertainment
+should be stated to our own government. The Prince bowed to this in a
+manner which seemed to express his satisfaction at what was promised.
+Captain Maxwell next observed, that besides the high public benefits of
+which he had just been speaking, he felt individually greatly honoured
+and obliged by the particular attention which had been shewn to himself,
+and to the captain of the little ship, and hoped that the Prince would
+accept from himself a small mark of his respect and gratitude. As soon
+as this was interpreted to the Prince, Captain Maxwell took from his
+neck a small thermometer, set in silver, and presented it to the Prince,
+who leaned his head forward, and requested that it might be hung round
+his neck.
+
+This may be supposed a curious place to hang a thermometer, but we had
+learned during our intercourse with the chiefs, that some management of
+this kind was necessary whenever it was intended to offer them presents;
+for their extreme delicacy made them unwilling to accept any thing of
+value, lest it might appear in the light of remuneration for their
+hospitality. Whenever any thing merely ornamental, or of little value,
+was offered, and particularly if worn about the person, no objection was
+made to receiving it. It thus became the practice, as being the most
+convenient method, to tie the proposed gift by a ribbon round the neck;
+and after a time, every one had rings, seals, watch-keys, or bank tokens
+with holes drilled in them, prepared for these occasions. The
+thermometer which was given to the Prince had particularly attracted his
+notice when he was on board.
+
+After Captain Maxwell had given his present, the Prince turned to me,
+and I put over his neck a cornelian ornament, suspended by a ribbon, in
+the same manner as the thermometer.
+
+He was greatly delighted with these compliments, and immediately
+resuming Captain Maxwell's hand, led him along the whole length of the
+causeway to the boat, and then stepped upon the top of the parapet to
+see us row away.
+
+As soon as we had put off, every one in the boats stood up and gave
+three cheers; to which the Prince bowed several times, with his hands
+closed and raised to his breast. He remained on the parapet, and
+continued waving his fan to us as we rowed down the harbour, as long as
+we could see him. As the boats rowed in procession out of the harbour,
+all the chiefs ran along to the end of the causeway, where they
+continued, along with a vast crowd of natives, waving their
+handkerchiefs and fans till we were a great way from the shore. On each
+side of this group of chiefs a gong was beat incessantly. On every side,
+the rocks, the trees, houses, and boats, in short, every spot was
+crowded with people, waving their hands, and cheering us as we went
+along. This brilliant scene had less of novelty in it, to be sure, than
+what we had witnessed at the same place on the twenty-third of last
+month, but it was still more pleasing, for we had now become acquainted
+with many of the individuals forming this assemblage, and could feel
+assured that their expressions of kindness and respect were sincere. On
+the first occasion, too, the natives being ignorant of our intentions,
+were very generally alarmed at our appearance; and accordingly, though
+there was much curiosity shewn, a profound silence and stillness
+prevailed over the whole crowd, very different from the friendly shouts
+and signs with which they greeted us as we passed among them to-day.
+
+Precautions had been taken to prevent the ladies from indulging their
+curiosity as they had done on the first visit, not a female being seen
+any where.
+
+26th of October.--Last night both the Alceste and Lyra were illuminated.
+At nine o'clock a _feu de joie_ was fired, and a number of fire-works
+let off from the yard-arms. A great concourse of the natives, who had
+been apprised of our intentions, assembled on the shore, and were very
+highly delighted with this brilliant exhibition.
+
+[Illustration: SCENE after the PRINCE of LOO CHOO'S FEAST.]
+
+The sick, as well as the remaining stores belonging to the Alceste, were
+removed on board this morning, and every preparation made for sea. While
+employed in completing the series of observations at the observatory,
+Madera joined us, having in his hand the sextant which I had given to
+the Prince yesterday. It seemed that he had been ordered to make himself
+acquainted with the use of it; and a more hopeless enterprise could not
+have been proposed to any man. But Madera was not a man to be thrown
+into despair by difficulty; on the contrary, he persevered in observing
+with this sextant, and the more the difficulty was made apparent, the
+more keenly he laboured to overcome it. The progress which he made in a
+few hours in the mere practical operation of taking angles and altitudes
+was not surprising, because there is in fact not much difficulty in it;
+but he was nowise satisfied with this proficiency, and seemed anxious to
+apply his knowledge to some useful purpose.
+
+With a sextant on a stand, I made him take the distance between the sun
+and moon, four or five times; on every occasion he was wonderfully near
+the truth. We endeavoured to confine him to one object, merely to
+ascertain the time of apparent noon; and I think we succeeded in
+explaining to him how this was to be done. He expressed repeatedly his
+regret at our approaching departure, in which sentiment he was joined by
+Jeeroo and the rest of the chiefs, who were quite out of spirits.
+Jeeroo, poor fellow, had prepared a handsome dinner for us under a tree
+near the observatory. He made us drink what he called "wackarittee," or
+the parting cup, several times over. We had a number of visitors at the
+observatory, who saw the instruments packed up and sent off with looks
+of real regret. They all said they were sorry we were going away. One
+man gave Mr. Clifford, as a farewell gift, a curious drawing of the
+Alceste dressed in flags, and executed, he said, by his son. The
+children, too, were all much affected by our preparations, and the
+wonted hilarity of the lower orders was quite gone.
+
+Having taken our final leave of the shore, we went to the Alceste, where
+we found the chiefs in conference with Captain Maxwell, who made each of
+the chiefs a present of a cut wine glass, which he knew they had long
+desired to possess. To Ookooma he gave a finely cut tumbler, in a red
+morocco case. This was much beyond his expectations, and perhaps his
+wishes, for he appeared to observe the wine glasses of the others with
+somewhat of a disappointed look. Captain Maxwell perceiving in a moment
+that Ookooma had set his heart upon a wine glass, opened the case, and
+placed one inside the tumbler, to Ookooma's great satisfaction; and soon
+afterwards the whole party went on shore, saying, before they left the
+ship, that in the morning the Bodzes would come on board in order to
+perform some sacrifice. As they never came, it is probable that the
+interpreter misunderstood them, particularly as Isaacha Sandoo said to
+Mr. Clifford, "Acha hoonee nittee Doochoo mang hoonee oocooyoong."
+"To-morrow the ships will go, and all the Loo-choo people will pray for
+them, or wish them well;" which was probably what was meant when the
+interpreter reported that the Bodzes were to come on board.
+
+While we were at dinner, Madera came into the Alceste's cabin for the
+purpose of asking some questions about the sextant. He had not been
+aware of our being at dinner, and looked shocked at having intruded; and
+when invited to sit down, politely, but firmly declined. From the cabin
+he went to the gun room, to see his friend Mr. Hoppner, the junior
+lieutenant of the Alceste, with whom he had formed a great friendship.
+Mr. Hoppner gave him a picture of the Alceste and some other presents;
+upon which Madera, who was much affected, said, "To-morrow ship go sea;
+I go my father house, two day distance: when I see my father, I show him
+your present, and I tell him, me, Henry Hoppner all same (as) brother,"
+and burst into tears!
+
+Sunday, 27th of October.--At daybreak we unmoored, and the natives, on
+seeing us take up one of our anchors, thought we were going to get under
+weigh immediately, and give them the slip, which was not at all
+intended. This alarm, however, brought the chiefs off in a great hurry;
+not in a body in their usual formal way, but one by one, in separate
+canoes. Old Jeema called on board the Lyra on his way to the frigate; he
+was a good deal agitated, and the tears came into his eyes when I put a
+ring on his finger. He gave me in return his knife.
+
+The other chiefs called alongside on their way to the frigate, but went
+on when I told them that I was just going to the Alceste myself. In the
+mean time Madera came on board, with the sextant in his hand; he was in
+such distress that he scarcely knew what he was about. In this
+distracted state he sat down to breakfast with us, during which he
+continued lighting his pipe and smoking as fast as he could; drinking
+and eating whatever was placed before him. After he had a little
+recovered himself, he asked what books it would be necessary to read to
+enable him to make use of the sextant; I gave him a nautical almanack,
+and told him that he must understand that in the first instance: he
+opened it, and looking at the figures, held up his hands in despair, and
+was at last forced to confess that it was a hopeless business. He
+therefore put the sextant up and bade us farewell. Before he left the
+Lyra he gave Mr. Clifford his pipe, tobacco pouch, and a crystal
+ornament; saying, as he held out the last, "You go Ingeree, you give
+this to your childs."
+
+Mr. Clifford gave him a few presents in return, and expressed his
+anxiety to be considered his friend. Madera, with the tears streaming
+down his cheeks, placed his hand several times upon his heart, and
+cried, "Eedooshee, edooshee!" My friend, my friend!
+
+To me he gave a fan and a picture of an old man looking up at the sun,
+drawn, he said, by himself: he probably meant in his picture some
+allusion to my usual occupation at the observatory. After he had put off
+in his boat, he called out, "Ingeree noo choo sibittee yootoosha," I
+shall ever remember the English people. When he went to the Alceste, one
+of the chiefs remarked that he had neither his hatchee-matchee on nor
+his robes, and told him that it was not respectful to wait upon Captain
+Maxwell for the last time, in his ordinary dress; particularly as all
+the others were in full array. Madera, who, poor fellow, had been too
+much concerned about other matters to think of dress, was shocked at
+this apparent want of politeness, and went immediately to apologize to
+Captain Maxwell, who took him by the hand, and gave him a present,
+telling him, at the same time, that he was always too happy to see him,
+to notice what dress he had on.
+
+On going into the cabin, I found the chiefs seated in a row, all very
+disconsolate, and apparently trying to conceal emotions different, in
+all probability, from any which they had ever before experienced.
+Captain Maxwell had made them his parting present, and I therefore gave
+to each chief some trifle, receiving from them in return, their knives,
+pipes, pouches, and fans. In the mean time the anchor was hove up, and
+every thing being ready for making sail, the chiefs rose to take leave.
+Ookooma wished to say something, but was too much affected to speak, and
+before they reached their boats they were all in tears.
+
+Madera cried bitterly as he shook hands with his numerous friends, who
+were loading him with presents.
+
+The chiefs, as well as the people in the numerous canoes which had
+assembled round the ships, stood up, and continued waving their fans and
+handkerchiefs till we were beyond the reefs, and could see them no
+longer.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+Almost every thing respecting the manners and customs of Loo-choo, with
+which we have had an opportunity of becoming acquainted, has been laid
+before the reader in the foregoing narrative. It is proposed to insert
+here a few particulars which in the hurry of the moment were noted down
+without date. They might easily have been embodied with the narrative,
+but it has been considered of less consequence to sacrifice arrangement,
+than to interfere in any way with the integrity of the Journal, in which
+nothing has been inserted out of the exact order in which it is known to
+have happened.
+
+The religion of Loo-choo appears to be that of Fo, said to be introduced
+by the bodzes one thousand years ago[16]. We found great difficulty in
+discovering any thing precise on this subject from the natives; but from
+all that we could gather, religion does not appear to be made a matter
+of general instruction as in Europe, being left, as in China, to the
+priests. This we infer from the careless way in which the subject was at
+all times treated by the natives, and the ignorance which they
+professed of the forms and ceremonies used in the temples. The bodzes
+are not respected or esteemed in society; they are prevented from
+marrying, and are not allowed to eat meat: few people associate with
+them, and even the children turn them into ridicule. On the occasion of
+the Loo-choo funeral service over the grave of the seaman, the bodzes
+stood behind, and were not called upon to officiate, the service being
+entirely performed by Jeeroo.
+
+In the large temple we saw three gilt idols and various pictures; but
+with the exception of the funeral service just alluded to, we never met
+with any thing in the least degree resembling a religious ceremony. The
+bodzes kept the temple clean swept, and took care of the walks and
+hedges, and this appeared to be their only employment. It is fair to
+suppose, however, that the occupation of the temple by us may have
+caused a temporary cessation of their religious observances.
+
+They have large tombs or cemeteries for their dead, being mostly of the
+Chinese form, viz. that of a horse-shoe. They are formed of stones and
+mortar, and are covered with a coat of cheenam, (shell lime), which is
+always kept nicely whitewashed and clean swept: some are more highly
+finished than others; their size varies from twenty to thirty feet in
+length, by twelve to fourteen broad. The coffin, when closed, is placed
+in the vault under the tomb, and is not touched for six or seven years,
+by which time the flesh is found to have separated and wasted away; the
+bones are then collected, and put into jars ranged in rows on the inside
+of the vault. Burning is never used at any stage of the proceedings, nor
+under any circumstances. In the course of time, when these vaults become
+crowded, the vases are removed to houses appropriated to their reception
+above ground: such must have been the building described by Mr. Clifford
+in the village near Port Melville. The lower orders, who cannot afford
+these expensive tombs, take advantage of hollow places in the rocks,
+which by a little assistance are made secure vaults. In the cliffs
+behind the village of Oonting, the galleries cut for the reception of
+the vases must have been the work of men possessed of power and
+authority. Not being fully aware what the Chinese customs are with
+respect to the dead, in ordinary cases, it is impossible for us to say
+how nearly they resemble those of Loo-choo, but there are certainly some
+points of resemblance.
+
+From Mr. Clifford's notes on the Loo-choo inscriptions, I have extracted
+the following particulars.
+
+"A number of carved stones, called by the natives Kawroo, were found at
+many places, particularly in the groves on the hill. The Kawroo is two
+feet long, by one wide, and one high; it is excavated a little on the
+upper part, on which an offering of rice is placed. On the sides of this
+stone are carved a variety of characters, denoting the rank of the
+person who makes the offering, as well as the object of his petition,
+together with the date.
+
+"Two of these inscriptions, copied at the time, have since been
+translated by a gentleman acquainted with the Chinese characters. The
+first gives an account of a man about to sail for China, in the reign of
+Kien Lung, the late monarch of that country; this person implores the
+divine aid in protecting him during his voyage. The other is dated in
+the twenty-first year of the reign of Kia-King, the present emperor of
+China, answering to the year 1816, in which we visited Loo-choo. This is
+an invocation to the deity for success in a literary pursuit.
+
+"Two narrow strips of paper, with characters inscribed on them, which by
+consent of the natives were taken from a pillar in the temple, and which
+have since been translated, prove to be invocations, one to the supreme
+deity, and the other to the evil spirit. The first is on a slip of
+paper, two feet long, by two inches wide, and contains a supplication
+for pardon. The latter invocation begins by seven rows of the character
+symbolical of the Devil. In the upper line there are seven, and in the
+last one, so that a triangular page is formed of twenty-eight
+characters, each signifying the Devil; and the prayer itself is written
+in a narrow perpendicular line underneath; the whole inscription
+resembling in form a kite with a long tail attached to it."
+
+Polygamy is not allowed in Loo-choo as in China, and the king, it
+appears, is the only person permitted by law to have concubines; they
+invariably spoke with horror of the Chinese practice, which allows a
+plurality of wives, and were much gratified on learning that the English
+customs in this respect were similar to those of Loo-choo. The women are
+not treated so well as we were led to expect from the mildness of
+character in the men, and their liberality of thinking in general. The
+upper classes of women are confined a good deal to their houses, and the
+lower orders perform much of the hard work of husbandry. We saw them at
+a distance, in great numbers, carrying loads on their heads. Madera says
+that the women are not treated with much indulgence, being even
+restricted from using fans; and that when they are met out of doors by
+the men, they take no notice of one another, whatever may be the degree
+of relationship or intimacy subsisting between them. The perseverance
+with which they kept the women from our sight is curious, and leads us
+to conjecture that the general practice of the island is to seclude the
+women at all times. In this respect they differ from the Japanese, who
+are said to allow wives to every stranger. This degree of seclusion
+does not prevail in China, as we had opportunities of observing at
+several places never before visited by Europeans. The Chinese account
+quoted in the Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses, vol. 23, states that the
+young men and women marry on this island by choice, and not, as in
+China, by a contract made without any personal knowledge of each other.
+We took every opportunity of interrogating them on this subject, but as
+the question was always evaded, we fear that their practice in this
+respect is not so praiseworthy as that account would make it appear.
+
+Of their literature we could get but few satisfactory accounts; they say
+that they have few books in their own language, the greater number on
+the island being Chinese. The young men of rank are sometimes sent to
+China to be educated. Jeeroo had been there when a boy. None but the
+upper classes understand the spoken Chinese, and the peasantry are in
+general ignorant both of the spoken and written Chinese language.
+
+They appear to have no money, and from all we could see or hear, they
+are even ignorant of its use. Those, however, who have visited China
+cannot be so ill informed, and yet none of them set any value upon
+Spanish dollars, or upon any gold coins that we had. Though we were
+incessantly trying to make out from Madera and the others, what their
+medium of exchange was, we could never learn any thing distinct upon the
+subject, nor could they be made to comprehend our questions about money;
+a difficulty, it may be observed, which we should expect to meet with
+among people whose only mode of purchase was by barter. The only
+circumstance which came to our knowledge bearing at all upon this
+question, was during the time when the garden was under preparation for
+the reception of the Alceste's stores; it was then remarked that each of
+the labourers employed had a little piece of paper stuck in his hair,
+with a single character written on it; this naturally excited our
+curiosity, but the inquiries we were enabled to make at that early stage
+of our knowledge of the language, led to nothing conclusive. Afterwards,
+when our means in this respect were more ample, we could not recall the
+circumstance to the recollection of the chiefs. As these papers were
+called by the people wearing them, "hoonatee," and as "hoonee" means
+ship, Mr. Clifford has conjectured that they may have been written
+passes to enable them to enter the gate on the ship's business.
+
+We saw no arms of any kind, and the natives always declared that they
+had none. Their behaviour on seeing a musket fired certainly implied an
+ignorance of fire-arms. In a cottage at the north end of the island, we
+saw a spear which had the appearance of a warlike weapon, but we had
+every reason to believe that this was used for the sole purpose of
+catching fish, having seen others not very dissimilar actually employed
+in this way. They looked at our swords and cutlasses, and at the Malay
+creeses and spears, with equal surprise, being apparently as little
+acquainted with the one as with the other. The chiefs carried little
+case knives in the folds of their robes, or in the girdle, and the lower
+orders had a larger knife, but these were always of some immediate
+practical utility, and were not worn for defence nor as ornaments. They
+denied having any knowledge of war either by experience or by tradition.
+
+We never saw any punishment inflicted at Loo-choo: a tap with the fan,
+or an angry look, was the severest chastisement ever resorted to, as far
+as we could discover. In giving orders, the chiefs were mild though
+firm, and the people always obeyed with cheerfulness. There seemed to be
+great respect and confidence on the one hand, and much consideration and
+kind feeling on the other. In this particular, more than in any other
+that fell under our notice, Loo-choo differs from China, for in the
+latter country we saw none of this generous and friendly understanding
+between the upper and lower classes.
+
+One day when we were drinking tea and smoking pipes with the chiefs, on
+the top of the hill, a boy began to exhibit feats of tumbling before us;
+in a short time all eyes were turned towards him, and his modesty caused
+him to desist. We offered him buttons and various things, but he would
+not resume his tumbling: we then asked Jeema to interfere; he did so,
+and told the youngster to go on; but he kept his seat, and Jeema became
+angry, or rather pretended to be so, yet the tumbler sat obstinately
+still. "Well," said Jeema to us, "what is to be done? It was for his own
+amusement that he began, and probably for his amusement he will do so
+again." The boy, when left alone, in a short time resumed his tumbling.
+I mention this to shew Jeema's good sense in not forcing the boy to do
+that as a task, which he had begun as an amusement, and which he had
+discernment enough to know would be unpleasant for us to witness in any
+other way. By this treatment of their children, mutual cordiality and
+freedom of intercourse are encouraged. It was probably owing to this
+mode of education that the children became at once familiar with us. One
+day while I was employed sketching the village and trees near the
+bridge, a boy stopped near me, and without saying any thing, endeavoured
+to attract my notice by performing various gambols before me. I took no
+notice of him for some time, but at last looked up and smiled; upon
+which the boy cried out in perfectly good English, "How do you do? Very
+well, I thank you;" and ran off, quite delighted at having displayed his
+proficiency in English.
+
+The chiefs were generally accompanied by one or two of their sons, who
+took their places near them, and were always put forward when there was
+any thing curious to be seen. In this way they were encouraged to make
+themselves acquainted with every thing, and yet nothing could be more
+respectful or affectionate than they always were. Great pains were taken
+to form the manners of the children, and we never observed an instance
+of rudeness in any one of them, though they were as full of life and
+spirits as the wildest English school-boys. John the Chinaman afforded
+them much amusement: he was a great coxcomb, and therefore fair game for
+the boys; they used to surround him and pretend to pull his long tail;
+but they never actually pulled it, but merely teazed him a little, and
+then ran away. These little traits seem worthy of notice, as they belong
+to a style of education quite different from what we had seen in China
+and some other eastern countries, where the children are made to look
+like men in miniature.
+
+During our intercourse with these people, there did not occur one
+instance of theft. They were all permitted to come on board
+indiscriminately; to go into the cabins, store-rooms, and wherever they
+liked, unattended. At the temple the Alceste's stores of every kind were
+lying about, as well as the carpenter's and armourer's tools; and in the
+observatory, the instruments, books, and pencils were merely placed
+under cover; yet there was not a single article taken away, though many
+hundreds of people were daily admitted, and allowed to examine whatever
+they pleased. This degree of honesty is a feature which distinguishes
+the people of Loo-choo from the Chinese, as well as from the inhabitants
+of the islands in the South Sea and of the Malay Archipelago; among whom
+even fear, as was ascertained by Captain Cook and other voyagers, is
+altogether insufficient to prevent theft. At Loo-choo the people are
+considerably civilised; but they have few wants, and they appear to be
+perfectly contented. Honesty is perhaps the natural consequence of such
+a state of society.
+
+We saw no musical instruments of any kind; they were, however, aware of
+their use. The natives almost all sing, and we heard several very sweet
+airs, principally plaintive: they had many jovial drinking songs, one of
+which we wrote down from their singing; it was inscribed on a drinking
+cup, and is as follows:
+
+ "Ty'wack koo, tawshoo, shee kackoofing,
+ "Chaw ung, itchee shaw, shooha neebooroo;
+ "Ting shee, you byee, chee taroo shoo ninnee
+ "Nooboo cadsee meesee carra shaw jeeroo
+ "Shing coodee sackee oochee noo shing."
+
+The Chinese characters on the drinking-cup were thus translated in
+China, "Tywack hoo[17], inspired by a jar of wine, writes an hundred
+pages of odes or verses without end. At the market town of Chaw-ung[18]
+he entered a wine shop to sleep. The Emperor summoned him to appear; in
+his haste to obey the summons, he forgot to put on his neckcloth, and
+rushing into the royal presence, exclaimed, 'I am the wine-loving
+immortal.'"
+
+The Loo-choo dress has been so frequently mentioned, that a brief
+notice, in recapitulation, will suffice in this place. Their loose robe
+was generally made of cotton, and of a great variety of colours. The
+robe of a grown up person was never flowered or printed over with
+figures, being generally of a uniform colour, though instances occurred
+of striped cloths being worn by the chiefs. This robe opened in front,
+but the edges overlapped, and were concealed by the folds, so as to
+render it difficult to say whether or not the robe was continued all
+round: the sleeves were about three feet wide: round the middle was
+bound a belt or girdle about four or five inches wide, always of a
+different colour from the dress, and in general richly ornamented with
+wrought silk and gold flowers. The folds of the robe overhang the belt,
+but not so much as to hide it: the whole of the dress folds easily, and
+has a graceful and picturesque appearance. The garments worn by the
+children were often gaudily printed with flowers. In rainy or cold
+weather, a sort of great coat was worn by the chiefs only, of thick blue
+cloth, buttoning in front over the robe, and tighter both in body and
+sleeves than the other. This cloth resembled the coarse cloth used in
+China; and it looked like woollen manufacture, and may possibly have
+been originally brought from England. The sandals worn by all ranks were
+exactly the same; they were formed of straw wrought into a firm mat to
+fit the sole of the foot, smooth towards the foot, and ragged
+underneath: a stiff smooth band of straw, about as thick as one's little
+finger, passes from that part of the sandal immediately under the ancle
+and over the lower part of the instep, so as to join the sandal at the
+opposite side; this is connected with the foremost part of the sandal by
+a short small straw cord which comes between the great toe and the
+next one. The upper classes wore stockings of white cotton, not unlike
+our half stockings, except that they button at the outside, and have a
+place like the finger of a glove for the great toe.
+
+[Illustration: GENTLEMAN of LOO CHOO in his CLOAK.]
+
+Their hair is of a jet black, and is kept glossy by juice expressed
+from a leaf. There is no variety in the fashion of dressing it; it is
+pulled tight up all round, and is formed at top into a compact knot, so
+as to conceal the crown of the head, which is shaved; through the knot
+are thrust two metal pins, one of which has a square point and flowered
+head consisting of six leaves or divisions: the other pin has one end
+sharp, and the other shaped like a scoop: the length of these pins is
+from four to six inches. We did not see the Prince's, as he remained
+covered during all the time of his visit; but the Chief of high rank,
+who visited the Alceste on the 23d of September, had the flowered end of
+one pin studded with precious stones. The higher orders wear, on state
+occasions, what they called a "hatchee-matchee," which is a kind of
+turban, apparently made by winding a broad band round a cylinder, in
+such a way, that a small segment of each fold is shewn at every turn, in
+front above, and behind below; this is effected by giving a slight
+diagonal direction to each fold. The lower orders occasionally tie a
+coloured cloth or handkerchief round the head; this they call "sadjee:"
+next the body they wear a thin cotton dress. The men wear no ornaments
+through their flesh, nor are they tattooed: we saw, indeed, some
+fishermen who had fish spears marked on their arms, but this does not
+prevail generally. An etching of these marks is given by Mr. Clifford in
+the second part of the Vocabulary.
+
+The cattle on this island, which are of a small black breed, are used
+exclusively for agricultural purposes. Hogs, goats, and poultry, with
+rice and a great variety of vegetables, form the food of the
+inhabitants: milk is never used. We saw no geese, so that those left by
+Captain Broughton most probably did not thrive. They have no sheep nor
+asses. Their horses are of a small slight make, and the natives are very
+fond of riding. We saw no carts or wheeled carriages of any kind, horses
+being used to carry loads; for this purpose the roads are numerous, and
+kept in excellent order, being from six to ten feet wide.
+
+Their mode of dressing the ground is neat, and resembles the Chinese,
+particularly in manuring and irrigating it. This is most attended to
+where the sugar-cane is cultivated: they have, besides, tobacco, wheat,
+rice, Indian corn, millet, sweet potatoes, brinjals, and many other
+vegetables. The fields, which are nicely squared, have convenient walks
+on the raised banks running round each. Along the sides of the hills,
+and round the villages, the bamboo and rattan grow to a considerable
+size. The pine is the most conspicuous tree on the island, growing to a
+great height and size, which we infer from seeing canoes built with
+planks several feet wide; the trees, however, near the temple at
+Napakiang were not above ninety feet high, and from three to four in
+girt. The banyan-tree of India was seen at several places; the finest
+one overhung the small temple at Napakiang, which circumstance led to
+the enquiry whether, as in India, this tree is held sacred, but we could
+gain no information on this subject.
+
+In a little plot of ground in the temple garden, Mr. Phillips, purser of
+the Alceste, sowed mustard-seed, peas, and a variety of other seeds, the
+natives taking his directions for their culture. Our total ignorance of
+botany prevented our making any observations on this subject while at
+Loo-choo; but to supply this deficiency, we collected specimens of every
+plant at the place. These were preserved between sheets of brown paper,
+and given afterwards to Mr. Abel, the naturalist of the embassy, in
+order to be arranged; but they were subsequently lost, along with the
+whole of that gentleman's collection.
+
+Of their manufactures it is difficult to speak with certainty. By their
+own account the silks which they wear are Chinese, but the cotton cloths
+are made on this and the neighbouring islands; the printed patterns of
+these are not without elegance. We saw no weaving looms, but as we were
+only in a few houses, this is not surprising: the webs are thirty-six
+feet long, and fourteen inches broad. Tobacco-pipes and fans are made at
+Loo-choo; as well as the sepulchral vases, of which there is a
+manufactory at Napakiang, from whence they are exported to Oonting, and
+other parts of the island. Some of the pouches of the chiefs were made
+of cloth, which they say comes from China; it is exactly like our broad
+cloth. We tried in vain to learn what goods they send to China in
+exchange for silks: perhaps sulphur forms a part, which these islands
+are said to produce, as well as tin. From the number of vessels
+constantly sailing out and in, it appears that they must have some
+trade, but our enquiries on this and many other topics, though
+sedulously pursued, led to nothing satisfactory, owing probably rather
+to our ignorance of the language, than to any wish on their part to
+withhold information; because, on topics which had no reference to the
+royal family or the women, they in general spoke freely.
+
+We had frequent opportunities of seeing their method of making salt, and
+an account of it may, perhaps, be interesting. Near the sea, large level
+fields are rolled or beat so as to have a hard surface. Over this is
+strewn a sort of sandy black earth, forming a coat about a quarter of an
+inch thick. Rakes and other implements are used to make it of a uniform
+thickness, but it is not pressed down. During the heat of the day, men
+are employed to bring water in tubs from the sea, which is sprinkled
+over these fields by means of a short scoop. The heat of the sun, in a
+short time, evaporates the water, and the salt is left in the sand,
+which is scraped up and put into raised receivers of masonry about six
+feet by four, and five deep. When the receiver is full of the sand, sea
+water is poured on the top, and this, in its way down, carries with it
+the salt left by evaporation. When it runs out below at a small hole, it
+is a very strong brine; this is reduced to salt by being boiled in
+vessels about three feet wide and one deep. The cakes resulting from
+this operation are an inch and a half in thickness.
+
+Of the population of this island we know nothing satisfactory: the
+natives invariably pleaded ignorance themselves; and as we had no
+precise data, our estimates were made at random, and as they never
+agreed with each other, they are not worthy of notice. From the south
+point of this island, to five or six miles north of Napakiang, an extent
+of sixteen or eighteen miles, the country is highly cultivated, and is
+almost entirely covered with villages. All round Port Melville too there
+are populous villages, but the north, north-east and eastern places are
+thinly peopled, and not cultivated to any extent. We saw nothing like
+poverty or distress of any kind: every person that we met seemed
+contented and happy. We saw no deformed people, nor any who bore
+indications of disease, except a few who were marked with the small-pox.
+
+The style of living of those with whom we associated is generous and
+free; their custom of carrying about their dinner in boxes, and making
+little pic-nic parties, is peculiarly striking, and they appeared fully
+sensible of the advantage of bringing people together in this way, and
+expressed much satisfaction at the ready way in which we fell into a
+custom from which all formality was dismissed. They shewed, moreover, a
+good deal of discernment, and could adapt themselves to the character of
+the particular persons they happened to be in company with, in a manner
+very remarkable; but this was evidently the result not of cunning, but
+of correct feelings, and of a polite habit of thinking.
+
+Of their manners, little need be added here to what every page of the
+narrative will show. It ought to be particularly noticed, however, that
+they are an exceedingly timorous people, and naturally suspicious of
+foreigners. A stranger visiting Loo-choo ought therefore to keep these
+features of their character constantly in mind. By imitating Captain
+Maxwell's wise plan of treating the natives with gentleness and
+kindness, and shewing every consideration for their peculiarities, he
+will stand the best chance of gaining their good-will and confidence.
+But if he should betray any impatience, or be at all harsh in treating
+with them, he may rest assured that he will lose much time, and in all
+probability fail at last in his attempts to establish an unreserved and
+friendly intercourse.
+
+As Loo-choo, however, lies quite out of the track of trading ships, and
+does not appear to produce any thing of value itself, and as the
+inhabitants seem indifferent about foreign commodities, and if they
+wished to possess them are without money to make purchases, it is not
+probable that this island will be soon revisited.
+
+[Illustration: BRIDGE AT NAPAKIANG.]
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 11: We first discovered the meaning of this word by hearing
+one of the natives apply it to the castle on the chess board: he used
+the same term when drawings of towers and castles were shewn to him.]
+
+[Footnote 12: The literal translation of the card is "Loo-choo nation,
+extender of laws, Great Person (called Ko), Heang, bows his head and
+worships," (the common visiting expression among the Chinese.) It ought
+to be remarked, that the Prince's name is placed on one corner of the
+card, which is the most respectful mode that can be used, according to
+Chinese usage.]
+
+[Footnote 13: See Broughton's Voyage, Book II. Chap. 2. for a very
+interesting account of the natives of Typinsan, who appear to resemble
+the people of the Great Loo-choo Island. In Book II. Chap. 3. Captain
+Broughton gives an account of his visit to Napachan. He was received by
+the inhabitants with great kindness; they supplied his wants, but
+objected to his landing, and sent back to the schooner some of the
+officers who had been sent on shore to examine the town. We found
+Captain Broughton's account of the people quite accurate.]
+
+[Footnote 14: At Manilla we found that the Great Loo-choo Island was
+known only by name. There appeared to be no intercourse between the two
+places.]
+
+[Footnote 15: LIST OF SUPPLIES RECEIVED AT LOO-CHOO BY H.M. SHIPS.
+
+ |Alceste. | Lyra. |
+ Bullocks | 19 | 8 |
+ Pigs | 23 | 10 |
+ Goats | 15 | 7 |
+ Fowls | *216 | 102 |*Not including
+ Fish | 29 | 12 |extra supplies
+ Eggs | 920 | 455 |to the officers.
+ Bags of sweet potatoes | *59 | 27 |*Not including
+ Squashes | 34 | 14 |ditto.
+ Jars of Samchoo, each containing about | | |
+ fifteen gallons | 6 | 3 |
+ Baskets of oranges | 9 | 4 |
+ Bundles of gingerbread | 8 | 3 |
+ -----------Onions | 16 | 8 |
+ -----------Radishes | 30 | 12 |
+ -----------Celery | 12 | 5 |
+ -----------Garlick | 8 | 4 |
+ -----------Candles | 7 | 3 |
+ -----------Wood | 16 | 8 |
+ Pumpkins | 60 | 30 |
+ Baskets of vermicelli | 7 | 3 |
+ Boxes of sugar | 2 | 1 |
+ Rolls of printed linen | 14 | 7 |
+ Bundles of paper | 6 | 3 |
+]
+
+[Footnote 16: See Lettres Edifiantes et Curieuses, vol. 23.]
+
+[Footnote 17: A man celebrated in the Tung dynasty for his convivial
+disposition: he is known in China by the name of Jai-pe.]
+
+[Footnote 18: The town of Chang-ngan in China, near the Great Wall.]
+
+
+
+
+APPENDIX:
+
+CONTAINING
+
+
+CHARTS
+
+OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THE GREAT LOO-CHOO
+ISLAND, NAPAKIANG ROADS, AND PORT MELVILLE: WITH BRIEF EXPLANATORY
+NOTICES.
+
+
+TABLE OF OBSERVATIONS
+
+MADE WITH DR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR: WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND A
+DESCRIPTION OF THIS INSTRUMENT, AND DIRECTIONS FOR ITS USE.
+
+
+METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,
+
+FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 1816, WHILE THE SHIPS WERE IN THE YELLOW AND JAPAN
+SEAS.
+
+
+ABSTRACT OF THE LYRA'S VOYAGE,
+
+FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN; SHEWING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE
+DIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICH SHE TOUCHED, AND THE TIME TAKEN IN PERFORMING
+EACH PASSAGE.
+
+
+GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM;
+
+BEING A DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKS COLLECTED ON THE SHORES OF
+THE YELLOW SEA, COREA, LOO-CHOO, MACAO, AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS.
+
+
+
+
+CHARTS
+
+OF THE
+
+GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, THE WEST COAST OF COREA, THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND,
+NAPAKIANG ROADS, AND PORT MELVILLE.
+
+WITH BRIEF EXPLANATORY NOTICES.
+
+[Illustration: Track of His Majesty's Sloop LYRA _and Honble. Comps.
+Ship INVESTIGATOR_ _along the Shores of the_ GULPH OF PETCHELEE By
+Captain Basil Hall R.N. 1816.
+
+_East of Greenwich_]
+
+
+
+
+NOTICE EXPLANATORY OF A CHART
+
+OF
+
+THE SOUTH SIDE OF THE GULF OF PE-CHE-LEE, YELLOW SEA.
+
+
+[Sidenote: First meridian used in constructing the chart.]
+
+In constructing this chart, I have assumed the longitude of the fort at
+the mouth of the Pei-ho to be 117º 49' east of Greenwich, or 11' west of
+the place where the squadron lay at anchor. From this the difference of
+longitude was measured by two chronometers. The latitudes were
+ascertained by frequent observations of the stars, as well as of the
+sun.
+
+[Sidenote: Aspect of the south and south-west coasts.]
+
+[Sidenote: Soundings.]
+
+The coast on the south and south-west sides of this Gulf is very low,
+resembling, in this respect, the shore at the entrance of the Pei-ho, or
+Pekin river, where it is uniformly low and sandy; occasionally a few
+houses are to be seen, and also square mounds or buildings like forts,
+but generally, a low white beach is all that can be discovered. The
+coast is not visible till within about three leagues distance, and the
+eye elevated eighty feet from the sea, which is the height of the Lyra's
+foretop-gallant yard. The depth of water when the land first came in
+sight, was generally five fathoms; at some places only four fathoms, and
+at the very bottom of the Gulf, it could not be discerned till in three
+and a half fathoms. It may be said generally, that at ten miles distance
+the soundings are from four and a half to six fathoms; at twelve miles,
+from six to eight fathoms. There is a wonderful uniformity in the depth
+from the Pei-ho round to the south-east corner of the Gulf; the bottom
+is mud, sometimes a little gritty, particularly towards the southern
+parts.
+
+[Sidenote: Colour of the water.]
+
+The colour of the water was mostly of the same dirty yellow or green
+which was observed off the Pei-ho, but we did not observe any red
+coloured water, as was frequently noticed at that place; at the bottom
+of the Gulf, indeed, there were several changes in the colour of the
+water, accompanied by long lines of foam, indicating, it would seem,
+the vicinity of a great river.
+
+[Sidenote: Tides on the western side of the Gulf.]
+
+On the west side of the Gulf the ebb tide runs to the south-east by
+south, and the flood north-west by west; the periods are very regular,
+being generally about six hours: they vary, however, in rapidity. As we
+anchored on the flood we were enabled to measure its velocity; as we got
+deep in the Gulf it decreased: at the Pei-ho it frequently ran two and
+two and a half knots, but far south it was sometimes hardly perceptible;
+it is worthy of notice, too, that the perpendicular rise and fall
+decreased from ten feet off the Pei-ho, to one, or at most two feet, in
+the bottom of the Gulf.
+
+[Sidenote: Bottom of the Gulf.]
+
+The most southern point of our track was 37º 15' north; at this time we
+could perceive the low coast stretching to the east and west; the
+distance it is difficult to assign very accurately, but it was probably
+seven or eight miles, for with a glass we could perceive a number of
+people on the shore. I took great pains to ascertain the latitude stated
+above, by the meridian altitudes of several stars; the longitude is 1º
+39' east of the Pei-ho, or 119º 28' east of Greenwich.
+
+[Sidenote: South-eastern side different from the opposite.]
+
+The coast from the south-west corner of the Gulf to the peninsula of
+Teu-choo-foo, is of a totally different character from that opposite to
+it, for it is high, and well marked: a range of mountains stretches from
+south-west to north-east, at the distance of three or four leagues
+inland; their outline is peaked, and they are intersected by deep
+ravines without any verdure; the summits are also barren.
+
+[Sidenote: Mount Ellis.]
+
+One of these mountains is very remarkable, having two peaks or paps by
+which it can be distinguished at the distance of fifty miles, and bears
+the same aspect when viewed from all parts of the Gulf. It lies in 37º
+6' north, and 2º 11' east of the Pei-ho, or 120º east of Greenwich. It
+has been called Mount Ellis, in honour of Mr. Ellis, the third
+commissioner of the Embassy.
+
+[Sidenote: Aspect of the coast.]
+
+[Sidenote: Jane's Isle.]
+
+[Sidenote: Douglas Island.]
+
+Between this range of hills and the shore, there is a lower belt of
+elevated ground in a state of high cultivation, covered with many towns
+and villages, and interspersed with scattered trees and several
+extensive woods; the ground, too, presents a varied surface, so that the
+whole offers a pleasing contrast with the rugged land behind. There are
+two small islands on this line of coast; the southern one lies in 37º
+21' north, and 2º 5' east of the Pei-ho; the other is in 37º 28' north,
+and 2º 19' east of the Pei-ho.
+
+[Sidenote: Dangerous shoal.]
+
+There is a dangerous shoal about five leagues off the shore, abreast of
+these islands, upon which the Lyra nearly struck at midnight on the
+17th instant. When at anchor just outside the shoal, the south island
+bore south 20º east, and the other, east 21º south; on the shoal there
+was two and a half fathoms, hard bottom. It seems to extend in a north
+and south direction, and is very narrow. It lies in 37º 32' north, which
+I ascertained by altitudes of the pole star, under favourable
+circumstances. It is 1º 58' 30" east of the Pei-ho.
+
+[Sidenote: Soundings and tides.]
+
+The soundings on this side of the Gulf are somewhat deeper than on the
+other, but not so deep as might have been expected from the bold nature
+of the land. The ebb tide runs to the north-eastward, and the flood into
+the Gulf.
+
+[Sidenote: Winds.]
+
+[Sidenote: Melville Point.]
+
+[Sidenote: Teu-choo-foo city.]
+
+The wind was south-east and quite light, from the 11th August to the
+17th, when it shifted to north north-east till about eight P.M. when
+close in shore near the southern of the two islands; it then blew off,
+with all the appearance of a regular land breeze. On the 19th it blew a
+gale of wind from the north-east, with a short, high sea; during the
+gale we lay at anchor off a remarkable point, connected with the main
+land by a low sandy neck; the ground felt soft to the lead, but it was
+probably rocky under the mud, as both ships lost a bower anchor by the
+cables being cut. This point lies in 37º 42' north, and 2º 35' east of
+the Pei-ho. We found the city of Teu-choo-foo to lie in 3º 4' east of
+the Pei-ho. The latitude observed in Teu-choo-foo roads was 37º 53'
+north, and the longitude 2º 54' east of the Pei-ho. The western Meadow
+Island bearing north.
+
+[Sidenote: Cheatow Bay.]
+
+The latitude of a small island at the north-east corner of the Bay of
+Cheatow or Zee-a-tow, was determined by the sun's meridian altitude on
+shore, to be 37º 35' 52" north, and longitude east of the Pei-ho 3º
+45', or in 121º 34' east of Greenwich.
+
+[Sidenote: Oei-hai-oei.]
+
+The latitude of Oei-hai-oei was observed on shore to be 37º 30' 40"
+north, and lies 4º 25' east of the Pei-ho.
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+The variation of the compass in the Yellow Sea was found to be 2º 16'
+westerly.
+
+The rise and fall of the tide at the anchorage of the squadron off the
+Pei-ho was twelve feet. It was high water at full, and change at III.
+The flood tide runs to the west-south-west, and the ebb generally about
+east and east-south-east. Its strength and direction are a good deal
+influenced by the prevalent winds.
+
+
+
+
+NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART OF THE WEST COAST OF COREA.
+
+
+[Sidenote: Inadequate time allowed for so extensive a survey.]
+
+This chart extends from 34º to 38º north latitude, and from 124º to 127º
+east longitude. The time of our stay on the coast being only nine days,
+no great accuracy is to be expected, and this chart pretends to be
+little more than an eye-draught, checked by chronometers and meridian
+altitudes of the sun and stars. Under circumstances of such haste, much
+has unavoidably been left untouched, and what is now given is presented
+with no great confidence.
+
+[Sidenote: General remarks on the methods followed in the survey.]
+
+What follows is extracted from notes made at the time by Mr. Clifford
+and myself. The longitudes by chronometer have all been carefully
+recomputed, and the greatest care was taken in ascertaining the various
+latitudes. The true bearings are in every instance set down, the
+variation being allowed for at the moment. The variation of the compass
+recorded in this notice, was determined by two azimuth compasses, and
+the method recommended by Captain Flinders, of repeating the
+observations by turning the compass first one way and then the other,
+was invariably followed.
+
+[Illustration: Track _of His Majesty's Ship_ ALCESTE _and_ LYRA _Sloop
+along the Western Coast of the PENINSULA of_ COREA by _Captain Basil Hall R.N._]
+
+[Sidenote: The ships leave China.]
+
+[Sidenote: Make the coast of Corea.]
+
+[Sidenote: Sir James Hall's group.]
+
+[Sidenote: Anchorage on the south side of an island.]
+
+His Majesty's ships Alceste and Lyra, after quitting the port of
+Oei-hai-oei, which is in latitude 37º 30' 40" north, and longitude 122º
+16' east, on the north coast of Shantung Promontory, stood to the
+northward and eastward till in latitude 38º north, and then ran to the
+eastward. On the morning of the 1st of September, 1816, we saw the land,
+bearing about east. By sights with chronometer on the meridian of these
+islands, we ascertained that the west end of the northern one lies in
+124º 44-1/2' east. The latitude of the south end of the eastern island
+was ascertained by meridian altitude of the sun to be 37º 44-1/2' north.
+There is a rocky white islet off the west end of the middle island. We
+had from twenty to thirty fathoms on rounding the south-west end of the
+islands, but on the south side of the southern one there is a bight with
+seven fathoms, black sand in the centre: here we anchored. There is good
+anchorage all over the bay, which is sheltered from all winds except
+between west south-west and south-east, being open to the southward.
+There are two villages here. From the top of the highest peak on this
+island, which is about seven or eight hundred feet high, we could
+discern the main land of Corea, high and rugged, stretching north
+north-west and south south-east, distant from eight to ten leagues.
+Along the coast abreast of us there were seen many islands. The channel
+between the middle island of the group and the one we were upon appeared
+clear and broad; but the northern and middle islands seemed connected by
+a reef which shews above water at several places.
+
+[Sidenote: Character of the inhabitants.]
+
+The inhabitants were suspicious and unfriendly: we saw some cattle and
+many fowls, but neither money nor any thing else that we had could
+induce them to part with either.
+
+[Sidenote: Lose sight of the coast.]
+
+In the evening we weighed and stood to the southward; next morning there
+was no land in sight. At noon we were in longitude 124º 47' 52" east,
+and latitude 36º 44-1/2' north, no land in sight. We hauled in shore to
+the eastward, and anchored in the night in deep water.
+
+[Sidenote: Group of five islands.]
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+3rd of September.--Weighed at 3.30 and stood in shore; at 7.45 A.M. we
+were due south of the western of a group of islands. Many sights were
+taken as we passed to settle the place of this group: it lies between
+125º 42-1/2' east, and 125º 57-1/2' east, and in latitude 36º 44' north.
+After passing this group we stood to the south-east towards a vast
+cluster of islands: at noon, when we were just entering the cluster, the
+latitude was observed 36º 18' 21" north, and longitude 126º 10' east.
+The south-west extreme of the islands bore south 40º west. There were
+eight islands near us between south-east and south-west, and a high
+bluff dark rock south one-quarter east, four miles: and on the main land
+a very high hill, east 19º north. When we had got well among the islands
+it fell calm, and we anchored in eight and a half fathoms. It remained
+calm during the night.
+
+[Sidenote: Run among the islands.]
+
+4th of September.--Weighed on a breeze springing up, and stood in shore.
+Observed in 36º 13' north, longitude 126º 30' east; at this time the
+following bearings were taken.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+A remarkable peak on the main land, east.
+
+High mountain on the main land, east 38-1/2º north.
+
+White cliff on the east end of the fourth island to the left of the wide
+entrance into the cluster, north.
+
+Small round island, north 30º west.
+
+Another, north 35º west.
+
+Extremes of a large bluff island from north 38º west, to north 32-1/2º
+west.
+
+Rock, north 72º west.
+
+Outer island, north 75º west.
+
+Extremes of the outer cluster, from north 77-1/2 west, to west 1º south.
+
+Large island, from west 14º 30' south, to west 18º south.
+
+[Sidenote: Basil's Bay.]
+
+[Sidenote: Unsocial disposition of the inhabitants.]
+
+These islands being within from ten to fifteen miles, were laid down by
+estimated distances, but it was quite impossible to assign places to the
+immense number of others which stretched away to the south and
+south-east, as far as the eye could reach. We stood in shore for the
+purpose of discovering whether there was any place of shelter in the
+main land, but in general it proved shallow and unsafe. At length we
+discovered a bay which promised shelter, but on running into it, the
+depth was found not to exceed three or four fathoms. This bay is open
+towards the south, and is formed by a curved tongue of land on the north
+and west. The longitude of the south end of this point is 126º 42' 22"
+east, and latitude 36º 7' 38" north. We remained here during the night,
+and the forenoon of the 5th. The natives came on board, but made great
+objections to our landing.
+
+[Sidenote: Tides.]
+
+The tide rose and fell fifteen feet and a half; it was low water at 8
+P.M., and high water at 2.30 A.M. This was two and a half days before
+full moon.
+
+The Alceste's boats were sent to sound in the eastern quarter, but they
+found shoal water every where.
+
+[Sidenote: Proceed to the south-westward.]
+
+5th of September.--At 11 A.M. we got under weigh and stood to the
+south-west among the islands, carrying seven, eight, nine, ten, to
+fifteen fathoms, and occasionally deepening to seventeen fathoms. At
+4.45 we observed in longitude 126º 24-1/2' east, and latitude 35º 52'
+north at this time.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+Two islands bore north half east, seven miles.
+
+A remarkable small black island, west 32º, north four miles.
+
+Another, west 22º north, seven miles.
+
+A range of islands, from east 10º north, to east 16º south.
+
+A long island, from south 25º east, to south 11º east.
+
+The islands off which we anchored on the 2nd instant bearing about north
+10º west.
+
+Two islands, from south 16º west, to south 25º west.
+
+[Sidenote: Main land.]
+
+The main land from south south-east to north-east, high and rugged.
+
+We had a sea breeze to-day, and fine weather. Variation 2º 10' westerly.
+We ran on by moonlight till 11 P.M., and then anchored among the
+islands. Latitude, observed by Polaris 35º 26' north. Longitude, at
+anchor by chronometer next morning 126º 23' 22" east. From this spot the
+main land was seen from east 12º north, to south 20º east.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+A rock, west 7º south, four miles.
+
+An island, from west 15º north, to west 31º north, 4-1/2'.
+
+Three islands, extending from west 36º south, to west 45º south, 3'.
+
+Two distant ones in the same direction.
+
+Cluster of islands, from west 64º south, to west 84-1/2º south.
+
+Large island, north 12º west, ten or twelve miles.
+
+A cluster of islands, from north 15º east, to north 28º east.
+
+Two distant islands, north 32º east.
+
+Two others, north 42º east.
+
+[Sidenote: Channels between the islands generally deep.]
+
+6th of September.--Weighed and stood to the southward. At noon observed
+in 35º 17' north, longitude 126º 28-1/2' east, being then in the centre
+of a semicircle of islands, extending from north-east to south-east and
+south-west. During the forenoon the flood tide set strong to the north
+north-east against us. Most of the channels between the islands were
+deep, but to-day we tried one which had not more than five and a half
+fathoms. At 4.30. took sights, when a long bluff island bore east
+north-east a quarter of a mile. Longitude 126º 6' 37" east; latitude 35º
+6' north. This island is the most westerly of the range of islands which
+lie between the latitude 35º and 36º north. High and connected land was
+faintly discernible to the eastward. The soundings were generally from
+nine to fifteen fathoms, deepening in most cases on approaching the
+bluff islands.
+
+[Sidenote: Flood tide runs to the northward.]
+
+[Sidenote: Windsor Castle.]
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+7th of September.--We anchored last night about ten o'clock in seventeen
+fathoms; the flood tide had made; it ran north nearly three miles an
+hour, till four A.M. when we got under weigh, and drifted fast to the
+southward with the ebb. At 9.30. got sights, which gave longitude 125º
+52' 45" east, latitude 34º 42' north; at this time a very remarkable
+hill on an island bore east 8º south; it has the appearance of a turret
+or large chimney. The other bearings from this spot were--
+
+Western extreme of a large island stretching west north-west, and east
+south-east; north 27º, east 4 or 5'.
+
+Round rock, north 18º east, 8'.
+
+Cluster of islands from north 50º west, to north 74º west.
+
+Round bluff small island, west 9º south.
+
+Large island, west 42º south, 7 or eight leagues.
+
+Two small distant islands, west 53º south, 10' leagues.
+
+Small island, south 11º east.
+
+[Sidenote: Soundings.]
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+Extreme of distant land, south 37º east: besides, as usual, innumerable
+distant islands. The flood tide made against us between ten and eleven.
+The soundings this morning have been from twenty-three to nineteen
+fathoms. The weather extremely hot and the water smooth. The ebb made
+about four, and there being no wind, it carried us rapidly towards some
+rocks joining two islands. We anchored in twenty-one fathoms. The
+variation of the compass 2-1/2º westerly. The bearings at anchor this
+evening were as follows:
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+Small island, south 3º 22' east.
+
+Large island, from south to south 20-1/2º east.
+
+A small island, south 22º east.
+
+Another, south 28-1/2º east.
+
+High bluff island, south 31º east.
+
+Island from south 9º east, to south 18º west.
+
+Sharp peaked rock, south 25º 40' west.
+
+Island from south 63º west, to south 65º west.
+
+Distant island, from south 63-1/2º west, to south 66º west, nine or ten
+leagues.
+
+Distant small island, west 1º 10' north, seven or eight leagues.
+
+[Sidenote: Bearings.]
+
+Distant island, from west 6º 39' north, to west 9º north, formed of one
+large flat space and five hummocks, eight or nine leagues.
+
+Island, west 28º 50' north.
+
+Large island, from west 31º north, to west 38º 19' north.
+
+Round bluff island, off which we observed at noon to-day, west 39º 52'
+north.
+
+Distant small island, west 44º 28' north, four or five leagues.
+
+Large island, from west 71º north, to west 81º 30' north.
+
+An island, afterwards called Thistle Island, south 79º east, to east 14º
+52' north, besides numberless islands, in thick clusters, extending as
+far as the eye could reach, in the north-east and east quarters. In the
+afternoon a boat went inside Thistle Island, and reported that there was
+a clear anchorage.
+
+[Sidenote: Sail into Murray's Sound.]
+
+[Sidenote: Latitude observed on shore.]
+
+[Sidenote: Longitude.]
+
+[Sidenote: Tides.]
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+8th of September.--At noon we weighed and sailed round the north end of
+Thistle Island, carrying seventeen fathoms, till the north end bore
+south; we then shoaled to ten and eleven, and one cast nine fathoms. On
+rounding the island we steered south, and anchored in eleven fathoms,
+soft bottom, about four hundred yards from the middle part of the
+island. The islands at this place are so situated as to form a capacious
+and secure anchorage, with passages among the islands in all directions.
+The latitude observed with an artificial horizon on shore, was 34º 22'
+39" north; longitude by mean of two chronometers, agreeing nearly, 126º
+2' 52" east. The tides run at the springs at the rate of three and four
+knots, the flood to the north north-east; the rise and fall is fifteen
+feet. Strong eddies are felt among the islands. The variation of the
+compass is 2º 30' westerly.
+
+[Sidenote: Appearance of the Amherst Isles, from the top of a peaked
+island.]
+
+On the 9th of September Captain Maxwell and a party went to the summit
+of a high peak, on an island to the south-east of the ships, in latitude
+34º 20' north, and longitude 126º 6' east. From this spot, elevated
+about seven or eight hundred feet above the sea, the view of the islands
+was very striking: we endeavoured to number them, but our accounts
+varied, owing to the difficulty of estimating the number in the distant
+groups; it will serve, however, to give some idea of this splendid
+scene, to say that the lowest enumeration gave one hundred and twenty
+islands.
+
+Many of these islands are large and high, almost all are cultivated, and
+their forms present an endless diversity.
+
+High land was seen to rise above the distant islands in the east and
+north-east; this probably was the main land of Corea, for it seemed more
+extensive and connected than any group of islands we had seen.
+
+[Sidenote: Difficulty of estimating the number of islands on this
+coast.]
+
+We had now ran along upwards of two hundred miles of this coast, and at
+every part which we approached, the islands were no less thickly sown
+than here; so that our attempts to enumerate them all, or even to assign
+places on the chart to those which we passed the nearest to, became
+after a time quite hopeless.
+
+[Sidenote: Winds and weather.]
+
+During our stay upon the coast of Corea, between the 1st and 10th of
+September, the winds were principally from the northward; the weather
+was moderate and clear; and occasionally calm during the heat of the
+day.
+
+[Sidenote: Barometer and thermometer.]
+
+The barometer rose and fell gradually between 29. 78. and 29. 98. The
+thermometer was never above 82º, and never, even at night, under 72º For
+further details respecting the winds and weather, see the Meteorological
+Journal.
+
+[Illustration: Chart of GREAT LOO CHOO Island
+
+_Surveyed in H.M. Sloop LYRA by Captain Basil Hall_
+
+1816]
+
+
+
+
+NOTICE TO ACCOMPANY THE GENERAL CHART OF THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, AND
+THE CHARTS OF NAPAKIANG, AND PORT MELVILLE.
+
+
+[Sidenote: Different names of this island.]
+
+This island is called Loo-choo, and sometimes Doo-choo, by the natives.
+In our maps it is variously written, but mostly Lekayo: the Chinese know
+it by the name of Low-kow. The spelling used by Mr. Horsburgh in his
+directions, Lieou-kieou, or Lieu-chew.
+
+[Sidenote: Geographical limits and general aspect.]
+
+The island lies between 26º 4-3/4' and 26º 52-1/2', north, and between
+127º 34' and 128º 18' east, being very nearly sixty miles long in a
+north-east direction, and preserving a tolerably uniform breadth of
+about ten or twelve miles. The north end is high and bold, with wood on
+the top of the hills. The north-east coast is also abrupt, but quite
+barren. The south-east side is low, with very little appearance of
+cultivation. The south, south-west, and western faces, particularly the
+two former, are of moderate height, and present a scene of great
+fertility and high cultivation: it is to this quarter that the mass of
+population have resorted. The north-west side is generally rugged and
+bare.
+
+[Sidenote: Deep bay.]
+
+[Sidenote: Barrow's Bay.]
+
+There are two deep indentures, one on each side of the island; that on
+the west has at least one hundred fathoms depth, and appears to have no
+coral in it: while the eastern bight is extremely shallow, and is not
+only skirted by a broad fringe of coral, but has reefs in the centre;
+and these last are very dangerous, for they give no warning either by
+breakers or discoloration of the water, or by soundings: and this remark
+will apply generally to all the reefs round this island, rendering the
+navigation, particularly at night, very dangerous.
+
+[Sidenote: General caution respecting coral reefs.]
+
+[Sidenote: Sugar Loaf or Eegooshcoond.]
+
+The most remarkable headland is the island called by Captain Broughton
+the Sugar Loaf, and by the natives Eegooshcoond (tower or castle); it
+can be seen distinctly at the distance of twenty-five miles when the eye
+is elevated only fifteen feet. It is a high conical mountain, varying
+very little in its aspect when viewed from different quarters: as there
+is no other peak like it on or near this island, it cannot be mistaken.
+The latitude of the peak is 26º 43' north; and I have reason to believe
+that this is within one mile of the truth. Its longitude is 127º 44', or
+6' east of the observatory at Napakiang, by two chronometers. The base
+of the cone and one-third of the way up is covered with houses; and the
+whole island has the appearance of a garden. When nearly on the meridian
+of the Sugar Loaf its top seems rounded off.
+
+[Sidenote: Two safe anchoring places.]
+
+[Sidenote: Geographical position of Napakiang.]
+
+There are two places where ships can ride in safety, Napakiang Roads
+on the south-west, and Port Melville on the north-west side of the
+island. The first of these is the one in which his majesty's ships
+Alceste and Lyra lay for upwards of a month. By means of a base of 1319
+feet on a coral reef, which dried at half ebb, we were enabled to make
+the survey which accompanies this notice. The latitude of the
+observatory was determined to be 26º 13' 34" north, the mean of three
+meridian altitudes of the sun by a sextant of Cary's, and five by a
+circle of Troughton's, the extreme difference being 20". The longitude
+is 127º 38' east; this was ascertained by measuring the difference of
+longitude between the observatory and Lintin Island off Canton river in
+a run of six days; on which occasion two chronometers on board the Lyra
+gave within one mile the same difference of longitude, viz. 13º 50',
+with that shewn by two others on board his majesty's ship Alceste; the
+longitude of Lintin being 113º 48' east of Greenwich. The longitude, by
+lunar observations, is 127º 37' 28". The plan of Napakiang roads will be
+found sufficient without many directions for ships wishing to enter it.
+The principal danger lies in the outer reefs, which do not show when the
+weather is very fine and there is little swell; on such occasions a boat
+ought to go a-head at least a quarter of a mile, and the ship should put
+about instantly upon approaching the reefs, which are every where bold.
+A ship coming from the westward ought to steer between the north-eastern
+of the group of high islands to the south-westward, and a low green
+island with extensive reefs to the northward, in latitude 26º 15' north.
+On passing which she should haul up east by south, giving Reef Island a
+birth of at least a mile.
+
+[Sidenote: Plan of Napakiang.]
+
+[Sidenote: Directions on approaching Napakiang.]
+
+[Sidenote: Reef Island.]
+
+[Illustration]
+
+[Sidenote: Directions for entering Napakiang roads.]
+
+[Illustration: NAPAKIANG ROADS
+
+_on the S.W. Side of the_ GREAT LOO CHOO Island
+
+_Laid down from actual survey by Captain Basil Hall R.N. H.M. Sloop
+LYRA_ 1816]
+
+[Sidenote: Capstan Rock.]
+
+[Sidenote: Best anchorage off the mouths of two rivulets.]
+
+[Sidenote: The northern entrance.]
+
+On approaching the main land a conspicuous wooded point will be seen,
+having rocks on its summit like the ruins of an abbey; this forms the
+south side of the anchorage, and is considerably more to the westward
+than the north-east side. The harbour of Napakiang will soon be seen at
+the south side of the bay; steer directly in for this, giving Abbey
+Point a birth of half a mile, and when directly between the south end of
+the outer reefs and Abbey Point haul up east by north. There is a very
+remarkable rock on the south-east side of the anchorage resembling the
+head of a capstan. It would be safest to anchor when this bears about
+south-south-east half a mile at most, in order to avoid a dangerous
+coral tongue, which lies north a little easterly from it, three-quarters
+of a mile; but as this anchorage is exposed, the ship may proceed
+farther in as soon as the exact place of the reef has been ascertained
+by boats; and if she proposes staying any time, she may warp into
+Barnpool, taking the precaution of placing a boat on each side of the
+entrance. There are two rivulets at this place, and probably the best
+anchorage is off their mouths, the bottom consisting of the mud brought
+down by the stream. There is a well on the eastern side supplied by a
+spring, and there are landing places at the entrance of both harbours.
+There is a safe passage between the reef, on which the base was
+measured, and the outer ones. The Lyra passed through this three times;
+and if the object is to go to the northward it ought to be followed,
+provided the wind will admit of steering north and two points on each
+side of it. The leading mark for going by this passage is Capstan Fort
+or Rock, on with a remarkable nose formed by the trees on the highest
+distant land; these are on when they bear about south by east half east.
+It would certainly not be advisable for a stranger to enter by this
+passage, but he may run on coming from the northward along the shore at
+the distance of two or three miles till Reef Island bears west, and then
+he should look sharply out for the reefs, keeping outside them till near
+Abbey Point, then act as before directed. On running down towards
+Napakiang from the northward a remarkable bluff table land will be seen
+to the southward of Abbey Point. The west face of Abbey Point ought to
+be kept just on with the east end of the table land; this will take you
+further out than is absolutely necessary; but it is safe; and when Reef
+Island is just on with the northern of the group of distant islands you
+will be exactly off the north entrance.
+
+[Sidenote: Appearance of land in coming from the northward towards
+Napakiang.]
+
+[Sidenote: Not to be attempted by a stranger.]
+
+[Sidenote: Dangerous coral reef about four leagues south-west by west
+from Napakiang.]
+
+On coming from the southward the only danger that lies in the way is a
+coral reef even with the water's edge; it is of a circular form, and at
+low water several rocks shew on it. On every occasion that we passed the
+sea broke high upon it; but from what we saw of other similar reefs, it
+seems very probable that when the water is smooth it will give no
+warning: it is about eight miles west, 15º north of the extreme south
+point of the island, and lies in latitude 26º 7' north, and longitude
+127º 26' east of Greenwich.
+
+[Sidenote: Port Melville.]
+
+[Sidenote: Directions to approach it, and to anchor previous to entering
+the harbour.]
+
+Port Melville is on the north-west side of the island. A ship wishing to
+enter it ought to make the Sugar Loaf Peak, and steer between it and the
+cluster of islands to the northward, directly for the bottom of the
+bight, which lies between the Sugar Loaf and the north end of the
+island; here Herbert's Island will be seen close to the shore, run in
+towards its western end, anchor when it bears east one-third of a mile,
+and the Sugar Loaf west one-quarter north, barely shut in with a low
+dark green point of land; here you will have from seventeen to twenty
+fathoms.
+
+[Sidenote: Boats should be sent to buoy the channel.]
+
+The entrance of the harbour is narrow, and ought not to be attempted
+without previous examination by the boats of a ship wishing to enter it.
+With a very little trouble the passage might be buoyed: a large ship
+will probably find it expedient to warp in and out.
+
+[Sidenote: Eye-draught of Port Melville.]
+
+The eye-draught, with the directions on it, render much further notice
+here superfluous. The harbour is secure, and sufficiently capacious for
+a numerous fleet. It extends in a north and south direction for about
+two miles, varying in breadth and form in a very remarkable manner; at
+the lower or north end there are two basons of a circular form, and have
+from nine to fifteen fathoms, soft bottom; these are about one-third of
+a mile across. At some places the steep rocks which form the banks
+approach within an hundred yards of one another; here the water is
+sixteen, eighteen, and twenty fathoms. There are many fine coves, some
+with shelving shores, and others steep-to. Every part of the harbour is
+secured from the sea, and many parts from all winds: it is well
+calculated for the re-equipment of ships, for it is not only secure as
+an anchorage, but offers conveniences for landing men and stores, and
+also for heaving down or careening a ship.
+
+[Sidenote: Villages of Cooee and of Oonting.]
+
+There are several large villages on the shores of an extensive bay,
+communicating with the sea to the north-eastward, at the upper or south
+end of the line of harbours, and one called Oonting on the west side of
+the lower harbour; there is another of some extent, on the south side of
+Herbert's Island, called Cooee.
+
+By permission of Captain Maxwell, I have named this excellent harbour,
+Port Melville, in honour of Lord Viscount Melville, First Lord of the
+Admiralty.
+
+[Illustration: _Draught_ _of_ PORT MELVILLE _on the N.W. side of_ _GREAT
+LOO-CHOO_ Island _by_ _Captain Basil Hall_ _and_ _the_ OFFICERS _of_
+_His Majesty's Sloop_ LYRA _11th Octr. 1816._]
+
+From the top of a range of hills which we ascended, rising on the south
+side of the upper bay of Port Melville, we could see the south-west
+corner of the great western bay, the whole range of Port Melville, and
+the coasts adjacent.
+
+[Sidenote: Geographical position of Port Melville.]
+
+The latitude of Herbert's Island, which lies directly off the entrance
+of Port Melville, is 26º 42-2/3' north, by meridian altitude of the sun
+observed on shore. Its longitude, which is also the longitude of Port
+Melville, is 127º 55' east, or 17' east of Napakiang observatory. The
+Sugar Loaf bears from the centre of the island, west 4-1/2º north, about
+ten miles.
+
+[Sidenote: Coast skirted by coral reefs.]
+
+As the whole part of this coast is skirted by dangerous coral reefs, the
+greatest attention should be paid to the lead, and the ship ought to
+be put about the instant that the water shoals to eight, seven, or six
+fathoms. On running in for the west end of Herbert's Island, on the
+morning of the 11th of October, we passed over a coral ledge having nine
+fathoms on it. The west point of Herbert's Island bore at this time
+south 8º 40' west, distant four or five miles. Before and after passing
+this we had from thirty to sixty fathoms; whether it was shoaler than
+nine fathoms at any place, was not ascertained, but the circumstance is
+deserving of notice, and ought to teach the necessity of constant
+vigilance, when near coral reefs.
+
+[Sidenote: Montgomery islands.]
+
+The cluster of islands to the northward of Port Melville lies between
+26º 54' and 27º 4-1/2' north, the north end of the northern one being in
+longitude 127º 57' east, or 19' east of the observatory. It does not
+appear that there is any good anchorage about them; and there are
+dangerous reefs off the south and south-western ones.
+
+[Sidenote: Hope Point.]
+
+The north end of the Great Loo-choo lies in 26º 52-1/2' north, and this
+is probably within one, or at most two miles of the truth. We observed
+in 27º 00' 15" north, at which time the northern extreme bore east 59º
+south, nine miles by estimation, an inference which was checked by the
+distance run on a direct course afterwards. The longitude is 128º 9'
+east, or 31' east of the observatory.
+
+[Sidenote: Sidmouth Point.]
+
+The coast from the north point runs south-east by east, with some minor
+deviations, nearly four leagues: great pains were taken to ascertain
+this precisely, as the former charts not only place it many miles
+further north, but make the coast at this end lie east and west. The
+north-east point lies in 26º 47' north, and longitude 128º 18' east, or
+40' east of the observatory. The latitude was determined by the meridian
+altitude of Sirius and an altitude of Polaris, so near daylight that the
+horizon was well defined; but as this point, off which there is a small
+island, was some miles north of the ship at the time of observation, the
+above latitude may err possibly two miles. It was intended to have
+examined two islands which lie to the north-eastward of the north point,
+but a strong current in the night carried us so far to leeward, that we
+could not effect this object; the situation, therefore, of these two
+islands, may perhaps not be accurately laid down in the chart.
+
+[Sidenote: Barrow's Bay.]
+
+The deep indenture about the middle of the east side of the island is
+unsafe to enter during the north-east monsoon: as the wind, however, had
+westing in it, we sailed up to within three or four miles of the top,
+carrying from thirty to twenty fathoms water; but when about to haul in
+for the north side, where there appeared to be a bay, we shoaled
+suddenly from twenty-four to eight fathoms: the helm was instantly put
+down, and when head to wind, we had only five fathoms. While in stays
+the water was observed to wash on a rock not a hundred yards to leeward
+of us, on which we must infallibly have struck, had we bore up instead
+of tacking.
+
+[Sidenote: South-east coast dangerous.]
+
+From the north-east to the south-east point, the coast runs south 40º
+west; the shore to the north-east of this deep bight is bold, and seems
+clear; that on the south-west side of it presents a formidable barrier
+of islands and coral reefs, which break to a great distance: in fine
+weather this part of the coast ought to be approached very cautiously.
+
+[Sidenote: South Point.]
+
+[Sidenote: Reef.]
+
+The southern extreme of this island lies in latitude 26º 4' 46" north,
+determined with great care by the meridian altitude of the sun on shore;
+and in longitude 127º 35' east, or 3' west of the observatory. There is
+good anchorage from twenty to thirty fathoms, south a little easterly,
+of this point. Between this point and the group of islands to the
+westward, there is a dangerous reef, already spoken of; it lies in 26º
+7' north, and 127º 26' east; it bears 26' west, 15º north from the south
+point of the island, distant eight miles. Immediately round the point on
+the west side there is a shallow harbour, formed by coral reefs, but the
+entrance is narrow and intricate.
+
+[Sidenote: South-western group.]
+
+We stood over to the largest of the south-west group, on the east side
+of which there stands out a conical rock, behind which it was thought
+that a harbour might lie, but upon examination, it proved only fit for
+boats; it lies in 26º 11' north.
+
+[Sidenote: Reef Island.]
+
+Reef Island lies west by north, about two leagues from Napakiang Roads;
+on the north side the reefs stretch a great way, but the south is more
+clear.
+
+Between Napakiang and the Sugar Loaf there is no place for ships to lie
+in safety; the bay immediately to the north was examined by Mr. Mayne,
+master of his Majesty's ship Alceste, when two shallow harbours were
+found.
+
+[Sidenote: Tides.]
+
+The flood runs to the northward and eastward, along shore, and the ebb
+in an opposite direction. The rise and fall is about nine feet
+perpendicular. High water at full and change IX.
+
+[Sidenote: Variation of the compass.]
+
+The variation of the compass, determined with great precision by the
+transit azimuth instrument, was 52' westerly.
+
+The longitude of the Lyra's observatory at Napakiang by the mean of
+thirty-six lunar observations on both sides of the moon, is 127º 37' 28"
+east; by four chronometers, agreeing nearly, 127º 38' 30" east. The
+latitude is 26º 13' 39" north.
+
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: Crescent moons are denoted by [((] or [))]; a circle
+with a period therein is denoted by [(.)]]
+
+
+OBSERVATIONS MADE AT NAPAKIANG OBSERVATORY, GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.
+
+ Lunars with a Sextant. Lunars with a Sextant.
+ [(.)] West of [((] *[Greek: a] Arietis, East of [))]
+
+ 25th September, 1816. 4th October, 1816
+
+ [(.)] [((] 127º. 38'. 15" East. * [))] 127º. 31'. 00" East.
+ 35 . 15 37 . 00
+ 36 . 15 43 . 00
+ 34 . 45 52 . 30
+ 33 . 00 54 . 30
+ 36 . 00 38 . 45
+ 30 . 45 52 . 45
+ 28 . 30 50 . 15
+ 32 . 15 50 . 30
+ 31 . 30 127º. 33'. 39" Mean 41 . 45
+ 40 . 30
+ 26th October, 1816. 34 . 15
+ 43 . 15
+ [(.)] [((] 127 . 38 . 30 39 . 45
+ 39 . 45 ------------
+ 41 . 30 Mean by sextant 127 . 43. 20 * East of [))]
+ 44 . 15
+ 44 . 30 Lunars by Circle.
+ 32 . 15 [(.)] West of [((]
+ 33 . 00
+ 31 . 45 4th October, 1816
+ 31 . 15 [(.)] [((] 127º. 38'. 45"
+ 27 . 30 127º 36'. 16" Mean 32 . 30
+ ------------- -------------
+ Mean by sextant 127 . 34 . 58
+ [(.)] W. [((] Mean 127 . 35 . 37 by circle.
+
+
+ Mean by sextant [(.)] west [))] 127º 34'. 58"
+ * East [((] 127 . 43 . 20
+ --------------
+ Mean longitude by sextant [(.)] * [))] 127 . 39 . 9
+ by circle [(.)] * [((] 127 . 35 . 37
+ --------------
+ Mean longitude by 36 lunars 127 . 37 . 28
+ Longitude by chronometers 127 . 38 . 30 east of Greenwich.
+
+
+
+
+LATITUDE OF NAPAKIANG.
+
+_By Meridian Altitudes of the Sun and Altitudes taken near Noon._
+
+ By meridian altitudes observed. By meridian altitudes deduced in the
+ usual way from sights taken near noon.
+
+ 1816. 1816.
+ Sextant. 8th Oct. mean of 3 A.M.} 26º. 13'. 30" circle.
+ 17th Oct. 26º. 13'. 43" and 3 P.M. }
+
+ 20th Oct. 26 . 13 . 44 20th Oct. A.M.{ 26 . 13 . 46} sext.
+ { 26 . 13 . 44}
+
+ Circle.
+ 26th Oct. 26 . 13 . 29 20th Oct. P.M.{ 26 . 13 . 58}
+ { 26 . 13 . 47} sext.
+ { 26 . 13 . 57}
+
+ 22d mean 2 A.M.& 2 P.M. 26 . 13 . 24} circle.
+ 26th 3 P.M. 26 . 13 . 29}
+
+ Latitude by mean of 3 meridian altitudes 26º. 13'. 39" sextant and circle.
+ mean of 5 altitudes near noon 26 . 13 . 50 sextant.
+ mean of 3 do. do. 26 . 13 . 28 circle.
+ ------------
+ Mean latitude 26 . 13 . 39 north.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+VARIATION OF THE COMPASS AT NAPAKIANG.
+
+The declination of the magnetic meridian was ascertained with
+considerable precision by means of the transit azimuth instrument: the
+needle seldom showed the same variation, as it oscillated about ten
+minutes, but the mean position of the magnetic meridian was 52' 10" west
+of the true. A coral reef was selected for the place of these
+observations, in order to avoid the attraction arising from buildings,
+or from inequalities in the ground.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+ _Variation observed on board by Walker's Azimuth Compass._
+
+ 29th Sept. 1816, P.M. ship's head W. by S. variation by
+
+ 1st azimuth 0º. 51'. 30" west.
+ 2nd 0 . 53 . 30
+ 3rd 1 . 17 . 30
+ Amplitude 1 . 15 . 00
+ 30th A.M. 1st azimuth 0 . 55 . 30
+ 2nd 0 . 34 . 15
+ 3d Oct. A.M. ship's head E.N.E. 1st azimuth 0 . 37 . 00
+ 2nd 0 . 48 . 00
+ -----------
+ Variation by mean of 7 azimuths and 1 amplitude 0 . 52 . 39 west.
+
+
+
+
+TABLE OF OBSERVATIONS
+
+MADE WITH
+
+DR. WOLLASTON'S DIP SECTOR:
+
+WITH AN ENGRAVING, AND A DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTRUMENT, AND DIRECTIONS
+FOR ITS USE.
+
+[Illustration: Wollaston's Dip Sector]
+
+EXPLANATION OF THE DIP SECTOR,
+
+AND
+
+REMARKS ON THE OBSERVATIONS MADE WITH IT IN HIS MAJESTY'S SLOOP LYRA.
+
+
+In our tables for apparent dip of the visible horizon at different
+heights from the sea, as calculated from the known curvature of the
+earth, allowance is made for the refraction of the atmosphere, on a
+supposition of its being constant, but as it is known to vary, the
+tabular dip will often be erroneous, and, consequently, altitudes taken
+under different states of the atmosphere, will exhibit different instead
+of corresponding results.
+
+It is foreign to the present purpose to shew what the causes are which
+have most effect in raising or depressing the apparent horizon. It may
+be sufficient to mention, that changes in the relative temperature of
+the air and the sea must produce changes in the refraction near the
+surface. Dr. Wollaston has published two papers in the Philosophical
+Transactions on this subject, in the volumes for 1800 and 1803, and to
+these I beg to refer the reader for precise information upon this very
+curious subject.
+
+The object which this sector proposes to attain, is the actual
+admeasurement of the dip angle; that is, to ascertain how much the
+visible horizon is depressed below the horizontal plane passing through
+the eye of the observer. The instrument is so contrived as to measure
+double the dip angle twice over, so that we obtain four times the
+required dip, and one quarter of this angle is what must be applied to
+vertical angles, measured from that part of the horizon which has been
+observed.
+
+Figure I. is the instrument seen in perspective, and Fig. II. is a plan
+of it with the telescope removed. In order to explain its use, let A and
+B (Fig. II.) represent the two reflecting glasses at right angles to the
+plane of the instrument, and also nearly at right angles to each other.
+It is clear that when the plane of the instrument is held vertically, an
+eye situated at E, and looking through the unsilvered part of the glass
+A at a distant point C, will at the same time see by joint reflection
+from both glasses, another distant point D at 180º from C; and D will
+appear to correspond with C, if a suitable motion be given to the index
+glass B by the tangent screw F.
+
+The instrument may now be supposed to measure the arc CZD. If the points
+C and D be each three minutes farther from the zenith than 90º, the
+entire angle will then exceed 180º by double that quantity. The relative
+position of the glasses then corresponds to 180º 6', and the six minutes
+of excess would be shewn on the arc at F if there were no index error.
+But, by reason of the index error, the real quantity will not be known
+till a similar observation has been made with the instrument in an
+opposite direction.
+
+If the instrument be now inverted, so that the unsilvered glass is
+uppermost, the arc intended to be measured is CND, or the sum of the
+distances of the points C and D from the Nadir instead of the Zenith,
+which of course falls short of 180º by as much as the former arc
+exceeded that quantity.
+
+The difference of the two arcs is consequently twelve minutes, and if
+the index be now moved till the objects C and D appear to correspond,
+the amount of this double difference will be shewn by the _change of
+position_ of the vernier.
+
+Hence it is evidently unnecessary that the index error should be
+previously known, and even preferable that its amount should be such as
+to avoid the needless introduction of negative quantities by positions
+on different sides of zero.
+
+In the preceding description, it is supposed that the eye is looking
+directly through the unsilvered glass at the horizon, and that it also
+perceives the opposite horizon after two reflections; but an inspection
+of the figure will shew that the observer's head would necessarily
+intercept the rays from the horizon behind him. To obviate this, both
+the direct and the reflected rays are received in coming from the
+unsilvered glass, (and after passing through the field-glass of the
+telescope) on a mirror placed at an angle of 45º, which reflects them to
+the eye. By this ingenious contrivance, the obstruction is removed, and
+the opposite points of the horizon may be both seen at one moment.
+
+In practice, it is most convenient to direct the telescope to the same
+part of the horizon in both cases. Thus, if the east and west parts of
+the horizon be observed, and that the index glass be uppermost, and
+telescope pointing to the west, the observer is on the south side, and
+his face must be turned to the north. When the instrument is inverted,
+if the observer turn himself round at the same time, so as to face the
+south, then the telescope will be pointed as before to the west; but
+since the index glass is now undermost, the inferior arc will now be
+measured precisely as if his face were to the north, but with the
+advantage of the same lights seen in the erect position of the
+instrument.
+
+In using this instrument at sea for the first time, considerable
+difficulty arises from the constant change in the plane of the
+instrument from the perpendicular position, in which it is absolutely
+necessary that it should be held, in order to obtain a correct
+observation. What at first appears to be a defect, however, is a real
+advantage, namely, that whenever it is held in the least degree out of
+the vertical plane, the two horizons (that seen direct, and the
+reflected one) cross each other, and it is only when the plane is
+vertical that the horizons can appear parallel.
+
+The object is to get the two horizons to coincide exactly, and for this
+purpose it will often be necessary to have them of different shades.
+This is managed, as in the sextant, by means of the screw, which raises
+or lowers the telescope. When the telescope is brought nearer to the
+plane of the instrument, the reflected horizon becomes dark and
+distinct, but when screwed off it becomes fainter, and is not so well
+defined. Practice alone can teach the degree of intensity which is most
+favourable. In general it is best to have one horizon dark, and the
+other light; then bring them very nearly to coincide, and wait till the
+ship is steady, at which moment a slight touch of the tangent screw
+brings them exactly to cover one another. It will happen, of course,
+that when the coincidence is perfect, there is only one horizon to be
+seen, and a doubt remains whether all is right, but a slight motion of
+the instrument, by making the horizons cross each other, defines them at
+once.
+
+It is advisable to take several observations, and the safest way is to
+take one first with the index glass uppermost, and then with the
+instrument inverted, after which to return to the first, and so on for
+two or three times each way.
+
+In the pages which follow, there is given a table containing the result
+of all the observations made during this voyage, preceded by several
+sets of observations in the fullest detail. From the table it will be
+observed how seldom the dip, actually measured, agrees with that
+inferred from the mean refraction. Some of these experiments shew very
+remarkable differences, and point out the great utility of this
+instrument.
+
+The practical navigator, particularly if he has been in hot climates,
+will recollect how discordant his observations for latitude always were,
+and how few even of the best observers agree in their determination of
+the latitude of the same place, simple as the observation is thought to
+be. The cause is quite clear; and though it equally affects altitudes
+taken for absolute time, the disagreement is less obvious, and it will
+often happen that a chronometer going extremely well appears to vary
+every day from inaccuracy in the observations. Thus it is, I think,
+generally admitted, that it is almost impossible to rate a chronometer
+from altitudes observed with the sea horizon. Nor is this difficulty
+removed by taking equal altitudes, because the refraction in all
+probability will be different at the two observations. With an
+artificial horizon, indeed, the changes in refraction are not felt,
+because, at a considerable elevation above the horizon, the changes are
+very trifling. But it often happens in practice, that the artificial
+horizon cannot be used, and we are then reduced to the sea horizon,
+where the changes of refraction are always the greatest. In the Yellow
+Sea, for instance, we had no opportunity of landing during all the time
+that the squadron was at anchor, till the day before we sailed. So that
+during nearly a fortnight that the ships were at anchor, the sea horizon
+was necessarily used. I need only to refer to the observations taken off
+the Pei-ho, viz. from No. 37 to 62, to shew how extremely fallacious the
+results must have been.
+
+It is much to be wished that this excellent instrument should be brought
+into general use in navigation.
+
+
+
+
+THE FOLLOWING EIGHT OBSERVATIONS ARE SET DOWN IN THE FULLEST DETAIL, IN
+ORDER TO SHEW THE METHOD USED IN RECORDING THEM.
+
+
+No. 31.
+
+YELLOW SEA.
+
+_July 23, 1816._--6 P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 8'. 10" B - 7'. 10"
+ 8 . 05 7 . 10
+ 8 . 00 7 . 10
+ ------ ------
+ Mean 8 . 05 Mean 7 . 10 B.
+ Mean + 8 . 05 A.
+ -------
+ 15 . 15
+ -------
+ 3 . 49 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 Difference.
+ -------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+
+ Parts of the horizon observed, WSW. and ENE.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 78 inches
+ Thermometer {Air 82º
+ {Sea 77º
+ Latitude 35º north.
+ Longitude 124º east.
+
+Wind light from south; horizon uncommonly well defined and sharp; sky
+clear, and sea perfectly smooth.
+
+
+No. 40.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_July 29, 1816._--9 A.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 8'. 20" B - 11'. 40"
+ 8 . 45 11 . 35
+ 8 . 30 11 . 50
+ ------ -------
+ Mean 8 . 32 Mean 11 . 42 B.
+ Mean + 8 . 32 A.
+ -------
+ 4) 20 . 14
+ 5 . 3 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 . 13 Difference +
+ -------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, NW. and SE.
+ The low land just visible in the NW. distant 12 or 14 miles.
+
+ Depth of the sea, 18 feet.
+ Barometer 29 . 60 inches.
+ Thermometer {Air 81º
+ {Sea 84º
+ Latitude 38º. 50' north.
+ Longitude 118º. 00' east.
+
+There has been little wind this morning, after a very close night.
+
+
+ No. 43.
+
+ OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+ _August 6, 1816._--1 P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 7'. 48" B - 11'. 55"
+ 7 . 48 11 . 45
+ 7 . 55 11 . 45
+ ------ -------
+ Mean 7 . 50 Mean 11 . 48 B.
+ Mean + 7 . 50 A.
+ -------
+ 4) 19 . 38
+ -------
+ 4 . 54 Dip.
+ 3 . 53 Tabular.
+ 1 . 1 Difference +
+ -------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 6 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, SW. by S. and NE. by N.
+ Depth of the sea, 29 feet.
+
+ Barometer - 29 . 64 inches.
+ Thermometer { Air 83-1/2º
+ { Sea 81-1/2º
+ Latitude - 38º 50' north.
+ Longitude - 118º 00' east.
+
+Moderate breeze from SE. by S.; rather hazy, but the horizon sharp and
+distinct.
+
+
+No. 50.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 8, 1816._--6.15. A.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+ A + 10'. 20" B - 12'. 50"
+ 10 . 18 12 . 45
+ 10 . 35 13 . 00
+ ---------- ----------
+ Mean 10 . 24, 3 Mean 12 . 51.7 B.
+ Mean + 10 . 24.3 A.
+ ----------
+ 4) 23 . 16
+ 5 . 49 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 . 59 Difference +
+ ----------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, NNE. and SSW. clear of the land.
+ Depth of the sea, 26 feet.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 65 inches.
+ Thermometer { Air 69-1/2º
+ { Sea 78º
+
+ Wind NNW. moderate.
+ Latitude - 38º. 50' north.
+ Longitude - 118º. 00' east.
+
+ _Mem._--The top of the fort at the mouth of the river, is just visible at 30
+ feet from the surface of the water.
+
+
+No. 53.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 10, 1816._--6.10. A.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted
+ A + 13'. 55" B - 7'. 30"
+ 13 . 50 7 . 15
+ 13 . 45 7 . 25
+ ------- ---------
+ Mean 13 . 50 Mean 7 . 23.3 B.
+ ---------
+ Mean + 13 . 50 A.
+ ---------
+ 4) 21 . 13.3
+ 5 . 18.3 Dip.
+ 2 . 20 Tabular.
+ 2 . 58 Difference +
+
+ Height of the eye, 5 feet, 6 inches.
+ Depth of the water, 5 feet.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, N. by E. and S. by W. just clear of the land.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 69 inches. } On board His Majesty's ship Lyra,
+ Thermometer { Air 75º } distant three or four miles.
+ { Sea 77º }
+ Wind WNW.
+
+About one mile from the fort of Tung-coo, at the entrance of the Pei-ho
+river. _Note._--Instrument readjusted.
+
+
+No. 58.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 10, 1816._--2 P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+
+ A + 15'. 40" B - 8'. 50"
+ 15 . 30 8 . 50
+ 15 . 35 8 . 50
+ -------- --------
+ Mean 15 . 35 Mean 8 . 50 B.
+ Mean + 15 . 35 A.
+
+ 4) 24 . 25
+ 6 . 6.3 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 2 . 16 Difference +
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, N. by E. and S. by W.
+ Depth of the sea, 27 feet.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 68 inches.
+ Thermometer } Air 84º
+ } Sea 83º
+
+ Latitude 38º . 50' north.
+ Longitude 118º . 00' east.
+
+
+No. 59.
+
+OFF THE PEI-HO, YELLOW SEA.
+
+_August 10, 1816._--2. 15. P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted
+ A + 15'. 10" B - 7'. 50"
+ 15 . 10 8 . 10
+ 15 . 10 8 . 05
+ --------- ---------
+ Mean 15 . 13.3 Mean 8 . 01.7 B.
+ Mean + 15 . 13.3 A.
+ ---------
+ 4) 21 . 15
+ 5 . 48.7 Dip.
+ 3 . 50 Tabular.
+ 1 . 59 Difference.
+ ---------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet, 3 inches.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, NW. by N. and SE. by S.
+ Depth of the water, 27 feet.
+
+ Barometer 29 . 68 inches.
+ Thermometer { Air 84º
+ { Sea 83º
+
+ Latitude 38º. 50' north.
+ Longitude 118º. 00' east.
+
+The vessels in all parts of the horizon have an inverted image under
+them; this is very considerable, some having about a third of the sail,
+others only the hull.
+
+
+No. 110.
+
+OFF THE CAPE.
+
+_July 28, 1817._--2.30. P.M.
+
+ Index uppermost. Instrument inverted.
+ A + 6'. 35" B - 5'. 00"
+ 6 . 35 4 . 55
+ 6 . 40 5 . 00
+ -------- ---------
+ Mean 6 . 36.7 Mean 4 . 58.3 B.
+ Mean + 6 . 36.7 A.
+ ---------
+ 4) 11 . 35
+ 2 . 53.7 Dip.
+ 3 . 49 Tabular.
+ 55 Difference -
+ ---------
+
+ Height of the eye, 15 feet.
+ Parts of the horizon observed, SE. and NW.
+
+ Thermometer { Air 64º
+ { Sea 59º
+ Depth of the sea, 222 feet.
+
+ Latitude 34º. 57' south.
+ Longitude 20º. 15' east.
+
+Cape Lagullus due north, distant 6 or 8 miles.
+
+Calm all day; sky clear, and weather hazy.
+
+On the 29th and 30th of July we were off the Cape, but the weather was
+so bad as to prevent any sights being taken.
+
+[Transcriber's Note: The final column of each of the following
+tables is transcribed beneath the table.]
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+-----+-------+-------+-----+-------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff.|Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+--+--+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.|+ |- |Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat. | East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+--+--+---+---+---+---+-----+-------+------+------+
+ |1816. |f. i|' " |' "| "| "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 18|June 16.|15 3|4 35.0|3 50|45| |83 |82-|1/2| |29.86| 5 11 S|106 3 | 60 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | |
+ 19|June 16.|15 3|4 33.0|3 50|43| |83-|82 | 1-| |29.86| 5 05 S|106 10| 56 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|sh.|1/2| | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | |{85| | | | | | |
+ 20|June 16.|14 0|3 59 |3 41|18| |84-|{sh|1/2| |29.83| 5 05 S|106 10| 48 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|{95| | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | |{su| | | | | | |
+ 21|June 16.|14 |4 01 |3 41|20| |83 |81 | 2 | |29.85| 5 05 S|106 10| 57 |
+ 22|June 27.|16 |4 21.0|3 56|25| |84 |82 | 2 | |29.81| 6 49 N|107 49| |
+ 23|June 28.|16 |4 22.2|3 56|26| |84 |82 | 2 | |29.80| 8 00 |108 10| |
+ 24|July 3. |16 |4 08.2|3 56|12| |84-|81 | 3-| |29.77|13 29 |112 59| |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 25|July 6. |16 |3 53 |3 56| | 3|84 |83-|1/4| |29.75|20 00 |114 | |
+ | | | | | | | |3/4| | | | | | |
+ 27|July 7. |15 3|4 3 |3 50|13| |85 |85 | | |29.79|21 11 |114 | |
+ 28|July 8. |14 6|3 49 |3 45| 4| |84-|82 | 2-| |29.72| | | |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 29|July 16.|15 3|3 27 |3 50| |23|79 |79 | | |29.75|24 37 |118 56| |
+ 30|July 21.|15 3|3 44 |3 50| | 6|77-|76 | 1-| |29.78|34 |124 | 270 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 31|July 23.|15 3|3 49 |3 50| | 1|77 |82 | |5 |29.78|35 |124 | |
+ 32|July 23.|15 3|3 49 |3 50| | 1|77 |82 | |5 |29.78|35 |124 | |
+ 33|July 23.|15 3|3 44 |3 50| | 6|77 |82 | |5 |29.78|35 |124 | |
+ 35|July 27.|15 3|4 02 |3 50|12| |76 |76 | | |29.70|38 55 |118 50| 72 |
+ 36|July 27.|13 |3 35 |3 33| 2| |76 |76 | | |29.70|38 55 |118 50| 78 |
+ 37|July 28.|15 3|4 21 |3 50|31| |83 |84 | |1 |29.62|38 50 |118 00 20 |
+ 38|July 28.|15 3|4 06 |3 50|16| |83 |84 | |1 |29.62|38 50 |118 00| 20 |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+--+--+---+---+---+---+-----+-------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ ---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 18 |Weather hazy. The low land of Sumatra just visible. The land wind has |
+ |been blowing gently for about four hours. |
+ 19 |East and west parts of the horizon observed. Coast of Sumatra just |
+ |visible. Hazy. The land-wind dying away. |
+ 20 |The day has been extremely hot, and almost a calm. The sea-breeze not yet |
+ |set in, only a few light flaws. |
+ 24 |A fresh breeze from WNW. The sun set in fiery dirty red clouds. Weather |
+ |squally, with occasional showers of rain. Parts of the horizon observed |
+ |east and west. |
+ 25 |Weather remarkably fine; sky clear; and a gentle breeze from the south. |
+ |The sun set about five minutes after these observations were taken. |
+ |Parts of the horizon observed east and west. |
+ 27 |The forenoon has been extremely hot and oppressive. A rolling swell from |
+ |the SW. |
+ 28 |Parts of the horizon observed SSW and NNE, the first clear to seaward, |
+ | the other clear horizon, but the mainland of China behind it, and |
+ |various islands on each side of the NNE line. |
+ 29 |Very hazy weather: sky fiery. |
+ 30 |Clear weather, with a light breeze from the eastward. Sun set behind a |
+ |low range of dark clouds: sky in that quarter was unusually red. A long |
+ |swell from the northward. |
+ 31 |Wind light from south; horizon uncommonly well defined and sharp; sky |
+ |clear; and the sea perfectly smooth. These sights, and the two following, |
+ |may be depended on, I think, within ten seconds. |
+ 32 |Circumstances similar to No. 31. |
+ 33 |Parts of the horizon observed were that immediately under the setting |
+ |sun; viz. W 21º N, and the opposite E 21º S, the sun being about 4º high. |
+ |Day has been remarkably clear, although the wind has been from the |
+ |southward, which in these seas is said generally to bring fogs. |
+ 35 |Weather somewhat hazy; wind easterly. |
+ 36 |Wind easterly. |
+ 37 |These sights were taken while at anchor off the mouth of the Pei-ho. The |
+ |fort of Tung-coo, on the south bank of the river, bearing W 50º N, distant|
+ |about four or five miles. |
+ ---+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+------+--------+------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+----+-+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| + |-|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ |1816. |f. i|' " |' "|' " |"| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 39|July 28.|15 3|3 46 |3 50| |4|82 |83-| | 1-|29.61|38 50 |118 | 23 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | |
+ 40|July 29.|15 3|5 3 |3 50|1 13| |84 |81 | 3 | |29.60|38 50 |118 | 18 |
+ 41|July 29.|15 3|4 00.9|3 50| 10| |84 |83 | 1 | |29.58|38.50 |118 | 20 |
+ 42|Aug. 6. |15 3|5 09 |3 50|1 29| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.64|38 50 |118 | 22-|
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1/2|
+ 43|Aug. 6. |15 6|4 54 |3 53|1 1| |81-|83-| | 2 |29.64|38 50 |118 | 29 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | |
+ 44|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 47 |3 50 57| |81-|83-| | 2 |29.64|38 50 |118 | 29 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | |
+ 45|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 59 |3 50|1 9| |81-|83-| | 1-|29.64|38 50 |118 | 29-|
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| |1/2| | | | 1/2|
+ 46|Aug. 6. | 3 9|2 39 |1 54| 45| |81 |84-| | 3-|29.62|38 50 |118 | 30 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | |
+ 47|Aug. 6. | 6 |3 26 |2 25|1 1| |81 |84-| | 3-|29.62|38 50 |118 | 30-|
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | 1/2|
+ 48|Aug. 6. |15 3|4 59.2|3 50|1 9| |82 |80 | 2 | |29.59|38 50 |118 | 30 |
+ 49|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 47 |3 50|1 57| |78 |69-| 8-| |29.65|38 50 |118 | 26 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ 50|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 49 |3 59|1 59| |78 |69-| 8-| |29.65|38 50 |118 | 26 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ 51|Aug. 8. |15 3|5 47 |3 50|1 57| |77-|73 | 4-| |29.66|38 50 |118 | 24 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 52|Aug. 9. |15 3|4 30.4|3 59| 40| |79-|75 | 4-| |29.72|38 50 |118 | |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 53|Aug.10. | 5 6|5 18.3|2 20|2 58| |77 |75 | 2 | |29.69|38 50 |118 | 5 |
+ 54|Aug.10. | 5 6|4 28.3|2 20|2 8| | | | | | |38 50 |117 55| |
+ 55|Aug.10. | 5 6|4 7 |2 20|1 47| |77 |75 | 2 | |29.69|38 50 |117 55| 12 |
+ 56|Aug.10. | 5 6|3 55 |2 20|1 35| |77 |75 | 2 | |29.69|38 50 |118 | 13 |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 39|The day has been exceedingly close with little wind. |
+ 40|There has been little wind this morning, after a very close night. |
+ 41|Nearly calm, there being only a very light air from the SE.--Day sultry. |
+ 42|Weather hazy; sky clear overhead; sea remarkably smooth; wind north. |
+ 43|Moderate breeze from SE by S; rather hazy; but the horizon sharp and |
+ |distinct. And this together with the four following observations, may be |
+ |taken as very accurate, every circumstance being most favourable. |
+ 45|Parts of the horizon observed E by N and W by S. |
+ 46|Parts of the horizon observed SSE and NNW. Wind SE. |
+ 47|Wind SE. |
+ 48|Parts of the horizon observed E and W. The day, which has been remarkably |
+ |fine, has resumed towards sunset a wild, stormy aspect. Wind fresh at SE. |
+ 49|Parts of the horizon observed E by S and W by N. This morning unusually |
+ |clear; so that when the sun's semi-diameter only was above the horizon, |
+ |it was painful to look at him. The horizon has a rugged appearance. |
+ 50|Parts of the horizon observed NNE and SSW. Wind NNW, moderate. |
+ 51|Weather remarkably clear; horizon still rugged; wind NNW, moderate. |
+ 52|This morning cloudy, and looks rainy but the air seems clear. Parts of the |
+ |horizon observed NW by W and SE by E. |
+ 53|Parts of the horizon observed N by E and S by W. Instrument readjusted. |
+ |Wind WNW. |
+ 54|Parts of the horizon observed WSW and ENE. Wind NW. These observations |
+ |were taken close to the low land, near the mouth of the Pei-ho. The night |
+ |had been cold, and the morning was still keen; but unfortunately there |
+ |was no thermometer in the boat; I suppose, however, that the air was |
+ |about 66º At the time these sights were taken, I observed a vessel bearing |
+ |N by W, the lower half of whose sail was inverted. |
+ 55|Wind NW. |
+ 56|Wind NW. Parts of the horizon observed NW and SE. During these |
+ |observations,(53, 54, 55, 56) the vessels near the land had more or less |
+ |an inverted image under them. |
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+------+--------+------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+----+-+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| + |-|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ |1816. |f. i| ' " |' "|' " |"| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 57|Aug. 10.|15 3| 5 37 |3 50|1 47| |78 |76-| 1-| |29.70|38 50 |118 | 26 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ 58|Aug. 10.|15 3| 6 6 |3 50|2 16| |83 |84 | | 1 |29.68|38 50 |118 | 27 |
+ 59|Aug. 10.|15 3| 5 49 |3 50|1 59| |83 |84 | | 1 |29.68|38 50 |118 | 27 |
+ 60|Aug. 11.|15 3| 5 3 |3 50|1 13| |79 |76 | 3 | |29.72|38 50 |118 | 26-|
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1/2|
+ 61|Aug. 11.|15 3| 5 13 |3 50|1 23| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.73|38 50 |118 | 24 |
+ 62|Aug. 12.|16 | 4 52 |3 56| 56| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.79|38 50 |118 | 24 |
+ 63|Aug. 12.|15 3| 4 35 |3 50| 45| |81 |79-| 1-| |29.77|38 36 |117 56| 29-|
+ | | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | 1/2|
+ 64|Aug. 13.|16 | 4 4 |3 56| 8| |79 |78 | 1 | |29.80|38 31 |118 09| 42 |
+ 65|Aug. 13.|16 | 4 6 |3 56| 10| |79 |78 | 1 | |29.80|38 31 |118 09| 42 |
+ 66|Aug. 13.|16 | 4 20 |3 56| 24| |81 |83 | | 2 |29.80|38 21 |118 04| 44 |
+ 67|Aug. 14.|15 3| 4 30 |3 30|1 | |78 |79 | | 1 |29.71|38 30 |118 24| |
+ 68|Aug. 14.|15 3| 4 25 |3 30| 55| |79-|80-| | 1 |29.70|38 30 |118 35| 50 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | | |
+ 69|Aug. 15.|15 3| 4 39 |3 30|1 9| |80 |79 | 1 | |29.77|38 00 |118 35| 48 |
+ 70|Aug. 15.|15 3| 4 53 |3 30|1 23| |81-|79 | 2-| |29.76|38 00 |118 54| 44 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | | |
+ 71|Aug. 15.|15 3| 5 4 |3 30|1 34| |82 |79 | 3 | |29.70|37 54 |118 56| 40 |
+ 72|Aug. 16.|15 3| 4 43 |3 30|1 13| |81 |76 | 5 | |29.17|37 38 |118 57| 39 |
+ 73|Aug. 17.|15 3| 4 38 |3 30|1 8| |80 |79-|1/2| |29.73|37 21 |119 28| 30 |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | |
+ 74|Aug. 17.|14 | 4 29 |3 41| 48| |81-|81 |1/2| |29.75|37 19 |119 44| 33 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | |
+ 75|Aug. 17.|15 3| 4 42 |3 30|1 12| |81-|82 | |1/2|29.70|37 21 |119 44| 30 |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | |
+ 76|Aug. 18.|16 | 4 39 |3 56| 43| |80 |77 | 3 | |29.76|37 29 |119 37| 48 |
+ 77|Aug. 20.|16 | 4 20 |3 56| 24| |77 |72 | 5 | |29.85|37 50 |120 16| |
+ 79|Aug. 21.|15 3| 4 42 |3 50| 52| |77 |71 | 6 | |29.80|37 52 |120 27| |
+ 80|Aug. 21.| 4 | 2 37 |1 58| 39| |77 |79 | | 2 |29.80|37 52 |120 27| 60 |
+ 81|Aug. 21.|15 3| 4 6 |3 50| 18| |77 |76 | 1 | |29.76| | | 60 |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+-+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 57|Weather very clear. Parts of the horizon observed ENE and WSW. |
+ 58|Parts of the horizon observed N by E and S by W. |
+ 59|The vessels in all parts of the horizon have an inverted image under them; |
+ |this is very considerable, some having about one-third of the sail, others |
+ |only the hull. |
+ 60|Light wind from SE. Sky cloudy, somewhat hazy; but the horizon sharp and |
+ |unbroken. |
+ 61|The inversion of the vessels as conspicuous as before. Parts of the |
+ |horizon observed ESE and WNW. |
+ 62|A light breeze from the SE. Cloudy and close.--N.B. Instrument readjusted. |
+ 63|Part of the horizon observed N and S. |
+ 64|Part of the horizon observed E and W. A moderate breeze from the SW. Clear |
+ |overhead; hazy in the horizon. |
+ 65|Parts of the horizon observed N and S. |
+ 66|Wind SE. Sky clear, and the horizon sharp. |
+ 67|Light breeze from ESE. Parts observed NE and SW. |
+ 68|Light breeze at ESE. Cloudy, with a haze in the horizon. Parts observed NE |
+ |and SW. |
+ 69|Parts of the horizon observed E and W. Moderate breeze from ENE. |
+ |Remarkably clear weather. |
+ 70|Steady moderate breeze at ENE. Very clear. Horizon sharp, and well defined.|
+ 72|Wind at East. Sky cloudy and rather hazy. |
+ 73|Light wind at SW. Hazy weather. |
+ 74|Light breeze from the Northward. Weather hazy. Parts of the horizon |
+ |observed SE and NW. |
+ 75|Parts of the horizon observed NE by E and SW by W. |
+ 76|Moderate breeze from East. Parts of the horizon observed WNW and ESE. |
+ 77|The wind has been blowing hard for two days from NE; this evening it has |
+ |lulled, and the weather has cleared off: there remains however a high |
+ |swell. |
+ 79|Land-wind South. Fine clear morning. |
+ 80|Parts of the horizon observed SW by S and NE by N. |
+ 81|The inversions which were so conspicuous this morning have been entirely |
+ |removed since the sea breeze set in. In some distant islands there is a |
+ |slight inversion at the ends, but very trifling. |
+ --+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ --+--------+----+-----------+-------+-------+-------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. |Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+----+--+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No. Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| + | -|Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+--+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ | 1816. |f. i| ' " |' "|' " | "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 82|Aug. 21.|14 | 3 26 |3 41| |15|76 |75 | 1 | |29.74| | | |
+ 83|Aug. 21.|15 3| 3 29 |3 41| |12|76 |75 | 1 | |29.74| | | |
+ 84|Aug. 22.|16 | 3 52 |3 56| | 4|75 |76 | 1 | |29.80| | | |
+ 85|Sept. 4.|12 | 3 46 |3 25| 21| |81 |83 | | 2 |29.86| 36 10|126 30| 56 |
+ 86|Sept. 4.|12 | 3 42 |3 25| 17| |81 |83 | | 2 |29.86| 36 8|126 35| 56 |
+ 87|Sept. 5.|15 | 3 47 |3 49| | 2|79 |80 | | 1 |29.80| 35 40|126 17| |
+ 88|Sept. 7.|15 3| 3 33 |3 41| | 8|74 |80 | | 6 |29.84| 34 32|126 34| |
+ 89|Sept. 7.|15 3| 3 27 |3 41| |14|74 |80 | | 6 |29.84| 34 32|126 34| |
+ | 1817. | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+ 90|Mar. 3. |14 | 3 57 |3 41| 16| |82 |84-| | 2-|29.74| 2 18|102 20| |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| |1/2| | | | |
+ 91|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 49 |3 46| 1 3| |83 |85 | | 2 |29.73| 3 40|100 35| |
+ 92|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 50 |3 46| 1 4| |83 |85 | | 2 |29.73| | | 165 |
+ 93|Mar. 5. |14 8| 4 53 |3 46| 1 7| | | | | | | | | |
+ 94|Mar. 8. |14 8| 4 33 |3 46| 47| |84 |84 | | |29.86| 5 12|100 14| 120 |
+ a)| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
+ 94|Mar. 8. |14 8| 4 58 |3 46|1 12| |84 |82-| 1-| |29.86| | | 120 |
+ b)| | | | | | | |1/2|1/2| | | | | |
+ --+--------+----+------+----+----+--+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ --+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 82|This and the following were observed towards sunset; they exhibit a |
+ |considerable degree of refraction above what is usual. The sights on this |
+ |morning in the same place gave upwards of 1' greater dip. |
+ 83|All other circumstances the same as in No. 82. |
+ 84|Fresh breeze from SE, with a remarkably clear sky. The horizon uncommonly |
+ |sharp. |
+ 85|Wind moderate from WNW. Clear weather. |
+ 86|All other circumstances the same as in No. 85. Parts of the horizon |
+ |observed SSW and NNE. |
+ 87|Parts of the horizon observed WNW and ESE. |
+ 88|The morning has been exceedingly hot before the breezes set in from sea at |
+ |11 A.M. |
+ 89|All other circumstances the same as in No. 89. |
+ 90|After a very hot day. |
+ 91|Parts of the horizon observed ESE and WNW. See further remarks under 93. |
+ |Instruments readjusted. |
+ 92|Parts of the horizon observed NE and SW. All other circumstances as in No. |
+ |91. |
+ 93|Parts of the horizon observed SSE and NNW. These three observations (Nos. |
+ |91, 92, and 93) were made under the most favourable circumstances, and may |
+ |be considered as shewing the accuracy which the instrument is capable of |
+ |attaining. The sea was so perfectly smooth, that not the slightest motion |
+ |could be detected. The horizon at all the parts observed was sharp, and |
+ |better defined than I recollect to have seen it; and, what is not often the |
+ |case, the opposite parts were alike in strength of light &c. The day has |
+ |been hot, but not close, with a light breeze from the Southward. The dip is |
+ |very great, but the observations were made with such care, that there can |
+ |be no doubt of their accuracy. |
+ 94|There had been a light breeze from the North in the morning, but for an |
+ a)|hour before these sights were taken it had been calm. |
+ 94|Nearly the same place as No. 94(a); but the other circumstances were |
+ b)|changed, as the sea breeze at NW had set in about a quarter of an hour, |
+ |whereas in the last instance it was calm. The above angles were taken with |
+ |great care. The horizon sharp. Parts of the horizon observed NW and SE. |
+ --+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ ---+--------+----+-----------+------+-------+-------+-----+------+------+------+
+ | |Height Dip. |Diff. | Then. |Differ.| | | | |
+ | | of +-----------+--+---+---+---+---+---+ | | Long.|Sound-|
+ No.| Date. |eye.| Obs. |Tab.| +| - |Sea|Air| + | - |Baro.| Lat.| East.| ings.|
+ ---+--------+----+------+----+--+---+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ | 1817. |f. i|' " |' "| "|' "| º | º | | | | º ' | º ' | feet |
+ 95|Mar. 19.|14 8| 3 51 |3 46| 5| |80 |82 | | 2 |29.84| | | |
+ 96|Mar. 19.|14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |80 |82 | | 2 |29.78|13 30 | 89 30| |
+ 97|Mar. 20.|14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |79-|82 | | 2-|29.83|14 30 | 89 15| |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | |1/2| | | | |
+ 98|Mar. 21.|14 8| 3 48 |3 46| 2| |80 |82 | | 2 |29.84|15 00 | 89 00| |
+ 99|Mar. 22.|14 8| 3 39 |3 46| | 7|79 |79-| |1/2|29.84|16 00 | 88 30| |
+ | | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | |
+ 100|Mar. 23.|14 8| 3 47 |3 46| 1| |78-|79 | |1/2|29.80|17 00 | 88 00| |
+ | | | | | | |1/2| | | | | | | |
+ 101|Mar. 24.|14 8| 3 53 |3 46| 7| |78 |80 | | 2 |29.78|17 30 | 88 15| |
+ | | | | | | | | | | | |South.| | |
+ 102|July 22 |15 | 3 36 |3 49| | 13|71 |72 | | 1 | |34 0 | 26 | 400 |
+ 103|July 24.|15 | 3 16 |3 49| | 33|59 |62 | | 3 | |34 25 | 24 56| 372 |
+ 104|July 25.|15 | 3 36 |3 49| | 13|62 |63 | | 1 | |35 S | 23 45| 462 |
+ 105|July 26.|15 | 3 30 |3 49| | 19|58 |60 | | 2 | |35 S | 23 | 462 |
+ 106|July 26.|15 | 3 30 |3 40| | 19|60 |63 | | 3 | |34 52 | 22 23| 420 |
+ 107|July 27.|15 | 2 55 |3 49| | 54|56 |59 | | 3 | |35 | 21 | 24 |
+ 108|July 27.|15 | 2 47 |3 49| |1 2|56 |59 | | 3 | |35 | 21 | 240 |
+ 109|July 28.|15 | 3 17 |3 19| | 32|58 |64 | | 6 | |34 58 | 20 15| |
+ 110|July 28.|15 | 2 54 |3 49| | 55|59 |64 | | 5 | |34 57 | 20 15| 222 |
+ ---+--------+----+------+----+--+---+---+---+---+---+-----+------+------+------+
+ Remarks.
+ ---+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ 95|The wind steady and moderate at NE; atmosphere clear; horizon well defined;|
+ |a long swell from SW. This swell, which was not high, produced an obvious |
+ |effect on the dip angle, as observed, the two horizons alternately |
+ |separating and overlapping; this change was however so slight that I have |
+ |not been able to measure it. |
+ 96|All other circumstances as in Nov. 95. Parts of the horizon observed NE |
+ |and SW. |
+ 97|During the night there has been a light breeze from the East; at this |
+ |moment it is freshening up a little. The atmosphere is clear; horizon |
+ |sharp; a long low swell from SW, as yesterday. |
+ 98|It has been calm, or nearly so, during the night; occasionally a light air |
+ |from SE and S. All circumstances favorable. |
+ 99|During the night there has been a light wind from SW. The weather is more |
+ |hazy than when the wind was from the Eastward, and the horizon not so |
+ |distinctly marked; but the above sights are good. There is still a swell |
+ |from SW, which causes some little uncertainty as to the exact moment of |
+ |taking the angle. |
+ 100|In the night there has been a light breeze from W by S. Weather hazy; but |
+ |the horizon sharper than yesterday morning. |
+ 101|During the night almost calm; just now a light air from the NE. Parts of |
+ |the horizon observed NE and SW. |
+ 102|Fine fair clear weather, but with so high a swell as to render the |
+ |observation difficult. Wind light from N, after having been blowing fresh. |
+ 103|Light breezes from the North-eastward; smooth water, and a clear cool air; |
+ |hazy about the land. The distance from the South cost of Africa was about |
+ |8 or 9 leagues. All circumstances seem favourable. No current; we have |
+ |probably been too near shore for it. |
+ 104|Light breeze from the SW, with a long swell. Hazy weather. The wind has |
+ |been from the West for 24 hours; at first blowing hard, but latterly |
+ |moderate, the current setting us to the SW about a mile an hour. A very |
+ |heavy dew falling this evening. Parts of the horizon observed East and |
+ |West. |
+ 105|Moderate breeze from the NE; air hazy; long high swell from the Westward. |
+ |From observations by stars and chronometers, it has been ascertained that |
+ |there is not the least current. Distance from the South coast of Africa |
+ |about 50 miles. A high range in sight to the Northward. Parts of the |
+ |horizon observed North and South. |
+ 106|A light breeze from the NE; air hazy; a long swell from the Westward. |
+ |About 50 miles distant from the land. |
+ 107|The wind has been moderate from the land all night; air hazy; weather raw; |
+ |a very heavy dew falling all night. The land in sight to the Northward, |
+ |distant about 40 miles, is inverted from one end to the other. |
+ 108|Parts of the horizon observed NNE and SSW. All other circumstances as in |
+ |No. 107. |
+ 109|Parts of the horizon observed NE and SW. Cape Lagullas North 2 or 3 |
+ |leagues. A light breeze from the Eastward. Air hazy. |
+ 110|Parts of the horizon observed SE and NW. Cape Lagullas due North, distant |
+ |6 or 8 miles. Calm all day; sky clear; and weather hazy. |
+ | |
+ |N.B. On the 29th and 30th of July we were off the Cape, but the weather |
+ |was so bad as to prevent any sights being taken. |
+ ---+---------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+
+
+METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL,
+
+FROM JULY TO NOVEMBER 1816, WHILE THE SHIPS WERE IN THE YELLOW AND JAPAN
+SEAS.
+
+
+
+
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ | | Thermom.| | | |
+ | +----+----+ | | |
+ Hour.|Barom. |Air.|Sea.| Winds.| Lat. | Long. |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | South | | |_Sunday, July 14, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | SSW | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued quite
+ 4 | | | | | | |light during the night, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |one or two slight showers, but
+ 6 | | | | | | |no squalls.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30i.01h| | | SW | | |About 8 A.M. the wind
+ 9 | | | | | | |hauled to about SW, from
+ 10 | | | | | | |which quarter it blew a light
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |breeze.
+ Noon.|30 .01 | 83º| 84º| |22º 07'|115º 26'|
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Coast of |
+ 3 | | | | | China. |
+ 4 |29 .94 | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |_Monday, July 15, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The same winds during the
+ 4 | | | | | | |night.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Found that we had been
+ 10 |29 .89 | | |SW by W| | |driven by a current,
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |setting about E by N, 2-1/2
+ Noon.|29 .89 | 82 | 83 | WNW |22 .43 |117 .30 |miles an hour.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | West | |
+ 2 | | | | | SE Coast |
+ 3 | | | | | of China. |About 3 o'clock it became
+ 4 | | | | | |extremely hazy; the sun set
+ 5 | | | | | |in fiery clouds, and a blood
+ 6 | | | | WSW | |red tint was given to the low
+ 7 | | | | | |clouds all round the horizon.
+ 8 |29 .76 | | | SW | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, July 16, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | WSW | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During this day there has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been a moderate breeze from
+ 6 | | | | West | | |the SSW, with a thick haze,
+ 7 | | | | | | |and dew at night.
+ 8 |29 .74 | | | WSW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Soundings from 32 to 26
+ 10 | | | | SW | | |fathoms: dark fine sand.
+ 11 |29 .83 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 83 | | |24 .37 |118 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Straits of |We have seen no land all
+ 3 | | | | | Formosa, |day, having ran along nearly
+ 4 | | | | | China. |parallel with the coast
+ 5 | | | | | |of about 30 or 40 about
+ 6 |29 .75 | | | | |Chusan, at the distance
+ 7 | | | | | |leagues.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 80 | 79 | SW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .76 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, July 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 80 | SSW | | |The weather is remarkably
+ | | |-1/2| | | |hazy, and there is a very
+ 5 | | | | | | |disagreeable sea coming after
+ 6 |29 .76 | | | | | |us.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 82 | 81 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .81 | | | SW | | |
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .81 | 82 | 80 |SW by S| 26 .1 |122 .6 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |29 .80 | | | SSW | |
+ 2 | | | | | Straits of |At night hazy with a heavy
+ 3 | | | | | Formosa, |dew; soundings 52 fathoms.
+ 4 |29 .76 | 82 | 81 | | China. |To-day we quitted the Straits
+ 5 |29 .76 | | | | |of Formosa, and stood towards
+ 6 | | | | | |the Yellow Sea. Last evening
+ 7 |29 .76 | | | | |we were among a cluster of
+ 8 |29 .79 | 82 | 80 | South | |large islands near the coast
+ 9 | | | | | |of China, about two-thirds of
+ 10 | | | | | |the way through the Straits
+ 11 | | | | | |of Formosa.
+ Mid.|29 .80 | 81 | 80 |S by W | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |_Thursday, July 18, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind during all this day
+ 4 | | | | | | |has been from the South
+ 5 |29 .78 | | | | | |Westward.
+ 6 | | | | | | | From noon till midnight it
+ 7 | | | | | | |continued fresh and steady,
+ 8 |29 .80 | 81 | 80 | WSW | | |after which it lulled.
+ 9 | | | | | | |Weather very hazy, and at
+ 10 |29 .86 | | | SW | | |night a heavy dew falling.
+ 11 | | | | | N | | Depth of water from 35 to
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 81 | 79 | SSW |26 .21 | |37 fathoms.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | SW | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | |To the northward|
+ 3 | | | | |of the Straits |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 81 | 80 |SW by W|of Formosa. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .76 | | | SW | |No land seen to-day, being
+ 7 | | | | | |about 30 leagues off shore,
+ 8 |29 .76 | 81 | 79 | SSW | |to the Northward of the
+ 9 | | | | | |Straits of Formosa.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, July 19, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .78 | 79 | 78 |S by W | | |During this day there has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been a moderate breeze from
+ 6 |29 .75 | | | | | |the SSW, with a thick haze
+ 7 | | | | | | |and dew at night.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 78 | 78 | SSW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Soundings from 32 to 26
+ 10 |29 .78 | | | SW | | |fathoms: fine dark sand.
+ 11 |29 .78 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .78 | 78 | 79 |SW by W|30 .54 |123 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .75 | | | |Off the Islands |
+ 3 | | | | |of Chusan 30 or |
+ 4 |29 .72 | 80 | 80 | SSW |40 leagues. |
+ 5 | | | | | |We have seen no land this
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | |day, having ran along nearly
+ 7 | | | | | |parallel with the coast about
+ 8 |29 .72 | 79 | 80 | South | |Chusan, at the distance of
+ 9 | | | | | |about 30 or 40 leagues.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .74 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |S by W | | |_Saturday, July 20, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Light SSW winds, with thick
+ 4 |29 .69 | 79 | 76 | | | |haze and dew at night. Regular
+ 5 | | | | | | |soundings 20 fathoms: mud and
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | | |black sand.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 79 | 77 | South | | |
+ 9 | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 80 | 78 |S by W |32 .35 |123 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |To-day we are about halfway
+ 2 |29 .70 | | |SW by W| Entering the |between the SE part of
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |Corea and the Chusan islands,
+ 4 |29 .66 | 80 | 77 | WSW | |each being about 50 leagues
+ 5 | | | | | |distant; the mouth of the
+ 6 |29 .68 | | | | |great river Yang-tse-kiang is
+ 7 | | | | | |nearly W 50 leagues, and the
+ 8 |29 .66 | 79 | 77 |SW by W| |promontory of Shan-tung N by
+ 9 | | | | | |W 100 leagues.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .69 | 78 | 77 | WSW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |W by N | | |_Sunday, July 21, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | NNW | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind after noon yesterday
+ 5 | | | | | | |freshened up towards sunset
+ 6 | | | | | | |from the WSW, and in the
+ 7 | | | | | | |night it hauled to the NW
+ 8 |29 .76 | 75 | 76 |N by W | | |gradually, and so to North;
+ 9 | | | | | | |about noon it became quite
+ 10 |29 .78 | | | | | |light as it drew to the
+ 11 |29 .79 | | | | N | E |northward.
+ Noon.|29 .79 | 76 | 77 | North |33 .55 | 124 |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+The weather has become quite
+ 1 |29 .78 | | | | |clear since the change of the
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | | Yellow Sea. |wind.
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .78 | 77 | 77 | NNW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Land in sight to-day about
+ 6 |29 .79 | | |E by N | |East from us, supposed to be
+ 7 | | | | | |the islands off the South end
+ 8 |29 .79 | 77 | 77 | East | |of Corea.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | |E by S | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | SE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SSE | | |_Monday, July 22, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |In the night there was a
+ 4 |9 .69 | 75 | 77 |S by W | | |breeze from the SSW with
+ 5 | | | | | | |very thick weather, and
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | | |much lightning all round.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .71 | 77 | 76 |SW by W| | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .71 | | | SW | | |
+ 11 |29 .75 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .75 | 78 | 77 | SSW |34 .44 |123 .55 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | SW | Yellow Sea. |After noon it fell calm till
+ 3 | | | | | |about 6 P.M. when there came
+ 4 |29 .75 | 79 | 79 | Calm | |light breeze from the westward
+ 5 | | | | | |which hauled to north, and
+ 6 |29 .73 | | | NNE | |about morning fell nearly calm.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .73 | 76 | 77 |N by E | |Regular soundings from 44 to
+ 9 | | | | | |43 fathoms: mud.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .74 | 75 | 76 | North | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |N by W | | |_Tuesday, July 23, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | West | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .76 | 75 | 76 | Calm | | |About 8 this morning a
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze sprung at South, which
+ 6 | | | | | | |lasted during the day,
+ 7 | | | | | | |freshening very gradually--sky
+ 8 |29 .78 | 77 | 77 | SSE | | |clear.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | SE | | |Regular soundings 43
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |fathoms: mud.
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 78 | South |35 .06 |123 .06 |
+ -----+-------+----+--- +-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .79 | | | | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .79 | 81 | 78 | SSW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |A moderate breeze from the
+ 6 |29 .78 | | | | |Southward, and fine clear
+ 7 | | | | | |weather.
+ 8 |29 .76 | 78 | 77 | SE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | SSE | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .77 | 77 | 76 |S by E | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SSE | | |_Wednesday, July 24, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind during these 24
+ 4 | | | | | | |hours has been moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |from the Southward.--Quite
+ 6 | | | | | | |clear, not the least
+ 7 | | | | | | |appearance of fog.
+ 8 |29 .75 | 77 | 76 |SE by S| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 |29 .77 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | |S by E | | |
+ 11 |29 .86 | | | NW | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .88 | 75 | 78 |NW by W|36 .27 |123 .01 |A very curious assemblage
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+of clouds passed over us at
+ 1 | | | | | |noon from the NW.
+ 2 |29 .70 | | |E by S | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .69 | 76 | 74 |SE by E| |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | SSE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 75 | 72 |S by E | |Soundings 40, 38, and 37
+ 9 | | | | | |fathoms: brown mud.
+ 10 | | | |S by W | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, July 25, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 70 | 71 | SSW | | |The wind during the night
+ 5 | | | | | | |hung to the SW, with rain
+ 6 | | | | | | |occasionally.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 71 | 66 | Calm | | |After daybreak the
+ 9 | | | | WNW | | |weather cleared up, and the
+ 10 |29 .70 | | |NW by W| | |breeze fell gradually as we
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | NW | N | E |rounded the NE point of the
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 74 | 73 | |37 .32 |122 .37 |promontory of Shan-tung.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .70 | | | East |Nearly on the |
+ 3 | | | | |meridian of the |
+ 4 |29 .66 | 77 | 72 | SE |NE point of |
+ 5 | | | | |Shan-tung |
+ 6 |29 .66 | | | SSE |promontory, |
+ 7 | | | | |Yellow Sea. |In the forenoon it felt
+ 8 |29 .61 | 76 | 72 | | |calm, and towards sunset a
+ 9 | | | | | |breeze sprung up from ESE
+ 10 | | | | | |and SE which lasted during
+ 11 | | | | | |the night.
+ Mid |29 .61 | 75 | 75 |S by W | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |S by W | | |_Friday, July 26, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | South | | |As the day broke, the
+ 4 |29 .61 | 74 | 72 | SSE | | |breeze which had been light
+ 5 | | | | | | |during the night, freshened
+ 6 | | | | | | |up, and the weather, hitherto
+ 7 | | | | South | | |clear, became suddenly quite
+ 8 |29. 61 | 74 | 72 | SSW | | |foggy; this however lasted
+ 9 | | | | | | |only half an hour, and we
+ 10 |29. 62 | | | | | |enjoyed during the day the
+ 11 |29. 62 | | | | N | E |same fine clear weather,
+ Noon.|29. 62 | 74 | 72 |S by W |38 .07 |122 .00 |with the exception indeed of
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+one thunder squall, which
+ 1 | | | | SSW | |lasted only a few minutes,
+ 2 |29. 62 | | | SW | |and passed over, going towards
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |the SE.
+ 4 |29. 59 | 76 | 66 | WNW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |N.B. This was the only
+ 6 |29. 60 | | |SE by S| |instance of fog during the
+ 7 | | | | SE | |six weeks that the ships were
+ 8 |29. 60 | 73 | 68 | | |in the Yellow Sea.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29. 60 | 75 | 74 |SE by E| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | South | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, July 27, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | SSE | | |During the whole of this
+ 5 | | | | | | |day we had a fresh breeze
+ 6 | | | | | | |from East and ESE, with dark
+ 7 | | | | | | |cloudy weather. As we drew
+ 8 |29. 69 | 77 | 77 | SE | | |across the Gulf of Petchelee
+ | | |-1/2| | |we had the wind much stronger.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 69 | | | East | | |
+ 11 |29. 70 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29. 70 | 76 | 76 | ENE |38 .52 |117 .49 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 68 | | |E by S | |
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |We anchored at seven
+ 4 |29. 61 | 76 | 77 |E by N | |o'clock in 3-1/2 fathoms water.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29. 61 | | | East | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 80 | 77 | 82 |E by N | |
+ 9 | | | | | |In the night it blew hard
+ 10 |29. 84 | | |SE by E| |from the East, and at sunrise
+ 11 | | | | | |we had a violent thunder
+ Mid.| | | | | |storm.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |SE by E| | |_Sunday, July 28, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After the thunder storm had
+ 4 |29 .70 | 80 | 80 |SE by S| | |passed the weather cleared up,
+ | | |-1/2| | | |and became quite fine.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .63 | 82 | 82 | SW | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .61 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .62 | | | | N | |
+ Noon.|29 .60 | 83 | 82 |W by N |38.52.42| |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | |N by E | |
+ 2 |29 .60 | | | North | Pei-ho, |During the day the breeze
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |has been moderate, with fine
+ 4 |29 .61 | 81 | 82 |E by S | |clear weather.
+ 5 | | | | SSE | |
+ 6 |29 .62 | | |S by E | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | |
+ 9 |29 .61 | 83 | 82 | South | |
+ 10 | | | |S by E | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .60 | 80 | 82 | SW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, July 29, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | WSW | | |
+ 4 |29 .59 | 79 | 81 | NNW | | |Light breezes and cloudy
+ | | |-1/2| | | |weather.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .60 | 82 | 82 |E by N | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it fell calm.
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .62 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .60 | 82 | 84 | NE |38 .56 |118 .00 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .59 | | | SE | |At anchor off the mouth of the
+ 3 | | | | | |Pei-ho river, Yellow Sea.
+ 4 |29 .53 | 83 | 84 | ESE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .55 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .55 | 82 | 82 | SE | |During the night a moderate
+ | |-1/2| | | |breeze from the Eastward.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .63 | 80 | 82 |SE by E| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, July 30, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |SE by E| | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During this day there has
+ 4 | | | | | | |been a light air from the
+ 5 | | | | | | |Eastward, and fine clear
+ 6 | | | | East | | |weather.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .50 | 82 | 82 | ENE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .63 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .63 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .62 | 81 | |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .65 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .68 | 81 | 84 |SE by E|Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .61 | 82 | 83 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |At midnight it fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .69 | 83 | 82 | Calm | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, July 31, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |This morning there is a
+ 5 | | | | | | |light air from the eastward,
+ 6 | | | | | | |inclining to calm.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | 88 | 82 | SW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 84 | 85 | WNW | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .70 | | | ESE |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .61 | 83 | 86 SE |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .71 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 82 | 82 | SSE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards night the breeze
+ 10 | | | | | |freshened up from the SE.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .84 | 83 | 82 | South | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 1, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | SW | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night there has
+ 4 |29 .69 | 83 | 84 | West | | |been a fresh breeze from the
+ 5 | | | | | | |SW, with rain and lightning.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 81 | 82 |SW by S| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .69 | | | SSW | | |Towards noon it became more
+ 11 | | | | | | |moderate.
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 81 | 82 |SW by S| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .63 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .66 | 82 | 82 |S by E |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 | | | | SE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 80 | 82 |S by E | |And at night it was very
+ 9 | | | | SSW | |squally, with rain.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .65 | 79 | 82 | SW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |W by S | | |_Friday, August 2, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the whole of the night
+ 5 | | | | | | |it rained.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | 78 | 82 | | | |Towards morning it blew fresh
+ | |-1/2| | | | |from the Westward.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .68 | | | SSW | | |
+ Noon.|29 .67 | 79 | 82 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |S by W | |
+ 2 |29 .63 | | | SE |At anchor off |During the whole of the day
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|it has been very hazy with
+ 4 |29 .68 | 78 | 83 | East |Pei-ho, Yellow |slight showers of rain.
+ | |-1/2| | |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .63 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .65 | 78 | 82 | SSE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Midnight, fresh breezes and
+ 10 | | | | | |clear.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .70 | 79 | 82 | East | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, August 3, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |E by N | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Fresh breezes and cloudy
+ 4 |29 .72 | 77 | 81 | NE | | |weather.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .84 | 77 | 81 | ENE | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Strong breezes and cloudy,
+ 10 | | | | | | |with slight showers of rain
+ 11 |29 .84 | | | NE | | |at intervals.
+ Noon.|29 .82 | 79 | 82 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .80 | 76 | 82 |NE by N|Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .84 | | | | |Towards evening it cleared
+ 7 | | | | | |up.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 76 | 80 | ENE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |A short swell from the NE.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ Mid.| | 75 | 80 |NE by N| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | North | | |_Sunday, August 4, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |Light airs and fine weather.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | NW | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .69 | 78 | 80 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ Noon |29 .70 | 78 | 81 | West | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | NW | |Cloudy, with slight showers
+ 2 |29 .68 | | | WNW |At anchor off |of rain at intervals.
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .68 | 78 | 81 | WSW |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .68 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .68 | 78 | 80 | West | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .68 | 77 | 81 | SW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, August 5, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |W by S | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ 4 |29 .68 | 77 | 80 | WSW | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .68 | 78 | 80 |W by N | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .69 | | | | | |In the forenoon we had a
+ 11 | | | | | | |slight shower.
+ Noon.|29 .68 | 78 | 81 | SW | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .68 | | |W by S |At anchor off |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .66 | 81 | 81 | WSW |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | | |-1/2| |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .65 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Light breezes and cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .59 | | |W by S | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | SW | | |_Tuesday, August 6, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | NE | | |
+ 4 |29 .65 | 71 | 79 | North | | |Alight breeze from the SW.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |Towards 4 A.M. the wind
+ 7 | | | | | | |shifted round to NW, and
+ 8 |29 .64 | 73 | 77 | NNW | | |freshened up.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .64 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | WSW | | |
+ Noon.|29 .63 | 76 | 81 |SW by W| | |Noon, a moderate breeze and
+ | | | | | | |fine weather.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .64 | 83 | 81 | SSE |At anchor off |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| |the mouth of the|
+ 3 | | | | |Pei-ho, Yellow |After noon the breeze, which
+ 4 |29 .60 | 82 | 81 | |Sea. |had hauled round to SE,
+ 5 | | | | | |freshened up considerably.
+ 6 |29 .62 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards sunset dark slaty
+ 8 |29 .66 | 79 | 82 | SE | |clouds drew over us from the
+ 9 | | | | | |land, moving in a contrary
+ 10 | | | | | |direction from that of the wind
+ 11 | | | | | |which we had.
+ Mid.|29 .66 | 80 | 81 |S by E | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, August 7, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | South | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |At sunrise it was moderate,
+ 4 | | | |E by N | | |but about nine o'clock the
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze freshened, and towards
+ 6 | | | | | | |noon blew fresh from the
+ 7 | | | | | | |Eastward.
+ 8 |29 .67 | 79 | 81 | East | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .95 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 77 | 80 |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .92 | 76 | 80 | NE |Pei-ho, Yellow |Fresh breezes and cloudy.
+ 5 | | | | |Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .82 | | | | |Towards night it moderated.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .81 | 73 | 78 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |At midnight a moderate breeze.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 8, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .65 | 71 | 78 | North | | |Moderate and cloudy.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 73 | 77 | NNW | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .67 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .68 | 76 | 81 | | | |Moderate and fine.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .66 | | | NNW |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .65 | 81 | | |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | |-1/2| | |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 79 | 80 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |Light airs.
+ Mid.|29 .71 | 77 | 79 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 9, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |N by E | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Light airs and cloudy.
+ 4 |29 .73 | 75 | 77 | NW | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .74 | 76 | 79 | | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |2 A.M. a moderate breeze
+ 11 | | | | | | |sprung up at NW.
+ Noon.|29 .77 | 80 | 79 | ESE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .76 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .70 | 79 | 77 | SSE |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | | |-1/2| |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | | | | |Moderate breezes.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .70 | 76 | 78 | NW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NW | | |_Saturday, August 10, 1816_
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | WNW | | |Moderate breezes and clear.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .60 | 75 | 77 | NW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .70 | | | | | |Calm and fine weather.
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 81 | 79 | Calm | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .69 | | | |At anchor off |
+ 3 | | | | |the mouth of the|
+ 4 |29 .67 | 79 | 78 | SSE |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ | | |-1/2| |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .65 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 76 | 78 | SW | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | Moderate and cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .74 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, August 11, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | SE | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 75 | 78 | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | |SE by S| | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 76 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .75 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 79 | 80 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ Moderate and clear weather.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | SE |Off the River |
+ 3 | | | | |Pei-ho, Yellow |
+ 4 |29 .72 | 79 | 78 | |Sea. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | 75 | 79 | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .75 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, August 12, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | 75 | 78 | SE | | |Moderate breezes and cloudy.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Moderate breezes from the
+ 10 | | | | | | |SE, with fine clear weather:
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |lightning at times.
+ Noon.|29 .79 | 79 | 79 |S by E |38 .38 |117 .44 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .79 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .78 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Moderate and fine weather.
+ 6 |29 .78 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 79 | 81 | SE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Moderate breezes and clear,
+ 10 | | | | | |with lightning.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .80 | 79 | 80 |SE by S| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 13, 1816._
+ 3 | | | |S by W | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |In the evening we had fresh
+ 6 | | | | | | |breezes from the SE--sky
+ 7 | | | | | | |assuming a threatening
+ 8 |29 .79 | 89 | 79 | SSW | | |appearance. Towards midnight
+ 9 | | | | | | |it moderated, at which time it
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | | |fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 83 | 81 | SE | 38 .34| 118 .08|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .77 | 80 | 80 | ESE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | SE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .79 | 79 | 78 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | |SE by S| |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | Calm | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |SE by S| | |_Wednesday, August 14, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | SE | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 77 | 78 | WSW | | |After midnight a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze sprung up from the SE.
+ 6 |29 .71 | 79 | 78 | South | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 79 | 78 | SSE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | |About 4 A.M. it shifted
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |more to the Southward, and
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 79 | 78 | |38 .29 |118.20 |remained so the rest of the day.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+ Weather fine.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .71 | | |S by E | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 80 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 79 | 80 |E by N | |
+ 9 | | | |E by S | |
+ 10 | | | | ESE | |At midnight the wind drew
+ 11 | | | | | |round to the Eastward.
+ Mid.|29 .75 | 76 | 79 |E by S | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 15, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | 76 | 79 | SE | | |Moderate and fine weather.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | East | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .77 | 78 | 80 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .79 | | | | N | E |During the day the wind
+ Noon.|29 .78 | 78 | 81 | | 37.58 | 118.49 |remained at East and ENE,
+ | |-1/2| | | | ||blowing a moderate breeze.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .76 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 82 | ENE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .74 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it freshened
+ 8 |29 .76 | 78 | | | |up, and remained quite steady.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .86 | 77 | 80 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 16, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day the wind continued at
+ 5 | | | | | | |East, the same as yesterday.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .79 | 79 | 81 |E by N | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | |E by S | | |
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 81 |E by N | 37 .30| 118.57 |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |E by S | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |In the evening it became
+ 4 |29 .74 | 80 | 81 | ENE | |squally, with rain.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .74 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .74 | 79 | 80 SE by S| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind
+ 10 | | | | | |hauled to the Southward.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | |S by W | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | S by W| | |
+ 2 | | | | SSW | | |_Saturday, August 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .74 | 78 | 80 |SW by S| | |To-day we have had a breeze
+ | |-1/2| | | | |from the SW.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 |29 .74 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | | |
+ 9 |29 .74 | 79 | 84 | SW | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .74 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .75 | 81 | 81 | | 37 .20| 119.33 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |During the afternoon the
+ 4 | | | | | |wind shifted to the Eastward,
+ 5 | | | | | |where it remained, and blew a
+ 6 |29 .70 | | | | |steady breeze.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 79 | 80 | East | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .71 | 79 | 80 |E by S | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | East | | |_Sunday, August 18, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .72 | 79 | 80 |E by N | | |After midnight we had a
+ | |-1/2| | | | |moderate breeze from the
+ 5 | | | | | | |Eastward, and at 4 A.M. it
+ 6 | | | | | | |freshened up at ENE, where it
+ 7 | | | | | | |continued until the evening, at
+ 8 |29 .80 | 79 | 80 | | | |which time it shifted to the
+ 9 | | | | | | |SE, with rain.
+ 10 |29 .81 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 79 | | 37 .47| 119 .37|
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |NE by E| |
+ 2 |29 .82 | | | | Gulf of |
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |At eight it was nearly calm.
+ 4 |29 .88 | 78 | 79 | ENE | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |About nine a breeze sprung
+ 6 |29 .82 | | | | |up from the Eastward,
+ 7 | | | |SE by S| |accompanied by rain.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 78 | 78 | Calm | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .98 | 78 | 78 | East | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NNE | | |_Monday, August 19, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |A light air.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 78 | 78 | ENE | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .92 | | | | N | E |Towards noon the breeze
+ Noon.|29 .92 | 74 | 77 | NE | 37. 40| 119.44 |freshened up at North-easterly,
+ | | |-1/2| | | |where it continued all day, and
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+blew rather fresh, with a short
+ 1 | | | | | |swell.
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | Gulf of |
+ 4 |29 .92 | 75 | 77 | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .94 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 74 | 76 |NE by N| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 20, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .95 | 76 | 78 | N by E| | |During the night it blew a
+ 5 | | | | | | |steady fresh breeze from NNE,
+ 6 | | | | | | |in which quarter it continued
+ 7 | | | | | | |all this day.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 76 | 77 | NNE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |The sky having a threatening
+ 9 | | | | | | |appearance.
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .03 | 75 | | | 37 .46| 120 .08|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |Towards the evening moderated.
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | Gulf of |
+ 4 |29 .90 | 74 | 78 | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Near midnight the wind came
+ 8 |29 .90 | 74 | 77 |NE by N| |round to the SW, and blew a
+ | | |-1/2| | |moderate breeze.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | SW | | |_Wednesday, August 21, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The early part of the day the
+ 4 | | | | | | |wind has been moderate from the
+ 5 | | | | SSW | | |Southward.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 74 | 77 |S by W | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |About noon it died away, but
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |shortly after a breeze sprung
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 79 | 77 | Calm | 37 .51| 120 .33|up from the Eastward, and blew
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+pretty steady from that quarter
+ 1 | | | | | |till the evening, when it
+ 2 |29 .78 | | | East | Gulf of |hauled round to the SE.
+ 3 | | | | | Pe-che-lee. |
+ 4 |29 .76 | 76 | 77 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .76 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .74 | 75 | 77 |SE by S| |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .82 | 74 | 73 |S by E | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 22, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .80 | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |During the early part of the
+ 6 | | | | | | |day we had a moderate breeze
+ 7 | | | | | | |from the SE.
+ 8 |29 .80 | 77 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .74 | 80 | 78 | SE | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .74 | | | | Off Cheatow, |After noon it hauled to the
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |Southward.
+ 4 |29 .74 | 78 | 78 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .72 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .72 | 77 | 78 | SSE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 23, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind has
+ 4 |29 .70 | 78 | 78 | NE | | |been moderate, and steady
+ 5 | | | | | | |from the Southward.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 80 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .72 | 81 | 78 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |SE by E| At anchor in |In the forenoon it veered to
+ 3 | | | | | Cheatow Bay, |the NE, and towards night to
+ 4 |29 .70 | 80 | 78 | SE | Yellow Sea. |the Southward.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .68 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 79 | 78 | Calm | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .66 | 77 | 78 | South | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | South | | |_Saturday, August 24, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 77 | 78 | | | |During the morning the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |was steady from the Southward.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .68 | 78 | 78 | S by E| | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .68 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .68 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |29 .68 | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .66 | | | | Che-a-tow, |
+ 3 |29 .66 | | | | Yellow Sea. |
+ 4 |29 .66 | 79 | 78 | | |Towards night the wind hauled
+ 5 |29 .64 | | | | |to the Eastward, blowing a
+ 6 |29 .64 | | | | |moderate breeze, and steady.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | 78 | 78 | East | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .62 | 78 | 77 | E by S| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Sunday, August 25, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | E by S| | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued to blow
+ 4 |29 .74 | | | | | |from the NE quarter all the
+ 5 | | | | | | |forenoon.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 78 | 78 | N by E| | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | NE | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .66 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NE | Che-a-tow, |
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |In the afternoon it hauled
+ 4 | | | | N by E| |more to the Northward.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | E by S| |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .64 | 78 | 77 | | |At midnight it hauled to the
+ | | |-1/2| | |SW, with fine clear weather.
+ 9 | | | | | |A heavy dew falling.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | SW | | |_Monday, August 26, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .56 | 77 | 77 | WNW | | |After midnight it continued
+ | | |-1/2| | | |to blow a moderate breeze from
+ 5 | | | | | | |the SW.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .56 | 78 | 77 |W by N | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .56 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .56 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |About 4 A.M. it shifted to
+ 2 |29 .64 | | | | Che-a-tow, |the NW, from which quarter it
+ 3 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |blew the whole of the day.
+ 4 |29 .52 | 79 | 78 | NW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .52 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .54 | 79 | 78 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .56 | 78 | 78 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, August 27, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | NW | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |Towards noon the wind hauled
+ 4 |29 .58 | 77 | 77 | North | | |more to the Westward, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain, thunder, and lightning.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .62 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .64 | 78 | 78 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .62 | | |S by W | At anchor in |
+ 3 | | | | | Oie-hai-oie |
+ 4 |29 .62 | 76 | 77 | | harbour, |
+ 5 | | | | | Yellow Sea. |
+ 6 |29 .62 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .61 | 76 | 77 | NNE | |In the evening the wind came
+ 9 | | | | | |to the NNE.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .64 | 75 | 77 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, August 28, 1816._
+ 3 | | | |NE by N| | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been
+ 5 | | | | | | |moderate and steady from the
+ 6 | | | | | | |North-eastward.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 75 | 77 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .72 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .72 | 77 | 76 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NE | Oie-hai-oie |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour, |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 77 | 76 | ENE | Yellow Sea. |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night the breeze
+ 8 |29 .70 | 77 | 76 | NE | |freshened, and the sky became
+ 9 | | | | | |cloudy, assuming a threatening
+ 10 | | | | | |appearance.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .74 | 79 | 76 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, August 29, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind hauled
+ 4 |29 .78 | 77 | 76 |E by N | | |to the Eastward, blowing fresh,
+ 5 | | | | | | |the weather still looking very
+ 6 | | | | | | |black.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 78 | 76 |S by E | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .80 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .80 | 81 | 77 | South | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | | Oie-hai-oie |After 4 it moderated, and the
+ 3 | | | | | harbour, |weather cleared up and became
+ 4 |29 .90 | 81 | 78 | SSE | Yellow Sea. |quite fine.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |About 8 P.M. the wind came
+ 8 |29 .92 | 78 | 77 | SW | |to the Southward. Towards
+ 9 | | | | | |midnight it drew round to the
+ 10 | | | | | |SW, and then to South again.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .94 | 79 | 77 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Friday, August 30, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .96 | 78 | 77 |S by W | | |All the forenoon the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |has been light from the
+ 6 | | | | | | |Southward and SW.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 78 | 77 | SW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .98 | | | West | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .96 | 80 | 76 | Calm |37 .58 |122 .58 |About noon it fell calm.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | |Calm| | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .92 | 80 | 81 | NNE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |At 2 a breeze sprung up from
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |the NE, with small drizzling
+ 7 | | | | | |rain, and thick weather.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 79 | 79 | ENE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, August 31, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 |29 .90 | 79 | 79 |W by N | | |After midnight a light breeze
+ 6 | | | | | | |from the Eastward, inclining
+ 7 | | | | | | |to calm.
+ 8 |29 .92 | 80 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .96 | 80 | 79 |NW by N|37 .55 |123 .37 |About noon a breeze sprung up
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+from the Westward; weather
+ 1 | | | | | |cloudy.
+ 2 |29 .94 | | | NW | Yellow Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .94 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |In the afternoon it died away
+ 6 |29 .92 | | | | |quite light.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .92 | 79 | 79 | Calm | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Towards midnight a moderate
+ 11 | | | | | |breeze from the Northward.
+ Mid. | | | | NW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |NE by N| | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 1, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 |29 .90 | 76 | 78 | N by E| | |During this day there has been
+ 6 | | | | | | |a steady breeze at North and
+ 7 | | | | | | |North by East.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 76 | 76 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .92 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .90 | 76 | 76 | |37 .45 | 124 .48|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | North | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | | Yellow Sea. |Towards night the wind
+ 3 | | | | | |freshened up.
+ 4 | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 75 | 75 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 2, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |About 2 A.M. the wind shifted
+ 4 | | | | | | |to the Eastward, where it
+ 5 | | | | | | |freshened.
+ 6 | 29.82 | 78 | 79 | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 | 29.82 | 80 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | 29.82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.| 29.82 | 81 | 80 |NW by N|36 .45 |124 .51 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |S by W | West Coast of |
+ 2 | 29.96 | | | | Corea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon it freshened
+ 4 | 29.98 | 80 | 80 | SSE | |and shifted to the Southward,
+ 5 | | | | | |accompanied by a slight shower
+ 6 | 29.98 | | | | |of rain.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | 30.04 | 80 | 80 |S by W | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | South | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 3, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | 30.02 | | | South | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |The wind during all the night
+ 6 | | | | | | |has been steady from the
+ 7 | | | | | | |Southward, and remained so all
+ 8 | 30.04 | 77 | 79 |S by W | | |day until the evening, when it
+ 9 | | | | | | |shifted to the Westward.
+ 10 | 30.04 | | | SSW | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.| 30.00 | 79 | 78 | |36 .18 |126 .09 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | 29.98 | | | SW | |
+ 3 | | | | WSW | |
+ 4 | 29.95 | 81 | 78 | West | |About sunset it fell calm.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | 29.94 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | 29.92 | 80 | 77 | Calm | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+---------+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, September 4, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | Calm | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |It continued calm all night.
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .95 | 78 | 78 | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .95 | 79 | 78 | West | | |About 8 A.M. a light breeze
+ 9 | | | | | | |from the Westward.
+ 10 |29 .95 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .92 | 80 | 82 | NW |36 .13 | 126 .34|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+At noon it freshened, hauling
+ 1 | | | | | |from W to NW.
+ 2 |29 .85 | | | West | West Coast of |
+ 3 | | | | | Corea. |
+ 4 |29 .84 | 81 | 82 | WSW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .84 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .84 | 79 | 80 |N by E | |Towards night the wind shifted
+ 9 | | | | | |to the Northward, and
+ 10 | | | | | |continued to blow steady.
+ 11 | | | | N | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | N | | |_Thursday, September 5, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .82 | 78 | 79 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |About 7 it fell calm.
+ 8 |29 .82 | 80 | 79 | Calm | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .82 | 80 | 80 | WNW |36 .05 |126 .42 |Towards noon a breeze sprung
+ | | |-1/2| | | |up from WNW, with fine clear
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+weather.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .82 | | | WNW | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 80 | 79 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind came
+ 10 | | | | | |to the Northward.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 6, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | |N by E | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The most part of this day the
+ 5 | | | | | | |wind has been from the
+ 6 |29 .86 | 78 | 78 | NNE | | |Northward, blowing a steady
+ | |-1/2| | | | |moderate breeze.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .86 | 79 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .88 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .88 | 79 | 78 | |35 .17 |126 .24 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |North | |
+ 2 |29 .89 | | | | West Coast of |
+ 3 | | | | | Corea. |
+ 4 |29 .90 | 79 | 77 | | |Towards night the wind drew
+ | | |-1/2| | Corea. |round to ENE, and became quite
+ 5 | | | |N by E | |light.
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .88 | 77 | 74 | ENE | |At midnight it fell calm.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | Calm | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |NNW | | |_Saturday, September 7, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight a light breeze
+ 4 | | | | | | |sprung up from NNW.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .82 | | |N by E | | |About 4 it hauled round to NE,
+ 7 | | | | | | |and at noon it was at North.
+ 8 |29 .82 | 76 | 75 | | | |
+ 9 | | | |ENE | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N. | E. |
+ Noon |29 .88 | 79 | 78 | |34 .32 |125 .50 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | N | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | NNE | |At 2 the wind shifted to NE,
+ 4 |29 .82 |80 | 72 | Calm | |and by 4 it fell calm.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |Towards 8 P.M. a breeze sprung
+ 7 | | | | | |up from the Northward, and
+ 8 |29 .82 |78 | 82 | N | |continued so the remainder of
+ 9 | | | | | |the night.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | Calm | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Sunday, September 8, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | North | | |Shortly after midnight it fell
+ 4 | | | | | | |calm; this did not last above
+ 5 | | | | Calm | | |half an hour, before a breeze
+ 6 | | | | NNW | | |sprung up from the Northward,
+ 7 | | | | | | |which continued so all day. In
+ 8 |29 .86 | 74 | 70 | North | | |the night a heavy dew fell; and
+ 9 | | | | | | |much lightning was observed in
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |the NE quarter.
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon |29 .81 | 78 | 71 | |34.22.30|126 .03|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | |N by E | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | |Moored in |
+ 3 | | | | |Murray's Sound, |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 76 | 70 | |among the |
+ 5 | | | | |islands which |
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | |lie off the SW |
+ 7 | | | | |extreme of |
+ 8 |29 .79 | 74 | 70 | NNE |Corea. |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |N by W | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 9, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |In the forenoon the wind came
+ 5 | | | | | | |to NW, and continued so all
+ 6 |29 .78 | 74 | 70 | | | |day, with a steady moderate
+ 7 | | | | | | |breeze, and fine clear weather.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 76 | 70 | NNW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .80 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon |29 .80 | 75 | 78 | |34.22.30|126 .03|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NW | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 74 | 71 | NNW | |A heavy dew fell during the
+ 5 | | | | | |night.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .78 | 74 | 70 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .78 | 73 | 69 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 10, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The breeze continued at NW
+ 4 |29 .76 | 72 | 68 | NW | | |until the afternoon, when it
+ 5 | | | | | | |drew round to the Northward,
+ 6 | | | | | | |and freshened up from that
+ 7 | | | | | | |quarter, looking threatening
+ 8 |29 .76 | 73 | 68 | | | |and squally.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 77 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29. 76 | 73 | 68 | | N | E |
+ Noon.| | | | |34 .19 |126 .05 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 74 | 72 | 68 |North |Got under weigh |
+ 3 | | | | |from Murray's |
+ 4 |29. 78 | 76 | 80 |N by W |Sound, and stood|Midnight, strong breezes with
+ 5 |29. 90 | | | |to the Southward|occasional showers of rain, and
+ 6 |29. 90 | | | |into the Japan |a very high irregular swell from
+ 7 | | | | |Sea. Saw |the NE. This seems to be the
+ 8 |29. 74 | 76 | 80 | |Quelpaert. |NE monsoon, which sets in to
+ 9 | | | | | |the Northward much earlier than
+ 10 | | | | | |in lower latitudes.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29. 76 | 76 | 80 | North | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | _Wednesday, September 11, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |To-day we have had a strong
+ 4 | | | | | | |breeze from the N by W, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |a high irregular swell setting
+ 6 | | | | | | |after us. In the afternoon the
+ 7 | | | | | | |wind hauled round to NW.
+ 8 |29. 73 | 80 | 80 |N by W | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 72 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29. 71 | 81 | 83 | NNW |31 .41 |126 .44 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 71 | | | | Japan Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29. 71 | 82 | 82 | NW | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight it
+ 6 |29. 71 | | | | |moderated: weather cloudy.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 73 | 79 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29. 80 | | |North | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 12, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | North | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |shifted to the Northward, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |a moderate breeze, and fine
+ 6 |29 .74 | 80 | 82 | | | |clear weather.
+ 7 |29. 75 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 75 | 82 | 82 | | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 75 | 82 | 83 | |29 .38 |127 .56 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |In the afternoon it became
+ 2 | | | | | Japan Sea. |squally, with a heavy shower
+ 3 | | | | | |of rain.
+ 4 |29. 70 | 83 | 83 |N by E | |
+ 5 | | | |NE by N| |This wind, though not fixed,
+ 6 |29. 72 | | | NE | |has much the appearance of
+ 7 | | | | | |the monsoon.
+ 8 |29. 78 | 83 | 83 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Latitude by Polaris 30º 3 min.
+ 10 | | | | | |30 in. at 2 h. 57 min. A.M.
+ 11 | | | | | |13th.
+ Mid. |29. 78 | 82 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 13, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NE,
+ 3 | | | | | | |with a steady fresh breeze;
+ 4 | | | | | | |which towards noon freshened
+ 5 | | | | | | |considerably, and a swell got
+ 6 |29. 72 | | | N by E| | |up from the NE. At noon
+ 7 | | | | | | |observed in 27º 48' N latitude.
+ 8 |29. 70 | 83 | 84 | | | |stormy 2º 30' it became dark
+ 9 | | | | | | |and in the NE, and the signal
+ 10 |29. 70 | | | | | |being made to shorten sail, we
+ 11 |29. 76 | | | | N | E |brought the ship under the main
+ Noon.|29. 78 | 84 | 84 | |27 .48 |128 .20 |topsail and foresail, and made
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+preparations for a gale. At 4
+ 1 |29. 60 | | | NE | |we saw the Loo-choo Islands SW
+ 2 |29. 74 | | | | Off Sulphur |by S 20 miles. At 5 the wind
+ 3 |29. 75 | | | | Island, Japan |shifted from N to NE, and the
+ 4 |29. 80 | | | | Sea. |mountainous swell which we had
+ 5 |29. 90 | | | | |experienced during the day
+ 6 |29. 95 | | | | |rose still higher. The wind did
+ 7 |29. 94 | | | | |not blow fresh except in short
+ 8 | | | | | |rainy squalls. After 8 P.M. it
+ 9 | | | | | |blew at times very fresh, and
+ 10 | | | | | |also in the night, but when the
+ 11 | | | | | |moon got up it became clear.
+ Mid. |29. 52 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 14, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |shifted from NE to NW, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |continued to blow fresh with a
+ 6 |29 .52 | | | | | |high irregular swell.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .52 | 83 | 82 | NW | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 |29 .54 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .54 | | |NW by W| | |
+ 11 |29 .56 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .60 | 83 | 82 | |27 .44 |127 .35 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |29 .58 | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .60 | | | | Off Loo-Choo, |Towards evening it became
+ 3 |29 .64 | | | | Japan Sea. |moderate and clear.
+ 4 |29 .52 | 83 | 82 |NW by N| |
+ 5 |29 .54 | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .66 | | | NW | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 82 | 82 |NW by N| |
+ 9 | | | | | |In the night fine clear
+ 10 | | | | | |weather.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .74 | 81 | | NW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 15, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |A moderate breeze from NNW,
+ 5 | | | | | | |with a clear sky; the swell
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | NNW | | |much less, though still
+ 7 | | | | | | |considerable.
+ 8 |29 .78 | 80 |83 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .76 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .71 | | |NW by N| N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .75 | 83 |84 | |26 .44 |127 .32 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .75 | | | | Off Loo-Choo, |
+ 3 | | | | | Japan Sea. |
+ 4 |29 .75 | 83 | 88 |N by W | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards night the wind veered
+ 6 |29 .75 | | | | |to NNE.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 81 | |North | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .81 | | | NNE | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .80 | 81 | 84 |NE by N| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 16, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NNE.
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |About 4 A.M. we had several
+ 6 |29 .84 | | | NNE | | |showers of rain, but soon
+ 7 | | | | | | |cleared off.
+ 8 |29 .84 | 81 | 83 |N by E | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .90 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |About noon the breeze
+ Noon.|29 .90 | 82 | 83 | |26.13.39|127 .38|freshened.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+--------+-------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .80 | | | | At anchor in |
+ 3 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 4 |29 .80 | 82 | 83 | NE |harbour, Great |In the afternoon we had a
+ 5 | | | | |Loo-choo Island.|shower.
+ 6 |29 .80 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 80 | 83 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, clear weather, with
+ 11 | | | | | |lightning in the SW.
+ Mid.| 2 9.8 | 80 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind continued at NE, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |a moderate breeze. At 4 there
+ 6 | | | | | | |was a slight shower of rain
+ 7 | | | | | | |but it cleared up again in a
+ 8 |29 .79 | 81 | 82 |NE by E| | |short time.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .82 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .82 | 83 | 82 |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .78 | | | | Moored in |After noon the wind shifted
+ 3 | | | | | Napakiang |to the Eastward: squally with
+ 4 |29 .77 | 82 | 82 | | harbour. |showers of rain.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .78 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 81 | 82 | ESE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, clear: moderate
+ 11 | | | | | |weather.
+ Mid.|29 .78 | 81 | 82 |E by N | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | _Wednesday, September 18, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | ENE | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been at NNE.
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |After 4 A.M. we had several
+ 7 | | | | | | |showers of rain.
+ 8 |29 .72 | 80 | 82 |NE by E| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 75 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |Towards noon the breeze
+ Noon.|29. 75 | 82 | 82 | ENE | | |freshened.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 70 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29. 72 | 82 | 82 |NE by E| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29. 74 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | 82 |82 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |At night squally, with rain.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29. 72 | | | NNE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 19, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it continued to
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain, with occasional squalls.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29. 63 | 81 |82 | NNE | | |As the day advanced it cleared
+ 9 | | | | | | |up.
+ 10 |29. 62 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29. 62 | 82 |83 | | | |At noon quite moderate.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29. 50 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the evening it looked very
+ 4 |29. 58 | 82 | 83 | NE | |black all round, and fell calm.
+ | | |-1/2| | |About 7 a breeze sprung up from
+ 5 | | | | | |the Eastward, and it commenced
+ 6 |29. 56 | | | Calm | |lightning. About 8 the wind
+ 7 | | | | | |shifted to SSE, and freshened,
+ 8 |29. 54 | | | East | |with squalls.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 |29. 54 | | | SSE | |Towards midnight heavy squalls,
+ 11 | | | | | |with rain: thunder and
+ Mid. |29. 54 | | | | |lightning.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, September 20, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the same
+ 4 | | | | | | |squally weather continued. As
+ 5 | | | | | | |the day advanced it cleared up.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .60 | 80 | 83 | SSE | | |In the afternoon it became
+ | |-1/2| | | | |squally, with slight showers
+ 9 | | | | | | |of rain. Towards evening it
+ 10 | | | | | | |looked very black all round.
+ 11 |29 .62 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .63 | 84 | 83 |S by E | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .63 | | | SSE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |It seems probable that this
+ 6 |29 .64 | | | | |is the breaking up of the
+ 7 | | | | | |monsoon. We were so completely
+ 8 |29 .69 |82 | 82 |E by S | |sheltered by the land, that we
+ | | |-1/2| | |did not feel the wind much;
+ 9 | | | | | |but it was evidently blowing
+ 10 | | | | | |hard outside.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .69 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 21, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .68 | | | | | |During the day the wind has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been South-easterly, with
+ 6 | | | | | | |occasional squalls and showers
+ 7 | | | | | | |of rain, and lightning.
+ 8 |29 .69 |80 |82 | SE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |In the forenoon the wind
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |hauled to the Eastward, and
+ 11 | | | | | | |cleared up.
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 83 | 83 |E by S | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .70 | | | ESE | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .70 | 83 | 83 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .70 | | |E by S | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .70 | 80 | 82 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 22, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight squally, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain and lightning.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .70 | 81 | 82 | ENE | | |About 7 the wind hauled to the
+ 9 | | | | | | |ENE, and cleared up, and
+ 10 |29 .70 | | | | | |continued fine all day.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .70 | 83 | 82 |E by N | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .68 | 82 | 82 | ENE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .66 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .66 | 81 | 82 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .66 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Monday, September 23, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |To-day the wind has been about
+ 4 | | | | | | |NE; squally at times, with
+ 5 | | | | | | |showers of rain, and every
+ 6 | | | | | | |appearance of approaching bad
+ 7 | | | | | | |weather.
+ 8 |29 .62 | 80 | 82 |NE by E| | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .62 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .62 | 81 | 82 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .60 | | | ENE | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .58 | 81 | 82 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |During all this day the
+ 6 |29 .50 | | | | | |barometer continued falling,
+ 7 | | | | | | |in the evening it had reached
+ 8 |29 .50 | | |NE by N| | |29.50. The wind in the early
+ 9 | | | | | | |part of the night hauled to
+ 10 | | | | | | |NNE, and towards morning to
+ 11 | | | | | | |the Northward.
+ Mid.| | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, September 24, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | NNE | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |In the night the wind has been
+ 4 | | | |NE by N| | |about NNE. About 4 A.M. it
+ 5 | | | | | | |began to blow very fresh, with
+ 6 |29 .43 | | | | | |squalls.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .42 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |About noon the wind shifted
+ 11 | | | | | | |to NNW, and increased in
+ Noon.|29 .40 | 81 | 81 | | | |strength.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .40 | | | NNW | Napakiang |During the afternoon it blew
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |hard, and gradually shifted to
+ 4 |29 .44 | 81 | 81 | | |the North-westward, with fresh
+ | | |-1/2| | |squalls of short duration. At
+ 5 |29 .50 | | | | |3 30 P.M. the mercury began
+ 6 |29 .55 | | |NW by N| |to rise, and continued rising
+ 7 |29 .56 | | | | |very rapidly.
+ 8 |29 .63 | 79 | 81 | | |
+ 9 |29 .65 | | | |The weather at sunset assumed
+ 10 | | | | | |a very stormy appearance.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .66 | 78 | 80 | NW | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, September 25, 1816.
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |Shortly after midnight it
+ 5 | | | | | | |cleared up and moderated.
+ 6 |29 .72 | | |NW by W| |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .80 | 78 | 80 | NW | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .86 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .86 | 79 | 80 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |During the day it has been
+ 2 |29 .84 | | | | |blowing a steady moderate
+ 3 | | | | | |breeze from the NW.
+ 4 |29 .84 | 78 | 80 |NW by W| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .86 | | | NW | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .92 | 77 | 79 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, moderate and cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .95 | 77 | 78 |NW by N| |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, September 26, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued about NNW
+ 4 | | | | | | |all day, blowing a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze, with fine weather.
+ 6 |29 .96 | | | NNW | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | 78 | 80 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .99 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 79 | 81 |NW by W| | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | 30.00 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .99 | 83 | 81 | | |8 P.M. it fell calm.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .99 | | | Calm | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 79 | 81 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Towards midnight a light
+ 11 | | | | | |breeze sprung up from NNE.
+ Mid.|29 .99 | 79 | 80 | NNE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NNE | | |Friday, September 27, 1816.
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind died
+ 5 | | | | | | |away.
+ 6 |29 .99 | 70 | | Calm | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 76 | 81 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .99 | | | | | |Towards noon a breeze sprung
+ 11 |29 .99 | | | | | |up from the Northward.
+ Noon.|29 .99 | 80 | 81 | North | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon it shifted to
+ 4 |29 .96 | 79 | 80 | ENE | |ENE.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .96 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .94 | 78 | 80 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, calm and cloudy
+ 11 | | | | | |weather.
+ Mid.|29 .94 | 77 | 79 | Calm | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, September 28, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |All the early part of the
+ 4 | | | | | | |morning it was quite calm.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .90 | 76 | 79 | Calm | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |About 8 A.M. a breeze sprung
+ 11 |29 .94 | | | | | |up about ESE; in the afternoon
+ Noon.|29 .94 | 81 | 81 | | | |it hauled round to East.
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .90 | | | ESE | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .92 | 81 | 81 | | |
+ 5 | |-1/2| | | |
+ 6 |29 .90 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .90 | 80 | 81 | East | |
+ 9 | | |-1/2| | |
+ 10 | | | | | |Midnight, the breeze shifted
+ 11 | | | | | |to NE, and was moderate.
+ Mid.|29 .90 | 76 | 79 | NE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, September 29, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .90 | 75 | 79 | NE | | |During this day the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |shifted occasionally from NE to
+ 6 | | | | | | |ENE, blowing a moderate breeze,
+ 7 | | | | | | |with fine clear weather.
+ 8 |29 .90 | 80 | 81 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .92 | | | ENE | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .92 | 82 | 81 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | | |NE by E| |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .94 | 81 | 81 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .95 | | | | |Towards night it became cloudy.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .95 | 80 | 80 | NE | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .95 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |NE by E| | |_Monday, September 30, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the forenoon the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |has been light from the NE.
+ 6 |29 .96 | 79 | 80 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it freshened up.
+ 10 |29 .97 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .98 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .98 | 82 | 81 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | |NE by N| |
+ 2 |29 .91 | | | | Napkiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .96 | 81 | 81 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .95 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .95 | 80 | 80 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |Midnight, cloudy weather.
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 1, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind drew
+ 5 | | | | | | |more to the Eastward, and the
+ 6 |29 .95 | | | | | |sky became very black all
+ 7 | | | | | | |round: squally, with rain at
+ 8 |30 .02 | 79 | 80 | East | | |intervals.
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |We got under weigh at daylight,
+ 10 |30 .07 | | | | | |and proceeded along shore to
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |the Northward.
+ Noon.|30 .07 | 80 | 80 | ESE | 26 .34| 127 .38|
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | | | | Sugar Loaf |The wind continued to the
+ 3 | | | | |Point. N .24º E.|Eastward.
+ 4 |29 .94 | 79 | 80 |E by S | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .94 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .94 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .92 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 2, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .91 | | | | | |The whole of this day the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |has been from the Eastward,
+ 6 | | | | | | |blowing a moderate breeze,
+ 7 | | | | | | |with fine weather.
+ 8 |29 .91 | 78 | 80 |E by S | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .96 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .96 | 79 | 80 | | 26 .25| 127 .38|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .89 | 80 | 81 | East | |Towards night cloudy weather.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .88 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .99 | 79 | 81 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .90 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | |_Thursday, October 3, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 5 | | | | | |shifted to NE by E.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards noon it shifted to
+ 8 |29 .87 | 78 | 81 |NE by E| |East, and in the evening to
+ 9 | | | | | |ENE again.
+ 10 |29 .87 | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .87 | 81 | 81 |E by S | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | East | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |20 .86 | 80 | 81 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | ENE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .86 | 78 | 81 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .86 | 78 | 80 |E by N | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, October 4, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day we had a light breeze
+ 5 | | | | | | |from the NE, until the
+ 6 | | | | | | |afternoon, when it shifted to
+ 7 | | | | | | |SE by E, but only remained a
+ 8 |29 .87 | 78 | 81 | NE | | |short time, coming back to NE
+ 9 | | | | | | |again, where it continued until
+ 10 | | | | | | |near midnight, when it fell
+ 11 | | | | | | |calm.
+ Noon.|29.87 | 79 | 84 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .86 | | | ENE | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .86 | 79 | 80 |SE by E| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .85 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .85 | 79 | 80 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .85 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 5, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |In the morning a breeze sprung
+ 5 | | | | | | |up from the Eastward, where it
+ 6 | | | | | | |remained until noon; then
+ 7 | | | | | | |shifted to NE, and continued
+ 8 |29 .86 | 78 | 80 | E by N| | |to blow from that quarter all
+ | | |-1/2| | | |the rest of the day.
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .87 | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .87 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .85 | 81 | 81 |NE by E| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .84 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .82 | 81 | 81 | N by E| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .82 | | | NE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .83 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .83 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 6, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The early part of the day from
+ 5 | | | | | | |wind has been moderate from the
+ 6 | | | | | | |NE.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .83 | 78 | 80 |NE by N| | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .84 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |About noon the wind shifted to
+ Noon.|29 .84 | 80 | 81 | North | | |the Northward.
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .83 | | | | |At night it came back to NE,
+ 5 | | | | | |with rain.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .83 | 79 | 80 | NE | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |29 .86 | | | NNE | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |NE by E| | |_Monday, October 7, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 6 | | | | | | |continued at NE by E, with
+ 7 | | | | | | |showers of rain.
+ 8 |29 .80 | 78 | 80 | North | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |29 .94 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .95 | 79 | 80 |N by E | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .92 | | | N by E| |At 4 A.M. the wind came to
+ 3 | | | | | |north, and the weather cleared
+ 4 |29 .93 | 79 | 80 | | |up: it blew a fresh breeze from
+ 5 | | | | | |that quarter all day.
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .93 | 78 | 80 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Towards midnight it moderated.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .96 | 78 | 79 | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 8, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |To-day we have had a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze at NE by N.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 78 | 79 |NE by N| | |Squally at times.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .02 | 78 | 79 | NNE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30. 00 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |30. 00 | 78 | 79 |NE by N| |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight fine clear
+ 6 | | | | | |weather.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30. 00 | 76 | 78 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. |30 00 | 75 | 78 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 9, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the morning a moderate
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze from NE by E.
+ 6 |30 .00 | | |NE by E| | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |About 6 A.M. we got underweigh,
+ 8 |30 .04 | 75 | 78 | | | |and stood to the Northward.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .10 | | | ENE | | |
+ 11 |30 .10 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 77 | 78 | | 26 .34| 127 .26|
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .06 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon the wind
+ 4 |30 .00 | 78 | 78 | East | |shifted to the Eastward, and
+ 5 | | | | | |continued so the remainder of
+ 6 |30 .06 | | | | |the day.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .13 | 77 | 78 | E by S| |
+ 9 | | | | | |At night, cloudy weather.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 10, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |been moderate from the
+ 7 | | | | | | |Eastward.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 77 | 79 | ESE | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .01 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | East | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .01 | 78 | 79 | E by N| 26 .50| 127 .50|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | ENE | Off the Great |
+ 3 | | | | |Loo-choo Island.|
+ 4 |29 .98 | 79 | 79 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | NE | |
+ 7 | | | | | |At night fine clear weather.
+ 8 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|29 .96 | 78 | 79 | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | NE | | |_Friday, October 11, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | | |shifted from NE to SE, with a
+ 7 | | | | | | |light air.
+ 8 |29 .97 | 78 | 79 | SE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |29 .97 | | | | | |Ten A.M. it fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .97 | 80 | 80 | | 26 .42| 127 .53|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .96 | | | | Off Port |
+ 3 | | | | | Melville. |
+ 4 |29 .96 | 80 | 80 | West | |
+ 5 | | | | | |In the afternoon a breeze
+ 6 |29 .96 | | | N by E| |sprung up from the Westward;
+ 7 | | | | | |about 8 it looked very dark all
+ 8 |29 .94 | | | NNE | |round, and shortly afterwards
+ 9 | | | | | |began to blow fresh from N by
+ 10 | | | | | |E, and continued so all night.
+ 11 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 12, 1816._
+ 2 | | | |NE by E| | |
+ 3 | | | | NE | | |During the night the wind came
+ 4 | | | | | | |to NE with a fresh breeze, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |rain at intervals.
+ 6 |30 .30 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .26 | 76 | 79 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .26 | | | | | |
+ 11 |30 .22 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .22 | 76 | 79 | |25 .33 |127 .50 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .20 | | | |Off Loo-choo. |
+ 3 | | | | | |In the afternoon a swell got up
+ 4 |30 .20 | 76 | 79 | ENE | |from the NE; the wind
+ 5 | | | | | |moderated, and drew round to
+ 6 |30 .30 | | | | |ENE.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .34 | 76 | 79 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |Midnight, fresh breezes and
+ 10 | | | | | |cloudy.
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .20 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | ENE | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 13, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it became quite
+ 5 | | | | | | |moderate, with rain at times.
+ 6 |30 .10 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .06 | 75 | 78 | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .04 | | | | | |In the forenoon it fell calm.
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .04 | 75 | 78 | Calm |27 .00 |128 .03 |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |During the afternoon a breeze
+ 4 |30 .00 | 75 | 78 | NE | |sprung up at NE.
+ 5 | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards midnight it freshened
+ 8 |30 .02 | 75 | 78 |NE by E| |considerably.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .02 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |NE by N| | |_Monday, October 14, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |moderated.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .04 | 75 | 79 | | | |About 8 A.M. it fell nearly
+ | | |-1/2| | | |calm, but shortly after it
+ 9 | | | | | | |freshened at NNE.
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 75 | 79 | NNE |26 .36 |127 .56 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .94 | | | North |Off Loo-choo. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .97 | 75 | 79 | NNW | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight the wind
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |shifted to NNW, and continued
+ 7 | | | | | |to blow fresh.
+ 8 |30 .02 | 75 | 79 | N by W| |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .18 | | | NNW | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Tuesday, October 15, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has
+ 5 | | | | | | |been from the N by W, blowing
+ 6 | | | | | | |a fresh breeze, with occasional
+ 7 | | | | | | |squalls.
+ 8 |30 .10 | | 78 |N by W | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 74 | 78 | North |26 .02 |127 .35 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .08 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .08 | 74 | 78 | | |At midnight it moderated.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 5 | | | | North | |
+ 6 |30 .08 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .10 | 74 |79 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 16, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |During the night the wind drew
+ 6 | | | | | | |round to N by E, with a
+ 7 | | | | | | |moderate breeze. About 7 A.M.
+ 8 |30 .20 | 73 | 77 |N by E | | |we weighed and stood to the
+ 9 | | | | | | |NW, shortly after the breeze
+ 10 |30 .20 | | | | | |freshened, with squalls; at
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |2 P.M. anchored in Napakiang
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 74 | 77 | |26 .11 |127 .30 |harbour.
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | Off Loo-choo. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 74 | 77 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |Towards midnight the breeze
+ 7 | | | | | |freshened.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 74 | 77 | N by W| |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 17, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |The whole of this day we have
+ 6 | | | | | | |had a breeze from the NNE, with
+ 7 | | | | | | |fine clear weather.
+ 8 |30 .00 | 71 | 76 | NNE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 75 | 77 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | |NE by N| Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 75 | 77 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .01 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .02 | 75 | 76 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.|30 .00 | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Friday, October 18, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |The wind continued about NE by
+ 4 | | | | | | |N.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 73 | 76 |NE by N| | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | E by N| | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .02 | 74 | 75 | | | |Towards noon it came to the
+ | | |-1/2| | | |eastward with a moderate
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+breeze.
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .02 | | | | Moored in |
+ 3 | | | | | Napakiang |
+ 4 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | |NE by E| |At night it shifted to the NE.
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 71 | 75 | NE | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NE | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Saturday, October 19, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | | | | | |During all this day the wind
+ 9 | | | | | | |has been moderate and steady
+ 10 | | | | | | |at NE, with fine clear weather.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .98 |76 | 76 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | NE | |
+ 2 | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .98 |73 | 75 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 |73 | 75 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Sunday, October 20, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 72 | 75 | NE | | |The breeze still continues at
+ | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |NE, with the same fine clear
+ 10 |29 .98 | | | | | |weather as yesterday.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|29 .98 | 73 | 75 | | | |
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .98 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .98 | 73 |75 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .98 | 72 |75 |NE by N| |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Monday, October 21, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight the wind
+ 5 | | | | | | |shifted to the N by E, with a
+ 6 | | | | | | |moderate breeze.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .00 | 73 | 75 |N by E | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 74 | 75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 73 |75 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it fell almost
+ 8 |30 .04 | 72 | 74 | NNE | |calm.
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNE | | |_Tuesday, October 22, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight the breeze
+ 4 | | | | | | |freshened up at NNE, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |continued so all day, with
+ 6 | | | | | | |fine clear weather.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .06 | 72 | 74 | | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 |30 .06 | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .06 | 73 | 75 |NE by N| | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |30 .08 | 73 | 74 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .08 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 72 | 74 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | |NE by N| | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Wednesday, October 23, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind continued steady at
+ 5 | | | | | | |NNE, with the same fine weather
+ 6 | | | | | | |as yesterday.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 73 |75 | NNE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .10 | 74 |75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .10 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .10 | 73 |74 |N by E | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .12 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .12 | 72 | 73 | | |
+ 7 | | |-1/2| | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 24, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |After midnight we had a
+ 4 | | | | | | |moderate breeze at NNE.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .04 | | |N by E | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |Towards noon it shifted to
+ 10 | | | | | | |north, and freshened up in
+ 11 | | | | | | |that quarter.
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 72 | 75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .99 | | |North | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |After noon we had a slight
+ 4 |29 .98 | | | | |shower of rain, but soon after
+ 5 | | | | | |it cleared up.
+ 6 |29 .98 | 72 | 74 | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | |North | | |_Friday, October 25, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |At daylight the breeze
+ 5 | | | | | | |freshened.
+ 6 |30 .05 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 74 | 75 | | | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |At 9 the weather became
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |squally, with a shower of rain.
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | NNW | |
+ 3 | | | | | |After noon the wind hauled
+ 4 |30 .00 | 74 | 74 | | |to NNW, and continued to blow
+ | |-1/2|-1/2| | |a fresh breeze all day.
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | 73 | 74 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Saturday, October 26, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During this day the wind has
+ 4 | | | | | | |been at north, blowing a fresh
+ 5 | | | | | | |breeze, with occasional
+ 6 | | | | | | |squalls.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .04 | 74 | 74 | North | | |
+ | | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 74 |75 | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .99 | | | | Napakiang |
+ 3 | | | | | harbour. |
+ 4 |29 .98 | | 74 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |Towards midnight it moderated.
+ 6 |29 .98 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | 74 | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | Calm | | |_Sunday, October 27, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |After midnight it fell calm.
+ 5 | | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .05 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .08 | 68 |73 | NNE | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |About 9 A.M. a breeze sprung up
+ 10 |30 .00 | | | | | |from NNE. Weighed and stood out
+ 11 | | | | | | |of the harbour.
+ Noon.|30 .00 | 70 | 74 |N by E | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .00 | 71 |74 | NNE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 |29 .96 | 72 |74 | | |Towards night the breeze
+ 9 | | | | | |freshened.
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Monday, October 28, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During all this day the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |has been at NNE, blowing a
+ 5 | | | | | | |steady fresh breeze.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .10 | 72 | 77 | North | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .08 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.| | | | |24 .41 |126 . 00|
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .99 | | | | Japan Sea. |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .98 |74 | 79 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it shifted to NE.
+ 8 |30 .05 | 74 | 79 | | |
+ 9 | |-1/2| | | |
+ | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid. | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | Calm | | |_Tuesday, October 29, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |The wind has been from the NE,
+ 5 | | | | | | |and a swell rising from that
+ 6 | | | | | | |quarter.
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 |30 .02 | 76 | 79 | NNE | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .02 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|30 .02 | 76 | 79 |N by E |23 .24 |124 .01 |
+ | |-1/2| | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |29 .95 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |29 .99 | 76 | 79 | NNE | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |30 .00 | | | | |Towards night the sky
+ 7 | | | | | |assumed a threatening
+ 8 |30 .00 | 76 | 79 | | |appearance.
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | NNW | | |_Wednesday, October 30, 1816._
+ 2 | | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | | |During the night the wind
+ 4 | | | | | | |shifted to the Northward, and
+ 5 | | | | | | |continued to blow fresh, with
+ 6 | | | | | | |a heavy swell. Saw the islands
+ 7 | | | | | | |of Botel-Tobago-Zima, and
+ 8 |30 .50 | 72 | 77 | North | | |Formosa.
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 |30 .30 | | | | | |
+ 11 |30 .00 | | | | N | E |
+ Noon.|29 .92 | | | |24 .41 |126 .00 |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 |30 .50 | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 |30 .85 |74 | 79 | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 |31 .10 | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |Towards night it shifted to NE.
+ 8 |31 .00 | 74 | 79 | | |
+ | |-1/2| | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+ 1 | | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | | |_Thursday, October 31, 1816._
+ 3 | | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | | |Passed Formosa, and entered
+ 5 | | | | | | |the China sea.
+ 6 | | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | | |
+ Noon.| | | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+
+ 1 | | | | | |
+ 2 | | | | | |
+ 3 | | | | | |
+ 4 | | | | | |
+ 5 | | | | | |
+ 6 | | | | | |
+ 7 | | | | | |
+ 8 | | | | | |
+ 9 | | | | | |
+ 10 | | | | | |
+ 11 | | | | | |
+ Mid.| | | | | |
+ -----+-------+----+----+-------+-------+--------+-------------------------------
+
+
+
+
+ABSTRACT OF THE LYRA'S VOYAGE, FROM LEAVING ENGLAND TILL HER RETURN;
+
+SHEWING
+
+THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE DIFFERENT PLACES AT WHICH SHE TOUCHED, AND THE
+TIME TAKEN IN PERFORMING EACH PASSAGE.
+
+
+
+
+ABSTRACT
+OF THE
+VOYAGES OF HIS MAJESTY'S SHIP LYRA,
+In 1816 and 1817.
+
+
+The Lyra, in the short space of twenty months, viz. from the 9th of
+February 1816, to the 14th of October 1817, visited Madeira, the Cape,
+Java, Macao, the Yellow Sea, the West Coast of Corea, the Great Loo-choo
+Island, Canton, Manilla, Prince of Wales's Island, Calcutta, Madras, the
+Mauritius, and St. Helena; having run, in direct courses, a distance of
+11,940 nautic leagues, or 41,490 statute miles.
+
+An abstract of the various passages, from place to place, during this
+voyage, illustrated by brief remarks on the particular circumstances of
+each, will probably be considered interesting.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+[Sidenote: England to Madeira and Cape, 2520 leagues.]
+
+1.
+
+Sailed through the Needles passage on the 9th of February, 1816.
+
+ Arrived at Madeira, 18th of February 9 days
+ Crossed the equator in longitude 25º 20' west, 4th March 15
+ Reached the Cape of Good Hope, 14th April 41
+ ---
+ From England to the Cape, in 9 weeks, 2 days, or 65 days.
+
+This is not a very good passage, considering that we carried the
+north-east trade wind to the latitude of 4º north, and longitude 23º
+west, where we got the south-east trade, without any interval of calms.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+2.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape to Java, 1800 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from the Cape on the 26th April 1816.
+
+ Arrived at Anjier Point, Java, 7th June. 42 days.
+ ---
+ Six weeks.
+
+After leaving the Cape we had strong westerly winds, with which we ran
+the longitude down, in the parallel of 38º and 39º south, till in
+longitude 57º east, where the weather being very stormy, we hauled to
+the north-east till in 35º south latitude, and then ran east till in 90º
+east, when we steered to the east-north-east, and crossed the tropic in
+102º east, which was probably too far west. The south-east trade hung
+far to the eastward, and made it difficult to fetch Java Head, which had
+we not succeeded in doing at first, might have caused considerable
+delay, as the wind still blew out of the Straits of Sunda.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+3.
+
+[Sidenote: Java to China, 600 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from Anjier Point, Java, on the 12th June, 1816.
+
+ Reached Gaspar Straits on the 17th June 1816 5 days.
+ Arrived off Macao, 8th July 21
+ ---
+ From Java to Macao in 3 weeks 5 days, or 26 days.
+
+This passage was unusually bad, it being nearly a week before we reached
+Gaspar Straits, an ordinary run of one day: in the south part of the
+China sea the south-west monsoon was very light. An American brig, which
+sailed only one day before us from Anjier Point, carried the breeze
+along with her, and reached Macao twelve days before us.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+4.
+
+[Sidenote: Ladrone Islands to the Yellow Sea, 520 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from the Ladrone Islands off Macao, on the 13th July 1816.
+
+ Rounded the promontory of Shantung and entered the
+ Yellow Sea, 25th July 12 days.
+ From thence to the anchorage off the Pei-ho
+ or Pekin River, 27th July 2
+ ---
+ Macao to Pekin River, in 2 weeks, or 14 days.
+
+This voyage can be compared only with that of the Lion on the occasion
+of the former embassy. The Lion was nearly three weeks, exclusive of the
+time at anchor at Chusan. We had fine weather and steady south-west
+winds, with very heavy dews at night. When nearly abreast of the south
+point of Corea, the wind became variable from the south-east and
+southward. In the Yellow Sea we had easterly winds and no fogs.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+5.
+
+[Sidenote: Pei-ho to Oei-hai-oei in the Yellow Sea, 90 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from the anchorage off the Pei-ho on the 11th August, 1816.
+
+ Arrived at Cheatow Bay, after having coasted from the
+ anchorage along the south side of the Gulf of
+ Pe-che-lee, 22d August 11 days.
+ From thence to the harbour of Oei-hai-oei, 23d August 1
+ ---
+ From Pekin River to harbour of Oei-hai-oei, 1 week
+ 5 days, or 12 days.
+
+In this cruise round the Gulf of Pe-che-lee we had constant easterly
+winds, which obliged us to tide the whole way. It blew a gale of wind on
+the 19th from the north-east, with a high short sea. With this
+exception, and a fresh breeze on the 3d and 6th, the weather was
+uniformly fine during our stay in the Yellow Sea, and we never
+experienced any fogs.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+6.
+
+[Sidenote: Yellow Sea to Corea, 40 leagues.]
+
+Sailed from Oei-hai-oei, in China, on the 29th August, 1816.
+
+ Made the islands off the coast of Corea, 1st September 3 days.
+ Running along the coast of Corea till the 10th September 9
+ ----
+ 12 days.
+
+On the coast of Corea the winds were mostly from the northward, and the
+weather uniformly fine, with heavy dews at night.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+7.
+
+[Sidenote: Corea to Loo-choo, 240 leagues.]
+
+ From the south-west end of Corea to the Great Loo-choo
+ Island, on the 14th September, 1816, 4 days.
+
+
+From Corea to the Great Loo-choo Island we had northeasterly and
+northerly winds, with one gale from the northward.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+8.
+
+[Sidenote: Loo-choo to China, 320 leagues.]
+
+ From Loo-choo to Lintin, off Canton.
+ 27th October to the 2d November, 1816 6 days.
+
+As the north-east monsoon was blowing fresh, this quick passage was to
+be expected.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+9.
+
+[Sidenote: China to Manilla, 200 leagues.]
+
+ From Lemma Islands to Manilla.
+ 2d February to the 5th February, 1817 3 days.
+
+A good passage for this season of the year.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+10.
+
+[Sidenote: Manilla to Penang, 600 leagues.]
+
+ From Manilla to Prince of Wales's Island.
+ 21st February to 8th March, 1817 15 days.
+
+In the north-east monsoon this is somewhat under the average passage.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+11.
+
+[Sidenote: Penang to Bengal, 400 leagues.]
+
+ From Prince of Wales's Island to Saugor Roads, Bengal.
+ 13th March to the 27th March, 1817 14 days.
+
+The average at this season is twenty-one days, consequently this passage
+is very good. At this season of the year the north-east monsoon has
+entirely ceased in the centre of the Bay of Bengal; so that a ship which
+steers well out between the Nicobars and Andamans need not apprehend
+northerly winds; whereas in the north-eastern parts of the bay, the
+monsoon still blows faintly, with long intervals of calm. A merchant
+brig, reputed a good sailer, left Prince of Wales's Island 6 days before
+us, and followed the inner route, while we went outside, and arrived 10
+days before her at Calcutta.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+12.
+
+[Sidenote: Calcutta to Madras, 300 leagues.]
+
+Sand Heads off Calcutta to Madras, against the south-west monsoon.
+
+ From 19th April to the 7th May, 1817 18-1/2 days.
+
+Three weeks is said to be a good passage. We beat down as far as the
+latitude 11º north, and longitude 87º east, before we hauled across. We
+had fine weather all the way.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+13.
+
+[Sidenote: Madras to Mauritius, 1140 leagues.]
+
+From Madras to the Mauritius.
+
+ 1st June to the 1st July, 1817 30 days.
+
+We were driven by the south-west monsoon as far as longitude 92º east,
+before crossing the equator; here we had a constant high swell. We were
+much baffled, and did not get the steady south-east trade till in 7º
+south, and longitude 88º east. The average passage is between five and
+six weeks at this season of the year.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+14.
+
+[Sidenote: Mauritius to rounding the Cape, 800 leagues.]
+
+From Mauritius to making the land of Africa, about Algoa Bay.
+
+ 8th July to the 22d July, 1817 14 days.
+ Thence to rounding the Cape on the 30th July 8
+ ---
+ Mauritius till round the Cape, 3 weeks 1 day, or 22 days.
+
+The average from the Mauritius to rounding the Cape, is twenty-eight
+days; on this occasion we kept close in-shore: we had no current, and
+though in the depth of winter, the weather was invariably fine, and the
+water smooth. At night a breeze generally blew off shore. There was a
+heavy dew every night.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+15.
+
+[Sidenote: Cape to St. Helena, 570 leagues.]
+
+ From off the Cape to St. Helena on the 11th August 12 days.
+ Mauritius to the Cape (see above) 22 days.
+ ---
+ From Mauritius to St. Helena in 4 weeks 6 days, or 34 days.
+
+[Sidenote: Mauritius to St. Helena, 1370 leagues.]
+
+This is an excellent passage. It appears to be a great object in making
+a passage from India to England, to pass the Cape without going in; for
+it is often easy to round the Cape and go to St. Helena, when it is
+difficult and tedious either to go to Simon's or Table Bay, and much
+delay is produced by the difficulty of getting out of the former
+anchorage.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+16.
+
+[Sidenote: St. Helena to Ireland, 1800 leagues.]
+
+ From St. Helena to Bantry Bay in Ireland.
+ Sailed from St. Helena on the 14th August, 1817.
+ Arrived off Bantry Bay, 14th October, 1817 61 days.
+
+This passage was unusually long, owing to a succession of hard gales
+from north-east to south-east, which we encountered in latitude 47º
+north, longitude 13º west, beginning on the 27th of September, and
+continuing, with little intermission, till the 8th of October; after
+which period the weather became fine, but the wind hung constantly to
+the eastward, so as to render it difficult to fetch Ireland.
+
+
+
+
+GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM;
+BEING
+A DESCRIPTION OF THE SPECIMENS OF ROCKS
+COLLECTED AT
+MACAO AND THE LADRONE ISLANDS, AND ON THE SHORES OF
+THE YELLOW SEA, THE WEST COAST OF COREA,
+AND THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.
+
+
+GEOLOGICAL MEMORANDUM.
+
+It is greatly to be regretted, that, during this voyage, our means of
+gaining information on this interesting subject were so limited. In
+China we were restrained, sometimes by the jealousy of the Chinese, and
+sometimes by an apprehension on our part of giving offence, or of
+exciting suspicion, by following up enquiries, the nature of which it
+was impossible to explain when interrogated by the inhabitants. On the
+coast of Corea, the still greater jealousy of the natives rendered it
+impossible to prosecute geological investigations beyond the beach. Both
+in China and on the coast of Corea our stay at each place was very
+short, and our time being often necessarily occupied by avocations
+foreign to such enquiries, many opportunities were lost merely for want
+of time. Even at the Great Loo-choo Island, where we remained much
+longer, our researches were confined to a coast which offered nothing
+interesting.
+
+Having therefore nothing of a general or striking nature to offer to the
+scientific world on this subject, I shall merely give an account of the
+specimens collected at the various places which we touched at during
+this voyage, accompanied by brief explanations from memorandums made on
+the spot.
+
+The geologist will be struck with the resemblance which the rocks in
+this remote quarter of the globe bear to those with which he has been
+familiarly acquainted.
+
+
+
+
+
+SPECIMENS FROM CHINA.
+
+
+MACAO.
+
+1. Granite, composed of white quartz, porcelain clay, and greenish
+steatite, with veins of white quartz intersecting each other.
+
+2. Fine-grained granite, composed of yellowish feldspar, white quartz,
+and black mica.
+
+Quartz dykes of great magnitude traverse the granite which forms this
+peninsula.
+
+
+HONG-KONG, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS, OFF MACAO.
+
+3. Lead-coloured compact quartz rock, with imbedded crystals of
+flesh-coloured feldspar.
+
+
+GREAT LEMMA, ONE OF THE LADRONE ISLANDS, OFF MACAO.
+
+4. Coarse-grained granite, with distinct crystals of feldspar.
+
+
+
+
+SOUTHERN SHORE OF THE YELLOW SEA.
+
+
+CHE-A-TOW.
+
+5. Fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz, white feldspar, and
+black mica, with a vein containing hornblend and crystals of feldspar.
+
+6. The strata are here very much contorted; the cliffs at some places
+being folded up like webs of cloth.
+
+7. Granular primitive lime-stone, containing greenish steatite.
+
+8. Quartz rock, alternating with gneiss.
+
+9. A specimen containing amorphous pieces of iron.
+
+
+CUNG-CUNG-CHEEN ISLANDS.
+
+10. Very fine-grained gneiss, composed of white quartz, flesh-coloured
+feldspar, and black mica.
+
+11. Coarser variety of the same.
+
+12. Compact blueish-grey feldspar, with grains of quartz.
+
+
+OEI-HAI-OEI.
+
+13. Gneiss, composed of yellowish feldspar, white quartz, and black
+mica.
+
+
+LUNG-CUNG-TAO ISLANDS.
+
+14. Coarser variety of the rock described above.
+
+
+
+
+WEST COAST OF COREA.
+
+
+From an Island in Latitude 37º 45' North.
+
+1. Compact stratified pale-pink lime-stone; variegated in colour; strata
+highly inclined.
+
+2. Very compact slaty light-grey rock; strata inclined at an angle of
+75º, dipping towards the north-east.
+
+3. Dark olive steatitic rock, containing fragments of granular marble.
+
+4. Very fine-grained greenish hornblend rock.
+
+5. Vine-grained purplish slate; the strata highly inclined.
+
+6. Greenish-grey slate, containing crystals of white feldspar and specks
+of hornblend: strata highly inclined, dipping towards the north-east.
+
+
+
+SPECIMENS FROM HUTTON'S ISLAND, COAST OF COREA.
+
+Latitude 36º 10' north, longitude 126º 13' east.
+
+The following note is taken from the narrative at page 8.
+
+We found the north-east end composed of a fine-grained granite[19]; the
+middle of the island of a brittle micaceous schistus of a deep blue
+colour[20]; the strata are nearly horizontal, but dip a little to the
+south-west. This body of strata is cut across by a granite dyke[21], at
+some places forty feet wide, at others not above ten; the strata in the
+vicinity of the dyke are broken and bent in a remarkable manner: this
+dislocation and contortion does not extend far from the walls of the
+dyke, though veins of granite branch out from it to a great distance,
+varying in width from three feet to the hundredth part of an inch: the
+dyke is visible from the top of the cliff to the water's edge, but does
+not re-appear on the corresponding cliff of an island opposite to it,
+though distant only thirty yards. This island is composed of the same
+schistus, and is cut in a vertical direction by a whin dyke[22], four
+feet wide, the planes of whose sides lie north-east and south-west,
+being at right angles to those of the great granite dyke in the
+neighbourhood, which run south-east and north-west. The strata
+contiguous to the whin dyke are a good deal twisted and broken, but not
+in the same degree as at their contact with the granite dyke. The whin
+dyke is formed of five layers or sets of prisms laid across in the usual
+way.
+
+Beyond the small island cut by the whin dyke, at the distance of only
+forty or fifty feet, we came to an island rising abruptly out of the
+sea, and presenting a high rugged cliff of breccia[23], fronting that on
+which the granite dyke is so conspicuous: the junction of this rock with
+the schistus cut by the granite and the whin would have been
+interesting; but although we must have been at times within a few yards
+of it, the actual contact was every where hid by the sea.
+
+The whole of the south-west end of this island is formed of breccia,
+being an assemblage of angular and water-worn pieces of schistus,
+quartz, and some other rocks, the whole having the appearance of a
+great shingle beach and cliffs. The fragments of the schistus in this
+rock are similar to that which forms the cliff first spoken of.
+(Specimen 8.)
+
+The theory which presented itself to us on the spot was, that the lower
+part of the great mass of strata which now forms the centre of the
+island was formerly at the bottom of the ocean; and that the western
+part, now a firm breccia, had been a beach of shingle produced by the
+action of the waves on the upper strata, which may have formed a coast
+above the sea: the granite of the eastern end of the island had been
+forced into its present situation from beneath the strata, with
+sufficient violence to dislocate and contort the beds nearest to it, and
+to inject the liquid granite into the rents formed by the heaving action
+of the strata as they were raised up. It is natural to suppose that the
+ragged edges of the strata forming the sides of these cracks would be
+subjected to a grinding action, from which the strata more remote might
+be exempted; and in this way we may account for the extraordinary
+twisting, and separation of masses along the whole course of the granite
+dyke. In the dyke, as well as in the veins which branch from it, there
+are numerous insulated portions of schistus. That this last was
+softened, seems to follow from the frequent instances which occur of its
+being bent back upon itself without producing cracks. The same heat,
+generated by the melted granite in the neighbourhood, and which appears
+to have been just sufficient to soften the schistus, may be supposed to
+have reduced the shingle beach to a state of semi fusion by the aid of
+some flux contained in the sand scattered amongst the fragments. We
+could not discover any circumstance by which the relative antiquity of
+the two dykes mentioned above could be inferred.
+
+The junction of the granite and schistus above described, resembles very
+much the well known junction at the Lowrin mountain, in Galloway,
+described by my father, Sir James Hall, in the 7th vol. of the Edinburgh
+Transactions. It is also very like the junctions at the Cape of Good
+Hope, described in the same volume. The same theory has been found to
+explain them all.
+
+Specimen 7. Fine-grained granite, composed of white quartz, white
+feldspar, and olive-green mica. This rock (7) forms the eastern end of
+the island; the schistus next described (8) the centre, and the breccia
+mentioned immediately afterwards (9) the western end.
+
+8. Fine-grained compact micaceous schistus: some of the specimens appear
+to contain plumbago. The strata lie north-west and south-east, dipping
+only a few degrees from the horizontal line.
+
+9. Breccia, composed of angular and contorted fragments of micaceous
+schistus, and angular pieces of feldspar and quartz. This rock forms the
+western end of Hutton's Island[24]: it rises in high rugged cliffs. The
+angular pieces of schistus are of a similar rock to that described above
+(8).
+
+10. Dyke, porphyritic granite, composed of white quartz, white feldspar,
+and bronze-coloured mica. This dyke cuts across the schistus last
+mentioned, in a direction north-east and south-west. It is nearly
+vertical, and varies in breadth from nine to forty feet, with numerous
+ramifications.
+
+11. Dyke of compact whin stone. This dyke is composed of five layers of
+prisms, whose length is at right angles to the walls of the dyke. It is
+nearly vertical. Its direction north and south, and is about five feet
+thick.
+
+
+MAIN LAND OF COREA.
+
+12. Lead-coloured, fine-grained, micaceous schistus. From the main land
+of Corea, latitude 36º 10' north, longitude 126º 48' east. The strata
+lie north-west and south-east, and are nearly vertical; the natives
+objected to our examining the cliffs, though distant less than a quarter
+of a mile from the beach.
+
+
+ANOTHER ISLAND OFF THE COAST OF COREA.
+
+Latitude 34º 23' north, longitude 126º east.
+
+13. Decomposing fine-grained rock; composed of flesh-coloured feldspar,
+white quartz, and porcelain clay.
+
+
+ANOTHER ISLAND NEAR THE ABOVE.
+
+14. Rock composed of white feldspar and quartz. The strata of this rock
+were very much contorted.
+
+This rock is the most general of any in this range of islands, at least
+as far as we had opportunities of examining them. The islands on this
+coast are very numerous; they lie in great clusters along a line of
+three degrees and a half of latitude. The islands vary in length from
+five or six miles to as many yards, and are of all forms. We saw none
+that were remarkably high, and none which seemed volcanic. As our stay
+on the coast was only nine days, and as the ships were almost always
+under weigh except at night, it was quite impossible to make any careful
+or valuable geological observations. It offers a splendid field to
+future voyagers.
+
+
+GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND.
+
+1. Grey stratified lime-stone without shells. This specimen was taken
+from the north end of the island, where the ranges of hills were mostly
+composed of it: the strata being highly inclined. The hills rise to the
+height of four or five hundred feet, and present nothing interesting.
+
+2. Fawn-coloured, cellular, granular lime-stone. The cliffs at Napakiang
+are composed of this rock; it also appears to stretch along the whole of
+the south-west and south parts of the coast. In the narrative, this rock
+has been erroneously called coral. These cliffs are curiously hollowed
+out into horizontal caves, which have all the appearance of having been
+worn by the dashing of the waves; but as it is obvious, that in their
+present situation the sea can never have reached the face of the cliffs,
+it seems probable that the whole coast may have been raised up, by a
+gentle movement, without dislocating the strata, or disturbing the
+horizontal position, in which it seems probable that these caves were
+formed.
+
+The variety of coralines which girt the shores of this island was very
+great, and large collections were made, as well of these as of the
+numerous zoophites which filled up every part of the reefs below
+high-water mark. This collection, of which unfortunately no duplicates
+were kept, was afterwards lost.
+
+
+SULPHUR ISLAND
+
+Lies in latitude 27º 5' north, and longitude 128º 25' east. An accurate
+representation of it is given as a frontispiece.
+
+We attempted to land, but the surf broke every where so high against the
+rock that this was impossible. There is a crater on the left side with
+white smoke issuing from it; this has a strong sulphuric smell. The
+sides of the crater are stratified. The south end of the island is about
+four or five hundred feet high, and is formed of a dark dingy red rock
+distinctly stratified; at several places it is cut vertically by great
+dykes, which being more durable than the strata which they intersect,
+stand out from the face of the cliffs to a considerable distance.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 19: Specimen 7, infra.]
+
+[Footnote 20: Specimen 8.]
+
+[Footnote 21: Specimen 10.]
+
+[Footnote 22: Specimen 11, infra.]
+
+[Footnote 23: Specimen 9.]
+
+[Footnote 24: The island above described was so named by Captain
+Maxwell, in compliment to the memory of the distinguished philosopher
+whose theory has been used to explain the curious phenomena which it
+exhibits.]
+
+
+
+END OF THE APPENDIX.
+
+
+
+
+VOCABULARY OF THE LANGUAGE
+SPOKEN AT
+THE GREAT LOO-CHOO ISLAND, IN THE
+JAPAN SEA.
+
+
+COMPILED BY
+HERBERT JOHN CLIFFORD, ESQ.
+LIEUTENANT, ROYAL NAVY.
+
+
+IN TWO PARTS.
+
+
+
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+ON
+THE LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.
+
+
+Of the grammar of this language I pretend to little knowledge, but the
+following observations upon some points may perhaps be worth attending
+to. The most striking circumstance, is the frequent use of the words
+_noo_ and _ka_; the former of which seems to signify _of_, or the _'s_
+of the English language, as will appear in _choo noo ka_, a man's skin,
+or the skin of a man; _ooshee noo stinnoo_, the bullock's horn, or the
+horn of the bullock; and in _moo noo kee saw'teeyoong_, to dig potatoes
+out of the ground, or, literally, potatoes of the earth to dig out.
+
+_Ka_, it will be observed, is used to denote skin, and also seems to
+signify a receiver or enclosure, as is expressed in the words _meezee
+ka_, a well of water, _meezee_ being water, and _ka_, the place
+containing the water; and in _ya ka saut eechoong_, to go out of a
+place, _ka_ in this instance expressing the enclosure, _ya_ you, and
+_sawt eechoong_ to go out from, as _eechoong_ signifies to go.
+
+The adjective is for the most part placed before the substantive, as
+_teeshooee ickkeega_, an old man; _wusa ya_, a mean house; and _wockka
+innago_, a young woman.
+
+There is little variety in the termination of the verb, the tenses being
+expressed by other means. I have throughout the vocabulary considered
+the termination _oong_ to denote the infinitive, and have translated it
+as such, even when the sense points to another mood, merely to preserve
+consistency; there are, however, a few exceptions to this, and some of
+the verbs will be found to terminate in _ang_, _ing_, _awng_, _ong_, and
+_ung_. Those ending in _oong_ seem generally to make the participle
+terminate in _ee_, as _wockkayoong_, to separate, makes the participle
+_wockkatee_, separated. The negative termination of the verb is
+generally _nang_ or _rang_, as _noomang_, not to drink, is the negative
+of _noomoong_, to drink; _meerang_, the negative of _meeoong_, to see;
+and _nooboorang_, the negative of _noobooyoong_, to climb or ascend.
+_Na_ is also used as a negative, _coonsoona_, not to rub out, being the
+negative of _coonshoong_, to rub out.
+
+_Nang_, _narang_, and _nashee_ are negatives used with a substantive,
+and are always placed after it, as _koomoo nang_, no clouds; _meezee
+narang_, no water; and _feejee nashee_, no beard.
+
+Some peculiarities will be found by referring to the following words:
+deaf; the sole of the foot; head-ache; palm of the hand; the toe; and
+the wrist.
+
+
+
+
+PART I.
+
+VOCABULARY OF ENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO WORDS ALPHABETICALLY ARRANGED, WITH
+NOTES, AND OCCASIONAL REFERENCES TO THE SENTENCES IN THE SECOND PART.
+
+
+
+
+VOCABULARY
+OF THE
+LOO-CHOO LANGUAGE.
+
+Note on the orthography used in the following vocabulary.--The sounds in
+the Loo-Choo words are expressed by the letters which in English
+correspond nearest to those sounds. There are no mute vowels. The letter
+_a_ is invariably sounded as in the English word _far_. The emphasis is
+marked by an accent over the last vowel of the accented syllable. _Ee_
+and _oo_, whether accented or not, always express one syllable.
+
+ _English._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ Above, or the top of a thing Wee.
+ Alive Itch-it'chee.
+ Alive, to be It'ch-chawng.
+ All (every one) Eenea, or I'gnea
+ (Italian gn[25].)
+ All drink, every one drinks I'gnea noodung.
+ Anchor Eeki.
+ Angry Neetsa.
+ Ankle Shanna go ooshee.
+ Answer, to Aree ga aanyoong.
+ Arm Teenoo.
+ Arrow Eea.
+ Awake, to Ooking.
+ Awaking Oocatee.
+ Bad Neesha.
+ Bad man Yawna moon, or Yanna choo.
+ Bad building Wasa ya.
+ Bailer of a canoe Yoo-tooee.
+ Baize, red Mooshung.
+ Bake, to I'rreechang.
+ Bake bread, to Quashee sookooyoong.
+ Bamboo-cane Dakee.
+ Bamboo (instrument of punishment) Boochee.
+ Basket Teeroo.
+ Beads Tamma.
+ Beard Feejee.
+ Beardless Feejee nashee.
+ Beat, to Soo-go-yoong.
+ ----, as the heart Nacoo-choong.
+ ---- on the gong Tanna ochoong (lit. to
+ play on the gong.)
+ ---- to, with the bamboo Chibbee ootchoong.
+ Bed Coocha.
+ Bell St'chee-gannee.
+ Belly Watta.
+ Belly, big Watta magesa.
+ Below, or the bottom of a thing Stcha.
+ Bend to, a thing Tammeeoong.
+ Bird Hotoo.
+ Birdcage Hotoo-coo.
+ Bishop at chess (lit. priest) B[=o]dsee, or B[=o]dzee[26].
+ Bite to, as a dog Cooyoong[27].
+ Bitter Injassa.
+ Black Korosa.
+ Bleed, to, (lit. to draw blood) Chee-hooga-choong.
+ Blind Meegua.
+ Blind man Akee meegua.
+ Block Koorooma.
+ Blood Chee[28].
+ Blow up, to, or light a fire Foo-tchoong.
+ Blowing (through a musical instrument) Gacoo.
+ Blue (colour) Tama-eeroo.
+ Blue (light colour) Meez-eeroo.
+ Blunt Chirrarung.
+ Blush (lit. red) Akassa.
+ Boat Timma, or Sabannee,
+ Boat, the bottom of a Nakamma.
+ Boil, to Tajeeing.
+ Book Sheemootsee[29].
+ Bone Cootsee.
+ Bonnet, or head-dress worn by the natives Hat'chee Mat'chee.
+ Both alike, or all the same Neechawng, or Yoonoomoong.
+ Bow to, to a person passing Deeshoong.
+ Bow Yoomee.
+ Bow, to pull a Yoomee feetchoong.
+ Bower Tannan.
+ Boy (lit. a man child) Ic'kkeega warrabee.
+ Brass Cheejackko, or Toong.
+ Bread Quashee.
+ Bread-basket, or tray Quashee boong.
+ Breadth Habba.
+ Break, to, a stick Ooyoong[30].
+ ---------- a tea-cup Wy'oong.
+ Breakers Namee.
+ Breast Moonee.
+ Breathe, to It'chee shoong[31].
+ Bridge Hashee[32].
+ Bring here Moot'chee coo.
+ Bring fire here Feetootee coo.
+ Brinjal (an Indian vegetable) Nasibbee.
+ Broke Ootee, Chirreetee.
+ Brother Weekee.
+ Bucket Tagoo.
+ Bull Woo Ooshee.
+ Burn, to Yaddee, or A'kka.
+ Butterfly Habaroo.
+ Button Hogannee, or kannee.
+ By and by A'tookara[33].
+ Cake, a sweet flowered Magia quashee.
+ Calf Ooshee gua.
+ Calf of the leg Koonda.
+ Candle Daw.
+ Candlestick Soocoo[34].
+ Candle and stick together Daw'secoo.
+ Cannon I'shee-beea.
+ Cap Cammoodee, Maw'tsee.
+ Carpenter's black line box Stinseeboo.
+ [35]Carry to, or take away Mootchee eechoong.
+ ------------, a basket on the head Teeroo kammeetong[35].
+ ------------, a child in the arms Dachoong.
+ ------------, with a bar on the shoulders[35] Katam'meeoong.
+ Carrying a basket on the arm Teeroo tenakikakittee.
+ Cask Soocoo.
+ Castle Eegoosecoo, or Gooseecoo.
+ Cat Mia, or My'a (Chinese).
+ Cat, to mew as a Nachoong deeoong.
+ Catch, to Kaootoochung.
+ Catch, to, a butterfly Kabaroo skehdang.
+ Chair Ee (Chinese).
+ Charcoal Chacheejing.
+ Cheeks Hoo.
+ Cheese (literally cow's milk and fat) Ooshee noo[36] chee quatee.
+ Chessmen Choonjee.
+ Child (infant) Worrabee.
+ Child, male (literally man-child) I'ckkeega worrabee.
+ Child, female (literally woman-child) Innago worrabee.
+ Children Qua.
+ Chin Oootooga.
+ Chin, the beard of the (lit. lower beard) Stcha feejee.
+ Chopsticks Fashay, or May'shung.
+ Climb, to, a pine-tree Matsee kee noobooyoong.
+ Cloth, or clothes Ching.
+ Cloth, red Akassa nonoo.
+ Clouds Koomoo.
+ Cock Tooee.
+ Cocoa-nut tree Nash'ikee.
+ Cocoa-nuts Naee.
+ Cold Feesa.
+ Cold water Feezeeroo Meezee.
+ Colours Eeroo eeroo.
+ Come, to Choong[37].
+ Come here Cung coo.
+ Come, to, down a hill Oodeeyoong.
+ --------- on board Choo-oong.
+ Coming up from below Noobooteecoo.
+ Compass Karahigh, or Kassee tooee[38].
+ Conk shell Neenya gooroo.
+ Cool Seedasha.
+ Copper Acoogannee.
+ Coral Ooroo
+ Cover, to, over with sand Sinna sheeostang.
+ Cough, to Sack-quee.
+ Count, to Oohaw'koo-oong[39].
+ Country A'whfee.
+ Cow Mee Ooshee.
+ Crab Gaannee.
+ Crab, to crawl as a Hoyoong.
+ Creep, to Haw'yoong.
+ Crow, to O'tayoong.
+ Crow Garrasee.
+ Cry, to Nachoong.
+ Curlew U'nguainan.
+ Cut, to Cheeoong, or feeoong, or
+ feejoong.
+ Dance Oodooee, or Makatta.
+ Dark Coorasing.
+ Daughter Innago oongua, or ungua.
+ Day (at Napakiang) Nit'chee[40].
+ ---- (in the north of the island) I'sheeree.
+ ---- after to-morrow Asattee.
+ ---- the following Asa tinnacha.
+ Daylight Heeroo.
+ Dead Sheenoong, or gang.
+ Deaf (literally, ear not to hear) Mimmee chee karung.
+ Deep Fookassa.
+ Deity (the Indian God Boudha) Boosa (Chinese).
+ Dice Sheego roocoo.
+ Dice, to play with Sheego roocoo ochoong.
+ Die, to Nintoong.
+ Dig, to, up the ground Oochoong.
+ ----, potatoes Moo noo kee sauteeyoong.
+ Directly (by and by) Atookar'ree, or Atookara.
+ Dive, to, under water Seenoong.
+ Dog Ing.
+ Dog barks I'nnoo nachoong.
+ Don't stir (said to a person rising to Wfay'sa[41].
+ depart)
+ Door Hasbirree.
+ Draw, to, a picture Ee-katchoong[42].
+ --------- blood Chee na by'oong.
+ Dress, to Ching cheeoong.
+ Drink Noomoo.
+ Drink, to Noomoong[43].
+ --------- wine Sack'kee noomoong.
+ -----, not to, wine Sack'kee noomang.
+ Drop, to, a thing Oocheerooshoong.
+ Drunk Weetee[44].
+ -----, to get Weeoong.
+ Dry, to Karachaoong.
+ -------, powder Eenshoo fooshoong.
+ Dung, cow, for manure Ooshee noo coosoo.
+ Duck, a tame A'feeroo.
+ Eagle Hack'ka.
+ Ear Mimmee.
+ ---, left Feejeeree noo mimmee.
+ ---, right Meejeree noo mimmee.
+ Ears, to pull the Mimmee feeoong, or feetchoong.
+ Earth Jee.
+ East Fingassee.
+ Eat, to Kamoong[45].
+ ---, I Moonoo kamoong.
+ ---, to, boiled rice Meeshee kamoong, or kanoung.
+ Eggs Cooga.
+ Eight [46]Kwat'chee, or fat'chee
+ (Loo-Choo); Eeyat'see
+ (Japan.)
+ Eighteen Kwat'chee joo, or fat'chee joo.
+ Eighty Hapack coo, or Habback coo.
+ Elbow Teenoo feejee.
+ Eleven Too.
+ Empty, to, or pour out Harashoong.
+ Ends of a thing Yookoo.
+ Every thing A'dee-coodee[47]?
+ Exchange, to, fans Kayra.
+ Exclamation of surprise Yeeah, or Chee-oo-oo.
+ ----------------------- I'yi-yi-yi-yi.
+ Expression of respect, or salutation Taw.
+ ------------- thanks in returning How.
+ any thing
+ Eye Mee.
+ Eyebrows Mai-oh.
+ Eyelashes Matsidjee.
+ Eyes, to open the Mee hoora choong.
+ ----, closing the Neebooee.
+ Face Steera, or Skeera[48].
+ Fall, to Taw'shoong, or Taw'ring[49].
+ Fan O'jee.
+ ---, to, one's self O'jeeshoong.
+ ---, to offer a O'jee kara.
+ Fat Quaitee.
+ Father Shoo.
+ Feathers of a fowl Tooee noo han'nee.
+ Female Mee.
+ Fence of bamboo Dack'kee gat'chee.
+ Fiddle Neeshing.
+ ------, to play on the Feetchoong (lit. to pull.)
+ ------ strings Cheeroo.
+ Fifteen Goonjoo.
+ Fifty Gooshacoo, or gooyacoo.
+ Fill, to I'ddeecoong.
+ Find, to Toomatung[50].
+ Finger Eebee.
+ ------, fore Choo shashee.
+ ------, little Eebeegwaw.
+ ------, middle Nack'ka eebee.
+ ------ ring Nanna shee.
+ ------ nail Thimmee.
+ Fire Fee.
+ ----, to put out Fee cha-chee.
+ ----, to, a gun Narashoong.
+ Fish Eeo[51].
+ ----, a small Coosa eeo.
+ ------------- blueish Tamung eeo.
+ ----, a large red Matchee eeo.
+ ----, the back of a Kanjee.
+ ----, the fin of a Hannay.
+ ----, the gills of a Ajee.
+ ----, the head of a Chee-boo-soo.
+ ----, the tail of a Dzoo.
+ ----, to catch Eeo kakeeoong.
+ ---- hook and line Cheena.
+ ---- spear Eeo stit'chee.
+ Five Goo (Loo-Choo); Ittitsee
+ (Japan)[52].
+ ---- sided figure Roo-ka-coo.
+ Flag Hata.
+ Flail[53] Coora ma baw[53].
+ Flesh Shishee.
+ Flesh, no Shishee ning.
+ Flower, a red, the name of A'ckka hanna.
+ Flower of a plant Fanna.
+ Flute, to play on the Hanshaw.
+ Fly Hayeh.
+ Fly, to, as a bird Toobeeoong.
+ Foot Shanna.
+ ----, the sole of the Shanna watta (lit. belly of
+ the foot).
+ ----, of a bird Fisha.
+ Forehead Fitchayeh.
+ Forty Speeakoo, or Sabacoo.
+ Four [54]Shee (Loo-Choo); Eeots see,
+ or joo (Japan).
+ Four-sided figure Sicca Coodair.
+ Fourteen Sheenjoo.
+ Friend Eedooshee.
+ Frog A'tta beetsee.
+ Full Meetchittee.
+ ----, half Ham'boong.
+ Get up Ta-tee.
+ Girdle O'bee.
+ Girl Tack'kee.
+ Give, to Queeoong[55].
+ Glass Kagung.
+ Go, to Eechoong[56].
+ ------, away Haddee.
+ ------, in a boat Timma ki eechoong.
+ Go, to, fast Hayee sit'choong.
+ ------, up a hill Noobooyoong (lit. to climb,).
+ --, not to, up a hill Nooboorang.
+ --, to, slow Yaw'na eechoong.
+ ------, on shore Amaki eechoong, or moodoeeong.
+ Goat Feeja.
+ ----, he Woo Feeja.
+ ----, she Mee Feeja.
+ Going down below Oorittee coo.
+ Gold Ching.
+ Good (for eating) Masa.
+ ---- (proper) Choorasa.
+ ---- man Yookachoo, or Eechoo.
+ ---- bye (taking leave) Wockkatee.
+ ---- for nothing Maconarang.
+ ----, not Worroosa.
+ Grand-children Soong maga.
+ Grass Goosit'chee, or Coosa.
+ -----, to cut Coosa cheeoong.
+ Grasshopper Sheeto, or Sayeh.
+ Grave Haka.
+ Greybeard Feejee sheerajee.
+ Great coat (made of straw, worn also New.
+ by the Chinese)
+ Great man (Chinese Tajin) A'jee, or Paychin.
+ ----- many Oowhoko.
+ Green O'sa.
+ Grind, to, the teeth Ha gissee gissee.
+ Groaning Doonee.
+ Hair Kurrazzee[57].
+ Hammer Gooshung.
+ ------ of a stone-cutter Oonoo.
+ Hand Kee[58].
+ ----, right Meejeeree.
+ ----, left Feejeeree.
+ Handkerchief Tee-sadjee[59].
+ Handsome Choorasa.
+ Harp San'gshing.
+ Hat, worn by the natives Kassa.
+ ---------------- English Kamooree.
+ Have not got Nang[60], or Narang.
+ ------------ water Meezee[61] narang.
+ Head, human Boosee.
+ Head-ache (lit. sick head) Seebooroo yadong.
+ Head, of a bird Tseebooroo.
+ Hear, to Sit'choong, or Skit'choong.
+ ----, I Moonoo sit'choong[62].
+ ----, I cannot (or understand) Sit'cheerang, or
+ Sit'cheekarang.
+ Heart Nacoo.
+ Heaven Ting.
+ ------, praying to Ting ooneewhfa[63].
+ Heavy Boosa.
+ Heel of the foot Shanna-a-roo.
+ Here Coo.
+ Hide, to, or cover (lit. cannot see) Meerang.
+ ---- of a bullock Ooshee noo ka.
+ Him (a third person) A'ree (meechay)[64].
+ Hips Gammacoo.
+ Hissing Seesee.
+ Hoe Quaya.
+ Hold, to take, of a person Kat'sameeoong.
+ Holding a thing (a butterfly) Meechawree[65].
+ (Letting a thing escape) Ootoo Batch[65].
+ Hole A'nna.
+ ---- to make in the ground A'nna hooyoong.
+ ---- in the jeeshee, or urn Mee hoojittee[66].
+ Hoop of a cask Obee[67]
+ Horn of a bullock Ooshee noo stinnoo.
+ Horse Ma[68] (Chinese).
+ Hot A'tteesa.
+ Hour Twit'chee[69].
+ House Ya, or Kat'chee.
+ House where salt is made Mashoo ya.
+ Hundred Sing.
+ Hungry Yasa.
+ I, or me (a first person) Wang[70] (chooee).
+ Jar, a large earthen Kamee.
+ ---, its top or cover Hoota.
+ Inch, one Eesing.
+ Inches, ten; Eeshackkoo.
+ Infant Worrabee.
+ Ink Sim'mee.
+ Inkstand Sim'mee shee.
+ Inside Oochee.
+ ----, or soft of bread Mee.
+ Iron Titzee.
+ Jump, to Moyoong.
+ Key Quaw.
+ Kick, to, with the foot King.
+ Kid (lit. small goat) Feeja agua.
+ Kill, to Sheemoong, or Koorashoong[71]
+ ----, birds Hotoo eechung.
+ ----, by the fire of a gun Doogaitee sheenoung.
+ King, or monarch Kowung (Chinese).
+ King's palace Oogoos-coo.
+ Kiss, to, (lit. kissing the mouth) Coochee spootee[72].
+ Kiss Sheemir'ree.
+ Knee Stinsee.
+ Kneel, to Shumma git'cheeoong.
+ Kneeling Shumma git'chee.
+ Knife, crooked, for cutting grass Eeranna.
+ -----, small (a penknife) Seego.
+ Knight, at chess Samooree.
+ Knot Coonja cootchee.
+ ----, to tie a Coonjoong.
+ Knuckles Fooshee.
+ Lacker, to Nooyoong.
+ Ladder Hashee.
+ Lake, or light purple Coonmoola sat'chee.
+ Land, or shore Amaki.
+ Lantern Tindoo.
+ -------, folding Chawching.
+ Lantern, glass Tamma-dooroo.
+ Large Weesa.
+ Laugh, to Warrayoong.
+ Laughing Warratee.
+ Lead (metal) Meejee kan'nee.
+ Leaf (of a tree) Wha.
+ ----, green (lit. the leaf of a tree) Kee noo wha.
+ ----, withered (lit. a dried leaf) Karree wha.
+ Lean (not fat) Yaitee.
+ ----, to, against a thing Yookatatoong[73].
+ Learning, or studying Cootooba[74].
+ Let, to, fall a thing Nageeoong.
+ Letter, or character Jee.
+ ------, to seal a Ing sit'choong.
+ ------, to write a Jee katchoong.
+ Letting go a thing O'too batch.[75]
+ Loo-Choo song Loochoo, or Doochoo oota.
+ Lift, to, a thing Moochoong.
+ Light, not dark (daylight) Feeroo, or Heeroo.
+ -----, not heavy Gasa.
+ -----, to, a pipe Sheeoong.
+ Lips Seeba.
+ Lip, lower Stit'cha seeba.
+ ---, upper Quaw seeba.
+ ---, the beard on the lower Coofeejee.
+ Liquor Sac'kkeedia, or Sam'tchoo
+ (Chinese).
+ Live, or reside, to Sim'matong[76].
+ Lizard U'ndlecha.
+ Look, or see, to Meeoong, or Meeing[77].
+ ----, to, at, or see the sun Teeda meeing.
+ ----, at a distance Han'na-rat'chee.
+ Look, to, closely Teetsheeoong.
+ Looking-glass Kagung.
+ Long, or length Nagasa.
+ Lose, to Ootoochung.
+ Make, to, clothes Ching nawyoong[78].
+ Make, a noise Habbeecoong.
+ Make, a rope Cheena ootchoong[79].
+ Make, salt Mashoo tatchoong.
+ Make, sugar Sata skoyoong[80].
+ Make, a tea-pot Tacoo sookooyoong[80].
+ Making a false step Koonsinda dakat'chee.
+ Male Woo.
+ Mallet, wooden Chee-chee.
+ Man (homo) Choo.
+ Man (vir) I'ckkeega[81].
+ Man, medical I'shsha.
+ Man, of rank Paychin, or Quangning
+ (Chinese).
+ Man, short Injasa.
+ Man, sick I'ckkeega yadong.
+ Man, the skin of a Choo-noo-ka.
+ Man, small Feecoosa.
+ Mast of a ship, or boat Hasseeda.
+ Mat Mooshooroo, or Hatung.
+ Match, or fire-stick used in the temples Kaw[82].
+ Me, or I Wang.
+ Meal, 1st (at sunrise) Stim'mee teemoong.
+ Meal, 2nd (two hours after) A'ssa bung.
+ Meal, 3rd (at noon) Feera moomoong.
+ ----, 4th (at sunset) Yoo bung.
+ Measure, to Gawjee hackkiyoong.
+ Melon Tooqua.
+ Men, a great many Oowhoko Ickkeega.
+ Mew, to, as a cat Nachoong deeoong.
+ Midday, or noon Teeda matchoo.
+ Milk Chee.
+ ----, to draw Chee hayoong.
+ Million Chaw.
+ Mine Coora wa moong.
+ Mixed Batee.
+ Moon, the Stchay.
+ ----, or month, one It'chee stit'chee, or
+ gwautsee[83].
+ ----, full Oostit'chee, or Maroo.
+ ----, half Mecasit'chee.
+ Monkey Saroo.
+ More Gnafing.
+ Morrow A'cha.
+ Mother Um'ma.
+ Mud Dooroo.
+ Musical instrument, to play on a Kootoo feetchoong.
+ Mustachios Wa feejee.
+ Nail to hang things on Coojee.
+ Naked Harraka.
+ Name Na.
+ ----, my Wa na.
+ ----, your Ya na.
+ ----, his A'rree ga na.
+ Navel Whoosoo[84].
+ Neck Coobee.
+ ----, short (lit. no neck) Coobee nang[85].
+ Needle Hayee skittee.
+ Net, fishing Sheebee.
+ Night Yooroo.
+ -----, one It'chee yooroo.
+ Nine Coo[86] (Loo-Choo), Koonitsee
+ (Japan).
+ Nineteen Coonjoo.
+ Ninety Coohacoo, or Queeshacoo.
+ Nipples Chee.
+ No Oongba, or Oomba[87].
+ Nod, to Najeechoong.
+ North Cheeta.
+ Nose Honna.
+ Nostrils Honnakee.
+ Octagon Hacac'koo.
+ Offer, to Ozagadee.
+ -----, wine Ozagadee sac'kkee.
+ -----, more, or again Matta ozagadee.
+ Old Teeshooee.
+ --- man Teeshooee ic'kkeega.
+ Olives Karang.
+ One It'chee (Loo-Choo), Teetesee,
+ or ta (Japan[88].)
+ Onions Dehchaw.
+ Open, to, or unlock A'keeoong[89].
+ Open it Akirree[2].
+ Orange, fruit Kooneeboo.
+ ------, the rind of an Kooneeboo noo ka.
+ ------, divisions Mee.
+ ------, the seed of an Tanee.
+ Overturn, to, or upset Kooroobashoong.
+ Outside Fooca.
+ -------, of bread (lit. skin) Ka.
+ Paddle of a canoe Wayacoo.
+ Paint, to Ooroo[90] sheenoostang.
+ Palanquin chair Kagoo.
+ Palm of the hand (lit. belly of the hand) Tee noo watta[91].
+ Pant, to Eetchee hootoong.
+ Panting Eetchee.
+ Paper of any kind Kabee.
+ Path Yamana meetchee.
+ Paupaw apple Wangshooee.
+ Pawns at chess Toomoo.
+ Pencil Hoodee.
+ Perspiration Ac'kkaddee[92].
+ Pepper pod Quada coosha.
+ Pick up any thing, to Moochoong.
+ Picture Kee-ee, or Kackkee-ee.
+ Pig Boota.
+ Pin worn in the hair of boys Jeepha, or Jeewa.
+ --- flower head worn by men Kam'mashishee.
+ ---, ladle head, do. Oosheethushee.
+ Pinch, to Katcheemeeoong[93].
+ Pine, the wild Adannee.
+ ----, leaves of the Wha.
+ ----, fruit of the Adannee nay.
+ ---- tree Matesee kee.
+ Pipe Shirree.
+ ----, the mouth-piece of a Quee cootchee.
+ ----, wooden part of a Saw.
+ ----, bowl of a Sarra.
+ ----, case of a Shirree bookooroo.
+ Pitchfork Feera.
+ Pivot on which the scull of a boat traverses Jeeco[94].
+ Place Skata.
+ Plank of a boat Fanna[95].
+ Plant Mee boosha.
+ Plantain, leaf of a Woo noo fa.
+ Play, to, at chess Choonjee ochoong.
+ ----, with dice Sheego roocoo ochoong.
+ ----, on a musical instrument Kootoo feetchoong[96].
+ ----, on the flute Hanshaw.
+ ----, on the violin Feetchoong.
+ Pleased Oosha.
+ Plough Sit'chee.
+ ------, to Sit'choong.
+ Point, to, with the finger Noochoong.
+ Potatoes, sweet Moo, or Moondee.
+ Pour in, to I'rreeing.
+ ---- out, to Cheejoong.
+ Pouring Cheejee.
+ Praying to the Deity Boosa, or Bosa meewhfa[97].
+ ------- to Heaven Ting ooneewhfa.
+ Powder Eeenshoo.
+ ------, to dry or air Eenshoo fooshoong.
+ Pregnant Kassee jeetawng.
+ Press, to, or squeeze Sheetskeeoong.
+ Prick, to, with a knife Hoogashoong[98].
+ Pricking Yatee.
+ Prickly pear bush Cooroojee.
+ Priest (Bonzes of China) Bodzee.
+ ------, the silk dress of a Eechoo cooroom.
+ ------, the cotton dress of a Basha cooroom.
+ ------, the belt of silk of a Quara.
+ Pull, to, or draw out Injat'chee.
+ ----, out of the ground Noojoong.
+ ----, a person Feetchoong, or fit'choong.
+ Purple Moola sat'chee.
+ Push, to, with the hand Kooroo bashoong[99].
+ Put, to, a thing above or upright I'sheeoong.
+ -------, up a thing above, high Injashoong.
+ -------, on the hat Kanjoong.
+ -------, or lay a thing down Oocheeking.
+ -------, a thing in I'ttee.
+ ---------------- under Kasseemeeoong.
+ -------, on clothes Ching cheeoong.
+ -------, out fire Fee chachee.
+ -------, a ring on the finger Eebee gannee sashoong.
+ Quack, to, like a duck Nachoong.
+ Quarrel, to Titskoong.
+ Queen, also at chess Oonajerra.
+ Quick Hayee.
+ Quick, to be Yoohaoong
+ Rain A'mee.
+ ----, to A'mee fooyoong.
+ ----, heavy Sheejeekoo fooyoong.
+ ----, lightly Kookoo fooyong.
+ Rainbow Noo-oojee.
+ Rat A'ck-a-sa.
+ Read, to Yoomoong, or Yoono-oong.
+ Red Akasa.
+ Rind of a shaddock Pow noo ka.
+ ------- an orange Kooneeboo noo ka.
+ ---- (lit. skin) Ka.
+ Ribbon, silk Eechoo.
+ Ribs Sawkee.
+ Rice Coomee.
+ ----, boiled U'mbang, or bang, or
+ oombang[100].
+ Ride, to, a horse Man'ayoong.
+ Right, in writing characters Katchee yanjee.
+ Ring Coosayee.
+ ---- for the finger Eebee gannee.
+ ----, to put on a Eebee gannee sashoong.
+ Rise, to, from a chair Tatchoong.
+ Road Meechee.
+ Rock See, or Weesa is'hee.
+ Root (bulb) Wee-ee.
+ Rope Chinna.
+ ----, to make Chinna oochoong.
+ Rough Sooroo sooroo.
+ Round Morroosa.
+ -----, a circle Maroodair.
+ Round, all round Marooee.
+ Rowing in a boat Coojee.
+ Rub, to Soosooing, or soosootee
+ ootooshung.
+ ---, out Seeree ootooshoong, or
+ Soosootee; ooteetung, or
+ coonshoong.
+ ---, not out Coonsoona.
+ Rubber, Indian Neeka.
+ Rum, or spirits Karaboo.
+ Run, to Hayay sit'choong[101].
+ Running Hayay.
+ Sail of a ship or boat Foo.
+ Sail, to, in a boat Harashoong.
+ Salt Mashoo.
+ ---- water Spookarasa Meezee.
+ ---- to the taste Spookarasa
+ Salute, to, a person Kameeoong.
+ Sand Sinna.
+ Say it, I can Ang.
+ ------, I cannot Narang[102].
+ Sea Nammee.
+ ---, the, or ocean Ooshoo.
+ ---, shore Hama, or Oomee.
+ --- weed Moo[103].
+ ---, high Oonammee.
+ Seal of a watch Ing, or Fang.
+ Seam between two planks Nago.
+ Scrape, to Sajoong.
+ Scratching Weegosa.
+ Screw, to Meegoorashoong[104].
+ Screw Jirree.
+ Scull of a boat Doo.
+ Scull, to, a boat Meegoorashoong.
+ See to, or look, (lit. to eye) Meeoong[105].
+ See, I cannot Meerang.
+ Seed Nigh.
+ Separate, to Wockkayoong.
+ Seven Sit'chee(Loo-Choo); Nannatsee
+ (Japan).
+ Seventeen Sit'chee joo.
+ Seventy Sit'chee hacoo.
+ Servant Toomoo, or Eeree, or Sad'ge-ee.
+ Sew, to Nawyoong, or No-a-yoong.
+ Shade, or shady Kajee.
+ Shake, to Katcheeming.
+ Shaking a thing Yootoo yootoo.
+ Shallow Asassa.
+ Sharp Aka, or chirraring?
+ Shave, to Sooyoong.
+ Shell Oosheemaw.
+ Shell fish (like a crab) A'mang.
+ Shield Timbayee.
+ Ship Hoonee[106].
+ ----, large Hooboonee, or Wesara Hoonee.
+ ----, small Hoonee gua, or Coosara Hoonee.
+ ---- goes away Hoonee eechoong.
+ ---- returns Moochee eechoong.
+ Shoes, or sandals Sabock, or Sabaugh.
+ Short Injasa.
+ Shoulders Kutta.
+ Shrub, with leaves resembling a Sootitsee.
+ palm tree, probably sago tree
+ Shut, to Meecheeoong.
+ Shut it Mechirree.
+ Skin Ka.
+ Skin, of a bullock Ooshee noo ka.
+ ----, of a man Choo noo ka.
+ Sick Yadong.
+ ---- man Ic'kkeega yadong.
+ ---- belly Watta eddee.
+ Side, of a person Harraga.
+ ----, of a thing Tattee.
+ Sigh, to Hooee eechee.
+ Silk Eechoo.
+ Silver Jing.
+ Sing, to Ootashoong, or ootayooshoong,
+ or ootayoong.
+ Sister O'nigh.
+ Sit down, to Eeoong.
+ --------, in a chair Eechawng, or Eeree.
+ --------, on the ground Eemeeshawdee, or Eedee.
+ --------, or be seated Yoocootee.
+ Six Roocoo (Loo-Choo); Mootsee
+ (Japan).
+ Sixteen Roocoojoo.
+ Sixty Rookpackcoo.
+ Sleep, to Ninjoong.
+ Sleeping Nintee.
+ Slow Yoona, or Yawna.
+ Small Coosa.
+ Smell, to Kannoong, or Kashashoong.
+ Smell Kabbasha[107].
+ Smoke, to Footchoong, or kootchoong.
+ Smoke Kinsee.
+ Smoking tobacco Tobacco fookee.
+ Smooth Nandooroosa.
+ Smooth down, to Nadeeyoong.
+ Snake Haboo.
+ Snake stings Haboo cootee.
+ Snatch, to Katayoong.
+ Sneeze, to Honna feeoong.
+ Snore, to Nintoong.
+ Snuff (lit. nose tobacco) Spachee, or Honna Tobacco.
+ Sole of the foot (lit. belly of the foot) Shanna watta.
+ Son Ic'kkeega oongua.
+ Song Oota[108].
+ Sore from riding Nautee.
+ Sorry Natskasha.
+ Sour Seesa.
+ South Whfa or fa.
+ Speak, to Moonooyoong[109].
+ Spear to catch fish with Tooga ooyoong.
+ Spectacles (lit. eye-glass) Mee kagung.
+ Spider Cooba.
+ Spider's web Cooba mang.
+ Spit, to Simpay-oong.
+ Spittle Simpayee.
+ Spoon Kaa.
+ Spy glass Toomee kagung.
+ Square Kackkoo.
+ ------, of a stone mason Banjaw gaunnee.
+ Squeeze, to Mimmeejoong.
+ Stab, to Choong.
+ Stand up, to Tatteeoong.
+ Stand back to back Coosee noochasa.
+ Stars Fooshee.
+ Stay on board ship Hoonee ootee.
+ Stem of a boat Oomootee.
+ Stern of a boat Cooma toomo.
+ Stone Is'hee.
+ ----- cutter's hammer Oong.
+ -----, carved Kawroo[110].
+ Stop Matee[111].
+ Straw Warra.
+ Strike, to Rejeecoong.
+ String Ko-eeroo.
+ Strong Choosa.
+ ------ wine Choozackkee, or Sackkeechoo.
+ Sucking Noodee[112].
+ Sugar Sata.
+ ----- cane Oojee.
+ -----, to make Sata skoyoong.
+ Sulky Harradat'chee.
+ -----, not Harradat'chee soona.
+ Sun Teeda.
+ Sunset Teeda sagayoong[113].
+ Sunshine Teeda tettee.
+ Sunrise Teeda agayoong.
+ Swallowing Noonootoosha.
+ Sweet Amasa.
+ ----- wine A'mazac'kkee[114].
+ ----- potatoes Moo, or Moondee.
+ Swim, to Weejoong.
+ Swimming Weejee.
+ Sword Tat'chee.
+ A flight of stone steps Keesiee.
+ A single step Coodammee.
+ To stick a thing in the ground Tateeing.
+ Table, round Madooee.
+ Tail of a bird Dzoo.
+ Take off the hat, to Hasseeoong.[115]
+ Tattoo marks on the right arm Oodeemaw.
+ --------------- on the left arm Tooga.
+ Tea cup Chawung.
+ -------, to break a Wy'oong.
+ --- pot Tacoo.
+ ---, in an octagon bucket Tacoo cee.
+ ---, the metal pot in the inside of Tacoo mee.
+ the bucket
+ ---, the cover of a Tacoo whfoota.
+ ---, the handle of a Tacoo tee.
+ ---, the ears of the bucket of a Tacoo toodee.
+ Tear, to Yayoong.
+ ---- a thing in pieces Cheereetawng.
+ Tears Nada.
+ Teeth Ha (an aspirate).
+ -----, to set on edge Ha gishee gish.
+ Temple Meea (Chinese).
+ ------ yard Tirra.
+ Temples, human Koomeegung.
+ Ten Joo (Loo-Choo);
+ Too (Japan).
+ Thank you Ka fooshee.
+ That A'ddee.
+ There Ic'kkee.
+ Thigh Moomoo.
+ Thirteen Sanjoo.
+ Thirty Sangbacoo.
+ This Coodee.
+ Thousand Mang.
+ --------, ten O'koo.
+ Three Sang (Loo-Choo);
+ Meetesee (Japan).
+ Three sided figure Sang cac'kkoo.
+ Thread, sewing Eechoo[116].
+ Thresh, to Ootchoong[117].
+ Throat Noodee[118].
+ Throw to, a stone at a mark Naging.
+ --------, away any thing Oochung-ging.
+ Thumb Hooee Eebee.
+ Tie to, a knot Coonjoong.
+ Tide Kadezee.
+ Tin Sheedookannee.
+ Tired, or fatigued Amus'heenoo.
+ Tobacco Tobacco[119] (as in England).
+ ------- pouch Cooshee sat'chee, or foosa.
+ To-day A'choo.
+ To-morrow A'cha.
+ Toe Shanna eebee (lit. foot
+ finger).
+ Toe-nail Shanna thimmee.
+ Tomb Haka.
+ Tomb-stone Cooroo ishee.
+ Tongue Stcha.
+ Torn, part of any thing Yadee tung.
+ Touch, to Sayoong, or sit'choong.
+ Town Meeattoo, or Metto.
+ Tray, or waiter Chirreedeh.
+ Tread, to Kooraming.
+ Tremble to, with cold Koorooyoong.
+ Tree Kee.
+ ----, branch of a Eeda.
+ ----, Banyan Gadesee maroo kee.
+ ----, with red and white flowers Hooyoo.
+ Tree, with large red flowers, which Dee-eego-kee.
+ are called _acka banna_
+ Trowsers Coo, or Hackkama.
+ Turban worn by the lower order of the Sajee.
+ natives
+ Turn round to Meegoyoong.
+ Two Nee (Loo-Choo); tatesee
+ (Japan).
+ Twelve Neejoo.
+ Twenty Hacoo.
+ ------ one Hacoo it'cheejoo.
+ ------ two Hacoo neejoo.
+ ------ three Hacoo sanjoo.
+ ------ four Hacoo sheenjoo, or sheehacoo.
+ ------ five Hacoo goonjoo, or goohacoo.
+ ------ six Hacoo roocoojoo.
+ ------ seven Hacoo sit'cheejoo.
+ ------ eight Hacoo fat'cheejoo.
+ ------ nine Hacoo coojoo.
+ Tyger Toora.
+ Vase, or urn Jeeshee.
+ Veins Kajee.
+ Very well (speaking of health) Ooganjoo.
+ --------- (well done, good) Eetshang.
+ Victual or dinner box Pintaw.
+ -------, the drawers in it Joobackkoo.
+ Ugly Ootooroosa.
+ Umbrella Shassee kassa.
+ Undress, to Ching hajeeing.
+ Untie, to, a knot Hootoochoong.
+ Upper garment Eeshaw, or Hoonta.
+ Water Meezee, or Meesee.
+ -----, hot A'tsee meezee, or atcheeroo.
+ -----, cold Feesa meezee, or feezeeroo
+ meezee.
+ -----, salt Spookoorasa meezee.
+ -----, a large jar containing Tookooee.
+ Water tub Meez-ofwhokee (cont. of meezee
+ and ofoowookee).
+ Walk, to At'choong.
+ ----, or crawl as a butterfly Seegatong.
+ ----, slow Yawna eechoong.
+ ----, quick Hayee sit'choong.
+ Walking hand in hand, as the natives Teefeecha.
+ Wash, to A'rayoong.
+ ----, or bathe Indeetawoong.
+ ----, clothes Ching arayoong.
+ Washing clothes Ching aratee.
+ Watch Karahigh.
+ ----- key Sasee noo quaw.
+ We, or a fourth person Yootay.
+ Weather Tinsee, or tinchee.
+ -------, fine Yetinsee[120], or tinchee.
+ -------, foul or bad Yanna tinsee, or tinchee.
+ Web-footed bird Itchooma.
+ ---------------, beak of a Coochee (lit. mouth).
+ --------------- head Makarajjee.
+ --------------- leg Sha.
+ --------------- two legs Shandee.
+ --------------- tail Majoo.
+ --------------- wing Honnee.
+ Well (lit. water's skin) Meezee ka.
+ West Neeshee.
+ Wet Inneetee.
+ Wet, to I'ndeetaoong.
+ What do you call this? Noondeega.
+ Wheel of a ship Coorooma.
+ Whiskers Binta.
+ Whisper, to Monotitchoong.
+ Whistling Feefee.
+ ---------, as a bird Hoosa.
+ White Sheeroosa.
+ Wick of a candle Skeecootshee.
+ Will you give me Wang yee quirree[121].
+ Wind Kassee, or Kazzee.
+ ---- to come in Kassee noochoong.
+ ---- to go out Kassee eechoong.
+ ----, little Kassee gua.
+ ----, great Weesa kassee, or taychfoo[122].
+ Wind, to, up a watch Feenoyoong.
+ --------, a string round the finger Karamachoong.
+ Winking Mee oochee.
+ Wine Sackkee.
+ ---- glass Tamma sackka sit'chee.
+ ---- kettle Dackkeezitza.
+ ----, sweet Amazack'kee, compounded of
+ amasa and sackee.
+ ----, strong Choozackkee, or sackkeechoo.
+ ----, weak Eeawzackkee, or sackkee ya.
+ Wing of a bird Hannay.
+ ---- feathers of a bird Kee.
+ Wipe, to, the face Soosooyoong.
+ Wish, to, or bid good bye Wockkayoong.
+ Wrist (lit. neck of the arm) Tee noo coobee.
+ Write, to Katchoong[123].
+ Writing-desk Sheekoo.
+ Wrong in writing characters Nawshoong.
+ Woman Innago.
+ -----, plain Ootooroosa innago.
+ -----, old Teeshooee innago.
+ -----, handsome Choorasa innago.
+ -----, young Wockka innago.
+ Wood of any kind Tamoong.
+ Yawning A'coobee.
+ Year[124] Ning.
+ ----, one It'chee ning.
+ Years, eighteen, of age Joo hat'chee.
+ -----, fourteen Joo shee.
+ -----, thirty Sanjoo.
+ -----, twenty-five Neejoo goo.
+ Yellow Cheeroo.
+ ------, dark Kassa cheeroo, or aka cheeroo.
+ ------, dirty or dingy Cheeroo dingee.
+ Yes Oo.
+ Yesterday Cheenoo.
+ Yoke, across the shoulders of porters Baw.
+ You (a second person) Ya (tay).
+ Young Wock'ka.
+ ----- woman Wock'ka innago.
+ Yours Coora ya moong.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 25: This sound is the same as the Italian _gn_, and will be
+found in the words _Gnafing_, signifying more; _Quangning_, a man of
+rank; and also in _Neesa_, bad, and _Nee_, two, which are most commonly
+pronounced as if a _g_ were prefixed to the _n_.]
+
+[Footnote 26: The _o_ in this word is sounded as in the English word
+_Bode_.]
+
+[Footnote 27: See sentence No. 101, Part II.]
+
+[Footnote 28: This word also signifies milk, and the female breast.]
+
+[Footnote 29: In speaking of books with reference to their number, they
+say _teetsee sheemootsee_, one book; _tatsee sheemootsee_, two books;
+but of a single book they only say _sheemootsee;_ and we never found
+that they had any plural termination.]
+
+[Footnote 30: See sentence No. 111.]
+
+[Footnote 31: There is a great similarity between this word and that
+which signifies _to be alive_, (Itch-chawng).]
+
+[Footnote 32: This word signifies both a ladder and a bridge.]
+
+[Footnote 33: See Sentences Nos. 25 and 41.]
+
+[Footnote 34: This word signifies both a cask and a candlestick.]
+
+[Footnote 35: See Sentence No. 70.]
+
+[Footnote 36: _Noo_ seems to express _of_, or the _'s_ used in the
+English language: as _Ooshee noo chee_, the cow's milk, or the milk of
+the cow; _Ooshee noo ka_, the bullock's skin, or the skin of the
+bullock; _Doochoo noo choe_, Loo-choo's people, or the people of
+Loo-choo; and will be found in a variety of other instances.]
+
+[Footnote 37: See Sentences Nos. 18, 19, and 21.]
+
+[Footnote 38: The compass was generally called _Kassee tooee_, which two
+words signify wind and a cock or fowl; but the landsmen called it
+_Karahigh_, which signifies a watch.]
+
+[Footnote 39: This is probably _Oowhoko_, signifying a great many
+persons.]
+
+[Footnote 40: The day at Loo-Choo is divided into six hours, as also the
+night. In counting a number of days they apply the numerals in a similar
+manner to that which will be found in a note on _Twitchee_, an hour; but
+they did not seem to have any names to denote the days of the week.]
+
+[Footnote 41: This word is generally used by the master of the house
+when his guest announces his intended departure, by saying, _Cung,
+cung_.]
+
+[Footnote 42: See Sentences Nos. 74 and 76.]
+
+[Footnote 43: See Sentences Nos. 29, 32, 33, and 37.]
+
+[Footnote 44: See Sentences Nos. 24 and 107.]
+
+[Footnote 45: See Sentences Nos. 31, 36, and 27.]
+
+[Footnote 46: See Numerals, Loo-Choo and Japan, Part II. after the
+Sentences.]
+
+[Footnote 47: This word, which is composed of _addee_, this, and
+_coodee_, that, I am not positive of, and I have therefore affixed a
+query against it.]
+
+[Footnote 48: This is a very difficult word to pronounce, and I am not
+certain of having conveyed its true sound.]
+
+[Footnote 49: See Sentence No. 111.]
+
+[Footnote 50: See Sentence No. 55.]
+
+[Footnote 51: See Sentence No. 20.]
+
+[Footnote 52: See note on Numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 53: The nearest sound to that of _flail_ which a native of
+Loo-Choo could utter was that of _Freyroo_; generally speaking they
+found great difficulty in pronouncing English words. The nearest sound
+to that of our _l_ was _Airoo_, and to that of _vil_ was _Bayroo_.]
+
+[Footnote 54: See note on Numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 55: See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48.]
+
+[Footnote 56: The intention of departing from a house is generally
+announced by _Cung, cung_.]
+
+[Footnote 57: The hair of the natives is formed into a knot on the crown
+of the head, and fastened by two pins of silver or brass, the one
+ornamented by a flowered head, called _kamma-shishee_, and the other
+_ooshee-thushee_. That worn by the children is called _jeefa_.]
+
+[Footnote 58: This word is used to denote a _tree_ as well as a _hand_;
+this probably arises from the similarity; considering the _hand_ as the
+trunk, and the fingers the branches of the _tree_.]
+
+[Footnote 59: A piece of China crape, or very fine paper, is used as a
+handkerchief by the superior classes of the natives, and is generally
+worn in the bosom: the lower orders substitute a coarser kind of paper.]
+
+[Footnote 60: A negative in frequent use.]
+
+[Footnote 61: This word may be applied to being in want of water.]
+
+[Footnote 62: See Sentence No. 2.]
+
+[Footnote 63: A strong aspirate.]
+
+[Footnote 64: See note on _I_ or _me_ (first person) next page.]
+
+[Footnote 65: These two expressions were obtained by catching a
+butterfly and then letting it go.]
+
+[Footnote 66: The _jeeshee_, or _vase_, is a stone jar in which the
+bones of the dead are deposited at the expiration of seven years after
+burial.]
+
+[Footnote 67: The same word (_obee_) signifies both the hoop of a cask
+and the girdle worn round the waist; this probably originated in the
+girdle being substituted for the hoop, which appears to have been worn
+formerly.]
+
+[Footnote 68: _Ma_, signifying a horse, is a Chinese word, and was
+probably introduced into Loo-Choo with that animal.]
+
+[Footnote 69: The names of the hours will be found in the second part;
+the divisions of time will be found under their different heads of
+day, month, year, &c.]
+
+[Footnote 70: While seeking to obtain from the natives the pronouns _I_,
+_you_, and _him_, I at first got _chooee, lay_, and _meechay;_ but on
+further enquiry I found that these had not that meaning, they were
+superseded by _wang_, _ya_, and _aree_, for _I_, _you_, and _him;_ but
+as I heard _chooee_, _lay_, and _meechay_ repeated in enumerating
+persons, I have set them down as first, second, and third persons, that
+being the sense which they seem to bear. The word _chooee_, or _choo_,
+it would seem signifies man (homo) in a general sense.]
+
+[Footnote 71: See Sentence No. 96.]
+
+[Footnote 72: See Sentence No. 99.]
+
+[Footnote 73: See Sentence No. 101.]
+
+[Footnote 74: See Sentence No. 6.]
+
+[Footnote 75: See note, "Holding a thing."]
+
+[Footnote 76: See Sentences Nos. 81 and 82.]
+
+[Footnote 77: See Sentences Nos. 38 to 44.]
+
+[Footnote 78: Literally to sew clothes.]
+
+[Footnote 79: Literally to work rope.]
+
+[Footnote 80: _Skoyoong_, or _Sookooyoong_, signifies to bake.]
+
+[Footnote 81: This word, which is composed of _ickkee_ and _ya_
+(_ickkee_ signifying _there_, and _ga_, which may possibly have been
+originally _ya, you_), appeared to me to bear a similar meaning to our
+_you, sir_, or _you, there_, as the natives invariably called out
+_ickkeega_, when wishing to attract the attention of any one.]
+
+[Footnote 82: See note on the _kawroo_. The _kaw_ is also burned when an
+offering of rice is made on the _kawroo_.]
+
+[Footnote 83: The following are the names of the months or moons.
+
+ January Shaw gwautsee.
+ February Nee gwautsee (lit. 2d month).
+ March Sang gwautsee (lit. 3d).
+ April Shee gwautsee (lit. 4th).
+ May Goo gwautsee (lit. 5th).
+ June Roocoo gwautsee (lit. 6th).
+ July Sitchee gwautsee (lit. 7th).
+ August Fatchee gwautsee (lit. 8th).
+ September Coo gwautsee (lit. 9th).
+ October Joo gwautsee (lit. 10th).
+ November Shee moo stitchee, or joo itchee gwautsee.
+ December Shee wasee, or joo nee gwautsee.
+
+The twentieth day of the tenth month (October), _Joo gwautsee, neejoo
+nitchee_, was, according to Loo-Choo time, the second day of the tenth
+month, _joo gwautsee, nee nitchee_.]
+
+[Footnote 84: A strong aspirate on the first syllable.]
+
+[Footnote 85: The negative is almost invariably placed after the word.]
+
+[Footnote 86: See note on numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 87: The sound of the _oong_, or _oomb_, is very difficult, and
+can only be approximated by closing the teeth firmly and compressing the
+sound of _oong_.]
+
+[Footnote 88: See note on Numerals.]
+
+[Footnote 89: See Sentences Nos. 49 to 53.]
+
+[Footnote 90: _Sheenoostang_ signifies to _cover over_, and possibly
+_ooroo_ should have been written _eeroo_, which is _colour_; and this
+word, signifying _painting_, would then be literally _to cover over with
+colour_.]
+
+[Footnote 91: This is literally the _belly of the hand_, or the _hand's
+belly_. For an explanation of the _noo_ see observations on the Loo-Choo
+language at the beginning.]
+
+[Footnote 92: This word seems to derive its origin from _ackka_,
+_burning_.]
+
+[Footnote 93: This word, _Katcheemeeoong_, to pinch, appears to be
+formed of the words _Ka_, skin, _chee_, blood, and _meeoong_, to see;
+and may be translated to _see the blood through the skin_, or _in the
+skin_.]
+
+[Footnote 94: This sound is not unlike that which the screwing about the
+scull of a boat on the pivot causes.]
+
+[Footnote 95: The same word signifies a flower.]
+
+[Footnote 96: _Feetchoong_ signifies to pull, so that it may with more
+propriety be applied to the harp, or touching the strings of the violin
+with the fingers.]
+
+[Footnote 97: A strong aspirate on the last syllable.]
+
+[Footnote 98: See Sentence No. 105.]
+
+[Footnote 99: Literally, to upset.]
+
+[Footnote 100: For the sound of this word see note on the English word
+_no_.]
+
+[Footnote 101: See Sentence No. 8.]
+
+[Footnote 102: _Narang_, or _nang_, is used on most occasions as the
+negative.]
+
+[Footnote 103: The same word signifies _sweet potatoes_.]
+
+[Footnote 104: This word it will be observed signifies both _to screw_
+and _to scull;_ this may originate in the screwing motion of the oar
+from side to side of the boat.]
+
+[Footnote 105: See Sentences No. 38 to 44.]
+
+[Footnote 106: The similarity in sound of this word to that of a
+character (_Hoonatee_) written on a piece of paper in the hats of the
+men employed working for the ships, has suggested the idea that the
+meaning of the character may have some reference to a ship.]
+
+[Footnote 107: See Sentences Nos. 102 and 103.]
+
+[Footnote 108: Words of Loo-Choo songs:
+
+"Sasa sangcoomeh sangcoomeah kadee yooshee daw, tantoong tantoong tang."
+
+A boat song: "Whee yo ee.--Whee yo ee." The steersman gave "Whee," and
+was followed by the other men with a repetition of "Whee yo ee."
+
+Another boat song: "Quee yay hanno ha.--Quee yay hanno ha." To both
+these airs the rowers kept very good time.]
+
+[Footnote 109: See Sentences Nos. 1 to 7.]
+
+[Footnote 110: The _kawroo_ is a small square stone excavated a little
+on the upper part, in which an offering of rice is made. On the face of
+this stone is carved a variety of characters denoting the rank, &c. of
+the person who makes the offering.]
+
+[Footnote 111: See Sentences in Part II.]
+
+[Footnote 112: See Sentences Nos. 29, 32, 33, and 37.]
+
+[Footnote 113: See Sentences Nos. 108, 109, and 110.]
+
+[Footnote 114: _Amazackkee_ is a contraction of the words _amasa_,
+sweet, and _sackkee_, wine; the latter always changing _s_ into _z_ when
+preceded by any other word. See _wine_, _strong_, _weak_, &c.]
+
+[Footnote 115: Tattoo marks will be found in Part II.]
+
+[Footnote 116: _Eechoo._ This word is used to denote _thread_, silk_,
+and _ribbon._]
+
+[Footnote 117: _Ootchoong_, or _oochoong_, signifies _to work_, _to
+play_, and _to make_.]
+
+[Footnote 118: Possibly this word implies the act of swallowing.]
+
+[Footnote 119: The sound of this word is precisely the same as that of
+our _tobacco_. I have, therefore, spelt it in the same manner.]
+
+[Footnote 120: See Sentence No. 109.]
+
+[Footnote 121: See Sentences Nos. 45, 47, and 48.]
+
+[Footnote 122: This is probably the _tae fung_ (great wind of the
+Chinese, called by us _tyfoon_), a severe gale of wind in the China
+Sea.]
+
+[Footnote 123: See Sentence No. 73.]
+
+[Footnote 124: The year at Loo-Choo, according to Jeeroo's account, is
+divided into twelve months of thirty days each, making in all 360 days,
+and every sixth year one month is intercalated.]
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTE.
+
+
+In the following Sentences the English is given before the Loo-Choo. No
+Sentence has been inserted the meaning of which was not distinctly
+ascertained; but it happened frequently that the precise import of some
+words in a Sentence was not made out, and in order to enable the reader
+to judge to what extent this took place, a literal translation of the
+words in each Sentence is given in the last column; and where a word
+occurs, the meaning of which is doubtful, an asterisk is put in its
+place.
+
+In the last column it will be observed that every verb having the
+termination _oong_, _ung_, &c. is translated as if it were the
+infinitive, although the sense, as denoted in the first column, points
+to another mood.
+
+
+
+
+SENTENCES, ENGLISH AND LOO-CHOO.
+
+ _Of Speaking._
+
+ No. _English._ _Loo-Choo._ _Literal Translation._
+
+ 1. I speak Moonooyoong I to speak.
+
+ 2. I speak, you hear Moonooyoong, ya sit'choong, I speak, you to hear,
+ or Chickkee or hearing.
+
+ 3. I speak to you Ya, or ea moonooyoong, or You to speak, or I.
+ wang. Ya too moonooyoong You * to speak.
+
+ 4. I speak Chinese Wang Quantoong I Chinese to speak.
+ moonooyoong
+
+ 5. I cannot speak Chinese Wang Quantoong moonoorang I Chinese cannot speak.
+
+ 6. I am learning to speak Wang Doochoo cootooba I Loo-Choo learning or
+ Loo-Choo yooshoong[125] studying to *.
+
+ 7. Madera speaks English I'ngere Madera moonooyoong English Madera to
+ speak.
+
+ _Of Going and Coming._
+
+ 8. A man running to the Hayay timma ic'kkeega Running boat man.
+ boat
+
+ 9. I am going on shore Wang amaki eechoong I shore to go.
+
+ 10. To-morrow I will return A'cha choo-oong To-morrow to come.
+
+ 11. To come back again A'mma ka choong[126] * * to come.
+
+ 12. I am going on board Timma ki eechoong Boat * to go.
+
+ 13. I came yesterday Cheenoo chung Yesterday came.
+
+ 14. Go down there Amunka ic'kkee * there.
+
+ 15. Come up here Noobootee coo Ascend here.
+
+ 16. You go below Ya oodee meeshawdee You * *.
+
+ 17. To go out of a place Ya ka saut eechoong * * * to go.
+
+ 18. To come into a place Ya ka saut choong * * * to come.
+
+ 19. Tayin[127] returns Tayin[127] choo-oong The great man to come.
+
+ 20. To go in a boat to Doochoo timma eechoong Loo-Choo boat to go
+ Loo-Choo to carry fish eeo katammeeoong fish to carry.
+
+ 21. To go to sea in a Timma eechoong ooshoo Boat to go sea fish to
+ boat to catch fish eeo cheeoong catch
+
+ 22. Where is Tayin gone Tayin makayee ga imjara Tayin * * *.
+
+ 23. Tayin has gone to Tayin eechoong hooboonee Tayin to go large ship
+ the other ship to meeyoong Sheenooma to see *.
+ pay his respects
+
+ 24. When all are drunk I'gnea weetee amaki All drunk shore *
+ we shall be permitted moototee yootoosha *.
+ to go on shore
+
+ 25. I am going now, he Atookarra wang eechoong By and by I to go, by
+ will come presently atookarra eechoong and by to go.
+
+ 26. I am going on shore Wang amaki eechoong I shore to go I to
+ to dinner moonookamoong eat.
+
+ 27. I am going on board Wang hoonee ki eechoong I ship * to go I to
+ to dinner moonoo kamoong eat.
+
+ 28. When the ships depart A'cha hoonee nittee Doochoo To-morrow ship *
+ to-morrow all the mang hoonee Loo-Choo thousand
+ Loo-Choo people will oocooyoong ship *.
+ pray
+
+
+ _Of Eating and Drinking._
+
+ 29. To drink wine Sac'kkee noomoong Wine to drink.
+
+ 30. Sweet wine Amazac'kkee Sweet wine.
+
+ 31. I eat Moonoo kamoong I to eat.
+
+ 32. I never drink tea Cha noodee narang Tea drinking never.
+
+ 33. Tayin and you never Tayin ya sac'kkee noodee Tayin you wine drink
+ drink wine narang never.
+
+ 34. The parting glass Wockkarittee Departing.
+
+ 35. It is good (to eat) Coodee masa This good (to eat).
+
+ 36. It is bad, throw it Neesba is'kung Bad *.
+ away
+
+ 37. It is tea, to drink Meezee tajeeing cha noodee Water to boil tea
+ drinking.
+
+
+ _Of Looking and Seeing._
+
+ 38. To look at the sun Teeda meeoong kagung Sun to see glass.
+ through a glass
+
+ 39. I look, or I see Moonoomeeoong I to see.
+
+ 40. The English gentleman I'ngere tayin meesheeoong English great man to
+ is looking look at.
+
+ 41. Stop, you shall look Matee*, atookarra ya Stop, by and by you
+ presently meesheeoong to look at.
+
+ 42. Clouds obscure the Koomoo teeda oosooostang Clouds sun to cover
+ sun over.
+
+ 43. The branches of the Toomee kagung kee noo Spy-glass trees
+ tree obstruct the kattakashee meerang branches to hide.
+ sight
+
+ 44. If a Loo-Choo woman Doochoo innago I'ngere Loo-Choo woman English
+ should see you she meeoong nachoong to see, to cry.
+ will be alarmed
+
+
+ _Of Giving._
+
+ 45. Will you give me that Wang yee quirree I * giving.
+
+ 46. Give me that pencil Hoodee moot'choo Pencil bring.
+
+ 47. I gave him some paper A'ree nee queetang Him * giving.
+
+ 48. By and by I will give Atookarra qua gnee queeoong By and by children *
+ it to my children to give.
+
+
+ _Of Opening and Shutting._
+
+ 49. Shut this, or it Akittee ninjoong Shutting to sleep.
+
+ 50. Open this, or it Akittee mirree, or Opening it.
+ akatindee
+
+ 51. Do you open this, Akatindee, or ya akirree Opening, or you
+ or it opening.
+
+ 52. Open this book Ya sheemootsee akirree You book opening.
+
+ 53. Open your watch that Akatindee karahigh meeoong Opening watch to see.
+ I may look at it
+
+
+ _Of Losing and Finding._
+
+ 54. To lose a pencil Hoodee ootoochung Pencil to lose.
+
+ 55. To find a pencil Hoodee toomatung Pencil to find.
+
+
+ _Of Quantity._
+
+ 56. Two small suns Tatsee teeda gua Two suns small.
+
+ 57. A few boys Coosa warrabee Few boys.
+
+ 58. A few Men Ic'kkeekoosa Men few.
+
+ 59. A great many men Ic'kkeerassa Men many.
+
+ 60. A few books Sheemootsee sansatche Books few.
+
+ 61. A great many books Sheemootsee toro Books many.
+
+ 62. Six kinds of wine Mooeeyroo noo sackkee * of wine.
+
+
+ _Of Making._
+
+ 63. Making a false step Koonsinda dakatchee * *.
+
+ 64. Vases made at Napa Napa jeeshee scootee Napa vases made.
+
+ 65. Sand spread on a level Sinna ooshoo shaee mashoo Sand sea * salt
+ plain on which water tatchoong to make.
+ is sprinkled for
+ making salt
+
+ 66. Sing a song Ya oota yooshoong You song to sing.
+
+ 67. Jeeroo sings well, Jeeroo oota yooshoong Jeeroo song to sing *
+ or with good taste cheecheegootoo * *.
+
+
+ _Of Bringing and Carrying._
+
+ 68. Bring your children Ya qua sauteecoo You children bring.
+
+ 69. Bring fire here Fee tooteecoo Fire bring.
+
+ 70. This vessel carries Hoonee jeeshee kattamittee Ship vases * Oonting.
+ vases to Oonting Oonting
+
+ 71. Boy, bring fire to I'rree fee tooteecoo tobacco Boy fire bring,
+ light my pipe fookee tobacco smoke.
+
+ 72. Bring a cup of water Chawung naki meezee eeteecoo Teacup * water *
+ here here.
+
+
+ _Of Writing and Sketching_
+
+ 73. To write a letter Jee katchoong A character to write.
+
+ 74. Tayin is sketching Tayin hashee noo Tayin bridge of to
+ the bridge eekatchoong sketch.
+
+ 75. Tayin sketches very Tayin yookatchee choorasa Tayin * sketches
+ well handsome.
+
+ 76. To sketch a Loo-Choo Doochoo meea eekatchoong Loo-Choo temple to
+ temple sketch.
+
+
+ _Of Compliment._
+
+ 77. Thank you Ka fooshee * * *.
+
+ 78. How do you do Yoo ky'moong * * *.
+
+ 79. Very well Ooganjoo * * *.
+
+ 80. I am very sorry Oomootee shangcoomeh * * *.
+
+
+ _Of Living or Residing._
+
+ 81. Tayin lives here Tayin simmajoo coo Tayin lives here.
+
+ 82. A man living in the Ickkeega simma awhfee A man living country.
+ country
+
+ 83. I live on board the Wang hoonee gua immatong I ship small to live.
+ brigs
+
+
+ _Of Burning and Scalding._
+
+ 84. Fire will burn you Fee yaddee Fire burns.
+
+ 85. Water will scald you Meesee yaddee Water burns.
+
+ 86. Scalding oneself with Meezee fidgeroosa yoo Water hot * burns.
+ hot water yaddee
+
+
+ _Of Enquiry and Reply._
+
+ 87. What is the name of Noondeega coora na What is this name.
+ this
+
+ 88. The name of this is Coora ga na ya This * name *.
+
+ 89. How many children Qui eecootiega * * *.
+ have you
+
+ 90. How old are you or Eecootseega * * *.
+ they
+
+ 91. I am fourteen years Jooshee Fourteen.
+ of age
+
+ 92. I am eighteen years Joohatc'hee Eighteen.
+ of age
+
+ 93. ---- twenty-five, &c. Neejoogoo Twenty-five.
+
+
+ _Miscellaneous._
+
+ 94. To boil potatoes Mootajeeing Potatoes to boil.
+
+ 95. I am very busy Yoo joonatan * * *.
+
+ 96. The sting of a snake Haboo cootee sheenoong Snake sting to kill.
+ will kill
+
+ 97. Sucking milk at the Chee nooma chee Milk * breast.
+ breast
+
+ 98. A child drinking milk Chee noodee warrabee Milk drinking child.
+ at the breast
+
+ 99. A child kissing its Warrabee umma coochee Child mother mouth
+ mother spootee kissing.
+
+ 100. A woman leaning Innago kakatong eeki Woman to lean anchor.
+ on an anchor
+
+ 101. A live shell-fish Amang it'chchawng Shell-fish to be alive
+ will bite cooyoong to bite.
+
+ 102. This flower has a Fanna masa kabasha Flower sweet smell.
+ pleasant smell
+
+ 103. This flower has no Fanna nang kabasha Flower no smell.
+ smell
+
+ 104. Loo-Choo women Doochoo innago fwhooco Loo-choo woman great
+ are not very ooorung many *.
+ handsome
+
+ 105. The sootitsee (sago Sootitsee wang tseechoong Sootitsee I * *.
+ tree) pricked me yatee
+
+ 106. To plant potatoes Moo jee hootee ceyoong Potatoes ground * *.
+
+ 107. Drunk, I vomit Weetee moonoo hachoong Drunk I vomit.
+
+ 108. After sunset it is Teeda sagatee seedasha Sun setting cool.
+ cool
+
+ 109. When the sun Teeda tettee, koomoo nang, Sunshine, clouds none,
+ shines, and there yaytinchee fine weather.
+ are no clouds, it
+ is fine weather
+
+ 110. The sun sets at six Roocoo twit'chee teeda Six hours sun to set.
+ o'clock sagayoong
+
+ 111. The horse fell down, Ma tawrittee tayin noo Horse fell down,
+ and the tayin eebee ootee tayin's finger broke.
+ broke his finger
+
+ 112. After seven years Sitchee ning, cootsee Seven years' bones
+ we wash the bones aratee jeeshee ittee washing vase putting
+ and put them into in.
+ a vase
+
+ 113. Without any flesh Shishee ning Flesh none.
+
+ 114. The people of Doochoo noo choo sibittee Loo-choo people
+ Loo-Choo I shall yootoosha remember * *.
+ never forget
+
+ 115. You will soon Sibittee wasa Remember bad.
+ forget them
+
+ 116. Twelve hours make Joo nee twit'chee, it'chee Ten two hours, one
+ one day nit'chee day.
+
+ 117. Thirty days make one Sanjoo nit'chee, it'chee Thirty days one month
+ moon, or month gwautsee
+
+ 118. One year consists of It'chee ning, joo nee One year, ten two
+ twelve months gwautsee months.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 125: _Yooshoong_ probably signifies _to recite_, as it is used in
+requesting a person to sing as well as in this instance.]
+
+[Footnote 126: Probably instead of _amma ka_, this should have been _amaki_
+(shore), which would makeit coming to the shore, which was the case.]
+
+[Footnote 127: _Ta-jin_, in Chinese, signifies a _great man;_ it is translated
+ by Mr. Morrison _his excellency_.]
+
+
+[Transcriber's Note: Japanese characters in the table below are denoted as such.]
+
+ NUMERALS.
+
+ _English._ _Loo-Choo._ _Characters._ _Japan._
+
+ 1 One It'chee [Japanese character] Teetsee, or te 1.
+
+ 2 Two Nee, or gnee [Japanese character] Tatsee, or ta 2.
+
+ 3 Three Sang [Japanese character] Meetsee, or mee 3.
+
+ 4 Four Shee [Japanese character] Eeotsee[128], or yoo 4.
+
+ 5 Five Goo, or go [Japanese character] I'ttitsee 5.
+
+ 6 Six Rooko [Japanese character] Mootsee 6.
+
+ 7 Seven St'chee [Japanese character] Nannatsee 7.
+
+ 8 Eight Fat'chee, or [Japanese character] Eeyatsee 8.
+ kwat'chee
+
+ 9 Nine Coo [Japanese character] Koonnitsee 9.
+
+ 10 Ten Joo, or dzoo [Japanese character] Too 10.
+
+Both sets of these numerals are in common use at Loo-Choo, though it
+would not perhaps be correct to apply them to the same word, as I never
+recollect having heard a native say "itchee sheemootsee," one book, or
+"teetsee twit'chee," one hour, but always "teetsee sheemootsee," one
+book, and "itchee twitchee," one hour. I at first imagined "teetsee,
+tatsee," &c. were ordinals, but I have since found from Captain
+Broughton's Voyage that they bear a great resemblance to the numerals of
+Japan, and as such I have inserted them.
+
+The characters, of which the above are copies, were written by a native.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 128: The _o_ in this word is to be pronounced as the diphthong
+_oa_ in boat.]
+
+
+
+NAMES OF PERSONS.
+
+ The Kowung, or King - Shang fwee.
+
+ The Pochin ta foo, or Prince - Shang pung-fwee.
+
+ The Chief of the Paychins who attended the ship - Ookooma Mowchowshooa.
+
+ The second Paychin - Madayra Shayoon.
+
+ The third do. - I'ssacha Sandoo.
+
+ The fourth do. - Jeema Tsi-se-eu.
+
+ His eldest son - Maatsee Tsi-chee.
+
+ His friend (an elderly man) - Oohoomee Chinchawhee.
+
+ The fifth Paychin - I'ssecha Hackkeeboocoo.
+
+ The sixth do. - Jeeroo Jeeda.
+
+ The first Linguist - Madera Kawsheeoong.
+
+ The second Linguist - A'nya Toonshoonfa.
+
+ His wife - Ooshee.
+
+ One of the junior Paychins - Yama Too.
+
+ The teacher (an old man) - Yackkabee Oomeejeeroo.
+
+ His eldest son - Yackkabee Oomee-nee whaw.
+
+ A boy - O'seejee.
+
+ One of the principal attendants of the}
+ Pochin ta foo } - Madam Bashee.
+
+ Another - Eevaroo.
+
+
+ NAMES OF PLACES.
+
+ Corea - Coray.
+
+ Pekin - Peking.
+
+ Fokien - Fotchien.
+
+ China - Quantoong.
+
+ Chusan - Choosan.
+
+ England - I'ngeree.
+
+ The island of Loo-Choo - Loo-Choo, or Doo-Choo.
+
+ The town of Napakiang - Napa ummeatto.
+
+ The high distant islands seen from Napa - A'makirreema.
+
+ The Sugar Loaf Island - Eegoos eecoondee.
+
+ Japan - Niphon.
+
+ Canton - Canton.
+
+
+NAMES OF THE DAYS OF THE MOON FROM NEW TO FULL.
+
+1. Chee tatchee.
+
+2. Hadjee mee nitchee.
+
+3. Hadjee mee san nit'chee.
+
+4. Hadjee mee noo ka.
+
+5. Hadjee mee goo nit'chee.
+
+6. Hadjee mee roocoo nit'chee.
+
+7. Hadjee mee sit'chee nit'chee.
+
+8. Hadjee mee fatchee nit'chee.
+
+9. Hadjee mee coo nit'chee.
+
+10. Yooka.
+
+11. Joo it'chee nit'chee.
+
+12. Joo nee nit'chee.
+
+13. Joo san nit'chee.
+
+14. Joo yooka.
+
+15. Joo goo nit'chee.
+
+
+
+
+THE NINE ORDERS OF RANK OF PAYCHINS, OR CHIEFS, WHO ARE DISTINGUISHED BY THE
+COLOUR OF THEIR BONNETS, CALLED HATCHEE MATCHEE.
+
+
+ { A pink ground with spots, circles,
+ 1st. Ching neestchoo noo Hat'chee { and diamonds, of black, yellow, blue,
+ mat'chee { white, and green.
+
+ 2nd. A'cadjee noo Hat'chee mat'chee { A pink ground with spots, &c. of red
+ { and yellow, blue and black.
+
+ 3rd. O'jee noo Hat'chee mat'chee { A green ground with spots, &c. of
+ { red, yellow, blue, and black.
+
+ 4th. Moola sat'chee noo Hat'chee { A pink or light purple ground, with
+ mat'chee { spots of the same colour.
+
+ 5th. Cheeroo dinjee noo Hat'chee { A dingy yellow ground, with spots of
+ mat'chee { the same colour.
+
+ 6th. Cheeroo sy ya noo Hat'chee { A bright yellow ground without
+ mat'chee { spots.
+
+ 7th. Chiddeeming noo Hat'chee { A red ground without spots.
+ mat'chee
+
+ 8th. Akasa noo Hat'chee mat'chee - A red ground without spots.
+
+ 9th. O'sa noo Hat'chee mat'chee - A green ground without spots.
+
+The attendants of the chiefs wear a red Hatchee matchee of a coarser
+texture.
+
+
+TATTOO MARKS ON THE ARMS OF SOME OF THE NATIVES OF THE GREAT LOO-CHOO
+ISLAND.
+
+ 1. 3.
+ Right arm. Right arm. Left arm.
+ This man had [Illustration: [Illustration: [Illustration:
+ not any mark Oodeemaw.] Oodeemaw.] tooga.]
+ on the left
+ arm.
+
+ 2. 4.
+ Right arm. Right arm. Left arm.
+ [Illustration: [Illustration] [Illustration:
+ Coodee Oodemaw.] tooga.]
+
+The four men, whose arms were marked in the above manner, were young and
+of the lower order, probably fishermen. It appeared to have been done by
+puncturing the skin, and staining it with Indian ink in the manner
+practised by our seamen.
+
+The above marks are quite as large as the originals; they were on the
+inner part of the fore arm, close up to the elbow joint. Some were
+marked on both arms, others only on the right, but we did not observe
+any who had them only on the left arm.
+
+
+NAMES OF THE HOURS.
+
+ One hour, or one o'clock It'chee twit'chee }
+ Two hours, or two Nee twit'chee }
+ Three Sang twit'chee } The day
+ Four Shee twit'chee }
+ Five Goo twit'chee }
+ Six Roocoo twit'chee }
+ Seven Sit'chee twit'chee }
+ Eight Fat'chee twit'chee }
+ Nine Coo twit'chee } The night.
+ Ten Joo twit'chee }
+ Eleven Joo it'chee twit'chee}
+ Twelve Joo nee twit'chee }
+
+The day at Loo-Choo, i.e. between sunrise and sunset, is divided into
+six hours, as is also the night.
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE JAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.
+
+
+
+
+NOTE.
+
+
+The following comparisons are given, with the view of pointing out as
+nearly as circumstances will permit what resemblance there is between
+the languages of the islands of Loo-Choo, Niphon, or Japan, and Insu,
+lying in the Japan Sea, and which by some voyagers have been considered
+the same language.
+
+In the first comparison, viz. that between the languages of Loo-Choo and
+Japan, the Japanese words are extracted from the translation of
+Thunberg's Voyage to Japan, printed in London 1795, 2d edit. vol. iii.
+
+In the second, viz. that between Loo-Choo and Insu, the Insu words are
+taken from Broughton's Voyage.
+
+A third comparison is given between the languages of Loo-Choo, Niphon,
+and Insu, together with the two sets of Numerals in use at Loo-Choo, the
+Japanese from Thunberg, and the Insu from Broughton.
+
+It ought to be recollected that as Mr. Thunberg was a foreigner, and
+wrote in a different language from that in which the Loo-Choo words have
+been recorded, a difference of sound may be suspected between them when
+no material difference really exists between the two languages.
+
+The letter _u_ has been substituted in the spelling of the Japanese
+words for the _v_ used by Thunberg.
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE JAPANESE AND LOO-CHOO LANGUAGES.
+
+
+ _English._ _Japanese[129]._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ All Mei Innea.
+ Anchor Ikari Eki.
+ Angry Fandatsuru Neetsa.
+ Answer, to Fento suru Aree ga aanyoong.
+ Arm Ude Teenoo.
+ Arrow Ja Eea.
+ Attendant Sairio Eeree.
+ Bad Warikakuse Neesha, or Wasa.
+ Bake, to Jaku Irree-chang.
+ Bare (naked) Haguru Harraka.
+ Bed Nedokuri Coocha.
+ Belly Stabara Watta.
+ Bend, to Oru Tammeeoong.
+ Bird Tori Hotoo.
+ Birdcage Tori no su Hotoo coo.
+ Bitter Nigaka Injassa.
+ Blood Tji, or Kjets Chee.
+ Blow, up the fire, to Fuku Footchoong.
+ Boat Temma Timma.
+ Boil, to Tagiru Tajeeing.
+ Bone Fone Cootsee.
+ Book Somots Sheemootsee.
+ Bow Jumi Yoomee.
+ Branch of a tree Jeda Kee.
+ Brass Sintju Cheejackkoo.
+ Breadth Jakohaba Habba.
+ Breast Mone Moonee.
+ Breathe, to Ikitsuku Itchooshoong.
+ Bridge Fae, hae Hashee.
+ Brother Kiodai Weekee.
+ Bucket Tango Tagoo.
+ Button Botan Kogannee.
+ Calf of the leg Stosone Koonda.
+ Candle Rosoku Daw.
+ Candlestick Rosoks tatti Soo-coo.
+ Cannon Issibia Isheebeea.
+ Carry away, to Mootsu Mootchee eechoong.
+ Cat Mio Mia.
+ Charcoal Sumi Chacheejing.
+ Cheeks Hogeta, fo Hoo.
+ Child Kodoma Warrabee.
+ Circle Maru Maroodair.
+ Castle, or tower Siro, so Eegooscoo.
+ Climb, to Nagoru Noobooyoong.
+ Cloth So king Ching.
+ Cock Otori Woo tooee.
+ Cold Samka kang Feesa.
+ Compass Fobari Karahigh.
+ Colour Iro Eeroo ceeroo.
+ Come, to Kuru Choong.
+ Cool Sususi Seedasha.
+ Copper Akaganni Acoogannee.
+ Count, to Kansju Oohawkoo-oong.
+ Cow Us Mee ooshee.
+ Creep, to Fau Hawyoong.
+ Cup, tea Tiawang Chawung.
+ Dark Mime Coorasing.
+ Daughter Musme, gogo Innago oongua.
+ Deep Fukai Fookassa.
+ Dig, to Foli Ooehoong.
+ Die Sinnoru sinu Nintoong.
+ Dice Saii Sheego roocoo.
+ Door To Hashirree.
+ Dog Inu Ing.
+ Drink Nomimono Noomoo.
+ Drink, to Nomu Noomoong.
+ Drunk, to be Namoji jeikfsari Weeoong.
+ Duck, tame Afiru Afeeroo.
+ Dry, to Karruru Karachoong.
+ Earth, the Tji dsi Jee.
+ Ear Mimi Mimmee.
+ East Figasi Fingassee.
+ Egg Tamago Cooga.
+ Elbow Ude, fisi Tenoo feejee.
+ Empty, to Akwuru Karashoong.
+ Exchange, to Kajuru Kayra (fans); to exchange
+ fans at Loo-Choo.
+ Face Tsera Steera.
+ Fall, to Tawareta Tawshoong.
+ Fan Oge Ojee.
+ Farewell Kingo, nigoserru Wockkatee.
+ Father Tete, toto Shoo.
+ Fat Kojuru Quaitee.
+ Feather Tori no fa Tooee noo hannee.
+ Fin, a fin Jokofiri fire Hannay.
+ Finger Jubi Eebee.
+ Find, to Midassu Toomatung.
+ Fire Fi, finoko Fee.
+ Fish Iwo, sakkana Eeo.
+ Fish Iwo tsuru Eeo kakeeoong.
+ Fishing net Ami Sheebee.
+ Flag, a Hato Hata.
+ Flower Fanna Fanna.
+ Fly, a Hai Hayeh.
+ Fly, to Toobu Toobeeoong.
+ Friend Ftoobai Eedooshee.
+ Foot Assi Shanna.
+ Firewood Takigi Tamoong.
+ Full Mits Meetchetee.
+ Girl Komusime Tackkee.
+ Girdle Skimmawas sansakagi Obee.
+ Give, to Fureru, jaru Queeoong.
+ Go down to Ururu, iru Ooritteo coo.
+ Go up to Aguru Noobooyoong.
+ Goat, he Jagi Woo feeja.
+ Gold Sin Ching.
+ Good Jukka Choorasa.
+ Good man Jukka fito Yookachoo.
+ Good for nothing Jonaka Maconarang.
+ Hair Kami Kurrazzee.
+ Hammer Kanatsutji Gooshung.
+ Hand Tee Kee.
+ Handkerchief Te no goi Teesadgee.
+ Hat Kasa Kassa.
+ Head Kubi Boosee.
+ Head-ache Attamanna, itama, Seebooroo yadong.
+ dutso
+ Heart Kokurro, sing Nacoo.
+ singnoso
+ Hear, to Kikf Sitchoong, or skitchoong.
+ Heavens Ten Ting.
+ Heavy Omoka, omotaka Boosa.
+ Hen, a Mendori, metori Meetooee.
+ Hide, to Kaksu Meerang.
+ Hip Momo Gammacoo.
+ Hole, or cavity Anna Anna.
+ Horn Tsunno, kaku Stinnoo.
+ Horse Aki uma Ma.
+ Hot Atska Atteesa.
+ House Je Ya, or katchee.
+ Ink Sum, sumi Simmee.
+ Inkstand Susumi hake Simmee shee.
+ Iron Tets, furoganni Titzee.
+ Key Kagi Quaw.
+ Kill, to Korossu Sheenoung, or
+ Koorashoong.
+ Kiss Umakutji, or Sheemirree.
+ Kwutjisu
+ Kiss, to Umakutji suru Coochee spootee.
+ Knife Haka Seego.
+ Knee Fisa, fisa no sarra Stinsee.
+ Kneel, to Fisatatsuru Shumma gitcheeoong.
+ Knot, a Fimmo Coonja cootchee.
+ Laugh, to Warau Worrayoong.
+ Learning, or studying Narau, Kicku Cootooba.
+ Letter, or character Moisi, tsi mousi Jee.
+ Lift to, a thing Motjiagaru Moochoong.
+ Light to, a pipe Fitobusu, fitomusu Sheeoong.
+ Lip Tsuba Seeba.
+ Liquor Sakki Sackkeedia, or
+ Samtchoo (Chinese).
+ Look to, or see Miru Meeoong, or meeing.
+ Looking-glass Kagami Kagung.
+ Long, or length Nagai Nagasa.
+ Lose, to Song suru, makuru Ootoochung.
+ Live, to Inotji Simmatong.
+ Lacker, to Makie saru Nooyoong.
+ Man (homo) Momo Choo.
+ Man (vir) Otoko Ickkeega.
+ Mast Hobasi Hasseeda.
+ Mat Tattami Mooshooroo, or Hatung.
+ Match (fire-stick) Skedakki, skegi Kaw.
+ Measure, to Siakf, monosasa Gaujee hackkiyoong.
+ Mew, to (like a cat) Neko, naku Nachoong deeoong.
+ Milk Tji tji tji Chee.
+ Monkey Saru, salu Saroo.
+ Moon Tsuki Stchay.
+ ----, full Mangets Oostitchee, or maroo.
+ Mother Fasa kasa Umma.
+ Mud Noro Dooroo.
+ Nail, finger Tsume, jassuru Thimmee.
+ Naked Hadaka Harraka.
+ Name Na Na.
+ Navel Fosso, feso Whoosoo.
+ Neck Kwabi, nodor Coobee.
+ Needle Fari Hayee skittee.
+ Night Josari, joru Yooroo.
+ Nipples Tjibusa Chee.
+ Nod, to Gatting suru Najeechoong.
+ North Kitta Cheeta.
+ Nose Fanna Honna.
+ Nostrils Fanna nosu Honnakee.
+ Offer, to Okuru, agurujasiagu- Ozagadee.
+ ru, nedoaskuru
+ Old Tassijori, furuje Teeshooee.
+ furuke
+ Open, to Akuru Akeeoong.
+ Overturn, to Tawaruru Kooroobashoong.
+ Paper Kami Kabee.
+ Pencil Fuda Hoodee.
+ Physician Isa Ishsha.
+ Pinch, to Nesumu Katcheemeeoong.
+ Pipe (tobacco) Kiseru Shirree.
+ Play to, with dice Sugoroko utsu Sheegoroocoo ochoong.
+ Plough Seri, seribetta, Sitchee.
+ tsuku tauts
+ Plough, to Togajassu Sitchoong.
+ Pour in, to Tsugu Irreeing.
+ Powder (gun) Jenso Eenshoo.
+ Pregnant Mimotji, farami Kassee jeetaung.
+ Press, to Siburu Sheetskeeoong.
+ Priest Boos Bodzee.
+ Push, to Sukikakaru Kooroobashoong.
+ Quarrel, to Ijou Titskoong.
+ Quick Faijo, faijaki Hayee.
+ Rain Ame Amee.
+ Rain, to Ame no fiuru Amee fooyoong.
+ Rainbow Nisi Noo, oojee.
+ Rat Nisumi Ack a-sa.
+ Read, to Jomu Yoomoong.
+ Rice Kome Coomee.
+ Rice, boiled Mes Umbang.
+ Ride, to, a horse Noru Manayoong.
+ Ring (finger) Ibiganni Eebee gannee.
+ Root Ne Wee-ee.
+ Rope Tsuna no na Chinna.
+ Round Mami Marroosa.
+ Row, to, in a boat Roosu Coojee.
+ Run, to Ajiubu Hayay sitchoong.
+ Sail Hoo Foo.
+ Salt Siwo Mashoo.
+ Salt water Siwo mis usiwo Spookarasa meezee.
+ Salute, to Resuru Kameeoong.
+ Sand Tsunna Sinna.
+ Scrape, to Kusagu Sajoong.
+ Screw Nesi Jirree.
+ Sea Ume Ooshoo.
+ Seal Fang hang ingjo Ing, or fang.
+ See, to Miru Meeoong.
+ Seed Tanna Ni.
+ Separate, to Saru Wockkayoong.
+ Serpent Kutjinawa hebi Haboo.
+ Sew, to No, noi Nawyoong, or noayoong.
+ Shallow Assai assaka Assassa.
+ Shave, to Soru Sooyoong.
+ Shell Kai Oosheemaw.
+ Ship Fune Hoonee.
+ Shoe Kwutsu Sabock.
+ Shoulders Kata Kutta.
+ Sick Itami mono, bioki Yadong.
+ mono, jamai mono
+ Silk Kinno Eechoo.
+ Silver Gin Jing.
+ Sing, to Utau Ootashoong, or ootayoong.
+ Sister (eldest) Musme are Oui.
+ Sleep Nur Nintee.
+ Sleep, to Nuru Ninjoong.
+ Slow Sisukamai, jojajora Yoona, yawna.
+ Small Ko, komaka Coosa.
+ Smell Nivi, niwoi Kabbasha.
+ Smell, to Kusamu Kannoung, kashashoong.
+ Smoke Honoo Kinsee.
+ Smoke, to Kemoli Footchoong.
+ Smoke tobacco, to Tabaco, nomu Tobacco, footchoong.
+ Sneeze, to Aksingu Honna feeoong.
+ Snore, to Ibikikaku Nintoong.
+ Snuff Fanna, tabak, kagi Spachee, honna, tob*
+ Sour Suika Seesa.
+ South Minami Whfa, or fa.
+ Speak, to Monoju, musmasu, Moonooyoong.
+ ju, moosuru
+ Spectacles Meganni, fanna, Meekagung.
+ meganni
+ Spider Kwumo Cooba.
+ Spittle Subakki Simpaee.
+ Spit, to Subakki, hawk Simpayoong.
+ Spoon Saisi Kaa.
+ Square Sikaku Kackkoo.
+ Stand up, to Okiru Tatteeoong.
+ Stars Fosi Fooshee.
+ Stone Isi iwa Ishee.
+ Strike, to Wutsu, utsu, tataku Rejeecoong.
+ Sugar Satto Sata.
+ Sun Fi, nitji Teeda.
+ Sunset Fi no iri Teeda sagayoong.
+ Sunrise Fino, de, fino, Teeda agayoong.
+ agaru
+ Swallow, to Nomikomu Noonootoosha.
+ Sweet Amaka, amai Amasa.
+ Swim, to Ojugu Weejoong.
+ Thigh Momo, solomomo Moomoo.
+ Thread Ito Eechoo.
+ Throw, to Naguru Naging.
+ Thumb Ojajubi, ojubi Hooee eebee.
+ Tiger Tora Toora.
+ Tin Susu Sheedookannee.
+ Tongue Sta, sita Stcha.
+ Tooth Jea Ha.
+ Touch, to Kamau, kakaru, Sayoong, or Sitchoong.
+ ateru
+ Tower To Eegooscoo.
+ Town Matji, sotomatji Mecatto, metto.
+ Tremble Fururu Koorooyoong.
+ Ugly Kisannai Ootooroosa.
+ Umbrella Fisasi Shassee kassa.
+ Vein Susi Kajee.
+ Wake, to Okiteoru Ooking.
+ Waken, to Okusu Oocatee.
+ Walk, to Ita Atchoong.
+ Warm Nakka, atska Attesa.
+ Wash Arau Arayoong.
+ Watch Tokei Karahigh.
+ Water Mis Meezee.
+ Water tub Furo Meezofwokee.
+ Weather, fine Jukka, fiuri, jui Yeetinchee, or tinsee.
+ teng
+ Weather, foul Warri fiuri Yannatinchee, or tinsee.
+ Well, a Jgawa Meezee ka.
+ West Nis Neeshee.
+ Wet Naroru Inneetee.
+ Wet, to Narassu Indeetaoong.
+ Wheel Kuruma Coorooma.
+ Wick of a candle Suku, saku Skee cootshee.
+ Wind Kase Kassee.
+ Wind up, to Sutsumu Feenoyoong.
+ Wing Toobu fanne Hannay.
+ Wink, to Manaku Meeoochee.
+ Wood Tagi Tamoong.
+ Write Kaku Katchoong.
+ Writing desk Fikidassi Sheekoo.
+ Year Fosi Ning.
+ Young Wakai Wockka.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 129: From Thunberg's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+NUMERALS.
+
+ _Japan_. _Insu[130]._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ 1 Stozee Sheeneap Stitz Itchee Teetsee, tee.
+ 2 Statze Too Statz Nee Tatsee, ta.
+ 3 Mitzee Liep Mitz Sang Meetsee, mee.
+ 4 Yeatze Eenep Yeatze Shee Eotsee, yoo.
+ 5 Idotzee Asheak Itseitzy Goo Ittitsee.
+ 6 Nitzee Ewan Nitz Roocoo Mootsee.
+ 7 Nanatzee Arrawan Nanatzy Stehee Nannatsee.
+ 8 Iosee Toopish Yeatz Fatchee Eyatsee.
+ 9 Kikonitz Lepish Kokonitz Coo Koonnitsee.
+ 10 Yoo Wanna Too Joo Too.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 130: From Broughton's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE LANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO AND INSU. AN ISLAND IN THE
+JAPAN SEA.
+
+ _English._ _Insu[131]._ _Loo-Choo._
+
+ Come here Arkee Cung coo.
+ To walk Appeass Atchoong.
+ To enquire the name of Tambene Noondeega.
+ any thing
+ A ship Penzy, or Foonil. Hoonee.
+ A bow Koo Yoomee.
+ An arrow Ay Eea.
+ The beard Creak Feejee.
+ The teeth Meemack Ha.
+ A man Oikyo Ickkeega.
+ A woman Meanako Innago.
+ Fish net Ya Sheebee.
+ Tobacco pipe Tsheeree Shirree.
+ Water Wakha Meezee.
+ To drink Horopsee Noomoong.
+ A book Shoomootza Sheemootsee.
+ The finger Yewbee Eebee.
+ The thumb O yewbee Hoee eebee.
+ The thigh Momo Moomoo.
+ The arm Oondee Teenoo.
+ The middle finger Nagayewbee Nackkaeebee.
+ Paper Kame Kabee.
+ A dog Enoo Ing.
+ A cat Necko Mia.
+ A child Vasasso Warrabee.
+ The foot Assee Shanna.
+ The chin Olongyse Ootooga.
+ The ear Meemee Mimmee.
+ Yes O Oo.
+ No Ny Oongba.
+ Hair Kamu Kurrazzee.
+ A boat Timma Timma.
+ Tea Tcha Cha.
+ Sugar Sado Sata.
+ Tobacco Tabacco Tobacco.
+
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 131: From Broughton's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+COMPARISON BETWEEN THE LANGUAGES OF LOO-CHOO, JAPAN, AND INSU.
+
+
+ _English._ _Japanese[132]._ _Loo-Choo._ _Insu[133]._
+
+ To walk Ita Atchoong Appeass.
+ A ship Fune Hoonee Penzy, or foonil.
+ A bow Jumi Yoomee Koo.
+ An arrow Ja Eea Ay.
+ The finger Jubi Eebee Askippi, yewbee.
+ The teeth Ha Ha Meemack.
+ A man Otoko Ickkeega Oikyo.
+ A fish net Ami Sheebee Ya.
+ A knife Haka Seego Magiddee.
+ An oar Ro Wayacoo Kanzee.
+ Water Mis Meezee Wakha.
+ To drink Nomu Noomoong Horopsee.
+ A book Somots Sheemootsee Shomotza.
+ The thumb Ojajubi, ojubi Hooee eebee O yewbee.
+ The thigh Momo, soto momo Moomoo Momo.
+ The arm Ude Teenoo Oondee.
+ Paper Kami Kabee Kame.
+ A dog Inu Ing Enoo.
+ A cat Mio, neko Mia Necko.
+ A child Kodoma Warrabee Vassasso.
+ The lips Tsuba Seeba Koodge.
+ The foot Assi Shanna Assee.
+ The ear Mimi Mimmee Meemee.
+ The hair Kami Kurrazzee Karnu.
+ A boat Temma Timma Timma.
+ Tea Tsjaa Cha Tcha.
+ Sugar Satto Sata Sado.
+ Tobacco Tabako Tobacco Tabacco.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 132: From Thunberg's Voyage.]
+
+[Footnote 133: From Broughton's Voyage.]
+
+
+
+
+WORDS OBTAINED FROM THE INHABITANTS OF THE WEST COAST OF COREA.
+
+
+ _English._ _Corean._
+
+ No Poodong.
+ Water Bool.
+ A pipe Dewton.
+ Hair Bodee.
+ Eyes Doon.
+ Mouth Jeep.
+ Nose Ko.
+ Hand So-an.
+ Beard Shee-om.
+ Tongue Chay.
+ Ear Quee.
+ Teeth Jee.
+ Tree[134] Phang na moo.
+ Grass[134] Phee.
+ Good[134] Hota.
+ Earth[134] K,hool.
+ Knife[134] Khul.
+ Jacket Chouksa.
+ Trowsers Choongay.
+ Shoe Po schien.
+ Stockings, or boots Hung inn.
+ Tobacco pouch Samb-jee.
+ Rice (food) Pa-ap.
+ Fan Pootsa.
+ Stove Tok.
+ White hat Pan-a-ee.
+ Black hat Kat.
+ A cock Tac.
+
+FOOTNOTES:
+
+[Footnote 134: These five words have the _h_ so strongly aspirated that
+it was rarely we could pronounce them to the satisfaction of the
+natives.
+
+Their language, upon the whole, is not unpleasing, and it has none of
+the harsh Chinese sounds. The natives have a remarkable facility in
+imitating our sounds, and they in general speak in a very loud tone of
+voice.]
+
+
+THE END.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+T. DAVISON, Lombard-street, Whitefriars, London.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Account of a Voyage of Discovery, by
+Captain Basil Hall
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ACCOUNT OF A VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY ***
+
+***** This file should be named 29051.txt or 29051.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+ http://www.gutenberg.org/2/9/0/5/29051/
+
+Produced by Jane Hyland and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/29051.zip b/29051.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9878efb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/29051.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3f0857
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #29051 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/29051)
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.25.1) at 2026-08-16 01:20:58 +0000